Today’s News 13th July 2020

  • UN: 700 Die In Syrian Camp For ISIS Families – "Explosive" Situation For Renewed Terrorism
    UN: 700 Die In Syrian Camp For ISIS Families – “Explosive” Situation For Renewed Terrorism

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/13/2020 – 02:45

    ISIS has long been out of international media headlines, but sprawling refugee camps full of what are said to be Islamic State families and sympathizers remain in eastern Syria.

    Days ago the United Nations issued an alarming report detailing that the some 70,000 mostly women, children, and elderly connected to ISIS at the al-Hol and Roj camps remain in “very dire conditions”.

    The UN counterterrorism chief Vladimir Voronkov announced late last week that 700 people “recently” died in the two camps, according to information his office had received. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Al-Hol camp in Hasakah province, Syria. Via Reuters

    Al-Hol and Roj are essentially massive open-air prison camps in the desert, administered by Syrian Kurdish forces backed by the United States.

    Voronkov underscored that driving the high fatality rate are “lack of medicine, lack of food” – and though there have been recent reports that coronavirus may be in the camps, it’s unclear the extent to which COVID-19 is a factor.

    A UN team was reported to have entered the largest of the two camps, al-Hol, earlier this month. The populations there are in a legal limbo of sorts, and their fate uncertain.

    From a counterterrorism point of view, the UN office warned the camps post a “huge problem” as they remain “very dangerous” for the prospect of a renewed Islamic State terror campaign. 

    Voronkov warned: “they could create very explosive materials that could be very helpful for terrorists to restart their activities” in Syria and Iraq.

    In the past weeks hundreds of ISIS sympathizers in the camps were reported to have escaped. 

  • Europe: Rape Victims Accused Of Racism
    Europe: Rape Victims Accused Of Racism

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/13/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Raymond Ibrahim via The Gatestone Institute,

    An increasingly popular idea is that whenever races clash, only minorities can be victims. The notion is hardly limited to the recent riots in America. Elements of such thinking often appear in other contexts.

    British women, for instance, including rape victims who drew attention to “Asian” (Pakistani and South Asian) sex grooming gangs, are also being attacked by the “woke” establishment.

    Earlier this month in the UK, Sarah Champion, a Labor politician and MP for Rotherham (the epicenter of sex grooming), was accused of “fanning the flames of racial hatred” and “acting like a neo-fascist murderer.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Her crime? She had dared to assert that “Britain has a problem with British Pakistani men raping and exploiting white girls.”

    The same elements accusing Champion of being a “murderer” also characterized the UK’s anti-extremism program, Prevent, as being “built upon a foundation of Islamophobia and racism.”

    A few weeks earlier, an article titled, “I was raped by Rotherham grooming gang—now I still face racist abuse online,” appeared. In it, a British woman (alias, “Ella”) revealed that her Muslim rapists called her “a white whore, a white b***h,” during the more than 100 times she was raped in her youth by the Pakistani grooming gang.

    “We need to understand racially and religiously aggravated crime if we are going to prevent it and protect people from it and if we are going to prosecute correctly for it,” Champion said in a recent interview.

    “Prevention, protection and prosecution—all of them are being hindered because we are neglecting to properly address the religious and racist aspects of grooming gang crimes…. It’s telling them that it’s OK to hate white people.”

    Ella’s attempts to highlight the “religious and racist aspects” of her and many other girls’ similar abuse led only to “a lot of abuse from far-left extremists, and radical feminist academics,” she said. Such groups “go online and they try to resist anyone they consider to be a Nazi, racist, fascist or white supremacist”.

    “They don’t care about anti-white racism, because they appear to believe that it doesn’t exist. They have tried to floor me and criticise me continually and this has been going on for a couple of months. They tried to shut me down, shut me up … I’ve never experienced such hate online in my life. They accuse me of ‘advocating for white paedophiles’ and being a ‘sinister demonic entity.'”

    Placing the blame — or at least responsibility — on the victim is not limited to the UK. According to an August 9, 2019 report, “in the Swedish city of Uppsala … four women were raped in as many days.” Although police failed to issue descriptions of the rapists — usually a sure sign of their origins — they did issue warnings for women to “think how they behave,” to “think ahead,” and not “go out alone.”

    Advice against alcohol, drugs, and reckless behavior would be more compelling if it were not made under duress.

    After mobs of Muslim migrants sexually assaulted as many as a thousand women on New Year’s Eve 2016 in Cologne, Germany, the city’s mayor, Henriette Reker, called on women to “be better prepared, especially with the Cologne carnival coming up. For this, we will publish online guidelines that these young women can read through to prepare themselves.”

    In Austria, after a 20-year-old woman waiting at a bus stop in Vienna was attacked, beaten and robbed by four Muslim men — including one who “started [by] putting his hands through my hair and made it clear that in his cultural background there were hardly any blonde women” — police responded by telling the victim to dye her hair.

    “At first I was scared, but now I’m more angry than anything. After the attack they told me that women shouldn’t be alone on the streets after 8pm. And they also gave me other advice, telling me I should dye my hair dark and also not dress in such a provocative way. Indirectly that means I was partly to blame for what happened to me. That is a massive insult.”

    In Norway, Unni Wikan, a female professor of social anthropology at the University of Oslo, insists that “Norwegian women must take their share of responsibility for these rapes,” because Muslim men found their manner of dress provocative. So much for the feminist claim that women are free to dress as seductively as they want — and woe to the man who misinterprets this, unless he is from a racial or religious minority group.

    Professor Wikan’s conclusion was not that Muslim men living in the West need to adjust to Western norms, but the exact opposite: “Norwegian women must realize that we live in a Multicultural society and adapt themselves to it.”

    Even when it comes to rape, then, if the victim is white and the rapist is not, she is no victim at all; worse, she is a “racist” and “hater” who, if anything, apparently deserves what she got and more. “Blame the victim” is back with a vengeance and gaining ground throughout the West.

  • Japan Announces New Stealth Fighter As US Clears Massive F-35 Sale 
    Japan Announces New Stealth Fighter As US Clears Massive F-35 Sale 

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/13/2020 – 01:00

    Japan announced this week it plans to produce a domestic fifth-generation fighter jet over the next decade. It also unveiled the purchase of more than 100 stealth fighters from the US, reported Forbes

    The Ministry of Defense on Wednesday announced the official timeline of the supersonic F-3 fighter’s first prototype should be ready in 2024. Series production will be handled by Mitsubishi Heavy Industry’s factory in 2030. The first F-3s are expected to enter service by 2035.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mitsubishi F-3 prototype 

    The F-3 is expected to be one of the world’s most sophisticated stealth jet fighters. The stealth fighter was designed to counter China’s ambitious expansion across the South China Sea and other regions in the Pacific. 

    According to CNN, citing Japan’s Acquisition, Logistics and Technology Agency (ALTA), the F-3 could feature these technologies: 

    • an ability to sync missile targeting between multiple aircraft, known as integrated fire control or network shooting;
    • internal weapons bays, like those seen on American F-22 stealth jets;
    • the use of thrust-vectoring nozzles, devices that use the engine’s thrust to turn more sharply.

    News of Japan’s first stealth fighter come as the US State Department cleared it to purchase 105 Lockheed Martin F-35 Lightning II stealth jets, worth an estimated $23.11 billion. 

    The deal is one of the most massive foreign military sales approved by Washington. The goal here is to install an “F-35 friends circle” in the Asia-Pacific region to counter China. 

  • Constitutional Republic Versus Pure Democracy: How The US Election Process Has Changed
    Constitutional Republic Versus Pure Democracy: How The US Election Process Has Changed

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/13/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by Sam Jacobs via Ammo.com,

    “I pledge allegiance to the Flag of the United States and to the Republic for which it stands, one Nation under God, indivisible, with liberty and justice for all.”

    Pledge of Allegiance, with a revision made in 1923

    Conservatives are generally quick to point out that America is a republic, not a democracy. But what really is the difference, and are they even right?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Voting in America has changed considerably since the days of our founding. Back then, the government didn’t even print official ballots. Instead, you got ballots from the candidate who wanted your support. Sometimes voting took place in public, so everyone knew who you voted for. And, of course, the franchise was largely restricted to white, male property owners.

    Now, anyone who turns 18 can vote. And the Democratic Party wants to increase ballot access by automatically registering anyone who gets a driver’s license. Democrats even pushed for mail-in ballots for the 2020 election to make voting even easier – and more open to voter fraud. But is any of this a good thing?

    Indeed, it is worth considering the transformation of the United States from a Constitutional Republic, ruled by law with the input of the people, to a total democracy, where the will of the people dominates all other discussion.

    A Brief History of the Franchise in America

    Open up your pocket Constitution and find the part where it says who can vote and who can’t. You’ll come up short. That’s because the Constitution delegates this right to the states. And while there are some amendments that, for example, say states can’t restrict the franchise on the basis of race, gender or being over the age of 18, otherwise there is broad leeway given in terms of who can vote and who can’t.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Before the United States existed, people were still voting and there were oftentimes even more restrictions in place. Property qualifications were most common, but there was often also a religious test involved. For example, Plymouth Colony required that voters be “orthodox in the fundamentals of religion,” which would have likely excluded even Catholics from voting. Indeed, Catholics, Quakers and Baptists were frequently forbidden from voting in early colonial elections. (Jews were forbidden from state office in Maryland until 1828, because of a state law requiring affirmation of belief in an afterlife.)

    One of the first laws drafted by the new nation was a process for people to become citizens and thus be able to vote in places where citizenship was a requirement to do so – and indeed, citizenship was not a requirement in many states or colonies in the early days of America. While only “natural born” citizens can become president, naturalized citizens enjoy the full benefits of the franchise. There is still much debate as to what qualifies as a “natural born” citizen, and it’s worth noting that several recent major party presidential candidates were not born in the United States – most recently Tulsi Gabbard (who was born in American Samoa) and Ted Cruz (who was born in Canada). The Republican nominee in 2008, John McCain, was born in the Panama Canal Zone. The last of these was the most problematic, as Downes v. Bidwell ruled that unincorporated territories were explicitly not the United States.

    While it is easy to ascribe this to petty religious bigotry, the reason is actually somewhat more profound: The colonists and the colonial governments that they formed considered it important to only allow the franchise to people who shared their values. Thus, those with heterodox religious beliefs were not allowed to vote on the grounds that doing so would undermine both the values and the liberty of the colony.

    Similarly, property holders were meant to be the main voters for the simple reason of having skin in the game. The early colonists did not want, for example, the merchant class to have an outsized say in politics because they were not tied to the land and thus not as subject to bad decisions. A shopkeeper or importer can simply sell their stock and move on to the next colony. A freeholder, working the land with his family, has far less flexibility and, the theory goes anyway, would be making more long-term decisions about what is best for the polity.

    What this meant, also, is that, in places like New Jersey, women were allowed to vote until 1807, provided that they could meet the property requirement. What changed in the early 19th century, under the expansion of the franchise under Jacksonian Democracy, was that race and gender were prized more than property rights. But free blacks still had the right to vote in some Northern states until 1838.

    This too was not an arbitrary distinction. Men who had been veterans of the War of 1812, or at the very least, defended their community against Indian raids, believed that they were entitled to the franchise on the basis of that service. By 1856, free white men were allowed to vote without meeting any property requirements, but five of the states still kept tax requirements (frequently a poll tax) in place. Again, this makes sense: The force of government is largely about the spending of taxes and the use of the military.

    By 1856, all property requirements had been lifted, but tax requirements remained in place in Rhode Island and Pennsylvania, until the 20th century. Rhode Island had what was basically a brief, low-level civil war over the question of property requirements known as the Dorr War. Indeed, anytime that post-Civil War disenfranchisement is discussed, it must include a discussion of the disenfranchisement of poor whites as well. The Battle of Athens is a fascinating tale of World War II veterans returning from battle and refusing to be shafted at the ballot box anymore.

    Of the 15 Constitutional Amendments passed since the Civil War, four involve the franchise. The 15th Amendment bars states from restricting the franchise on the basis of race, the 19th from restrictions on the basis of gender, the 24th bars any tax requirements, and the 26th bars any age restrictions against those over the age of 18. Another Amendment, the 17th, allows for the direct election of senators, rather than having them elected by the respective state legislature – another expansion of pure democracy in America, though not an expansion of suffrage per se.

    The previous method of electing senators, having them appointed by the respective state legislatures, was not an oversight on the part of the Founders. Rather, this was to give a voice to the state governments in the federal government. This was seen as an important safeguard against the overreach of federal power. Among other things, the Senate was a check on a power-hungry federal government seeking to put its tentacles into anything it could. It was a form of distributed power that was yet another attempt by the Founders to prevent consolidation and centralization of government.

    It’s worth noting that Western states, starting with Wyoming in 1869, were granting women the right to vote, largely as an enticement to get them to move to the region, which was seriously devoid of women.

    The concept of “one man, one vote” is the cornerstone of a more pure democracy. There were three decisions of the Earl Warren Supreme Court that definitively transformed the landscape of America into a democracy:

    • Baker v. Carr found that federal courts had jurisdiction over state redistricting efforts.

    • Wesberry v. Sanders found that U.S. House of Representatives districts – whose borders are determined by state governments – must be roughly equal in population.

    • Reynolds v. Sims found that state legislature districts must be roughly equal in population, regardless of chamber. This effectively means that states are not allowed to have institutions like the Senate – for example, a state government cannot give each county two seats in the state legislature if the counties do not have roughly the same population size.

    Residency requirements are mostly illegal in the United States, with one-year requirements struck down in Dunn v. BlumsteinThe longest residency requirement that states are allowed to have now is 50 days.

    What’s So Wrong With Democracy?

    All of this raises the question of what is wrong with democracy, as opposed to a Constitutional Republic? It’s a cliche that democracy is the right of 51 percent of the population to take away the toothbrushes of the other 49. The Constitution provides protections against the tyranny of the majority and one of those protections is against pure democracy.

    Indeed, the Senate and Electoral College, two of the last vestiges of the anti-democratic mood that penetrated the country during Revolutionary times, provide protections to rural states to this day. Without either of these, or with a Senate converted into a proportional representation body, as some have suggested, rural states are effectively political serfs for the larger urban centers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The counter argument presented to this is that “land doesn’t vote,” which is fair enough, but again: America was not conceived as a pure democracy where everyone had an equal say in everything. There are many layers to the onion, many tiers that prevent one group of the population from having too much say over the others. The Electoral College and the Senate allow rural states to have a voice in how the country is run, rather than being totally ruled over by people in urban centers who don’t own guns, can’t grow food, and have never met their neighbors.

    It’s not a coincidence that Electoral College abolition is a particular ax ground by the left. The abolition of the Electoral College would allow for sweeping changes in American public policy championed by those currently on the leftward edge of the political spectrum. Do you want to live in a country where, for example, the voters of smaller states like Nevada, New Hampshire and Montana are drowned out by a handful of cities on the coasts? What of medium-sized states with a number of post-industrial cities with their own concerns, just as valid as those of rural America, but entirely separate from the centers of financial, cultural and academic power?

    There’s also the small matter of the role that the media plays in shaping public opinion, as well as the role that public works projects and other government spending play in essentially buying votes. Ostensibly “undemocratic” institutions act as brakes on the manipulation of public opinion. Indeed, the Senate was specifically designed as a deliberative body that would “cool the passions” of the masses represented in the lower house, the House of Representatives.

    The Primary System as a Laboratory of Democracy

    The primary process for nominating presidential candidates represents an excellent example of how pure democracy has produced poorer results than a more managed and directed one.

    Most Americans, particularly younger ones, don’t know that prior to the 1970s, the primary contests didn’t mean much. Rather, it was the state party conventions which held greater weight and these were largely managed by party bosses rather than directly influenced by voters. It’s not that this system of backroom wheeling and dealing never produced a total dud or stifled genuine needs for reform – of course it did. However, looking at the roster of candidates produced by this process (i.e., two Roosevelts, a Coolidge, an Eisenhower and a Kennedy), it’s hard to argue with the results.

    What was entirely lacking was the current primary process that we have in the United States, which still boasts a very low overall turnout and lasts from approximately the fourth quarter of the year before the election sometimes all the way up until the convention. All told, the Democratic Primary cycle of 2020 had 12 debates planned, with 11 completed and the 12th not happening simply because Joe Biden said he wasn’t going to show up.

    The primaries are dominated by highly motivated and often highly ideological voters. This means that a number of highly polarizing figures have made it through the modern primary process, including Barry Goldwater (1964, so a little early) and George McGovern, but also a ton of people who the party in question loved but Americans just plain didn’t like (examples of this being Walter MondaleMichael Dukakis and Mitt Romney). This is because party bosses were much more concerned about someone who could win – and all the patronage that flowed from that – rather than someone who shared their ideological picadillos.

    President Eisenhower is perhaps the gold standard of a president annointed by party bosses. Senator Robert Taft, the leading light of the ideologically conservative faction of the party, lost to the choice of the party bosses, General Dwight D. Eisenhower. While historical counterfactuals are hard to tease out, there’s little reason to believe that Senator Taft could have won a general election against President Truman or eventual nominee Senator Adlai Stevenson. This is because, while there was a big thirst to roll back the whole of the New Deal among the hardcore Republican base, there was virtually no taste for it in the American mainstream, which either liked the programs or had learned to live with them. Indeed, it is largely believed that the delegates themselves might have preferred Taft to Eisenhower – but they preferred Eisenhower to losing.

    It’s worth noting that in the last two Democratic primaries, party bosses have leaned heavily on the scale against insurgent candidate Bernie Sanders in favor of, respectively, Hillary Clinton and Joe Biden. In contrast, Donald Trump was able to coast to the nomination in 2016 without any significant organized chicanery on the part of the party bosses.

    But it’s not just political parties who lose when American presidential candidates are the result of a process catering to a very small niche of the electorate. America loses also, because we are incapable of having substantive, issue-driven debates that address real problems of the American people. Instead, we end up focusing much more on the personalities and cultural differences that divide the two parties – to the detriment of the entire nation.

    Election Fraud in the United States

    There is dispute as to whether or not there is widespread election fraud in the United States. However, there are three presidential elections that merit a brief discussion in our exploration of the franchise in America.

    The 1876 Election

    The election of 1876 was so controversial and potentially fraud-ridden that it was the subject of a Congressional Electoral Commission in response to a major Constitutional crisis. There were 20 electoral votes outstanding, with the Democratic candidate one shy of winning, with the 20 outstanding electoral votes all coming from states with potentially massive voter fraud. The Commission was convened by the Democratic House and the Republican Senate, with five members from each body and five from the Supreme Court of the United States.

    One of the tricks in question is actually an exploit of pure democracy: In those days, there were no official ballots. Ballots or “tickets” were generally printed up by political parties or their partisans and distributed to the voters. Southern Democrats used ballots with Abraham Lincoln on them in an attempt to fool illiterate voters into voting for their slate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Tilden or Blood!” was a slogan at the time and Democratic candidate Samuel Tilden’s supporters declared that they had 100,000 men ready to march on the capital and install him as president if need be. A party-line vote of the Electoral Commission gave all the votes to Republican Rutherford B. Hayes, making him president. However, as a concession, the South got the end of Reconstruction and the withdrawal of all remaining federal troops.

    Democrats remained unsatisfied, with the House of Representatives going as far to pass a non-binding resolution declaring Tilden the winner. The Electoral Count Act of 1887 made the state legislature the definitive arbiter of who counted as an elector, which was the subject of Bush v. Gore, another controversial election over 100 years later.

    The 1960 Election

    The 1960 election was disputed as well, but not formally and officially like in 1876. The claim is this: That the Democratic Party used friendly city machines in Dallas and Illinois to win states for John F. Kennedy that he otherwise would not have won – and that would have delivered the presidency to Republican Richard Nixon.

    This is not a marginal theory. Senators such as Everett Dirksen and Barry Goldwater have stated that they believe there was fraud in the election. All told, Republicans in 11 states sought to have the vote overturned, including in Illinois and Texas. A special prosecutor charged 650 people with voter fraud, but there were no convictions.

    It is unknown to what degree Nixon felt he had been cheated, but he never seriously pursued it, believing it would divide the nation and tarnish the office of the presidency.

    The 2000 Election

    Finally, there is the 2000 election, where chicanery is alleged to have taken place not at the ballot box, but at the Supreme Court. It was the Supreme Court who stopped the recount under the Equal Protection Clause because they did not approve of how the recount was being carried out. Further, a new standard could not be agreed upon because of the time frame – electors had to be selected by December 12.

    This allowed a previous vote count certified by Secretary of State Katherine Harris (a Republican and Bush family ally) to stand.

    Here the question was not about whether or not someone was ballot-box stuffing. No one has seriously or credibly proposed this. What was in question is how the votes were counted. This calls to mind an apocryphal quote often attributed to Soviet dictator Joseph Stalin:

    “The people who cast the votes decide nothing. The people who count the votes decide everything.”

    Several have written that if a statewide recount were done, rather than a county-based one, that it was Vice President Al Gore who would have won. But the question here is what was the best way to count the votes. And unsurprisingly, partisans of both parties prefer the method resulting in their candidate winning.

    Beyond the Theory: Why Pure Democracy Is Bad In Its Execution

    Once the notion of a universal franchise enters the public vernacular, there is then no limit on who should be included. Andrew Yang became the first major party presidential candidate to endorse lowering the voting age to 16, but others have endorsed removing age requirements for voting entirely. Indeed, there is an entire current of thought that says that citizenship shouldn’t be a requirement (it isn’t in some municipal elections) or even that the entire world should be allowed a say in who becomes the President of the United States.

    While these might all sound like ridiculous proposals – and we agree that they are – they are the thin edge of the wedge, the tip of the spear that will eventually introduce this kind of discourse into the political mainstream and perhaps much sooner than anyone thinks. If the only criteria for who gets to vote is that you are “affected by government policy” or some such and thus entitled to a say, why not let the entire populations of France and Bangladesh and China have a vote? There is a logic to universal suffrage that does not end with America’s adult population or even at its borders.

    Consider the fight against voter ID laws in the United States. When one accepts that voting is a universal right, it makes perfect sense that having or not having an ID shouldn’t be an impediment to exercising that right. A lack of voter ID laws has been tied to voter fraud. But perhaps more disturbing is the growing practice of ballot harvesting.

    Ballot Harvesting

    The Democratic Party likes ballot harvesting so much that they tried to insert it into the stimulus and relief bill targeted at people suffering from the effects of the Wuhan Coronavirus outbreak of 2020. Put simply, this is when paper ballots are collected by intermediaries between the state and the voter, then delivered en masse. If this sounds like it’s a ripe place for voter fraud to happen, that’s because it is. Ballot harvesting played a role in the do-over of the 2019 North Carolina election, where Democrats were, perhaps for the first time ever, deeply concerned with the specter of voter fraud.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Orange County, California, was home to a whopping quarter million ballots delivered on Election Day alone. In practice, ballot harvesters go around collecting ballots for people who vote for the candidate they want to win. In the case of North Carolina, there were allegations that ballots had been discarded because people voted for the “wrong” candidate.

    In the wake of the Wuhan Coronavirus outbreak, there has been a push – mostly from Democrats – to offer mail-in ballots. These are different from absentee ballots, which are sent out to specific voters on a by-request basis. Compare this with the push for mass mail-in voting: This is just printing up a ton of ballots, sending them out and letting everyone mail them in. There are few, if any, protections in place for preventing people from voting twice, preventing non-registered voters from voting, or preventing illegal aliens from voting. For every person who votes that shouldn’t, a legal voter has their vote cancelled out or nullified.

    There’s not much of a way to verify and track this process to ensure that everyone who votes is having their vote counted. But again, it is very much in keeping with the logic of “one man, one vote.” Those who espouse the ideology of a pure democracy are always looking for ways to make it easier for people to vote.

    Perhaps, not coincidentally, making it easier for people to vote also opens up the door to electoral fraud.

    And this is really the crux of the matter when it comes down to pure democracy: The transition to a purer democracy has coincided with greater influence among unofficial kingmakers who control the process while also consolidating greater power in Washington, D.C. In practice, this has meant favoring a bureaucratic elite who effectively act as unelected legislators. Most of the regulations put in place by the alphabet soup of federal agencies aren’t there by statute, but are in fact part of powers delegated to them by the legislature who have abdicated their legislative authority.

    What’s more, these unofficial kingmakers are often shadowy figures whose names (to say nothing of their intentions) are mostly unknown. These are not the traditional party bosses who were, in a sense, beholden to their people in the form of having to provide patronage and pork and other tangible results. Rather the new kingmakers of our pure democracy are the mass media, party activists and others with no skin in the game and little in the way of public accountability. Their angle is one entirely of self-interest and not to the broader body politic, to say nothing of future generations.

  • China Vehicles Sales Expected To Plunge 10-20% This Year
    China Vehicles Sales Expected To Plunge 10-20% This Year

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 23:30

    Even the good news for the world’s auto market seems to be bad news right now. 

    Day ago, when detailing China’s passenger auto sales plunge for the month of June, we noted that the China Association of Automobile Manufacturers has been predicting for the last few months that auto sales would fall between 15% and 25% for the year.

    Those predictions have now been adjusted slightly upward, to a drop of 10% to 20%, despite the fact that China’s auto market still appears to be leading the global market into several more years of deep recession. Recall, the auto market was already facing headwinds and China’s market specifically was already contracting for several years before the pandemic. 

    And while passenger vehicles fell 6.5% in June, as we noted, total vehicle sales rose 11.6% for the month to 2.3 million units, likely helping lead to the revised predictions for the year. The driving force behind total vehicles rising was a 63% surge in commercial vehicles, which also saw a 8.6% rise in the first half of 2020, likely due to vehicles being used to manage the spread of the virus in the country. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Recall, days ago Beijing announced that the country had sold 1.68 million passenger vehicle units in JuneThis marks a 6.5% year over year drop despite May’s dead cat bounce, where numbers rose 1.9% from the year prior, mostly due to easy comps. The association called the number proof of a “continuing recovery” in the passenger car market, according to Reuters

    As was the case in May, luxury automakers outpaced the market while sales of NEV vehicles reached 85,600. Tesla accounted for 23% of the pure battery EV sector in the month and CPCA Secretary-General Cui Dongshu said he expects EV sales to outperform in the second half of 2020. 

     

    These numbers won’t come as too big of a surprise for Zero Hedge readers. We noted days ago that sales numbers coming out of June looked as though it would be another slumping month for China. Just days ago, the CPCA said that retail car sales were down 37% YOY for the 4th week of June.

    Average daily sales were down to 51,627 during June 22-27, which marked a 6% sequential fall from the same week in May, indicating little respite or improvement from the pressure of the coronavirus pandemic on the industry. PCA blamed “seasonal factors” for the drop, which is a funny way to say “Chinese-borne virus ravaging the entire planet”. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We said days ago:

    “This also paints an ugly picture for June’s new car sales number, since we reported about 3 weeks ago that the first week in June was also off to an ugly start. In that article, we noted that retail car sales fell 10% year over year – but more importantly 20% from the same period in May – in the first week of June.”

    This news comes despite better than expected results in May, where sales showed a 12% increase year over year. 

    According to The Detroit Bureau, premium and luxury passenger car retail sales led the charge in May, rising 28% last month compared with year-ago results. Luxury vehicles maintained their strength in June.

    The Chinese government continues to try to spur demand with new policies aimed at enticing buyers…. but as we showed yesterday, it’s not working.

    Recall, we have recently noted that U.S. auto manufacturers are also teeing up sizeable incentives to get buyers back into showrooms. Europe is following suit, with Volkswagen starting a sales initiative to revive demand, including improved leasing and financing terms. 

  • Harper's "Bizarre" Letter & The Woke Revolution
    Harper’s “Bizarre” Letter & The Woke Revolution

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 23:00

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    150 prominent intellectuals and Ivy League academics of leftish persuasion have signed a letter in Harper’s protesting the breakdown in civilized debate and imposition of ideological conformity.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The signatories made the obligatory bow to denouncing Trump as “a real threat to democracy” and called for “greater equality and inclusion across our society.”

    But this wasn’t enough to save them from denunciation for stating these truthful facts:

    The free exchange of information and ideas, the lifeblood of a liberal society, is daily becoming more constricted. While we have come to expect this on the radical right, censoriousness is also spreading more widely in our culture: an intolerance of opposing views, a vogue for public shaming and ostracism, and the tendency to dissolve complex policy issues in a blinding moral certainty. We uphold the value of robust and even caustic counter-speech from all quarters. But it is now all too common to hear calls for swift and severe retribution in response to perceived transgressions of speech and thought.

    More troubling still, institutional leaders, in a spirit of panicked damage control, are delivering hasty and disproportionate punishments instead of considered reforms. Editors are fired for running controversial pieces; books are withdrawn for alleged inauthenticity; journalists are barred from writing on certain topics; professors are investigated for quoting works of literature in class; a researcher is fired for circulating a peer-reviewed academic study; and the heads of organizations are ousted for what are sometimes just clumsy mistakes.

    Whatever the arguments around each particular incident, the result has been to steadily narrow the boundaries of what can be said without the threat of reprisal. We are already paying the price in greater risk aversion among writers, artists, and journalists who fear for their livelihoods if they depart from the consensus, or even lack sufficient zeal in agreement.”

    The signatories to the letter do not understand that time has passed them by. Free speech is no longer a value. Free speach is an ally of oppression because it permits charges against Western civilization and the white racist oppressors to be answered, and facts are not welcome. The purpose of the woke revolution is to overthrow a liberal society and impose conformity with wokeness in its place. Whiteness has been declared evil. There is nothing to debate.

    The signatories do not understand that today there is only one side. In place of debate there is denunciation, the purpose of which is to impose ideological conformity. It is pointless to search for truth when truth has been revealed: Western civilization and all its works are a white racist construct and must be destroyed. There is nothing to debate.

    To make clear that in these revolutionary times not even prominent people of accomplishment such as Noam Chomsky are entitled to a voice different from woke-imposed conformity, the letter was answered by a condescending statement signed by a long list of woke journalists of no distinction or achievement, people no one has ever heard of.

    The 150 prominent defenders of free speech were simply dismissed as no longer relevant.

    Noam Chomsky and the other prominent signatories were dismissed as irrelevant just as the prominent historians were who took exception to the New York Times 1619 project, a packet of lies and anti-white propaganda. The famous historians found that they weren’t relevant. The New York Times has an agenda that is independent of the facts.

    The message is clear: shutup “white, wealthy” people and you also Thomas Chatterton Williams, a black person with a white name. Your voices of oppression have been cancelled.

    The “oppressed” and “marginalized” voices of woke revolutionaries, who have imposed tyranny in universities, the work place, and via social media, are the ones that now control explanations. No one is permitted to disagree with them.

    Lining up on the woke side are CNN, New York Times, Los Angeles Times, Slate, and other presstitute organizations desperately trying to remain relevant. Everyone of these institutions quickly took the side of the woke revolution against facts and free speech.

    The revolution is over unless the guillotine is next. Academic freedom no longer exists. Free speech no longer exists. The media is a propaganda ministry. Without free speech there can be no answer to denunciation. White people are guilty. Period.

  • Graham Asks Mueller To Testify Before Senate After WaPo Editorial Slamming Stone Commutation
    Graham Asks Mueller To Testify Before Senate After WaPo Editorial Slamming Stone Commutation

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 22:30

    From the minute President Trump handed down his commutation of Roger Stone’s sentence Friday just days before the longtime Trump ally was set to go to prison, it was only a matter of time before the now-retired Robert Mueller, the infamously reticent former special prosecutor, weighed in to assure the world that Trump is once again ‘abusing’ the powers of his office, and thereby threatening the democratic controls and values at the very core of our system. Prosecutors who worked on Mueller’s team have been popping up in the press more frequently. One even testified to Congress about DoJ interference and alleged political pressure in the Stone case.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The former FBI chief broke his silence last night, when the Washington Post published a Mueller-penned op-ed hitting all the expected notes. Reminding the public – well, more like implying – that Stone knows all the secrets of the Russia-Wikileaks-Trump connection. The DNC hack, Hillary’s missing emails, all those twitter bots – all of these victories surely helped sway voters in Trump’s favor, Mueller argues.

    And without Russia’s tacit support, Mueller argues, they would never have happened. But was Stone really so integral to these operations? His reputation as a fabricator and an exaggerator were well covered during the case.

    We now have a detailed picture of Russia’s interference in the 2016 presidential election. The special counsel’s office identified two principal operations directed at our election: hacking and dumping Clinton campaign emails, and an online social media campaign to disparage the Democratic candidate. We also identified numerous links between the Russian government and Trump campaign personnel — Stone among them. We did not establish that members of the Trump campaign conspired with the Russian government in its activities. The investigation did, however, establish that the Russian government perceived it would benefit from a Trump presidency and worked to secure that outcome. It also established that the campaign expected it would benefit electorally from information stolen and released through Russian efforts.

    Uncovering and tracing Russian outreach and interference activities was a complex task. The investigation to understand these activities took two years and substantial effort. Based on our work, eight individuals pleaded guilty or were convicted at trial, and more than two dozen Russian individuals and entities, including senior Russian intelligence officers, were charged with federal crimes.

    Congress also investigated and sought information from Stone. A jury later determined he lied repeatedly to members of Congress. He lied about the identity of his intermediary to WikiLeaks. He lied about the existence of written communications with his intermediary. He lied by denying he had communicated with the Trump campaign about the timing of WikiLeaks’ releases. He in fact updated senior campaign officials repeatedly about WikiLeaks. And he tampered with a witness, imploring him to stonewall Congress.

    Stone was found guilty by a jury back in November of all seven charges that he faced. He was charged with lying to Congress, witness tampering and obstruction. At the time, the press reported that Stone could face up to 50 years in prison. He was eventually sentenced to between 3 and four years after being convicted on all 7 counts he faced, including the witness tampering charge, which carried a maximum penalty of 20 years, while the maximum for each of the other six charges is five years. Stones convictions will stand, and he will remain a felon.

    Mueller also insisted he made every decision based “solely on the facts”, though we wonder how tipping off CNN to the military-style raid that brought Stone into federal custody relates to Mueller’s “by the book” credo.

    Russian efforts to interfere in our political system, and the essential question of whether those efforts involved the Trump campaign, required investigation. In that investigation, it was critical for us (and, before us, the FBI) to obtain full and accurate information. Likewise, it was critical for Congress to obtain accurate information from its witnesses. When a subject lies to investigators, it strikes at the core of the government’s efforts to find the truth and hold wrongdoers accountable. It may ultimately impede those efforts.

    We made every decision in Stone’s case, as in all our cases, based solely on the facts and the law and in accordance with the rule of law. The women and men who conducted these investigations and prosecutions acted with the highest integrity. Claims to the contrary are false.

    Unsurprisingly, Mueller’s latest communique (expect the WaPo op-ed, like the Mueller report before it, to be transformed into its own book – then who knows? Maybe a maybe motion picture based on the limited communications of Robert Swan Mueller III?) triggered a wave of hand-wringing in Washington, including among some Republicans, who have groused about Trump’s decision to intercede on behalf of his one-time advisor (and, reportedly, friend). Despite being a firm Trump backer and friend, Graham has made noises about joining with Democrats and granting permission to bring Mueller in to testify before the Senate Judiciary Committee (nearly a year ago, Mueller participated in a marathon series of hearings before the House Intelligence Committee and House Judiciary).

    Most Republicans have generally opposed another round of Mueller testimony, But Graham is facing a competitive election bid, and grandstanding on this topic allows him to both feign bipartisan cooperation while upping the pressure for a Congressional investigation into the origins of the ‘Witch Hunt’ which would presumably target Mueller, Comey and the rest of the FBI/DoJ leadership who were caught up in it.

    Graham delivered the statement in a series of tweets.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course, most observers agree that they would be shocked if Mueller accepted. Though, perhaps with Mueller’s input, Graham will finally be able to cobble together those ‘witch hunt’ subpoenas he’s been promising.’

    Or maybe not – but either way, we suspect the issue will stay ‘open’ until at least Nov. 4.

  • American Collusion: Weaponizing Media, Big-Tech, & Government
    American Collusion: Weaponizing Media, Big-Tech, & Government

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by James Grundvig via WND.com,

    The planners quickly deployed the “insurance policy” after Donald J. Trump won the presidential election in 2016. Like an annuity, the payments to the policyholders would be small and steady at first, then lead, they hoped, to a much bigger payoff: the removal of President Trump from office.

    At least that was the plan. Three and a half years later, the big day never arrived.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From the unsubstantiated Steele dossier, the discredited Russiagate investigation, to the FISA court abuses, the potholed-strewn road to impeachment circled back to the Mueller Report, which was supposed to clinch the deal. Without a smoking gun on the president, the Mueller team reached and then overreached, picking off a few Trump confidants, in an attempt to tighten the noose. The results were half-baked. That’s usually what the FBI perjury trap produces. Plea deals; no evidence of collusion.

    Sure, Robert Mueller collected a few big scalps in Gen. Michael Flynn and Roger Stone. But now that Flynn’s indictment unraveled, the insurance claim has turned into a liability for the policyholders. Trump is still president. And now the investigation into collusion has moved in the other direction focusing on the planners of the insurance policy.

    Going largely unnoticed, the Trump campaign turned social media into a clear advantage in 2016. Twitter emerged as the platform of choice, empowering Trump to communicate directly to the American people without filter, media biased, or interpretation, and with greater reach than all the network news outlets combined.

    In late October 2016, Jason Sullivan – then chief Twitter strategist for Roger Stone, used a data-mining tool he created, Power10, to peer into the public sentiment of the election. Outgunning the antiquated polling surveys that got it so wrong, Sullivan witnessed candidate Hilary Clinton catch up to Trump two weeks before the election in real time. He then saw, a few days later, how FBI Director James Comey gave Clinton a temporary boost that helped her overtake Trump when he announced the bureau would reopen the investigation into her email scandal.

    Since that time, Jason Sullivan hasn’t told his story about what happened behind the scenes leading to the biggest presidential upset election in more than a century. He wasn’t able to. That’s because the FBI swept Sullivan up in a dawn raid in early 2018, after intimidating other members of his family. The FBI hauled him off to testify under oath of perjury before the Mueller team.

    Surviving the FBI interrogation, Jason Sullivan retreated from the social media spotlight. That was until this June when he saw the establishment’s coordinated effort to tilt the 2020 election against President Trump, again.

    The COVID-19 outbreak and subsequent lockdowns gave blue states cover for an all mail-in paper election. The Black Lives Matter (BLM) and Antifa protests, looting and riots further shut down cities across the United States. Some posed the theory that funds donated to BLM flow through ActBlue, another political front company, and into the DNC.

    The biggest lever in tilting the election this year, however, emerges with the collusion between the mainstream media and the tech giants as de facto gatekeepers of information. They wield tremendous power to determine what can and cannot be said, seen, shared and posted. They include Twitter, Facebook, Google and YouTube, among others.

    All this boils down to one objective: Censorship.

    Surviving the Mueller interrogation, Sullivan developed a strong opinion on both censorship and what transpired during the last presidential election.

    On November 8th, 2016, all the laws of gravity were completely defied, and the legitimacy of every last one of the traditional political polls were utterly destroyed and proven beyond a shadow of a doubt to be completely inaccurate in what went down as the single biggest political upset in modern-day history,” Sullivan said.

    “The DNC, Hilary Clinton, the Obama administration, all the Democrats, all the leading newspapers and publications, the establishment Republicans and the RINOs were ALL completely caught flat-footed! If any one of the traditional polls were remotely accurate, candidate Trump did not stand a snowball’s chance in hell of winning the presidential election.”

    Sullivan concluded his first salvo, stating, “There is no one today who will argue that Donald Trump won the presidency because of social media … not even President Trump. But social media is what allowed candidate Donald Trump to completely circumvent the mainstream media and get his message out directly to the people.”

    On Twitter shadow-banning, Sullivan observed the “systemized censorship that if Twitter staff members didn’t like a user’s tweet, they would zap the user’s account, for a period of time. Meaning, everything the user would post would not show up on any of his followers news feeds. It’s like getting hit with a digital stun gun.”

    Another deceptive tool Twitter deploys includes “removing the user’s Twitter handle from its search function,” Sullivan explained. “The search wouldn’t show up or populate in the results of the Twitter search bar. In short, the Twitter handle would not be found by anyone attempting to visit the account.”

    Today, Twitter has been warning (President Trump twice), suspending (Candace Owens) and deleting accounts at a pace that’s picking up speed. Maybe this is due to Twitter’s fluid policies on “hate speech” and other rules that provide gray area to surgically remove some content, while allow other more insidious content to remain.

    At the Sept. 5, 2018, U.S. congressional testimony, Twitter CEO Jack Dorsey claimed, in his opening statement: “Twitter is used as a global town square, where people from around the world come together in an open and free exchange of ideas.”

    Nice digital utopian vision. What if the “town square” is closed off to some, with groups of other voices silenced? Then Twitter no longer is a forum for the “free exchange of ideas,” but a gatekeeper with clear editorial controls.

    What’s interesting is Sullivan knows that Jack Dorsey and Twitter are censoring more people today than ever before. And he can prove it.

    Stifling Free Speech

    What worries Sullivan are the other candidates in this election cycle. “Think about it,” he said. “Twitter is and has been systematically shadow-banning federal level senatorial and congressional candidates across the country? Twitter could prevent them from campaigning effectively by muting their voices from reaching potential voters.”

    Jason Sullivan isn’t alone in his concern or his quest to expose the censorship being carried out by social media platforms. Bill Binney, the former NSA technical director of the World Geopolitical and Military Analysis Reporting Group, has joined Sullivan in setting out to reestablish a level playing field for all candidates.

    Twice, Binney submitted sworn affidavits to the court where the Mueller team tried Gen. Flynn and Roger Stone. In both cases, “The judge wouldn’t allow my testimony in court,” Binney wrote in an email.

    On Russiagate, Binney stated the three things that bother him about the “insurance policy”:

    A. “The lack of IC agencies (like NSA, CIA, FBI) looking at forensics of WikiLeaks and Guccifer 2.0 data, or even stating what they had or did not have in their collection.”

    Advertisement – story continues below

    B. “Mueller, Rosenstein, the House and Senate committees’ failure to listen to our VIPS testimony.”

    C. “The refusal of judges in the Flynn and Stone cases to allow our Russiagate testimony in court.”

    Binney added that the reason why mainstream media and their proxies continue to push Russiagate in July 2020, despite it being exposed, “would require them to admit that they have been pushing an outright fraud for three years. That’s too big a crow for them to eat.”

    The insurance policy started as “a diversion to make it look like the Russians interfered and to set the basis to justify the Democratic effort to impeach President Trump,” Binney added. “This effort and follow-on ones have failed as they too were obvious manufactured frauds.”

    Binney explained the CIA’s software tool HammerDrill. “My understanding is that it uses NSA and other collection equipment to capture data plus some hacking tools to exfiltrate data.” In the case of domestic spying, “HammerDrill was used to keep the rest of government not knowing what the CIA and John Brennan were doing. If they used the NSA data, they would have been recorded; same for FBI.”

    Jason Sullivan recalled, “President Trump has been wise to the censorship since it began. We know, because we have personally been feeding evidence to the people instrumental to the Trump administration ever since he won the nomination at the Republican National Convention in July 2016.”

    On what Twitter is currently doing, Sullivan won’t discuss the more advanced shadow-banning practices and methodologies, “because there is an ongoing investigation by this administration, by We the People, by reporters and investigators at-large, and by an army digital soldiers,” he said. “But I will say, we are hot onto social media’s misdeeds and nefarious practices, for which the president is keen. POTUS has recently set the stage by his latest executive order on ‘Preventing Online Censorship.'”

    Bill Binney has summed up the past three years in a fractious America, stating, “Sad to say, but this is the most serious attack on our Republic since the Civil War.”

    Jason Sullivan agrees with Binney. Together they make a formidable team to challenge Twitter and the other digital gatekeepers in the free flow of ideas.

  • 'People Are Going To Be Shocked': Bannon Claims Wuhan Lab Employees Have Defected, Are Working With FBI
    ‘People Are Going To Be Shocked’: Bannon Claims Wuhan Lab Employees Have Defected, Are Working With FBI

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 21:30

    One day after a report that a respected Chinese virologist fled Hong Kong to accuse Beijing of a COVID cover-up, former Trump strategist Steve Bannon told the Daily Mail that scientists from the Wuhan Institute of Virology and other labs have defected to the West and are “turning over evidence” against the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) for their role in the COVID-19 pandemic which has claimed over 560,000 lives worldwide since last December.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    People are going to be shocked,” Bannon told the  Mail (“from a yacht off the East coast of America,” the Mail would like us to know).

    The 66-year-old then said that defectors are cooperating with intelligence agencies in America, Europe and the UK, which have been assembling evidence to challenge the CCP claim that the pandemic originated in a wet market – not in a lab home to scientists who have come under fire for manipulating bat coronavirus to be more transmissible to humans.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I think that they [spy agencies] have electronic intelligence, and that they have done a full inventory of who has provided access to that lab. I think they have very compelling evidence. And there have also been defectors,” he said. “People around these labs have been leaving China and Hong Kong since mid-February. [US intelligence] along with MI5 and MI6 are trying to build a very thorough legal case, which may take a long time. It’s not like James Bond.”

    Mr Bannon even suggested that the French government, which helped to build the institute, had left behind monitoring systems after Beijing shut them out of the project before it opened in 2017. –Daily Mail

    The thing was built with French help, so don’t think that there aren’t some monitoring devices in there. I think what you are going to find out is that these guys were doing experiments which they weren’t fully authorized [for] or knew what they were doing and that somehow, either through an inadvertent mistake, or on a lab technician, one of these things got out,” Bannon continued. “It’s not that hard for these viruses to get out. That is why these labs are so dangerous.”

    “You essentially had a biological Chernobyl in Wuhan, but the center of gravity, the Ground Zero, was around the Wuhan lab, in terms of the casualty rates. And like Chernobyl, you also had the cover-up – the state apparatus reports to itself and just protects itself.”

    Mr Bannon, who has close links to Guo Wengui, an exiled Chinese billionaire, told this newspaper: ‘Regardless of whether it came out of the market or the Wuhan lab, the Chinese Communist party’s subsequent decisions hold them guilty of pre-meditated murder.

    ‘We know this because Taiwan formally informed the WHO on December 31 that there was some sort of epidemic coming out of Hubei province [where Wuhan is]. The CDC in Beijing was informed on January 2 or 3, and they decided to withhold that information and then sign a trade deal [with the US on January 15].

    If they had been straightforward and truthful in the last week of December, 95 per cent of the lives lost and the economic carnage would have been contained. –Daily Mail

    Bannon continues:

    “That is the tragedy here. They used the time to scoop up all the world’s personal protective equipment. This is a murderous dictatorship. The blood is [also] on the hands of the world’s corporations – the investment banks, the hedge funds and the pension funds – and it is time to start calling it out before it leads to the destruction of the West,” Bannon elaborated. “We are in the most extraordinary crisis in modern American history, more than Vietnam, the Cold War, even the Second World War. A global pandemic and an economic inferno. I have no faith in the WHO, the leadership should face criminal charges and be shut down.”

    One has to wonder if China will respond with whistleblowers from Ft. Detrick to support their narrative?

  • Authors Of Study Finding No Bias In Police Killings Ask For Retraction
    Authors Of Study Finding No Bias In Police Killings Ask For Retraction

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 21:00

    Submitted by by Sovereign Man

    The authors of a study which found no racial bias in police shootings asked for the study to be retracted.  The main findings were:

    “1) As the proportion of Black or Hispanic officers in a [fatal officer-involved shootings] increases, a person shot is more likely to be Black or Hispanic than White, a disparity explained by county demographics; 2) race-specific county-level violent crime strongly predicts the race of the civilian shot…”

    But the authors don’t want the study to be retracted because their findings were wrong. The data is sound.

    Rather, the authors of the study now feel that it is being used improperly in the debate about police killings. They don’t like that people are using their study to discredit the Black Lives Matter narrative.

    What this means:

    A professor who helped fund parts of the study was the victim of the Twitter mob a couple weeks ago. We talked about how Stephen Hsu was fired from his position as Vice President of Research and Innovation at Michigan State University, essentially for supporting academic freedom.

    We are all for police reform.

    We’ve discussed many of the needed reforms: ending qualified immunity, reigning in police unions, ending civil asset forfeiture, ending the drug war, and so on. But we’ve always been skeptical of the argument that the way police behave is all about race.

    And we are especially skeptical of movements like Black Lives Matter, which goes way beyond racial injustice and promotes a Marxist agenda.

    Getting power out of government hands is the best solution, especially if racial prejudice is built into the system.

    * * *

    Bill in Senate would reform Civil Asset Forfeiture

    What happened:

    Senator Rand Paul and others have introduced a bill called the Fifth Amendment Integrity Restoration, or FAIR Act. If passed, the law would put due process back into civil asset forfeiture.

    Civil asset forfeiture is when authorities take property suspected of being involved with or obtained through criminal activities, without convicting or even charging the owner with a crime.

    The legislation requires a court date in front of a judge within two weeks from a seizure. Right now, victims of forfeiture are often forced into an administrative appeal with whatever department seized the property, not an actual court.

    The bill also would require the property to have been knowingly involved in criminal activity, as opposed to incidentally. In the past, vehicle owners have had their cars seized when someone else was driving, sometimes without permission.

    The bill would also end equitable sharing where state and local police keep 80% of property seized for federal agencies– an obvious conflict of interest.

    The bill also gives the owner of the seized property the right to counsel, guaranteed by the Sixth Amendment.

    What this means:

    Reading what the bill changes, most people would be shocked to hear that these are standard practices in law enforcement right now.

    Many of these practices with civil asset forfeiture so obviously violate due process and the rights of the accused. It’s unbelievable they have gone on so long.

    There are a lot of people demanding criminal justice reform right now.

    But somehow it seems like the bills introduced by libertarian-leaning politicians like Sen. Rand Paul and Rep. Justin Amash (ending qualified immunity) aren’t getting much traction…

    * * *

    France bans a bike commercial for discrediting auto industry

    What happened:

    A Dutch commercial shows a black vehicle, and in the reflection, all the negative things associated with driving.

    You see pollution, car crashes, traffic jams and so on. Eventually the car melts away into oil, and a bicycle is revealed. The video is an advertisement for a Dutch bicycle company.

    But France’s advertising regulators have banned the commercial from showing in France.

    They say it creates a “climate of anxiety,” and attempts to “discredit the automobile sector.”

    What this means:

    From the same country that brought you a ban on using meat and dairy terms to advertise vegetarian/ vegan alternatives…

    This is a reminder that government powers to regulate always turn into cronyism.

    The meat industry is more entrenched and powerful than the veggie-burger industry. So they get the government on their side to club the competitors.

    Same goes with the automobile industry– more powerful than the bike industry.

    Anytime you allow the government the power to regulate speech, this sort of thing is inevitable

  • Cost-Cutting And COVID-19 Could Catalyze Election Day Chaos
    Cost-Cutting And COVID-19 Could Catalyze Election Day Chaos

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 20:30

    State and local governments are already setting up for what is likely going to be one of the most difficult elections to manage in decades due to the pandemic. Compounding the issues that come with the coronavirus is the fact that many states and municipalities are also facing budget cuts, suffocating their ability to make the changes necessary to keep voters safe in November.

    States remain on different footing with how they want to approach November. For example, in Ohio, election officials want to equip polling places with safety measures to constrain the virus. In Georgia, officials are considering making absentee ballots easier to get.

    Regardless, across the nation, it’s a situation that could lead to “chaos” in November, Reuters reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tina Barton, the city clerk and chief elections official in Rochester Hills, Michigan, a tightly contested election area, said: “What kind of price tag are you going to put on the integrity of the election process and the safety of those who work it and those who vote? Those are the things at risk.”

    At the very least, elections will simply cost more this year: face masks, face shields and other virus-proofing equipment will need to be purchased in addition to a normal election budget. There are also costs associated with a larger volume of more mail-in ballots. Across the U.S., election officials are warning that they don’t have what they need to do the job properly. 

    Myrna Perez, director of the elections program at New York University’s Brennan Center for Justice, says there could be “widespread disenfranchisement,” as a result. “We run the risk of people really questioning the legitimacy of the election,” she commented.

    Congress has already approved $400 million in federal funding to help states hold the elections as part of the CARES Act. But that is 10% of the $4 billion that experts believe will be necessary to hold “safe and fair” elections this year. Postage alone for mail-in ballots will cost almost $600 million. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An aid bill passed in May in the House included $3.6 billion in new election funding, but the bill has no chance of passing the Senate as Republicans have taken exception with mail-in voting rules changes that were included in the bill. Republicans remain worried that mail-in voting will encourage fraud and will favor the Democrats. 

    Hans von Spakovsky, a former Republican member of the Federal Elections Commission, thinks the answer is simply keeping polling places safe instead of switching to mail-in voting: “I’m not saying that this is easy but it is not going to be as difficult as all these people are predicting.”

    Amy Klobuchar, the senior Democrat on the Senate rules committee that oversees federal grants for elections, says that money that is supposed to be used for election security is now being used for cleaning supplies: “That’s not a one-or-the-other choice. We need voters to be safe and we need our elections to be secure.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Still some state and local governments are trying their best to make changes despite a combined $360 billion revenue loss over the next 36 months due to the Covid outbreak. According to Reuters:

    • Georgia sent absentee ballot requests to all voters ahead of its June 9 elections, which officials cited in local media estimated would cost at least $5 million
    • Philadelphia is faced with an election budget of $12.3 million, instead of $22.5 million and has already spent more than its expected CARES grant holding during its June 2 primary.
    • Ohio’s Lucas County has simply ruled out buying safety equipment like Plexiglas sneeze guards for more than 300 polling stations that the county hopes to operate.

    Finally, the budget cuts mean that election results may be in much later in the evening than we are currently used to. In places like Michigan, where election boards need machines to count ballots faster, there remains budget shortfalls in the tens of millions. Secretary of State Jocelyn Benson concluded: “This means … that election results may not be available until long after election night.”

  • Why Illinois Governor Pritzker's Congressional Testimony On COVID-19 Was False And Hypocritical
    Why Illinois Governor Pritzker’s Congressional Testimony On COVID-19 Was False And Hypocritical

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by Mark Glennon via Wirepoints.org,

    Let’s start with a central claim Governor JB Pritzker made Wednesday in his testimony about COVID-19 policy before the United States House Committee on Homeland Security:

    “We instituted [his mandate to wear masks] in Illinois on May 1st, one of the first in the nation, and it aligns with our most significant downward shifts in our infection rate,” he said.

    That’s simply untrue and his own administration’s data show why. Infections turned down well before his mask order went into effect on May 1. We laid it out in detail in early June.

    The evidence of the day-to-day course of the virus closest to being timely is hospitalizations for it, as Pritzker himself has said. Deaths provide another index. However, hospitalizations and deaths lag the actual course of the virus, and that lag time is provided directly by the Center for Disease Control. Adjusting for those lags shows that the virus peaked in Illinois around April 15 or April 18 – before the mask order even went into effect.

    Progress from the mask order would not have shown up until mid-May, which is when Pritzker’s “science and data” projected the virus would peak. Those projections are now proved to have been wrong even before they were announced. Our full analysis, using the state’s own numbers and the CDC adjustments, includes the details.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gov. JB Pritzker testifying remotely

    And what about Pritzker’s suggestion for going forward, which made national headlines — a federal mask mandate for the whole nation?

    In his testimony Pritzker said,

    “If there’s one job government has, it’s to respond to a life-threatening emergency. But when the same emergency is crashing down on every state at once, that’s a national emergency, and it requires a national response.”

    But remember what he said in April when President Trump and Vice President Pence were roundly rebuked – properly – for claiming that the federal government could override state emergency orders and reopening plans? Pritzker was among the critics.

    “Well, I think [Trump] is going to issue some advice about it, but it is true that it’s up to the governors to make decisions about the executive orders we put in place,” Pritzker said.

    And Pritzker says Trump alone should issue the national mask order, with no legislation. Executive authority for that is highly questionable. On executive power, at least he is consistent. It’s also his position that he can micromanage much of the state through an emergency order he claims can be renewed for as long as he alone chooses.

    Watch the video of the rest of his testimony and you will see that the gist of it is that, when the federal government failed, it was his administration that stepped up with the right response, which is how much of the press summarized his testimony. When asked later to elaborate on what lessons Illinois officials gained from handling the pandemic, Pritzker offered no specifics, saying only, “There’s an awful lot of learning that’s taken place from March until now, so yes I think we’ve created a path for someone in the future to follow.”

    His leadership showed the country how to do it, in other words.

    But here’s what Pritzker didn’t tell Congress: Illinois has suffered 42% more deaths per capita than America as a whole. Per 100,000 of population, 58 Illinoisans have died from the virus but just 41, nationally. Yes, the virus is spiking in states like Florida, Texas and Arizona, but their deaths per capita remain far behind Illinois’ at 19, 10 and 28, respectively, per 100,000.

    Given that record so far, nobody should be telling Congress that Illinois provides the model for others to follow.

    Another matter Pritzker omitted is the growing question of whether lockdown orders make a difference at all. As we have often written, many experts have found it hard to match state and national success fighting the virus with current or prior emergency rules; the virus seems to have a life of its own, often surprising the experts.

    A good, current illustration is California, which is also among the states where the virus is surging, though it has had strict lockdown rules.

    The latest evidence on that issue is particularly intriguing. It’s a study authored by two University of Chicago economists, one of whom is Austan Goolsby, who served on the Council of Economic Advisors during the Obama Administration.

    They concluded that it’s individual choice that determines how people have conducted themselves during the pandemic, not rules. Legal shutdown orders account for only 7 percentage points of what was a 60 percentage points drop in consumer traffic due to the virus, they found.

    That conclusion is consistent with another recent study in Wisconsin that we wrote about. It found virtually no change in social distancing behavior after the Wisconsin Supreme Court voided the state’s shutdown order on May 13.

    *  *  *

    The truth is that the verdict is still out on much of what works, and Illinois is certainly not in a position to be telling Congress that it knows. What we can say for certain is that the entire nation at all levels of government – as well as most educational institutions and many businesses — were tragically unprepared. That failure most clearly includes the absence of any planning for what levels of government are responsible for what – the very issue on which Pritzker plays both sides.

    Let’s hope that, when this is over, a quality review is undertaken that produces a useful assessment akin to the 911 Commission’s report. Hopefully, it will be free of self-aggrandizing politicians who have plagued the debate so far.

  • Goldman Expects A 60% Drop In Q2 EPS, Much Worse Than Consensus
    Goldman Expects A 60% Drop In Q2 EPS, Much Worse Than Consensus

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 19:30

    While Morgan Stanley continues to cheerlead some imaginary V-shaped recovery that is increasingly just in the heads of its research analysts who are running out of time to convince the bank’s clients to buy everything the bank’s prop desks have to sell (while pointing to the market’s surge as if central bank manipulation in the form of trillions of money printed is somehow equivalent to discounting the future, something which the market used to do before central banks took over “price discovery”), Goldman has increasingly become the bearish foil to Stanley’s mind-numbing cheerleading, and in his latest note, Goldman’s chief equity strategist David Kostin looks at Q2 earnings, writing that “investors seek answers about the size of the downturn and the scope for recovery”, and warns that the earnings reality about to be revealed will be far uglier than even the pessimists expect.

    Which is why, unlike consensus which expects an already catastrophic 44% drop in Q2 EPS Y/Y, Goldman is even more downbeat with Kostin predicting that “earnings will fall by 60% in the quarter“, the worst print since the financial crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As was the case in Q1, when historical earnings reports were largely ignored, investors will be looking below the surface of aggregate results to better understand the earnings impact of shutdowns and how quickly earnings can recover as the world reopens. Given the recent resurgence of COVID-19 cases in the US, we expect management commentary will prove more important to gauging the forward path of earnings than actual 2Q results. That is, assuming that companies will not eliminated guidance for the second quarter in a row.

    We’ll find out as soon as Tuesday, when the largest US Banks, including C, JPM, WFC, and BAC, report second quarter results, with 66% of S&P 500 companies set to report earnings during the two-week period between July 20 and July 31.

    Here are some more details from Goldman on why an already dismal consensus will likely end up being overly optimistic:

    Consensus expects S&P 500 earnings will decline by 44% in 2Q, but aggregate results will mask wide dispersion by sector. Equity analysts forecast S&P 500 sales will decline by 12% and net profit margins will contract by 400 bp to 6.8%.  If realized, 2Q 2020 EPS growth would be the weakest since 4Q 2009 (-65%).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Energy and Consumer Discretionary are expected to post outright losses in the quarter due to the sharp decline in oil prices and direct impact from coronavirus shutdowns. Financials results will also be weak as Banks build additional reserves ahead of an expected surge in bankruptcies and nonperforming loans. Goldman’s Banks team expects earnings to decline by 69%.

    At the other end of the distribution, analysts expect Info Tech EPS to decline by just 9%. The defensive Utilities is the only sector expected to grow EPS in 2Q (+2%).

    Looking at the big picture, Goldman believes Q2 earnings results will be worse than consensus currently forecasts. With economic growth the primary driver of S&P 500 EPS growth; 65% of the variation in quarterly year/year EPS growth can be explained by US economic activity in the quarter. Goldman’s US Current Activity Indicator averaged -12% in 2Q, improving from -25% in April to -1.4% in June. The bank forecasts S&P 500 EPS will decline by 60% year/year.

    The S&P 500 comprises large, profitable firms and should be insulated from the economic damage relative to smaller firms. Analyst estimates show Russell 2000 EPS falling by 120% in the second quarter.

    Investors continue to look through 2020 EPS and focus on the earnings outlook for 2021 and 2022. Many investors expect the coronavirus-induced collapse in profits will be concentrated in 2020.

    In order to shift attention even further away from the current collapse in profits, Goldman believes FY+2 earnings and valuation multiples “more accurately reflect the investing environment” and the bank “adjusts our baseline forecast for S&P 500 2020 EPS to $115 (-30%) from $110, maintain our 2021 EPS estimate of $170 (+48%), and introduce a 2022 EPS estimate of $188 (+11%).”

    Goldman’s 2021 EPS forecast is 4% above realized 2019 EPS, while in 2020, Goldman assumes average annual US GDP growth of -4.6%, average Brent crude oil price of $41/bbl (-35% year/year), and a 5% stronger trade-weighted US dollar relative to 2019.

    The bank’s 2021 and 2022 forecasts incorporate expectations of modestly higher oil prices, a weaker USD, and US real economic growth that averages +5.8% in 2021 and +3.5% in 2022. The bank’s economists also expect slack to persist in the labor market through 2022, providing additional flexibility for corporate profit margins.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Kostin, “more of the 2020 decline in earnings is driven by margin contraction than by a drop in sales” as many companies have adjusted their revenue models (e.g., online, curbside) but are experiencing increased costs to reopen safely. Excluding Financials and Utilities, Goldman forecasts S&P 500 sales growth of -8% in 2020, +13% in 2021, and +7% in 2022, and net profit margins of 8.6% (-205 bp) in 2020, 11.1% (+250 bp) in 2021, and 11.5% (+40 bp) in 2022.

    While Goldman is especially downbeat on Q2 earnings, it is far more optimistic looking at the year ahead, and its estimates for 2021 and 2022 remain above bottom-up consensus and most buy-side estimates. Consensus continues to look for a rebound in earnings through 2022 following a 24% decline in 2020. However, revisions have been steadily negative in the past month. Consensus now expects 2021 EPS of $162 (+30%) and 2022 EPS of $187 (+15%), both below Goldman’s top-down estimates.

    What if Goldman is – as usual – wrong about everything? Well, in a downside scenario, Kostin expects that S&P 500 EPS would equal just $105 in 2020, $135 in 2021, and $160 in 2022, with the downside estimates implying EPS growth of -36% in 2020, +29% in 2021, and +19% in 2022, meaning 2022 EPS would remain 3% below 2019 levels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    These estimates are broadly consistent with the downside scenario outlined by Goldman’s economists and represent a “check-mark” rather than a “V-shaped” recovery. The bank expects this downside scenario to occur if reopening plans are meaningfully pushed back because the virus is uncontained or if damage to the labor market and businesses becomes more long-lasting in nature. For example, large company bankruptcies have increased sharply in the past few weeks. Based on Goldman’s top-down model, every 100 bp change in US GDP growth equates to $6 of S&P 500 EPS.

    On the other hand, if a vaccine were approved and distributed rapidly, it would generate only modest upside to the bank’s optimistic baseline 2021 EPS estimate.

    The election wildcard: The 2020 elections add to the earnings uncertainty created by the coronavirus. The odds of a Democratic sweep in November have increased substantially since February and now stand above 50%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If enacted, the Biden tax plan would reduce our S&P 500 earnings estimate for 2021 by $20 per share, from $170 to $150.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This estimate includes raising the statutory federal tax rate on domestic income from 21% to 28%, doubling the GILTI tax  rate on certain foreign income, imposing a minimum tax rate of 15%, adding an additional payroll tax on high earners, and a drag on US GDP of a similar magnitude to the boost the TCJA created in 2018.

    Outside of tax reform, Goldman sees regulation, infrastructure, and trade policy represent potential upside and downside risk to S&P 500 EPS. It’s not just bad news from a Biden beat: Kostin reminds us that this week, Biden outlined a $700 bn economic plan focused on fiscal stimulus. Large fiscal expansion would likely provide a tailwind to economic growth and S&P 500 EPS. Meanwhile, JPMOrgan has published a matrix showing that no matter if Trump or Biden wins, the outcome will be bullish for stocks in either case.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

  • Okinawa Bases Locked Down As COVID-19 Outbreak Grows; Florida Smashes US Single-Day Record: Live Updates
    Okinawa Bases Locked Down As COVID-19 Outbreak Grows; Florida Smashes US Single-Day Record: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 19:03

    Summary:

    • Japan shutters US bases on Okinawa
    • Phoenix mayor sets record for ventilator usage
    • South Carolina positivity rate tops 22%
    • French official warns we shouldn’t expect vaccine by year’s end
    • US hospitals see severe shortages of remdesivir
    • WHO reports another single-day global record
    • Florida shatters US single-day record, surpassing NY
    • US 7-day average for deaths hits highest level since June 16
    • Mexico deaths on track to surpass Italy
    • India outbreak surpasses 250k
    • Israelis protest in Tel Aviv

    * * *

    Update (1840ET): Phoenix Mayor Kate Gallego told CNN Sunday during an interview with Dana Bash that the state’s positivity rates and record-setting ventilator usage are plaguing Phoenix.

    “Our health care workers are telling us they are already tired and they are worried that there could be additional growth after the 4th of July,” Gallego said.

    She also claimed that people in Phoenix are waiting up to 13 hours to get tested.

    “We have had people waiting, eight, 10, 13 hours” to get tested, Gallego said.

    We wonder: will she need to walk back any of these claims, too.

    Meanwhile, as Iran suffers a dramatic resurgence of its deadly coronavirus outbreak, Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei in a televised speech on Sunday said the situation is “truly sad” and encouraged citizens to take appropriate measures to help shorten the chain of transmission “before bringing the country to the shore of salvation,” according to Khamenei’s office.

    While Florida’s daily numbers were undoubtedly the highlight of the weekend, it’s worth noting that the total number of test results reported yesterday in South Carolina was 8,769, with the % positive hitting 22.3%. A total of 538,022 tests were conducted in the state, according to the state’s latest press release, while there were 1,952 new cases of coronavirus and 10 new deaths reported for a total of 56,485 confirmed cases and 163 probable cases. There have also been 950 confirmed deaths and 11 probable deaths statewide.

    In vaccine news, after an Australian official warned that we shouldn’t expect a vaccine by the end of the year, French epidemiologist Arnaud Fontanet says that despite ‘unprecedented effort’ a vaccine is still not likely before next year.

    As more countries scramble to secure stocks of Gilead’s remdesivir, in the US, hospitals in some bad hit areas are complaining that they don’t have enough of the stuff, while hospitals in places like NYC are saying they have more than they need.

    Finally, after 61 US marines tested positive for the virus at two US bases in Okinawa, a Japan-controlled island, the Japanese and the US just announced that they would be placing the base on lockdown to prevent further spread. Japan is reportedly “shocked” and furious at the US after a major coronavirus outbreak at 2 Marine bases in Okinawa.

    * * *

    Update (1400ET): Like Brazil, Chile and Peru, Mexico’s cases from the coronavirus have been surging as the country struggles to compensate for its lackluster early response.

    On Sunday, As Reuters reports, Mexico is set to overtake Italy and shoot above 35,000 deaths on Sunday, leaving Mexico on track to become the world’s fourth most deadly outbreak, according to Reuters’ tally. On Saturday, Mexico recorded 539 additional fatalities to bring its coronavirus toll to 34,730, with 295,268 confirmed cases.

    Italy has recorded 34,945 deaths and 242,827 cases, though it’s only diagnosing a hundred or so new cases a day for the entire country, along with a handful of deaths.

    Mexico’s coronavirus death toll per million residents is the 16th highest in the world. The country’s population is about 120 million.

    Meanwhile, after Fla. reported the largest single-day jump in new cases for any US state, Miami-Dade County officials warned that some hospitals in the state’s hardest-hit county are reaching capacity in both available beds and ICU beds. The shortages are being found at some of the county’s largest and most critical hospitals, Mayor Carlos Gimenez told CNN in an interview earlier.

    “Our ventilator usage has gone up, close to 200 now, so we definitely had a sharp increase in the number of people going to the hospital,” Gimenez said.

    In the first look at the number of new cases reported globally on Sunday, the WHO just reported 230,370 new cases for its Sunday total, the latest global record as outbreaks in Latin America, India and the US continue to intensify. The new cases bring the total number of cases reported to WHO from around the world to 12,552,765.

    * * *

    Update (1120ET): It was only a matter of time, but Florida has finally smashed the one-day coronavirus record set by New York State during the spring peak, reporting 15,300 new cases (15,299, to be exact) – a higher daily total than most countries have ever reported – bringing the state’s total to 269,811.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another 45 deaths were reported on Sunday as well, bringing the statewide death toll to 4,242. Though the 45 number was roughly half the number from the day before.

    That number will probably account for roughly a quarter of all cases reported over the last 24 hours once all  of Sunday’s reports are in.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, this new daily record comes with an important caveat: A massive increase in tests was reported yesterday, with 143,000 being run, roughly double the 7-day total from earlier this month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The positivity rate fell to 13.6%.

    * * *

    Though the various daily tallies are starting to diverge more noticeably (Johns Hopkins reports another record jump in new cases, while worldometer reported a pullback from the 70k+ high from Friday), they all reported another day of 60k+ new cases as the US’s 7-day average continues to move to ever-higher records.

    As of Sunday morning, the 7-day average reported by Worldometer was 58,340, while the US reported 61,719 new cases on Saturday (numbers across the US are reported with a 24-hour delay).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The US reported 732 new deaths on Saturday, which was lower than the prior three days, but not low enough to stop the 7-day average from climbing to its highest level since June 16.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    All told, there were 3,357,928 cases as of Sunday morning in the US, along with 137,429 deaths. Globally, Worldometer counted 12,898,827 total cases and 568,815 deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    Outside of the US, India’s coronavirus outbreak has continued to expand at its explosive pace, nearing 850,000 with a record surge of 28,637 cases in the past 24 hours, prompting authorities to announce the return to lockdown measures in the southern tech hub of Bangalore. India’s other major hot spots, including Mumbai and New Delhi, are implementing strict new procedures focusing on proactive testing to try to eradicate the virus in the country’s most densely packed slums.

    In Israel, thousands filled Tel Aviv’s Rabin Square Saturday night to protest the government’s handling of the coronavirus crisis. The public is furious over Israel’s failure to prevent an outbreak, despite strict and early steps taken, including lockdowns and travel restrictions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Protesters waved yellow and black signs chastising the country’s “disconnected” political leaders and saying “enough,” while others held up signs calling this an “economic war” and demanding the government “release the money.”

    We can’t imagine this will make Israel’s famed contact tracing effort any easier.

  • Extreme "Heat Dome" To Fry US With Record Temperatures Up To 121F For Several Weeks
    Extreme “Heat Dome” To Fry US With Record Temperatures Up To 121F For Several Weeks

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 19:00

    Authored by Elias Marat via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    It was only to be expected that in an already brutal year, the summer of 2020 was going to be the absolute worst.

    And now, it appears that a sizzling “heat dome” will be frying most of the continental United States for several weeks starting this weekend.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What this means is that over 80 percent of the U.S. population – encompassing 265 million people – can expect sweltering heat over the next week with highs exceeding 90. Another 45 million people will be facing highs in the triple digits.

    Additionally, we can expect a full season of lethal heat ranging from 90°F to 121°F, not to mention extreme tropical storms, wildfires, and extreme weather related to La Niña conditions, reports the Independent.

    On Friday, the National Weather Service issued excessive heat watch alerts for “dangerously hot conditions” and forecast that between Friday and Tuesday, over 75 record high temperatures would be reached or exceeded, with heat expected to increase in the following week.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Saturday, temperature in Las Vegas reached a sweltering 112°F with the temperature expected to increase to 114°F on Sunday, while in Phoenix temperatures hit 115°F with Sunday expected to bring a withering 116°F before coasting at or above 110°F through the next week.

    The new extremes sharply raise the danger of heat-related illness and death, further adding to the woes of hospitals struggling with surging COVID-19 infections in hard-hit regions and states like Arizona, California, Nevada and Texas.

    “The heat wave will be very long-lived, lasting multiple weeks in some areas with only a few days of near-normal temperatures during that span,” Jeff Masters, Ph.D. and founder of the popular site Weather Underground, told CBS News.

     “This will increase the odds of heat illness and heat-related deaths.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And for those who may be feeling a little bored sheltering at home, there could be some excitement in store for you in the form of thunderstorms in the Midwest and Northeast, hurricanes in the South, and wildfires in the Southwest and West Coast.

    This less-than-good news comes as the east coast buckles down and braces itself for Tropical Storm Fay, which is set to thrash the New England region, deluge New York, and inundate parts of New Jersey with flash floods.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The news comes as many are already struggling to stay cool during the COVID-19 lockdown without air conditioning, or even the jobs and income to keep their AC units operational if they do have them.

    Heat domes occur when the atmosphere keeps hot ocean air trapped as if it were under a lid or cap, with the end result being conditions of persistent high pressure and sustained heat for a prolonged period of time, sprawled over massive geographical regions.

    To make matters worse, the larger the heat dome becomes, the hotter and more longer-lasting it will be.

    According to a team of National Ocean Services researchers who set up the Modeling, Analysis Predictions and Projections program to figure out why heat domes occur, they found that the primary cause was strong changes in ocean temperatures from west to east in the tropical Pacific Ocean during the prior winter.

    “This happens when strong, high-pressure atmospheric conditions combine with influences from La Niña, creating vast areas of sweltering heat that get trapped under the high-pressure ‘dome’,” the ocean service said.

    Warnings of the brutal heat dome come one day after the NWS issued a La Niña watch Thursday predicting a 50 to 55 percent chance that the phenomenon would develop in the coming months, ensuring an intensification of the Atlantic hurricane season and a growing number of hurricanes and tropical storms.

  • More Media-Hyped Hysteria? Fearmongering NBC Doctor Who 'Battled COVID' Admits Never Had Virus
    More Media-Hyped Hysteria? Fearmongering NBC Doctor Who ‘Battled COVID’ Admits Never Had Virus

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 18:30

    Make no mistake about it: no matter what your take on the coronavirus pandemic, most people seem to understand that the media is likely making the situation out to be far more dire than it is. And why wouldn’t they – most media outlets spend 24 hours a day, 7 days a week of live coverage looking for anything possible to undermine the Trump administration.

    As it relates to coronavirus, the media rarely ever offers details when it touts awful sounding things like the “death count”. MSM outlets never take the time to detail the age group and underlying health conditions – and even the primary cause of death – behind all of the deaths included in the coronavirus death count. They report every time a celebrity tests positive for the virus, but never cover when someone recovers from the virus. The reporting on the virus is selective, to say the least. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which is why we weren’t the least bit surprised to read that NBC News spent weeks documenting the coronavirus “journey” of one of its contributors with Covid-19 – despite the fact that he never tested positive for the virus!

    The contributor, Dr. Joseph Fair, believed he had the virus, according to the Daily Wire, and subsequently appeared on the air on NBC several times to discuss his struggle with the illness in May and June.

    “I had a mask on, I had gloves on, I did my normal wipes routine … but obviously, you can still get it through your eyes. And, of course, I wasn’t wearing goggles on the flight,” Fair said in the appearance on the “TODAY” show from the hospital.

    Host Hoda Kotb said during the segment about the tests:

    “Every time it came back negative, but clearly you have it.”

    A negative test indicates the patient does not have the virus.

    But last week, Fair admitted that he never tested positive for the virus and also tested negative when he was administered and antibody test. 

    He Tweeted out last week: “My undiagnosed/suspected COVID illness from nearly 2 months ago remains an undiagnosed mystery as a recent antibody test was negative. I had myriad COVID symptoms, was hospitalized in a COVID ward & treated for COVID-related co-morbidities, despite testing negative by nasal swab.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fair said he had a myriad of COVID-19 symptoms, was hospitalized in a ward along with other patients with the new disease, and treated for “COVID-related co-morbidities.”

    I was severely ill for 2 weeks, 4 days of it in critical condition, resulting in pneumonia, diffuse lung injury & 18lbs of weight loss. My path forward is a 2nd AB test, & follow-up with a pulmonologist & tropical medicine specialist in an effort to diagnose what made me so ill,” he wrote.

    He said he plans to take another antibody test.

    Fair said he was humbled by what happened and hit back at his critics, writing in a missive:

    “I have absolutely nothing to hide. I got really sick, brought up my test results upfront, and reported the follow-up. A somewhat funny irony is that no one would have ever known I had any negative tests had I not reported them.”

    But back in May, Fair had suggested on the air on the “Today” show that he may have gotten the virus through his eye during a flight that he took. He gave the interview from a hospital bed in New Orleans.

    Even better, NBC knew about the negative tests and failed to mention them, according to the Daily Wire. They wrote: “During a June 14 interview with Chuck Todd on ‘Meet the Press,’ no one noted that Fair had already tested negative at least five times.”

    Steve Krakauer, author of the “Fourth Watch” newsletter, wrote: “In the end, NBC’s viewers were left with two very alarming – and false – impressions. First, that an expert virologist can take every precaution but can still catch COVID-19 through his eyes. False. Second, that tests can be so untrustworthy that you can have multiple negative tests and still have coronavirus.”

  • Cross-Asset Valuations Suggest That The Market Is Deeply Suspicious Of Growth Returning To Normal
    Cross-Asset Valuations Suggest That The Market Is Deeply Suspicious Of Growth Returning To Normal

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 18:00

    Authored by Morgan Stanley chief global economist, Andrew Sheets

    Will there be a V-shaped global recovery? Probably no financial question is more important, or more poorly defined. The intensity of investor debate over which letter the economy will resemble, with no broad agreement on what those letters mean, remains a major challenge. Morgan Stanley’s forecast for a V-shaped recovery has US and DM growth returning to pre-recession levels by 4Q21, faster than consensus and much faster than the recuperation from the global financial crisis. But it will still be 18 months before growth returns to normal; even a V-shaped recovery takes time.

    That slog would seem to stand in sharp contrast to action in the financial markets, which, free to look ahead, have roared back from the lows. Global equities are up almost 40% since late March, causing a healthy amount of scepticism that “markets have run ahead of the fundamentals”. We see this concern in investors’ positioning, read it in the financial press, and hear it in client conversations. There’s just one problem with this view: if markets are pricing a ‘V’, they’re going about it in an odd way.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since there’s no common definition for ‘V-shaped’, we’re going to support the home team and use Morgan Stanley’s above-consensus economic forecasts. They assume a modest second wave of infections this winter, widespread availability of a vaccine in the US by mid-2021, and continued support from fiscal and monetary policy. They expect that pent-up savings will support consumer spending next year even as businesses are slower to respond, and that the global economy won’t suffer a lasting, deflationary shock.

    Markets have other ideas. Cross-asset valuations suggest that the market is deeply suspicious of growth returning to normal, worries about ongoing market volatility, and expects deep scarring in the US and global economy for years to come. There are many ways to describe such a scenario, but ‘V’ isn’t among them.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Let’s start with expected growth. Greater optimism on the recovery should boost demand for smaller, more cyclical businesses, which have more gearing to economic activity. It should reduce the discount for lower-quality companies and credits, as a rising tide lifts more boats. It should lead to higher yields, as economic normalcy removes the need for extremely accommodative policy.

    That’s not exactly happening. Relative valuations for global small caps versus large caps are well below average, and low-quality stocks have almost never been cheaper to high-quality ones.  The basis between BBB and A rated credit, and B and BB rated credit, remains elevated. And developed market yields are still within a whisker of all-time lows, despite the improvement in stock markets and economic indicators.

    Volatility markets also suggest scepticism about a return to normal. Implied equity and credit vol sit in the top 15% of all observations of the last 20 years (the very opposite of ‘normal’), while skew, a measure of how much extra investors are willing to pay for disaster protection, has rarely been higher. Neither suggest a market that’s pricing a return to normal any time soon.

    And then there’s the long term. Looking beyond 2021 may feel like a luxury, but what market pricing implies is still remarkable: a Fed that won’t raise interest rates until 2024. A US 10-year yield that’s sub-2% past 2035. US CPI inflation averaging ~1.6%Y, well below the Fed’s inflation goal, through 2050.

    All this means that we don’t think markets are priced for our economists’ forecasts for a V-shaped recovery. It also makes three events this month important:

    • 2Q earnings season kicks off next week, and my colleague Mike Wilson thinks it will more likely help than hurt. Companies should be able to report a better trajectory of business since the March lows, leading to a sustainable bottom in earnings revisions. Banks, which have lagged the market, will be among the first to report.
    • The European recovery fund, which my colleagues Reza Moghadam and Jacob Nell expect to be approved by the end of the month, and which my colleague Graham Secker sees as a positive catalyst for European equities.
    • Further US fiscal stimulus, which my colleague Michael Zezas believes will amount to another ~US$1 trillion, to be approved near month-end. The failure of such a measure would mean significantly higher risk for markets.

    After July, these catalysts will be behind us and the tactical environment looks more challenging: First things first; we think that positive events still lie ahead over the next several weeks, and among the various risks facing markets, ‘priced for a V’ isn’t at the top of our list.

  • 21 Hospitalized After Fire, Explosion Aboard Naval Ship Docked In San Diego
    21 Hospitalized After Fire, Explosion Aboard Naval Ship Docked In San Diego

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 17:53

    Update (1750ET): 17 sailors and four civilians have been transported to a San Diego hospital with non-life-threatening injuries following the fire and explosion aboard the USS Bonhomme Richard.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The fire broke out around 9 a.m. local time, according to San Diego Fire-Rescue, before quickly reaching three-alarm status.

    There were 160 sailors aboard at the time and the entire crew, as well as responders, have been accounted for.

    Update: Watch live

    *  *  *

    A fire broke out Sunday on the USS Bonbomme Richard at US Naval San Diego, injuring several sailors according to authorities.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A three-alarm fire was declared on the amphibious assault ship, reported at 8:51 a.m. according to local station CBS8, citing the San Diego Fire-Rescue department. As the fire progressed, the ship was reportedly evacuated.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Smoke could be seen from a distance as the fire burned. Meanwhile, just before 11 a.m. an explosion was reported resulting in at least one injury, according to the report. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Developing…

  • Iran Says Radar Operator "Forgot" To Make Crucial Adjustment, Leading To Airline Downing
    Iran Says Radar Operator “Forgot” To Make Crucial Adjustment, Leading To Airline Downing

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/12/2020 – 17:30

    Iran has made a key announcement revealing shocking details behind the tragic downing of Ukraine International Airlines Flight 752 shortly after it took off from Tehran Imam Khomeini International Airport on January 8. All 176 passengers and crew were killed when it exploded in the sky after direct missile impact. 

    Recall that the Islamic Republic and the US were on the brink of war over the US assassination by drone of IRGC Quds Force chief Qassem Soleimani in Baghdad days prior, and that two surface-to-air missiles took out the passenger aircraft, mistaking it for an inbound American attack. 

    After six Iranians were arrested in June over the accidental shoot down, with no details or identification given, Tehran officials announced Saturday that it was ultimately triggered by human error related to monitoring defensive radar. Personnel “forgot” to make a crucial radar adjustment after resetting the defensive system, Iran’s Civil Aviation Organization (CAO) said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wreckage from downed Ukraine International Airlines Flight 752, image via Wikimedia Commons.

    Bloomberg writes of the new findings

    An Iranian air defense unit that “forgot” to adjust its radar system triggered a chain of communication and human errors that led to the deadly downing of a Ukrainian passenger jet in January, according to a report from Iran’s Civil Aviation Organization.

    The report further underscored that it was an isolated but devastating error that did not pass through the chain of command.

    “The operator of the air defense system launched a missile at what it had detected as a hostile target without response from the command center,” CAO said its report, which also detailed that authorities were not informed before the launch.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stillframe footage of horrific aftermath, via BBC.

    The two missiles were fired about 30 seconds apart, targeting what ground units thought was a cruise missile. Data from the passenger airline’s black box is not expected to be decoded starting until July 20.

    At the time Iran was fully expecting to come under attack given soaring tensions with the US in neighboring Iran and stated threats with warnings of “red lines” out of the Trump administration. 

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 12th July 2020

  • Communist China's Silent War Against America
    Communist China’s Silent War Against America

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 23:30

    Authored by Bowen Xiao via The Epoch Times,

    Stealthily, surreptitiously, and with sweeping precision, the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) began a decades-long war against America for world domination by utilizing a military strategy known as “unrestricted warfare” that continues today.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unbeknownst to most of the population, the CCP has infiltrated almost every major avenue of life in the United States – leaving virtually no industry untouched. While this threat has largely existed undetected, the effects it’s had on the nation, as well as its geopolitical consequences, are far-reaching.

    Skirting the traditional, direct military confrontation offensives that have become somewhat outdated in modern times, this unconventional strategy has become central to the communist regime’s approach to warfare.

    The strategy is highlighted in the 1999 book “Unrestricted Warfare,” authored by two Chinese air force colonels—Qiao Liang and Wang Xiangsui—and published by the People’s Liberation Army, the armed forces of the CCP. The book, which has been translated into English, is based on the original army documents.

    Beijing uses an array of subversive tactics, including, but not limited to, propaganda warfare, culture warfare, memetic warfare, front operations, political infiltration, technological and telecommunications warfare, legal warfare, economic espionage, education espionage, cyberwarfare, and sanctions warfare.

    Exploitation, infiltration, and espionage are all recurring themes. The CCP employs all of them to varying degrees simultaneously in multiple sectors of society in order to undermine or influence the United States—its main impediment to global domination.

    While some examples are more obvious, such as China’s long history of intellectual property theft and unfair trade practices with the United States, others that use what it calls “soft power” are harder to detect.

    One such avenue is its Party-backed Confucius Institutes (CIs) that infiltrate and operate on American college campuses in order to boost CCP’s image. It also aims to push a foreign policy goal of making the regime not only an economic superpower, but also a cultural one.

    CIs have attracted attention from lawmakers, national organizations, and the FBI over allegations that the program undermines academic freedom. The CIs have been accused of promoting Chinese communist propaganda under the pretense of promoting the Chinese language and history. There are thousands of CIs over the world and, by one count, at least 75 in America.

    Other examples are more blatant, from a former chair of Harvard University’s chemistry department being recently indicted for making false statements about funding he received from China to a Chinese citizen who was found guilty of economic espionage, theft of trade secrets, and conspiracy.

    In the latter case, a man identified as 41-year-old Hao Zhang was found to have attempted to steal trade secrets from two U.S. companies “for the benefit of the People’s Republic of China,” according to the Justice Department. Zhang stole information specifically related to the performance of wireless devices.

    Economic espionage “is a pervasive threat throughout the United States, particularly to the San Francisco Bay Area and Silicon Valley, which is the center of innovation and technology,” John F. Bennett, special agent in charge of the San Francisco Division of the FBI, said of the case involving Zhang.

    The Thousand Talents Plan, one of the more widely known CCP talent recruitment or “brain gain” programs, encourages theft of intellectual property from U.S. institutions, according to the FBI. By offering competitive salaries, state-of-the-art research facilities, and honorific titles, these programs lure talent from overseas into China, “even if that means stealing proprietary information or violating export controls to do so,” the bureau states.

    FBI Director Christopher Wray testified in 2018 that the bureau was attempting to view the danger posed by China “as not just a whole-of-government threat, but a whole-of-society threat on their end.” To counter China’s strategy effectively, Wray said the United States must also employ a “whole-of-society response.” 

    Walter Lohman, director of The Heritage Foundation’s Asian Studies Center, said the United States has treated China’s “sensitivities” carefully, yet has received “nothing in return.”

    “China’s aggressive behavior over the last 15 years or so has only gotten worse, despite our best efforts,” he told The Epoch Times.

    China currently poses the biggest threat to the United States because it is “powerful across the range of indicators, and … is directly threatening so many American interests, like our communication networks, like Taiwan, freedom in Hong Kong, and freedom of the seas,” he said.

    The CCP also has aggressively promoted and pushed its telecommunications companies, such as Huawei, and ZTE, as well as Chinese-owned apps like TikTok and Zoom, into the United States and around the world.

    Lawmakers and U.S. officials have begun to realize the national security threats these Chinese companies pose. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) in June formally designated Huawei and ZTE as national security threats, thus banning access to money from the FCC’s $8.3 billion a year Universal Service Fund to buy or modify any equipment or services provided by the suppliers.

    One reason behind the decision, as FCC Chairman Ajit Pai notes, is that both companies are closely linked to the CCP and its military apparatus, in that they “are broadly subject to Chinese law obligating them to cooperate with the country’s intelligence services.” Both companies deny this.

    Chinese-owned TikTok, which has seen meteoric growth in the United States, also was recently found to be secretly reading users’ clipboard data, although the app now claims that it has fixed the issue. There are similar concerns about Zoom, as researchers found that encryption keys were being transmitted to servers in China.

    While the United States is stepping up its efforts to counter threats from Beijing, the communist regime is simultaneously ramping up its own aggressive endeavors through the CCP’s United Front Work Department.

    This unit coordinates thousands of groups to carry out foreign political influence operations, suppress dissident movements, gather intelligence, and facilitate the transfer of other countries’ technology to China, according to a June report by the Australian Strategic Policy Institute.

    Its political influence initiatives target foreign elites, including politicians and business executives, and are often covert in nature, the report said. Overseas Chinese communities are also key targets, with the Party seeking to co-opt and control community groups, business associations, and Chinese-language media.

    Alex Joske, author of the report, said that the United Front’s work abroad amounts to an “exportation of the CCP’s political system.” Its effort “undermines social cohesion, exacerbates racial tension, influences politics, harms media integrity, facilitates espionage, and increases unsupervised technology transfer,” the report states.

    With these CCP-backed companies, the regime is attempting to exert its influence over the entire globe, not just the United States. Some major programs backed by the regime that also play into its international ambitions are its Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) and its “Made in China 2025″ plan.

    The CCP, through the BRI, injected billions of dollars into low-income countries in order to build their infrastructure projects. Since 2013, the initiative has launched more than 2,900 projects valued at $3.87 trillion. The BRI has been called a “debt trap” because of Beijing’s predatory lending practices, which leave countries vulnerable to China’s aggressive influence campaigns.

    Over the past two decades, China has become a major global lender, with outstanding debt exceeding $5.5 trillion in 2019—more than 6 percent of global gross domestic product, a report by the Institute of International Finance stated.

    And the CCP’s “Made in China 2025″ industrial plan, which was rolled out in 2015, seeks to make the country a global competitor in 10 tech sectors by 2025. In late 2018, Beijing also began “China Standards 2035” to accelerate efforts to become the leader in burgeoning tech sectors such as big data, artificial intelligence, and the internet of things (IoT).

    Meanwhile, a report published in March determined that Beijing was exploiting the global CCP virus pandemic, which first broke out in Wuhan, China, to advance its economic goals and fulfill its wider ambitions.

    “Beijing intends to use the global dislocation and downturn to attract foreign investment, to seize strategic market share and resources—especially those that force dependence [on China],” the report by Horizon Advisory, a U.S.-based independent consultancy, states. The group reviewed recent policies and notices announced by Chinese central government agencies, regional governments, and research institutes.

    While a growing number of countries are expressing anger and frustration over Beijing’s botched handling of the outbreak, exacerbated by a wide-reaching coverup, backlash is also mounting against its efforts to brand itself as a global leader in combating the pandemic.

    Beijing sent a slew of medical experts and supplies such as masks and respirators to countries where they were desperately needed in a bid to improve its image.

    But the products it delivered often turned out to be defective, leaving countries no choice but to reject the faulty equipment. The Netherlands, Spain, TurkeyFinland, Britain, and Ireland are just some of the countries that received supplies found to be unusable.

    “Authoritative Chinese sources state explicitly that the economic ravages and dislocation that COVID-19 creates give China an opportunity to expand its dominance in global markets and supply chains—both in the real economy and in the virtual domain,” the Horizon Advisory report states. “They also stress that the present crisis will allow Beijing to reverse U.S. efforts to protect its systems, and those of its allies, from China.”

  • First Federal Execution In 17 Years Halted On Coronavirus Fears
    First Federal Execution In 17 Years Halted On Coronavirus Fears

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 23:00

    A year ago the Department of Justice announced for the first time in nearly two decades the resumption of capital punishment in federal cases, with Attorney General William Barr announcing the process for the execution of five death-row in mates is set to move forward, marking the first federal executions since 2003

    The first federal execution in 17 years was to take place on Monday of this next week prior to a federal judge in Indiana halting it. 47-year old Daniel Lee is to die by lethal injection for the 1996 slaying of a family — William Mueller, his wife, Nancy, and her 8-year-old daughter, Sarah Powell.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The only execution chamber in the federal prison system, at the U.S. Penitentiary in Terre Haute. Via AP

    But Chief District Judge Jane Magnus-Stinson in an unusual ruling has halted the scheduled execution on coronavirus fears. She cited that the families of the victims are too afraid of traveling during the pandemic, as well as the potential risk to elderly family members at the site of the execution given that COVID-19 has especially ravaged prisons and correctional facilities.

    The family of the victims filed a lawsuit on Tuesday to get the execution date pushed back:

    Earlene Peterson, the mother of Nancy Mueller and grandmother of 8-year-old Sarah Powell, two of the three brutally murdered in 1996, says the coronavirus poses too much of a travel threat for her to leave her home in Hector to go to Indiana.

    Right now, Lee is set to be put to death Monday at the federal prison in Terre Haute, but the lawsuit filed Tuesday could change that.

    In it, Peterson’s attorney sites multiple health conditions of different family members that could be lethal if one of them contracts coronavirus while traveling to the execution.

    Upon the delay, the Justice Department said it would be appealing Magnus-Stinson’s ruling to the 7th US Circuit Court of Appeals.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    1997 file photo Danny Lee, The Courier via AP.

    Two more executions are scheduled at Terre Haute for next week as it’s the only federal prison to have an active death chamber. The judge’s ruling in the Lee execution does not impact these.

    The men awaiting federal death sentences were involved in heinous crimes involving deaths of families and children: “In January 1996, Lee and his accomplice, Chevie Kehoe, burglarized Mueller’s house in Tilly and waited for him and his wife and stepdaughter to come home. Lee and Kehoe used a stun rod to incapacitate the victims before taping plastic bags over their heads to asphyxiate them, authorities said.”

    Prior to stopping federal execution cases in 2003, perhaps the more notorious criminal to be put to death was Timothy McVeigh in 2001, for killing 168 people in the Oklahoma City bombing, and further recent death row cases awaiting execution include Dzhokhar Tsarnaev in 2015 for the Boston Marathon bombing, and white supremacist Dylann Roof in 2017 for the Charleston church shooting.

  • Binney & Sullivan: An Open Letter Challenge To Twitter CEO Jack Dorsey On Censorship
    Binney & Sullivan: An Open Letter Challenge To Twitter CEO Jack Dorsey On Censorship

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 22:30

    Authored by Jason Sullivan and Bill Binney,

    Open Letter to Jack Dorsey…

    The American People and Social Media

    “We seek a free flow of information… we are not afraid to entrust the American people with unpleasant facts, foreign ideas, alien philosophies, and competitive values.”

    – John F. Kennedy, February 1962

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dear Mr. Dorsey,

    At the September 5, 2018, U.S. Congressional Hearing in which you gave testimony under oath, you stated, in part:

    Twitter does not use political ideology to make any decisions, whether related to ranking content on our service or how we enforce our rules. We believe strongly in being impartial, and we strive to enforce our rules impartially. We do not shadowban anyone based on political ideology. From a simple business perspective and to serve the public conversation, Twitter is incentivized to keep all voices on the platform.”

    What we now know, thanks to multiple media investigations, is that; not only is Twitter engaged in censorship, but that it also openly weights its decisions by subjective terminology like “highest potential for harm” meant to obscure its motive of silencing any opposition to the mainstream narrative of both political “sides.”

    At its inception, America was intended to be a free and open society, a land of opportunity where common people could freely express their thoughts and ideas, a place where Americans could practice freedom of religion, freedom of speech and freedom of assembly without fear of persecution. Throughout the history of our great nation, brave men and women have fought and died to protect these God-given inalienable rights. That is why the Founding Fathers wrote protections into the Bill of Rights for the generations to come. Thomas Jefferson insisted on the 1st Amendment, and swore upon an altar of God against all forms of tyranny over the mind of man.

    It is the great wisdom and divine vision of our Founding Fathers that is responsible for propelling America’s trajectory to become the greatest nation on earth, both admired by those inspired by its idea and feared by those who oppose the light of truth it represents.

    President Harry S. Truman said:

    “Once a government is committed to the principle of silencing the voice of opposition, it has only one way to go, and that is down the path of increasingly repressive measures, until it becomes a source of terror to all its citizens and creates a country where everyone lives in fear.”

    Our Founding Fathers drafted the Bill of Rights not to protect popular speech or the popular majority, but to protect the rights of the minority, lest they fall silent and all real social progress cease. By attempting to make polarized views inaccessible, you effectively shut down the discussion of ideas born out of the flaws in the current system, creating a two-sided echo chamber that neither enlightens people nor helps society grow.

    It prevents people from engaging in quality discourse over any ideology that subjectively may “offend” people on all sides.

    This Orwellian tactic represents the wishes of citizens on either side of the aisle, but perfectly captures the profit-driven motive behind the corporate stance. That no opinion except the popular view of the moment need be allowed. The popular opinion can be shaped by the controlling interests of the corporation that holds the medium hostage. After all, in a world where lines of division are controlled and silenced, new generations of people being immersed in only an ofGicial narrative will have little other recourse for truly free thought.

    We understand that social media is not the government and that companies such as Twitter are private entities. Yet at what point does a private body expand beyond using this excuse to shelter themselves from accountability for their provably suspicious behavior, and enter the realm of being a public service used by billions of people the world over?

    Twitter is not just a messaging board. After all, it aggregates news, offers content suggestions based on meticulously created algorithms that track a person’s every click. It is designed to create and maintain echo chambers and censor out any offending opinions. This creates a dangerous precedent, especially in terms of abusing its power to shape public opinion along controlling party lines actively.

    For example, the very powerful Democratic Congressman, Adam Schiff, chair of the Congressional Intelligence Community, wrote a letter to the top social media platforms, urging them to censor discussions of vaccine injuries, which certainly do occur. The Vaccine Injury Compensation Program has paid out over $4 billion for vaccine injuries since its inception in December 1987. Yes, there are those who, in misplaced zeal, offer opinions less than worthy of note. Still, there should never be a point where a multi-billion dollar corporation steps in and removes people’s ability to actively discuss issues like this on either side of the aisle. Healthy discussion, after all, is what leads to progress, spurs forward innovation, and motivates accountability across the board.

    President John F. Kennedy said:

    The very word “secrecy” is repugnant in a free and open society; and we are as a people inherently and historically opposed to secret societies, to secret oaths, and to secret proceedings. We decided long ago that the dangers of excessive and unwarranted concealment of pertinent facts far outweigh the dangers which are cited to justify it. Even today, there is little value in opposing the threat of a closed society by imitating its arbitrary restrictions. Even today, there is little value in ensuring the survival of our nation if our traditions do not survive with it. And there is very grave danger that an announced need for increased security will be seized upon by those anxious to expand its meaning to the very limits of official censorship and concealment.

    By their very nature, social media platforms have become the dominant platform in the exchange of information and ideas. Technology’s inexorable march into the Digital Age has created a connected world, a communications platform without peer or precedent. Whether by design or not, social media has become the largest and most powerful public forum on the planet. As you duly noted in your testimony, Twitter and other platforms have created a true “global public square.”

    Why would any American-based platforms intentionally design their rules or weight their “community standards” toward one group of views over another, in direct conflict with the protections of the 1st Amendment of the United States? Any “community standard” practices less than or not equal to the 1st Amendment standards would essentially be unAmerican, wouldn’t it?

    In 2017, the U.S. Supreme Court recognized (in a unanimous opinion) that social media platforms are the most important platforms for the exchange of information and ideas. That is why so many people, government officials, human rights agencies, and activists are working around the clock to protect “equal and fair” access to social media for all of the people, even if someone’s ideas are unpopular or controversial.

    The more profound question then becomes: With evidence mounting to support the fact that censorship not only occurs but often leans toward the moderator’s individual biases or those few interests who control the moderator, at what point do we look at the equation and note the collusion that takes shape? What begins to appear out of the murky water of legalese excuses is a distinct pattern of systematic control exercised by a few interests who can weight and shape the landscape of public opinion with a dangerous amount of unchecked power.

    The fact is, that for all the excuses put forward, the lies given to not just the American People, but the citizens of the global community at large, the provability of censorship to a startling degree is not only easy to see, but can be identified with cold sets of data, and be recreated and shown to the masses.

    Pursuant to the above, I, Jason Sullivan (aka “The Wizard of Twitter”), along with Bill Binney (former NSA Lead Technical Director and developer of its surveillance metadata program Thin Thread) hereby challenge you, Jack Dorsey, CEO of Twitter, that your company systematically and aggressively censor “free speech” on your ubiquitous platform concerning the following three criteria.

    1. Twitter shadowbans ( including “deboosting” people and hiding their words to more substantial audiences “based on larger political success of their corporate ideology.

    2. Twitter censors religious and medical freedoms that subvert human rights. (while promulgating some alarming content that Gits their broader agenda.)

    3. Twitter removes and physically deplatforms voices that challenge its views and ideology while lifting similar content; it deems in line with its own goals.

    We are intent on proving these facts beyond a shadow of a doubt and are fully prepared to do so.

    Mr. Dorsey, please prove us wrong. Please show to the American people and us that you do not shadowban based on political views; you do not censor religious and health freedom views; and you do not censor voices dissonant with your personal views.

    Please provide this evidence to the public within seven days. If you would like to discuss how to do that best, please contact us. We look forward to the evidence of testimony before Congress and the President of the United States. We look forward to your timely response.

    Sincerely yours,

    Jason Sullivan [aka The Wizard of Twitter]

    Bill Binney [former NSA Lead Technical Director]

    *  *  *

    Co-signatories:

    Lynnette Hardaway & Rochelle Richardson

    aka: Diamond & Silk

    Terrence K. Williams

    Actor / Comedian / Commentator Extraordinaire

    Chris Sullivan 

    Founder of the Outback Steakhouse Restaurant Concept – Now Bloomin’ Brands

    Richard Beard, III 

    Principal at RA Beard Company

    Dr. Rodney Howard Browne 

    Lead Pastor at Revival Ministries International

    Dr. Ben Graham 

    Pastor and President of Graham Family Films

    David J. Harris, Jr. 

    Author of Why I Couldn’t Stay Silent: One Man’s Battle as a Black Conservative

    Christina Engelstad & Lyndsey Morris

    The Deplorable Choir

    Ben & Tina Garrison 

    American Political Cartoonists

    Zach Vorhies 

    Google Whistleblower 

    Dr. Tony B. Beizaee

    Leadership Council at Republican Jewish Coalition, Special Envoy at America Israel Society

    Ty and Charlene Bollinger 

    Founders of The Truth About Cancer (TTAC)

    Kevin Jenkins

    Executive Director, Urban Global Health Alliance

    Jason Fyke 

    The ongoing lawsuit against Facebook on anti-competitive grounds in the 9th Circuit Court

    Dr. Judy A Mikovits 

    Ph.D., Author of Plague of Corruption: Restoring Faith in the Promise of Science

    Dr. Joseph Mercola 

    D.O., F.A.C.N., Founder of Mercola.com

    Dr. Sherri J Tenpenny

    D.O.

    Dr. Andrew Jeremy Wakefield 

    MB, BS

    Ann Vandersteel

    Host of SteelTruth

    Dr. Edward F. Fogarty, III, MD

    Adjunct Professor, Radiologist, HBOT Specialist

    Past President of the International Hyperbaric Medical Foundation

    James O. Grundvig

    Author & Investigative Journalist

  • Coronavirus: The Under-40s Dilemma
    Coronavirus: The Under-40s Dilemma

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 22:00

    Last week, Deutsche Bank’s Jim Reid made a striking observation, one which threw all coronavirus comparisons to the Spanish Flu, and the coming second wave of the pandemic, in for a loop.

    Specifically, Reid cited a paper that influenced market thinking in the early days of the Covid-19 pandemic looked at the effect of non-pharmaceutical interventions like social distancing and school closures during the Spanish flu (link here). The paper found that the US cities that implemented these measures tended to have better economic outcomes over the medium term. This offered historical support to the argument that there wasn’t such a big trade-off between economic activity and public health, because you needed to suppress the virus to enable consumers to be more confident and for businesses to operate as normal.

    However, a major difference between Spanish flu and Covid-19 was the age distribution of fatalities, as shown in the chart below:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here is the punchline: for Covid-19, the elderly have been overwhelmingly the worst hit. For the Spanish flu of 1918, the young working-age population were severely affected too. In fact, the death rate from pneumonia and influenza that year among 25-34 year olds in the United States was more than 50% higher than that for 65-74 year olds, “a remarkable difference to Covid-19.”

    Now, in a follow up observation from Reid, the DB credit strategist points out another coronavirus peculiarity: the fact that the virus leads to virtually no fatalities of people below 45.

    As Reid writes, the UK has been one of the worst-hit countries in the world when it comes to fatalities per head from Covid-19. The country has seen around 60,000 excess deaths relative to the previous 5-year average. But given the scale of these numbers, Reid points out a “remarkable fact” that among those aged under around 40, deaths have been roughly the same as for the previous 5-year baseline (using England and Wales data). This backs up previous observations on how age-discriminant Covid-19 has been.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s not just the UK: in Sweden (pop. 10.25m), where there was no lockdown, huge international criticism of its strategy, and one of the highest fatalities per head in the world – only 70 people under 49 years old have died of Covid-19, out of 5,482 total virus deaths (1.3%) so far. For context, average annual deaths in Sweden over the last 5 years for under-49-year-olds have been 3,417.

    And yet, while the coronavirus has lead to virtually no excess deaths in younger age cohorts, it is the younger strata of society that are the most impact by the economic shutdowns that have resulted in tens of millions of unemployed Millennials.

    Indeed, as the second DB chart below shows, lockdowns will likely lead to 2020 being the worst year for the UK economy for 310 years.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Reid provocatively puts it, “younger people will be suffering most from the economic impact of Covid-19 for many years to come, we wonder how history will judge the global response.” That said, since the economic crisis resulting from Covid-19 has also unleashed full-blown helicopter money as well as the biggest round of corporate bailouts of insolvent and zombie companies in history, we are confident that the tsunami of global moral hazard – which will leave tens of millions of young workers without a job – will allow central bankers to sleep soundly at night.

    Reid’s conclusion: “the debate is more nuanced than a 250-word email can capture (e.g. the potential long-term implications of Covid-19 on individual health, the need to protect healthcare systems, etc.), but it’s a good discussion to have.”

    Alas, the die has already been cast and it is now far too late.

  • Matt Taibbi: "It Was Like Watching Bruce Springsteen And Dionne Warwick Be Pelted With Dogshit For Singing We Are the World"
    Matt Taibbi: “It Was Like Watching Bruce Springsteen And Dionne Warwick Be Pelted With Dogshit For Singing We Are the World”

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 21:45

    Authored by Matt Taibbi

    As excerpted from “If it’s Not “Cancel Culture,” What Kind of Culture is it?

    Any attempt to build bridges between the two mindsets falls apart, often spectacularly, as we saw this week in an online fight over free speech that could not possibly have been more comic in its unraveling.

    A group of high-profile writers and thinkers, including Pinker, Noam Chomsky, Wynton Marsalis, Salman Rushdie, Gloria Steinem and Anne Appelbaum, signed a letter in Harper’s calling for an end to callouts and cancelations.

    “We refuse any false choice between justice and freedom,” the authors wrote, adding, “We need to preserve the possibility of good-faith disagreement without dire professional consequences.”

    This Hallmark-card-level inoffensive sentiment naturally inspired peals of outrage across the Internet, mainly directed at a handful of signatories deemed hypocrites for having called for the firings of various persons before.

    Then a few signatories withdrew their names when they found out that they would be sharing space on the letterhead with people they disliked.

    “I thought I was endorsing a well meaning, if vague, message against internet shaming. I did know Chomsky, Steinem, and Atwood were in, and I thought, good company,” tweeted Jennifer Finney Boylan, adding, “The consequences are mine to bear. I am so sorry.”

    Translation: I had no idea my group statement against intellectual monoculture would be signed by people with different views!

    In the predictable next development – no dialogue between American intellectuals is complete these days without someone complaining to the boss – Vox writer Emily VanDerWerff declared herself literally threatened by co-worker Matt Yglesias’s decision to sign the statement. The public as well as Vox editors were told:

    The letter, signed as it is by several prominent anti-trans voices and containing as many dog whistles towards anti-trans positions as it does, ideally would not have been signed by anybody at Vox… His signature on the letter makes me feel less safe.

    Naturally, this declaration impelled Vox co-founder Ezra Klein to take VanDerWerff’s side and publicly denounce the Harper’s letter as a status-defending con.

    “A lot of debates that sell themselves as being about free speech are actually about power,” tweeted Klein, clearly referencing his old pal Yglesias. “And there’s a lot of power in being able to claim, and hold, the mantle of free speech defender.” 

    This Marxian denunciation of the defense of free speech as cynical capitalist ruse was brought to you by the same Ezra Klein who once worked with Yglesias to help Vox raise $300 million. This was just one of many weirdly petty storylines. Writer Thomas Chatterton Williams, who organized the letter, found himself described as a “mixed race man heavily invested in respectability politics,” once he defended the letter, one of many transparent insults directed toward the letter’s nonwhite signatories by ostensible antiracist voices.

    The whole episode was nuts. It was like watching Bruce Springsteen and Dionne Warwick be pelted with dogshit for trying to sing We Are the World.

    This being America in the Trump era, where the only art form to enjoy wide acceptance is the verbose monograph written in condemnation of the obvious, the Harper’s fiasco inspired multiple entries in the vast literature decrying the rumored existence of “cancel culture.” The two most common themes of such essays are a) the illiberal left is a Trumpian myth, and b) if the illiberal left does exist, it’s a good thing because all of those people they’re smearing/getting fired deserved it.

    In this conception there’s nothing to worry about when a Dean of Nursing at the University of Massachusetts-Lowell is dismissed for writing “Black Lives Matter, but also, everyone’s life matters” in an email, or when an Indiana University Medical School professor has to apologize for asking students how they would treat a patient who says ‘I can’t breathe!’ in a clinical setting, or when someone is fired for retweeting a study suggesting nonviolent protest is effective. The people affected are always eventually judged to be “bad,” or to have promoted “bad research,” or guilty of making “bad arguments,” etc.

    In this case, Current Affairs hastened to remind us that the people signing the Harper’s letter were many varieties of bad! They included Questioners of Politically Correct Culture like “Pinker, Jesse Singal, Zaid Jilani, John McWhorter, Nicholas A. Christakis, Caitlin Flanagan, Jonathan Haidt, and Bari Weiss,” as well as “chess champion and proponent of the bizarre conspiracy theory that the Middle Ages did not happen, Garry Kasparov,” and “right wing blowhards known for being wrong about everything” in David Frum and Francis Fukuyama, as well as – this is my favorite line – “problematic novelists Martin Amis, Salman Rushdie, and J.K. Rowling.”

    Where on the irony-o-meter does one rate an essay that decries the “right-wing myth” of cancel culture by mass-denouncing a gymnasium full of intellectuals as problematic? 

    Continued reading on Matt Taibbi’s Substack

  • LA Teachers Union Says Schools Can't Reopen Unless Charter Schools Get Shut-Down, Police Defunded
    LA Teachers Union Says Schools Can’t Reopen Unless Charter Schools Get Shut-Down, Police Defunded

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 21:30

    Authored by Daniel Payne via JustTheNews.com,

    A major teachers union is claiming that the re-opening of schools in its district cannot occur without several substantial policy provisions in place, including a “moratorium” on charter schools and the defunding of local police. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    United Teachers Los Angeles, a 35,000-strong union in the Los Angeles Unified School District, made those demands in a policy paper it released this week. The organization called on local authorities to “keep school campuses closed when the semester begins on Aug. 18.”

    The union outlined numerous major provisions it says will be necessary to reopen schools again, including sequestering students in small groups throughout the school day, providing students with masks and other forms of protective equipment, and re-designing school layouts in order to facilitate “social distancing.” 

    Yet the union goes even farther than those requests, calling for “local support” in the form of defunded police departments and the shuttering of charter schools. 

    Police violence “is a leading cause of death and trauma for Black people, and is a serious public health and moral issue,” the union writes. The document calls on authorities to “shift the astronomical amount of money devoted to policing, to education and other essential needs such as housing and public health.”

    “Privately operated, publicly funded charter schools,” meanwhile, “drain resources from district schools,” the union states. The practice of “colocating” charter schools in existing structures, it continues, “adds students to campuses when we need to reduce the number of students to allow for physical distancing.”

    The union also demands the implementation of a federal Medicare-for-All program, several new state-level taxes on wealthy people, and a “federal bailout” of the school district. 

    “The benefits to restarting physical schools must outweigh the risks, especially for our most vulnerable students and school communities,” the document continues. 

    “As it stands, the only people guaranteed to benefit from the premature physical reopening of schools amidst a rapidly accelerating pandemic are billionaires and the politicians they’ve purchased,” it adds. 

  • China Says Samples Of Imported Salmon Tested Positive For COVID-19
    China Says Samples Of Imported Salmon Tested Positive For COVID-19

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 21:00

    We’ve been paying close attention to Chinese propaganda since the beginning of the coronavirus outbreak, and six months in now, we must give the CCP credit where credit is due: thanks to the tightly controlled media atmosphere inside the country, the CCP’s propaganda machine is mercilessly effective. With the full weight of the state-controlled press behind them, the CCP can manufacture false narratives out of thin air, subtly sowing doubts in the minds of the Chinese people that maybe SARS-CoV-2 didn’t originate in China.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yesterday, we noted a report in the Global Times (one of many English-language outlets controlled by the CCP) relaying a warning from China’s embassy in Astana about a deadly pneumonia potentially even more lethal than the coronavirus. More than 1,500 had apparently been confirmed already, and it’s feared that more remain unconfirmed – at least, according to the report. Given the sourcing – the story cited China’s embassy in the country as its primary source, not the Kazakh public health officials who have been overseeing the coronavirus outbreak.

    Immediately, it was clear to us the report was planted as a nudge to the Chinese people to sow doubts about China’s role in unleashing the outbreak. Unsurprisingly, the WHO treated the report with deference, saying that while they believed most of these pneumonia cases were caused by SARS-CoV-2, they would look into it nonetheless. 

    Of course, every narrative becomes easier to swallow when the people want to believe it. But that’s perhaps besides the point.

    Much like the Big Apple, China’s propaganda machine never sleeps. And on Saturday, Bloomberg signal-boosted local reports claiming that imported shrimp from Ecuador had been found to be carrying traces of the virus which were found in the packaging (apparently, no traces were detected in the shrimp itself).

    China said samples of imported shrimp tested positive for the coronavirus, raising questions again over whether the pathogen can spread through food or frozen products.

    The virus tested positive on both the inside and outside of the shrimp packaging, said China’s General Administration of Customs. The samples were from three Ecuadorian plants, and imports from those processors will be halted, it said. A leading Ecuadorian shrimp exporter disputed the findings.

    “The test result doesn’t mean the virus is contagious, but reflects the loopholes in companies’ food safety regulations,” said Bi Kexin, director of the food import and export safety bureau in the customs department. “Customs will further strengthen control of the origins of imported cold-chain food.”

    This isn’t the first time the CCP has tried to portray imported seafood as a threat. A few weeks ago, when the first post-lockdown cluster was found in Beijing and traced to a wholesale market in the southwestern parts of the city, officials there said traces of salmon found on a cutting board had tested positive. This triggered a nationwide boycott that led to thousands of tons of imported salmon being thrown in the trash.

    Though traces of the virus were apparently found on the packaging, whether those traces may have actually been infectious isn’t clear.

    At the time, China began mass testing cold food imports at ports, and blocked shipments of meat from plants abroad that reported infections.

    But as one Rabobank analyst confirmed to BBG, evidence suggests that it’s extremely unlikely for the virus to be transmitted through food, according to Gorjan Nikolik, Rabobank’s director of seafood .

    “It’s a typical food scare” he said. “I expect them to be very short-lived.”

    By testing seafood so aggressively, this setup effectively guarantees the CCP a steady stream of legitimate ‘positive’ tests. These reports will induce panic, and hurt local businesses forced to take a loss on their wears, but the CCP doesn’t care. The propaganda value is clearly too great.

    Understandably, the FDA felt compelled to issue a statement on the issue, and in that statement the agency asserted that there is no evidence that tainted food packaging can transmit the virus (not even to workers at the warehouses that handle the packaging).

    The Ecuadorian exporter, who agreed to close down and do a cleaning, helped put into context how minor the sample actually was.

    Ecuadorian shrimp exporter Santa Priscila questioned the findings and lamented the blow to the industry’s reputation, saying Chinese officials had refused to provide information on the testing in recent weeks.

    “They found one positive non-contagious test ‘inside the wall of the container’ as a result of 227,934 samples taken from the containers, that is 0.0000043%,” Santa Priscila President and founder Santiago Salem said in a statement.

    So anybody shipping seafood to markets in China, beware: If there’s even a speak of virus RNA on the packaging or in the food that you ship, the CCP will find it, and exploit it for political gain. And if you lose money and your business goes under? Well, my friend, that’s just a little something called “counterparty risk”.

  • When Will The Madness End?
    When Will The Madness End?

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 20:30

    Authored by Jeffrey Tucker via The American Institute for Economic research,

    I was sitting in the green room in a Manhattan television studio on the day that the storm seemed to hit. It was Thursday, March 12, 2020, and I was waiting anxiously for a TV appearance, hoping that the trains wouldn’t shut down before I could leave the city. The trains never did shut but half of everything else did. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On this day, everyone knew what was coming. There was disease panic in the air, fomented mostly by the media and political figures. A month earlier, the idea of lockdown was unthinkable, but now it seemed like it could happen, at any moment. 

    A thin, wise-looking bearded man with Freud-style glasses sat down across from me, having just left the studio. He was there to catch his breath following his interview but he looked deeply troubled. 

    “There is fear in the air,” I said, breaking the silence. 

    “Madness is all around us. The public is adopting a personality disorder I’ve been treating my whole career.”

    “What is it that you do?” I asked. 

    I’m a practicing psychiatrist who specializes in anxiety disorders, paranoid delusions, and irrational fear. I’ve been treating this in individuals as a specialist. It’s hard enough to contain these problems in normal times. What’s happening now is a spread of this serious medical condition to the whole population. It can happen with anything but here we see a primal fear of disease turning into mass panic. It seems almost deliberate. It is tragic. Once this starts, it could take years to repair the psychological damage.

    I sat there a bit stunned, partially because speaking in such apocalyptic terms was new in those days, and because of the certitude of his opinion. Underlying his brief comments were a presumption that there was nothing particularly unusual about this virus. We’ve evolved with them, and learned to treat them with calm and professionalism. What distinguished the current moment, he was suggesting, was not the virus but the unleashing of a kind of public madness. 

    I was an early skeptic of the we-are-all-going-to-die narrative. But even I was unsure if he was correct that the real problem was not physical but mental. In those days, even I was cautious about shaking hands and carrying around sanitizer. I learned later, of course, that plenty of medical professionals had been trying to calm people down for weeks, urging the normal functioning of society rather than panic. It took weeks however even for me to realize that he was right: the main threat society faced was a psychological condition. 

    I should have immediately turned to a book that captivated me in high school. It is Extraordinary Popular Delusions and the Madness of Crowds by Charles Mackay (1841). I liked reading it because, while it highlighted human folly, it also seemed to indicate that we as a civilization are over that period in history. 

    It allowed me to laugh at how ridiculous people were in the past, with sudden panics over long hair and beards, jewelry, witches, the devil, prophecies and sorcery, disease and cures, land speculation, tulips, just about anything. In a surprising number of cases he details, disease plays a role, usually as evidence of a malicious force operating in the world. Once fear reaches a certain threshold, normalcy, rationality, morality, and decency fade and are replaced by shocking stupidity and cruelty. 

    He writes:

    In reading the history of nations, we find that, like individuals, they have their whims and their peculiarities; their seasons of excitement and recklessness, when they care not what they do. We find that whole communities suddenly fix their minds upon one object, and go mad in its pursuit; that millions of people become simultaneously impressed with one delusion, and run after it, till their attention is caught by some new folly more captivating than the first. We see one nation suddenly seized, from its highest to its lowest members, with a fierce desire of military glory; another as suddenly becoming crazed upon a religious scruple; and neither of them recovering its senses until it has shed rivers of blood and sowed a harvest of groans and tears, to be reaped by its posterity…. Men, it has been well said, think in herds; it will be seen that they go mad in herds, while they only recover their senses slowly, and one by one.

    After 2005 when the Internet developed into a serious repository for human knowledge, and it became accessible via smartphones and near-universal access, I too was tempted by the idea that we would enter into a new age of enlightenment in which mass frenzies would be quickly stopped by dawning wisdom. 

    You can see evidence of my naivete with my April 5, 2020 article: With Knowledge Comes Calm, Rationality, and, Possibly, Openness. My thought then was that the evidence of the extremely discriminatory impact of the virus on plus-70 people with underlying conditions would cause a sudden realization that this virus was behaving like a normal virus. We were not all going to die. We would use rationality and reopen. I recall writing that with a sense of confidence that the media would report the new study and the panic would end. 

    I was preposterously wrong, along with my four-month-old feeling that all of this stuff would stop on Monday. The psychiatrist I met in New York was correct: the drug of fear had already invaded the public mind. Once there, it takes a very long time to recover. This is made far worse by politics, which has only fed the beast of fear. This is the most politicized disease in history, and doing so has done nothing to help manage it and much to make it all vastly worse. 

    We’ve learned throughout this ordeal that despite our technology, our knowledge, our history of building prosperity and peace, we are no smarter than our ancestors and, by some measures, not as smart as our parents and grandparents. The experience with COVID has caused a mass reversion to the superstitions and panics that sporadically defined the human experience of ages past. 

    Eventually, people have and do come to their senses, but it is as Mackay said: people “go mad in herds, while they only recover their senses slowly, and one by one.”

  • Trump Admin Tells Minnesota Governor To Get Bent Over $16 Million Aid Request Following Riots
    Trump Admin Tells Minnesota Governor To Get Bent Over $16 Million Aid Request Following Riots

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 20:00

    The Trump administration has denied a request by Minnesota Governor Tim Walz (D) for $16 million in federal aid to help rebuild widespread damage in Minneapolis caused by rioters protesting the death of George Floyd.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Late Friday, Walz spokesman Teddy Tschann confirmed that the July 2 federal aid request to the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) was denied.

    The Governor is disappointed that the federal government declined his request for financial support,” said Tschann in a statement. “As we navigate one of the most difficult periods in our state’s history, we look for support from our federal government to help us through.”

    Over 1,500 buildings were damaged by fires, looting and vandalism following Floyd’s death on May 25 while in police custody. According to Walz, over $500 million in damages ensued.

    Many small businesses and grocery stores, pharmacies and post offices were damaged during the unrest. In his letter to FEMA, Walz said what happened in the Twin Cities after Floyd’s death was the second most destructive incident of civil unrest in U.S. history, after the 1992 riots in Los Angeles.

    The Walz administration conducted a preliminary damage assessment that found nearly $16 million of eligible damages related to fires. The federal funds would have been used to reimburse local governments for repairs and debris removal. –Star Tribune

    On Thursday, Republican Rep. Tim Emmer (MN) sent a letter to President Trump asking for a “thorough and concurrent review” of how state officials handled the civil unrest so that “every governor, mayor and local official can learn from our experiences.”

    “If the federal government is expected to assist in the clean-up of these unfortunate weeks, it has an obligation to every American — prior to the release of funding — to fully understand the events which allowed for this level of destruction to occur and ensure it never happens again,” wrote Emmer.

    “Current damage estimates are now five times their original projections, but the extent of the destruction cannot be calculated solely in dollars and cents,” continues Emmer’s letter. “Thousands of livelihoods have been permanently disrupted, future economic development plans have been derailed as businesses reconsider investing in and around the Twin Cities, and numerous public lifelines for the community have been cut leaving Minnesotans searching for alternative means of care for their families.

    “To date there have been no federal analysis of the actions that were – or were not – taken by local and state officials to prevent one of the most destructive episodes of civil unrest in our nation’s history.

  • Why The Roger Stone Commutation Is Not As Controversial As The Outrage Mob Thinks
    Why The Roger Stone Commutation Is Not As Controversial As The Outrage Mob Thinks

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 19:30

    Authored by Jonathan Turley, op-ed via The Hill,

    Washington was sent into vapors of shock and disgust with news of the commutation of Roger Stone. Legal analyst Jeffrey Toobin declared it to be “the most corrupt and cronyistic act in all of recent history.” Despite my disagreement with the commutation, that claim is almost quaint. The sordid history of pardons makes it look positively chaste in comparison. Many presidents have found the power of pardons to be an irresistible temptation when it involves family, friends, and political allies.

    I have maintained that Stone deserved another trial but not a pardon. As Attorney General William Barr has said, this was a “righteous prosecution” and Stone was correctly convicted and correctly sentenced to 40 months in prison. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    President Trump did not give his confidant a pardon but rather a commutation, so Stone is still a convicted felon. However, Trump should have left this decision to his attorney general. In addition to Stone being a friend and political ally, Trump was implicated in those allegations against Stone. While there was never any evidence linking Trump to the leaking of hacked emails, he has an obvious conflict of interest in the case.

    The White House issued a statement that Stone is “a victim of the Russia hoax.” The fact is that Stone is a victim of himself. Years of what he called his “performance art” finally caught up with him when he realized federal prosecutors who were not amused by his antics. Stone defines himself as an “agent provocateur.” He crossed the line when he called witnesses to influence their testimony and gave false answers to investigators.

    But criticism of this commutation immediately seemed to be decoupled from any foundation in history or in the Constitution.

    Indeed, Toobin also declared, “This is simply not done by American presidents. They do not pardon or commute sentences of people who are close to them or about to go to prison. It just does not happen until this president.”

    In reality, the commutation of Stone barely stands out in the old gallery of White House pardons, which are the most consistently and openly abused power in the Constitution. This authority under Article Two is stated in absolute terms, and some presidents have wielded it with absolute abandon.

    Thomas Jefferson pardoned Erick Bollman for violations of the Alien and Sedition Act in the hope that he would testify against rival Aaron Burr for treason. Andrew Jackson stopped the execution of George Wilson in favor of a prison sentence, despite the long record Wilson had as a train robber, after powerful friends intervened with Jackson. Wilson surprised everyone by opting to be hanged anyway. However, Wilson could not hold a candle to Ignazio Lupo, one of the most lethal mob hitmen who was needed back in New York during a mafia war. With the bootlegging business hanging in the balance, Warren Harding, who along with his attorney general, Harry Daugherty, was repeatedly accused of selling pardons, decided to pardon Lupo on the condition that he be a “law abiding” free citizen.

    Franklin Roosevelt also pardoned political allies, including Conrad Mann, who was a close associate of Kansas City political boss Tom Pendergast. Pendergast made a fortune off illegal alcohol, gambling, and graft, and helped send Harry Truman into office. Truman also misused this power, including pardoning the extremely corrupt George Caldwell, who was a state official who skimmed massive amounts of money off government projects, like a building fund for Louisiana State University.

    Richard Nixon was both giver and receiver of controversial pardons. He pardoned Jimmy Hoffa after the Teamsters Union leader had pledged to support his reelection bid. Nixon himself was later pardoned by Gerald Ford, an act many of us view as a mistake. To his credit, Ronald Reagan declined to pardon the Iran Contra affair figures, but his vice president, George Bush, did so after becoming president. Despite his own alleged involvement in that scandal, Bush still pardoned those other Iran Contra figures, such as Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger.

    Bill Clinton committed some of the worst abuses of this power, including pardons for his brother Roger Clinton and his friend and business partner Susan McDougal. He also pardoned the fugitive financier Marc Rich, who evaded justice by fleeing abroad. Entirely unrepentant, Rich was a major Democratic donor, and Clinton had wiped away his convictions for fraud, tax evasion, racketeering, and illegal dealings with Iran.

    Unlike many of these cases, there were legitimate questions raised about the Stone case. The biggest issue was that the foreperson of the trial jury was also actually a Democratic activist and an outspoken critic of Trump and his associates who even wrote publicly about the Stone case. Despite multiple opportunities to do so, she never disclosed her prior statements and actions that would have demonstrated such bias. Judge Amy Berman Jackson shrugged off all that, however, and refused to grant Stone a new trial, denying him the most basic protection in our system.

    Moreover, I think both the court and the Justice Department were wrong to push for Stone going to prison at this time, because he meets all of the criteria for an inmate at high risk for exposure to the coronavirus. None of that, however, justifies Trump becoming involved in a commutation, when many of the issues could have been addressed in a legal appeal.

    There is lots to criticize in this move without pretending it was a pristine power besmirched by a rogue president. Indeed, Trump should have left the decision to a successor or, at a minimum, to the attorney general. But compared to the other presidents, this commutation is not even a distant contender for “the most corrupt and cronyistic act” of clemency.

  • Phoenix Mayor Lied About Morgues Bringing In 'Refrigerator Trucks' To Store Overflow COVID Bodies
    Phoenix Mayor Lied About Morgues Bringing In ‘Refrigerator Trucks’ To Store Overflow COVID Bodies

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 19:26

    As the number of hospitalized COVID-19 patients in Maricopa County climbed to new highs late this week, Phoenix Mayor Kate Gallego appeared on MSNBC Friday morning for an interview with Chuck Todd and Katy Tur to discuss the situation in the state, which has moved to close bars, and rollback other reopening measures to combat the outbreak.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During the interview, Gallego claimed that the county’s public health agency had just put in an order for refrigerated trucks because they were running out of space in the morgue.

    “Maricopa County, which is our county public health agency, just announced that they’re going to be getting refrigerated trucks because the Abrazo health care system has run out of morgue beds,” Gallego said.

    Hours later, as the mayor’s comments started proliferating through the media, representatives for the hospital system called and complained that the mayor’s comment wasn’t true, despite the fact that she made the claim – seemingly with a high degree of certainty – on a popular cable new show.

    Spokesman Keith Jones told azcentral.com that Abrazo hospitals have “adequate morgue space.”

    Here’s the story: Phoenix and the rest of the state have been asked to implement their emergency plans to prepare for possible COVID-19 overloads.

    Part of the plan, Jones said, was to proactively make sure there would be enough morgue space. So the hospital system ordered refrigerated storage weeks ago, but they have yet to be deployed.

    “At this point, it is not needed,” Jones said.

    Of course, it’s not difficult to imagine why Gallego made such a specious – and, some might argue, alarmist – claim:

    Democrats in the state believe they need to discredit Gov Doug Ducey’s COVID-19 response if they want to succeed in flipping John McCain’s old Senate seat, currently occupied by Republican Senator Martha McSally, on Nov. 3.

    The special election is being held to find a permanent successor to the former presidential candidate and longtime Republican Senator.

    For some reason, we couldn’t find the video of the interview on YouTube.

    Update – we found it on Twitter…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Russian Fighter Jets Intercept US Spy Plane Over Sea Of Japan 
    Russian Fighter Jets Intercept US Spy Plane Over Sea Of Japan 

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 19:00

    Russia’s defense ministry (MoD) announced that on Saturday its Su-35 and MiG-31 fighter jets intercepted a US spy plain over the Sea of Japan.

    “On 11 July, the Russian airspace surveillance identified an air target over the neutral waters of the Sea of ​​Japan [East Sea], flying in the direction of the state border of the Russian Federation,” the MoD statement said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sukhoi Su-35 fighter, file image.

    “On July 11, the Russian airspace monitoring system over the neutral waters of the Sea of ​​Japan discovered an air target flying towards the state borders of the Russian Federation, and Russian fighters escorted the American reconnaissance plane at a safe distance, and the Russian fighters returned to the airport after the American plane had rotated and moved away from the Russian border,” the statement continued.

    The Russian statements identified the American aircraft as an Air Force RC-135 reconnaissance jet.

    Over the past two months there’s been dozens of intercept incidents between the rival superpowers, but typically not in this location.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Most close encounters have taken place off Alaska’s coast, as well as over the Black and Baltic Seas, as well as the Mediterranean near Syria.

    Last month there was a rare similar intercept incident over the remote Sea of Okhotsk just off the Russian far east.

    Russian media detailed of this latest Sea of Japan incident: “Russian fighter jets escorted the reconnaissance aircraft at a safe distance and returned to the home base after the US aircraft flew away from the Russian border.”

    The intercepts have been part of a developing tit-for-tat spate of intercepts between the US and Russian militaries over international waters and airspace. 

  • The Delusion Of A Seamless Reopening Is Being Obliterated
    The Delusion Of A Seamless Reopening Is Being Obliterated

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 18:30

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Birch Gold Group,

    During the first wave of pandemic lockdowns, America became a rather surreal place. The initial shock that I witnessed in average people in my area was disturbing. Half the businesses in the region closed and a third of the grocery store shelves were empty. The look in people’s faces was one of bewilderment and fear; their eyes were like saucers, no one was staring into their cell phones as they usually do, and people huddled over their shopping carts like wild dogs protecting a carcass.

    Luckily, this tension has subsided, but only because the majority of Americans have been assuming for the past couple months that the pandemic was going to fade away in the summer and that the “reopening” was permanent. Sadly, this is a delusion that is going to bite people in the ass in the next month or two.

    In “The Economic Reopening Is A Fake-Out”, published at the end of May, I stated:

    “The restrictions will continue in major US population centers while rural areas have mostly opened with much fanfare. The end result of this will be a flood of city dwellers into rural towns looking for relief from more strict lockdown conditions. In about a month, we should expect new viral clusters in places where there was limited transmission. I suggest that before the 4th of July holiday, state governments and the Federal government will be talking about new lockdowns, using the predictable infection spike as an excuse.”

    I also noted:

    Certainly, it appears that most Americans hate the lockdowns. But will they be fooled by the “reopening” into complacency for the next several weeks while the government gets ready to hit them with the next round of restrictions? Will they be so caught off guard they won’t know how to react? Imagine the economic devastation of just one more nationwide lockdown event? It will be carnage, and a lot of hope within the population will be lost.

    In “Pandemic And Economic Collapse: The Next 60 Days”, published in April, I predicted:

    The extent of the crisis will become much more clear in the next two months to the majority. The result will be civil unrest in the summer, likely followed by extreme poverty levels in the winter. No measure of “reopening” is going to do much to stop the avalanche that has already been started.

    My position at the time, on secondary infection spikes in the summer as well as renewed lockdown restrictions, appears to have proven correct. Currently, daily reported infections in the U.S. are at a record 50,000 per day or more and cases are rising in 40 out of 50 states. Many of the new infection clusters are in more rural areas and states that a lot of people thought had dodged the initial wave, including California. There has been a massive rush of home buyers moving to rural and suburban America away from the cities. The great migration has begun.

    Subsequently, public anxiety is rising yet again. Protests such as those in Michigan over the lockdowns were overwhelmingly peaceful, yet liberty movement activists were demonized and accused of “inciting violence” and “spreading the virus”. Some groups with left-leaning political agendas used the death of George Floyd to create civil unrest. The mainstream media mostly lavished these groups with praise and refused to acknowledge that they might be spreading the virus.

    The double standard is clear, but this is just the beginning.

    As I have argued for the past few months, the REAL public crisis will strike when the secondary lockdowns are enforced, either by state governments or the federal government. Make no mistake, these orders are coming. We can already see restriction in some states being implemented, though they refuse yet to call the situation a “lockdown”.

    California has recently added 24 counties to its “Covid watchlist”, and most of these counties have added new restrictions, including many non-essential businesses being ordered to remain closed.

    The governor of Arizona announced statewide restrictions including business shutdowns, suggesting there may be a reopening at the end of July. If the previous lockdown is any indication, this means the next reopening will probably not happen until early September.

    Similar restrictions have been announced in Texas, Florida, Georgia, etc. This is essentially a new shutdown that has not yet been officially labeled a “shutdown”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So what does this mean for the U.S. economy going forward?

    Well, the first lockdowns caused an explosion in unemployment, with 40 million jobs lost on top of around 11 million existing jobless. Beyond that, you can add the 95 million people without work that are no longer counted on the rolls by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. Only a portion of these jobs were regained when the reopening occurred. According to Shadowstats.com, the real unemployment rate including U-6 measurements is 31% – around the same level as it was during the Great Depression.

    So far in 2020 there have been 4,300 major retail store closings, added onto the thousands of businesses already hit in 2019 in what many are calling “The Retail Apocalypse”. Small business closings are harder to gauge at this time, but according to Yelp, over 41% of their listed participants are announcing they are closing for good.

    This outcome was easy to predict when it became clear that only 13% to 18% of businesses applying for the small business bailout loans received aid, and half of those businesses were actually large corporations

    What happens next? The companies that did survive the first phase lockdowns are now going to get hit again, hard. I expect another 50% of small businesses to either close permanently or announce bankruptcy over this summer and fall. This means a second huge surge in job losses in the service sector.

    It’s important to remember that the U.S. economy is 70% service based, and around 50% of total jobs are provided by small businesses. The lockdowns hit both these areas of our system mercilessly. And, with most of the aid from the government bailouts being diverted to major corporations, it’s as if someone was trying to deliberately crush the small business pillar of support for our economy. If you were attempting to drag the U.S. into an economic collapse, the Covid lockdowns are a perfect cover to make this happen.

    Another economic threat is the slowdown in the supply chain. There will be renewed shortages in many goods. I have received numerous emails from readers who work in manufacturing, repair and acquisitions of vital parts for major companies who have told me that simple components, such as electronic and industrial parts that are required for factories to produce goods and repair goods, are almost gone. Meaning they are not being produced overseas in places like China, either due to the pandemic or geopolitical conflict. They tell me there is a maximum of two months before these components are completely gone.

    The greater danger, however, is the higher likelihood of civil unrest. I’ve heard many people suggest that Americans will “never” put up with another round of shutdowns. I think it depends on the state you live in. If you live in places like California, Illinois, New York, or even Florida, the majority of people are going to conform to lockdowns even in the face of financial calamity. Interior states with more conservatives are not as certain. Regardless, I expect at least half the country to be shut down in the next few weeks, and those places that don’t shut down will be accused of “selfishly endangering others”.

    As I have said many times since this crisis began, it does not matter how dangerous or deadly a virus is; shutting down the economy is assured destruction and is not an acceptable response.

    Of course, certain special interest groups benefit greatly from the increased fear and chaos that economic instability brings. Right now, states like Georgia are pushing to stage the national guard to quell unrest, and I think this will spread to many places in the U.S. over the summer. They know what is coming, and they are worried about people hitting the wall of poverty that is ahead and reacting angrily.

    As the globalist Imperial College of London published in March, the plan is for lockdowns to continue on and off for the next 18 months or more. This is not going away, and after the next wave of lockdowns, most Americans are finally going to realize it.

    Rather than promoting localized production, independent economies and self-sufficiency, the establishment is going to suggest martial law and medical tyranny as the solution to the pandemic problem. In other words, they will demand total control over the population and the erasure of constitutional liberties in the name of “the greater good”.

    These are the same people that downplayed the pandemic at the beginning of the year and refused to stop travel from China until it was too late. They are also the same people (including Dr. Anthony Fauci) who gave the Chinese millions of dollars to play around with the coronavirus at the Level 4 lab in Wuhan, which is the likely source of the current outbreak. I’m not sure why ANYONE would want to give more power to the people that caused the crisis in the first place.

    Three factors are working hand-in-hand to undermine U.S. stability and create a rationale for totalitarian controls including the economic crash, civil unrest and the pandemic itself. Understand that preparations to protect yourself and your family must be finalized NOW. There will not be even a minor recovery after the next shutdown.

    *  *  *

    After 8 long years of ultra-loose monetary policy from the Federal Reserve, it’s no secret that inflation is primed to soar. If your IRA or 401(k) is exposed to this threat, it’s critical to act now! That’s why thousands of Americans are moving their retirement into a Gold IRA. Learn how you can too with a free info kit on gold from Birch Gold Group. It reveals the little-known IRS Tax Law to move your IRA or 401(k) into gold. Click here to get your free Info Kit on Gold.

  • Testing, Tracing, Treating – How Asia's Biggest Slum Is Beating The Coronavirus
    Testing, Tracing, Treating – How Asia’s Biggest Slum Is Beating The Coronavirus

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 18:00

    As the total number of confirmed COVID-19 cases in India passes 800k, pushing India past Russia and into third place on the ranking of most global cases…

    …the country’s leader, Prime Minister Narendra Modi has been hard-pressed to come up with a solution, particularly after an economy-crippling shutdown.

    Earlier this month, local officials in Mumbai and New Delhi, the country’s two hardest-hit areas, launched an effort to perform a ‘COVID-19 audit’ on the city’s inhabitants in an ambitious testing program that would ideally test everyone in the two cities.

    Now, local media are reporting that the WHO has praised an effort to contain an outbreak in Mumbai’s Dharavi slum, said to be the largest slum in all of Asia, and also one of the densest.

    World Health Organization Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said during the WHO’s press conference in Geneva on Friday that the situation in Dharavi is an example of how even some of the most intense outbreaks can be brought under control with a proactive strategy.

    “And some of these examples are Italy, Spain and South Korea, and even in Dharavi – a densely packed area in the megacity of Mumbai,” he had said.

    According to local officials, the strategy they used to successfully start suppressing the outbreak relied on proactive testing first and foremost, along with the support of medical professionals and other medical resources focused on the area aside from the tests and the people needed to administer them.

    The neighborhood, once deemed a global COVID-19 hotspot, has managed to flatten its curve.

    One of the top hospital officials who participated in the effort said that the linchpin of the strategy was going out into the community and proactively testing individuals – especially the most vulnerable –  instead of waiting for patients to come to get tested at a facility.

    “Proactive screening helped in early detection, timely treatment and recovery,” he said.

    When positive cases were found, officials diligently guided the subject to care (if they needed it) or quarantine, then made sure to trace cases back to the point of infection while keeping confirmed patients from spreading it to others.

    Across Dharavi, 14,000 people were reportedly tested and 13,000, were placed in institutional quarantine with medical facilities and community kitchen for free,” the senior official said. That’s across a slum that measures 2.5 square kilometers, with a population density of 2,27,136 people per square kilometer.

    Soon, officials noted progress in the data. In April, the doubling rate was 18 days. It was gradually improved to 43 days in May and slowed down to 108 and 430 days in June and July respectively.

    As many as 2,359 COVID-19 cases have been recorded in Dharavi so far, of which 1,952 patients have recovered from the deadly infection, while there are only 166 active cases at present. However, achieving this monumental feat was not easy for the local authorities, who had to overcome their fair share of challenges.

    “At least 80% of Dharavi’s population depends on 450 community toilets and the administration had to sanitize and disinfect these toilets several times a day,” Dighavkar said.

    […]

    “Our approach to tackle the virus was focused on four Ts – tracing, tracking, testing and treating,” he said.

    Social distancing was next to impossible in Dharavi, where families of eight to 10 people live in 10×10 huts, and travel requires walking through narrow lanes in between the tenement houses.

    Doctors and private clinics, as part of proactive screening and fever camps, covered as many as 47,500 houses, while 14,970 people were screened in mobile vans, the official said.

    Apart from this, special care was taken for the elderly residents and 8,246 senior citizens were surveyed, he said.

    Manpower was a major issue for organizing fever camps and proactive screening in high-risk zones.

    “We mobilised all private practitioners. At least 24 private doctors came forward and the civic body provided them with PPE kits, thermal scanners, pulse oxymetres, masks, gloves, and started door-to-door screening in high risk zones and all suspects were identified,” he said.

    City officials also cleared schools and other buildings to transform them into makeshift hospitals and quarantine units. In just 2 weeks, a 200-bed hospital was devised.

    Like the US, India saw a surge in cases after exiting a lengthy lockdown. The lockdown imposed by the Indian government was by all accounts far more strict than what most Americans experienced. Still, the virus has made a comeback, suggesting that lockdowns in India aren’t a sustainable way to deal with the problem. But proactive testing sounds like it could certainly go a long way.

  • The Fed Put Narrative Era
    The Fed Put Narrative Era

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 17:35

    Submitted by The Swam Blog,

    For years, I have heard fund managers and economists claiming that “a financial crisis is unlikely as long as central banks intervene”. This postulate has been the foundation of the well-known “Fed put”. Stocks should only go up thanks to monetary policy.

    The past ten years have reinforced that conviction, since all the actions of the Fed and the ECB had strong positive impact on risky assets. But, as Tyler Durden would say, “on a long enough timeline the survival rate for everyone drops to zero”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In fact, if you study economic history, then you are likely to realize that such relationship between money supply and asset prices has no real foundations. Besides, the purchasing power of money theory tells us that increasing money supply can lead to higher prices, but only if the so-called velocity of money does not decrease. Thus, velocity is a key variable. When it comes to investment, it seems that velocity is mostly driven by psychological factors. In other words, if QE has become so bullish for stocks or bonds, it is mainly because people believe that it is.

    Therefore, everyone should remember that “the greatest trick the devil ever pulled was convincing the world he didn’t exist”. Not only can the market drop despite the Fed, but it might crash precisely because of such dominant belief.

    Intersubjective Markets and Narratives

    Intersubjectivity can be thought as a share agreement of meanings between multiple people. According to Yuval Noah Harari, without intersubjective frameworks like religions, governments, money, firms, etc., anatomically modern humans would not be able to form and control large social groups.

    Financial markets can also be treated as an intersubjective framework. From that perspective, a market narrative can be defined as a subculture (or ideology) common to multiple investors, sharing a common vision on how markets work and how assets are priced.

    Without narratives, there would be no bull or bear markets. Of course, bull markets can be driven by positive news such as earning growth. However, speculative bubbles would make no sense without intersubjectivity. The concept of narratives is the key to understand how markets work and how investor price assets.

    The “Fed put” can regarded as the dominant narrative since 2009. And it has become so dominant that Nasdaq stock prices have disconnected from economic fundamentals like they did in 1999.

    Fractals and Avalanches

    Today, equity markets seem to display a macro-behavior, since almost everyone has turned bullish. Despite a few skeptical folks, even pessimistic investors have resigned themselves to the idea that markets would not drop anymore because of Jerome Powell. In other words, a form of order has emerged (i.e. low entropy), and the market has reached a critical state.

    The problem is that such a state is very unstable, and a fast reversal becomes more and more likely. What could be the trigger?  It could be anything like the acceleration of the pandemic, bankruptcies, geopolitical tensions, etc. However, answering this question is not essential.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indeed, the bubble has been driven by endogenous feedback loops. So, the market can crash without any obvious reason. This is what we observed on US equity markets in 1929, 1987 and 2000. And this is also how ended the bitcoin mania in 2017, and the China A shares rally in 2015.

    What we know so far is that a reversal can lead to a significant volatility spike since the apparent order will be suddenly broken.

    Hidden Risks Behind the Tech Rally

    Some physicists state that the whole boom and bust process can be captured using the so-called log-periodicity power law singularity (LPPLS) model. Whether it is purely theoretical or not, the model indicates that Nasdaq euphoria is likely to terminate by the end of the summer (see It is All About Waves – Tech Stocks and The Log-Periodicity Power Law Singularity Model and We Are Warned – Precisions About the Log-Periodicity Power Law Singularity Model).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beyond that statistical prediction, it is important to have a look at technicals as the current trend looks quite unsustainable (see Sven Henrich’s chart above) with numerous unfilled gaps below. And while the Nasdaq is breaking records every day, the VIX remains at historically high levels.

    At this stage, the question is, what will support the market if the dominant narrative is broken? The Fed has our backs, until it has not. Extreme concentration and short-volatility bets are major risks for equity investors, especially Robinhood retail traders.

    As Nassim Nicholas Taleb says, “missing a train is only painful if you run after it”.

  • For First Time Since The Great Depression, Americans Must Wait In Line For The Most Basic Essential Items
    For First Time Since The Great Depression, Americans Must Wait In Line For The Most Basic Essential Items

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 17:10

    The scene can be somewhat dystopian and third world when you look at it: as a result of the pandemic and the new way that our economy is forced to do business, Americans all over the country are waiting in line – even for the most basic of essentials. 

    For example, Bloomberg points out that food banks in Vermont have to deal with “miles long” lines of cars and at Covid testing sites in Florida, people have to show up with full tanks of gas because of how long they have to wait. 

    People applying for unemployment have similar horror stories – as we have detailed – trying to pile onto an overwhelmed website to collect benefits and left with no one to call when the system doesn’t function properly. The physical waits in unemployment lines are similarly distressing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kara Eaton, a 27-year-old industrial welder from Eufaula, Oklahoma, said: “We have to hope that the person next to us in line will hold our place while we use the bathroom — Subway usually doesn’t mind if we use theirs.”

    Rachelle Basaraba of Oregon said: “Having to be patient and wait your turn — I don’t know if that’s necessarily the American way.” She says that a “herd mentality” and respect for rules bring order to waiting in line in Denmark, where her company is based. She called this a “a positive thing,” though was unsure about how it would catch on the U.S.

    This time in America is the first since the Great Depression to make Americans wait in line for limited resources. 

    J. Jeffrey Inman, a marketing professor and associate dean at the University of Pittsburgh’s Katz Graduate School of Business, said: “The U.S. is getting a dose of the scarcity economy, and we don’t like it. The U.S. has gotten spoiled where we’ve always had a plentiful, efficient supply chain. Now we’re seeing what can happen once it gets disrupted.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But capitalism is trying to swoop in and solve the problem. For example, a company called Lavi Industries, that usually makes post-and-rope systems for Homeland Security, is now involved in making plastic sneeze guards and portable stations for lines to make the waiting for bearable. They are also working on their “virtual queueing technology,” which is a smart phone technology that can summon customers out of line from afar. 

    Perry Kuklin, Lavi’s marketing director, put it simply: “People hate to wait. If you make it more pleasant, make it more efficient, you as a business can not only profit from it, but you create a better passenger experience or theater experience.”

    Richard Larson, a Massachusetts Institute of Technology professor and expert on queuing theory, says the issue is just temporary: “My parents had to wait in a bank queue line between 10 a.m. and 3 p.m. and now ATMs are everywhere. We have umpteen more gas station pumps you can stop at. A lot of traditional pesky queuing is gone.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some Americans are trying to make the best of the situation. “It was time to stop and notice, to look around and watch, to not be on my phone. I tried just to be there,” said Dena Babb of Torrance, California, about trying to be mindful while enjoying waiting in line.

    But other Americans continue to grow more and more skittish about the practice, leading to another vein of increased tension across the nation. Francisco Salazar of East Meadow, New York, concluded: “Earlier in the pandemic, they were checking people for masks, cleaning the carts, giving sanitizer — they’re no longer doing any of it. I feel paranoid. I don’t want to be on these long lines.”

     

  • Official COVID-19 Statistics Are Missing Something Critical
    Official COVID-19 Statistics Are Missing Something Critical

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 16:45

    Authored by Thomas Smith via Elemental,

    Even if you recover from Covid-19, you may not escape unscathed…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the moment, official record-keeping offers only three options when it comes to Covid-19: infection, recovery, or death. This misses a broad range of other potential outcomes for people who catch the virus — many of them bad.

    In medicine, physicians talk about “M&M,” or “Mortality and Morbidity.” Many hospitals even hold closed-door “M&M” conferences, where their providers discuss everything that’s gone wrong with their patients over the last week or month.

    Mortality is a pretty straightforward concept. Have patients died from a particular disease process, and if so, how? Were their deaths avoidable? Can the field of medicine learn anything from them which will improve patient care in the future?

    Morbidity, though, is a much trickier concept. It includes the complications, health issues, and other negative outcomes (other than death) that a disease causes. Basically, it’s all the ways that a disease can make you unwell, even if it doesn’t actually kill you.

    Official statistics capture deaths that occur from Covid-19 reasonably well. Reporting methods are often updated, and epidemiologists have gone back and attempted to quantify Covid-19 deaths that were originally missed. But overall, death counts are a relatively easy metric to apply. Patients are either alive or dead. Knowing the difference is comparatively simple.

    But these official statistics miss quite a lot. Specifically, they fail to represent Covid-19 morbidity — the harm that the disease causes, even in people that it doesn’t kill. In terms of measuring the long-term impact of the disease — and accurately evaluating risk — that’s a big problem.

    Mounting evidence shows that even if Covid-19 kills less than 1% of patients, it doesn’t necessarily leave the others it infects unharmed. Even those who have “recovered” may have long-term impacts from it.

    Morbidity can happen over a long-term period, so it is a harder variable to study and track in the early stages of a pandemic than death. Anecdotal reports and early data, though, show that Covid-19 morbidity may be a very real concern. According to a report in The Atlantic which followed several people with Covid-19 over multiple months, many had long-lasting symptoms and impairments (including headaches and debilitating fatigue) that didn’t resolve when their active infection stopped.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    All of these cases were considered “mild” and didn’t result in the use of a ventilator or a stay in the ICU. And they occurred in people from a variety of age groups, not only older adults and the infirm. Yet despite these “low risk” factors, patients were still experiencing major impacts from the disease months after contracting it.

    A handful of studies about Covid-19 (as well as scholarship on previous coronaviruses) bears this out. Covid-19 infection can have long-term impacts on the lungs, heart, immune system, and even the brain. These include an increased risk for heart attacks, future respiratory infections (including more severe cases of flu), and neurological impacts like cognitive impairment.

    These are in addition to the known risks for hospitalization, especially if a hospitalization results in an ICU stay and might trigger ICU delirium, a condition that can be permanent. Just because you’ve recovered from Covid-19 doesn’t mean you’ve necessarily escaped unscathed — especially if the disease landed you in the hospital.

    Even more concerning is emerging data showing that “asymptomatic” Covid-19 infections can cause long-term damage. Recent studies, including one published in Nature Medicine, have found “ground-glass opacities” in the lungs of asymptomatic carriers of Covid-19 — evidence of inflammation which could be causing damage internally, even if the patient feels completely fine.

    And although earlier evidence suggested that children are less affected by the disease, the emergence of a new condition, Multisystem Inflammatory Syndrome, suggests that the virus may be having longer-term impacts even on the young. MSIS symptoms can emerge weeks or months after the original infection and can be deadly without prompt treatment.

    All these early reports point to the possibility that Covid-19 causes acute infection, but also long-term inflammatory damage. Inflammatory diseases are the leading cause of death worldwide. If Covid-19 worsens these conditions — or causes its own long-term inflammatory damage — the result could be millions of additional deaths from heart disease, diabetes, asthma, and the like, especially in already vulnerable populations. These effects of the disease may not be apparent for years or decades.

    At the moment, official statistics largely fail to take such ongoing health impacts of the coronavirus into account. Traditional epidemiology does have metrics for morbidity. But they tend to focus on disease prevalence. Once a person’s active infection has passed, they are often no longer followed or counted.

    As risk professionals like Nassim Nicholas Taleb have pointed out, the failure to measure Covid-19 morbidity makes it far harder to evaluate the true risk from the pandemic. Simply looking at deaths is not enough. Mortality statistics fail to account for the people who survive the disease but suffer long-term harm — or those who die from its complications long after their initial infection has subsided.

    This blindness to morbidity may push populations toward more aggressive reopening, or away from risk-reduction measures like mandating face coverings. If deaths are declining, the picture may appear rosy. But in reality, the disease may be causing irreparable harm to millions of people — just in a way that’s invisible in current statistics.

    In an increasingly polarized world, morbidity is an issue that cuts across political lines. Even if your primary goal is to restart the American economy, you should care about Covid-19 morbidity. Chronically sick people often have a hard time working, or the efficiency of their work suffers. Several of the patients profiled in The Atlantic experienced “brain fog” and other neurological effects from the virus, and have found even simple activities like housework and yoga challenging. These patients would almost certainly have a hard time returning to work. To achieve lasting economic recovery with minimal burden from worker illness, Covid-19 morbidity has to be accounted for.

    Thankfully, tracking Covid-19 morbidity doesn’t require reinventing the wheel. Medicine and risk management already have a robust tool for measuring the impact (health-wise and financial) of morbidity: the Quality-Adjusted Life Year (QALY) and its sister statistic, the Disability-Adjusted Life Year (DALY).

    QALYs and DALYs take into account both a person’s life expectancy and their quality of life (defined, broadly, by how much a disease affects their ability to perform daily tasks). Lowered life expectancy affects QALYs, but so do long-term disease effects like the kind we’re beginning to see from Covid-19.

    QALYs and DALYs are often used to evaluate new treatments. But there’s no reason QALYs and DALYs couldn’t be applied more broadly, to estimate and measure the disease burden of the Covid-19 pandemic on a given population.

    In the early stage of the Covid-19 pandemic, QALYs and DALYs could be applied by deciding on an estimate for a “weight factor” measuring the severity of Covid-19’s impact on patients’ health (this is usually done on a scale of 0 for “perfectly healthy” and 1 for “dead”). This weight factor could be set differently for different populations. For example, older people with Covid-19 or those with more preexisting conditions could receive a higher weight factor.

    Using demographic data for a particular population (mean age, prevalence of existing diseases, etc.) and these weight factors, an estimate of the impact of Covid-19 morbidity could be established for a population. This could then be multiplied by the number of confirmed infections in the population to arrive at a crude estimate of the overall burden of Covid-19 morbidity.

    Accounting for morbidity in this way could have some major impacts on plans for reopening. Regions with highly vulnerable populations (those expected to suffer more morbidity as a result of Covid-19 infections) could reopen more slowly. And those with relatively lower projected morbidity might be emboldened to open more quickly.

    As the pandemic continues and more data on the long-term impact of Covid-19 becomes available, weights could be adjusted. If it emerges that certain populations are less vulnerable than expected, their weights could be adjusted downward. If more long-term impacts of Covid-19 infection emerge (like breathing issues in asymptomatic carriers), weight factors could be adjusted upward.

    QALYs and DALYs are not perfect metrics. Setting weight factors is inherently subjective, and can reflect biases present in a society. At the early stage of a pandemic, very little data is available, so estimating morbidity is more an art than a science. There are also ethical concerns with QALYs and DALYs since they’re often used to weigh the value of one life against another. QALYs and DALYs can also miss the hard-to-measure impacts of disease, like their impact on mental health.

    But given that Covid-19 morbidity is basically invisible in current public health models, measuring morbidity with metrics like QALYs and DALYs would at least be a helpful start. It could begin to give us a way to estimate not only how many people will die from Covid-19, but how many lives will be negatively impacted by the disease.

    Measuring morbidity could also provide better treatment and follow-up. Current approaches assume that once an asymptomatic carrier of Covid-19 tests negative, their disease has run its course. Follow-up for these patients is likely to be limited. If it turns out that Covid-19 causes ongoing morbidity in patients who appear healthy, providers could shift toward monitoring them months or years after their infection (looking for evidence of inflammation and lung damage, for example).

    On a personal level, if you’ve tested positive for Covid-19 and feel fine now, don’t assume your disease is over. Especially in the longer term, be aware of potential Covid-19 symptoms, and talk with your doctor about testing for any long-term impacts that emerge.

    And if you still have symptoms after your Covid-19 test has turned negative, and are told that these are unrelated to the disease, be skeptical. In the grand scheme, very little is known about Covid-19. You may be experiencing lingering effects from your infection, which your doctor should help you address and manage.

    Tracking deaths and recoveries is a start. But current approaches to tracking Covid-19 are binary — you’re either positive or negative, alive or dead. To truly measure (and react to) the long-term impacts of the pandemic, we need more nuanced measures.

    Specifically, we need a way to measure morbidity. Otherwise, we risk missing impacts of Covid-19 which could have massive, invisible consequences — especially for our most vulnerable.

  • Louisiana Gov Orders All Bars To Close As COVID-19 Cases, Hospitalizations Surge: Live Updates
    Louisiana Gov Orders All Bars To Close As COVID-19 Cases, Hospitalizations Surge: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 16:24

    Summary:

    • Louisiana closes all bars, limits size of outdoor gatherings as virus case spike
    • 40% of COVID-19 infections asymptomatic, CDC says
    • Florida revises Friday death toll
    • NY 3-day average deaths fall to 7
    • Florida reports 2nd highest jump yet
    • US reports 70k+ new COVID-19 cases
    • Deaths near 1k for 4th day
    • Global case number: 12,689,741
    • India cases top 400k
    • Japan sees record 430 new cases
    • Victoria reports 216 new cases
    • Australian official: vaccine may be 2 years away still

    * * *

    Update (1611ET): With the US on track to report another record, or near record, jump in new coronavirus cases reported Saturday (remember, those cases were reported with a 24-hour delay), Louisiana Gov John Bel Edwards announced that he would be closing bars in the state, following other southern states like Mississippi and Texas.

    The governor’s new order will also limit gatherings to 50 people indoors and require social distancing for gatherings outdoors.

    “None of these steps are ones that I wanted to take, but I do think their essential,” Edwards said.

    The state reported 2,167 new cases Saturday, the fourth highest single-day total since the pandemic began, for a total of 76,803. The state has also reported 3,295 deaths.

    Gov. John Bel Edwards announced Saturday he will issue a public mask mandate and new restrictions on bars and crowd sizes Saturday.

    Edwards, a Democrat, has resisted tightening restrictions since he moved the state into Phase 2, but cases and hospitalizations climbed sharply in July, with 1,182 COVID-19 patients hospitalized throughout the state, and 120 of them on ventilators.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The state is now No. 3 in per capita cases in the nation behind only New York and New Jersey.

    “It’s become clear to me the current restrictions are not enough,” Edwards said. “We cannot risk losing our capacity to deliver hospital care.”

    A previous Edwards mask order requires employees who interact with the public to wear masks, but not the general public.

    The new order mandates face coverings statewide for people ages 8 and older.

    Parishes and cities may opt out if they don’t have a high rate of COVID. So far, only Grant, Red River and West Feliciana would qualify to opt out.

    Louisiana reported more than 2,000 new COVID cases Saturday for the second straight day as the infection continued to intensify in the state.

    * * *

    Update (1430ET): Florida’s Department of Health has issued an apology and a retraction claiming that Saturday’s death toll figures were “miscalculated”, and that the state only suffered 97 deaths instead of the 188 reported, which would have been a record number, beating the prior record by a considerable margin.

    “The previous report calculated the change in the deaths over the last two days (93 on 7/10 and 95 on 7/11), instead of the change from yesterday to today. It has now been corrected to only reflect the change in deaths from yesterday to today,” the spokesperson said in an email.

    Meanwhile, in New York, the state recorded its lowest COVID-19 three-day death toll average – at 7 – since March 16, the governor said in a Saturday tweet. New York reported just six deaths yesterday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In other news, the CDC announced on Saturday that it had updated its guidance for the number of asymptomatic carriers roaming around. According to the new numbers, officials are estimating that roughly 40% of all those infected are asymptomatic, up from 35% during a previous estimate released in May.

    The CDC is now including an infection fatality ratio, which supposedly takes into account both symptomatic and asymptomatic cases: It estimates that in total, 0.65% of people who contract the virus are thought to die. Though the agency warned that the situation remains highly uncertain, according to CNN.

    The report also disputes the claim (once advanced by the WHO) that asymptomatic people can’t infect others.

    * * *

    Update (1125ET): Florida health officials on Friday reported 10,360 (+4.2%) new COVID-19 cases and 188 deaths, marking the second-most cases reported in a single day, according to data from the state Department of Health dashboard. However, the increase is below the 7-day average of +4.6%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 188 deaths reported Saturday is also the most deaths reported in a single day yet. The figure is 50% larger than the number from the prior day. Florida’s previous single-day death tally was 120, which was reported on July 9. The state has reported a total of 4,197 since the beginning of the pandemic.

    * * *

    The US reported yet another record-breaking single-day number of new coronavirus cases on Friday. And while counts by Johns Hopkins and others put the total at roughly 64k cases, a tally by worldometer put the number of new cases at 71,787, the first time the US has reported more than 70k cases in a day.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Those numbers brought the case total in the US to 3,294,539, while the US also reported another 854 new deaths, bringing the total to 136,735k.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That number marked a fourth day of new deaths trending closer to 1k, a psychologically important level.

    Globally, the world recorded 228,000 new cases yesterday, another record high as Brazil and India see cases spiral out of control. That brought the international total to 12,689,741.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Friday’s numbers brought the mortality rate in the US to 4.8%, while the number of total cases in the country, home to the world’s largest outbreak, still represented roughly a quarter of the global total. Globally, there were 12,689,741 confirmed cases as of Saturday morning on the East Coast of the US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, in Florida, hospitals confirmed that a total of 7,063 patients were hospitalized with the virus in Florida, according to data released Saturday by a state agency. Miami-Dade County is the state leader with 1,601 patients hospitalized, the most in any single county in the country.

    While the Sun Belt outbreaks continue to spiral out of control, we noticed an interesting report out of NYC on Saturday. The NYT recently reported that more than 68% of people tested positive for antibodies at a clinic in Corona, a working-class Queens neighborhood,  while 56% tested positive at another clinic in nearby Jackson Heights.

    That compares with just 13% of people tested in ritzy Cobble Hill, a ritzy Brooklyn neighborhood.

    India has registered more than 800,000 Covid-19 cases so far, the country’s health ministry announced Saturday.

    It reported a record 27,114 new Covid-19 cases on Friday, bringing the nationwide total to 820,916.

    This is the third consecutive day that the country has recorded its highest single-day jump in new coronavirus cases.

    As virus cases continue to soar, Indian cities and states are reimposing strict measures to curb the spread.

    A coronavirus vaccine may be two years away, if one is ever found, and low levels of infection may become a part of life, Australia’s deputy chief medical officer warned.

    On Friday, India’s most populous state, Uttar Pradesh, imposed new restrictions for the weekend, leaving only essential services operating.

    The South Asian nation has so far tested over 11.3 million samples for coronavirus, according to the Indian Council of Medical Research.

    Japan recorded 430 new cases, first time the country has registered more than 400 in a day since April 24, when the countywide emergency order was still in effect. Tokyo contirbted 243 of those, its highest daily jump in new cases yet. Japanese TV station NHK also reported that US military facilities in Okinawa have found at least 50 cases.

    Finally, in Australia, the state of Victoria, home to Melbourne, recorded 216 new coronavirus cases, Premier Daniel Andrews announced Saturday. Of these 186 remain under investigation, while the other 30 have been linked to known outbreaks. The number was down from the 288 cases reported Thursday, the most in a single day in any Australian state. So far, a total of  21,841 cases have been confirmed, along with 995 deaths.

    As the country struggles with this still-relatively-mild resurgence, Australia’s deputy chief medical officer issued a stark warning on Saturday. As several vaccine trials get under way in the country (Moderna is testing its vaccine candidate in the country) he warned that a vaccine may be two years away, if one is ever found.

    It’s still possible that low levels of SARS-CoV-2 infection might become “a part of life.”

  • Shocking Video Shows Deranged Man Stabbing Multiple People On NYC Subway
    Shocking Video Shows Deranged Man Stabbing Multiple People On NYC Subway

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 07/11/2020 – 16:20

    We have a feeling you won’t see this on the evening news.

    In another bloody incident of violent crime caught on tape, an assailant armed with a knife slashes at least two terrified men on a subway car in NYC. The incident was filmed by one very steady-handed bystander.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Since the riots that swept NYC and other cities during the George Floyd protests, crime in New York has come soaring back to levels not seen in decades as Mayor de Blasio has taken hundreds of undercover officers off the streets and moved to lay off thousands of NYPD employees as part of a massive budget cut to the country’s biggest policing force.

    This isn’t the only stabbing incident we’ve seen lately. In Houston, a group of bystanders were recently filmed helping police subdue an unhinged attacker at a gas station on Fuqua Street in southeast Houston.

    At first, it seems the man filming had the audacity to tell the officers who were arresting the attacker “don’t put your hands on his neck now”.

    In response, the officer calmly explained his technique, clearly showing how he had his hand on the suspect’s back, before inviting the person filming and other bystanders to help hold the man down while he was being handcuffed.

    Field’s video has hundreds of thousands of views. On Thursday, musician Timbaland shared it on his Instagram page with the comment, “they got it right this time‼️”

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 11th July 2020

  • "I Could Live With That": How The CIA Made Afghanistan Safe For The Opium Trade
    “I Could Live With That”: How The CIA Made Afghanistan Safe For The Opium Trade

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 23:45

    Authored by Jeffrey St.Clair via Counterpunch.org,

    “I decided I could live with that.”

    – Stansfield Turner, Jimmy Carter’s CIA director, on the extreme level of civilian casualties in the CIA’s covert war in Afghanistan.

    The first indelible image of the war in Afghanistan for many Americans was probably that of CBS anchorman Dan Rather, wrapped in the voluminous drapery of a mujahedin fighter, looking like a healthy relative of Lawrence of Arabia (albeit with hair that seemed freshly blow-dried, as some viewers were quick to point out). From his secret mountainside “somewhere in the Hindu Kush,” Rather unloaded on his audience a barrowload of nonsense about the conflict. The Soviets, Rather confided portentously, had put a bounty on his head “of many thousands of dollars.” He went on, “It was the best compliment they could have given me. And having a price put on my head was a small price to pay for the truths we told about Afghanistan.”

    Every one of these observations turned out to be entirely false. Rather described the government of Hafizullah Amin as a “Moscow-installed puppet regime in Kabul.” But Amin had closer ties to the CIA than he did to the KGB. Rather called the mujahedin the “Afghan freedom fighters … who were engaged in a deeply patriotic fight to the death for home and hearth.” The mujahedin were scarcely fighting for freedom, in any sense Rather would have been comfortable with, but instead to impose one of the most repressive brands of Islamic fundamentalism known to the world, barbarous, ignorant and notably cruel to women.

    It was a “fact,” Rather announced, that the Soviets had used chemical weapons against Afghan villagers. This was a claim promoted by the Reagan administration, which charged that the extraordinarily precise number of 3,042 Afghans had been killed by this yellow chemical rain, a substance that had won glorious propaganda victories in its manifestation in Laos a few years earlier, when the yellow rain turned out to be bee feces heavily loaded with pollen. As Frank Brodhead put it in the London Guardian, “Its composition: one part bee feces, plus many parts State Department disinformation mixed with media gullibility.”

    Rather claimed that the mujahedin were severely underequipped, doing their best with Kalashnikov rifles taken from dead Soviet soldiers. In fact the mujahedin were extremely well-equipped, being the recipients of CIA-furnished weapons in the most ” “expensive covert war the Agency had ever mounted. They did carry Soviet weapons, but they came courtesy of the CIA. Rather also showed news footage that he claimed was of Soviet bombers strafing defenseless Afghan villages. This footage was staged, with the “Soviet bomber” actually a Pakistani air force plane on a training mission over northwest Pakistan.

    CBS claimed to have discovered in Soviet-bombed areas stuffed animals filled with Soviet explosives, designed to blow Afghan children to bits. These booby-trapped toys had in fact been manufactured by the mujahedin for the exclusive purpose of gulling CBS News, as an entertaining article in the New York Post later made clear.

    Rather made his heroically filmed way to Yunas Khalis, described as the leader of the Afghan warriors. In tones of awe he normally reserves for hurricanes in the Gulf of Mexico, Rather recalls in his book, The Camera Never Blinks Twice, “Belief in ‘right’ makes ‘might’ may have been fading in other parts of the world. In Afghanistan it was alive and well, and beating the Soviets.” Khalis was a ruthless butcher, with his troops fondly boasting of their slaughter of 700 prisoners of war. He spent most[…] makes ‘might’ may have been fading in other parts of the world. In Afghanistan it was alive and well, and beating the Soviets.” Khalis was a ruthless butcher, with his troops fondly boasting of their slaughter of 700 prisoners of war. He spent most of his time fighting, but the wars were not primarily with the Soviets. Instead, Khalis battled other Afghan rebel groups, the object of the conflicts being control of poppy fields and the roads and trails from them to his seven heroin labs near his headquarters in the town of Ribat al Ali. Sixty percent of Afghanistan’s opium crop was cultivated in the Helmand Valley, with an irrigation infrastructure underwritten by USAID.

    In his dispatches from the front Rather did mention the local opium trade, but in a remarkably disingenuous fashion. “Afghans,” he said, “had turned Darra into a boom town, selling their home-grown opium for the best available weapons, then going back into Afghanistan to fight.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now Darra is a town in northwest Pakistan where the CIA had set up a factory to manufacture Soviet-style weapons that it was giving away to all Afghan comers. The weapons factory was run under contract to Pakistani Inter-Service Intelligence (ISI). Much of the opium trucked into Darra from Afghanistan by the mujahedin was sold to the Pakistani governor of the northwest territory, Lieutenant General Fazle Huq. From this opium the heroin was refined in labs in Darra, placed on Pakistani army trucks and transported to Karachi, then shipped to Europe and the United States.

    Rather belittled the Carter administration’s reaction to the Soviet-backed coup in 1979, charging that Carter’s response had been tepid and slow in coming. In fact, President Carter had reacted with a range of moves that should have been the envy of the Reagan hawks who, a couple of years later, were belaboring him for being a Cold War wimp. Not only did Carter withdraw the United States from the 1980 Olympics, he slashed grain sales to the Soviet Union, to the great distress of Midwestern farmers; put the SALT II treaty hold; pledged to increase the US defense budget by 5 percent a year until the Soviets pulled out of Afghanistan; and unveiled the Carter doctrine of containment in southern Asia, which CIA historian John Ranelagh says led Carter to approve “more secret CIA operations than Reagan later did.”

    Carter later confessed in his memoirs that he was more shaken by the invasion of Afghanistan than any other event of his presidency, including the Iranian revolution. Carter was convinced by the CIA that it could be the start of a push by the Soviets toward the Persian Gulf, a scenario that led the president to seriously consider the use of tactical nuclear weapons.

    Three weeks after Soviet tanks rolled into Kabul, Carter’s secretary of defense, Harold Brown, was in Beijing, arranging for a weapons transfer from the Chinese to the CIA-backed Afghani troops mustered in Pakistan. The Chinese, who were generously compensated for the deal, agreed and even consented to send military advisers. Brown worked out a similar arrangement with Egypt to buy $15 million worth of weapons. “The US contacted me,” Anwar Sadat recalled shortly before his assassination. “They told me, ‘Please open your stores for us so that we can give the Afghans the armaments they need to fight.’ And I gave them the armaments. The transport of arms to the Afghans started from Cairo on US planes.”

    But few in the Carter administration believed the rebels had any chance of toppling the Soviets. Under most scenarios, the war seemed destined to be a slaughter, with civilians and the rebels paying a heavy price. The objective of the Carter doctrine was more cynical. It was to bleed the Soviets, hoping to entrap them in a Vietnam-style quagmire. The high level of civilian casualties didn’t faze the architects of covert American intervention. “I decided I could live with that,” recalled Carter’s CIA director Stansfield Turner.

    Prior to the Soviet invasion, Afghanistan barely registered as a topic of interest for the national press, surfacing in only a handful of annual newspaper stories. In December 1973, when détente was near its zenith, the Wall Street Journal ran a rare front-page story on the country, titled “Do the Russians Covet Afghanistan? If so, It’s Hard to Figure Why.” Reporter Peter Kann, later to become the Journal’s chairman and publisher, wrote that “great power strategists tend to think of Afghanistan as a kind of fulcrum upon which the world balance of power tips. But from close up, Afghanistan tends to look less like a fulcrum or a domino or a steppingstone than like a vast expanse of desert waste with a few fly-ridden bazaars, a fair number of feuding tribes and a lot of miserably poor people.”

    After the Soviet Union invaded, this wasteland swiftly acquired the status of a precious geopolitical prize. A Journal editorial following the Soviet takeover said Afghanistan was “more serious than a mere stepping-stone” and, in response, called for stationing of US troops in the Middle East, increased military outlays, expanded covert operations and reinstatement of draft registration. Drew Middleton, then a New York Times Defense Department correspondent, filed a tremulous post-invasion analysis in January 1980: “The conventional wisdom in the Pentagon,” he wrote, “is that in purely military terms, the Russians are in a far better position vis-à-vis the United States than Hitler was against Britain and France in 1939.”

    The Pentagon and CIA agitprop machine went into high gear: on January 3, 1980, George Wilson of the Washington Post reported that military leaders hoped the invasion would “help cure the Vietnam “never again’ hangover of the American public.” Newsweek said the “Soviet thrust” represented “a severe threat” to US interests: “Control of Afghanistan would put the Russians within 350 miles of the Arabian Sea, the oil lifeline of the West and Japan. Soviet warplanes based in Afghanistan could cut the lifeline at will.” The New York Times endorsed Carter’s call for increased military spending and supported the Cruise and Trident missile programs, “faster research on the MX or some other mobile land missile,” and the creation of a rapid deployment force for Third World intervention, calling the latter an “investment in diplomacy.”

    In sum, Afghanistan proved to be a glorious campaign for both the CIA and Defense Department, a dazzling offensive in which waves of credulous and compliant journalists were dispatched to promulgate the ludicrous proposition that the United States was under military threat. By the time Reagan assumed office, he and his CIA director William Casey saw support for their own stepped-up Afghan plan from an unlikely source, the Democrat-controlled Congress, which was pushing to double spending on the war. “It was a windfall [for the Reagan administration],” a congressional staffer told the Washington Post. “They’d faced so much opposition to covert action in Central America and here comes the Congress helping and throwing money at them, putting money their way and they say, ‘Who are we to say no?’ ”

    As the CIA increased its backing of the mujahedin (the CIA budget for Afghanistan finally reached $3.2 billion, the most expensive secret operation in its history) a White House member of the president’s Strategic Council on Drug Abuse, David Musto, informed the administration that the decision to arm the mujahedin would misfire: “I told the Council that we were going into Afghanistan to support the opium growers in their rebellion against the Soviets. Shouldn’t we try to avoid what we’d done in Laos? Shouldn’t we try to pay the growers if they will eradicate their opium production? There was silence.”

    After issuing this warning, Musto and a colleague on the council, Joyce Lowinson, continued to question US policy, but found their queries blocked by the CIA and the State Department. Frustrated, they then turned to the New York Times op-ed page and wrote, on May 22, 1980:

    “We worry about the growing of opium in Afghanistan or Pakistan by rebel tribesmen who apparently are the chief adversaries of the Soviet troops in Afghanistan. Are we erring in befriending these tribes as we did in Laos when Air America (chartered by the Central Intelligence Agency) helped transport crude opium from certain tribal areas?”

    But Musto and Lowinson met with silence once again, not only from the administration but from the press. It was heresy to question covert intervention in Afghanistan.

    Later in 1980, Hoag Levins, a writer for Philadelphia Magazine, interviewed a man he identified as a “high level” law enforcement official in the Carter administration’s Justice Department and quoted him thus:

    You have the administration tiptoeing around this like it’s a land mine. The issue of opium and heroin in Afghanistan is explosive … In the State of the Union speech, the president mentioned drug abuse but he was very careful to avoid mentioning Afghanistan, even though Afghanistan is where things are really happening right now … Why aren’t we taking a more critical look at the arms we are now shipping into gangs of drug runners who are obviously going to use them to increase the efficiency of their drug-smuggling operation?”

    The DEA was well aware that the mujahedin rebels were deeply involved in the opium trade. The drug agency’s reports in 1980 showed that Afghan rebel incursions from their Pakistan bases into Soviet-held positions were “determined in part by opium planting and harvest seasons.” The numbers were stark and forbidding. Afghan opium production tripled between 1979 and 1982. There was evidence that by 1981 the Afghan heroin producers had captured 60 percent of the heroin market in Western Europe and the United States (these are UN and DEA figures).

    In 1971, during the height of the CIA’s involvement in Laos, there were about 500,000 heroin addicts in the United States. By the mid- to late 1970s this total had fallen to 200,000. But in 1981 with the new flood of Afghan heroin and consequent low prices, the heroin addict population rose to 450,000. In New York City in 1979 alone (the year that the flow of arms to the mujahedin began), heroin-related drug deaths increased by 77 percent. The only publicly acknowledged US casualties on the Afghan battlefields were some Black Muslims who journeyed to the Hindu Kush from the United States to fight on the Prophet’s behalf. But the drug casualties inside the US from the secret CIA war, particularly in the inner cities, numbered in the thousands, plus untold social blight and suffering.

    Since the seventeenth century opium poppies have been grown in the so-called Golden Crescent, where the highlands of Afghanistan, Pakistan and Iran all converge. For nearly four centuries this was an internal market. By the 1950s very little opium was produced in either Afghanistan or Pakistan, with perhaps 2,500 acres in these two countries under cultivation. The fertile growing fields of Afghanistan’s Helmand Valley, by the 1980s under intensive opium poppy cultivation, were covered with vineyards, wheat fields and cotton plantations.

    In Iran, the situation was markedly different in the early 1950s. The country, dominated by British and US oil companies and intelligence agencies, was producing 600 tons of opium a year and had 1.3 million opium addicts, second only to China where, at the same moment, the western opium imperialists still held sway. Then, in 1953, Mohammed Mossadegh, Iran’s nationalist equivalent of China’s Sun Yat-sen, won elections and immediately moved to suppress the opium trade. Within a few weeks, US Secretary of State John Foster Dulles was calling Mossadegh a madman, and Dulles’s brother Allen, head of the CIA, dispatched Kermit Roosevelt to organize a coup against him. In August 1953 Mossadegh was overthrown, the Shah was installed by the CIA, and the oil and opium fields of Iran were once again in friendly hands. Production continued unabated until the assumption of power in 1979 of the Ayatollah Khomeini, at which point Iran had a very serious opium problem in terms of the addiction of its own population. Unlike the mujahedin chieftains, the Ayatollah was a strict constructionist of Islamic law on the matter of intoxicants: addicts and dealers faced the death penalty. Opium production in Iran dropped drastically.

    In Afghanistan in the 1950s and 1960s, the relatively sparse opium trade was controlled by the royal family, headed by King Mohammed Zahir, The large feudal estates all had their opium fields, primarily to feed domestic consumption of the drug. In April 1978 a populist coup overthrew the regime of Mohammed Daoud, who had formed an alliance with the Shah of Iran. The Shah had shoveled money in Daoud’s direction – $2 billion on one report – and the Iranian secret police, the Savak, were imported to train Daoud’s internal security force. The new Afghan government was led by Noor Mohammed Taraki. The Taraki administration moved toward land reform, hence an attack on the opium-growing feudal estates. Taraki went to the UN, where he requested and received loans for crop substitution for the poppy fields.

    Taraki also pressed hard against opium production in the border areas held by fundamentalists, since the latter were using opium revenues to finance attacks on the Afghan central government, which they regarded as an unwholesome incarnation of modernity that allowed women to go to school and outlawed arranged marriages and the bride price.

    By the spring of 1979 the character of Dan Rather’s heroes, the mujahedin, was also beginning to emerge. The Washington Post reported that the mujahedin liked to “torture their victims by first cutting off their noses, ears and genitals, then removing one slice of skin after another.” Over that year the mujahedin evinced particular animosity toward westerners, killing six West Germans and a Canadian tourist and severely beating a US military attaché. It’s also ironic that in that year the mujahedin were getting money not only from the CIA but from Libya’s Moammar Qaddaffi, who sent $250,000 in their direction.

    In the summer of 1979, over six months before the Soviets moved in, the US State Department produced a memorandum making clear how it saw the stakes, no matter how modern-minded Taraki might be, or how feudal the mujahedin: “The United States’ larger interest … would be served by the demise of the Taraki-Amin regime, despite whatever setbacks this might mean for future social and economic reforms in Afghanistan.” The report continued, “The overthrow of the DRA [Democratic Republic of Afghanistan] would show the rest of the world, particularly the Third World, that the Soviets’ view of the socialist course of history as being inevitable is not accurate.”

    Hard pressed by conservative forces in Afghanistan, Taraki appealed to the Soviets for help, which they declined to furnish on the grounds that this was exactly what their mutual enemies were waiting for.

    In September 1979 Taraki was killed in a coup organized by Afghan military officers. Hafizullah Amin was installed as president. He had impeccable western credentials, having been to Columbia University in New York and the University of Wisconsin. Amin had served as the president of the Afghan Students Association, which had been funded by the Asia Foundation, a CIA pass-through group, or front. After the coup Amin began meeting regularly with US Embassy officials at a time when the US was arming Islamic rebels in Pakistan. Fearing a fundamentalist, US-backed regime pressing against its own border, the Soviet Union invaded Afghanistan in force on December 27, 1979.

    Then began the Carter-initiated CIA buildup that so worried White House drug expert David Musto. In a replication of what happened following the CIA-backed coup in Iran, the feudal estates were soon back in opium production and the crop-substitution program ended.

    Because Pakistan had a nuclear program, the US had a foreign aid ban on the country. This was soon lifted it as the waging of a proxy war in Afghanistan became prime policy. In fairly short order, without any discernible slowdown in its nuclear program, Pakistan became the third largest recipient of US aid worldwide, right behind Israel and Egypt. Arms poured into Karachi from the US and were shipped up to Peshawar by the National Logistics Cell, a military unit controlled by Pakistan’s secret police, the ISI. From Peshawar those guns that weren’t simply sold to any and all customers (the Iranians got 16 Stinger missiles, one of which was used against a US helicopter in the Gulf) were divvied out by the ISI to the Afghan factions.

    Though the US press, Dan Rather to the fore, portrayed the mujahedin as a unified force of freedom fighters, the fact (unsurprising to anyone with an inkling of Afghan history) was that the mujahedin consisted of at least seven warring factions, all battling for territory and control of the opium trade. The ISI gave the bulk of the arms – at one count 60 percent – to a particularly fanatical fundamentalist and woman-hater Gulbuddin Hekmatyar, who made his public debut at the University of Kabul by killing a leftist student. In 1972 Hekmatyar fled to Pakistan, where he became an agent of the ISI. He urged his followers to throw acid in the faces of women not wearing the veil, kidnapped rival leaders, and built up his CIA-furnished arsenal against the day the Soviets would leave and the war for the mastery of Afghanistan would truly break out.

    Using his weapons to get control of the opium fields, Hekmatyar and his men would urge the peasants, at gun point, to increase production. They would collect the raw opium and bring it back to Hekmatyar’s six heroin factories in the town of Koh-i-Soltan

    One of Hekmatyar’s chief rivals in the mujahedin, Mullah Nassim, controlled the opium poppy fields in the Helmand Valley, producing 260 tons of opium a year. His brother, Mohammed Rasul, defended this agricultural enterprise by stating, “We must grow and sell opium to fight our holy war against the Russian nonbelievers.” Despite this well-calculated pronouncement, they spent almost all their time fighting their fellow-believers, using the weapons sent them by the CIA to try to win the advantage in these internecine struggles. In 1989 Hekmatyar launched an assault against Nassim, attempting to take control of the Helmand Valley. Nassim fought him off, but a few months later Hekmatyar successfully engineered Nassim’s assassination when he was holding the post of deputy defense minister in the provisional post-Soviet Afghan government. Hekmatyar now controlled opium growing in the Helmand Valley.

    American DEA agents were fully apprised of the drug running of the mujahedin in concert with Pakistani intelligence and military leaders. In 1983 the DEA’s congressional liaison, David Melocik, told a congressional committee, “You can say the rebels make their money off the sale of opium. There’s no doubt about it. These rebels keep their cause going through the sale of opium.” But talk about “the cause” depending on drug sales was nonsense at that particular moment. The CIA was paying for everything regardless. The opium revenues were ending up in offshore accounts in the Habib Bank, one of Pakistan’s largest, and in the accounts of BCCI, founded by Agha Hasan Abedi, who began his banking career at Habib. The CIA was simultaneously using BCCI for its own secret transactions.

    The DEA had evidence of over forty heroin syndicates operating in Pakistan in the mid-1980s during the Afghan war, and there was evidence of more than 200 heroin labs operating in northwest Pakistan. Even though Islamabad houses one of the largest DEA offices in Asia, no action was ever taken by the DEA agents against any of these operations. An Interpol officer told the journalist Lawrence Lifschultz,

    It is very strange that the Americans, with the size of their resources, and political power they possess in Pakistan, have failed to break a single case. The explanation cannot be found in a lack of adequate police work. They have had some excellent men working in Pakistan.”

    But working in the same offices as those DEA agents were five CIA officers who, so one of the DEA agents later told the Washington Post, ordered them to pull back their operations in Afghanistan and Pakistan for the duration of the war.

    Those DEA agents were well aware of the drug-tainted profile of a firm the CIA was using to funnel cash to the mujahedin, namely Shakarchi Trading Company. This Lebanese-owned company had been the subject of a long-running DEA investigation into money laundering. One of Shakarchi’s chief clients was Yasir Musullulu, who had once been nabbed attempting to deliver an 8.5-ton shipment of Afghan opium to members of the Gambino crime syndicate in New York City. A DEA memo noted that Shakarchi mingled “the currency of heroin, morphine base, and hashish traffickers with that of jewelers buying gold on the black market and Middle Eastern arms traffickers.”

    In May 1984 Vice President George Bush journeyed to Pakistan to confer with General Zia al Huq and other ranking members of the Pakistani regime. At the time, Bush was the head of President Reagan’s National Narcotics Border Interdiction System. In this latter function, one of Bush’s first moves was to expand the role of the CIA in drug operations. He gave the Agency primary responsibility in the use of, and control over, drug informants. The operational head of this task force was retired Admiral Daniel J. Murphy.

    Murphy pushed for access to intelligence on drug syndicates but complained that the CIA was forever dragging its feet. “I didn’t win,” he said later to the New York Times. “I didn’t get as much effective participation from the CIA as I wanted.” Another member of the task force put it more bluntly, “The CIA could be of value, but you need a change of values and attitude. I don’t know of a single thing they’ve ever given us that was useful.”

    Bush certainly knew well that Pakistan had become the source for most of the high-grade heroin entering Western Europe and the United States and that the generals with whom he was consorting were deeply involved in the drug trade. But the vice president, who proclaimed later that “I will never bargain with drug dealers on US or foreign soil,” used his journey to Pakistan to praise the Zia regime for its unflinching support for the War on Drugs. (Amid such rhetorical excursions he did find time, it has to be said, to extract from Zia a contract to buy $40 million worth of gas turbines made by the General Electric Co.)

    Predictably, through the 1980s the Reagan and Bush administrations went to great lengths to pin the blame for the upswing in Pakistani heroin production on the Soviet generals in Kabul. “The regime maintains an absolute indifference to any measures to control poppy,” Reagan’s attorney general Edwin Meese declared during a visit to Islamabad in March 1986. “We strongly believe that there is actually encouragement, at least tacitly, over growing opium poppy.”

    Meese knew better. His own Justice Department had been tracking the import of drugs from Pakistan since at least 1982 and was well aware that the trade was controlled by Afghan rebels and the Pakistani military. A few months after Meese’s speech in Pakistan, the US Customs Office nabbed a Pakistani man named Abdul Wali as he tried to unload more than a ton of hash and a smaller amount of heroin into the United States at Port Newark, New Jersey. The Justice Department informed the press that Wali headed a 50,000-member organization in northwest Pakistan – but Deputy Attorney General Claudia Flynn refused to reveal the group’s identity. Another federal official told the Associated Press that Wali was a top leader of the mujahedin.

    It was also known to US officials that people on intimate terms with President Zia were making fortunes in the opium trade. The word “fortune” here is no exaggeration, since one such Zia associate had $3 billion in his BCCI accounts. In 1983, a year before George Bush’s visit to Pakistan, one of President Zia’s doctors, a Japanese herbalist named Hisayoshi Maruyama was arrested in Amsterdam packing 17.5 kilos of high-grade heroin manufactured in Pakistan out of Afghan opium. At the time of his arrest he was disguised as a boy scout.

    Interrogated by DEA agents after his arrest, Maruyama said that he was just a courier for Mirza Iqbal Baig, a man whom Pakistani customs agents described as “the most active dope dealer in the country.” Baig was on close terms with the Zia family and other ranking officials in the government. He had twice been a target of the DEA, whose agents were told not to pursue investigations of him because of his ties to the Zia government. A top Pakistani lawyer, Said Sani Ahmed, told the BBC that this was standard procedure in Pakistan: “We may have evidence against a particular individual, but still our law-enforcing agencies cannot lay hands on such people, because they are forbidden to act by their superiors. The real culprits have enough money and resources. Frankly, they are enjoying some sort of immunity.”

    Baig was one of the tycoons of the Pakistani city of Lahore, owning cinemas, shopping centers, factories and a textile mill. He wasn’t indicted on drug charges until 1992, after the fall of the Zia regime, when a US federal court in Brooklyn indicted him for heroin trafficking. The US finally exerted enough pressure on Pakistan to have him arrested in 1993; as of the spring of 1998 he was in prison in Pakistan.

    One of Baig’s partners (as described in Newsweek) in his drug business was Haji Ayub Afridi, a close ally of President Zia, who had served in the Pakistani General Assembly. Afridi lives thirty-five miles outside Peshawar in a large compound sealed off by 20-foot-high walls topped with concertina-wire and with defenses including an anti-aircraft battery and a private army of tribesmen. Afridi was said to be in charge of purchasing raw opium from the Afghan drug lords, while Baig looked after logistics and shipping to Europe and the United States. In 1993 Afridi was alleged to have put out a contract on the life of a DEA agent working in Pakistan.

    Another case close to the Zia government involved the arrest on drug charges of Hamid Hasnain, the vice president of Pakistan’s largest financial house, the Habib Bank. Hasnain’s arrest became the centerpiece of a scandal known as the “Pakistani League affair.” The drug ring was investigated by a dogged Norwegian investigator named Olyvind Olsen. On December 13, 1983 Norwegian police seized 3.5 kilos of heroin at Oslo airport in the luggage of a Pakistani named Raza Qureishi. In exchange for a reduced sentence Qureishi agreed to name his suppliers to Olsen, the narcotics investigator. Shortly after his interview with Qureishi, Olsen flew to Islamabad to ferret out the other members of the heroin syndicate. For more than a year Olsen pressured Pakistan’s Federal Investigate Agency (FIA) to arrest the three men Qureishi had fingered: Tahir Butt, Munawaar Hussain, and Hasnain. All were associates of Baig and Zia. It wasn’t until Olsen threatened to publicly condemn the FIA’s conduct that the Agency took any action: finally, on October 25, 1985 the FIA arrested the three men. When the Pakistani agents picked up Hasnain they were assailed with a barrage of threats. Hasnain spoke of “dire consequences” and claimed to be “like a son” to President Zia. Inside Hasnain’s suitcase FIA agents discovered records of the ample bank accounts of President Zia plus those of Zia’s wife and daughter.

    Immediately after learning of Hasnain’s arrest, Zia’s wife, who was in Egypt at the time, telephoned the head of the FIA. The president’s wife imperiously demanded the release of her family’s “personal banker.” It turned out that Hasnain not only attended to the secret financial affairs of the presidential family, but also of the senior Pakistani generals, who were skimming money off the arms imports from the CIA and making millions from the opium traffic. A few days after his wife’s call, President Zia himself was on the phone to the FIA, demanding that the investigators explain the circumstances surrounding Hasnain’s arrest. Zia soon arranged for Hasnain to be released on bail pending trial. When Qureishi, the courier, took the stand to testify against Hasnain, the banker and his co-defendant hurled death threats against the witness in open court, prompting a protest from the Norwegian investigator, who threatened to withdraw from the proceedings.

    Eventually the judge in the case clamped down, revoking Hasnain’s bail and handing him a stiff prison term after his conviction. But Hasnain was just a relatively small fish who went to prison while guilty generals went free.

    “He’s been made a scapegoat,” Munir Bhatti told journalist Lawrence Lifschultz.

    “The CIA spoiled the case. The evidence was distorted. There was no justification in letting off the actual culprits who include senior personalities in this country. There was evidence in this case identifying such people.”

    Such were the men to whom the CIA was paying $3.2 billion a year to run the Afghan war, and no person better epitomizes this relationship than Lieutenant General Fazle Huq, who oversaw military operations in northwest Pakistan for General Zia, including the arming of the mujahedin who were using the region as a staging area for their raids. It was Huq who ensured that his ally Hekmatyar received the bulk of the CIA arms shipments, and it was also Huq who oversaw and protected the operations of the 200 heroin labs within his jurisdiction. Huq had been identified in 1982 by Interpol as a key player in the Afghan-Pakistani opium trade. The Pakistani opposition leaders referred to Huq as Pakistani’s Noriega. He had been protected from drug investigations by Zia and the CIA and later boasted that with these connections he could get away “with blue murder.”

    Like other narco-generals in the Zia regime, Huq was also on close terms with Agha Hassan Abedi, the head of the BCCI. Abedi, Huq and Zia would dine together nearly every month, and conferred several times with Reagan’s CIA director William Casey. Huq had a BCCI account worth $3 million. After Zia was assassinated in 1988 by a bomb planted (probably by senior military officers) in his presidential plane, Huq lost some of his official protection, and he was soon arrested for ordering the murder of a Shi’ite cleric.

    After Prime Minister Benazir Bhutto was deposed, her replacement Ishaq Khan swiftly released Huq from prison. In 1991 Huq was shot to death, probably in revenge for the cleric’s death. The opium general was given a state funeral, where he was eulogized by Ishaq Khan as “a great soldier and competent administrator who played a commendable role in Pakistan’s national progress.”

    Benazir Bhutto had swept to power in 1988 amid fierce vows to clean up Pakistan’s drug-sodden corruption, but it wasn’t long “before her own regime became the focus of serious charges. In 1989 the US Drug Enforcement Agency came across information that Benazir’s husband, Asif Ali Zardari, may have been financing large shipments of heroin from Pakistan to Great Britain and the United States. The DEA assigned one of its agents, a man named John Banks, to work undercover in Pakistan. Banks was a former British mercenary who had worked undercover for Scotland Yard in big international drug cases.

    While in Pakistan, Banks claims he posed as a member of the Mafia and that he had met with Bhutto and her husband at their home in Sind. Banks further claims that he traveled with Zadari to Islamabad, where he secretly recorded five hours of conversation between Zadari, a Pakistani air force general and a Pakistani banker. The men discussed the logistics of transporting heroin to the US and to Britain: “We talked about how they were going to ship the drugs to America in a metal cutter,” Banks said in 1996. “They told me that the United Kingdom was another area where they had shipped heroin and hashish on a regular basis.” The British Customs Office had also been monitoring Zadari for dope running: “We received intelligence from about three or four sources, about his alleged involvement as a financier,” a retired British customs officer told the Financial Times. “This was all reported to British intelligence.” The customs official says his government failed to act on this report. Similarly, Banks asserts that the CIA halted the DEA’s investigation of Zardari. All this emerged when Bhutto’s government fell for the second time, in 1996, on charges of corruption lodged primarily against Zardari, who is now in prison for his role in the murder of his brother-in-law Murtaza. Zardari also stands accused of embezzling more than $1 billion in government funds.”

    In 1991 Nawz Sharif says that while he served as prime minister he was approached by two Pakistani generals – Aslam Beg, chief of staff for the army, and Asad Durrani, head of the ISI – with a plan to fund dozens of covert operations through the sale of heroin. “General Durrani told me, ‘We have a blueprint ready for your approval,’ Sharif explained to Washington Post reporter John Ward Anderson in 1994. “I was totally flabbergasted. Both Beg and Durrani insisted that Pakistan’s name would not be cited at any place because the whole operation would be carried out by trustworthy third parties. Durrani then went on to list a series of covert military operations in desperate need of money.” Sharif said that he rejected the plan, but believes it was put in place when Bhutto resumed power.

    The impact of the Afghan war on Pakistan’s addiction rates was even more drastic than the surge in heroin addiction in the US and Europe. Before the CIA program began, there were fewer than 5,000 heroin addicts in Pakistan. By 1996, according to the United Nations, there were more than 1.6 million. The Pakistani representative to the UN Commission on Narcotics, Raoolf Ali Khan, said in 1993 that “there is no branch of government where drug corruption doesn’t pervade.” As an example he pointed to the fact that Pakistan spends only $1.8 million a year on anti-drug efforts, with an allotment of $1,000 to purchase gasoline for its seven trucks.

    By 1994 the value of the heroin trade in Pakistan was twice the amount of the government’s budget. A Western diplomat told the Washington Post in that year that “when you get to the stage where narco-traffickers have more money than the government it’s going to take remarkable efforts and remarkable people to turn it around.” The magnitude of commitment required is illustrated by two episodes. In 1991 the largest drug bust in world history occurred on the road from Peshawar to Karachi. Pakistani customs officers seized 3.5 tons of heroin and 44 tons of hashish. Several days later half the hashish and heroin had vanished along with the witnesses. The suspects, four men with ties to Pakistani intelligence, had “mysteriously escaped,” to use the words of a Pakistani customs officer. In 1993 Pakistani border guards seized 8 tons of hashish and 1.7 tons of heroin. When the case was turned over to the Pakistani narcotics control board, the entire staff went on vacation to avoid being involved in the investigation. No one was disciplined or otherwise inconvenienced and the narco-traffickers got off scot free. Even the CIA was eventually forced to admit in a 1994 report to Congress that heroin had become the “life blood of the Pakistani economy and political system.”

    In February 1989 Mikhail Gorbachev pulled the Soviet troops out of Afghanistan, and asked the US to agree to an embargo on the provision of weapons to any of the Afghan mujahedin factions, who were preparing for another phase of internecine war for control of the country. President Bush refused, thus ensuring a period of continued misery and horror for most Afghans. The war had already turned half the population into refugees, and seen 3 million wounded and more than a million killed. The proclivities of the mujahedin at this point are illustrated by a couple of anecdotes. The Kabul correspondent of the Far Eastern Economic Review reported in 1989 the mujahedin’s treatment of Soviet prisoners: “One group was killed, skinned and hung up in a butcher’s shop. One captive found himself the center of attraction in a game of buzkashi, that rough-and-tumble form of Afghan polo in which a headless goat is usually the ball. The captive was used instead. Alive. He was literally torn to pieces.” The CIA also had evidence that its freedom fighters had doped up more than 200 Soviet soldiers with heroin and locked them in animal cages where, the Washington Post reported in 1990, they led “lives of indescribable horror.”

    In September 1996 the Taliban, fundamentalists nurtured originally in Pakistan as creatures of both the ISI and the CIA, seized power in Kabul, whereupon Mullah Omar, their leader, announced that all laws inconsistent with the Muslim Sharia would be changed. Women would be forced to assume the chador and remain at home, with total segregation of the sexes and women kept out of hospitals, schools and public bathrooms. The CIA continued to support these medieval fanatics who, according to Emma Bonino, the European Union’s commissioner for humanitarian affairs, were committing “gender genocide.”

    One law at odds with the Sharia that the Taliban had no apparent interest in changing was the prophet’s injunction against intoxicants. In fact, the Taliban urged its Afghan farmers to increase their production of opium.

    One of the Taliban leaders, the “drug czar” Abdul Rashid, noted, “If we try to stop this [opium farming] the people will be against us.”

    By the end 1996, according to the UN, Afghan opium production had reached 2,000 metric tons. There were an estimated 200,000 families in Afghanistan working in the opium trade. The Taliban were in control of the 96 percent of all Afghan land in opium cultivation and imposed a tax on opium production and a road toll on trucks carrying the crop.

    In 1997 an Afghan opium farmer gave an ironic reply to Jimmy Carter’s brooding on whether to use nuclear weapons as part of a response to the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan in 1979. Amhud Gul told a reporter from the Washington Post, “We are cultivating this [that is, opium] and exporting this as an atom bomb.”

    CIA intervention had worked its magic once again. By 1994, Afghanistan, according to the UN drug control program had surpassed Burma as the world’s number one supplier of raw opium.

    *  *  *

    Note: This story was more than two years in the making. I started reporting it in 1995 for the premier issue of a Portland-based magazine called Serpent’s Tooth: Reporting the Drug War, which was meant to be a cross between Ramparts and Paul Krassner’s The Realist, with plenty of sex ads to pay the bills. In fact, Krassner also wrote a scathingly funny piece for that issue, some ribald tale involving three of his favorite subjects: Bill Clinton, LSD and the virtues of masturbation. Alas, a few weeks before the magazine was ready to go to press, the trust-fund publisher pulled the plug on the entire venture after getting into a brawl with the editorial collective. In my experience, any time there’s an “editorial collective” in charge, the publication is destined for a ventilator, especially when cocaine is involved. So, after spending more than a year working on my big piece on the Afghan war and the opium trade, it was orphaned. Portions of the story later appeared in CounterPunch, the Anderson Valley Advertiser and the Twin Cities weekly, City Pages. And a version of it ended up as a chapter in our book Whiteout: the CIA, Drugs and the Press.

  • Lifestyles Of The Mega-Rich & Fearful: Inside The Luxury Apocalypse Bunker
    Lifestyles Of The Mega-Rich & Fearful: Inside The Luxury Apocalypse Bunker

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 23:25

    When it comes to doomsday bunkers – we might have found the ‘Cadillac’ of underground shelters for the superrich to ride out the virus pandemic and social-economic implosion of America. 

    It’s called the Survival Condo, buried 200 feet underground in the middle of rural Kansas, several hundred miles from Kansas City, is a newly outfitted Cold War nuclear silo that houses underground condos that can survive a 12-kiloton nuclear warhead. 

    Condos start at $1 million, plus an extra $2,500 per month condo fee to cover expenses in the bunker, such as food, ammo, electricity, and internet connectivity. 

    CNET spoke with Larry Hall, the owner of the Survival Condo, who said the bunker is 15 floors and buried 200 feet underground. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Beneath the dome, the cylindrical silo houses a further 14 floors — the top three floors are where you’ll find the mechanical rooms, medical facilities and a food store (complete with a full hydroponics and aquaculture setup), followed beneath by seven levels of residential condos. At the bottom, the final four floors house the classroom and library, a cinema and bar, and a workout room (with a sauna),” CNET said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     Survival Condo’s website lists the facilities top features:

    • Elevator & Stairwell Access throughout the facility.
    • Over 20,000 square foot of floor space in the monolithic dome.
    • Redundant electric sources.
    • Redundant water supply with minimum of 75,000 gallon reserve tanks.
    • Redundant air filtration including Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) filtration.
    • Organic hydroponic and aquaculture food production.
    • General Store.
    • Indoor Pool & Spa, and a complete workout facility.
    • Custom theater.
    • Custom Bar & Lounge.
    • Library & Classroom.
    • Command & Control Center.
    • Medical First Aid Center.
    • Communication Center complete with on-site Internet subset access.
    • Digital weather station.

    The facility has a maximum occupancy of 75 people that can survive for about five years. Here are some of the condo features:

    • Full-Floor layout is approximately 1,820 square feet of living space.
    • Half-Floor layout is approximately 900 square feet of living space.
    • Maximum occupancy for full & half floor layouts are 10 and 5 respectively.
    • Full kitchens with High-end stainless appliances.
    • Full Spectrum LED lighting throughout.
    • Kohler fixtures throughout.
    • 50-inch LED TV and home automation system with remote off-site access.
    • Biometric Keyless access.
    • Each unit is fully furnished and professionally decorated.
    • Each unit comes with a five-year food reserve per person.
    • Washer and dryer in each unit.

    There’s also a shooting range and pool to keep occupants trained for the apocalypse. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The smallest unit costs around $1 million, with the largest about $3 million. Condos are predominantly owned by wealthy elites: 

    “All of our people are self-made millionaires,” Hall said. “They’re very successful: doctors, engineers, lawyers, international business people… almost all of them have children. And they’re concerned about the ‘what if’ scenario.” 

    Video: Inside the doomsday bunker 

    Somewhere in rural Kansas – millionaires have a luxury bunker where they can ride out the socio-economic implosion of America. Can even withstand a nuclear blast if the president decides to go to war with China. After all, President Trump didn’t spend trillions of dollars on the military to look at shiny new hypersonic missiles and fifth-generation fighters at future parades in Washington, D.C. The rich are preparing for the end game – the world has already entered a period of chaos that could persist through the 2020s. 

  • Major Tax Increases Are About To Slam America As Cities & States Want You To Pay For COVID Fallout
    Major Tax Increases Are About To Slam America As Cities & States Want You To Pay For COVID Fallout

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 23:05

    Authored by Isaac Davis via Waking Times,

    Just prior to the global Coronavirus outbreak, serious signs of an emerging financial crisis began to emerge. As people were beginning to realize that yet another central bank engineered ‘bust’ was coming down on us, we were thrown into lockdown, shuttering millions of businesses and sending millions of people to the unemployment line.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, a few months later, we are starting to realize just how deep the economic fallout will be, and Americans are scrambling to adjust their lifestyles to a totally new world order. At the top of the food chain, though, is government. City, county, state and federal.

    In the midst of such a bizarre and frightful socioeconomic crisis, the tax man is hurting too. Tax revenues at all levels of government have plummeted like never before, and the pain is especially acute for city budgets who’ve seen sales tax revenue nosedive. While the American citizenry is seeing a drastic drop in income, so is Uncle Sam and all of his bureaucratic agencies.

    Take a look at some of the numbers.

    For states like Texas, Alaska and New Mexico which depend on oil revenue to balance their budgets, the financial hit will be a double whammy.

    Alaska is projecting an $815 million decline in revenues in the coming fiscal year, and New Mexico could see a $1.5 to $2 billion drop. [Source]

    While Americans clamor to figure out how to make ends meet in their own households, so too is government trying to figure out how to balance budgets, and the reality is that once these emergency accounting measures really begin to sink in, Americans aren’t going to like it one bit.

    The question for mayors and governors will be, ‘how much money can we extract from the people without causing extreme poverty and triggering widespread revolt?’

    The answer, of course, is taxes. Primarily property taxes, because that’s the one thing people are still paying while locked down at home and unable to shop.

    Take note:

    • Nashville Mayor John Cooper is openly proposing raising property taxes by 32% in order to correct an estimated $250 million budget shortfall.

    “There is no choice but to have a significant increase in property taxes,” he said. “Measured in a percent, it’s going to be on the order of more than 20 percent to be sure.” [Source]

    • Dallas, TX is looking at a proposed 8% increase in property taxes, and is having to work a loophole that allows them to ignore state law which would prevent them from raising taxes more than 3.5%. [Source]

    • Expecting a $700 million shortfall, Chicago’s Mayor Lightfoot has said that a property tax increase is ‘on the table.’ [Source]

    • California is considering a partial reversal of Proposition 13, which would allow government to assess commercial properties differently, creating an increase in property tax revenue without actually increasing the property tax rate. [Source]

    • Other initiatives include “Arizona, where taxes would be raised on incomes above $250,000 to boost teacher salaries; Colorado, which is targeting corporations for at least $151 million in taxes to fund out-of-school learning; and North Carolina, which would issue bonds worth $1.9 billion in part to pay for school capital improvements.” [Source]

    • New York is pitching the idea of tax increases for wealthier people. [Source]

    • New Jersey is expected to see an unknown increase in taxes as the governor moves to borrow billions of dollars to cover budget gaps. [Source]

    • CNBC reports that many states across the nation will be looking at tax increases in many areas, including corporate income taxes, online purchases, excise and sales taxes, property taxes, and gross receipts taxes. [Source]

    As we move forward in this deepening crisis, we shall see how all of this works out; but for to be sure, Mr. and Mrs. America, even though you didn’t create the fraud in the financial system, and even though you were forced to close down your business, you will now be used as tax cattle to pay for this giant fustercluck.

  • Kim's Sister Rules Out Further Talks With Trump, Vows Peace As Long As "U.S. Doesn't Touch Us"
    Kim’s Sister Rules Out Further Talks With Trump, Vows Peace As Long As “U.S. Doesn’t Touch Us”

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 22:45

    It appears the world will not witness any kind of breakthrough Trump-Kim meeting by the end of Trump’s first term in office, given that on Friday Kim Jong Un’s increasingly powerful sister, Kim Yo Jong, had some specific words on the matter.

    She said a new Trump-Kim summit is “unlikely” to happen this year but left a remote door open, suggesting “a surprise thing may still happen.”

    While this is hardly a surprise given stalled nuclear talks since the end of last year – hopes for any resumption which has since been completely dashed – what is new is her assertion that there will be peace as long as the US “don’t touch us and hurt us, everything will flow as is.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    North Korean leader Kim Jong Un and his sister Kim Yo Jong, via Reuters.

    The comments carried by KCNA news agency are a huge change in tune when compared to her coming close to threatening all-out war against the South a month ago.

    Pyongyang had ordered a military build-up along the DMZ ostensibly in response to South Korean activists floating ‘propaganda balloons’ across the border, urging citizens in the North to defect.

    Kim Yo Jong said Friday:

    “We would like to make it clear that it does not necessarily mean the denuclearisation is not possible,” and added: “But what we mean is that it is not possible at this point of time.”

    She emphasized that the US must change its stance and tone toward Pyongyang if Washington hopes for a future breakthrough.

    “We do not have the slightest intention to pose a threat to the U.S…. Everything will go smoothly if they leave us alone and make no provocation on us,” she said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The historic summit in Singapore on June 12, 2018, via AFP.

    Recent rising North-South tensions have been attributed by many analysts to Seoul’s failed to materialize assurances that Washington would ease sanctions as part of denuclearization talks. This has further appeared an opportunity for Kim’s increasingly visible and powerful sister to flex her authority over the military and next in line to rule. 

    In these newest comments she also interestingly mentioned watching footage of July 4th celebrations in America

    Bloomberg reports that she expressed curiosity over how the United States celebrates its Independence Day. Bloomberg describes that:

    …she received permission from her brother to obtain the DVDs of what she called the “celebratory events” of last week. “I’m trying to personally obtain DVDs on U.S. Independence Day events from now on, and I’ve also gotten approval from the chairman for that,” she said, adding that she’s already watched news reports of the celebrations.

    She also expressed good wishes to President Trump, but said the time isn’t right to meet. 

    Perhaps this somewhat odd aside regarding the DVDs is meant to spur another ‘letter writing type opening’ from Trump? Perhaps a “July 4th care package” might be in the works? 

  • "Defund The Police" Just Means "I'm Rich & White"
    “Defund The Police” Just Means “I’m Rich & White”

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 22:25

    Authored by Karol Markowicz via Spectator,

    Wealthy white liberals don’t suffer the consequences of their fringe ideologies…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Walk along the leafy streets of any neighborhood in so-called ‘brownstone Brooklyn’, Park Slope, Carroll Gardens, Brooklyn Heights, and you’ll see ‘Defund the Police’ in many a home window.

    Owners of $3 million dollar brownstones proudly proclaim their agreement with a fringe policy, designed to remove resources from police squads, as a solution to police violence. How exactly less funding for police will result in better policing is unclear, but virtue signaling of the kind that has rich people pushing for fewer resources for poor people doesn’t get tangled up in the details.

    The details are specifically grim.

    The New York Post reported on Monday that ‘between Monday, June 29, and Sunday, July 5, the city saw 74 shooting incidents with 101 victims’. Those numbers are more than tripled from the same period in 2019.

    But the city is largely not gripped in terror. The rise in homelessness and general lawlessness had been a frequent topic of conversation over the last year. The shootings are contained to only a few neighborhoods and the pain is not spread evenly among the residents of the city. And the left has to mostly ignore the crime rate lest their ‘Defund the Police’ pledge starts to look like cruelty.

    The issue, of course, is that these shootings are largely happening in majority-black neighborhoods around the five boroughs. Brownsville, Brooklyn has been hit particularly hard. Upper Manhattan. Harlem. Dozens shot, many dead. No shootings have taken place in Park Slope, Carroll Gardens, Brooklyn Heights. The position ‘Defund the Police’ can easily be shorthand for ‘I’m rich’.

    New York City Mayor Bill de Blasio blames the violence on coronavirus and pent up rage.

    He’s not wrong, exactly – our continued lockdown is exacerbating the situation – but he’s also ignoring the elephant in the room. The sustained attack on police leads to a force unable to do its job.

    People feel unsafe as a result, and that feeling leads to ever more violence. It’s a lesson New York City has learned before. It’s too bad it has to learn it all over again.

    If these shootings were happening in the neighborhoods with the ‘Defund the Police’ signs in their windows, they would quickly be replaced with ‘Triple the Police’, and everybody knows it.

    But as long as the violence is confined to mostly black areas, rich white liberals are happy to go along with leftist policy goals that don’t affect them. ‘Black Lives Matter’, their signs say. But not always.

  • Sonoma Hotel Employs Robot For Contactless Room Service 
    Sonoma Hotel Employs Robot For Contactless Room Service 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 22:05

    During the pandemic, readers may recall several of our pieces describing what life would be like in a post corona world.

    From restaurants to flying to gambling to hotels to gyms to interacting with people to even housing trends – we highlighted how social distancing would transform the economy. 

    As the transformation becomes more evident by the week, we want to focus on automation and artificial intelligence – and how these two things are allowing hotels, well at least one in California, to accommodate patrons with contactless room service.

    Hotel Trio in Healdsburg, California, is surrounded by wineries and restaurants in Healdsburg/Sonoma County region, recently hired a new worker named “Rosé the Robot” that delivers food, water, wine, beer, and other necessities, reported Sonoma Magazine.

    The four-foot plastic cylinder with wheels is an innovative robotic butler that offers patrons a contactless experience while staying in the hotel. The robot rolls up and down hallways, even use the elevator, while flashing digital messages to guests in – such as, “I’m on a guest delivery.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “As Rosé approaches a room with a delivery, she calls the phone to let the guest know she’s outside. A tablet-sized screen on Rosé’s head greets the guest as they open the door, and confirms the order. Next, she opens a lid on top of her head and reveals a storage compartment containing the ordered items. Rosé then communicates a handful of questions surrounding customer satisfaction via her screen. She bids farewell, turns around and as she heads back toward her docking station near the front desk, she emits chirps that sound like a mix between R2D2 and a little bird,” said Sonoma Magazine. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Henry Harteveldt, a travel industry analyst at Atmospheric Research Group in San Francisco, said robots would be integrated into the hotel experience. 

    “This is a part of travel that will see major growth in the years ahead,” Harteveldt said. 

    Rosé is manufactured by Savioke, a San Jose-based company that has dozens of robots in hotels nationwide. 

    The tradeoff of a contactless environment where automation and artificial intelligence replace humans to mitigate the spread of a virus is permanent job loss.   

  • Matt Taibbi: "It Was Like Watching Bruce Springsteen And Dionne Warwick Be Pelted With Dogshit For Singing We Are the World"
    Matt Taibbi: “It Was Like Watching Bruce Springsteen And Dionne Warwick Be Pelted With Dogshit For Singing We Are the World”

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 21:45

    Authored by Matt Taibbi

    As excerpted from “If it’s Not “Cancel Culture,” What Kind of Culture is it?

    Any attempt to build bridges between the two mindsets falls apart, often spectacularly, as we saw this week in an online fight over free speech that could not possibly have been more comic in its unraveling.

    A group of high-profile writers and thinkers, including Pinker, Noam Chomsky, Wynton Marsalis, Salman Rushdie, Gloria Steinem and Anne Appelbaum, signed a letter in Harper’s calling for an end to callouts and cancelations.

    “We refuse any false choice between justice and freedom,” the authors wrote, adding, “We need to preserve the possibility of good-faith disagreement without dire professional consequences.”

    This Hallmark-card-level inoffensive sentiment naturally inspired peals of outrage across the Internet, mainly directed at a handful of signatories deemed hypocrites for having called for the firings of various persons before.

    Then a few signatories withdrew their names when they found out that they would be sharing space on the letterhead with people they disliked.

    “I thought I was endorsing a well meaning, if vague, message against internet shaming. I did know Chomsky, Steinem, and Atwood were in, and I thought, good company,” tweeted Jennifer Finney Boylan, adding, “The consequences are mine to bear. I am so sorry.”

    Translation: I had no idea my group statement against intellectual monoculture would be signed by people with different views!

    In the predictable next development – no dialogue between American intellectuals is complete these days without someone complaining to the boss – Vox writer Emily VanDerWerff declared herself literally threatened by co-worker Matt Yglesias’s decision to sign the statement. The public as well as Vox editors were told:

    The letter, signed as it is by several prominent anti-trans voices and containing as many dog whistles towards anti-trans positions as it does, ideally would not have been signed by anybody at Vox… His signature on the letter makes me feel less safe.

    Naturally, this declaration impelled Vox co-founder Ezra Klein to take VanDerWerff’s side and publicly denounce the Harper’s letter as a status-defending con.

    “A lot of debates that sell themselves as being about free speech are actually about power,” tweeted Klein, clearly referencing his old pal Yglesias. “And there’s a lot of power in being able to claim, and hold, the mantle of free speech defender.” 

    This Marxian denunciation of the defense of free speech as cynical capitalist ruse was brought to you by the same Ezra Klein who once worked with Yglesias to help Vox raise $300 million. This was just one of many weirdly petty storylines. Writer Thomas Chatterton Williams, who organized the letter, found himself described as a “mixed race man heavily invested in respectability politics,” once he defended the letter, one of many transparent insults directed toward the letter’s nonwhite signatories by ostensible antiracist voices.

    The whole episode was nuts. It was like watching Bruce Springsteen and Dionne Warwick be pelted with dogshit for trying to sing We Are the World.

    This being America in the Trump era, where the only art form to enjoy wide acceptance is the verbose monograph written in condemnation of the obvious, the Harper’s fiasco inspired multiple entries in the vast literature decrying the rumored existence of “cancel culture.” The two most common themes of such essays are a) the illiberal left is a Trumpian myth, and b) if the illiberal left does exist, it’s a good thing because all of those people they’re smearing/getting fired deserved it.

    In this conception there’s nothing to worry about when a Dean of Nursing at the University of Massachusetts-Lowell is dismissed for writing “Black Lives Matter, but also, everyone’s life matters” in an email, or when an Indiana University Medical School professor has to apologize for asking students how they would treat a patient who says ‘I can’t breathe!’ in a clinical setting, or when someone is fired for retweeting a study suggesting nonviolent protest is effective. The people affected are always eventually judged to be “bad,” or to have promoted “bad research,” or guilty of making “bad arguments,” etc.

    In this case, Current Affairs hastened to remind us that the people signing the Harper’s letter were many varieties of bad! They included Questioners of Politically Correct Culture like “Pinker, Jesse Singal, Zaid Jilani, John McWhorter, Nicholas A. Christakis, Caitlin Flanagan, Jonathan Haidt, and Bari Weiss,” as well as “chess champion and proponent of the bizarre conspiracy theory that the Middle Ages did not happen, Garry Kasparov,” and “right wing blowhards known for being wrong about everything” in David Frum and Francis Fukuyama, as well as – this is my favorite line – “problematic novelists Martin Amis, Salman Rushdie, and J.K. Rowling.”

    Where on the irony-o-meter does one rate an essay that decries the “right-wing myth” of cancel culture by mass-denouncing a gymnasium full of intellectuals as problematic? 

    Continued reading on Matt Taibbi’s Substack

  • Washington Town Resorts To Printing Wooden Currency To Boost COVID Stimulus Spending
    Washington Town Resorts To Printing Wooden Currency To Boost COVID Stimulus Spending

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 21:25

    The last time this small town in Washington State printed local dollars out of wood was in the Great Depression. Now, the town of Tenino, a community of fewer than 2,000 people near Seattle, has fired up the printing presses after 90 years to fight the virus-induced downturn that has decimated the region. 

    Tenino residents who can prove economic hardships caused by the virus pandemic are eligible for $300 per month in wooden dollars, subsidized by the local government grant program. So far, the city printed $10,000 of local currency for residents to only be used at businesses in city limits.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tenino wood dollar 

    The currency is not made of cotton/linen material or 0s or 1s on the blockchain – but rather, wood, as this is the latest example of the rise of “micro currencies” in local communities. 

    Tenino Mayor Wayne Fournier told The Hustle the wood coins were used during the pandemic to bring back consumption that crashed. 

    “We were talking about grants for business, microloans, trying to team up with a bunch of different banks,” Fournier said. “The big concern was, ‘How do we directly help families and individuals?”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Resident using wood dollar 

    And then it dawned on him: “Why not start our currency?”

    The plan came together fast. Fournier decided that Tenino would set aside $10k to give out to low-income residents hurt by the pandemic. But instead of using federal dollars, he’d print the money on thin sheets of wood designed exclusively for use in Tenino. His mint? A 130-year-old newspaper printer from a local museum.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tenino printing press  

    Fournier’s central idea is pulled straight from Tenino’s history. During the Great Depression, the city printed sets of wooden dollars using that exact same 1890 newspaper printer. Within a year, the wooden currency had helped bring the economy back from the dead.

    By reinstating the old currency now, Fournier has accidentally become part of a much bigger movement. With businesses worried about keeping the lights on and people scrambling to find spending money, communities have struggled to keep their local economies afloat.

    So they’ve revived an old strategy: When in doubt, print your own money.  – The Hustle 

    Not too long ago, we noted a small southern Italian town of Castellino del Biferno, printed their local currency to support the local economy during the pandemic. 

    Amid the current recession, bartering has been booming – it was noted back in April that online bartering sites saw a rapid surge in traffic.

    And what does this all mean? Well, the Federal Reserve is not in the businesses of saving small communities – they’re in the business of stabilizing too-big-to-fail banks and Wall Street hedge funds – which means in a post-corona world, the emergence of local currencies could be coming to a small community near you. 

    Google search trend for “microcurrencies” has erupted in recent months. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fed up with the status quo? Launch a local micro currency in your small town. 

  • West Vancouver Police: Driver Carried Out "Gesture Of Hate" For Skidding On Pride Crosswalk
    West Vancouver Police: Driver Carried Out “Gesture Of Hate” For Skidding On Pride Crosswalk

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 21:05

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    West Vancouver Police accused a man of carrying out a “gesture of hate” for ‘defacing’ a rainbow-colored gay pride crosswalk after he left tire marks on the road.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “On July 7, 2020 at 4:04 pm staff inside the police station heard a loud and sustained tire squealing outside,” according to the West Vancouver Police website.

    “When officers took a closer look, they discovered that someone had just left tire marks across a portion of the crosswalk, at the intersection of 16th St and Esquimalt Ave.”

    The man then left the area at high speed but has since been identified by authorities.

    “This is very upsetting,” said Cst. Kevin Goodmurphy. “For whatever reason, this person has chosen to leave a gesture of hate on a crosswalk that stands for the exact opposite.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The “gesture of hate” is a tire skid mark that covers part of the crosswalk but is by no means substantial.

    Respondents to the tweet questioned whether West Vancouver Police should be concentrating on finding more dangerous criminals than those who leave tire marks on the road.

    “If you look closely, there are hardly any skid marks on the white stripe. This driver must have been homophobic AND a white supremacist,” joked one respondent.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Have you started an investigation into yourselves for having the nerve to stand on it?” asked another.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “I understand that Vancouver has no serious crime and needs to classify a traffic violation as a hate-crime to make the job of the police more interesting before it gets defunded, or is this business as usual for Canadian police?” commented another Twitter user.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It remains to be seen whether the culprit will be charged with a hate crime.

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.

  • China Passenger Car Sales Slump 6.5% In June After Dead Cat Bounce In May
    China Passenger Car Sales Slump 6.5% In June After Dead Cat Bounce In May

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/10/2020 – 20:45

    Despite endless government incentives and a faux-V-shaped recovery, reality once again seems to be sinking in for China’s auto market.

    Beijing announced today that the country had sold 1.68 million units in June, according to the China Passenger Car Association (CPCA). This marks a 6.5% year over year drop despite May’s dead cat bounce, where numbers rose 1.9% from the year prior, mostly due to easy comps. 

    The association called the number proof of a “continuing recovery” in the passenger car market, according to Reuters

    As was the case in May, luxury automakers outpaced the market while sales of NEV vehicles reached 85,600. Tesla accounted for 23% of the pure battery EV sector in the month and CPCA Secretary-General Cui Dongshu said he expects EV sales to outperform in the second half of 2020. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    These numbers won’t come as too big of a surprise for Zero Hedge readers. We noted days ago that sales numbers coming out of June looked as though it would be another slumping month for China. Just days ago, the CPCA said that retail car sales were down 37% YOY for the 4th week of June.

    Average daily sales were down to 51,627 during June 22-27, which marked a 6% sequential fall from the same week in May, indicating little respite or improvement from the pressure of the coronavirus pandemic on the industry. PCA blamed “seasonal factors” for the drop, which is a funny way to say “Chinese-borne virus ravaging the entire planet”. 

    We said days ago:

    “This also paints an ugly picture for June’s new car sales number, since we reported about 3 weeks ago that the first week in June was also off to an ugly start. In that article, we noted that retail car sales fell 10% year over year – but more importantly 20% from the same period in May – in the first week of June.”

    This news comes despite better than expected results in May, where sales showed a 12% increase year over year. 

    According to The Detroit Bureau, premium and luxury passenger car retail sales led the charge in May, rising 28% last month compared with year-ago results. Luxury vehicles maintained their strength in June.

     

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Chinese government continues to try to spur demand with new policies aimed at enticing buyers. 

    Recall, we have recently noted that U.S. auto manufacturers are also teeing up sizeable incentives to get buyers back into showrooms. Europe is following suit, with Volkswagen starting a sales initiative to revive demand, including improved leasing and financing terms. 

    Outlook for the year in China remains less-than-optimistic. The CAAM predicts that sales will drop 15% to 25% for the year, depending on whether or not the country is able to further slow the spread of the virus.

    • Here's What 75 Preppers Learned During The Lockdown
      Here’s What 75 Preppers Learned During The Lockdown

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 20:25

      Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

      The lockdown that recently took place due to the pandemic was like a practice run for a bigger SHTF event. Many of our prepper theories played out and were accurate, while others weren’t as realistic as we thought beforehand.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      People who weren’t preppers already learned a lot about why they would want to be better prepared in the future, but they weren’t the only ones who learned lessons. These preppers took a moment to answer questions about the lessons they learned during the lockdown. (Here’s an article about the things I learned.)

      What did you learn about preparedness during the lockdown?

      Trisha…

      I learned two main things. First, I was very surprised at how strongly the isolation hit me. I am a person who is “energized” by interacting with other people. I knew that already, but I was shocked at how MUCH it affected me. Second, I got a taste of normalcy bias. I kept trying to see ways in which our situation was still “Normal”. As a school teacher of little ones for thirty years, I was pretty much used to switching into action immediately to deal with a crisis and putting my feelings on the back burner. So, I was shocked that it took me a couple of months to “accept” the changes in our lives and start looking for creative ways to make life work and meet our needs.

      Maria…

      I learned it is so important to pay attention to what’s going on and stay ahead of the crowd. My husband and I were able to stock up two weeks before everyone else panicked. I also learned my plan of being stocked up and shopping only for replacements is a great system. For example I have 3 jars of mayo on the shelf, when I open one I put it on the list to purchase next time and replenish. Same with Costco TP. Every time I shop there I grab one package. We didn’t even go through half our stock pile and I was able to leave it for those who really needed it. I also learned to listen to your instincts, inner voice, the spirit, God or whatever you call it. I listened every time and we have made it through very comfortably. Also, look for opportunities to help others prepare. I have gotten several people to prepare seriously because of staying ahead of everyone else. I couldn’t have done what I did with[out] Daisy and her spot on articles. Like I said earlier, they kept me two weeks ahead of the crowd.

      Angela…

      That individuals mental state can be intrusive to yours. For me-it preteen having her 1st period.

      Annabel…

      That things happen really fast. If you act when things happen it is too late. Act now.

      Judith…

      That prepping is far more than one type of crisis. Organization of preps is vitally important ( I am still not where I need to be). Having a list of recipes and items needed helps with how and what to shop for. Alternative sources for cooking, cleaning etc. are important.

      Angela…

      Being in a lockdown during the spring was great. House was cool and could bake. Once it got hot, there was no baking. Need to learn to bake more via the fire, not just cook.

      Maya…

      I had anticipated shortages like food, soap, TP, and PPEs, but I underestimated how short in supply durable consumer goods would be – like the fact that freezers would pretty much become extinct, all gardening supplies, etc. Luckily, I had stockpiled seeds (although this year I brought veggie starts because everything started late this year.) It took until June to get the raised bed kits (industrial area, it’s not safe to grow anything you want to eat in the ground). Canning jars have also become in short supply. I anticipated has shortages, which did not take place – in fact, gas became dirt cheap with nobody able to go anywhere. I did fail to anticipate that the border would be closed for half a year! Living in a border city, I tend to rely on the much cheaper US prices for many things. I really should not have put off dentist and eye appointments, or a haircut! I will get that attended to before the next wave of contamination and lock-downs. I am working now on beefing up food growing and preserving supplies. Desiccants, oxygen absorbers, Mylar bags, food grade buckets, canning lids, canning jars, and food saver bags are all likely to become harder to obtain as food prices rise and more people become aware of how to grow and preserve foods. I am also stocking up on organic fertilizers and indoor growing options. And sprouting seeds – I think I have at least 2 years’ worth of those.

      Tarra…

      Baby items. We have a brand-new great grandchild born on the 4th and an 8-month-old granddaughter. I have always kept some things for when they are here, or the kids need help. We learned when it first hit that formula and diapers go quick.

      Lynda…

      Realized we ATE way more than I thought we would and more than normal, I think. Also, it’s easy to slip into an [depressive] state even when you aren’t prone to depression.

      Chelsea…

      I was truly surprised at how fast everything happened. I learned that people get really angry and do things that defy logic when they are panicking. I remember I kept thinking, “if they do this over hand sanitizer and toilet paper, how crazy are they going to be when it’s food!”. I learned that my preparations allowed me some measure of peace and calm that others didn’t have. It allowed me to enjoy family time at home. I was surprised by how information changed daily. You really didn’t know who or what info to trust. I had to be vigilant in reading sources and reasoning. I learned that people are generally idiots and very selfish. As much as we want to believe people will rise up for the greater good, many won’t. But also, there were many beautiful people out there willing to help anyone who felt scared going to the store. I didn’t see many holes because I truly planned ahead and made trips to the store when needed. I was surprised how quickly people lost their jobs and businesses went under. It really didn’t take much for that to happen. I have become wearier of information released. I don’t t trust it immediately because it will change the next day…which makes it harder to get a handle on the truth of a situation. I learned that when you watch, you will prepare…and we were stocked and self-isolating before the government required it. I learned emotionally preparing is just as important as physical. Mental and emotional resilience is what got us through when we realized this was a marathon and not a sprint.

      Tara…

      I learned not to wait to get something you want or need. I was lucky to get new filters for our Berkey before they ran out. Also, I have wanted a grain mill forever and now I have one ordered but is back order until August. And remember, one is none and two is one rule!

      Shelley…

      Never assume that your job is safe. I’m a L&D nurse at a busy hospital. BUT, I’m per diem, April 8th I was sent home early and have not worked regularly since then. I just now found a travel nurse assignment that fits. I’ll be working both jobs for the time being. My hospital definitely puts profit over patient safety.

      Pat…

      I was surprised how quickly the shut-down of stores, libraries, etc. happened. The notice went out only hours before the shutdown happened so there was little opportunity to get out and pick up the non-essential supplies (books, craft supplies, gardening supplies) that would have made isolation easier. I was/am also surprised by the shifting “news” and medical opinion. First–masks won’t help, then they may help, now they are required. And the fact that prepping quickly became “hoarding”.

      Pam…

      Coffee and tonic water. People in SW Kansas found out that tonic water had quinine in it and bought it like crazy, once it was suggested that malaria drugs would fight the virus.

      Melissa…

      I learned I need a bigger network and plans for the winter. Things I thought I may need, but didn’t buy, I should have- like more masks. If I think maybe, then I should get it then like a pool or kayak cause the reasonable ones are gone. My family depended on me to send them things since they were in a hot spot and store were limited on particular items.

      Melinda…

      I learned to follow my instincts. I did, and I’m thankful, because we were better stocked than we would have been otherwise. Holes – I didn’t have enough TP. I also didn’t anticipate how much I would rely on easy to prepare foods for my kids, such as Mac and cheese cups. It seemed like when everything else was upside down, they really appreciated having a “fun” food.

      Sandy…

      I learned that “Alone Time” is worth more than anything we could’ve bought at the store. With quarantines and self-isolation ‘all in the same house’, it was very difficult at times to remain sane. Normal entertainment was taken advantage of as well and so some of us just sat there dumbfounded when our ‘normally scheduled program’ wasn’t there, or when the next episode of our favorite show wasn’t going to come out until next year sometime. This was different than a power outage, a big snowstorm, or a hurricane… There was very little entertainment, plenty of work that ‘could’ be done, but little to work with. Ultimately, creativity and imagination became my best friend. In lieu of that, I’ve ordered plenty of paper, pencils, new brushes, and canvas.

      Sue…

      I learned that medical emergencies can appear out of the blue. Thanks to early pandemic prep posts here, the oxygen concentrator I got saved my dog during a sudden life-threatening ARDS episode when the vet ER was closed during lockdown and fish mox made all the difference when I developed a tooth abscess until oral surgery was available over a month later. I learned that my success during lockdown was largely because online ordering never stopped, and all utilities were available. Back in February and March, I had prepped for both being shut down and did a good job with that. The fact that they didn’t made our lockdown pretty easy. My house is like a disorganized warehouse now. My focus was getting supplies in and deal with it later. My current and future plans are to organize and work diligently to improve/optimize health.

      Kathy…

      Glasses. Always get your eye exam on time so that you aren’t facing an uncertain future using an outdated prescription. (I still need to get mine updated!)

      What are some holes you found in your preps?

      Kate…

      Reading the articles here on Prep Club kept me ahead of the curve by at least a month, if not 6 weeks. I didn’t hit us hard here on Vancouver Island, but the one thing I did fail with was yeast and baking soda. Never expected that so many would decide to start baking bread, and the baking soda I use mixed with dish soap in place of comet or vim. We were down to our last little box when the local Walmart finally got a shipment in. Also failed with seed potatoes. I had a lot left over from last years harvest, but I wanted to get more. Tried every store and nursery and they were all gone. I always get my seeds in January, so that was not an issue.

      Jenn…

      I didn’t plan adequately for fresh things like milk & eggs (I had powdered milk but more frozen for the shorter term would have been good). I also realized w[ith] the yeast & flour shortage (both of which I had but wanted to preserve my stock of) it was easier & a better use of my resources to buy inexpensive white sandwich bread for curbside pickup rather than bake it.

      Kim…

      I found holes in personal items. My husband and I both were essential so we didn’t get to lock-down but we limited unnecessary travel/trips to the store in the beginning. I found that I had been so busy making sure we had plenty of water, food and tp. I didn’t realize I didn’t stock up on shampoo, soap etc. I have since made sure we have a year’s supply of personal toiletry items.

      Becky Ann…

      I ran out of Dawn and surprisingly coffee

      Anne…

      I will never assume TP will always be available. Or frozen peas, rice, cleaners, pasta, flour, etc. When I see it any of these items, I’m going to go stay ahead of the game and get them consistently. THAT SAID, what will I do differently tomorrow? I will try to anticipate where the next shortage will occur. I need more beans, for sure. I think clothing and shoes may be harder to get at some point.

      Letia…

      Holes was toiletries. I was so concentrated on food. I need to get bug out bags made and set up for us to grab. Honestly y’all have taught me so much! I’m just gonna keep going. Stocking food, bumping up security, bags, canning, growing food.

      Chris…

      Masks were the item I missed in my preps. When I tried to order them before covid even hit here, they were sold out. I refuse to pay 50.00 for 10 so I’ve been slowly buying a box at a time as the price comes down. And I’ve yet to find yeast.

      Angela…

      …not enough extension cords. Old house does not have a lot of 3 prong outlets, which I need for my current extension cords. We do not have a printer. So, schoolwork needed to be printed, adapted and overcome.

      Polly…

      …we had gotten sloppy with replacing some of our frequently used food – peanut butter, popcorn, flour, etc. I also learned it is really, really important to be at least one step ahead of the masses when it comes to supplies. My son-in-law would say, “we need to make sure we have enough (********** )” and I would say, “Got it.” When the info about the virus started to filter through to Ohio, I made a special trip for gloves, hand sanitizer, masks, etc. Within another 2 weeks, you couldn’t find them anywhere, for any price. I couldn’t believe how a mistaken belief (How much toilet paper do you need for a respiratory virus.) caused such craziness. That freaked me out.

      Heather…

      Ask my hubs this question and he said, “you did good”. I plan on getting things like paint and building supplies as they were unavailable. Took contractors almost two months to build my barn because of supply issues.

      StivnSheila…

      Need more chocolate and chips…. and canning supplies.

      Melissa…

      Thermometers. When covid started becoming a household word and it was recommended to check temperatures, I realized my never-been-used thermometer was a dud. My husband had been sick for a week- not covid, but we couldn’t tell if he had a low-grade fever or not. I went to four different stores to find a thermometer- all four stores were sold out! Then, I remembered we had bought three extensive first aid kits- we dug them out, and each had a thermometer. I thought we were prepared, but we weren’t prepared at all for a pandemic.

      Arleene…

      We need more storage space for animal feed. Found that out the hard way when we weren’t able to make our bimonthly run to the feed store.

      Whitney…

      I worked the whole time so not much changed. Holes were toiletries, medical supplies and I need to come up with an alternative energy solution. I need better organization and more room. One major issue is: foot problem (in pt now, may have to still do surgery) has caused me to not get some stuff done. Trying to rectify that slowly before I have to tell the Dr yes or no on the surgery.

      Teresa…

      The only hole in my preps was “entertainment “. We live out in the country so going outside was a great help but, for bad weather days I need more movies and maybe series on DVD. Where we live streaming is not yet optimal, and that is putting it nicely! Books, puzzles, and games are great but, sometimes you just want to watch a good movie.

      Dana…

      My biggest problem was forgetting how much more I would need when my oldest daughter and her 2 toddlers moved back in. I also can’t depend on anyone but me to check out how low the resources are getting.

      Laura…

      Dried yeast was the thing we didn’t have enough of that we missed. Next time I’ll make sure I have enough in sealed tins. I’ll double up on PPE although we still haven’t used it all up. For information two sources were useful… lists posted on here by knowledgeable group members, even in other countries and local info from friends about which shops had what scarce stuff.

      Donna…

      I underestimated how QUICKLY shortages would show up in our rural town. Within HOURS of the first confirmed case of corona virus in our area (still several counties away), sections of the local Walmart were cleaned out and remained that way for weeks. I wish I had stocked more PPE. I had not expected garden supplies to sell out so quickly and remain sold out so long. Many garden supply items are sold out within hours of being stocked on the shelves. The rabbits this year seem to be eating everything. (peppers, marigolds, peas, beans, etc.) Hardware cloth is still difficult to find.

      What will you do differently to prepare for any future lockdown?

      Judi…

      I would stock a lot more liquid hand soap and dish washing liquid. It was truly hard to find hand soap, still is most places. Meat has gotten very expensive. I wish I had my chest freezer full of hamburger instead of turkey, a ham and chicken. I can do more things creatively with hamburger. With everyone home, it’s too hard to keep up with making bread. Hungry little piranhas trying to eat it before it’s even cool enough to slice…lol! Store bought bread to the rescue. These folks can go through a loaf in one lunch, with only 3 of them eating it!

      Max…

      My family was more prepared than needed which provided us confidence and peace of mind. What would I do differently? Buy more gloves. My stock was sized for medical use, not going to the grocery use.

      Alyssa…

      Act on the thoughts and feelings you have immediately, and don’t stop to overthink them. For example: I had the thought back in January to learn how to can ground beef and get a few quarts canned. I didn’t act on that and now ground beef is almost $5 a pound. One thing I feel I did right, is that the month before seeds had sold out, I had already placed my order so I could start things inside. By the time I was ready to plant outside, things were pretty much sold out.

      Diane…

      Watch my mental state. Keep watch on the news, but don’t get obsessed with it. Stay proactive. The only things missing were coffee and hair coloring….Oh! Need more popcorn for when the next wave of social media arguments break out. (j/k) Things we did that really worked: We sat down with my son & his wife and put a game plan together if supply chains got broken. He started an organic farm with dairy goats and chickens. We expanded our garden and made a good contact with a local family ranch. Their business was just gone because the restaurants had shut down, so I helped them figure out some veggie boxes and then promoted on social media. It helped both the people getting high quality fresh veggies and the farm. Now, they’re just flooding me with veggies. My thought was that if things go south, having a farm as a friend was a good thing.

      Allison…

      Food-wise I would buy more frozen fruits and vegetables. My freezer is packed with meat and some quick meals(and frozen pizza for the teenager) I have canned veggies but wanted more variety. Broccoli, cauliflower, and such. Fruit, I needed more apples, bananas, oranges, lemons, and limes. Trying to problem solve the lack of citrus.

      Susan…

      Aside from wishing I’d had more money for padding, about the only thing I plan on stocking more of is chocolate and sweets. It turns out that a Cadbury egg every day is what kept me feeling sane and safe. Weird, and please don’t judge me..(LOL) I think the excessive sugar/carb/fat triggers a serotonin reaction. And yes, I found where I can buy a box of 48 for $25. I did find that I’m reluctant to cook the dried beans I have. I’m not sure why. Lack of experience. Not having recipes. I have many types, and a lot of them, so I should start using them I suppose.

      Erica…

      Adding more food and supplies. I wasn’t planning on having four more people back home so that made me change my game plan a bit. Otherwise, getting more pandemic supplies to carry in all vehicles.

      How will you change your preparedness in general?

      Leigh Ann…

      My husband and I became sick with covid-19 and were pretty much unable to leave the house for almost a month. I thought I had done a decent job of preparing with food storage. But after not going to a store for a month and very limited shopping a couple months before that, I realized I had underestimated how much food we would go through. I also underestimated the amount of paper products, garbage bags, cleaning products etc. We still did OK and I am so glad I had what I had. But I am learning you need a lot more than what you think you do. I had heard and read that before but I think it’s hard to understand exactly what that means until you can see it firsthand.

      Hayley…

      I’ve actually coasted along quite nicely once I got past the initial upset of having my routine messed up, fresh produce was an issue, I’m planning an overhaul of the garden to help supplement that for this winter onward, what I did find odd was my reluctance to start using my stockpile, I was concerned as to how I would replenish it, I’m not sure how I can really overcome that other than having back ups of back ups so if, for example, I manage to work thru my 12 months supply of loo roll I then have other options I can fall back on until I can get more or if it never restocks.

      Sharon…

      We did pretty good overall. We have been long term preppers, dealing with weather related and power outages. We had no problem at all with social distancing because we generally do that anyways. What we learned was how much money we saved by working from home. Almost $500 month on just gas alone in savings was like a wonderful gift. I am thankful my husband has a job that he could do this. What we learned is we HAVE to get out of this rental and buy a place of our own. The fresh stuff we relied on as a staple kept us much healthier. We both gained weight living off of more pantry staples. While I have some pots of salad greens & herbs that’s a far cry from what I usually buy fresh. A garden is a must have for us. We have taken the opportunity to learn a lot of new skills including more medical skills, organizing preps & inventory keeping, planning for the unexpected, learning to slaughter & process a pig in hot weather – totally different than the usual early winter harvest. I learned how fast supplies can become unavailable because of importing of goods. I became aware of how much the media pushes their agenda in whatever direction it wants and is not to be trusted or relied on and how its really feeding the divisions that can easily fuel a civil war. Knowledge and skills are so much more important than having a lot of stuff. In all I think it really impacted our reasons as to why we prep and to step it up a lot more in our time frames from WHAT IF…To WHEN! Where are we going to be??? And giving us a START GETTING READY NOW! kick in the pants.

      Lisa…

      We did pretty well. I don’t know if I’m able to change what I need to which would be to stop helping others. I started pushing family members to start building a stock of hygiene/sanitizing products and I was ignored (I’m sure there were whispers that my tinfoil hat was too tight). Then when they couldn’t find the stuff, I gave out of my stash. I had/have enough but now need to rebuild my stockpile. It was frustrating to be sure! Can I look at my dad or my in-laws and tell them “I told you so”? Well, I did but I still gave them the supplies they needed. But the ‘kids’ (ages 25+), I told them they need to figure it out themselves and sent links on DIY stuff.

      Pam…

      Keeping informed from sources outside msm kept me 3-4 weeks ahead of the crowds, thank you Prep Club. I felt comfortable with my preps when things got bad here in the US. I did find myself reluctant to use my stash. I was able to explain early the need to be ready for lockdown with extended family. In turn, they were better prepared and now know I’m not paranoid. It was surprising to learn how few times I truly need to go anywhere ever.

      Lisa…

      Snacks and quick stuff to eat. I typically don’t keep a lot of it anyway, but with everyone home constantly it was more of an issue. I’m still not quite sure how to impact that without impacting storage and stock rotation issues. Second was a little more emergency or liquid cash…that issue is currently changing. We just were not comfortable with how tight we were personally and for our business. Sometimes that can’t be helped, but we are making a concerted effort to have a little better padded emergency fund. We would have survived, but not as comfortably as we would like.

      Angela…

      …coffee brings me sanity… and a bit of normality. How I look forward to my cup each morning. Part of my routine that never changed.

      Deb…

      I was in the hospital when the whole COVID thing blew wide open. I came home to a disaster. My big fail was not explaining the prep system to hubby (who had previously no interest).

      Colette…

      As full-time farmers we were never really “locked down”. The whole thing made me more aware though. We were well stocked on food and hygiene items, no real holes where supplies are concerned. In all honesty I believe we could go a year+ on total lockdown without going hungry or being dirty, or really doing without anything we really wanted or needed. We raise pretty much everything we eat, and I always keep a surplus stock of seeds. I think I would reconsider my water supply. We are on public water but if it quit running, we have a cistern and access to strip pits. It will just require considerably more work for transport and purification. I would like a solar set up for electricity. And always more means of defending our home and livestock. It’s the same as always, being able to afford those more expensive items.

      Tina…

      I never knew that liquid bleach got weaker over time. You can stockpile it by the gallon, but that does you no good about six months out. I picked up granulated pool shock, which can be reconstituted a tiny bit at a time and make a similar product to bleach, useful in all the same situations, that we’ll use up in tiny batches then make more. Added plus: it’s a small packet that takes up almost no space and lasts indefinitely if stored properly.

      Kathy…

      I need to get to the range more.

      Laurie…

      After having been through several hurricanes and the ’08 crash and having to help family, we’re good.

      Crystal…

      Toilet paper & Clorox wipes are worth more than gold to some people. When tp starts being restocked and the sign says 1 per family you buy it every trip just in case. Friends and family in larger cities don’t stock up and their large stores were out a long time. I thought I might have to start shipping toilet paper. Learning about gardening and buying extra seeds BEFORE it’s time to plant. We weren’t ready for an in-ground garden and used containers. Gardening supplies, including vegetable starts, here went fast (within days) since everyone was stuck at home and didn’t want to go to the bigger cities. Buying a spare freezer mid shutdown was interesting. Home Depot delivery was 4 months wait! Our neighbor is finally getting one they ordered in April. We bought a used one local for $100 thankfully it’s still going…Oh and stock up even more on dry/canned pet foods. We usually buy the biggest bag possible and still needed to order more. Chewy & Walmart online was sold out of most options and our small local store only gets small bags and even that was hit or miss each week. Like toilet paper buy what you can every trip and stock up. Can’t ever have too much as long as it’s sealed and not around mice.

      Barbara…

      Organization. I honestly didn’t know how much I needed of everything. I still don’t have that nailed. And part of that is a place I can store goods so that is can see what I have more easily. Shelves, etc.

      Shelia…

      Had enough TP until just now. But now was able to find some and have restocked. I will now buy every time I go to the store. Seeds: I had heirloom seeds but will begin adding extra to my collection. Never thought as a nurse that I would ever have to worry about having a steady job as I have usually over the past 32 years worked at least 1-2 Full-time jobs (we work 12-hour shifts so can work 2 -FT jobs 3 -12 hr. shifts per week) but with Covid and me now not working in the Emergency Room I found myself not being able to work my job in pre-op surgery due to being shut down. But we are now back up and running at mostly normal schedules. Our garden is supplying fresh fruits and vegetables which is great. Chicken supplying eggs. Masks and cleaning supplies are what I will also stock up on. The pool shock is a great thing I will be checking into.

      Michelle…

      I need to work on stocking up on clothing for my son, as he is still growing. It is harder to come by good used clothes for boys in the size he is in now and forward, but I need to be prepared anyway! I always have had a stash of tp and still have quite a bit but will continue to stock up as needed. I think the hard thing now is the temptation to sit back and not press forward on prepping as much since I have a good stash of food, etc. But one never knows just what tomorrow will bring. I keep getting two pounds of butter every time I am at Aldi, as it’s the limit and it’s the cheapest it’s been in ages ($1.88/pound). I probably have an exorbitant amount of butter in my freezers, but the low price cannot last forever!

      Nicole…

      I need better organization, I have too much stuff and can’t find what I need when I need it!! I didn’t go grocery shopping for over 2 months at a store other than for some random unimportant things, pet food, and fresh produce/milk. I feel that we would be okay for a long time with human things! We do need more pet food, and I’ve bought powdered milk at bulk barn every time I get milk and vacuum-sealed what we would use in a month. I also need Mylar bags and more coffee! And less dog hair would be nice! Oh, and an adult inflatable pool would be awesome! My dryer died in March, so I’ve been doing a load every time a basket is full and hang drying. Getting a huge walnut tree taken down in August since it’s a major allergy issue and blocks the sun and kills all the grass/plants in the back yard, and getting my old deck ripped out. Going to replace with patio stones or concrete since it is home for skunks, rabbits, or rats at different times of their year and I had a major rat problem this winter in my old half of the basement. Also, will be putting in proper insulation to my bedroom crawlspace since it has none and new windows/doors (they are at least 50 years old) have been bought and I will be helping my dad put them in so I can learn how to! These all need to be done before SHTF to make sure I can keep the house comfortable since they are responsible for 30% heat/cooling loss!

      Julie…

      I need better organization, inventory tracking methods, an upright freezer, more shelving in my storage area, and ammo. Need 9mm ammo and it’s impossible to find locally right now.

      Jim…

      Not much changed for me, but my wife had several clients on hiatus out of fear of getting sick.

      Heather…

      I love my kids, I love my kids, I love my kids. This mantra was said daily. And now with the hubby home going on week 4 it applies to him as well. I need school supplies at home, never saw that one coming. I stay home anyway so that didn’t change, the husband had to work so that was normal. I know I had some short and they were odd ones so those were taken care of.

      Melissa…

      I spent more money than expected! Although I typically buy extra supplies each shopping trip, in February and March with the potential for shelter in place I did some large grocery, ammo and cleaning supply purchasing. Ammo was impossible to find by mid-March, and it’s still very limited on availability in early July. I realized living alone and being furloughed, that after two weeks I craved human interaction. I ended up going to my parents for a week. When initially the lockdown began and there was not clear knowledge of what would happen with the virus, I avoided the stores but after a month caved to get fresh vegetables and fruit, but ironically during that time I also threw away vegetables as I over bought and I didn’t eat or process all of them before they rotted.

      Susan…

      Just trying to save money, get out of debt and looking for another (“essential”) job

      Erin…

      It may seem silly or trivial but purchasing undergarments and clothing. I am in need of some things that need to be tried on before purchase and I won’t be able to do that for the foreseeable future. I have a backup plan, but I procrastinated too much on making these purchases.

      Julia…

      Coming up with more options to supplement easily perishable items. For example, I learned that carton egg whites store very well frozen in the carton and switching to shelf stable nondairy milk lasts much longer than refrigerated. Also, I learned that if I see something, I need to not worry what others thought. In Feb I did a few rather large shopping trips and got a lot of looks/comments, but I didn’t mind. Those supplies were well used, and at that point there were several left for others of they so desired. Also important for me to learn was to prep snack supplies and actual meals, not just staples. My children get very tired of just basics so when I found good deals on shelf stable things they enjoy (granola bars, cereal, packaged Mac, and cheese) I’ve been adding them to my stockpile.

      Karen…

      Definitely keep more cleaning wipes, paper towels and TP on hand (although I’m still good). Get another small chest freezer (I already have one) for frozen veggies, fruits and meat. For over a month I couldn’t find canned or frozen peas anywhere. Masks, definitely. Right now, I know I have a guaranteed job for this coming year, but not sure after. So, I will be saving and possibly converting to some gold and silver coin.

      Jose…

      Going STRAIGHT to my BOL. If the wife doesn’t want to come, cool. Hasta la vista, baby. But I´ll take the kids with me. And the cat. You can keep the dog.

      Lynda…

      The pandemic virus was on my radar late January, early February. We started prepping seriously for the pandemic effect here in Massachusetts. Shopping was done by early March. Our group of friends had multiple planning conversations and we shared our resources and maximized our shopping together. We informed everyone we could. Bread was probably the one item I should have frozen more of.

      Vicki…

      I usually have enough of everything on hand, but when I first started reading about the virus (thank you, Daisy), I quickly bought extra masks, hand sanitizer, Clorox wipes, disposable gloves, and OTC drugs, as well as extra thermometers. It was all well-stocked at the beginning of the pandemic. The only thing I forgot to stock was yeast, but I’ve since been able to buy 2 one-pound packages online.

      Sheila…

      I’ll never again say “Do I really need more of those (insert whatever)? I already have x amount. No, I won’t get them.” I will get them. And more. And more if I can. Not because I’m a hoarder. Because so many people I know, and love had NONE. And I shared. And they learned that yes, they need to get more of them too. And also, I learned not to ignore that nagging little feeling of “Something’s coming”.

      What about you?

      What did you learn during the lockdown? Did you run out of anything that you thought you have plenty? Was there something unexpected that occurred that you never saw coming?

    • Trump Commutes Roger Stone's Prison Sentence
      Trump Commutes Roger Stone’s Prison Sentence

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 20:05

      President Trump has commuted the 40-month prison sentence of longtime adviser Roger Stone.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The move comes after a US appeals court denied an emergency request by Stone to delay the start of his sentence over concerns that he might contract coronavirus.

      In a court filing earlier on Friday, Stone, 67, said his life would be put at risk in the Georgia facility because at least 20 inmates and four staff members there had contracted the deadly virus. When U.S. District Judge Amy Berman Jackson denied his request for the delay, the facility with almost 1,400 inmates had no cases, he said. –Bloomberg

      In a late Friday statement, the White House said “Roger Stone is a victim of the Russia Hoax that the Left and its allies in the media perpetuated for years in an attempt to undermine the Trump presidency. There was never any collusion between the Trump Campaign, or the Trump Administration, with Russia. Such collusion was never anything other than a fantasy of partisans unable to accept the result of the 2016 election.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Stone’s clemency came as no surprise, as Trump telegraphed the move earlier Friday when he told reporters “Well, I’ll be looking at it,” adding “I think Roger Stone was very unfairly treated, as were many people.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Earlier in the week, Stone issued a statement urging Trump to commute his sentence, while Senate Judiciary Committee Chairman Lindsey Graham tweeted on Friday that “it would be justified if President @realDonaldTrump decided to commute Roger Stone’s prison sentence.”

    • "It's Going To Be A Mess" – Quarter of NYC Renters Haven't Paid Since March
      “It’s Going To Be A Mess” – Quarter of NYC Renters Haven’t Paid Since March

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 20:05

      As the US recovery stalls and the fiscal cliff looms, there are new, troubling signs from America’s biggest rental market, as an alarming number of renters haven’t paid in months.

      Bloomberg, citing a new report via the Community Housing Improvement Program (CHIP), a group that represents landlords, said 25% of New York City’s apartment renters haven’t paid since March. 

      Shocking, right? Because President Trump has been on Twitter this week, boasting about the economy and jobs “are growing faster than anyone expected.” However, the real story is one where the consumer is severely damaged due to the virus-induced downturn.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And the problem gets worse, that is, because when rental income for landlords collapses, they will experience financial hardships as well, including servicing mortgage payments and inability to cover other building-related expenses (if those are fixed or variable costs).

      Another issue developing is the fiscal cliff – and we’ve noted, direct payments to Americans now make up 25% of all personal income, suggesting when the stimulus runs out, expected at the end of July, the economy/consumption will crater. Couple that with a stalled recovery and surging virus cases around the country, it now makes sense why the Trump administration is requesting round two in the stimulus. 

      If Congress fails to pass the second stimulus bill – this will prove disasters for landlords as renters will not be able to afford rent through the end of summer. Last month, New York state passed the Tenant Safe Harbor Act, which makes it even harder for landlords to evict. 

      Even if a landlord manages to evict someone – demand for rentals has plunged, plus people are fleeing cities due to virus pandemic and social unrest.  

      Dondre Roberts, an agent with brokerage Nestseekers International, represents a landlord in Manhattan with a 17% vacancy rate because college reopenings have been delayed. 

      “Typically a studio would go for $2,600, but now it’s $2,300,” Roberts said. “A lot of landlords are offering one-month free rent, and they’re paying the broker fee. It’s a tenant’s market.” Of course, tenants with jobs are getting harder to find.

      Sharon Redhead, a landlord in Brooklyn’s East Flatbush neighborhood, said if rental income doesn’t rebound in the near term – she might be forced to sell her property. 

      Redhead said 40% of the tenants in her +50 unit building skipped out on rent payments in June. 

       “We’re rent-check-to-rent-check like our tenants,” she said. “We have small cushions.”

      Besides the election propaganda from the Trump administration about a ‘rocket ship’ recovery – Ameria’s largest rental market, that is New York City, is facing a massive crisis, with no remedy in sight and a consumer that has been decimated by the virus-downturn in the economy – this all suggest the recession is far from over. 

      As Gary Shilling, the president of A. Gary Shilling & Co., told CNBC earlier this week, prepare for another downturn in the stock market as investors will soon realize the shape of the recovery is an “L” rather than the overhyped “V.” 

    • The Illiberalism At The Heart Of Cancel Culture
      The Illiberalism At The Heart Of Cancel Culture

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 19:45

      Authored by John Lloyd via CAPX

      In 2018, David Remnick, editor of the New Yorker and Pulitzer Prize-winning author, cancelled a public interview with Steve Bannon, a former senior adviser to President Donald Trump, which he had organised for the magazine’s annual festival. Several staff members had complained and two or three participants in the festival had said they would withdraw if Bannon appeared. Two of the magazine’s most distinguished writers, Malcolm Gladwell and Lawrence Wright, strongly criticised Remnick’s decision: “journalism is about hearing opposing views”, said Wright. Gladwell noted that “If you only invite your friends over, it’s called a dinner party”. The episode was a worrying sign of things to come.

      In 2019, New York Review of Books publisher Rea Hederman – who has a proud history of anti-racism – fired Ian Buruma, editor of the Review for only sixteen months, after pressure from the staff. Buruma’s crime? He had printed an essay – ‘Confessions of a Hashtag’ by Jian Ghomeishi, a former Canadian Broadcasting radio host, who had been accused of violence to around twenty women, but had been recently acquitted in a case brought by some of them. Ghomeishi’s piece, which addressed these accusations, was deemed to be out of step with the spirit of the #MeToo movement. That the next issue of the NYRB was to devote a large amount of space to rebuttal was not enough to save Buruma.

      A G Sulzberger had, in his apprentice journalist years, used relentless coverage to force a Lion’s Club in Narragansett to reverse its decision to bar women, and revealed misconduct in an Oregon sheriff’s office, causing his resignation. He took over as publisher of the New York Times in 2018, the sixth Sulzberger to take that position: he strongly criticised President Trump, in an Oval Office meeting, for calling the Times “treasonous” and rendering journalists’ work more dangerous.

      Then in June 2020, he forced the resignation of James Bennet, editor of the NYT‘s op-ed page. Why? Because they carried an opinion piece by the Republican senator Tom Cotton which argued that demonstrations which turned violent should be met with “an overwhelming show of force” – a phrase that caused outrage among some of the staff. Bennet had been tipped as the future Editor of the New York Times. Now he was out the door.

      In each case, the main actors were men I admired – Hederman and Sulzberger by reputation, Remnick (whom I met when we were both correspondents in Moscow) by his writing and editing. They had faced difficult decisions, made enemies and hard choices. In each case, the men worked for a journal with a history of innovative, no-hold-barred criticism of the powerful.

      And in each case, they had folded because of pressure from the staff  – pressure which stemmed from an article or an event the complainants deemed unsuitable for any audience. For those staff, opinions they dislike are seen as intolerable in a publication on which they work. A red line had been crossed.

      Journalism, in the protesting staffs’ view, must conform to novel, liberal verities, which include the protection of audiences from material seen as hurtful, even dangerous. The view of John Stuart Mill in On Liberty (1859) – “to utter and argue freely, according to conscience”- is now discarded in many parts of the cultural landscape. The sharpening of one’s own convictions by setting them against opposing opinions would now, under this approach, be impossible.

      Part of this may be the phenomenon which Jonathan Swift noted when he wrote that “you cannot reason someone out of something that he or she was not reasoned into”: that views held because fashionable, or approved by one’s circle, or regarded as morally beyond question, are sometimes too shallow to be able to sustain argument. Dogmatic positions adopted with little thought except for signaling virtue often collapse when questioned hard.

      What’s to be done about this? First, the phenomenon itself has to be held up to the light as much as possible. If, as I suspect, much of it is loudly proclaimed but lightly ingested, argument and debate has to be brought to bear. The best argument remains Mill’s: that opinions, many of them having to do with central issues of our time, are too important not to be challenged, worked over, considered anew and either strengthened or weakened – and, in the latter case, either modified or discarded.

      Journalism needs now, more than ever, to build debate and contestation into news media worlds. The challenge is to rediscover the fundamentals of journalism – without which it ceases to be a necessary pillar of democratic, civic societies: in short, journalism needs to rediscover a belief in the fact of facts, and in the plurality of opinion. No liberal would for a moment agree that criticism of President Trump, distasteful to his supporters, should be censored.

      Editors’ mission is to insist that, barring the dangerous extremes, all opinions deserve airing and contesting, just as all facts deserve to be checked and given context. Those in journalism who object to views in their journal, channel or website must accept that the robust clash of beliefs remains a necessary insurance against enforced conformity, and indeed reaction. In a society built on diverse ways of looking at the world, some upset on seeing or reading an account or a conviction which strongly contradicts your own has to be borne, considered and where possible replied to, not shut down.

      A letter signed by prominent writers, scholars and others organized by Harper’s Magazine on July 7 – “On Justice and Open Debate” – noted that “it is now all too common to hear calls for swift and severe retribution in response to perceived transgressions of speech and thought. More troubling still, institutional leaders, in a spirit of panicked damage control, are delivering hasty and disproportionate punishments instead of considered reforms”.

      The concession to staff protests in the great New York titles and the punishments to Buruma and Bennet were “hasty and disproportionate”. These journals stood as examples to others: their example has been weakened. Journalists have been trained to keep an open mind to all events they chronicle, conscious of their complexity: and to listen to and allow space for views which are far from their own. That tradition is not past its useful life.

      John Lloyd is a Contributing Editor to the Financial Times, ex-editor of The New Statesman and a co-founder of the Reuters Institute for the Study of Journalism at the University of Oxford.

    • YouTube Removes Video Of Popular EV Owner Explaining Why He Traded His Tesla For A Gas-Powered Car
      YouTube Removes Video Of Popular EV Owner Explaining Why He Traded His Tesla For A Gas-Powered Car

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 19:25

      Rich Benoit has a YouTube channel that has over 700,000 subscribers and over 80 million views. Business for his channel over the last couple of years was, for all intents and purposes, booming. 

      Benoit made a name for himself with the EV community, attracting a huge subscriber base of electric car enthusiasts due to a number of projects involving Teslas that he would take on. His most recent, according to Vice, was a rebuilt 2013 Tesla S P85. 

      But the YouTube love he was getting changed suddenly when he posted one of his latest projects called: “Why I’m selling my Tesla and going back to Gas.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The video was supposed to be an explanation of why Benoit was selling his most recent Tesla project in favor of purchasing a gas-powered car. But the Tesla cult didn’t allow the video to air more than a couple of hours. Shortly after posting the video, it was taken down by YouTube for violating Community Guidelines.

      He said at the beginning of the video: “This video is going to be a little bit different. In this episode I’m going to re-building a Tesla Model S. It’s going to be from start to finish in one episode, while I talk over the reasons why I’m switching back to gas. Kind of ironic, isn’t it?”

      On his Twitter, Benoit blamed “Tesla fanboys” for the YouTube ban:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Benoit also noticed a “high dislike ratio” on his video shortly after it was posted, which he suspects it was the Tesla cult that got his video banned.

      Benoit said: “People clearly did not like the content even though there was no cursing. I’ve been on YouTube for several years now and I’ve never had a video pulled, so having a video pulled within five hours after announcing that I’ll be replacing my Tesla with a gas powered vehicle doesn’t seem like a coincidence.”

      He then appealed the violation with YouTube who re-instated his video. After it was put up a second time, it was again flagged and taken down.

      Benoit has surrendered to the cult and given up: “I have given up yes. It’s not worth it me trying for a third time.”

    • LancetGate: "Scientific Corona Lies" & Big Pharma Corruption – Hydroxychloroquine Versus Remdesivir
      LancetGate: “Scientific Corona Lies” & Big Pharma Corruption – Hydroxychloroquine Versus Remdesivir

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 19:05

      Authored by Prof Michel Chossudovsky via GlobalResearch.ca,

      Introduction

      There is an ongoing battle to suppress Hydroxychloroquine (HCQ), a cheap and effective drug for the treatment of Covid-19. The campaign against HCQ is carried out through slanderous political statements, media smears, not to mention an authoritative peer reviewed “evaluation”  published on May 22nd by The Lancet, which was based on fake figures and test trials.

      The study was allegedly based on data analysis of 96,032 patients hospitalized with COVID-19 between Dec 20, 2019, and April 14, 2020 from 671 hospitals Worldwide. The database had been fabricated. The objective was to kill the Hydroxychloroquine (HCQ) cure on behalf of Big Pharma.

      While The Lancet article was retracted, the media casually blamed “a tiny US based company” named Surgisphere whose employees included “a sci-fi writer and an adult content model” for spreading “flawed data” (Guardian). This Chicago based outfit was accused of having misled both the WHO and national governments, inciting them to ban HCQ. None of those trial tests actually took place.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      While the blame was placed on Surgisphere, the unspoken truth (which neither the scientific community nor the media have acknowledged) is that the study was coordinated by Harvard professor Mandeep Mehra under the auspices of Brigham and Women’s Hospital (BWH) which is a partner of the Harvard Medical School.

      When the scam was revealed, Dr. Mandeep Mehra who holds the Harvey Distinguished Chair of Medicine at  Brigham and Women’s Hospital apologized:

      I have always performed my research in accordance with the highest ethical and professional guidelines. However, we can never forget the responsibility we have as researchers to scrupulously ensure that we rely on data sources that adhere to our high standards.

      It is now clear to me that in my hope to contribute this research during a time of great need, I did not do enough to ensure that the data source was appropriate for this use. For that, and for all the disruptions – both directly and indirectly – I am truly sorry. (emphasis added)

      Mandeep R. Mehra, MD, MSC  (official statement on BWH website)

      But that “truly sorry” note was just the tip of the iceberg. Why?

      Studies on Gilead Science’s Remdesivir and Hydroxychloroquine (HCQ) Were Conducted Simultaneously by Brigham and Women’s Hospital (BWH)

      While The Lancet report (May 22, 2020) coordinated by Dr. Mandeep Mehra was intended “to kill” the legitimacy of HCQ as a cure of Covid-19, another important (related) study was being carried out (concurrently) at BWH pertaining to Remdesivir on behalf of Gilead Sciences Inc. Dr. Francisco Marty, a specialist in Infectious Disease and Associate Professor at Harvard Medical School was entrusted with coordination of the clinical trial tests of the antiviral medication Remdesivir under Brigham’s contract with Gilead Sciences Inc:

      Brigham and Women’s Hospital began enrolling patients in two clinical trials for Gilead’s antiviral medication remdesivir. The Brigham is one of multiple clinical trial sites for a Gilead-initiated study of the drug in 600 participants with moderate coronavirus disease (COVID-19) and a Gilead-initiated study of 400 participants with severe COVID-19.

      … If the results are promising, this could lead to FDA approval, and if they aren’t, it gives us critical information in the fight against COVID-19 and allows us to move on to other therapies.”

      While Dr. Mandeep Mehra was not directly involved in the Gilead Remdesevir BWH study under the supervision of his colleague Dr. Francisco Marty, he nonetheless had contacts with Gilead Sciences Inc: “He participated in a conference sponsored by Gilead in early April 2020 as part of the Covid-19 debate” (France Soir, May 23, 2020)

      What was the intent of his (failed) study? To undermine the legitimacy of Hydroxychloroquine?

      According to France Soir, in a report published after The Lancet Retraction:

      The often evasive answers produced by Dr Mandeep R. Mehra, … professor at Harvard Medical School, did not produce confidence, fueling doubt instead about the integrity of this retrospective study and its results. (France Soir, June 5, 2020)

      Was Dr. Mandeep Mehra in conflict of interest? (That is a matter for BWH and the Harvard Medical School to decide upon).

      Who are the Main Actors? 

      Dr. Anthony Fauci, advisor to Donald Trump, portrayed as “America’s top infectious disease expert” has played a key role in smearing the HCQ cure which had been approved years earlier by the CDC as well as providing legitimacy to Gilead’s Remdesivir.

      Dr. Fauci has been the head of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases (NIAID) since the Reagan administration. He is known to act as a mouthpiece for Big Pharma.

      Dr. Fauci launched Remdesivir in late June (see details below). According to Fauci, Remdesevir is the “corona wonder drug” developed by Gilead Science Inc. It’s a $1.6 billion dollar bonanza.

      Gilead Sciences Inc: History

      Gilead Sciences Inc is a Multibillion dollar bio-pharmaceutical company which is now involved in developing and marketing Remdesivir. Gilead has a long history. It has the backing of major investment conglomerates including the Vanguard Group and Capital Research & Management Co, among others. It has developed ties with the US Government.

      In 1999 Gilead Sciences Inc, developed Tamiflu (used as a treatment of seasonal influenza and bird flu). At the  time, Gilead Sciences Inc was headed by Donald Rumsfeld (1997-2001), who later joined the George W. Bush administration as Secretary of Defense (2001-2006). Rumsfeld was responsible for coordinating the illegal and criminal wars on Afghanistan (2001) and Iraq (2003).

      Rumsfeld maintained his links to Gilead Sciences Inc throughout his tenure as Secretary of Defense (2001-2006). According to CNN Money (2005): “The prospect of a bird flu outbreak … was very good news for Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld [who still owned Gilead stocks] and other politically connected investors in Gilead Sciences”.

      Anthony Fauci has been in charge of the NIAID since 1984, using his position as “a go between” the US government and Big Pharma. During Rumsfeld’s tenure as Secretary of Defense, the budget allocated to bio-terrorism increased substantially, involving contracts with Big Pharma including Gilead Sciences Inc. Anthony Fauci considered that the money allocated to bio-terrorism in early 2002 would: 

      “accelerate our understanding of the biology and pathogenesis of microbes that can be used in attacks, and the biology of the microbes’ hosts — human beings and their immune systems. One result should be more effective vaccines with less toxicity.” (WPo report)

      In 2008, Dr. Anthony Fauci was granted the Presidential Medal of Freedom by president George W. Bush “for his determined and aggressive efforts to help others live longer and healthier lives.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The 2020 Gilead Sciences Inc Remdesivir Project

      We will be focussing on key documents (and events)

      Chronology 

      February 21: Initial Release pertaining to NIH-NIAID Remdesivir placebo test trial

      April 10: The Gilead Sciences Inc study published in the NEJM on the “Compassionate Use of Remdesivir”

      April 29: NIH Release: Study on Remdesivir (Report published on May 22 in NEJM)

      May 22, The BWH-Harvard Study on Hydroxychloroquine coordinated by Dr. Mandeep Mehra published in The Lancet

      May 22Remdesivir for the Treatment of Covid-19 — Preliminary Report (NEJM) 

      June 5: The (fake) Lancet Report (May 22) on HCQ is Retracted.

      June 29, Fauci announcement. The $1.6 Billion Remdevisir HHS Agreement with Gilead Sciences Inc

      April 10: The Gilead Sciences Inc. study published in the NEJM on the “Compassionate Use of Remdesivir”

      A Gilead sponsored report was published in New England Journal of Medicine in an article entitled  “Compassionate Use of Remdesivir for Patients with Severe Covid-19” . It was co-authored by an impressive list of 56 distinguished medical doctors and scientists, many of whom were recipients of consulting fees from Gilead Sciences Inc.

      Gilead Sciences Inc. funded the study which included several staff members as co-authors.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The testing included a total of 61 patients [who] received at least one dose of remdesivir on or before March 7, 2020; 8 of these patients were excluded because of missing postbaseline information (7 patients) and an erroneous remdesivir start date (1 patient) … Of the 53 remaining patients included in this analysis, 40 (75%) received the full 10-day course of remdesivir, 10 (19%) received 5 to 9 days of treatment, and 3 (6%) fewer than 5 days of treatment.

      The NEJM article states that “Gilead Sciences Inc began accepting requests from clinicians for compassionate use of remdesivir on January 25, 2020”. From whom, From Where? According to the WHO (January 30, 2020) there were 82 cases in 18 countries outside China of which 5 were in the US, 5 in France and 3 in Canada.

      Several prominent physicians and scientists have cast  doubt on the Compassionate Use of Remdesivir study conducted by Gilead, focussing on the small size of the trial. Ironically, the number of patients in the test  is less that the number of co-authors: “53 patients” versus “56 co-authors”

      Below we provide excerpts of scientific statements on the Gilead NEJM project (Science Media Centre emphasis added) published immediately following the release of the NEJM article:

      ‘Compassionate use’ is better described as using an unlicensed therapy to treat a patient because there are no other treatments available. Research based on this kind of use should be treated with extreme caution because there is no control group or randomisation, which are some of the hallmarks of good practice in clinical trials. Prof Duncan Richard, Clinical Therapeutics, University of Oxford.

       “It is critical not to over-interpret this study. Most importantly, it is impossible to know the outcome for this relatively small group of patients had they not received remdesivir. Dr Stephen Griffin, Associate Professor, School of Medicine, University of Leeds.

       “The research is interesting but doesn’t prove anything at this point: the data are from a small and uncontrolled study.  Simon Maxwell, Professor of Clinical Pharmacology and Prescribing, University of Edinburgh.

      “The data from this paper are almost uninterpretable. It is very surprising, perhaps even unethical, that the New England Journal of Medicine has published it. It would be more appropriate to publish the data on the website of the pharmaceutical company that has sponsored and written up the study. At least Gilead have been clear that this has not been done in the way that a high quality scientific paper would be written.  Prof Stephen Evans, Professor of Pharmacoepidemiology, London School of Hygiene & Tropical Medicine.

       “It’s very hard to draw useful conclusions from uncontrolled studies like this particularly with a new disease where we really don’t know what to expect and with wide variations in outcomes between places and over time. One really has to question the ethics of failing to do randomisation – this study really represents more than anything else, a missed opportunity.” Prof Adam Finn, Professor of Paediatrics, University of Bristol.

      To review the complete document of Science Media Centre pertaining to expert assessments click here

      April 29: The National Institutes of Health (NIH) Study on Remdevisir. 

      On April 29th following the publication of the Gilead Sciences Inc Study in the NEJM on April 10, a press release of the National Institutes of Health (NIH) on Remdevisir was released.  The full document was published on May 22, by the NEJM under the title:

       Remdesivir for the Treatment of Covid-19 — Preliminary Report (NEJM) 

      The study had been initiated on February 21, 2020. The title of the April 29 Press Release was:

      “Peer-reviewed data shows remdesivir for COVID-19 improves time to recovery”

      It’s a government sponsored report which includes preliminary data from a randomized trial involving 1063 hospitalized patients. The results of the trial labelled Adaptive COVID-19 Treatment Trial (ACTT) are preliminary, conducted under the helm of Dr. Fauci’s National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases (NIAID):

      An independent data and safety monitoring board (DSMB) overseeing the trial met on April 27 to review data and shared their interim analysis with the study team. Based upon their review of the data, they noted that remdesivir was better than placebo from the perspective of the primary endpoint, time to recovery, a metric often used in influenza trials. Recovery in this study was defined as being well enough for hospital discharge or returning to normal activity level.

      Preliminary results indicate that patients who received remdesivir had a 31% faster time to recovery than those who received placebo (p<0.001). Specifically, the median time to recovery was 11 days for patients treated with remdesivir compared with 15 days for those who received placebo. Results also suggested a survival benefit, with a mortality rate of 8.0% for the group receiving remdesivir versus 11.6% for the placebo group (p=0.059).  (emphasis added)

      In the NIH’s earlier February 21, 2020 report (released at the outset of the study), the methodology was described as follows:

      … A randomized, controlled clinical trial to evaluate the safety and efficacy of the investigational antiviral remdesivir in hospitalized adults diagnosed with coronavirus disease 2019 (COVID-19) …

      Numbers. Where? When? 

      The February 21 report confirmed that the first trial participant was “an American who was repatriated after being quarantined on the Diamond Princess cruise ship” that docked in Yokohama (Japanese Territorial Waters). “Thirteen people repatriated by the U.S. State Department from the Diamond Princess cruise ship” were selected as patients for the placebo trial test. Ironically, at the outset of the study, 58.7% of the “confirmed cases” Worldwide (542 cases out of 924) (outside China),  were on the Diamond Cruise Princess from which the initial trial placebo patients were selected.

      Where and When: The trial test in the 68 selected sites? That came at a later date because on February 19th (WHO data), the US had recorded only 15 positive cases (see Table Below).

      “A total of 68 sites ultimately joined the study—47 in the United States and 21 in countries in Europe and Asia.” (emphasis added)

      In the final May 22 NEJM report entitled Remdesivir for the Treatment of Covid-19 — Preliminary Report

      There were 60 trial sites and 13 subsites in the United States (45 sites), Denmark (8), the United Kingdom (5), Greece (4), Germany (3), Korea (2), Mexico (2), Spain (2), Japan (1), and Singapore (1). Eligible patients were randomly assigned in a 1:1 ratio to receive either remdesivir or placebo. Randomization was stratified by study site and disease severity at enrollment

      The Washington Post applauded Anthony Fauci’s announcement (April 29):

      “The preliminary results, disclosed at the White House by Anthony S. Fauci, …  fall short of the magic bullet or cure… But with no approved treatments for Covid-19,[Lie] Fauci said, it will become the standard of care for hospitalized patients …The data shows that remdisivir has a clear-cut, significant, positive effect in diminishing the time to recovery,” Fauci said.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The government’s first rigorous clinical trial of the experimental drug remdesivir as a coronavirus treatment delivered mixed results to the medical community Wednesday — but rallied stock markets and raised hopes that an early weapon to help some patients was at hand.

      The preliminary results, disclosed at the White House by Anthony Fauci, chief of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, which led the placebo-controlled trial found that the drug accelerated the recovery of hospitalized patients but had only a marginal benefit in the rate of death.

      … Fauci’s remarks boosted speculation that the Food and Drug Administration would seek emergency use authorization that would permit doctors to prescribe the drug.

      In addition to clinical trials, remdesivir has been given to more than 1,000 patients under compassionate use. [also refers to the Gilead study published on April 10 in the NEJM]

      The study, involving [more than] 1,000 patients at 68 sites in the United States and around the world (??), offers the first evidence (??) from a large (??), randomized (??) clinical study of remdesivir’s effectiveness against COVID-19.

      The NIH placebo test study provided “preliminary results”. While the placebo trial test was “randomized”, the overall selection of patients at the 68 sites was not fully randomized. See the full report.

      May 22: The Fake Lancet Report on Hydroxychloroquine (HCQ)

      It is worth noting that the full report of the NIH-NIAID) entitled Remdesivir for the Treatment of Covid-19 — Preliminary Report was released on May 22, 2020 in the NEJM, on the same day as the controversial Lancet report on Hydroxychloroquine.

      Immediately folllowing its publication, the media went into high gear, smearing the HCQ cure, while applauding the NIH-NIASD report released on the same day.

      Remdesivir, the only drug cleared to treat Covid-19, sped the recovery time of patients with the disease, … “It’s a very safe and effective drug,” said Eric Topol, founder and director of the Scripps Research Translational Institute. “We now have a definite first efficacious drug for Covid-19, which is a major step forward and will be built upon with other drugs, [and drug] combinations.”

      When the Lancet HCQ article by  Bingham-Harvard was retracted on June 5, it was too late, it received minimal media coverage. Despite the Retraction, the HCQ cure “had been killed”.

      June 29: Fauci Greenlight. The $1.6 Billion Remdesivir Contract with Gilead Sciences Inc

      Dr. Anthony Fauci granted the “Greenlight” to Gilead Sciences Inc. on June 29, 2020.

      The semi-official US government NIH-NIAID sponsored report (May 22) entitled Remdesivir for the Treatment of Covid-19 — Preliminary Report (NEJM) was used to justify a major agreement with Gilead Sciences Inc.

      The Report was largely funded by the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases (NIAID) headed by Dr. Anthony Fauci and the National Institutes of Health (NIH).

      On June 29, based on the findings of the NIH-NIAID Report published in the NEJM, the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) announced on behalf of the Trump Adminstration an agreement to secure large supplies of the remdesivir drug from Gilead Sciences Inc. for the treatment of Covid-19 in America’s private hospitals and clinics.

      The earlier Gilead study based on scanty test results published in the NEJM (April 10), of 53 cases (and 56 co-authors) was not highlighted. The results of this study had been  questioned by several prominent physicians and scientists.

      Who will be able to afford Remdisivir? 500,000 doses of Remdesivir are envisaged at $3,200 per patient, namely $1.6 billion (see the study by Elizabeth Woodworth)

      The Drug was also approved for marketing in the European Union. under the brandname Veklury.

      If this contract is implemented as planned, it represents for Gilead Science Inc. and the recipient US private hospitals and clinics a colossal amount of money.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      [error in above title according to HHS: $3200]

      According to The Trump Administration’s HHS Secretary Alex Azar (June 29, 2020):

      “To the extent possible, we want to ensure that any American patient who needs remdesivir can get it. [at $3200] The Trump Administration is doing everything in our power to learn more about life-saving therapeutics for COVID-19 and secure access to these options for the American people.”

      Remdesivir for Covid-19: $1.6 Billion for a “Modestly Beneficial” Drug?

      Remdesivir versus Hydroxychloroquine (HCQ)

      Careful timing:

      The Lancet study (published on May 22) was intended to undermine the legitimacy of Hydroxychloroquine as an effective cure to Covid-19, with a view to sustaining the $1.6 billion agreement between the HHS and Gilead Sciences Inc. on June 29th. The legitmacy of this agreement rested on the May 22 NIH-NIAID study in the NEJM which was considered “preliminary”. 

      What Dr. Fauci failed to acknowledge is that Chloroquine had been “studied” and tested fifteen years ago by the CDC as a drug to be used against coronavirus infections.  And that Hydroxychloroquine has been used recently in the treatment of Covid-19 in several countries.

      According to the Virology Journal (2005) Chloroquine is a potent inhibitor of SARS coronavirus infection and spread”. It was used in the SARS-1 outbreak in 2002. It had the endorsement of the CDC. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      HCQ is not only effective, it is “inexpensive” when compared to Remdesivir, at an estimated “$3120 for a US Patient with private insurance”.

      Below are excerpts of an interview of Harvard’s Professor Mehra (who undertook the May 22 Lancet study) with France Soir published immediately following the publication of the Lancet report (prior to its Retraction).

      Dr. Mandeep Mehra: In our study, it is fairly obvious that the lack of benefit and the risk of toxicity observed for hydroxychloroquine are fairly reliable. [referring to the May 22 Lancet study]

      France Soir: Do you have the data for Remdesivir?

      MM: Yes, we have the data, but the number of patients is too small for us to be able to conclude in one way or another.

      FS: As you know, in France, there is a pros and cons battle over hydroxychloroquine which has turned into a public health issue even involving the financial lobbying of pharmaceutical companies. Why not measure the effect of one against the other to put an end to all speculation?  …

      MM: In fact, there is no rational basis for testing Remdesivir versus hydroxychloroquine. On the one hand, Remdesivir has shown that there is no risk of mortality and that there is a reduction in recovery time. On the other hand, for hydroxychloroquine it is the opposite: it has never been shown any advantage and most studies are small or inconclusive In addition, our study shows that there are harmful effects.

      It would therefore be difficult and probably unethical to compare a drug with demonstrated harmfulness to a drug with at least a glimmer of hope.

      FS: You said that there is no basis for testing or comparing Remdesivir with hydroxychloroquine, do you think you have done everything to conclude that hydroxychloroquine is dangerous?

      MM: Exactly. …

      All we are saying is that once you have been infected (5 to 7 days after) to the point of having to be hospitalized with a severe viral load, the use of hydroxychloroquine and its derivative is not effective.

      The damage from the virus is already there and the situation is beyond repair. With this treatment [HCQ] it can generate more complications

      FS Mandeep Mehra declared that he had no conflict of interest with the laboratories and that this study was financed from the endowment funds of the professor’s chair.

      He participated in a conference sponsored by Gilead in early April 2020 as part of the Covid-19 debate.

      – France Soir, translated by the author, emphasis added, May 23, 2020)

      In Annex, see the followup article by France Soir published after the scam surrounding the data base of Dr. Mehra’s Lancet report was revealed.

      Concluding Remarks

       Lies and Corruption to the nth Degree involving Dr. Anthony Fauci, “The Boston Connection” and Gilead Sciences Inc.

      The Gilead Sciences Inc. Remdesivir study (50+ authors) was published in the New England Journal of Medicine (April 10, 2020).

      It was followed by the NIH-NIAID Remdesivir for the Treatment of Covid-19 — Preliminary Report on May 22, 2020 in the NEJM.  And on that same day, May 22, the “fake report” on Hydroxychloroquine by BWH-Harvard Dr. Mehra was published by The Lancet.

      Harvard Medical School and the BWH bear responsibility for having hosted and financed the fake Lancet report on HCQ coordinated by Dr. Mandeep Mehra.

      Is there conflict of interest? BWH was simultaneously involved in a study on Remdesivir in contract with Gilead Sciences, Inc.

      While the Lancet report coordinated by Harvard’s Dr. Mehra was retracted, it nonetheless served the interests of Gilead Sciences Inc.

      It is important that an independent scientific and medical assessment be undertaken, respectively of the Gilead Sciences Inc New England Journal of Medicine (NEMJ) peer reviewed study (April 10, 2020) as well as the NIH-NIAID study also published in the NEJM (May 22, 2020). 

      *  *  *

      ANNEX

      Retraction by France Soir

      The fraud concerning the Lancet Report was revealed in early June. France Soir in a subsequent article (June 5, 2020) points to the Boston Connection: La connexion de Boston, namely the insiduous relationship between Gilead Sciences Inc and Professor Mehra, Harvard Medical School as well as the two related Boston based hospitals involved.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      (excerpts here, to access the complete text click here translation from French by France Soir, emphasis in the original article)

      The often evasive answers produced by Dr Mandeep R. Mehra, a physician specializing in cardiovascular surgery and professor at Harvard Medical School, did not produce confidence, fueling doubt instead about the integrity of this retrospective study and its results.

      … However, the reported information that Dr. Mehra had attended a conference sponsored by Gilead – producer of remdesivir, a drug in direct competition with hydroxychloroquine (HCQ) – early in April called for further investigation

      It is important to keep in mind that Dr. Mandeep Mehra has a practice at the Brigham and Women’s Hospital (BWH) in Boston.

      That study relied on the shared medical records of 8,910 patients in 169 hospitals around the world, also by Surgisphere.

      Funding for the study was “Supported by the William Harvey Chair in Cardiovascular Medicine at Brigham and Women’s Hospital. The development and maintenance of the collaborative surgical outcomes database was funded by Surgisphere.”

      The study published on May 22 sought to evaluate the efficacy or otherwise of chloroquine and hydroxychloroquine, alone or in combination with a macrolide antibiotic.  …

      It is therefore noteworthy that within 3 weeks, 2 large observational retrospective studies on large populations – 96,032 and 8,910 patients – spread around the world were published in two different journals by Dr. Mehra, Dr. Desai and other co-authors using the database of Surgisphere, Dr. Desai’s company.

      These two practising physicians and surgeons seem to have an exceptional working capacity associated with the gift of ubiquity.

      The date of May 22 is also noteworthy because on the very same day, the date of the publication in The Lancet of the highly accusatory study against HCQ,  another study was published in the New England Journal of Medicine concerning the results of a clinical trial of…remdesivir.

      In the conclusion of this randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial, “remdesivir was superior to placebo in shortening the time to recovery in adults hospitalized with Covid-19 and evidence of lower respiratory tract infection.”

      Concretely: on the same day, May 22nd, one study demeaned HCQ  in one journal while another claimed evidence of attenuation on some patients through remdesivir in another journal.

      It should be noted that one of the main co-authors, Elizabeth “Libby”* Hohmann, represents one of the participating hospitals, the Massachusetts General Hospital in Boston, also affiliated with Harvard Medical School, as is the Brigham and Women’s Hospital in Boston, where Dr. Mandeep Mehra practices.

      Coincidence, probably.

      Upon further investigation, we discovered that the first 3 major clinical trials on Gilead’s remdesivir were conducted by these two hospitals:

      “While COVID-19 continues to circle the globe with scientists following on its trail, Massachusetts General Hospital (MGH) and Brigham and Women’s Hospital (BWH) are leading the search for effective treatment.

      “Both hospitals are conducting clinical trials of remdesivir.”

      MGH has joined what the National Institute of Health (NIH) describe as the first clinical trial in the United States of an experimental treatment for COVID-19, sponsored by the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, part of NIH. MGH is currently the only hospital in New England to participate in this trial, according to a list of sites shared by the hospital.

      ” It’s a gigantic undertaking, with patients registered in some 50 sites across the country, getting better.

      “The NIH trial, which can be adapted to evaluate other treatments, aims to determine whether the drug relieves the respiratory problems and other symptoms of COVID-19, helping patients leave hospital earlier.**

      As a reminder, the NIAID/NIH is led by Antony Fauci, a staunch opponent of HCQ.

      Coincidence, probably.

      At the Brigham, two additional trials initiated by Gilead, the drug developer, will determine whether it alleviates symptoms in patients with moderate to severe illness over five- and ten-days courses. These trials will also be randomized, but not placebo controlled, and will include 1,000 patients at sites worldwide. Those patients, noted Francisco Marty, MD, Brigham physician and study co-investigator, will likely be recruited at an unsettlingly rapid clip.”

      As a result, the first major clinical trials on remdesivir launched on March 20, whose results are highly important for Gilead, are being led by the MGH and BWH in Boston, precisely where Dr. Mehra, the main author of the May 22nd HCQ trial, is practising.

      Small world! Coincidence, again, probably.

      Dr. Marty at BWH expected to have results two months later. Indeed, in recent days, several US media outlets have reported Gilead’s announcements of positive results from the remdesivir clinical trials in Boston.:

      “Encouraging results from a new study published Wednesday on remdesivir for the treatment of patients with COVID-19.**

      Brigham and Dr. Francisco Marty worked on this study, and he says the results show that there is no major difference between treating a patient with a five-day versus a 10-day regimen.

      …”Gilead Announces Results of Phase 3 Remdesivir Trial in Patients with Moderate COVID-19 

      – One study shows that the 5-day treatment of remdesivir resulted in significantly greater clinical improvement compared to treatment with the standard of care alone

      – The data come on top of the body of evidence from previous studies demonstrating the benefits of remdesivir in hospitalized patients with IDVOC-19

      “We now have three randomized controlled trials demonstrating that remdesivir improved clinical outcomes by several different measures,” Gilead plans to submit the complete data for publication in a peer-reviewed journal in the coming weeks.

      These results announced by Gilead a few days after the May 22 publication of the study in the Lancet demolishing HCQ, a study whose main author is Dr. Mehra, are probably again a coincidence.

      So many coincidences adds up to coincidences? Really ?

    • Trump To Sign Executive Order Giving DACA Recipients 'Road To Citizenship'
      Trump To Sign Executive Order Giving DACA Recipients ‘Road To Citizenship’

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 19:00

      In a Friday interview with Telemundo, President Trump revealed that he will be signing an executive order on immigration which would include a “road to citizenship” for recipients of the Obama-era Deferred Action for Childhood Arrivals (DACA) program.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Speaking with anchor José Díaz-Balart, Trump slammed Democrats for nuking a DACA deal, but that the Supreme Court’s June decision blocking his plan to end the program gave him “tremendous power” to move forward on an executive order, according to The Hill.

      “The deal was done. DACA is going to be just fine. We’re putting it in. It’s going to be just fine. And I am going to be, over the next few weeks, signing an immigration bill that a lot of people don’t know about. You have breaking news, but I’m signing a big immigration bill,” said Trump.

      When asked “Is that an executive order?”, Trump replied “I’m going to do a big executive order. I have the power to do it as president and I’m going to make DACA a part of it.

      “But, we put it in, and we’ll probably going to then be taking it out. We’re working out the legal complexities right now, but I’m going to be signing a very major immigration bill as an executive order, which Supreme Court now, because of the DACA decision, has given me the power to do that.”

      Díaz-Balart then asked if the executive order would be temporary, to which Trump replied that the DACA path to citizenship would be “part of a much bigger bill on immigration.”

      It’s going to be a very big bill, a very good bill, and merit-based bill and it will include DACA, and I think people are going to be very happy,” said Trump, adding “But one of the aspects of the bill is going to be DACA. We’re going to have a road to citizenship.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Needless to say, much of Trump’s base might might not be ‘very happy’ about the plan.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • "Liberal" NYC Cafe Owner Terrorized By Yuppie Neighbors After Claiming He Voted For Trump
      “Liberal” NYC Cafe Owner Terrorized By Yuppie Neighbors After Claiming He Voted For Trump

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 18:45

      After helping to legitimize cancel culture by running countless thinkpieces on the subject while its reporters increasingly adopted a strategy of covering these cancel campaigns and publishing opinion pieces written by (mostly minority) authors arguing extremist positions based on what should be a frightening underlying assumption: That every individual who expresses support for the president, or who in any other way breaks with the liberal orthodoxies espoused by the Times and its staff, is worthy of scorn and shame. Even when people like Chris Cooper, clearly a compassionate individual, say that the now-infamous ‘Central Park Karen’ Amy Cooper has “suffered enough” when he decided not to cooperate with an NYPD investigation into his erstwhile tormentor’s transgressions.

      But as the backlash to the ‘cancel culture’ intensifies, fortunately, media figures like Joe Rogan (with his $100 million Spotify deal) are finding places in the media firmament from where they can safely question cancel culture and the notion that Trump and all his supporters are ‘evil demons’ without facing a backlash from big tech and the far left. The fact that Rogan has managed to attain such success is a testament to the weariness with the SJW ‘cancel culture’ and other orthodoxies like “the Patriarchy” and “International White Supremacy” that many millions of Americans, Europeans and others feel. And NYT staffers like Taylor Lorenz and Bari Weiss genuinely believe that Rogan shouldn’t be afforded such a platform.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Clearly, the old-timer editors at the NYT who have been swept aside by the left-wing mob are starting to feel a little remorse, because in today’s paper, one of the NYT’s top political correspondents, Azi Paybarah, has published a feature about a bar owner in Inwood, a neighborhood situated on the northern tip of Manhattan, far from the roving tourists and spoiled hipsters who populate the city below.

      Thomas Bosco, the owner of the Indian Road Cafe in Upper Manhattan, is by all accounts a good-natured man and a fair employer. When employees can’t find child care, he welcomes children to the restaurant and finds a place for them where they can be supervised. His cafe had become a haven for progressives, and when the protests started, Bosco hung a black lives matter flag in the window.

      But when he told a reporter at MSNBC during an interview – he claims he had believed that the comment wasn’t going to be aired – that he had voted for President Trump in 2016, the comment unleashed the hounds on him, and he soon found his business and livelihood facing a boycott as angry former patrons – including two drag queens who had hosted bingo nights at the cafe for years – launched a boycott.

      At Indian Road Cafe in Upper Manhattan, a Black Lives Matter sign hangs in a front window. Local writers, artists, musicians and political activists are regulars. And for years, two drag queens have hosted a monthly charity bingo tournament there.

      Many in the surrounding Inwood neighborhood considered it a community hub and a progressive oasis.

      But then the cafe’s owner, Thomas Bosco, said in an MSNBC interview in late spring that he voted for President Trump in 2016 and was likely to do so again.

      The backlash was swift, as you might expect.

      Neighbors railed in the comments on various neighborhood Facebook groups, posting hundreds of angry messages aimed at the cafe — and one another. Some people called for a boycott.

      “How could I be against Trump and all that he stands for and go somewhere and patronize someone who supports this demon?” Douglas Henderson, 62, a lawyer and nearby resident, said in an interview.

      Ironically, Bosco made the appearance during a piece about the difficulties facing American small-business owners during the pandemic. Little did he know that by trying to share his experiences honestly with the public, that he would be made into a target of inchoate rage fanned by the far left.

      According to the NYT, the backlash to Bosco’s seemingly innocuous comment “shows how in a highly polarized social media era, a few comments in an interview can reverberate.”

      Glennis Aquino-Gil, 37, a resident of Riverdale, in the Bronx, vowed she would never go to Indian Road again.

      Randi Weingarten, the president of the American Federation of Teachers, who lives nearby, wrote on Facebook: “It’s hard to ever go back.”
      The two drag queens have said they will move their show to a different venue.

      The controversy, coming in the middle of a pandemic and the Black Lives Matter protests, shows how in a highly polarized social media era, a few comments in an interview can reverberate: Mr. Bosco said the fallout from his TV appearance, in a segment about small business owners and workers, might put him out of business.

      The situation got so out of hand, that Bosco felt he needed to publish an “open letter” to the community explaining his answer. He revealed in the letter that he had voted for the last 4 presidents, and that he considered himself a liberal guy.

      Soon after the TV appearance circulated online, Mr. Bosco posted an open letter to the community — “the community I live in, a community I love, respect, and serve” — defending his answer to the question about Mr. Trump’s response to the coronavirus pandemic.

      In the appearance, Mr. Bosco said that the president had made missteps, “but at the end of the day, I support him. I support my governor and I support my mayor.” Mr. Bosco then said he voted for Mr. Trump in 2016 and planned to do so again.

      In his open letter, Mr. Bosco wrote that he had “answered honestly and from the heart,” but his response had been presented without context. He said that what was in the video did not include that he had supported the last four presidents and that he had “found many things troubling about our administration.”

      “I’m a liberal guy who supports almost every liberal cause I can think of,” Mr. Bosco said recently while sitting inside his cafe, empty because of the current ban on indoor dining.

      Though the comments received plenty of good feedback, particularly, we suspect, due to his claim that MSNBC had left out a large part of his answer to that question in a manner that was highly suspect. But many are still angry, and expressing that anger on the Internet, mostly. Whether he realizes it or not, Bosco’s apology only made him more of a target since he offered some insight into how editors at NBC News often edit footage with the goal to maximize the ‘audience response’ (ie outrage).  More outrage, more clicks. That’s just how it is.

      But by trying to show how some ‘liberal’ well-meaning people have voted for Trump, or expressed support for the president, Bosco has made him a target to leftists who will do whatever it takes to preserve the narrative that all Trump voters are racists, and all racists are evil people who deserve to be scorned. Clearly, since Trump is the president, many people in this country don’t agree with this viewpoint. Yet, so-called “leaders” like Joe Biden have pandered to the progressive left at every turn.

      In his open letter, Mr. Bosco wrote that he had “answered honestly and from the heart,” but his response had been presented without context. He said that what was in the video did not include that he had supported the last four presidents and that he had “found many things troubling about our administration.”

      “I’m a liberal guy who supports almost every liberal cause I can think of,” Mr. Bosco said recently while sitting inside his cafe, empty because of the current ban on indoor dining.

      When a worker did not have child care, Mr. Bosco provided it on site, Mr. Bosco and another employee said. They also said that when a different worker feared being stopped by the police and questioned about his immigration status, Mr. Bosco drove that person to and from the cafe.

      Bosco is known to friends and customers for allowing his restaurant to become a haven for progressives and he often gives back to the community, and goes above and beyond for his workers. But he also told the NYT that he supported both Bernie Sanders and Trump, a concept that sometimes causes leftists to short-circuit with rage when confronted by evidence of the supposed “myth”.

      When a worker did not have child care, Mr. Bosco provided it on site, Mr. Bosco and another employee said.

      They also said that when a different worker feared being stopped by the police and questioned about his immigration status, Mr. Bosco drove that person to and from the cafe.

      And on the Rev. Dr. Martin Luther King Jr.’s birthday, Mr. Bosco organized a brunch to raise money for an immigrant’s advocacy organization.

      He struggled to explain how he voted for Mr. Trump in 2016 after having supported Senator Bernie Sanders of Vermont, a progressive Democrat, earlier that year. Eventually, he settled on the phrase “small government, big community.”

      Now, Mr. Bosco says, he is not sure whom he will support in November.

      “My staff feels like I let them down to a certain extent,” Mr. Bosco said.

      “They feel like when I answered that question, that I didn’t think about them” as employees of the cafe he was representing, he added.

      “And that hurts. I wish I had it back.”

      Back in the day, Bosco’s views on politics never mattered. And that would probably still be the case, if it wasn’t for the fact that a wave of yuppie gentrifiers have swarmed Inwood looking for “inexpensive” rents and “more space”, pushing out the mostly working-class immigrants who had called the neighborhood home.

      One complainant who chimed in online sneered: “does he know where his restaurant is?”

      Mr. Bosco has not made donations to any political campaign, according to city, state and federal records online. And Indian Road is not a chain.

      “Does he know where his restaurant is?” asked Caroline Montero, 29, from nearby Washington Heights. The cafe, which will change its name to Inwood Farm this month, is in a gentrifying area with many immigrants.

      “Where’s your loyalty?” she added, as she sat in a park across the street from the cafe with Ms. Aquino-Gil and another friend. Sipping drinks purchased from a park vendor, all three vowed to no longer patronize the cafe.

      When confronted with the fact that Bosco never donated to Trump, and that he had donated to pro-immigration groups, one neighbor still claimed that didn’t outweigh the fact that Trump was trying to “take away her rights”.

      “I appreciate that he’s given money to immigrants rights groups and donated to food pantries,” Ms. Llodrá said in an interview. “That’s great. But it doesn’t take away the fact that he voted for someone in 2016 and planned to vote for someone in 2020 who will take away my rights.”

      Assuming she’s an American citizens…how is he trying to do that, exactly?

      Now, Bosco says he’s not sure who to support in November because he feels like he ‘let his employees down’ by sharing his feelings. But this is just another example of the ‘Internet mob mentality’ that exists when hyper-progressive NIMBY yuppies see one of their precious orthodoxies being violated. Business owners like Bosco have been in the neighborhood for years, helping to build it into the type of place that out-of-town yuppies might want to live.

      And this is the thanks he gets…

    • Daily Briefing – July 10, 2020
      Daily Briefing – July 10, 2020


      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 18:40

      Is the idea of a V-shaped recovery dead? Real Vision CEO Raoul Pal and senior editor Ash Bennington explore that question in depth through the lens of the virulent reemergence of COVID-19 in the U.S. Raoul and Ash break down the alarming rise of cases coming out of many states and analyze the effect that this ominous second wave will have on markets. They also discuss Ash’s seminal interview today with Dr. Kayvon Modjarrad, director for Emerging Infectious Diseases at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research. Raoul is firm in belief that the human reaction function is what matters and that the virus’s effect on behavior is more significant than the virus itself. Raoul concludes that caution is prudent in these uncertain times and that the bond market is sending the clearest signal to investors. In the intro, Peter Cooper examines market news and coronavirus data.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 10th July 2020

    • Virus Unrest Turns Violent As Serbs Protest Being "Lied To For Political Ends"
      Virus Unrest Turns Violent As Serbs Protest Being “Lied To For Political Ends”

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 02:45

      Social unrest has rocked Belgrade and other cities in Serbia this week in response to President Aleksandar Vucic’s reintroduction of government-curfews over surging coronavirus cases.

      Serbian police fired tear gas and were dressed head to toe in riot gear, as demonstrators, mostly young people, assaulted police on Tuesday and Wednesday. The New York Times said the unrest was some of the first in Europe since the pandemic began – also indicating the severity of the unrest was worst since the rule of Slobodan Milosevic in the 1990s. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      July 8 Belgrade riot chaos. h/t Reuters 

      Young Serbs quickly took the streets on Tuesday after Vucic announced Belgrade would be placed under a new order restricting movement in the region for three days to mitigate the spread of the second coronavirus wave. Many were infuriated by the re-implementation of the lockdown after coming out of some of the strictest ones in Europe to allow the general election last week.

      “We don’t mind staying home for another three days — that wasn’t the problem,” said Dragana Grncarski, 45, who has been protesting this week. 

      “However, they’re playing with our minds and with the truth,” Grncarski added. “When it suits them to do elections, there is no corona. They organized football matches and tennis matches, and because of that we have a situation where the hospitals are full.”

      “Citizens have been constantly deceived and lied to for political ends,” said Tena Prelec, a political expert on Southeast Europe at the University of Oxford.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Jelena Vasiljevic, an expert on Balkan unrest at the University of Belgrade, said the expiration of the lockdowns for election purposes – then re-implementation of the lockdowns took the population “from one extreme to another.” 

      Vasiljevic said the “excessive use of force” by the government to combat rioters hasn’t been seen since the days of “Milosevic in 1996 or 1997.” Milosevic led Serbia through the Balkan Wars and was later charged for war crimes. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Serbian Defense Minister Aleksandar Vulin was convinced the demonstration against the re-implementation of the lockdowns in Belgrade and other cities were “carefully planned” – and aimed at igniting a civil war. 

      “We have terrible violence on the streets, we have an attempt at a coup, we have an attempt to seize power by force and an attempt to provoke a civil war in Serbia. It cannot be described and explained differently. There is no reason, there is no reason to set fire to the Assembly, to set fire to the City Hall in Novi Sad, to attack the police, to beat people on the streets, to endanger life and to endanger the property of Serbian citizens ,” said Vulin, a guest on the show Novo jutro on TV Pink, was asked to comment on the events in the previous two evenings. 

      Russian Times caught some of the unrest on video earlier this week. Young Serbs can be seen clashing with riot police in front of government buildings. 

      “There were indications of foreign involvement, and some criminal faces were there, too,” Vucic said on Wednesday afternoon. He added that virus cases will likely flare-up because of the mass unrest. 

      “I wonder who will be responsible for the fact that hundreds and thousands of people became infected yesterday and the day before yesterday,” he said

      Vucic has also backtracked on the curfew after several days of unrest –  instead, the government is expected to impose restrictions on public spaces and possibly limit business hours. There’s also talk of fining people for not wearing masks. 

      When it comes to outside forces meddling in Serb domestic affairs, Russia came out on Thursday, denying it had any involvement. 

    • UK Commits "Highway Robbery" Of Venezuelan Gold, Says Academic
      UK Commits “Highway Robbery” Of Venezuelan Gold, Says Academic

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 02:00

      Authored by Johanna Ross via InfoBrics.org,

      When it comes to Venezuela, Britain is suffering from split personality disorder. While the UK Foreign Office reportedly maintains ‘full, normal and reciprocal diplomatic relations’ with legitimately elected President Maduro’s government, and with Maduro’s UK ambassador, the British government has been actively supporting the self-appointed US-backed ‘leader’ Juan Guaido, who led the coup against Maduro in 2019.

      Last week the High Court in London ruled that Juan Guaido was ‘unequivocally’ recognised as the President of Venezuela.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      There’s just one problem with the ruling however: Juan Guaido isn’t the President.

      He may have tried hard; he talked the talk, and walked the walk (clearly modelling himself on a cross between Justin Trudeau and Emmanuel Macron, with sleeves rolled up like Barack Obama). He had just the right youthful, liberal image to front the US led regime change campaign in the South American nation. But last year’s coup, supported by the US and Colombia, dramatically backfired after the Venezuelan military refused to back him.

      Nevertheless, it has been in the British government’s interest to prop up the would-be Venezuelan leader. The High Court’s verdict was in a case brought to the court by Maduro’s government, which is trying to access $1bn of its gold currently held by the Bank of England. It’s pretty straightforward – the bank doesn’t want to pay out, and is using Maduro’s ‘contested’ leadership as a reason not to do so. Suddenly it matters that Maduro’s presidency is questionable, never mind the fact that he was democratically re-elected in 2018.

      Juan Guaido claims that the funds from the Bank of England gold would be used to ‘prop up the regime’, while the Venezuelan government has insisted that the money would go towards managing the coronavirus pandemic. Maduro has even said that once the gold is sold the money will be transferred to the UN Development Programme. In any case, the reason seems irrelevant; when was the last time you or I had to justify a withdrawal from our own bank accounts?

      I spoke recently to the National Secretary of the Venezuela Solidarity Campaign and senior lecturer at the University of Middlesex, Dr Francisco Dominguez, who said to me that the move by the High Court to block the transfer of Venezuelan gold constituted nothing more than ‘highway robbery’ and he condemned the UK’s use of Guaido in this case as a ‘legal device to steal Venezuela’s assets’. He stated:

      It is abundantly clear the UK’s recognition of Guaido’s farcical ‘interim presidency’ has nothing to do with ‘democracy’ or ‘human rights’ but with ‘colonial pillage’. 

      After all, there is nothing democratic or decent about Guaido: he colludes with Colombian narco-traffickers; he attempted a violent coup d’etat’; contracted US mercenaries to assassinate President Maduro and several Venezulean government high officials, vigorously promotes sanctions and aggression against his own nation, and he reeks of corruption.”

      Dr Dominguez also pointed to direct collusion of the UK government with Guaido, as was recently uncovered by a British journalist. Newly obtained documents, exposed by John McEvoy, have recently shed light on the murky connection between the British government and the aspiring Venezuelan president. It was uncovered that a Foreign & Commonwealth Office (FCO) Unit named the Venezuela Reconstruction Unit has been created which has not been officially acknowledged by either country. In the documents it was revealed that  Juan Guaidó’s representative in the UK, Vanessa Neumann, had spoken with FCO officials about the sustenance of British business interests in Venezuela’s ‘reconstruction’. A conversation of this nature obviously stinks of regime change, given the fact Venezuela sits on the largest proven oil reserves in the world, and that Neumann has previously links to oil companies. Britain is placing its stake in Venezuela’s demise.

      Formally the UK government has a different position. In relation to Venezuela’s gold, former Treasury Minister Robert Jenrick said back in 2019 in response to the parliamentary question ‘what the legal basis was for the Bank of England’s decision to freeze approximately 1125 gold bars stored by the Venezuelan central bank in November 2018.’, that it was a ‘matter for the Bank of England’. Jenrick maintained that HM Treasury only has direct control over the UK government’s own holdings of gold within its official reserves, which are held at the Bank of England.’

      However the facts paint a different picture.

      John Bolton’s White House memoir The Room Where It Happened’ reveals that UK Foreign Secretary at the time, Jeremy Hunt ‘was delighted to freeze Venezuelan gold deposits in the Bank of England so the regime could not sell the gold to keep itself going.’ 

      As Bolton unashamedly admitted:

      “These were the sort of steps we were already applying to pressure Maduro financially.”

      The former National Security Advisor relates in his book how proud he was to have been the driving force behind the 2019 power grab:

      “I was heartened that Maduro’s government promptly accused me of leading a coup.”

      Bolton openly describes how they discussed ways of delegitimizing the Venezuelan government as Trump reportedly said “Maybe it’s time to put Maduro out of business.”

      The evidence suggests that the UK complied fully in Bolton’s masterplan to unseat Maduro, and is continuing to work with the US to undermine the Venezuelan leadership; only in truly subtle British fashion, surreptitiously, hoping no-one would notice. Who knows, when, if ever, the Venezuelans will see their gold. But you can be sure they won’t be investing with the Bank of England any time soon.

    • Tyranny Without A Tyrant: The Deep State's Divide-And-Conquer Strategy Is Working
      Tyranny Without A Tyrant: The Deep State’s Divide-And-Conquer Strategy Is Working

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/10/2020 – 00:00

      Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

      “In a fully developed bureaucracy there is nobody left with whom one can argue, to whom one can present grievances, on whom the pressures of power can be exerted. Bureaucracy is the form of government in which everybody is deprived of political freedom, of the power to act; for the rule by Nobody is not no-rule, and where all are equally powerless, we have a tyranny without a tyrant.”

      – Hannah Arendt, On Violence

      What exactly is going on?

      Is this revolution? Is this anarchy? Is this a spectacle engineered to distract us from the machinations of the police state? Is this a sociological means of re-setting our national equilibrium? Is this a Machiavellian scheme designed to further polarize the populace and undermine our efforts to stand unified against government tyranny? Is this so-called populist uprising actually a manufactured race war and election-year referendum on who should occupy the White House?

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Whatever it is, thisthe racial hypersensitivity without racial justice, the kowtowing to politically correct bullies with no regard for anyone else’s free speech rights, the violent blowback after years of government-sanctioned brutality, the mob mindset that is overwhelming the rights of the individual, the oppressive glowering of the Nanny State, the seemingly righteous indignation full of sound and fury that in the end signifies nothing, the partisan divide that grows more impassable with every passing dayis not leading us anywhere good.

      Certainly it’s not leading to more freedom.

      This draconian exercise in how to divide, conquer and subdue a nation is succeeding.

      It must be said: the Black Lives Matter protests have not helped. Inadvertently or intentionally, these protests—tinged with mob violence, rampant incivility, intolerance, and an arrogant disdain for how an open marketplace of ideas can advance freedom—have politicized what should never have been politicized: police brutality and the government’s ongoing assaults on our freedoms.

      For one brief moment in the wake of George Floyd’s death, it seemed as if finally “we the people” might put aside our differences long enough to stand united in outrage over the government’s brutality.

      That sliver of unity didn’t last.

      We may be worse off now than we were before.

      Suddenly, no one seems to be talking about any of the egregious governmental abuses that are still wreaking havoc on our freedoms: police shootings of unarmed individuals, invasive surveillance, roadside blood draws, roadside strip searches, SWAT team raids gone awry, the military industrial complex’s costly wars, pork barrel spending, pre-crime laws, civil asset forfeiture, fusion centers, militarization, armed drones, smart policing carried out by AI robots, courts that march in lockstep with the police state, schools that function as indoctrination centers, bureaucrats that keep the Deep State in power.

      The more things change, the more they stay the same.

      How do you persuade a populace to embrace totalitarianism, that goose-stepping form of tyranny in which the government has all of the power and “we the people” have none?

      You persuade the people that the menace they face (imaginary or not) is so sinister, so overwhelming, so fearsome that the only way to surmount the danger is by empowering the government to take all necessary steps to quash it, even if that means allowing government jackboots to trample all over the Constitution.

      This is how you use the politics of fear to persuade a freedom-endowed people to shackle themselves to a dictatorship.

      It works the same way every time.

      The government’s overblown, extended wars on terrorism, drugs, violence, illegal immigration, and so-called domestic extremism have been convenient ruses used to terrorize the populace into relinquishing more of their freedoms in exchange for elusive promises of security.

      Having allowed our fears to be codified and our actions criminalized, we now find ourselves in a strange new world where just about everything we do is criminalized, even our ability to choose whether or not to wear a mask in public during the COVID-19 pandemic.

      Strangely enough, in the face of outright corruption and incompetency on the part of our elected officials, Americans in general remain relatively gullible, eager to be persuaded that the government can solve the problems that plague us, whether it be terrorism, an economic depression, an environmental disaster, or a global pandemic.

      We have relinquished control over the most intimate aspects of our lives to government officials who, while they may occupy seats of authority, are neither wiser, smarter, more in tune with our needs, more knowledgeable about our problems, nor more aware of what is really in our best interests. Yet having bought into the false notion that the government does indeed know what’s best for us and can ensure not only our safety but our happiness and will take care of us from cradle to grave—that is, from daycare centers to nursing homes—we have in actuality allowed ourselves to be bridled and turned into slaves at the bidding of a government that cares little for our freedoms or our happiness.

      The lesson is this: once a free people allows the government inroads into their freedoms or uses those same freedoms as bargaining chips for security, it quickly becomes a slippery slope to outright tyranny.

      Nor does it seem to matter whether it’s a Democrat or a Republican at the helm anymore. Indeed, the bureaucratic mindset on both sides of the aisle now seems to embody the same philosophy of authoritarian government, whose priorities are to milk “we the people” of our hard-earned money (by way of taxes, fines and fees) and remain in control and in power.

      Modern government in general—ranging from the militarized police in SWAT team gear crashing through our doors to the rash of innocent citizens being gunned down by police to the invasive spying on everything we do—is acting illogically, even psychopathically. (The characteristics of a psychopath include a “lack of remorse and empathy, a sense of grandiosity, superficial charm, conning and manipulative behavior, and refusal to take responsibility for one’s actions, among others.”)

      When our own government no longer sees us as human beings with dignity and worth but as things to be manipulated, maneuvered, mined for data, manhandled by police, conned into believing it has our best interests at heart, mistreated, and then jails us if we dare step out of line, punishes us unjustly without remorse, and refuses to own up to its failings, we are no longer operating under a constitutional republic. Instead, what we are experiencing is a pathocracy: tyranny at the hands of a psychopathic government, which “operates against the interests of its own people except for favoring certain groups.”

      So where does that leave us?

      Having allowed the government to expand and exceed our reach, we find ourselves on the losing end of a tug-of-war over control of our country and our lives. And for as long as we let them, government officials will continue to trample on our rights, always justifying their actions as being for the good of the people.

      Yet the government can only go as far as “we the people” allow. Therein lies the problem.

      The pickle we find ourselves in speaks volumes about the nature of the government beast we have been saddled with and how it views the rights and sovereignty of “we the people.”

      Now you don’t hear a lot about sovereignty anymore. Sovereignty is a dusty, antiquated term that harkens back to an age when kings and emperors ruled with absolute power over a populace that had no rights. Americans turned the idea of sovereignty on its head when they declared their independence from Great Britain and rejected the absolute authority of King George III. In doing so, Americans claimed for themselves the right to self-government and established themselves as the ultimate authority and power.

      In other words, in America, “we the people”— sovereign citizens—call the shots.

      So when the government acts, it is supposed to do so at our bidding and on our behalf, because we are the rulers.

      That’s not exactly how it turned out, though, is it?

      In the 200-plus years since we boldly embarked on this experiment in self-government, we have been steadily losing ground to the government’s brazen power grabs, foisted upon us in the so-called name of national security.

      The government has knocked us off our rightful throne. It has usurped our rightful authority. It has staged the ultimate coup. Its agents no longer even pretend that they answer to “we the people.” Worst of all, “we the people” have become desensitized to this constant undermining of our freedoms.

      How do we reconcile the Founders’ vision of the government as an entity whose only purpose is to serve the people with the police state’s insistence that the government is the supreme authority, that its power trumps that of the people themselves, and that it may exercise that power in any way it sees fit (that includes government agents crashing through doors, mass arrests, ethnic cleansing, racial profiling, indefinite detentions without due process, and internment camps)?

      They cannot be reconciled. They are polar opposites.

      We are fast approaching a moment of reckoning where we will be forced to choose between the vision of what America was intended to be (a model for self-governance where power is vested in the people) and the reality of what it has become (a police state where power is vested in the government).

      This slide into totalitarianism—helped along by overcriminalization, government surveillance, militarized police, neighbors turning in neighbors, privatized prisons, and forced labor camps, to name just a few similarities—is tracking very closely with what happened in Germany in the years leading up to Hitler’s rise to power.

      We are walking a dangerous path right now.

      No matter who wins the presidential election come November, it’s a sure bet that the losers will be the American people.

      Despite what is taught in school and the propaganda that is peddled by the media, the 2020 presidential election is not a populist election for a representative. Rather, it’s a gathering of shareholders to select the next CEO, a fact reinforced by the nation’s archaic electoral college system.

      Anyone who believes that this election will bring about any real change in how the American government does business is either incredibly naïve, woefully out-of-touch, or oblivious to the fact that as an in-depth Princeton University study shows, we now live in an oligarchy that is “of the rich, by the rich and for the rich.”

      When a country spends close to $10 billion on elections to select what is, for all intents and purposes, a glorified homecoming king or queen to occupy the White House and fill other government seats, while more than 40 million of its people live in povertymore than 40 million Americans are on unemployment, more than 500,000 Americans are homeless, and analysts forecast it will take a decade to work our way out of the current COVID-induced recession, that’s a country whose priorities are out of step with the needs of its people.

      Be warned, however: the Establishment—the Deep State and its corporate partners that really run the show, pull the strings and dictate the policies, no matter who occupies the Oval Office—is not going to allow anyone to take office who will unravel their power structures. Those who have attempted to do so in the past have been effectively put out of commission.

      Voting sustains the illusion that we have a democratic republic, but it is merely a dictatorship in disguise, or what political scientists Martin Gilens and Benjamin Page more accurately refer to as an “economic élite domination.”

      In such an environment, the economic elite (lobbyists, corporations, monied special interest groups) dictate national policy. As the Princeton University oligarchy study indicates, our elected officials, especially those in the nation’s capital, represent the interests of the rich and powerful rather than the average citizen. As such, the citizenry has little if any impact on the policies of government.

      We have been saddled with a two-party system and fooled into believing that there’s a difference between the Republicans and Democrats, when in fact, the two parties are exactly the same. As one commentator noted, both parties support endless war, engage in out-of-control spending, ignore the citizenry’s basic rights, have no respect for the rule of law, are bought and paid for by Big Business, care most about their own power, and have a long record of expanding government and shrinking liberty

      We’re drowning under the weight of too much debt, too many wars, too much power in the hands of a centralized government run by a corporate elite, too many militarized police, too many laws, too many lobbyists, and generally too much bad news.

      The powers-that-be want us to believe that our job as citizens begins and ends on Election Day. They want us to believe that we have no right to complain about the state of the nation unless we’ve cast our vote one way or the other. They want us to remain divided over politics, hostile to those with whom we disagree politically, and intolerant of anyone or anything whose solutions to what ails this country differ from our own.

      What they don’t want us talking about is the fact that the government is corrupt, the system is rigged, the politicians don’t represent us, the electoral college is a joke, most of the candidates are frauds, and, as I point out in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, we as a nation are repeating the mistakes of history—namely, allowing a totalitarian state to reign over us.

      Former concentration camp inmate Hannah Arendt warned against this when she wrote, “Never has our future been more unpredictable, never have we depended so much on political forces that cannot be trusted to follow the rules of common sense and self-interest—forces that look like sheer insanity, if judged by the standards of other centuries.”

      As we once again find ourselves faced with the prospect of voting for the lesser of two evils, “we the people” have a decision to make: do we simply participate in the collapse of the American republic as it degenerates toward a totalitarian regime, or do we take a stand and reject the pathetic excuse for government that is being fobbed off on us?

      Never forget that the lesser of two evils is still evil.

    • This Is How Propaganda's Supposed To Work: 60% In US Believe Fake Russia Bounty Story
      This Is How Propaganda’s Supposed To Work: 60% In US Believe Fake Russia Bounty Story

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 23:40

      It’s the same Russiagate playbook that’s sadly been the norm for years: breathless headlines are issued, the “walls are closing in”, then officials and media begin slowly walking back key aspects, and said walk-backs are buried in back sections of the Times, the substance of the story is memory-holed, while the vague imprint of the headline remains on the American consciousness. 

      A who’s who of top intelligence and military officials have now denied the the Russian bounties to kill American troops in Afghanistan story which originated in The New York Times weeks ago. The outlets behind the initial reporting themselves have been slowly forced to qualify the story into oblivion.

      And yet a new Reuters/Ipsos polls finds that 60% of Americans view that allegation as “believable.” 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Appears in print on June 27, 2020, Section A, Page 1 

      Reuters describes of the poll:

      A majority of Americans believe that Russia paid the Taliban to kill U.S. soldiers in Afghanistan last year amid negotiations to end the war, and more than half want to respond with new economic sanctions against Moscow, according to a Reuters/Ipsos poll released on Wednesday.

      As an example of how some of the very outlets which pushed the story hard have since walked back many of the central claims, consider the following line from The Washington Post last week, which was certainly awkward for them and the Times:

      The Washington Post reported on Tuesday that White House officials were first informed in early 2019 of intelligence reports that Russia was offering the bounties to kill U.S. and coalition military personnel, but the information was deemed sketchy and in need of additional confirmation, according to people familiar with the matter.

      “Sketchy” and yet the avalanche of headlines are still out there. The Pentagon has flatly denied its accuracy many times over to boot.

      Yes, this is how propaganda is supposed to work. When the ‘Russia boogeyman’ is invoked, especially related to Trump, the threshhold for evidence is low to non-existent.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Reuters continues:

      Overall, 60% of Americans said they found reports of Russian bounties on American soldiers to be “very” or “somewhat” believable, while 21% said they were not credible and the rest were unsure.

      Thirty-nine percent said they thought Trump “did know” about Russia’s targeting of the U.S. military before reports surfaced in the news media last month, while 26% said the president “did nsot know.”

      As AntiWar.com points out, such fake stories and the American public’s gullibility has real-world and potentially very dangerous consequences: “The poll shows that they view Russian President Vladimir Putin as a ‘threat,’ and support a new round of US sanctions against Russia. Alarmingly, 9% even supported attacking Russia outright.”

      “This is undercut by the strong evidence that this plot isn’t true, and never was. The danger is, the US could escalate hostilities and the majority of the public is fine with it,” AntiWar aptly concludes.

    • Congratulations, You've Been Accepted! Now Stay Home
      Congratulations, You’ve Been Accepted! Now Stay Home

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 23:20

      Authored by Elisabeth Wolf via RealClearPolitics.com,

      I have two kids who are supposed to be in college. Home since March, they pushed through quarantine and Zoom spring believing they would return to campuses in the fall. Like thousands of other students, they were recently informed that their colleges are not welcoming them back.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      After four months of committee meetings and emails, colleges and universities across America made the weak decision not to be bold. Rather than showing America how to move forward in a murky moment, institutions of higher education took the low road. Schools announcing partial openings or continuing online demonstrate glaring faults in their mission. They abdicate teaching students maturity, independence, and the ability to care for others in addition to or above themselves.

      Of course, young people can contract COVID-19. The current spike in cases is attributed to young people, and yet young people are not filling up ICUs. According to the Centers for Disease Control, the rate of hospitalization for people who test positive for the coronavirus in their 20s is under 4%. To put this in perspective, the American Psychological Association states that one in three college freshmen worldwide report a mental health disorder. According to Alcohol.org, nearly 2,000 young adults aged 18-24 die each year from alcohol and related accidents. Colleges, unfortunately, are seeing way too many students who are very ill and need extreme medical treatment.

      Since last March, doctors and researchers have confirmed that wearing face masks greatly slows Covid-19 transmission. Physical distancing, testing, isolation of symptomatic cases, and contact tracing are all effective means of slowing and reducing the spread of Coronavirus (see New Zealand and South Korea). Colleges, which operate as autonomous villages or towns, could implement all the recommended tools. Students have identification and are directly connected to school by text and college email accounts. Before Coronavirus, colleges regularly deployed their security teams to break up parties and cite those under 21 for being in a room where there was drinking. Surely, schools can apply these same resources to identifying anyone refusing a mask or overfilling a dorm room or other space.

      Students not complying with rules laid down by the college should be asked to leave. No debate. No hearing. No calls from parents to the dean of students. Students who cannot abide by the straightforward rules should stay home or go home. Wearing masks, keeping respectable distance, handwashing, and sanitizing can keep your roommate, classmates, professors, dean, and dining hall staff safe. Time to learn: Modify your behavior to protect others.

      Schools should have figured this out. Spend some dough. Teach kids more than reading, writing, mathematics, and sharp elbows. Teach kids resilience. Colleges like Colby did. They altered their school calendar, procured 85,000 COVID-19 tests, took over their college-owned inn for additional space, laid down rules, and said: Let’s do this. Colby didn’t pull this off just because they’re small and in Maine; they planned, organized and acted.

      But other schools are taking a patchwork approach. Bowdoin College, 50 miles south of Colby, is only opening for first years and select others. University of Pennsylvania has decided to open to all enrolled students. Tiny Swarthmore College, 20 miles away, is only allowing first years and sophomores. The California State University schools remain online experiences. Clemson will do a three-phase approach to getting students on campus. Why couldn’t colleges and universities do what they ask students to do to prepare them for the world: work together. Coordinate getting all students back. With this random approach, educational experiences will be vastly different for students even at the same school. Will students sitting at a kitchen table be evaluated the same as a student in a classroom? How can these students compete against each other for jobs or graduate schools? Schools’ scattershot approach guarantees additional and deeper inequities in education among young people.

      Students not allowed to return to campus are considering other options, but few exist. Many cannot afford a “gap” year because of student loan commitments, as well as the absence of many job opportunities in a COVID-19-crippled America. Moreover, more than ever, students should congregate to discuss social injustice and racial inequality. Looking into other students’ eyes (over their masks) is more meaningful and requires more patience, thoughtfulness, and confidence than hitting a “delete” button. What a time to leave young people stuck in their childhood homes when they have adult ideas, dreams, and impetus to bring change!

      Instead, thousands of young people are dealing with U-turns, off ramps, and stop signs on the road to adulthood. They have no map. Federal, state, and local leadership has not given clear and consistent messages and, now, neither have colleges. Certainly, schools have to provide safe working conditions for professors, particularly those over 65. Yet, in addition to Zoom and other technology, can’t schools’ engineering professors develop portable plexiglass barriers? Can professors conduct class outside buildings? Could science departments share laboratory protective gear with other professors? Young people are naturally creative thinkers. Those who administer their campuses should be too. At least they should embrace the same standards to which the students are held. Colleges faced the problem of how to manage their students, campus housing, and classrooms with the variable of COVID-19. Instead of solving the equation, many colleges just slashed the numbers. I asked my daughter, a math major, what would happen if she had a complex problem but couldn’t solve it right away. Could she ask the professor for simpler numbers? Her answer, “Not if I wanted to pass the class.” 

      Further by-products of colleges not welcoming back students include depressing local economies, laying off or reducing pay for college employees, and preventing students from voting in November in towns and states where their votes could have an impact. In a blind abdication of their responsibility to students, schools not completely opening have ignored the mental health implication of their decision. According to the Chronicle of Higher Education, this pandemic has worsened student mental health. Those sitting at home or whatever safe space they can find this coming semester will be deprived of friendships, mentors, counseling, and many of the coping strategies developed when they leapt to new lives. 

      At the beginning of the COVID-19 shutdowns, farmers had to dump or destroy fresh milk, eggs and produce at the same time thousands needed food. I wondered why, in the greatest, most technologically advanced democracy, we could not coordinate getting this food to the hungry. I assumed it was a timing issue. There was just not enough time to coordinate and make the arrangements. Colleges and universities not welcoming back all students are doing the equivalent of dumping this crop of students. However, they do not have the excuse of not enough time. They have had months. They have had the benefit of knowing what can work to slow the virus.

      Instead, they gave up.  

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As for the millions of students left off campus, whether or not you have an American passport, your chance to change the world may be delayed or just take another direction. It’s not gone. My favorite college counselor in the world, now retired in his late 80s, Mr. James Richardson, had a sign hanging in his office that read, “Grow where you are planted.” Without the help of colleges or universities, your resilience will blossom. 

    • Hong Kong Banks Conducting "Emergency Audits" Of Clients For Exposure To US Sanctions
      Hong Kong Banks Conducting “Emergency Audits” Of Clients For Exposure To US Sanctions

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 23:00

      Shortly after we reported that in anticipation of soon-to-be-enacted US sanctions – dubbed the Hong Kong autonomy act – which will penalize Chinese banks for serving officials who implement the new National Security Law in Hong Kong, Chinese commercial megabanks such as Bank of China and Industrial and Commercial Bank of China (ICBC) were looking at the possibility of being cut off from U.S. dollars or losing access to U.S. dollar settlements, as well as planning for a run on Hong Kong branches if customers feared these could run out of U.S. currency, the FT reports that US and European banks in Hong Kong are conducting emergency audits of their clients to identify Chinese and Hong Kong officials and corporates that could face US sanctions over a new national security law.

      According to the report, at least two large international banks in Hong Kong were studying which of their clients and partners might be exposed to sanctions under the Autonomy act and with which they might have to terminate their business relationships.

      A person at one of the banks said that cutting off the clients could hit revenues from Chinese banks and the country’s state-owned enterprises, but that could not be helped. “If they are sanctioned [we] can’t touch them,” the FT source said.

      To be sure, there are plenty of banks that don’t want to jeopardize their goodwill with SWIFT: foreign banks such as HSBC, Standard Chartered and Citibank have retail outlets in Hong Kong, while global investment banks JPMorgan, Goldman Sachs, Bank of America, UBS and others have offices in the Asian financial hub. Large Chinese banks with international operations, such as Bank of China (Hong Kong), are also dominant in the city. In addition, the sanctions could hit the territory’s international fund managers and insurers.

      “Some of them are going through that exercise of looking at their existing client base and seeing where the risks are,” said Chen Zhu, a lawyer at Davis Polk who advises institutions on the impact of economic sanctions.

      While it remains unclear just how forcefully US would pursue its sanctions in Hong Kong, these could range from freezing the property of individuals and companies to cutting them out of the US financial system. They could also stop banks from conducting foreign exchange transactions over which the US has jurisdiction, implying that Washington could try to curb their access to dollars, a move which is seen by many as a nuclear option.

      The act could force financial institutions to choose between doing business with the US or China, lawyers said. Hong Kong’s national security law makes it illegal to comply with US sanctions against Hong Kong and China.

      Another person at a bank who was familiar with the matter said: “I think at this stage everyone sensible is taking a look through their client lists and mapping out the various different scenarios.”

      “It’s speculative because the list isn’t out yet and our assumption is that it may not be that long. But the situation at the moment means you also have to consider worse scenarios where it does have an impact on your business and you need to plan how to react,” the person said.

      US officials are expected to unveil details of the list in the months following the introduction of the act.

      Meanwhile, Hong Kong’s financial industry discussed the potential conflict between the Chinese and US laws at a meeting with the Hong Kong Monetary Authority, the territory’s central bank, this week. But few expect firm advice on how business and banks can ensure compliance with the national security law, which outlaws subversion, secession, terrorism and colluding with foreign forces but has been criticized for being vaguely defined. “Who is going to tell [Chinese president] Xi Jinping your law needs a bit more clarity,” said one person at a bank who was familiar with the matter.

      Kher Sheng Lee, head of Hong Kong’s Alternative Investment Management Association, said hedge funds typically outsourced sanctions compliance to fund administrators. But some of the “more proactive” funds would also be examining how exposed they were to potentially sanctioned individuals and companies under the act.

      Mr Lee said these funds were expecting the impact to be “quite minimal”.

      “If the name is caught up on the list they would have to explore appropriate steps, including effecting a compulsory redemption and expelling that investor out of the fund. Unless there are major investors on the list, I expect this is something they will be able to manage,” he said.

      Most, however, appear to be in denial: as the FT concludes, many bankers in the city argued that there was a lot of “bluff and bluster” from the US on Hong Kong. They said the implementation of the act could be much less severe than expected, especially as the timeframe for the implementation of the sanctions could stretch beyond the US election.

      “Financial institutions are concerned as there is uncertainty and they are looking for additional guidance from US agencies,” said Nicholas Turner of Steptoe, who advises financial institutions on sanctions compliance.

      It is this belief that Trump is ultimately bluffing and merely posturing in his hardline stance toward China that has resulted in virtually no impact on risk assets. Some, however, like Rabobank’s Michael Hartnett, believe that once the laws have been passed, it is largely out of the hands of both Xi and Trump, as the escalation is now out of both their hands, and it is only a matter of time before global stock markets realize that the world’s two biggest superpowers are now in a state of cold war.

    • Iran To Help Syria With Air Defense To Repel US, Israeli Attacks
      Iran To Help Syria With Air Defense To Repel US, Israeli Attacks

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 22:40

      Submitted by South Front,

      Iran will help to strengthen Syrian air defense capabilities as part of a wider military security agreement between the two countries, Chairman of the Chiefs of Staff of the Iranian Armed Forces Major General Mohammad Baqeri said on July 8. The statement was made after the signing of a new military cooperation agreement in Damascus.

      The agreement provides for the expansion of military and security cooperation and the continuation of coordination between the Armed Forces of the two countries. Major General Baqeri said that the signed deal “increases our will to work together in the face of US pressure.”

      “If the American administrations had been able to subjugate Syria, Iran and the axis of resistance, they would not have hesitated for a moment,” he said.

      The major general emphasized that Israel is a “powerful partner” of the US in the war against Syria, claiming that terrorist groups constituted part of the Israeli aggression.

      In their turn, the United States and Israel insist that Iran and Hezbollah are responsible for the destabilization of Syria and prepare what they call ‘terrorist attacks’ against the US and Israel. In the framework of this approach, Israel, with direct and indirect help from the US, regularly conducts strikes on various supposedly ‘Iranian targets’ across Syria. Often these strikes concur with large-scale attacks of al-Qaeda-linked groups and ISIS on positions of the Syrian Army and its allies. One of the main points of Israeli concern is the growing military infrastructure of pro-Iranian forces near al-Bukamal, on the Syrian-Iraqi border. Therefore, the announced move by Iran to boost Syrian air defenses, including possible deployment of additional air defense systems, is a logical step for them to take to protect their own interests.

      Clashes between the Syrian Army and Turkish-backed militants were ongoing in western Aleppo late on July 8 and early on July 9. According to pro-militant sources, the army destroyed at least one bulldozer and killed 2 members of the National Front for Liberation. Turkish proxies insist that their mortar strikes on army positions also led to casualties.

      In southern Idlib, the Syrian Army shelled positions of Hayat Tahrir al-Sham near Ruwaihah after the terrorist group sent additional reinforcements there under the cover of the ceasefire regime. On the morning of July 9th, Hayat Tahrir al-Sham units continued their deployment in the area. Since the signing of the March 5 ceasefire agreement between Turkey and Russia, Hayat Tahrir al-Sham has been openly working to strengthen its positions in southern Idlib. Despite the successes in the conducting of joint Russian-Turkish patrols along the M4 highway, which even reached Jisr al-Shughur, the highway itself and the agreed security zone area along it in fact remain in the hands of Idlib militants.

      Pro-ISIS sources claimed that the terrorist group’s cells have ambushed a unit of pro-government forces in the Homs-Deir Ezzor desert destroying at least one vehicle. These claims have yet to be confirmed. However, the situation in central Syria has recently deteriorated due to the increase in ISIS attacks and government forces are now conducting active security operations there.

    • Manhattan Rental Market Implodes: Median Rent Plunges Most Ever As Vacancies Hit Record High
      Manhattan Rental Market Implodes: Median Rent Plunges Most Ever As Vacancies Hit Record High

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 22:20

      It’s nost just Manhattan’s housing market that is getting crushed in recent weeks: the city’s rental market is also starting to show the damage from a pandemic-fueled exodus. According to Douglas Elliman Real Estate and appraiser Miller Samuel, the borough’s apartment-vacancy rate in June rose to the highest on record. Available listings surged 85% from a year earlier to 10,789,  an all-time high for a single month.

      Predictably, all that excess inventory has put a dent in pricing with the median rent tumbling 6.6% to $3,242, the first decline in 18 months and the biggest in data going back to October 2011, according to Jonathan Miller, president of Miller Samuel.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “It does give context to the scale of the movement out of Manhattan during the crisis,” Miller said in an interview with Bloomberg, which notes that “many New Yorkers have lost their taste for dense city living while the coronavirus raged, shuttering office buildings and giving people few reasons to stick around.”

      The delayed response is because apartments vacated during the three-month lockdown were heaped onto the market at the end of June, when the state lifted the ban on in-person real estate showings.

      New lease signings jumped 45% last month from May, with 3,171 apartments finding takers, Miller Samuel and Douglas Elliman said. To get those tenants, landlords had to offer average rent discounts of 2%, more than double what they were giving last year. They also piled on sweeteners, such as free months and payment of broker fees, in 45% of deals.

      Even with all that, the vacancy rate still climbed to 3.67%, a record in data going back to August 2006. The rate had never before topped 3%, according to Miller.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “We’re in for a summer season that is going to be all about supply,” he said.

    • Trump Reaps The Whirlwind With China/Iran Mega Deal
      Trump Reaps The Whirlwind With China/Iran Mega Deal

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 22:00

      Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

      For more than three years I’ve tried to explain that President Trump’s foreign policy was having the exact opposite effect of its intended purpose.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Trump, under the advice of people like John Bolton, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu and Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman (MBS) has pursued a maximum pressure campaign against Iran in the hopes of the regime either crumbling or suing for peace.

      Trump was warned by both Chinese Premier Xi Jinping and Russian President Vladimir Putin that Iran would ‘rather eat dirt’ than submit to him on nuclear weapons, support for Hezbollah, Iraq and President Bashar al-Assad in Syria.

      In effect, Trump and Pompeo have argued for Iran to give up its sovereignty to appease the fears of Netanyahu in Israel, and they have steadfastly told Bibi and The Donald to go pound sand.

      Every six months or so, depending on the state of domestic affairs, tensions with Iran ratchet up another notch. Over the past couple of weeks a series of explosions at key Iranian military facilities occurred with fingerprints of Israel striking deep into Iran to cripple strategic targets.

      Trump, distracted by the domestic insurrection against him, has left foreign policy strictly to Pompeo who is avidly pursuing a ‘have his cake and eat it too moment,’ trying to extend the weapons embargo against Iran at the United Nations while still claiming the unilateral right to leave the JCPOA without further consequences.

      In a word, Russia, China and Europe are telling him, “No.”

      And now we know why. China and Iran just inked a 25-year, game-changing strategic deal covering everything from oil sales, contract bids and massive upgrades to Iran’s anti-air capabilities as well as its domestic air force.

      This deal was in the air over the weekend when Iranian Foriegn Minister Javad Zarif briefed Iranian lawmakers on the pending deal.

      From Simon Watkins at Oilprice.com via Zerohedge who is arguing the deal was actually inked last year:

      One of the secret elements of the deal signed last year is that China will invest US$280 billion in developing Iran’s oil, gas, and petrochemicals sectors. This amount will be front-loaded into the first five-year period of the new 25-year deal, and the understanding is that further amounts will be available in each subsequent five year period, provided that both parties agree. There will be another US$120 billion of investment, which again can be front-loaded into the first five-year period, for upgrading Iran’s transport and manufacturing infrastructure, and again subject to increase in each subsequent period should both parties agree. In exchange for this, to begin with, Chinese companies will be given the first option to bid on any new – or stalled or uncompleted – oil, gas, and petrochemicals projects in Iran. China will also be able to buy any and all oil, gas, and petchems products at a minimum guaranteed discount of 12 per cent to the six-month rolling mean average price of comparable benchmark products, plus another 6 to 8 per cent of that metric for risk-adjusted compensation. Additionally, China will be granted the right to delay payment for up to two years and, significantly, it will be able to pay in soft currencies that it has accrued from doing business in Africa and the Former Soviet Union states.

      You can almost hear MBS’ sobs from here. Because there is no way the Saudis can compete with this. This is a strategic move by Iran to ensure that

      1. Iran has guaranteed oil exports despite U.S. sanctions

      2. The Iranian economy de-dollarizes faster

      3. Iran and Iraq, by extension, integrate into China’s One Belt, One Road project.

      4. Saudi Arabia’s position as the leader of the Arab oil-producing world is destroyed.

      5. Iran’s ability to withstand U.S. sanctions pressure rises dramatically

      This also dovetails with China’s eschewing Saudi oil for Russian Urals gradeAt the same time China is working on putting a buyer’s group together to further marginalize Saudi oil pricing policy of setting tenders on a monthly basis.

      Moreover, China wants its oil futures contract in Shanghai more dominant in the global market. That contract is a key piece to deepening Yuan liquidity.

      Shifting the oil trade where it can trade in real time versus would be a boon to the market. Most of the Arab states set their tender prices at the beginning of the month and they don’t change.

      Now let’s tie this into what’s happening in Hong Kong, where President Trump is threatening the Hong Kong Dollar’s peg to the U.S. dollar to try and cause China economic pain.

      But China wants this to happen. It obviously doesn’t want Hong Kong to continue being the source of China’s international liquidity which is also retarding the internationalization of the yuan as a trade settlement currency.

      I’ve been steadfast in my belief that China is ready to let Hong Kong go as a financial center. It is getting prepared to move its financial center to Shanghai, where its oil and gold futures contracts trade, the latter also convertible into gold.

      The folly of all of this bluff and bluster is that Trump never wanted a war with Iran as the dramatic events from last year made clear. He simply wanted to force everyone to the bargaining table and renegotiate the JCPOA on Israel’s terms.

      But the means and manner in which he went about this was both deeply insulting and demeaning.

      Proud people like Iranians don’t respond to those kinds of cheap, gangster-like tactics and Trump has found out the hard way that treating international politics like negotiating a real estate deal doesn’t work.

      There’s always someone else willing to come in and find their comparative advantage. So, this deal with China was always on the table, lurking in the background.

      Israel pushed Trump to ditch the JCPOA to escalate the situation to their advantage. It gives Netanyahu every justification to send his air force around bombing targets in not just Syria, but now Iraq and Iran, increasing the likelihood of bringing Russia and China deeper into the region to defend its ally.

      Every argument made to me over the past four years on this point has downplayed the idea that Russia and China would not come to Iran’s aid.

      And yet it has steadily occurred.

      All Trump did was help China get better terms on this deal with Iran than it would have gotten had he not gone full bull in an open-air marketplace.

      Now that this deal has leaked out into the world we can see why Mike Pompeo is so desperately trying to re-impose the weapons embargo against Iran per the snap-back provisions of the JCPOA.

      Because part of this deal is for China and Russia to sell Iran massive upgrades to both their anti-air defenses, namely Russian S-400’s, and to its air force.

      Again from Watkins at Oilprice:

      OilPrice.com understands from the Iranian sources that the bombers to be deployed will be China-modified versions of the long-range Russian Tupolev Tu-22M3s, with a manufacturing specification range of 6,800 kilometres (2,410 km with a  typical weapons load), and the fighters will be the all-weather supersonic medium-range fighter bomber/strike Sukhoi Su-34, plus the newer single-seat stealth attack Sukhoi-57. It is apposite to note that in August 2016, Russia used the Hamedan airbase to launch attacks on targets in Syria using both Tupolev-22M3 long-range bombers and Sukhoi-34 strike fighters. At the same time, Chinese and Russian military vessels will be able to use newly-created dual-use facilities at Iran’s key ports at Chabahar, Bandar-e-Bushehr, and Bandar Abbas, constructed by Chinese companies.

      Moreover, Iran’s military will further integrate Russian Electronic Warfare (EW) protocols into its structures. Remember Russia treats EW as a vital and integral part of its military capabilities. It isn’t an add-on or adjunct to core military operations.

      EW is integrated into Russian military operations down to the squad level.

      The bottom line is that this deal cements the Russian/Chinese/Iranian axis as an unbreakable thing. For nearly four years Trump’s team has pushed him to try and break this alliance up, but did so with tactics which only pushed them closer together.

      All stick and no carrot after decades of the same treatment while showing no capability of abiding by any deal struck was never a recipe for driving a wedge between these people.

      So, we’re left with the following situation which, actually, is quite dangerous. The U.S.’s position in Iraq is ultimately tenuous, like it is in Syria. Iran will now be flush with Chinese money to rebuild not only its oil and gas export business but better support its allies in Lebanon, Syria and Yemen.

      Those same men pushed Trump to the brink of war in the end are still in his ear. And they are pushing a scorched earth policy of economic privation effecting social and political unrest.

      But all that does is create the opportunity for China to step out from behind the curtain and into the spotlight.

      And for the sin on not going to war with Iran he’s being roasted by neoconservatives at home who have openly now joined forces with the Democrats to campaign against him.

      If he wants to stay in power he may have to appease them one last time, as his anti-China, anti-EU campaign strategy comes to a head in October when the arms embargo against Iran expires.

      In article after article I patiently explained how and why Trump and the U.S. had no real leverage over Iran short of bombing the country back to the stone age. That would never happen on Trump’s watch because Iran’s leadership would never do anything so overt as to invite that response.

      Even the attack on the U.S. bases in Iraq in January in response to Trump’s miscalculated assassination of General Qassem Soleimani was measured, precise and, officially, without U.S. casualties. If there was ever a moment for the Iranians to make a strategic mistake that invited Trump’s wrath, it was that.

      And once his bluff was called there, that was the end of Energy Dominance and the entire strategy of isolating Iran.

      At the same time those strikes demonstrated an ability to deliver blows far ahead of anything Trump had been briefed on by his advisers.

      And the consequences would be catastrophic, especially for not only Saudi Arabia, which got a small taste of what could come their way, but also Israel.

      Back then we were all worried about what would happen if Iran attacked oil tankers in the Persian Gulf sending oil to $200 per barrel. The financial derivative meltdown and subsequent supply chain disruptions would have been existential.

      Today we’re living through what happens when the opposite occurs and oil plunges to $18 per barrel, thanks to Vladimir Putin finally telling both OPEC+ and the U.S., “No.”

      The outcome is pretty much the same, a meltdown of Western markets financialized to the point of self-destruction which has now plunged both the U.S. and Europe into political chaos.

      Into that vacuum China and Russia can now move openly into central Asia, and impose their will over the future of the region without having to fight anything more dangerous than skirmishes.

      China secures its future energy needs and the supply lines for cross-continental trade. It establishes itself as the new power broker in the region alongside Russia who supplies the military prowess and a broke and battered U.S. can only fight rearguard actions while its allies there sink further into irrelevancy.

      *  *  *

      Join my Patreon if you want to understand the stupidity of powerful men. Install the Brave Browser to combat Google’s attempts to keep us from talking about them.

    • UN Report "Whitewashing" Terrorists As Soleimani Was "Bloodiest Terrorist In The World": State Dept
      UN Report “Whitewashing” Terrorists As Soleimani Was “Bloodiest Terrorist In The World”: State Dept

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 21:40

      Washington has lashed out at a new United Nations report which was the result of a months-long investigation into the Jan. 3rd killing by US drone strike of Iran’s IRGC General Qassem Soleimani and his entourage.

      UN special rapporteur on extrajudicial, summary or arbitrary executions Agnes Callamard is due to submit the report to a UN Human Rights session Thursday. It calls the Soleimani assassination “unlawful” and deems it an “arbitrary killing” — especially given, according to the UN findings, there exists no evidence that Soleimani was planning an imminent attack on the United States or its personnel. 

      The US State Department blasted the report and denied the killing of the late Quds Force commander violated international law. Spokesperson Morgan Ortagus in Wednesday comments addressing the report called Soleimani “the bloodiest terrorist in the world”.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      She further said the UN is essentially “whitewashing” crimes and giving a pass to terrorists:

      “It takes a special kind of intellectual dishonesty to issue a report condemning the United States for acting in self-defense while whitewashing General Soleimani’s notorious past as one of the world’s deadliest terrorists,” Ortagus said on Wednesday.

      “This tendentious and tedious report undermines human rights by giving a pass to terrorists and it proves once again why America was right to leave” the UN Human Rights Council in 2018, she added.

      She asserted that Soleimani had been “committing terrorist acts to destabilize the Middle East over the past twenty years.”

      “Soleimani and his Quds Force are responsible for killing hundreds of American and coalition forces and wounding thousands of others,” she added. Deputy Head of Iraq’s Popular Mobilization Units, Abu Mahdi Al-Mohandis, was also killed in the strike, which the US also accused of killing Americans at Tehran’s bidding.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Recall that in first announcing the January assassination to the US public, which put the Mideast region on war footing, also resulting in an Iranian cruise missile strike on bases in Iraq where US personnel are present, President Trump said the targeted killing prevented more American deaths.

      “Soleimani was plotting imminent and sinister attacks on American diplomats and military personnel, but we caught him in the act and terminated him,” Trump said at the time.

      The US has taken issue from the start over Soleimani being considered by many European countries as a ‘state official’. Washington has instead deemed he and the elite Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) as terrorists, and thus legitimate targets of US military action.

      However, the new UN report has highlighted that never before has a member nation claimed ‘right to self-defense’ as rationale for killing a state official in a third country.

    • Remember The Red Guards Before You Cheer The Woke Mobs
      Remember The Red Guards Before You Cheer The Woke Mobs

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 21:20

      Authored by Peter Van Buren via TheAmericanConservative.com,

      Today statues, tomorrow mass firings… or even worse. There’s a history here.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      I’m ambivalent about statues and J.K. Rowling being torn down, but terrified of the thought process behind the destruction. Decisions should never be made by mobs. 

      Is America on the edge of a cultural revolution?

      The historical namesake and obvious parallel is the Cultural Revolution in China, which lasted from 1966 to 1976. Its stated goal was to purge capitalist and traditional elements from society, and to substitute a new way of thinking based on Mao’s own beliefs. The epic struggle for control and power waged war against anybody on the wrong side of an idea.

      To set the mobs on somebody, one needed only to tie him to an official blacklist like the Four Olds (old customs, culture, habits, and ideas). China’s young people and urban workers formed Red Guard units to go after whomever was outed. Violence? Yes, please. When Mao launched the movement in May 1966, he told his mobs to “bombard the headquarters” and made clear that “to rebel is justified.” He said “revisionists should be removed through violent class struggle.” The old thinkers were everywhere and were systematically trying to preserve their power and subjugate the people.

      Whetted, the mobs took the task to heart: Red Guards destroyed historical relics, statues, and artifacts, and ransacked cultural and religious sites. Libraries were burned. Religion was considered a tool of capitalists and so churches were destroyed—even the Temple of Confucius was wrecked. Eventually the Red Guards moved on to openly killing people who did not think as they did. Where were the police? The cops were told not to intervene in Red Guard activities, and if they did, the national police chief pardoned the Guards for any crimes.

      Education was singled out, as it was the way the old values were preserved and transmitted. Teachers, particularly those at universities, were considered the “Stinking Old Ninth” and were widely persecuted. The lucky ones just suffered the public humiliation of shaved heads, while others were tortured. Many were slaughtered or harassed into suicide. Schools and universities eventually closed down and over 10 million former students were sent to the countryside to labor under the Down to the Countryside Movement. A lost generation was abandoned to fester, uneducated. Red Guard pogroms eventually came to include the cannibalization of revisionists. After all, as Mao said, a revolution is not a dinner party.

      The Cultural Revolution destroyed China’s economy and traditional culture, leaving behind a possible death toll ranging from one to 20 million. Nobody really knows. It was a war on the way people think. And it failed. One immediate consequence of the Revolution’s failure was the rise in power of the military after regular people decided they’d had enough and wanted order restored. China then became even more of a capitalist society than it had ever imagined in pre-Revolution days. Oh well.

      I spoke with an elderly Chinese academic who had been forced from her classroom and made to sleep outside with the animals during the Revolution. She recalled forced self-criticism sessions that required her to guess at her crimes, as she’d done nothing more than teach literature, a kind of systematic revisionism in that it espoused beliefs her tormentors thought contributed to the rotten society. She also had to write out long apologies for being who she was. She was personally held responsible for 4,000 years of oppression of the masses. Our meeting was last year, before white guilt became a whole category on Netflix, but I wonder if she’d see now how similar it all is.

      That’s probably a longer version of events than a column like this would usually feature. A tragedy on the scale of the Holocaust in terms of human lives, an attempt to destroy culture on a level that would embarrass the Taliban—this topic is not widely taught in American colleges, never mind in China.

      It should be taught, because history rhymes. Chinese students are again outing teachers, sometimes via cellphone videos, for “improper speech,” teaching hurtful things from the past using the wrong vocabulary. Other Chinese intellectuals are harassed online for holding outlier positions, or lose their jobs for teaching novels with the wrong values. Once abhorred as anti-free speech, most UC Berkeley students would likely now agree that such steps are proper. In Minnesota, To Kill A Mockingbird and Huckleberry Finn are banned because fictional characters use a racial slur.

      There are no statues to the Cultural Revolution here or in China. Nobody builds monuments to chaos. But it’s never really about the statues anyway. In America, we moved quickly from demands to tear down the statues of Robert E. Lee to Thomas Jefferson to basically any Caucasian, including “White Jesus.

      Of course, it was never going to stop with Confederate generals because it was not really about racism any more than the Cultural Revolution was really about capitalism. This is about rewriting history for political ends, both short-term power grabs (Not Trump 2020!) and longer term societal changes that one critic calls the “successor ideology,” the melange of academic radicalism now seeking hegemony throughout American institutions. Douglas Murray is more succinct. The purpose “is to embed a new metaphysics into our societies: a new religion.” The ideas—centered on there being only one accepted way of thought—are a tool of control.

      It remains to be seen where America goes next in its own nascent cultural revolution. Like slow dancing in eighth grade, maybe nothing will come of it. These early stages, where the victims are Uncle Ben, Aunt Jemima, someone losing her temper while walking a dog in Central Park, and canceled celebrities, are a far cry from the millions murdered for the same goals in China. Much of what appears revolutionary is just Internet pranking and common looting amplified by an agendaized media. One writer sees “cancel culture as a game, the point of which is to impose unemployment on people as a form of recreation.” B-list celebs and Karens in the parking lot are easy enough targets. Ask the Red Guards: it’s fun to break things.

      Still, the intellectual roots of our revolution and China’s seem similar: the hate of the old, the need for unacceptable ideas to be disappeared in the name of social progress, intolerance toward dissent, violence to enforce conformity. 

      In America these are spreading outward from our universities so that everywhere today—movies, TV, publishing, news, ads, sports—is an Oberlin where in the name of free speech “hate speech” is banned, and in the name of safety dangerous ideas and the people who hold them are not only not discussed but canceled, shot down via the projectile of the heckler’s veto, unfriended, demonetized, deleted, de-platformed, demeaned, chased after by mobs both real and online in a horrible blend of self-righteousness and cyber bullying. They don’t believe in a marketplace of ideas. Ideas to the mob are either right or wrong and the “wrong” ones must be banished. The choices to survive the mobs are conformity or silence. In China, you showed conformity by carrying around Mao’s Little Red Book. In America, you wear a soiled surgical mask to the supermarket.

      The philosophical spadework for an American Cultural Revolution is done. Switch the terms capitalism and revisionism with racism and white supremacy in some of Mao’s speeches and you have a decent speech draft for a Black Lives Matter rally. Actually, you can keep Mao’s references to destroying capitalism, as they track pretty closely with progressive thought in 2020 America.

      History is not there to make anyone feel safe or justify current theories about policing. History exists so we can learn from it, and for us to learn from it, it has to exist for us to study it, to be offended and uncomfortable with it, to bathe in it, to taste it bitter or sweet. When you wash your hands of an idea, you lose all the other ideas that grew to challenge it. Think of those as antibodies fighting a disease. What happens when they are no longer at the ready? What happens when a body forgets how to fight an illness? What happens when a society forgets how to challenge a bad idea with a better one?

    • Top Communist Party Official: China, US Headed For "Complete Economic Decoupling"
      Top Communist Party Official: China, US Headed For “Complete Economic Decoupling”

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 21:00

      It’s fair to say that tensions between the US and China have escalated to levels unseen since the days of the Nixon Administration, when the bilateral relationship between the two countries finally began as the Communists abandoned their commitment to isolation and insulation from the capitalist west.

      Though it has never garnered much attention in the headines, the US Navy has increasingly flexed its military muscle in the contested South China Sea, which Beijing claims as sovereign Chinese territory, despite an ICC ruling repudiating China’s claims to some of these reefs and islands in the south and east china seas.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Over the past week, the Navy sent two aircraft carriers to begin some of the largest military exercises that US forces have ever hosted in the South China Sea, a show of strength with a clear message: That the US stands ready to counter China’s military ambitions in the Pacific.

      A reporter for the Nikkei Asian Review noted Thursday that a former high-ranking CCP official this week published an editorial in a key academic journal that appears to cut against the Party line, and suggest an even more radical solution: complete economic decoupling from the US.

      The author is careful to address the fact that isolationism has a bad history in the 20th Century in China: Instead of China going it alone, Zhou Li, a 65-year-old former deputy head of the Chinese Communist Party’s International Liaison Department, argues that a competing “yuan-based” economic bloc must emerge to rival the dollar-based financial system.

      In a commentary piece, a writer for Nikkei breaks down Zhou’s argument:

      It has been a tense first week of July in the seas of Asia.

      While two U.S. aircraft carriers, the USS Ronald Reagan and the USS Nimitz, launched hundreds of aircraft daily into the skies above the South China Sea, China was conducting naval exercises in the same sea. In a rare and symbolic move, the People’s Liberation Army Navy also carried out live-fire drills in the East China Sea and the Yellow Sea.

      Amid the tensions, one published article has been the talk of the town in many Chinese circles. Written on the assumption that the novel coronavirus will disrupt China and the world for an extended period, the content is highly controversial.

      The article predicts industrial supply chains being torn up, a China-U.S. decoupling and a world split into dollar and yuan economic blocs.

      The author is Zhou Li, a 65-year-old former deputy head of the Chinese Communist Party’s International Liaison Department, a division in charge of party-led diplomacy. His views notably differ from the official Chinese government line; they are also radical.

      Zhou says Chinese must prepare:

      1. For the deterioration of Sino-U.S. relations and the full escalation of the struggle.
      2. To cope with shrinking external demand and a disruption of supply chains.
      3. For a new normal of coexisting with the novel coronavirus pandemic over the long term.
      4. To leave the dollar hegemony and gradually realize the decoupling of the yuan from the dollar.
      5. For the outbreak of a global food crisis.
      6. For a resurgence of international terrorism.

      Zhou does not shy from painting a grim picture of the Chinese economy, and his wording clearly differs from that of official documents prepared by government bureaucrats.

      “Many international economic organizations such as the International Monetary Fund have issued reports downgrading global economic growth this year to as much as minus 4.9%, the worst economic recession since the Great Depression in the 1930s,” Zhou wrote.

      The article goes on: “The order log at our exporters has been greatly reduced. Production at enterprises upstream and downstream has stalled. International transportation logistics have been blocked. Raw materials are lacking and plants are unable to deliver their products.

      This phenomenon is putting huge pressure on our stable growth and job security.”

      While not spelling it out, Zhou was hinting that China’s current economic situation is so harsh that it too could post zero or negative growth.

      It is precisely the “black swan” – a serious incident that defies conventional wisdom and is unforeseen – that President Xi Jinping has been warning about.

      Furthermore, Zhou indicated that the yuan bloc is on its back foot. “The U.S. controls the main channel for international payment and clearing, namely through SWIFT,” he wrote, noting that the international payment information of Chinese, Russian and Iranian companies is in Washington’s hands.

      Disrupted supply chains would inevitably deliver a blow to the 5G strategy of Chinese telecoms equipment maker Huawei.

      If Zhou’s predictions are correct, various future plans of Xi’s would crumble.

      But there is an even bigger problem.

      If China barrels ahead to go beyond building an economic bloc and chooses to isolate itself, it will no doubt revert to the world before its accession to the World Trade Organization at the end of 2001, a stepping stone for the high economic growth that followed.

      Worse, China may travel back in time to before it established diplomatic ties with the U.S. in 1979, during the Cold War.

      China’s historic rapprochement with the U.S. came a few years after the end of the 1966-1976 Cultural Revolution, a political campaign launched by Mao Zedong, during which numerous innocent people became victims after being stigmatized as counterrevolutionaries.

      The Cultural Revolution followed the 1958-1961 Great Leap Forward, a reckless campaign also launched at the behest of Mao to pursue a big increase in agricultural and industrial production. The campaign failed, and a huge number of people starved to death.

      To be sure, Xi has recently issued an order to prepare for the worst, including in China’s relations with the U.S., using the expression “bottom-line thinking,” or assuming the worst.

      But until now, it had been taboo in China to refer to just how far the situation surrounding China might deteriorate due to the “new Cold War.”

      “In the six months since the outbreak, the US ruling authorities – including the Trump administration and the U.S. Congress – have continued to strengthen their pressure on China,” Zhou wrote, citing examples such as canceling preferential treatment for Hong Kong and sending warships to the Taiwan Strait and the South China Sea.

      He said the U.S. attempted to write “China “Virus” into U.N. Security Council resolutions and that it was trying to seize U.S. Treasury bonds purchased by China as compensation for the pandemic.

      Zhou is not a mere scholar. He is a figure who was close to the center of the party’s diplomatic nerve center.

      Furthermore, his article appeared in a newspaper published by the Chinese Academy of Social Sciences, a government-affiliated think tank. It appeared as part of a special feature about “a community with a shared future for humanity.”

      Amid a compilation of articles praising Xi’s concept of a “community with a shared future for humanity,” Zhou’s article oddly stands out. It was as if to say that the “community” Xi envisions is that of an economic bloc.

      The article has sparked a torrent of interpretations and speculation as to why China dared to reveal a doomsday scenario.

      In a straightforward interpretation, Zhou’s article could be an attempt at preemptive-damage control ahead of a sudden move toward decoupling, which would rattle the Chinese people and could lead to social unrest.

      The article has left Chinese readers with a sense of resolve. “China will never lose,” and, “Beat the U.S.” are frequent comments left by those who read it.

      Some Chinese have reacted coolly to the article. “U.S.-China decoupling is a pipe dream,” one reader said. “There is no way that we can get along through such a method.” This view is shared by other skeptical readers.

      Others say it could be in line with the traditional way of expressing views euphemistically. While seeming to be loyal to the party, these euphemistic articles often level criticism or give advice to the party.

      In the second half of his article, Zhou touched on higher food prices, which have already been laid bare, and the possible coming of a global food crisis.

      In the past, China, the world’s biggest importer of soybeans, gave up on food self-sufficiency as it pursued industrialization. Without an international environment that helps the global economy to thrive, China could not feed its people.

      Some say Zhou’s article could be an indirect expression of dissatisfaction toward a current leadership team that is running out of control.

      It is of great interest how Zhou, a former diplomat stationed in Moscow, analyzed the self-destruction of the Soviet Union after it was driven into an economic corner.

      The demise of the Soviet Union is a topic in which Xi himself has been interested. He sees it as a bad example that China must avoid.

      He once said, “Why did the Soviet Union disintegrate? Why did the Soviet Communist Party collapse? An important reason was that their ideals and convictions wavered.”

      “Finally, all it took was one careless word from Mikhail Gorbachev to dissolve the Soviet Communist Party, and a great party was gone,” he said.

      Xi made the remarks in Guangdong Province in December 2012, shortly after taking the helm of the Chinese Communist Party as its general secretary.

      Xi is firmly determined to protect his communist rule at any cost and prevent any moves that could lead to “color revolutions.”

      The introduction of the highly controversial national security law in Hong Kong is one piece in this puzzle.

      In mid-June, Chinese Vice Premier Liu He, who signed the “phase one” trade deal with the U.S. in January as Xi’s economic advisor, hinted at another piece of the puzzle — an economy mainly based on domestic circulation.

      That smacks of the Mao Zedong-style “self reliance” policy Xi mentioned shortly after the U.S-China trade war erupted.

      What is Zhou’s true motive for laying out the worst-case scenario? Will China indeed decouple from U.S.?

      Is it really possible for the powers to avoid a military clash?

      The article has raised more questions than answers.

      * * *

      Source: Nikkei Asian Review

    • Russia Eyes Another Massive Gas Pipeline To China
      Russia Eyes Another Massive Gas Pipeline To China

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 20:40

      Authored by Vanand Meliksetian via OilPrice.com,

      The Chinese and Russian leadership have over the years intensified political and economic collaboration. Troubling relations with the West in general and the U.S. in particular are increasingly driving Beijing and Moscow into each other’s arms. The countries’ economies are highly complementary, which is an opportunity for further integration. While China has become the world’s factory and an important technological powerhouse, Russia is extremely wealthy in terms of energy and minerals.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The obvious advantages have led to the landmark $400 billion ‘Power of Siberia pipeline’ agreement for the export of natural gas from Russia’s far east to northern China. On top of this success, Gazprom and Moscow have been pushing for the ‘Power of Siberia-2 pipeline’ from Western Siberia to China’s Xinjiang region. The proposal has been met with a lukewarm response from Beijing because the region is already well-supplied with Central Asian gas. However, due to the Coronavirus pandemic and Gazprom’s adjusted plan, the Power of Siberia-2 project is gaining momentum.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Russia’s motives

      Russia’s relations with the West nosedived after the Ukraine crisis and the annexation of Crimea. Ever since Moscow has been reaffirming that it’s not politically isolated by increasingly engaging with its giant Asian neighbor. The problem, however, is that the majority of Gazprom’s export capabilities end in Europe. Pivoting to China, therefore, was essential to lessen dependence.

      Gazprom’s initial proposal through the Altai region and into Western China has been replaced with the ‘Mongolia alternative’ with an annual capacity of 50 bcm. The recent Russian assertiveness comes from Moscow’s assertion that its position in key market Europe is under threat. The Corona pandemic has increased the pressure even further. According to Alexander Gabuev, a senior fellow at the Carnegie Moscow Center, “Gazprom sees that its position in the European market is eroding over the long run because of growing competition and a push by some countries to reduce dependence on Russia. Gazprom has to market gas from fields in Yamal and Western Siberia, and China is the big market next door.”

      China is essential for Russia which can be seen in Gazprom’s fast-tracking of investments concerning the enlargement of Power of Siberia-1 pipeline. Despite quarantine measures, some 3,000 laborers were infected with Corona who were drilling new wells and constructing power and compressor stations.

      China’s motives

      Of the two parties, Russia is more inclined to strike a deal. Beijing, in theory, has more options due to its relative proximity to large natural gas producers and the size and potential of the Chinese market. However, since Donald Trump’s presidency relations between the U.S. and China have deteriorated strongly which is pushing Beijing and Moscow towards each other.

      Economic relations between Russia and China were already poised to grow due to the complementarity of their economies. The pandemic has exacerbated both the upward and downward trends of relations with Russia and the U.S.

      According to Lin Boqiang, dean of the China Institute for Studies in Energy Policy at Xiamen University, ”before the current situation between China and the United States, China was planning to buy a lot of energy from the U.S. because of the trade agreement. But now the situation looks uncertain, and that will certainly encourage China to cooperate more with Russia.”

      The alternatives for Bejing are increasing imports from Central Asia and LNG. Both are not appealing due to different reasons. LNG is either shipped from politically unfriendly nations, e.g. the U.S. and Australia, or cargoes need to travel through bottlenecks such as the strait of Malacca. Concerning Central Asia, imports from the region dwarf Russia’s meaning a choice for the latter would improve energy security through diversification. Furthermore, Siberian natural gas is very competitive due to the favorable price difference.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Striking a deal

      Despite the favorable environment, it is yet to be seen whether a deal can be struck. In the case of Power of Siberia-1, it took four years to sign a contract from the moment terms and conditions were agreed. Furthermore, construction took five years after the long-term contract agreement was signed. Power of Siberia-2 could take a similar amount of time meaning it could be operational around 2030.

      Gazprom’s flexibility in considering the Mongolia route offers an additional advantage. Russian gas could be supplied to the heavily polluted capital city Ulan Bator which ranks among the most polluted cities in the world. Poverty and a relatively small state budget rule out big energy projects that would bring cleaner fuels to Mongolia’s cities. The Power of Siberia-2 pipeline, therefore, is a unique opportunity.

      However, the biggest beneficiaries would be China and Russia because the pipeline could further solidify the political and economic integration of the world’s second-biggest economy with the world’s largest energy producer.

    • Doug Casey On COVID Brainwashing: "Look, Hysteria Is The Problem; Not The Flu Itself"
      Doug Casey On COVID Brainwashing: “Look, Hysteria Is The Problem; Not The Flu Itself”

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 20:20

      Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

      Recently, gold bug and investor Doug Casey sat down with Kenneth Ameduri of Crush the Street. Casey jumped right in saying the breakdown of the United States under the boot of tyranny is “actually predictable.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Casey says Western civilization peaked around World War 1, just after the Federal Reserve took over the monetary supply. Yet at the same time, technology improved. So in some ways, things have gotten better, but in the ways that matter, things have gotten worse. Now, people are easily programmed to believe what the TV tells them to, thanks to technological advancement. Yet, both global warming and COVID are “phony” as far as Casey is concerned.

      Casey then discusses more in detail the COVID hoax.  When Ameduri asks about the cases going up, but fatalities going down, Casey says the case numbers are meaningless. He says we should focus on the deaths, which are being “greatly overreported.

      In fact, we showed documents from the government back in April that prove they need the death toll to be as high as possible to exact tyranny on people through fear.

      “Look, hysteria is the problem; not the flu itself.”

      He adds, “this is hysteria comparable to the witch trials of the late 17th century.”

      Casey says this whole situation was done as a form of “people control.” The government, who will issue your immunity passport, will decide what you can and cannot do based on whether or not you’ve gotten the mandatory vaccine. He says it’s possible to experience even more tyranny as the vaccine is rolled out. 

      “The worst people, not the best people, get into government.” 

      It’s all predictable he says.

      We’ve all heard the saying: “power corrupts, and ultimate power corrupts ultimately.” That saying has always been true.

      The best way to protect yourself is by buying physical gold or silver. Casey is betting on economic and financial chaos more than inflation or deflation.  The whole system is set to absolutely self-destruct.

      Casey says that there’s a good chance the Democrats will win the White House in 2020. He says there are two reasons.

      One, Democrats are promising a lot more free stuff.

      And two, they are much better at stuffing the ballot boxes.

      I personally, disagree with Casey on this one. I think the winner will be whoever the New World Order, aka, the International Banking Cartel, chooses to win. Presidents are selected, not elected, especially now when we have no semblance of a government “by the people.”

      “Look, it’s gonna end very badly,” Casey says of the government’s management of the economy.

    • Is China's Stock Market Bubble Simply A Massive Reverse-Robin-Hood Scheme To Bail Out The Rich?
      Is China’s Stock Market Bubble Simply A Massive Reverse-Robin-Hood Scheme To Bail Out The Rich?

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 20:00

      Without a doubt, the Chinese investor is “all-in” again. As we detailed earlier, there has been a massive surge in retail accounts opening margin accounts with margin-trading account balances rising at a faster pace than at the peak of speculative frenzy in 2014/2015…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Source: Bloomberg

      Five years on from that euphoria, it’s deja vu all over again as millions of ‘home-gamers’ turn back to the markets, under the umbrella of government suggestions to do so… this won’t end well (again).

      “Right now, I’m feeling invincible,” says one 36-year-old who works at a tech startup.

      “There’s no way I can lose!”

      From everything the state-owned media is telling mom-and-pop Chinese investors, this is all a great opportunity to create wealth and lift up the masses (via mass speculation).

      However, as a new research paper publish on VoxChina details, this government-sponsored buying frenzy in stocks is anything but a path to prosperity for the vast majority of China’s citizenry.

      Using comprehensive administrative data from China, we document a substantial increase in inequality of wealth held in risky assets by Chinese households in the 2014–2015 bubble-crash episode: the top 0.5% households in the equity market gained, while the bottom 85% lost, 250B RMB through active trading in this period, equating to 30% of each group’s initial equity wealth.

      In comparison, the return differential between the top and bottom groups in periods of a relatively calm stock market is an order of magnitude smaller.

      In other words, during the period when the Shanghai Composite Index climbed more than 150% before crashing 40%, the three academics found that the rich ended up richer and the poor poorer as an approximately equal RMB250 billion was redistributed from the lower wealth cohorts to the higher wealth cohorts – dramatically widening inequality.

      The researchers broke the investors down into four groups based on the value of their accounts, ranging from below 500,000 yuan to over 10 million yuan.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The bottom wealth group accounted for 85% of all individual accounts, while the top wealth group made up 0.5%. Households altogether accounted for 87% of trading volume, confirming the notion that China is largely a retail market.

      Wealthy investors seems to be fairly good at timing the market, while the poor are suckers. The top 0.5% households added to their exposure during the rally, while the bottom 85% cut their holdings. Shortly after the peak, the wealthy quickly exited the market, selling their shares to smaller households and corporations.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The bottom 85% of households lose 250B RMB from July 2014 to December 2015, while the top 0.5% gain 254B RMB in this 18-month period.

      In stark contrast, the study finds that wealth redistribution in calm market conditions is an order of magnitude smaller than that in the bubble-crash episode.

      Their key finding then is as follows:

      The key takeaway from our study is that the heterogeneity in market timing and stock selection ability between the poor and the ultra-wealthy, while also present in calm periods, is greatly amplified in bubble-crash episodes, when both volatilities and trading volume spike.

      In other words – officially-sanctioned (central bank or otherwise) bubbles in stock markets amplify inequality and crush the relative household wealth of the average joe far more than in a more ‘normal’ market environment.

      The findings suggest some rather uncomfortable implications for the world’s central planners (especially if the hordes find out about this reverse-Robin-Hood scheme)…

      It is often believed that greater stock market participation (or participation in any other risky financial market) is a path to prosperity and equality, especially in developing countries where financial literacy and market participation are generally low. However, if the poor, less financially sophisticated invest actively in financial markets that are prone to bubbles and crashes, such participation can be detrimental to their wealth.

      This is particularly concerning given the recent finding that salient early life experiences have long-lasting impacts on individuals’ economic decisions decades later.

      Consequently, policymakers and academics must emphasize that while greater stock market participation can be welfare-improving – especially for the poor – active investment by the poor will likely result in the exact opposite.

      And, just in case you thought smugly that “us Americans know far better than those silly speculative muppets in China,” think again (even though retail accounts represent a far greater aspect of Chinese markets than in the US)…

      As we detailed previously,  the exact same pattern of reverse-Robin-Hood-ism is occurring in US equity markets. The two following charts indicate that as recessions begin, the top 1% begins to sell their holdings, while the bottom 90% continues to try and “buy the dip”.

      The first chart shows the top 1% dumping as the market falls entering recession. Of late, we can see that selling has happened in spurts by the top 1%:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      For the bottom 90% it’s just the opposite: the vast majority of unsophisticated retail investor start to chase momentum at the worst possible time, as they buy stocks en masse just as a recession begins, which in turn craters the market. In the Goldman chart below, we can see that the share of equities owned by the 90% jumps just as recession begin.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And no – you’re not the one buying at the lows.

      In laymens terms, the rich dump their stock to the poor just before the market crashes.

      The technical term is “distribution.”

      As Bloomberg’s Ye Xie noted so eloquently, “it appears that the boom-bust was one effective way for the poor to be robbed by the rich.”

    • What If A COVID-19 Wave 2 Happens During A Natural Disaster?
      What If A COVID-19 Wave 2 Happens During A Natural Disaster?

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 19:40

      Authored by Adam Taggart via PeakProsperity.com,

      It’s hard to think about a second wave of covid-19 infections when countries are still wrestling with Wave 1. We don’t even know if one will occur.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      But history shows it’s a possibility we have to be on guard for. The Great Influenza of 1918 had three waves, with the second being by far the deadliest.

      If covid-19 turns out to indeed have a second wave, will it be more deadly, too? No way to know at this time. But again, that’s a potential outcome we need to be aware of.

      Yet one other important question we don’t have the answer (yet) to: If a second wave does occur, what would happen if the timing coincides with another crisis?

      This question is timely, as most predictable natural disasters tend to happen in the second half of the year. And we’re entering that period now.

      The east coast’s hurricane season runs June 1 through November 30. Already there have been four named storms (out of 13 to 19 predicted), and more hurricanes than normal are expected this year. Peak activity should happen between late August and early October:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In the west, fires have been getting worse for years; and this year’s season is predicted to be “above normal”:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And if Wave 2 were to hit in late winter/early Spring 2021, these are the US regions at greatest risk of experiencing floods during that time:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      So, what would happen if a covid-19 Wave 2 requiring a serious lockdown gets disrupted by one or more of these natural disasters? Where hundreds of thousands to millions of people suddenly have to evacuate to parts unknown when a health quarantine is supposed to be in place?

      The short answer is: Nothing good.

      Evacuees will have to jettison much of their covid defense preparations in the scramble. And hygiene discipline around social distancing/etc will likely be seriously compromised as so many weary families arrive at locations unprepared for them. It’s hard to imagine how infections won’t skyrocket.

      Ugh.

      While there’s no way to predict with certainty when or even if this will happen, we can improve our individual odds for safety by planning today for such an outcome.

      First, identify your bug-out destination should you be forced to relocate under these conditions. Contact the folks there now and game-plan with them what would happen if you had to show up there during a Wave 2. Would they be willing to welcome you? What would the pre-arranged safety protocols be while you stayed there? What resources would they depend on you to bring with you?

      Second, prepare your bug-out checklist and make sure you maintain all needed supplies in reserve should you need to leave home in a hurry. If low, head out now to fill any gaps.

      And third, make sure you’re as prepared as possible for successfully dealing with a second covid-19 wave.

      A growing chorus of readers have been asking my co-founder Chris Martenson and me for a covid-19 Wave 2 prep guide that builds upon the recommendations made in the earlier guides we published back in February and March. Now that we’ve been through Wave 1, what new preparations would we emphasize?

      Given the high degree of reader interest as well as our strong belief that the time to prepare for adversity is well before it arrives, we’ve just compiled our critical insights.

      In Part 2: The Covid-19 Wave 2 Preparation Guide, Chris and I put on our Monday Morning quarterback helmets and reveal what we assess are the most important Wave 1 lessons to bring with us in anticipation of Wave 2.

      Treatment protocols, meds, key supplies, food, money, social strategies — we detail out what everyone now needs to integrate into their future covid planning. The prudent move here is to hope for the best but prepare for the worst.

      Click here to read Part 2 of this report (free executive summary, enrollment required for full access)

    • Chinese Banks Preparing For "Worst Case" Scenario: Being Cut Off From SWIFT, Hong Kong Bank Runs
      Chinese Banks Preparing For “Worst Case” Scenario: Being Cut Off From SWIFT, Hong Kong Bank Runs

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 19:20

      In the latest escalation over China’s de facto annexation of Hong Kong, Reuters reports that Chinese state lenders are “revamping contingency plans” in anticipation of the soon to be enacted U.S. legislation (just waiting for Trump’s signature) that would penalize banks for serving officials who implement the new national security law for Hong Kong.

      In a “worst-case scenario” under consideration by Chinese commercial megabanks Bank of China and Industrial and Commercial Bank of China (ICBC), the lenders are said to be looking at the possibility of being cut off from U.S. dollars or losing access to U.S. dollar settlements, two Reuters sources said.

      The worst-case scenario also envisions what would happen in the event of a run on its branches in Hong Kong if customers feared that it would run out of U.S. currency, one of the sources said (this is the scenario discussed in “If 500,000 Rich Hong Kongers Leave The City, The HKD Peg Would Surely Collapse“). The scenario was also looking at the experience of banks in Iran, the same person said. Iranian banks have been hit from time to time by U.S. sanctions dating back to the 1979 Islamic Revolution.

      “We are hoping for the best, but preparing for the worst. You never know how things will turn out,” one of the sources said.

      In a milder scenario being looked at by the Agricultural Bank of China (AgBank), lenders would need to find ways to address the problem of clients blacklisted by the United States, especially those who might face a sudden loss of liquidity.

      As Reuters adds, the contingency planning has been initiated by the banks themselves, who have the most to lose should the US effectively trigger a massive dollar bank run.

      As Reuters calculates, Bank of China, the country’s most international lender, had the biggest exposure of the country’s big four lenders to the greenback at the end of 2019, with about $433 billion in liabilities. China’s top four banks, which also include ICBC, China Construction Bank and AgBank, had a combined 7.5 trillion yuan ($1 trillion) in U.S. dollar liabilities at the end of 2019, annual reports show.

      According to the report, at least three state-run leasing firms, including an ICBC unit and CSIC Leasing, are also making contingency plans. Leasing firms are often heavily reliant on dollar borrowing to fund purchases of aircraft, machinery and facilities.

      China’s contingency plans are in response to the unanimous passage in the House and Senate of a bill last week which seeks to impose financial sanctions on Chinese banks in response to the National Security Law. It has yet to be signed into law by President Donald Trump. The bill calls for sanctions on Chinese officials and others who help violate Hong Kong’s autonomy and on financial institutions that do business with them. But it does not spell out what the sanctions would look like.

      “There are sanctions in this bill which could be interpreted to prevent a bank from clearing some dollar transactions via U.S. institutions, but unlike other congressional sanctions bills there are not specific provisions mandating it,” said Nick Turner, a lawyer specialising in sanctions and anti-money laundering at Steptoe & Johnson in Hong Kong.

      Aside from its contingency planning, China has said it would “launch a counterattack against US hegemony” if Trump was to block access of Chinese banks to dollar funding and the SWIFT payment system

      SGH Macro have noted that countermeasures from China could include a speeding up of the use of the Renminbi for China’s own parallel Cross-border Interbank Payment System (CIPS), a surge in issuance of RMB denominated loans to Belt and Road Initiative countries, a push for greater RMB use through the Shanghai International Energy Exchange (INE) crude oil futures, and an acceleration of the implementation of China’s Digital Currency Electronics Payment (DCEP), the first digital currency issued by a central bank. 

    • US Reports Another Record Single-Day Jump In COVID-19 Infections: Live Updates
      US Reports Another Record Single-Day Jump In COVID-19 Infections: Live Updates

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 19:03

      Summary:

      • US reports 60k+ new cases for first time, per JHU & BBG
      • DeSantis says schools will reopen safely in August
      • NYC mayor cancels all big public events
      • Texas reports 3rd straight record death
      • Wisconsin sees biggest daily jump
      • South Africa sees another record jump
      • California reports record jump in deaths
      • Cali Gov holds press briefing
      • WHO begins ‘independent’ review of COVID-19 response
      • Italy bars travelers from 13 countries as cases creep higher
      • Arizona reports new cases
      • NYT names Arizona “world’s worst COVID-19 hotspot”
      • Florida reports record jump in deaths, hospitalizations
      • Goldman: 40% of US population lives in states where reopening has been rolled back or delayed
      • US single-day tally tops 60k again
      • At least 5 states reported record single-day cases on Wednesday
      • Global total tops 12 million
      • 7-day average death rate creeps higher
      • Tokyo, Hong Kong report single-day highs of new cases
      • India reported 22.7k new cases
      • Victoria reports another 165 new cases
      • Beijing slams US over WHO pullout

      * * *

      Update (1850ET): Preliminary counts of new cases reported in the US on Thursday shows the US on track for another record jump, at least the second in the past week, though the exact numbers vary between sources. Global deaths, meanwhile, just passed 550,000.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Globally, JHU counted 211,878 new cases on Thursday, the second-highest total according to BBG. Though the WHO counted 63k+ cases in the US earlier this week, JHU’s numbers have the US case total for Thursday. Coronavirus cases in the US increased by 61,791 from a day earlier to 3.08 million. The 2% increase was higher than the average daily increase of 1.9% over the past week. Deaths rose 0.7% to 132,803.

      * * *

      Update (1840ET): After the state of Florida ordered schools to open in August on Monday, Gov DeSantis said during Thursday’s press briefing that if stores like Home Depot and Wal-Mart can open, that the schools can reopen, too.

      Gov. Ron DeSantis (R) advocated for the reopening of schools in the fall, despite rising coronavirus case numbers in Florida, comparing classrooms filling with children to businesses that have welcomed back customers.

      “If you can do Home Depot, if you can do Walmart, if you can do these things, we absolutely can do the schools,” DeSantis said at a Thursday news briefing in Jacksonville with U.S. Labor Secretary Eugene Scalia.

      On Thursday, Florida reported its highest one-day death toll since the start of the coronavirus pandemic, with 120 new deaths. The state tallied 8,935 new cases.

      The Florida Department of Education ordered Monday that schools should reopen in August, although it is up to individual school districts to implement public health precautions.

      The press is going to love this.

      In other news, de Blasio has cancelled all big public events in the city (parades and such) to help out restaurants who need to set up dining in the streets.

      Mayor Bill De Blasio ordered large events that typically require a permit to be canceled through Sept. 30. The goal is to ensure room for outdoor restaurant seating and New York’s “Open Streets” program, which expands car-free public spaces for city dwellers.

      That is, unless you’re marching for BLM.

      * * *

      Update (1654ET): Texas reports 9,782 new cases of coronavirus and a record 102 new deaths, the state’s second straight single-day record after Wednesday’s case total. The death toll increased by 102, depending on which source you want to believe. That’s higher than the 98 reported yesterday, and the state’s first triple-digit day for deaths since the outbreak began. 

      In response, Texas Gov. Greg Abbott on Thursday issued a Proclamation suspending elective surgeries in hospitals in all counties located within 11 Trauma Service Areas in Texas.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The positivity rate in the state was around 18% on Thursday, also a new record high.

      While NYC’s hospitals remain nearly empty, hospitals across Texas are reporting a massive influx of patients, with the sickest often fighting the virus for weeks, sometimes more than a month, before passing away. CBS News spoke to a team of doctors in McAllen, Texas.

      “Knowing how things have progressed, are you worried?” CBS News asked Dr. Osman Khan, an emergency room physician.

      “Yeah, I am worried. I feel like it is just the beginning for us. It seems like it’s going to be getting a lot worse,” Khan said.

      While we were there, Kahn was treating patients who were developing pneumonia.

      “Have you seen your husband?” CBS News asked. “Once,” Prieto replied.

      One patient had lost her 35-year-old daughter to the virus the week before.

      The state now has 230,346 confirmed cases, with 2,918 deaths.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      * * *

      Update (1615ET): Wisconsin, a state that hasn’t received too much attention during the outbreak so far, just reported a record jump in new cases even as neighboring Illinois has found success suppressing the virus. The state reported 754 new cases.

      The numbers brought the state’s 7-day average to its highest level yet.

      Elsewhere, South Africa just reported another record jump in new cases, and a positivity rate of over 24%.

      * * *

      Update (1600ET): Dr. Fauci said Thursday that some states should consider returning to a lockdown scenario to help suppress the virus.

      Anthony S. Fauci, the nation’s top infectious-disease official, is advising that some states seriously consider “shutting down” again if they are facing major resurgences of the virus — a warning that conflicts with President Trump’s push to reopen the country as quickly as possible.

      “I think any state that is having a serious problem, that state should seriously look at shutting down,” Fauci said Wednesday. “It’s not for me to say, because each state is different.”

      Fauci added Thursday that while he hopes there’s no need for new shutdowns, it “would not be viewed very, very favorably,” and urged states to pause their reopening process to slow the spread of the virus.

      * * *

      Update (1540ET): Newsom’s briefing Thursday focused on wildfire preparations, but data released by state public health officials after he finished speaking shows California reported a record number of single-day deaths, though Newsom claims some of them are part of a “backlog”, which also added 2,000 cases to Thursday’s count of 7,031 new virus cases, which is below the 7-day average (8,043), even more so if one subtracts the 2k.

      Yesterday, the state reported 11,694 cases. On Thursday, the state reported 149 new virus deaths, well above the 7-day average of 73.

      This helpful chart from CNBC puts the outbreak across the US in perspective.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      * * *

      Update (1500ET): California Gov Gavin Newsom is holding a press briefing…

      * * *

      Update (1400ET): The WHO named the heads of an independent panel it’s establishing to review its COVID-19 response pandemic that has been criticized by the US.

      Helen Clark, former prime minister of New Zealand, and Ellen Johnson Sirleaf, former president of Liberia, were selected as co-chairs, WHO Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said in a meeting with member-states. The panel will present an interim report in November.

      WHO has come under fire for its response to the coronavirus outbreak from President Donald Trump who is pulling the U.S. out of the global group, saying that it’s too close to China. Tedros has responded that the agency acted appropriately with the information it had and the rest of the world had plenty of time to prepare to fight the outbreak.

      We’re curious to see the report, whenever it’s released.

      * * *

      Update (1315ET): As Florida officials continue to refuse to offer a breakdown of hospitalization data, localities have been releasing figures like the number of occupied ICU beds on their own. And what they’ve found is that 190 COVID-19 patients are on ventilators throughout the county, which includes the city of Miami.

      • MIAMI-DADE HAS 190 COVID-19 PATIENTS ON VENTILATORS; PREV. 184

      It’s just another alarming hospital occupancy headline, but the market doesn’t seem to be reacting much.

      * * *

      Update (1250ET): As COVID-19 cases creep higher in Italy (though deaths continue to slide)…

      …the country just declared travelers from 13 countries barred from Italy. The countries include Brazil. Americans are also barred from traveling to most EU countries, except in special circumstances. Italy announced earlier this week that it would bar travel from Bangladesh after  a flight from the country brought many infected travelers to Italy.

      Meanwhile, lockdown measures have mostly been lifted across the country.

      * * *

      Update (1157ET): Arizona has released its latest number. Confirmed cases rose by 4,057 to a total of 112,671, the state Department of Health said Thursday (remember, these figures are reported with a day lag). Further details of the daily update revealed that COVID-19-related hospitalizations increased by 16 to 3,437 as of Wednesday , a 12th straight record high.

      75 Arizonans died, pushing the state’s death toll above 2k.

      The market didn’t like these numbers, apparently.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Adult intensive care unit beds in use by all patients in the state edged lower from 91% on Tuesday to 89% on Wednesday.

      Here’s more from the state’s dashboard:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The positivity rate tumbled to 11.5% on Thursday, well below the nearly 30% rate the state reported yesterday.

      As states cleared a rumored weekend backlog yesterday, at least five states – Missouri, Tennessee, Texas, Utah and West Virginia – set single-day records for new infections on Wednesday, per the NYT.

      Additionally, the NYT this morning declared Arizona the world’s biggest “hot spot”, claiming the state has the largest infection rate (often represented by the variable “R”) in the world.

      The NYT ranked Arizona No. 1, with about 3,300 cases per 1 million in population, with Florida (2,700) and South Carolina (2,300) following. Bahrain (2,200) took the No. 4. spot.

      * * *

      Update (1040ET): Florida just suffered its deadliest day yet, health officials reported Thursday.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      While the state reported 8,935 new cases (+4%) on Thursday, the number of new deaths hit yet another single-day record with 120 new deaths, 7 deaths higher than the prior record of 113 reached back in early May.

      The state also added 411 new hospitalizations. The previous high for new hospitalizations was 400 people back in mid-May. About 17,500 people have had to seek hospitalization because of the virus so far.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The positivity rate in the state hit 18.4%, up from 14.1% in the prior day.

      Here’s a rundown of the state’s latest totals for cases, deaths, tests and hospitalizations.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

       

      * * *

      Update (0830ET): A team of analysts from Goldman Sachs wrote in a note sent out to clients that 40% of America’s population lives in a state that has rolled back its reopening plans.

      The coronavirus situation in Arizona continues to worsen with new confirmed cases per day continuing to grow on the back of still-growing prevalence of COVID-like symptoms. Hospital capacity in the state is diminishing further. In other states that have high new case counts and fall short on other gating criteria, such as South Carolina, Georgia, and Nevada, hospital and ICU capacity looks slightly better but is still below recommended levels.

      More states continue to put their reopening plans on hold. Over the past few days, Connecticut, Ohio, and Washington have delayed reopening plans or placed reopening on hold. States with over 40% of the population have now put reopening on hold, and states with another 30% have already reversed part of their reopening.   

      Even states that have their outbreaks under control are rolling back measures as a precaution.

      States are increasingly putting their reopenings on hold. Over the past few days, state officials in Connecticut, Ohio, and Washington delayed planned reopening measures or explicitly put reopening on hold. States containing over 40% of the population have now put reopening on hold, and states with another 30% have increased restrictions. Several state governors have also issued new executive orders instituting specific social distancing and other requirements. In Washington, these practices are required “until there is an effective vaccine, effective treatment or herd immunity.”   

      Goldman illustrated the trend of pausing the economic reopening across the country.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The latest state tracker put together by the team reflects all of yesterday’s near-record numbers.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The tracker also reflects the larger numbers of deaths we’ve seen over the last two days.

      * * *

      Wednesday was another brutal day for the US during the global coronavirus outbreak as all of the worst hit states in the sunbelt produced new single-day records ranging from the highest 7-day positivity rate (Florida) to new records for deaths (Texas), single-day cases (California) and hospitalizations (Arizona, Florida, Texas etc).

      After the US reported more than 60k new cases on Tuesday for the first time, the country repeated that feat on Wednesday, essentially tying its record number from the prior day.

      But as the COVID tracking project points out, the 7-day average for deaths is “creeping back up” after two days of deaths near 1,000 (on Monday, the US reported fewer than 500 deaths for the entire country).

      As deaths continue falling in New England, the sun belt has more than compensated for it.

      As we noted, the US also topped 3 million cases yesterday.

      So far on Thursday, the bad news out of the US has apparently carried over to Asia, as Hong Kong and Tokyo both reported new single-day records of new cases, as new outbreaks in both territories have come roaring back in recent weeks. Both areas are closely watched bellwethers of the outbreak in East Asia.

      Tokyo confirmed 224 new infections on Thursday, its  largest single-day tally yet. While Tokyo has focused its virus suppression efforts on nightlife districts, more mundane places like diners and – of course – nursing homes have seen several outbreaks.

       

       

      The city’s mayor has said there are no plans to reinstate the state of emergency that was lifted in Tokyo last month.

      Hong Kong health officials have warned of a third wave of coronavirus infections after the city recorded 23 new cases in two days. Social distancing measures in HK were largely lifted over the past two months as the city’s cases dwindled. An outbreak at a nursing home in Kowloon has contributed 8 infections to today’s total – four residents and four staff tested positive, on top of one resident who tested positive yesterday.

      In response, authorities have reintroduced limits on the size of gatherings, with a maximum of eight people. At bars and restaurants, it’s 4 people per table tops. Catering businesses can only operate at 60 percent of their usual capacity. Gyms and karaoke lounges must have no more than 16 people in each room or facility.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      India reported 22,752 new cases, up slightly from 22,252 yesterday, bringing India’s virus total to 742,417. The death toll has jumped to 20,642, up 482.

      Meanwhile, as tensions with Beijing intensify, with the White House mulling new retaliatory measures ranging from an assault on the HKD currency peg to barring the popular social media app TikTok, Beijing hurled a few rhetorical rocks Thursday morning when Foreign Ministry spokesperson Zhao Lijian slammed the Trump Administration’s decision to withdraw was “another demonstration of the US pursuing unilateralism, withdrawing from groups and breaking contracts.”

      The WHO is “the most authoritative and professional international institution in the field of global public health security,” Zhao said at a briefing Wednesday, adding that the US departure would hurt the developing world, the AP reports – contrasting America’s WHO withdrawal with President Xi’s promises of forgivable or zero-interest loans and bundles while supplying the developing world with the vaccine.

      In Australia, Victoria, the worst-hit Australian state, recorded another 165 case, as an outbreak at a Melbourne high school emerged as the largest cluster in the country. Queensland state also closed its border to people fleeing a six-week lockdown in Melbourne. In addition to the lockdown, Victoria has effectively sealed its borders, while neighboring New South Wales has also shut its border with Victoria.

    • Venezuelan Fighter Jets "Neutralize" US-Registered Aircraft
      Venezuelan Fighter Jets “Neutralize” US-Registered Aircraft

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 19:00

      The official Twitter account of the Strategic Operational Command of the Bolivarian National Armed Forces tweeted Thursday it “neutralized” a ‘narco-jet’ that violated Venezuelan airspace late Tuesday night. 

      “#ULTIMAHORA#CEOFANB reports that the @CODAI_FANB , detected at midnight on #07JUL20 the entry of a Narco-aircraft with registration #EEUU to our airspace and once the Law protocol was applied, it was NEUTRALIZED with aircraft from our Military Aviation,” the Venezuelan military tweeted.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Defense Blog said, “fighter jets of the Bolivarian Venezuelan Military Aviation forced a ‘narco jet’ transporting cocaine to land. After landing in the field, the crew allegedly set fire to the plane to hide all evidence.” 

      Attached to the Bolivarian National Armed Force’s Twitter post were alleged pictures of the “neutralized” private jet. The tail number reads “N339AV.” After a quick search on Flight Aware, the plane is a 1994 Raytheon Hawker 800 corporate jet owned by KMWFlight LLC, located in Wilmington, Delaware. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      N339AV’s latest “registered flight route was in Mexico, from the central Toluca state to Cozumel island in the Caribbean,” said Defense Blog. 

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 9th July 2020

    • 83% Of German Firms With International Exposure Warn of Collapsing Revenues 
      83% Of German Firms With International Exposure Warn of Collapsing Revenues 

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 02:45

      Germany eased strict social distancing restrictions on April 20 and started the process of reopening its economy as the virus pandemic curve flatten. However, the consequence of closing businesses and forcing people to stay home, along with shutdowns of international commerce, resulted in a deep recession in the first half of the year for the exporting nation. 

      A new survey via the German Chambers of Commerce (reported by Reuters) said 83% of domestic firms with high international exposure had experienced a collapse in revenues. Many of these firms, about 93% of respondents, said the global economy could improve in 2021 or beyond. 

      The survey is an eye-opener for Europe’s largest economy, and one of the largest exporting nations in the world, suggesting a global economic recovery in the shape of a “V” is not feasible for the back half of 2020. About 15% of the 3,300 companies surveyed said their annual turnover is expected to be halved. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      It was noted the impact of the virus-induced downturn, whereas at the start of the pandemic, crushed travel and tourism, has now impacted other sectors and rippled through the economy in the form of a demand shock. 

      Fifty-nine percent of respondents this month (July) warned of slumping demand for their products and services, up from 57% in April. 

      Under such conditions, firms are unwilling to invest – more than half of the respondents said they’re cutting CapEx abroad, compared with 35% in April.

      We noted on Tuesday, global CapEx is expected to be slashed, on average, 12%, which is much larger than the 11.3% decline during the global financial crisis in 2008-09. Global capital expenditure weakness suggests a weak recovery is ahead.

      German Chambers of Industry and Commerce released a report on Wednesday indicating exports will drop by 15% in 2020 with a slight recovery in 2021. 

      The German government has unveiled a $146 billion stimulus package to jump-start the severely damaged economy. However, it appears the recovery, so far, has been a dead cat bounce that will not revert to 2019 growth activity levels for the next several years, or longer… 

      German industrial production has a long ways to go… 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      So what must be done to supercharge a recovery? Well, we offer insight here

    • Turkey To Hold Massive Naval Exercise Off Libyan Coast In 'Message To Egypt'
      Turkey To Hold Massive Naval Exercise Off Libyan Coast In ‘Message To Egypt’

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/09/2020 – 02:00

      Via AlMasdarNews.com,

      In a noticeable step in terms of timing and location, the Turkish Navy announced that it would soon conduct massive naval exercises off the Libyan coast. Turkish media quoted the navy as saying that the expected maneuvers would be called “Naftex”, and would take place off the Libyan coast in 3 different regions, and each would bear a special name, which is “Barbaros”, “Targot Rais” and “Chaka Bay”.

      Furthermore, the Turkey-based Yeni Safak newspaper revealed that the military exercises will take place imminently, and that they are training in anticipation of any war in the eastern Mediterranean, in addition to what has been described as escalating tensions in Libya between Egypt and Turkey.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Commenting on the Turkish military maneuvers off the coast of Libya, Egyptian military expert Major General Samir Ragheb said that it is a dangerous diplomatic message called “battleship diplomacy”.

      Ragheb said in an interview with RT Arabic this week that the Turkish military maneuvers are sending a stern warning to Ankara’s enemies that they are willing to use its armed forces to combat any threat.

      The Egyptian military expert considered that these maneuvers came in response to the destruction of the Turkish air defense system at the Al-Watiyah military base south of the Libyan capital, Tripoli last week.

      In particular, Ragheb believes Turkey is sending a message to Egypt, who is currently watching the events in Libya very closely, especially at the Sirte front in the north-central part of the country.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The Egyptian military expert said that the Turkish naval exercises along the Libyan coast is not a surprise because Ankara is trying to scare its enemies.

      He added that these naval exercises will not influence Egypt’s decision about Sirte and Al-Jafra, pointing out that they remain “red lines” for Cairo.

    • The Great Race Bait: Don't Fall For It Conservative America
      The Great Race Bait: Don’t Fall For It Conservative America

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 23:45

      Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

      Isn’t it odd that the political left claims to be so adamantly opposed to racism, yet they are the first people in the room to make generalizations based on race? Maybe it’s not so odd, at least when you consider the history of social justice movements and the people who fund them. There is power to be had in creating a “race war” narrative, and the chaos surrounding such a conflict could be easily exploited. By making everything about race, the political left is perhaps unwittingly serving the interests of the very wealthy elites they claim to despise.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As I predicted in my article ‘Order Out Of Chaos: The Defeat Of The Left Comes With A Cost’ back in 2016:

      When I mentioned in my last article the crippling of social justice, I did not mention that this could have some negative reverberations. With Trump and conservatives taking near-total power after the Left had assumed they would never lose again, their reaction has been to transform. They are stepping away from the normal activities and mindset of cultural Marxism and evolving into full blown communists. Instead of admitting that their ideology is a failure in every respect, they are doubling down.

      When this evolution is complete, the Left WILL resort to direct violent action on a larger scale, and they will do so with a clear conscience because, in their minds, they are fighting fascism. Ironically, it will be this behavior by leftists that may actually push conservatives towards a fascist model. Conservatives might decide to fight crazy with more crazy.”

      This evolution of the political left is not natural or “grassroots”; it is completely engineered. This past week a group of well armed BLM protesters called the “NFAC” (Not F#&*ing Around Coalition) marched near Atlanta on July 4th demanding the destruction of a confederate monument and trying to goad “white militias” into facing off with them. I don’t view this group as a legitimate threat, only a sign of things to come.  They do appear to be organized well enough and seem to have come out of nowhere, so much so that I’m rather suspicious.

      First, I would point that the media is perfectly on board with the NFAC and similar groups, calling them “peaceful protesters”. Yet, when conservative militias hold armed demonstrations, the media viciously attacks and accuses the right-wing of inciting violence. When BLM protested the death of George Floyd, the media called it stunning and brave. When conservatives protested the Covid lockdowns in Michigan that were destroying the economy, the media attacked them for “spreading the virus”.

      When BLM and Antifa announced they would be busing activists into rural towns, residents organized an armed security response. The protesters remained peaceful, and in some cases decided not to show up. The armed citizens were of course demonized and accused of paranoia over a threat that “did not exist”.

      The convenient thing about extreme left groups is that they have no principles or rules to follow. Meaning, they operate on lies and manipulation. They do not care about being right, they only care about winning. When Antifa fails, or they get caught in the middle of something nefarious, they simply claim they are not a group but an idea, therefore they aren’t culpable for the actions of a “handful of bad apples”. When the BLM or Antifa wimp out and don’t show up to a rural town to protest because they might have to face organized opposition, the media claims that the groups had no plans to protest in those towns anyway.

      It is clear who the establishment supports. BLM and Antifa groups have received millions in donations from corporate sponsors over the past few years. In fact, BLM was initially funded by organizations like George Soros’ Open Society Foundation as well as the Ford Foundation.

      Does this sound like “grassroots” to you?

      I believe the NFAC, represents new trial run in the engineered conflict within America. When compared to groups like the John Brown Gun Club or the “Trigger Warning Gun Club”, which ended up becoming a hilarious joke to most of the country, the NFAC is far more tailored and puts on a much better show. These people are being groomed as bogeymen for conservatives.

      The NFAC’s choice to protest near a confederate monument, as well as calling out “white militias” to fight them, is obvious race baiting for political gain. I have been around militia groups for the better part of a decade, and I can say with some authority that most of them are not “all white”. Liberty groups are made up of people that are willing to defend freedom; that’s it. There is no skin color requirement. In the NFAC videos I can make out one white guy among them (maybe their handler). Perhaps this black progressive militia should attempt to be more inclusive and a little less racist?

      The media’s soft glove treatment of the NFAC reminds me of the conflict in Syria in 2013. Remember when the mainstream media originally tried to present ISIS insurgents funded and trained by western interests as clean-cut and wholesome freedom fighters standing against the “oppressive Assad regime”? Yeah, that’s what this feels like.

      At bottom, it’s not the leftist mobs that present the biggest threat; these groups are ultimately a paper tiger. Instead, the greater danger comes from groups that are directly trained and organized by elitist or government interests. These are the groups that end up being used to trigger attacks, like shootings, bombings, assassinations, etc. And, it’s not the first time in US history this has been done.

      In my article ‘Militant Leftists Are More An Annoyance Than A Real Threat To Liberty’ I outlined how such groups tend to mutate into something more dangerous once they start receiving funding or illicit training from establishment interests. As I noted in 2017:

      Government and elitist-supported groups, supplied with training and funding, are a greater danger. They tend to operate more like terrorist cells, using bombings, shootings and attrition.

      This is not always simply to instill fear or to achieve an actual political aim in support of leftist “values.” Instead, these groups are sometimes injected into the system as a way to inspire conservatives to overreact or to run into the welcoming arms of a waiting dictatorship.

      Perhaps the most effective example of the creation and exploitation of violent leftist terror was Operation Gladio, a false flag program running from the 1950s to the 1990s in Europe until it was finally exposed by Italian Prime Minister Giulio Andreotti. Many of the leftist and “communist” cells involved in the numerous attacks on civilians during this period were in fact either manipulated by government agencies like the CIA, or they were created from scratch by those same agencies.”

      The method of using racial tensions as a driver for domestic conflict is also not new. As I mentioned in the same article:

      I would also suggest research into more famous and violent leftist activist groups like the Weather Underground; a collective responsible for dozens of bombings and threats against government facilities. Perhaps the most suspicious circumstance of the Weathermen and their seeming immunity in many cases to prosecution is the strange story of Bill Ayers, a leader within the Weather Underground that planned multiple bombings but remains free to this day and is an influential figure among political elites in Washington.

      If you think that the racially charged rhetoric of social justice warriors today is extreme or “new,” just look at the rhetoric of the Weather Underground, which included discussions on “killing all white babies” because they were destined to “grow up to be oppressive racists.” This propaganda has been going on a LONG time.”

      I suggest that we are on a fast path to hard leftist militancy, and that this is being created by special interest groups as a catalyst for war. If the establishment can make the fight about race, then they gain an aggressive advantage over the narrative. Conservatives must continue to assert a non-race based position, and not be lured into allowing the political left and the media to dictate the terms of the fight. Atlanta is just the beginning.

      This battle is not about race, it is not about white vs. black or so called “marginalized” groups against the patriarchy, it’s about collectivism vs. liberty. It’s about socialism and communism vs. voluntarism and free choice. When I look at groups like BLM or the NFAC, I don’t see black people, I see useful idiots being exploited by elitist interests. I see Marxist pawns. The gatekeepers want to make it about race so that the real reasons for the conflict are obscured. We cannot allow this, and we must avoid the trap.

      *  *  *

      If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

    • Qatar Selling World's Largest Private Jet As Recession Bites 
      Qatar Selling World’s Largest Private Jet As Recession Bites 

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 23:25

      Qatar’s economy contracted for the first time in two decades in 2019. The COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in a prolonged downturn in the Arab country, weighed down primarily by slumping energy prices and collapsed world trade

      As a result of the virus-induced downturn, the Qatari government has decided to sell its Boeing Business Jet 747-8i, one of the largest private jets in the world, with less than 1,000 total flight hours on the airframe, reported The Drive.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The Qatari 747-8i, with Boeing serial number 37075, was manufactured in Everett, Washington, in 2012, currently sits at AMAC Aerospace Switzerland AG’s hanger in Basel, Switzerland, the company responsible for outfitting the jet with a luxury interior. 

      The private jet entered service with the Qatar Amiri Flight in 2015, a division of the country’s Qatar Airways that serves royal elites and government officials. 

      AMAC’s aircraft specifications show the plane supports up to 18 crew and 89 passengers.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

       

      “With a master bedroom, guest bedroom, grand staircase, living rooms, private offices and lounges, general lounges, fully stocked galleys, and more, the art deco-inspired and somewhat timeless interior of this aircraft is extremely lavish, to say the least,” said The Drive.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The list price remains a mystery – though The Drive points out that a similar 747-8i, not outfitted for service, recently sold for $350 million. 

    • A Swarm Of Swarms: Toward Aerospace Warfare Model Of The 21st Century
      A Swarm Of Swarms: Toward Aerospace Warfare Model Of The 21st Century

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 23:05

      Written and produced by SF Team: J.Hawk, Daniel Deiss, Edwin Watson,

      While the phrase “system of systems” has entered relatively common usage some years ago as a reflection of the need to field systems and assets with complementary capabilities that will operate as part of a synergistic whole in their respective domain of warfare, in the realm of aerospace combat the United States is moving in the direction of the “swarm” as the key organizing principle of its combat paradigm.

      The US Air Force Future Operating Concept which attempts to envision USAF operations in the year 2035 places “interconnectedness” high on the list of buzzwords, and promotes such goals as “Global Integrated Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance” and “Global Precision Strike”, all being controlled from “Multi-Domain Operations Centers” whose ability to manage a wide variety of interconnected systems and assets would guarantee getting inside the adversary’s “Observe, Orient, Decide, Act” (OODA) Loop, a long-standing Holy Grail among US airmen ever since USAF Colonel John Boyd formulated the concept as a result of his Korean War experiences.

      Advances in communications, sensors, and artificial intelligence have meant that munitions have progressed greatly beyond being little more than bullets, launched at a specific target and then guided to it by either its on-board sensors perceiving some aspect of the electromagnetic spectrum emanated by the target, or by an autopilot navigating it and its lethal payload to its destination.

      The swarm approach apparently became attractive to the US military following the cruise missile strikes against targets in Syria, during which the slow-moving trickle of subsonic, non-maneuverable, but very expensive Tomahawk SLCMs was combed out of the sky by a variety of modern air defense systems. Evidently even the current sophisticated Tomahawk mission planning software is incapable of delivering the “time on target” response necessary to overcome local air defenses. On the other hand, an AI-enhanced swarm of smaller, cheaper munitions might succeed where the by now dated Tomahawk had failed.

      In response, the US military had embraced the “swarm” idea with a vengeance, hoping that interconnectedness and AI will deliver the sort of technological overmatch of any and all adversaries that currently does not exist.

      US Air Force and the US Navy have been enormously resistant to the idea of heavy unmanned combat aerial vehicles (UCAVs) for much of the last decade. Many earlier experiments involving flying wing-style UCAVs such as the X-47 have failed to result in a deployed combat system. This hesitancy was driven by two factors. The first was the “fighter mafia” that rules the USAF and the naval aviation component of the USN, which is jealously guarding its elite status and which is not interested in “fighter jocks” being displaced by a bunch of kids with video game consoles controlling UCAVs. The second was the belief that the F-35 Joint Strike Fighter would live up to Lockheed-Martin propaganda and be that technological “silver bullet” in both air-to-air and air-to-ground applications, thanks to its stealth, advanced sensors, and the ability to share tactical information in real time. In actuality, however, the incredibly protracted F-35 development allowed for countermeasures to be developed, and secondly the fighter itself was found to have enough shortcomings to practically relegate it to a “niche” weapon system, a sort of second-generation F-117, rather than a workhorse to replace the vast fleet of F-16 fighters in US and allied use.

      With the F-35’s flaws now in plain view, the UCAV has been given a second lease on life as a means of rescuing the most expensive combat aircraft program in history from failure. Remarkably enough, the first air force to recognize these problems was Australia’s, which launched the “loyal wingman” project for which Boeing, a competitor to Lockheed Martin, is already building prototypes. The US equivalent is the considerably more ambitious Skyborg which is still in the conceptual stage, but which also is pursuing the same aim that is close to being achieved in Russia with the Su-57—Okhotnik UCAV combination. While the information about Skyborg is still scarce, once operational it will be procured in large numbers to ensure each F-35 could take at least one into combat by its side.

      USAF’s swarm principle is unlikely to stop there, and will also extend into munitions. The service awarded several contracts in the past couple of years to further the development of stand-off munitions that would be cheaper, longer-ranged, equipped with sensors, and interlinked, in order to facilitate their cooperation while in flight.

      The US “space swarm” so far is the least developed of the three, but its rudiments are already visible. The SpaceX Starlink constellation of small satellites that was advertised as a means of providing the entire world with access to wireless internet has also been revealed to have direct military applications. The US Air Force has acknowledged it will rely on it for broadband access for its combat aircraft. Moreover, if combined with powerful enough signal processing capabilities, Starlink offers the prospect of a global aircraft detection system, possibly even capable of tracking large moving objects on the surface of the planet, such as aircraft carriers. It’s difficult to imagine USAF and USSF would forgot attempting to develop a technology which was demonstrated for the first time with the downing of the F-117 over Serbia in 1999.

      Given the US military’s interest in reusable space-launch vehicles and developing the ability to surge launches whenever needed, it’s doubtful the Starlink will remain the only US application of the swarm concept in space. G_5 (A) – Done.  Sooner or later they will be supplemented by combat vehicles, likely based on the X-37 unmanned and reusable space shuttle that has logged an impressive number of hours in space, and whose payloads and activities remain a closely guarded secret. The recent tests of an anti-drone combat laser aboard a US warship suggest that such a weapon could eventually be deployed aboard X-37-derived combat spacecraft. While the small size of the X-37 means accommodating necessary power supplies to make the lasers effective would be a daunting task indeed, the absence of an atmosphere in low Earth orbit and the fragility of most satellites mean that a space-borne laser would be a more effective anti-satellite than anti-missile weapon.

      The dream of interconnected aerospace swarms extending from the Earth’s surface into low Earth orbit and beyond will encounter major obstacles along the way, to the point that perhaps it will remain yet another US utopian technological project aiming at obtaining permanent military supremacy.

      The first is the existence of the US Space Force, which will fight tooth and nail for organizational turf and control over space-capable assets. Ironically, the establishment of the USSF may undermine the drive toward integrated aerospace operations the same way as the creation of the US Air Force as an independent service led to the promotion of the idea of airpower winning wars entirely on its own, without collaboration with other services. While strategic airpower was a favorite among the US Army Air Corps leadership in part because, in the absence of a large land theater of operations against Germany, the bombers were the only means of bringing the war to Germany, the subordination to the Army meant tactical air could not be ignored. Once that independence from the Army was won, time and again tactical air support capabilities had to be engineered into various combat aircraft only after they became operational. One still remembers “not a pound for air to ground” that accompanied the creation of the F-15 Eagle.

      By the same token, the creation of the USSF means the existence of an organization about as interested in watching USAF develop its space capabilities, which it seems very interested in doing, as USAF is in the US Army having its own fixed-wing combat aircraft. And just as USAF prioritized air superiority and strategic warfare over tactical air support, so is the USSF liable to lose sight of the fact the most important aspect of its mission is the support of combat operations in the atmosphere and on the Earth’s surface.

      The sheer complexity of the goal of building a global swarm of swarms that links all the aerial and space platforms and munitions will also be a major challenge. It should be noted that many of the problems of the F-35 are actually software-based, for example the failed ALIS centralized maintenance monitoring system which USAF finally gave up on and decided to commission an entirely different system. Since US software development do not appear to be on a part with US military’s ambitions, there is no guarantee the US military will be able to achieve its end objective.

      This is not the first time the US military has bet on a technological advance to provide a “game changer” that would give it an irresistible advantage. The Norden bombsight, the nuclear weapon, guided munitions, were all supposed to deliver a similar objective. None of them really delivered what they promised because other powers responded in kind, and the technological capabilities themselves fell short of what was advertised.

    • California 'Utterly Failing' As 2 Million Residents Waiting For Unemployment Checks
      California ‘Utterly Failing’ As 2 Million Residents Waiting For Unemployment Checks

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 22:45

      Approximately two million Californians are still waiting for their unemployment checks from the first three months of the government-mandated COVID-19 lockdowns, according to the San Jose Mercury News which cites government data.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Unemployed residents are complaining of clogged phone lines and outdated technology at the Employment Development Department (EDD) despite Gov. Gavin Newsom (D) promising to increase staffing among other reforms.

      “I have done just about everything I know how to do as a public official to make things work, but my colleagues, my staff, my constituents and I are at our wits’ end,” said state Assemblymember David Chiu (D-San Francisco) in a tweet.

      “I know people who are on hold every day and can’t get a response,” said San Francisco resident Armand Domalewski, a workforce development expert who co-created a Facebook group for unemployed residents.

      The mounting claims arrive as some county and state government agencies are again moving to shut down an array of business activities as fears escalate that the coronavirus outbreak might intensify — a collective decision that could cause additional workers to lose their jobs.

      I’m terribly disappointed. The EDD has let us down terribly,” said Rhonda Dias, a San Jose resident and daycare teacher. Dias was temporarily laid off and later returned to her job, but at reduced hours. “The website doesn’t work and you can’t get through on the phone. People have to pay their taxes. Then they can’t help us.”

      Over the three months of March, April and May, 5.01 million California workers filed initial claims for unemployment benefits and the EDD completed first-time payments to just 3.13 million workers, statistics compiled by the U.S. Labor Department show. That points to a grim gap between the initial claims and the first-time payments, leaving 1.88 million claims unfilled and suggests a mammoth backlog of workers who have yet to receive any benefits despite being out of work for weeks or months. –San Jose Mercury News

      “You can’t get a clear answer from anybody with the EDD,” said Laurie Nelson, a resident of Union City who has been unemployed since March. “You go week after week trying to certify your claim and get some sort of unemployment payment. If I hadn’t gotten loans from family members, I would be out on the street. I wouldn’t be able to pay my rent.”

      The backlog was already horrendous before the lockdowns which began in March – with 1.44 million unpaid workers waiting for checks from the EDD. By the end of April, the backlog grew to 1.75 million. Today, the backlog stands at just under 2 million.

      “These numbers show what we have suspected all along: EDD is utterly failing millions of Californians,” said Chiu, who added “EDD’s failure has real human consequences. Californians have depleted their life savings, gone into severe debt, and been unable to feed their families because of bureaucratic incompetence.”

      ““We continue to work around the clock, seven days a week to expand our capacity for processing this unprecedented demand for unemployment benefits as quickly as possible,” EDD spokesman Barry White insisted. “We are enhancing our technology systems to increase efficiencies, and have already hired or have offers extended to more than 4,000 new staff needed as part of an expedited mass hiring effort with the increased federal funding we’ve received.”

      The agency has promised to prioritize older claims from March and April, but gave no indication when the backlog would be cleared.

      California isn’t the only state to face unemployment woes – as the state of Washington has called in the National Guard to help process thousands of unemployment claims.

      This comes after state officials stopped unemployment benefits after they were tricked out of ‘hundreds of millions of dollars‘ in a Nigerian scam.

       

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • Is Strzok Memo The Rosetta Stone Of Obamagate?
      Is Strzok Memo The Rosetta Stone Of Obamagate?

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 22:25

      Authored by Frank Miele via RealClearPolitics.com,

      So much happens so fast in a world with a 15-minute news cycle that it’s difficult for a journalist to stop and breathe, let alone ponder the meaning of the latest breathless reporting.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As an example, it seems like it was months ago when the D.C. Court of Appeals ordered Judge Emmet Sullivan to dismiss the case against former National Security Adviser Michael Flynn, but it was actually less than two weeks ago. June 24 to be exact, but to Flynn it probably seems like forever. No word from Sullivan about whether he intends to follow the order of the senior court, or continue to stall in an effort to punish Lt. Gen. Flynn for his political crime of supporting President Trump. But based on his record so far, Sullivan can probably be counted on to drag his feet while thumbing his nose at justice.

      Whether it is the Flynn case, or the persecution of one-time Trump adviser Roger Stone for a procedural crime of lying before a malevolent Congress, the implicit reason behind all the over-the-top harassment almost seems to be to goad Trump into pardoning his much-maligned associates in order to create another fake news cycle as we head into the 2020 election. Nobody asks, “Did you see what that corrupt judge did? Or what the Democrat-worshiping DOJ did?” It’s always “Did you hear what that crazy bastard Trump did?”)

      It doesn’t seem to matter to the mainstream media that evidence has mounted into the stratosphere that Trump has been right all along about his campaign being illegally surveilled by the Obama administration. It doesn’t matter that Trump survived a two-plus year investigation by a special counsel and was cleared of any kind of collusion with the Russians. The Democrats and their agents in the Deep State know that whatever they do to harass Trump will be treated as noble and patriotic by the corrupt media, and that whenever evidence surfaces of their criminal behavior it will be promptly buried again.

      Which brings us to the infamous handwritten notes by disgraced FBI agent Peter Strzok about a White House meeting that surfaced in a recent filing in the Flynn case. Strzok had already earned a prominent place in the “Wish I Hadn’t Done That” Hall of Fame for his serial confession via text message of not just marital infidelity but also constitutional perfidy. But the half-page of notes released by Flynn’s defense team rises to the level of a history-altering “Oops!” Indeed, it could well be the Rosetta stone that allows us to penetrate the secrets of the anti-Trump conspiracy that stretched from the FBI to the CIA, the Justice Department and the White House.

      What we know about the provenance of the notes comes from Flynn’s attorney Sidney Powell, who said they were written by Strzok about a meeting that took place on Jan. 4, 2017. The only problem is that the cast of characters in the memo duplicates those who were in attendance at the White House on Jan. 5, 2017, to discuss how the Obama administration should proceed in its dealings with Flynn, who was accused of playing footsie with Russian Ambassador Sergey Kislyak prior to assuming his official role as national security adviser. Attorney General William Barr has gone on the record (on the “Verdict With Ted Cruz” podcast) that the notes actually describe the Jan. 5 meeting.

      If so, the notes strongly contradict Susan Rice’s CYA “memo to self” where the Obama national security adviser recounts the Jan. 5 meeting and stresses three times that President Obama and his team were handling the Flynn investigation “by the book.” Methinks the lady doth protest too much, especially now that we have Strzok’s contemporaneous notes to contradict her memo, which suspiciously was written in the final minutes of the Obama administration as Donald Trump was being sworn in at the Capitol.

      From what we can tell, Strzok (unlike Rice) was not writing his memo to protect anyone. He seems to have merely jotted down some notes about what various participants in the meeting said, including President Obama, Vice President Joe Biden, Rice, Deputy Attorney General Sally Yates and Strzok’s boss — FBI Director James Comey. Chances are, at this point Strzok had no idea his dirty laundry was going to be aired or that his role as a master of the universe was going to be toppled.

      But to see the importance of these notes, we need to transcribe them from the cryptic handwritten notes. Words and phrases that are outright guesses are reproduced in brackets. Speakers are noted at the beginning of each line. “NSA” stands for Rice. “D” stands for Comey. “DAG” stands for Yates. “VP” stands for Biden. “P” stands for Obama. “Cuts” is said to refer to summaries of phone calls monitored under a FISA warrant to collect foreign intelligence.

      NSA – D – DAG: Flynn cuts. Other [countries].

      D – DAG: Lean forward on [illegible, but possibly “ambass” as in ambassador. Others have speculated on “useless” or “unless,” which don’t fit the context, or “unclass” as in “unclassified” or even a name beginning with m. We just don’t know.]

      VP: “Logan Act”

      P: These are unusual times

      VP: I’ve been on the Intel Committee for 10 years and I never

      P: Make sure you look at thing[s] + have the right people on it

      P: Is there anything I shouldn’t be telling transition team?

      D: Flynn —> Kislyak calls but appear legit.

      [Apple][??] – Happy New Year – Yeah right

      The reasons why these nine lines are so important have been adequately explored by other writers on most of the relevant topics. Most significantly from a political point of view is confirmation that Biden lied when he said he had nothing to do with the criminal prosecution of Flynn. The Logan Act is a more than 200-year-old statute that forbids ordinary Americans from negotiating with foreign governments that have a dispute with the United States. No one has ever been convicted under the law, and Flynn was not an ordinary American, but rather the incoming national security adviser; nonetheless it was a central plank in the plan to give Flynn enough rope to hang himself. The fact that quotes appear only around the words Logan Act suggest that this was a direct quote from Biden.

      In addition, the order by Obama presumably to Comey to “have the right people on it” suggests that there was a political element to the investigation and that the president wanted loyalists to handle it. What other explanation is there? Who exactly are the “wrong people” in the FBI? (That’s a rhetorical question. Obviously the wrong people were Strzok, Comey and their buddies at the FBI and CIA who were wiretapping honest Americans and framing a president.)

      Finally, and most importantly for Flynn and his attorneys, we have a contemporaneous account of the FBI director assuring the president that Flynn’s conversations with Kislyak were “legit.” In that case, why did Strzok reveal in an instant message on Jan. 4, 2017, the day before this historic meeting, that the FBI agent in charge should NOT close the case against Flynn even though it should have already been closed because no evidence had accrued against him? If Comey thought the general’s conversations with Kislyak were “legit,” then why did Strzok tell another FBI contact that the “7th floor [was] involved” in the decision to keep the Flynn case alive. The seventh floor being where the offices of Comey and the rest of the top FBI brass are located. Strzok was ecstatic to find out that the case had “serendipitously” not been closed, and told his girlfriend Lisa Page, “Our utter incompetence actually helps us.”

      There seems to be no consensus among analysts about the context of Strzok’s notes. According to Rice’s independent recollection of the Jan. 5 meeting, only the principals named above were present. CIA Director John Brennan and Director of National Intelligence James Clapper had already been booted out of the meeting after giving a briefing on alleged Russian election interference. It seems unlikely that Strzok would have been present in any capacity.

      Andrew McCarthy at National Review speculates that “Strzok’s notes were taken when someone later briefed him about the White House meeting that Strzok did not attend.” The New York Post concludes that the Strzok memo is “plainly Strzok’s notes of FBI chief Jim Comey’s account.” Certainly if Strzok were briefed by someone in attendance, it was most likely Comey. But Ivan Pentchoukov of The Epoch Times floats a much more interesting idea about how Strzok came to be in possession of the facts he recorded in the memo.

      “The on-the-fly nature of the notes suggest that he was either physically present or listened in on a conference call,” Pentchoukov speculates.

      Well, the Washington Post reports that “Strzok’s lawyer told The Fact Checker that Strzok did not attend the meeting,” and then suggests that probably means “the notes may recount what someone else – perhaps Comey – told him about the meeting.” Yes, maybe so, but there is good reason not to skate over the possibility that, as Pentchoukov puts it, Strzok “listened in” on the conversation.

      This is indeed heady stuff, as it is beyond reason to think that Strzok was an invited participant. The last thing anyone at that meeting would want is an independent account of what was said as they planned how to entrap one of the incoming president’s closest aides. Yet that does not eliminate the chance that Strzok benefited from some kind of surveillance technique to eavesdrop on the conversation, either with the knowledge of one person in the room or possibly with none. Of course it is scary to think that the FBI was wiretapping the White House, but they did it to Trump Tower, so who knows?

      It is the nature of the notes themselves that lends credence to this speculation. If they were written after the fact to memorialize a conversation Strzok had with Comey or someone else, there is no way to account for the brevity and choppiness of the account. Rather than just put “Logan Act” next to VP, an after-the-fact recitation would have been more likely to specify, “The Vice President brought up the Logan Act as one statute that could be used to prosecute Flynn’s dangerous dealings with the Russian ambassador.” And most suspiciously, there is no explanation for why Strzok would have cut off the end of Biden’s other contribution to the conversation. “I’ve been on the Intel Committee for 10 years and I never,” the transcript goes. “Never what?” the reader wants to know.

      Of course we can add the words ourselves: “Never heard of anyone being prosecuted for talking to a foreign leader, especially not if they had a legitimate interest in establishing relations with their counterpart prior to a new president taking office.” If Strzok were making leisurely notes while talking to his boss, or especially if he had gone back to his own office and thought it worthwhile to record what he had been told, would it make any sense for him to stop in mid-sentence?

      No, it wouldn’t. It only makes sense if, as Pentchoukov describes it, the notes were written “on the fly.” Certainly not with a tape recorder running, where one could establish an exact transcript, but hurriedly, sloppily, furtively. That would also explain why the handwriting is not exactly consistent with other known samples of Strzok’s script. Presumably, the FBI has validated the handwriting as Strzok’s, but does the FBI have any reason to lie about that? Hmm.

      Ultimately, if Strzok is indeed the author, we need him to testify under oath exactly what is in the notes, and how they came to be written. Hopefully the FBI, the attorney general or someone else will declassify the extensive redactions above and below the nine lines that were released. One has to imagine that in those passages, Strzok revealed his source for the material quoted, as well as confirming the date of the meeting, and possibly the reason for the meeting. He has quite a tale to tell — one that could change history.

      If there were even one Republican senator in charge of a committee who had the curiosity of a 3-year-old, it is likely we could actually get to the bottom of the shenanigans that nearly toppled a president and finally pin the “tale” on the donkey — the Democratic donkey that is.

      But Republican senators in an election year have better things to do than protect and defend the Constitution. There are fundraisers to attend, after all.

    • Hong Kong Schools Must Ensure "Patriotic" Content & Remove Books Breaching China Security Law
      Hong Kong Schools Must Ensure “Patriotic” Content & Remove Books Breaching China Security Law

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 22:05

      Things in Hong Kong have rapidly gone straight Orwellian very quickly after the July 1 enactment of the new national security law.

      As we detailed this week activists are busy scrubbing their digital footprints, including deleting social media profiles and chat histories, given authorities can reportedly pry citizens’ online communications from internet companies without a warrant under the law.

      But it’s not just college-age and ‘professional demonstrators’ and pro-independence organizers that have to worry, as now even schools have been ordered to review textual content in books. This means teachers and young students are coming under threat if they don’t visibly and “positively” conform.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Via CNN

      Hong Kong’s Education Bureau this week announced that schools must review their own long in use education material, including books in classrooms and on library shelves, to ensure that no content which violates the law is present.

      The bureau described this as part of an initiative to “positively teach” students regarding the new law. “In accordance with the four types of offences clearly stipulated in the law, the school management and teachers should review teaching and learning materials in a timely manner, including books,” the Education Bureau said.

      “If they find outdated content or content that may concern the four aforementioned offences, they should remove them,” it added. This essentially hearkens back to 1930’s Germany book burning days.

      And in a chilling statement which seems straight of a dystopian novel, the Education Bureau added: “As with other serious crimes or immoral behaviour that is not socially acceptable, materials should be removed and re-selected.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Hong Kong has long prided itself as a city of free expression set apart from the overshadowing mainland. But it appears that’s changing fast, already as prominent anti-Beijing activists have begun fleeing the city, amid fears the national security law could be applied retroactively.

      “Hong Kong has some of Asia’s best universities and a campus culture where topics that would be taboo on the mainland are still discussed and written about,” AFP noted, and added disturbingly: “But Beijing has made clear it wants education in the city to become more ‘patriotic’ especially after a year of huge, often violent and largely youth-led pro-democracy protests.”

      Meanwhile, for the first time since Hong Kong reached its semi-autonomous status, a new Beijing security office has opened in the city, placing mainland Chinese law enforcement and intelligence agents there for the first time.

    • Selective Media Reporting Further Fuels Our Racial Divide
      Selective Media Reporting Further Fuels Our Racial Divide

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 21:45

      Authored by John Lott via RealClearPolitics.com,

      On Saturday, a man drove his car onto a Seattle freeway that had been closed by a Black Lives Matter crowd. The driver killed one person and seriously injured another after going the wrong way up a ramp and then around a barricade. Reports noted that police “don’t believe impairment was a factor.”

      Over the weekend, news outlets replayed the brutal hit, but there’s one thing you won’t learn from their coverage: The driver was black and his victims were white.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      NPR linked this attack to other car-ramming incidents by “right-wing extremists targeting Black Lives Matter protesters.” They quote a researcher about how these right-wingers were “trying to intimidate the most recent wave of BLM protesters, to stop their movement.”

      The driver was a Seattle local named Dawit Kelete. But you’ll find scant mention of the driver’s ethnicity in mainstream media coverage. You might have more easily learned that Kelete was black by going to the Australia Broadcasting Corporation. The American national media also doesn’t note that Kelete’s two victims were white. You can find that out over at the U.K.’s Daily Mail.

      Among the few U.S. outlets to mention the race of the driver is Heavy.com. The rest of the news media seemingly would rather just have people assume that a white driver attacked two black protesters. Acknowledging the driver’s and victims’ ethnicity wouldn’t advance their narrative of oppression, so it apparently isn’t newsworthy.

      One case doesn’t prove a pattern. It could just be that while the American media knows almost everything about this killer, including his name, age, and where he lives, they couldn’t find information on his race. Possibly the foreign news outlets were just lucky to discover that information.

      Of course, the media outlets might honestly not view race as essential to the story. But their selective reporting of it shows that they think race is important when it involves certain races. The problem is that it gives readers a biased perspective, inflaming prejudice and creating stereotypes. 

      Research conducted by the Crime Prevention Research Center, of which I am president, on all police shootings from 2013 to 2015 found that while local news coverage will often mention the race of the officer and the suspect, the national coverage is much more selective. While the evidence indicates that black officers are no less likely to shoot suspects than white officers, local news coverage of black officers shooting black suspects gets picked up by the national news in just 9% of cases. By contrast, 38% of the cases in which local news reported on a white officer shooting a black suspect get national coverage.

      The selective coverage creates the belief that white officers are the problem — they are the ones shooting blacks, presumably because white officers treat black suspects differently than white ones. Watching the news, you would never guess that the research found that black officers were just as likely as white officers to shoot an unarmed black suspect. 

      The media’s selective coverage has done real harm. It has heightened racial divides and sown distrust of the police in the communities that need them most. Now, with police sidelined and facing “defunding,” gun violence is rising fast in major cities around the country. 

      The media similarly seems intent on claiming that mass public shooters are disproportionately white and right-wing, when nothing could be further from the truth. While 58% of the mass public shooters from 1998 to 2019 were white (excluding people of Middle Eastern descent), about 75% of the total U.S. population was white. Middle Eastern Arabs made up just 1% of the population, but accounted for 8% of shooters. Of all the mass killers, 72%  have no known political affiliation or views – only 3% are known to be conservative or Republican.

      Race and politics increasingly divide Americans, and selective media reporting is largely to blame. The media, not Trump, is fanning the flames of violence. The destruction and the long-term harm that is being done to heavily minority parts of our cities is their responsibility.  

    • San Francisco Lawmaker Unveils 'CAREN Act' To Stop "Racist, Sexist, Transphobic" 9-1-1 Calls
      San Francisco Lawmaker Unveils ‘CAREN Act’ To Stop “Racist, Sexist, Transphobic” 9-1-1 Calls

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 21:25

      24 hours after Amy Cooper, the Central Park ‘Karen’ in New York City, was charged with a misdemeanor for making a false report when she called the police to accuse a Black man who was bird watching of harassing her, the always-righteous city of San Francisco is taking a stand against Karens (well mostly racist Karens).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The Mercury News reports that Supervisor Shamann Walton introduced on Tuesday the Caution Against Racially Exploitative Non-Emergencies (or CAREN) Act, which would make it illegal to “fabricate false racially biased emergency reports.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Member of the San Francisco board of supervisors Shamann Walton

      “Racist 911 calls are unacceptable,” Shamann Walton, a member of the San Francisco board of supervisors, tweeted Tuesday.

      One example given by Walton, according to The Mercury News, was “a woman [calling] the police on a Filipino man stenciling ‘Black Lives Matter’ in chalk in front of his home in San Francisco’s Pacific Heights neighborhood.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “That’s why I’m introducing the CAREN Act at today’s SF Board of Supervisors meeting.”

      The Act “will make it unlawful for an individual to contact law enforcement solely to discriminate on the basis of a person’s race, ethnicity, religious affiliation, gender, sexual orientation, or gender identity,” the San Francisco Chronicle reported, citing the draft law.

      It would appear the main aim of this law in practice, since it is already illegal to make false 911 calls in California, would be to  designate the act as a racial hate crime.

    • Hydroxychloroquine And Fake News
      Hydroxychloroquine And Fake News

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 21:05

      Authored by Jeremy Gordon via TheDuran.com,

      The anti-hydroxychloroquine media has been full of the supposed dangers of hydroxychloroquine and its failure as a treatment for the virus.

      Does hydroxychloroquine work or does it not, is it safe or dangerous, and should we be using it as a treatment for the virus?

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Here we examine the evidence for and against it.

      A New York doctor Vladimir Zelenko looked at treatments being used in China and Korea and gave it to 405 patients over 60 or with high-risk problems such as diabetes, asthma, obesity, hypertension or shortness of breath. In this high risk group he claimed to have cut hospital admission and mortality rates compared to what could be expected without treatment by 80 to 90%. https://internetprotocol.co/hype-news/2020/04/14/a-detailed-coronavirus-treatment-plan-from-dr-zelenko/

      Dr Zelenko sent a letter to President Trump urging him to issue an executive order to roll out the treatment which the FDA was blocking. Trump announced that hydroxychloroquine looked like it could be a “game-changer”, and thus the politicization of hydroxychloroquine began.

      Dr Fauci the director of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases who was supposed to be advising Trump disagreed with him and backed Gilead’s rival treatment Remdesivir. YouTube deleted a video of Dr. Zelenko talking about the treatment on his Rabbi’s channel and despite objections that there was nothing wrong with the video YouTube never reinstated it.

      In this YouTube video interview with Rudy Giulliani from July 1, which hopefully will not be deleted by the time you read this, Dr. Zelenko claims 99,3% survival rate for the high-risk patients he has treatedhttps://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TFwjY0qe7ro

      Professor Didier Raoult of Marseilles used a similar protocol to Dr. Zelenko without the zinc. His study with a small group using hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin showed a fifty-fold benefit. He then went on to get similar results with a much larger group of 1,061 patients. Contrary to the warnings the media had been running that hydroxychloroquine would cause heart problems, no cardiac toxicity was observed and he achieved a mortality rate of only 0.5%. http://covexit.com/professor-didier-raoult-releases-the-results-of-a-new-hydroxychloroquine-treatment-study-on-1061-patients/

      The media quickly found critics who claimed that the only valid proof any treatment worked was a “gold-standard” double-blind clinical trial and dismissed Dr. Zelenko’s and Raoult’s results. Dr. Zelenko and Prof. Raoult both refused on ethical grounds to give placebos to half the patients in clinical trials and they defended their data as sufficient to show the treatment did work. They both stressed that the urgency of the situation made it necessary to act on available evidence, not clinical trials which would take months to produce results and be verified. There have subsequently been over a dozen studies which confirm that Dr. Zelenko’s and Prof. Raoult’s protocols do work.

      A study from the New York University Grossman school of Medicine published in May found patients given hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin at an early stage had a lower need for hospitalization than those who were not. The addition of zinc improved the results even more. https://www.medrxiv.org/content/10.1101/2020.05.02.20080036v1.full.pdf

      I’ll tell you what. If this is me, and I am me, and I end up getting this thing, I am going to want Zinc plus Hydroxychloroquine plus Azithromycin. I would want that treatment.” commented Chris Martenson, PhD, in his video series about COVID-19 where he talks about this study. http://covexit.com/i-am-going-to-want-zinc-plus-hydroxychloroquine-plus-azithromycin-chris-masterson-phd/

      Yale Professor Harvey Risch submitted a report of five trials and studies using hydroxychloroquine in the American Journal of Epistemology titled “Early Outpatient Treatment of Symptomatic, High-Risk Covid-19 Patients that Should be Ramped-Up Immediately as Key to the Pandemic Crisis.  https://www.medrxiv.org/content/10.1101/2020.05.02.20080036v1.

      Prof. Risch agreed that, in an ideal world, randomized double-blinded controlled clinical trials would be preferable but in the meantime “for the great majority I conclude that hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin, preferably with zinc can be this outpatient treatment, at least until we find or add something better. It is our obligation not to stand by as the old and infirm are killed by this disease and our economy is destroyed by it and we have nothing to offer except high-mortality hospital treatment. Available evidence of efficacy of HCQ+AZ has been repeatedly described in the media as anecdotal, but most certainly is not” http://covexit.com/yale-epidemiology-professor-urges-hydroxychloroquine-azithromycin-early-therapy-for-covid-19/

      A Brazilian study found 4.6 times less hospitalization in patients who took hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin within seven days of infection. Professor Paolo Zanotto reported that there were 41% of deaths among those who did not choose therapy and were hospitalized against 0% among those who chose by therapy.” http://covexit.com/new-brazilian-study-shows-telemedicine-hydroxychloroquine-treatment-reduce-need-for-hospitalization/

      A retrospective study of 2,541 Detroit cases showed up to 71% reduction in mortality in early treatment with hydroxychloroquine azithromycin. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijid.2020.06.099

      A retrospective study of 3,737 cases in Marseille showed a reduction of 50% in mortality without any adverse effects in the Hydroxychloroquine and Azithromycin group. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.tmaid.2020.101791

      A meta-analysis of 105,040 cases from 20 studies in 9 countries found a reduction in mortality by up to three times in groups treated early with Hydroxychloroquine and Azithromycinhttps://doi.org/10.1016/j.nmni.2020.100709

      A study of 6,493 patients with COVID-19 at Mount Sinai Hospital, New York, showed that hydroxychloroquine helped to reduce mortality in hospitalized patients. . https://doi.org/10.1007/s11606-020-05983-z

      On July 3 a study by a Michigan team at Henry Ford Health System found that 13 percent of patients who were given the drug early on survived while 26 percent of patients who were not given the drug died. The study which included 2,541 patients was published in the International Journal of Infectious Diseases and determined that hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin provided a 71% hazard ratio reduction.

      Our results do differ from some other studies. What we think was important in ours … is that patients were treated early. For hydroxychloroquine to have a benefit, it needs to begin before the patients begin to suffer some of the severe immune reactions that patients can have with COVID” said Dr. Marcus Zervos, head of infectious disease for Henry Ford Health System. https://www.ijidonline.com/article/S1201-9712(20)30534-8/fulltext

      A statement from the Trump campaign hailed the study as fantastic news.

      Fortunately, the Trump Administration secured a massive supply of hydroxychloroquine for the national stockpile months ago, yet this is the same drug that the media and the Biden campaign spent weeks trying to discredit and spread fear and doubt around because President Trump dared to mention it as a potential treatment for coronavirus. The new study from the Henry Ford Health System should be a clear message to the media and the Democrats: stop the bizarre attempts to discredit hydroxychloroquine to satisfy your own anti-Trump agenda. It may be costing lives.”

      Also on July 3 results from another study by Dr. Takahisa Mikami and his team at Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai in New York, was published in the Journal of General Internal Medicine. The study analyzed the outcomes of 6,493 patients who had laboratory-confirmed COVID-19 in the New York City metropolitan area and found that hydroxychloroquine decreased mortality hazard ratio by 47% percent.  https://doi.org/10.1007/s11606-020-05983-z

      Many more studies in addition to those above also show that treating early with hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin and preferably also zinc is the key to ending hospitalization and death.  https://c19study.com/

      The trials that confirm Dr. Zelenko’s and Prof. Raoult’s finding have been mostly ignored or dismissed by the anti-hydroxychloroquine media.

      The trials that they have given attention to are those that supposedly show that hydroxychloroquine doesn’t help or even increases the death rate.

      Statistics from the US Veterans hospital study (Magagnoli, 2020) showed patients who were given hydroxychloroquine died more frequently than those who did not. https://www.medrxiv.org/content/10.1101/2020.04.16.20065920v2

      In this study hydroxychloroquine was only given to patients who were already seriously ill and those who were getting better without any treatment were not given it. Predictably those given hydroxychloroquine did worse than the untreated group but those conducting the study claimed it as proof that hydroxychloroquine did not work. Professor Raoult commented “In the current period, it seems that passion dominates rigorous and balanced scientific analysis and may lead to scientific misconduct. The study by Magagnoli et al is an absolutely spectacular example of this,” http://covexit.com/the-definitive-guide-to-discrediting-hydroxychloroquine-based-treatments-to-covid-19-part-1/

      One of the collaborators in the trial reportedly received a $260 million grant from Gilead Sciences Inc. which produces the rival treatment Remdesivir.

      The US Secretary of Veteran Affairs Robert Wilkie, acknowledged that the drug was given to veterans at their last stages of life and added “We know the drug has been working on middle-age and young veterans … it is working in stopping the progression of the disease.”

      Another study that supposedly showed that hydroxychloroquine was dangerous and didn’t work came from a group that claimed to have data on hydroxychloroquine use for Covid-19 from hospitals around the world  The study was published on 22 May in the Lancet medical journal. The results were immediately disputed by one of the Australian hospitals from which Surgisphere, the company which supplied the data claimed to have obtained it.

      Following this a group of 140 scientists, researchers, and statisticians wrote an open letter to the Lancet and the authors of the study questioning the data used. A Guardian investigation revealed that Surgisphere was run by employees who lacked any scientific background. One was a science fiction author and fantasy artist and another was an “adult model and events hostess.” The Lancet conducted an independent investigation, retracted the study and in an interview with The New York Times, Dr. Richard Horton, the editor in chief admitted that the study should never have appeared in his journal.  https://www.thelancet.com/journals/lancet/article/PIIS0140-6736(20)31180-6/fulltext

      On the basis of the flawed Lancet study the WHO suspended the hydroxychloroquine trials it was sponsoring. When the study was retracted they resumed them briefly but soon after suspended them again on the results of another faulty study, the Oxford University’s “RECOVERY Trial”.

      The researchers in this trial gave patients massive doses of hydroxychloroquine without the necessary addition of azithromycin and they started treatment too late. That the RECOVERY Trial was never going to work was pointed out on the Covexit website two months before it started. http://covexit.com/uk-recovery-trial-inadequate-hydroxychloroquine-treatment-predictably-fails/

      Prof. Raoult compared the Oxford academics who carried out the hydroxychloroquine section of the RECOVERY trial to the Marx Brothers in a video interview titled “The Marx Brothers are Doing Science – the Example of RECOVERY” http://covexit.com/professor-raoult-compares-the-oxford-recovery-trial-academics-to-the-marx-brothers/

      Prof. Raoult sarcastically commented that the good news that came out of the trial was that hydroxychloroquine is not toxic. The RECOVERY trial used a 2,400 mg dose on the first day compared to Dr.Raoult’s 600 mg. Even with such high dosage there were no cardiac side effects with any of the participants. Prof. Raoult recalled that “two weeks ago one was told everybody was dying because of cardiac issuesAt least, this trial is good to assess the toxicity of hydroxychloroquine as they did not announce any toxicity, even at such high dosage”.

      Although by now it should have been abundantly clear that hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin only worked in combination and if given early, not to patients in hospital more than seven days after infection, in April the US National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI) at the National Institutes of Health (NIH) started hydroxychloroquine trials on hospitalized patients too late, some already in emergency wards, and then abandoned the trials with the conclusion that “hydroxychloroquine does no harm but provides no benefit”. The FDA cancelled its emergency use authorization and the NIH halted their clinical trials of hydroxychloroquine

      The media hostile to hydroxychloroquine successfully whipped up hysteria about its supposed dangers although it has an excellent safety record and it is not even alongside aspirin on the WHO list of the 100 most dangerous drugs.  Specialists and doctors prescribing hydroxychloroquine for Rheumatoid Arthritis and Lupus have confirmed that thousands of patients are being prescribed the same dose Dr. Zelenko is giving for five days for years on end without problems.

      Were the failed studies faulty because of ignorance or by design?

      Who gains from them?

      The drug companies can’t make much money on a generic drug, and they found in the media and the scientific community willing accomplices to stop its use. Gilead Sciences Inc. gives grants in addition to those mentioned above to Oxford University and the WHO. Is it possible that people in these prestigious institutions may have their integrity compromised by money, or is it mere coincidence that Gilead with their rival treatment is funding them?

      Some of the media will do anything to make Trump look like a fool and these faulty trials were the perfect opportunity. The media hostile to hydroxychloroquine downplayed or cast doubt on the many successful studies and trials with hydroxychloroquine and made the most of the faulty trials as proof that the drug Trump had touted didn’t work.

      For the media it seems to have been more about scoring political points and increasing their audience ratings rather than investigative reporting which uncovers the truth. For those who are dying and their families and friends as a result of this treatment not being used because of media misinformation it is lives tragically lost, and for the rest of us it is our economies sinking, businesses failing, and unemployment, poverty and suffering rising.

      Hundreds of thousands of lives could be saved, and los,s ruin, suffering and devastation to our economies and societies avoided if we simply started using this safe, cheap and readily available treatment. It is a ludicrous and tragic farce that because of the massive misinformation on behalf of corporate greed and political point scoring that we are not.

    • Navy Taking "Extraordinary Measures" To Keep South China Sea Carriers COVID-Free
      Navy Taking “Extraordinary Measures” To Keep South China Sea Carriers COVID-Free

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 20:45

      The Pentagon is seeking to assure the US public and the world that “extraordinary measures” are being taken to ensure all sailors currently deployed on two aircraft carriers in the South China Sea remain COVID-19 free. 

      The Navy is enacting strict health measures, including mandatory face masks among sailors, in order to avoid the USS Theodore Roosevelt disaster of months ago, which saw over 1,000 of its nearly 5,000 member crew infected, including the ship’s commander.

      “We’ve taken extraordinary measures to protect our sailors from COVID, but that said it remains a real threat and requires constant vigilance,” Rear Adm. George Wikoff, the commander of Carrier Strike Group 5, led by the USS Ronald Reagan, said in a statement Wednesday. “The entire team underway, everyone on board, is required to wear a mask,” he added. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      USS Ronald Reagan, bottom, and USS Nimitz are training in the South China Sea along with support ships, via Reuters.

      The Pentagon has described the South China Sea maneuvers by two supercarriers sent to the region days ago, namely the USS Ronald Reagan and USS Nimitz, as necessary to stand up “for the right of all nations to fly, sail and operate wherever international law allows” and further as a “symbol of resolve”.

      Each carrier has 90 or more aircraft and about 6,000 personnel, making it a significant display of force off China’s coast. But any potential outbreak among the combined 12,000 navy personnel could be disastrous, and send quite the opposite message of lack of preparedness. 

      Additional measures ensuring the two carriers will avoid the fate of the Roosevelt include spaced out mealtimes, general social distancing measures, and having specialists aboard such as trained microbiologists who can help detect any early cases. Extra medical personnel have also been assigned to the carriers. 

      Beijing officials earlier dismissed the provocative carrier presence in the region as as “nothing more than paper tigers on China’s doorsteps.” 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      To some degree that does indeed describe the prior USS Roosevelt saga, given COVID-19 did take it out of commission as it was forced to cut short its mission and dock at Guam to deal with the outbreak.

    • California, Texas, Arizona Shatter COVID-19 Records As Global Case Total Nears 12 Million: Live Updates
      California, Texas, Arizona Shatter COVID-19 Records As Global Case Total Nears 12 Million: Live Updates

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 20:37

      Summary:

      • Texas reports record deaths for second day
      • US reports 59,655 new cases
      • California reports record jump in new cases
      • No. of Fla ICUs at 100% capacity drops to 42
      • Miami Mayor calls on Trump to make mask-wearing mandatory
      • White House to issue its own school reopening guidelines
      • Chile tops 300k cases, plans to lift lockdown
      • Miami-Dade occupied hospital beds hit new record
      • Dr Birx urges states with worst outbreaks to revert to phase 1 reopening
      • Decision on reopening NY schools will come first week in August
      • Cuomo warns outbreak in the Sun Belt is putting NY’s progress at risk
      • Arizona hospitalizations rise to another record
      • NYC schools won’t reopen in September, mayor says
      • Dr. Fauci: “I never saw a virus with so many symptoms”
      • Cuomo calls for press briefing at 1130ET
      • Moderna completes trial enrollment
      • WHO finally admits there’s “some evidence” of airborne transmission as US severs ties
      • Kudlow says moving back toward lockdown would be “a mistake”
      • Mt Sinai, Emergent Bio announce plans to test new COVID plasma drug
      • US reports 60k+ new cases on Tuesday
      • NJ orders mandatory mask wearing outside
      • US coronavirus cases top 3 million
      • US reports ~44k new cases Tuesday
      • 56 Florida ICUs hit full capacity
      • Texas hospital occupancy at more than 90%
      • World reports 5k new deaths
      • US sees highest daily death toll since June 9
      • Brazil president says he’s taking hydroxychloroquine
      • Trump demands schools reopen in the fall

      * * *

      Update (1900ET): During a day when a “weekend backlog” Texas posted its second straight day of record virus deaths, at 98, bringing total fatalities in the state to 2,813.

      Virus cases rose 4.7% to 220,564, exceeding the seven-day average of 4%. The 9,979 new cases were second only to yesterday’s record of 10,028. Hospitalizations jumped by 324, or 3.5%, which was less than the 7-day average of 5.2%.

      • TEXAS VIRUS CASES RISE 4.7%, EXCEEDING 7-DAY AVERAGE OF 4%

      As cases continued rising in Houston, epicenter of the state’s biggest outbreak, Mayor Sylvester Turner said he was canceling the Republican Party’s state convention that was to be held in the city next week. The mayor also objected to proposals to reopen public schools in August.

      * * *

      Update (1730ET): California reported 11,694 new cases of the novel coronavirus on Wednesday, its biggest yet, as its rate of positive cases over the last 2 weeks has climbed to 7.1%, compared with 5% during the prior 2-week period. Gov Newsom explained away Wednesday’s record jump by saying it includes some of the backlog from LA County from the holiday weekend. 

      The state also reported another 111 deaths.

      Meanwhile, coronavirus cases in the US rose 59,655 from a day earlier to 3.02 million, according to data from Johns Hopkins and Bloomberg. The 2% increase was higher than the average daily increase of 1.8% over the past week. Deaths, meanwhile, rose 0.8% to 131,857.

      Around the world, the total number of COVID-19 cases has reached 11,921,616, leaving it on track to top 12 million by end-of-day tomorrow.

      * * *

      Update (1430ET): CNN Just reported that the number of Florida hospitals with a full ICU had declined to 42 from a record 56 earlier.

      There are currently 42 Florida hospitals that are at zero capacity for intensive care unit beds.

      This is down from 56 hospitals reported on Tuesday, according to Florida’s Agency for Healthcare Administration. On Wednesday, 54 hospitals around the state were at 10% capacity or less, according to the AHCA dashboard.

      “Hospitals have the ability to convert beds and bring additional ICU beds online in a surge situation when necessary,” the AHCA said in a statement to CNN.

      Boca Raton Hospital in Palm Beach County normally has 230 adult ICU beds, there are just 11 available; lowering their capacity to 4.56%, according to AHCA.

      Miami-Dade County has 992 adult ICU beds in its hospitals but currently 170 are available, 17.14% capacity, AHCA data shows.

      “The state has established a field hospital at the Miami Beach Convention Center with over 450 beds to allow for even greater capacity if necessary,” the AHCA statement said. 

      Broward County, one of the worst-hit in the state, is also saying it might not reopen schools in the fall with the rest of the state if things don’t improve substantially. Meanwhile, Miami’s Mayor is calling for a national mask mandate, while warning that it’s only a matter of time before the death toll in his state rises.

      * * *

      Update (1330ET): After President Trump all but confirmed it earlier after saying he disagreed with the CDC’s guidelines, NBC News reports that the White House is, in fact, preparing its own guidelines, barely an hour after Governor Cuomo finished telling the press that New York won’t be “bullied” into reopening its schools before it’s ready.

      * * *

      Update (1245ET): Chile has just topped 300k confirmed cases of COVID-19, joining the an exclusive group of just a handful of countries that have passed the threshold.

      The country also announced plans to lift its lockdown, but not until Aug. 1.

      Chile surpassed 300,000 coronavirus cases on Tuesday after reporting more than 2,400 new infections over the last 24 hours, prompting the South American country to move ahead with easing its lockdown.

      There were 50 new deaths, bringing the total to more than 6,400, although the health ministry believes another 3,500 deaths were probably caused by the virus.

      Chile’s numbers have been declining for more than three weeks, and the country is now planning to ease confinement measures.

      “We confirm an improvement that has been going on for 23 days,” said Health Minister Enrique Paris.

      The country remains essentially tied with Peru for worst hit country in Latin America.

      * * *

      Update (1215ET): Miami-Dade just announced that its occupied hospital beds have hit a new record high at 358, from 343. As Fla’s hospitals grow more crowded, Dr. Birx said Wednesday that states with the worst outbreaks should “revert” to phase 1 of the reopening.

      * * *

      Update (1154ET): As Cuomo continues to chide the sun belt states for not doing enough to contain the virus, we’d just like to point out that more stories about the state’s futile ‘contact tracing’ efforts have emerged. Today’s comes from San Diego’s KPBS:

      Every day, Asma Al Sabag goes to work and gives people bad news.

      “I’ll say, ‘Hi, I’m calling because you were recently exposed to someone who tested positive for COVID-19,”‘ she said during a recent call.

      Al Sabag is one of nearly 500 contact tracers working for San Diego County whose job it is to find and notify people who were likely in contact with someone who’s tested positive for the coronavirus. And while she’s likely made hundreds of phone calls by now, all her hard work might not be paying off.

      Since early March when San Diego County’s contact tracing program began tracking COVID-19 cases, tracers have only contacted about 9,000 county residents who were named as a close contact of someone with the virus, according to county spokeswoman Sarah Sweeney.

      That’s likely only a small fraction of those who’ve been exposed countywide. So far there have been about 17,000 known positive cases of COVID-19 in San Diego County, and each case on average has about 10 close contacts — people the infected person has been less than 6 feet away from for more than 15 minutes in the last two weeks.

      In other news, the White House’s Dr. Birx said that she’s “hopeful” Arizona’s cases have finally “plateaued”, while also expressing hope that Florida’s outbreak has also been contained.

      “The seven-day average (of coronavirus cases in Arizona) is showing some flattening and I find that encouraging. Also, equally encouraging at this point, because we know that the test positivity rate is the first thing to increase and we’re hoping that it heralds a stability in Arizona of at least reaching a plateau in their curve,” Birx said.

      […]

      “We also understand that we went through a holiday weekend and holiday weekends can impact data on both ends – underreporting through the weekend and catch up reporting on Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday after a holiday weekend,” she added.

      Cuomo, drawing near the end of his briefing, once again called on President Trump to sign a mandatory executive order on mask wearing, even after Dr. Fauci yesterday said he believed these types of mandates should come from local officials.

      * * *

      Update (1140ET): As expected, Cuomo spent today’s press briefing chiding the worst-hit states for allowing the virus to get so out of control. He claimed that the outbreak around the country, which produced a record 60k+ new cases reported on Tuesday, is now “putting New York’s progress at risk.” He also claimed Florida has asked for assistance in combating its outbreak, and that Cuomo and NY would be happy to provide it.

      But Cuomo assured the public: “Schools won’t reopen if it’s not safe.”

      He also announced that beginning on July 10, malls in certain parts of the state that are entering ‘Phase 4’ of the reopening process may allowed to reopen so long as they have “MERV-13” filters installed. But a decision on when the state’s schools will reopen won’t be released for another month. Cuomo said it should be expected between Aug. 1 and Aug. 7.

      According to Cuomo, “one of those three filters” – MERV-13,12 and 11 – will filter out coronavirus in the air.

      As Cuomo continues, we’d like to highlight an interesting theory that was just brought to our attention by RBC economist Tom Porcelli. The theory attempts to explain why the market hasn’t been badly disturbed by the new record-breaking COVID-19 numbers.

      Perhaps it’s because, with so many young people getting infected, markets are betting that this outbreak is actually bringing the US closer to herd immunity.

      Despite the resurgence of the virus, there’s reason to be optimistic. One of the arguments out there to explain the markets’ resilience to the resurgence is that the U.S. is approaching herd immunity as more young people are infected, which reduces the risk of the next flu season.

      RBC economist Tom Porcelli proposed the theory. He noted that deaths as percentage of new cases from two weeks ago in those hot spots such as Florida and Texas remain low.

      Keep in mind, herd immunity is believed to be extremely difficult to achieve, and no country believes it has achieved it yet.

      Btw, here are NY’s numbers for Wednesday.

      * * *

      Update (1130ET): NYC Mayor Andrew Cuomo will deliver a briefing at 1130…

      …meanwhile Arizona is reporting its latest numbers. By reporting 3,520 (+3.3%), Arizona now has surpassed New York’s epidemic peak, by at least one measure. The 7-day average increase is 4.1%.

      Here’s a breakdown with charts:

      To recap, the state also reported several other disheartening records, aside from the total hospital population

      • Arizona just reported *4,878* new COVID cases in the last 24 hours, a staggering record.
      • Arizona just reported *88* newly-reported COVID deaths, another staggering record.
      • Arizona just reported the percent positive rate of tests today was 28.3%, which is…another record high.

      To help put things in perspective.

      Earlier this week, as Mexico closed its border with Arizona as cases on both sides of it exploded

      * * *

      As we wait to hear from Gov Cuomo at 11:30, NYC Mayor de Blasio has predictably weighed in to announce that the city won’t be reopening schools in September, even though whether the city sticks to this plan will likely be contingent on what happens over the coming months. If there isn’t a resurgence in new cases, it might become difficult to justify.

      The plan shared by de Blasio with the NYT reportedly calls for no more than 12 people including teachers to be in a classroom at a time. Most students will only attend class two or maybe three times a week.

      About four months after 1.1 million New York City children were forced into online learning, Mayor Bill de Blasio announced on Wednesday that public schools would still not fully reopen in September, saying that classroom attendance would instead be limited to only one to three days a week in an effort to continue to curb the coronavirus outbreak.

      The mayor’s release of his plan for the system, by far the nation’s largest, capped weeks of intense debate among elected officials, educators and public health experts over how to bring children back safely to 1,800 public schools.

      The decision to opt for only a partial reopening, which is most likely the only way to accommodate students in school buildings while maintaining social distancing, may hinder hundreds of thousands of parents from returning to their pre-pandemic work lives, undermining the recovery of the sputtering local economy.

      Still, the staggered schedules in New York City schools for September reflect a growing trend among school systems, universities and colleges around the country, which are all trying to find ways of balancing the urgent need to bring students back to classrooms and campuses while also reducing density to prevent the spread of the virus.

      Under the mayor’s plan, there will probably be no more than a dozen people in a classroom at a time, including teachers and aides, a stark change from typical class size in New York City schools, which can hover around 30 children.

      Of course, the city still has months to change its mind. With little evidence available on how the virus spreads among, and affects, young children, the city should have a very good safety reason if it wants to keep schools partially shut, hamstringing and burdening millions of working- and middle-class families.

      * * *

      Update (1030ET): Florida has once again reported roughly 10k new cases of the coronavirus. Florida added 9,989 (+4.7%) new COVID-19  cases Wednesday. Now with 223,783 (up from 213,794 yesterday), the state also reported 14.15% of its 75,865 test results coming back positive. The number of tests run is close to record highs for the state. Florida’s positivity rate has been north of 14% since June 29. The figure is lower than yesterday’s 16.2%.

      • FLORIDA COVID-19 CASES RISE 4.7% VS. PREVIOUS 7-DAY AVG. 5%

      Its the biggest single-day jump in new cases on a Wednesday, and up 50% from last Wednesday’s reading.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The median age of those infected ticked lower to 39.

      * * *

      Update (1015ET): Just some food for thought….

      * * *

      Update (1000ET): Doctors have been struggling to explain rare cases of people who are infected with the virus more than once, or whose symptoms just never seem to subside, even after months of infection.

      One Texas man who shared his story with CNN said the second time around, his symptoms got “much worse.”

      * * *

      Update (0950ET): Andrew Cuomo is holding a press conference this morning at 1130ET. The governor previously claimed that he wouldn’t hold another briefing unless he had something notable to share.

      * * *

      Update (0940ET): As stocks move higher after the open, Moderna just announced that it has completed recruitment for the start of the second phase of its testing, which is by far the most rigorous, and requires tens of thousands of participants.

      * * *

      Update (0925ET): After some 200 scientists from dozens of countries urged the WHO to acknowledge the growing body of evidence suggesting that the virus can linger in the air and infect people who inadvertently inhale it, making it an “airborne” virus. The WHO had previously maintained that aersolization via coughing or sneezing via symptomatic patients was the primary means of spread.

      But as the US officially severs its ties from the organization, the NGO has decided to ‘tweak’ its guidelines, but only mildly.

      The World Health Organization confirmed there is “emerging evidence” of airborne transmission of the coronavirus following the publication of a letter Monday signed by 239 scientists that urged the agency to be more forthcoming about the likelihood that people can catch the virus from droplets floating in the air.

      Dr. Benedetta Alleganzi, WHO Technical Lead for Infection Prevention and Control, said during a briefing Tuesday, that the agency has discussed and collaborated with many of the scientists who signed the letter.

      “We acknowledge that there is emerging evidence in this field, as in all other fields regarding the Covid-19 virus and pandemic and therefore we believe that we have to be open to this evidence and understand its implications regarding the modes of transmission and also regarding the precautions that need to be taken,” Alleganzi said.

      Infectious disease epidemiologist Maria Van Kerkove, with WHO’s Health Emergencies Program, said many of the letter’s signatories are engineers, “which adds to growing knowledge about the importance of ventilation, which we feel is very important.”

      “We have been talking about the possibility of airborne transmission and aerosol transmission as one of the modes of transmission of Covid-19, as well as droplet. We’ve looked at fomites. We’ve looked at fecal oral. We’ve looked at mother to child. We’ve looked at animal to human, of course as well,” Van Kerkove said.

      She said the agency is working on a scientific brief summarizing the current knowledge around transmission of the deadly virus, which should be available in the coming weeks.

      Even still, the WHO insists that more research is needed on the issue of transmission.

      * * *

      Update (0900ET): As Trump’s push to reopen schools in the fall elicits the inevitable blowback from the left-leaning press, Larry Kudlow took to CNBC Wednesday morning to defend the policy, and reiterate that ‘the data’ continues to point to a V-shaped recovery, and that taking more steps back toward another lockdown would be “a big mistake.”

      Earlier, Mt Sinai and Emergent Bio announced plans to cooperate on testing a newly developed drug that uses plasma harvested from the blood of recovered COVID-19 patients to try and prevent infections in front-line workers

      NEW YORK and GAITHERSBURG, Md. and NEW ORLEANS and LAFAYETTE, La., July 08, 2020 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — The Mount Sinai Health System, Emergent BioSolutions (NYSE: EBS), and ImmunoTek Bio Centers today announced that they will collaborate to develop, manufacture, and conduct clinical trials to evaluate Emergent’s COVID-19 hyperimmune globulin product, COVID-HIG, including a post-exposure prophylaxis (PEP) study on health care providers at high risk of COVID-19 infection and other high-risk populations, with $34.6 million in funding from the U.S. Department of Defense’s (DOD) Joint Program Executive Office for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Defense (JPEO-CBRND).

      * * *

      Update (0840ET): Following yesterday’s news that the state’s “R” rate had ticked north of 1, the threshold above which the virus is said to be expanding, New Jersey Gov Phil Murphy is reportedly planning to sign an executive order mandating mask wearing even when outdoors, where the benefits of wearing a mask are marginal, at best.

      New Jerseyans may soon be required to wear face coverings outdoors, too, to help prevent the spread of the coronavirus, NJ.com reports.

      Meanwhile, according to the latest updated figures released this morning, JHU has actually counted more than 60k new cases on Thursday, a new single day record. That’s more than the roughly 43k we noted earlier. The updated numbers were released just minutes ago.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The US reported exactly 60,021 new coronavirus cases on Tuesday, according to JHU data cited by CNBC.

      In a graphic produced by a team of BAML analysts, the bank breaks down how the states with the worst outbreaks – Texas, Florida, California and Arizona – are contributing to the bulk of the countrywide outbreak, while the northeastern states that have seen the most effective results have continued to see their numbers dwindle as a percentage of the total cases being counted each day.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Still, daily deaths continue to trend lower. And as we await the ‘inevitable’ jump in deaths, here’s some more food for thought, from Mark Cudmore:

      If the surge in U.S. case numbers should result in increasing deaths, why haven’t we seen it by now?

      Market bulls point out that the lag between the April peaks in U.S. daily cases and deaths was only five days. The lag was six days in Italy, eight days in Spain and 11 days in the U.K. We’re way past those spans now in the Sun Belt states where cases have been climbing, which is why several readers rejected my proposition this week that it was premature to relax around the trend in the U.S. death numbers.

      * * *

      The US coronavirus outbreak crossed a grim milestone of over 3 million confirmed cases on Tuesday as more states reported record numbers of new infections, while dozens of hospitals in Florida are facing a shortage of ICU beds.

      Meanwhile, the US reported 44,953 new cases on Tuesday (remember, these numbers are reported with a 24-hour delay).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Globally, the world reported roughly 5k new deaths yesterday as the US saw its death toll top 130k.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Roughly 20% of new deaths yesterday were recorded in the US as it suffered the biggest jump in deaths in a month.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      When we left off last night, 43 ICUs in the state of Florida had reached full capacity.

      The number of patients in ICU beds has climbed from 180 on June 25 to 343 as of July 7, according to the data. There were 1,656 Covid-19 patients in hospital as of July 7, with 175 on ventilators, up from 885 patients in hospital on June 25, when there were 84 on ventilators.

      At last count, 56 ICUs across Florida have reached capacity, according to CNN.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      While Florida’s hospitals appear to be seeing the most problems with capacity, Texas isn’t far behind. Nearly 80% of the state’s hospital beds are in use, and ICUs are filling up in San Antonio and Houston, which are some of the biggest cities in the entire US. As the AP reports, leaders are warning their health facilities could become overwhelmed in the coming days.

      While rising cases have reflected rising tests, and while deaths have continued to trend lower despite yesterday’s spike, Texas has a positive test rate of 13.5%, more than double the share from a month prior, even as the number of tests being carried out each day have increased substantially.

      In North Houston, one hospital, United Memorial has been rapidly dedicating more and more space to virus care. Now, 88 of 117 beds are devoted to such patients, and it’s weighing the possibility of going ‘all-COVID-19’.

      Finally, Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro said Wednesday, one day after confirming he had tested positive for the virus, that he was taking hydroxychloroquine as part of his treatment regimen, and that he was feeling fine.

      As the White House ratchets up pressure on Hong Kong, which reported 24 new COVID cases, with 19 of them locally transmitted infections, and 5 imported cases.

      President Trump, meanwhile, is doubling down on his demands that schools across the US prepare to reopen in the fall, while accusing local officials (who have total control over education since education is handled at the local level in the US) of putting politics before the best interests of the community, according to the NYT.

    • The Planes Are Safe, It's The People Who Aren't
      The Planes Are Safe, It’s The People Who Aren’t

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 20:25

      Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk,

      Airplane circulations filters effectively handle Covid-19. That’s not the problem.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Leeham writer Bjorn Fehrm has said that the aircraft recirculation system is effective in controlling spread of virus. Here is part 1 of a multi-part series.

      In part 9, Fehrm says the HEPA filters in the cabin return path are hospital-grade and remove 99.9% of the viruses.

      Fehrm also comments on the need to stay hydrated because the recirculated air is very dry.

      Today Leeham has a different take, but not about the recirculation system. itself.

      Why I Won’t be Flying Soon

      Please consider Pontifications: Why I Won’t be Flying Soon by Scott Hamilton.

      Some airlines block center seats. Others abandoned the practice recently or didn’t do so from the start. (When flights were operating 10% full, blocking seats didn’t matter.)

      Blocking center seats really is cosmetic. Social distancing guidelines call for six feet between you and the next person. Blocking a center seat provides about 18 inches wide and 29-30 inches fore-and-aft.

      The problem is not the airplane. It’s the people who fly. Passengers flying without masks put everyone at risk in those 2-4 minutes, as well as during enplaning and deplaning.

      And most airlines aren’t enforcing a mask policy. The federal government won’t issue a rule requiring masks. Containing the virus requires passenger cooperation. It’s not there yet.

      User’s Guide To Masks

      NPR has User’s Guide To Masks that some may be interested in.

    • CNN's Don Lemon Offers 5 Tips To "End The Violence & Chaos" In Black Communities
      CNN’s Don Lemon Offers 5 Tips To “End The Violence & Chaos” In Black Communities

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 20:04

      This is going to be a little awkward for some.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Having recently gone to battle with Terry Crews over the semantic difference between the “Black Lives Matter” movement (which appears not to care about ‘some’ black lives) and Crews’ argument that “all black lives matter”, video from 2013 has exposed CNN’s infamously outspoken African American anchor Don Lemon as a thoughtful, pensive, open-minded pundit who truly went out on a limb to help America’s black communities lift themselves up… by agreeing with none other than Fox’s Bill O’Reilly.

      From July 2013, courtesy of Ian Stewart at RealClearPolitics.com,

      DON LEMON, CNN ANCHOR: I want to talk to you because we’re going to take a break from the headlines to talk about something I’ve had on my mind for quite some time now. So much so that I felt compelled to bring back our segment where we hold politicians, leaders, and pundits accountable for what comes out of their mouths. It’s time now, again, for No Talking Points.

      The Trayvon Martin murder case got just about everybody talking about race, and not just specifically how it related to the case. It got some, many on the political right, wondering why the so-called liberal media wasn’t talking about other problems in the black community.

      Ok, so far so good, but it sounds like Lemon is about to rail on the ‘rightist’ racism… But wait…

      LEMON: Someone on another network got the chance to go first because I couldn’t go during the week. I’m only here on the weekend, so listen to this

      BILL O’REILLY, FOX NEWS HOST: The reason there is so much violence and chaos in the black precincts is the disintegration of the African- American family.

      LEMON: He’s got a point. In fact, he’s got more than a point. Bill?

      O’REILLY: Raised without much structure, young black men often reject education and gravitate towards the street culture, drugs, hustling, gangs. Nobody forces them to do that, again, it is a personal decision.

      LEMON: He is right about that, too.

      Ok, now remove all fluids from your mouth and put down all sharp objects, things are about to get very real and very Twilight Zone at the same time. CNN’s Don Lemon then offers black people five things they should think about doing if they want to, in his words “fix their problem.” (annotated below, see the full transcript here)

      Number five. Pull up your pants… 

      Sagging pants, whether Justin Bieber or No-name Derek around the way, walking around with your ass and your underwear showing is not OK.

      Number four is the n-word

      By promoting the use of that word when it’s not germane to the conversation, have you ever considered that you may be just perpetuating the stereotype the master intended acting like a n***er?

      Number three. Respect where you live

      Start small by not dropping trash, littering in your own communities.

      Number two, finish school…

      You want to break the cycle of poverty? Stop telling kids they’re acting white because they go to school or they speak proper English.

      Number one, and probably the most important, just because you can have a baby, it doesn’t mean you should… 

      Studies show that lack of a male role model is an express train right to prison and the cycle continues.

      Lemon concludes:

      “So, please, black folks, as I said if this doesn’t apply to you, I’m not talking to you. Pay attention to and think about what has been presented in recent history as acceptable behavior. Pay close attention to the hip-hop and rap culture that many of you embrace. A culture that glorifies everything I just mentioned, thug and reprehensible behavior, a culture that is making a lot of people rich, just not you.”

      Watch the full clip below (before it is banned for its clear racism):

      We wonder what would happen if President Trump held a press conference and suggested these five steps as a starting point for “Making Black America Great Again”? We suspect Lemon would be the first to exclaim “racism” at the President’s “white supremacist” attitude, daring to offer an opinion on what might help.

      What a difference seven years (and a different president) makes.

      Is Don Lemon about to be #canceled?

    • Biden Embraces 'Green New Deal' In Newly Released "Biden-Sanders" Policy Platform
      Biden Embraces ‘Green New Deal’ In Newly Released “Biden-Sanders” Policy Platform

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 19:48

      While Joe Biden was hanging out in the basement, his team was hard at work liaising with the remnants of the Bernie Sanders campaign people to craft a policy agenda that, they hope, will motivate the young people who came out in droves for Bernie to come out and vote for Biden.

      And unsurprisingly, Biden’s plan is a hodge-podge of mostly incompatible ideas obviously intended to pander to the white working class swing voters in the Midwest, and the young AOC-worshipping DSA members and crypto-marxists who powered Sanders to his second straight second-place finish in a Democratic presidential primary.

      According to information released by the campaign, the outline of Biden’s plan covers four areas: A push to ‘buy American’ and incentivizing American jobs, as well as embracing ‘clean energy’ (mostly via extreme policy proposals outlined in the Green New Deal), while also working to boost the “caring” economy – whatever that means. The Biden campaign said it would commit to bolstering child care and elder care, as well as racial equity.

      Here’s one quote from the policy paper released by the campaign:

      Ensure the U.S. achieves a 100% clean energy economy and reaches net-zero emissions no later than 2050. On day one, Biden will sign a series of new executive orders with unprecedented reach that go well beyond the Obama-Biden Administration platform and put us on the right track. And, he will demand that Congress enacts legislation in the first year of his presidency that: 1) establishes an enforcement mechanism that includes milestone targets no later than the end of his first term in 2025, 2) makes a historic investment in clean energy and climate research and innovation, 3) incentivizes the rapid deployment of clean energy innovations across the economy, especially in communities most impacted by climate change.

      He followed this up with a video promising to take “drastic action” to confront climate change.

      Biden will follow this all up with a speech on Thursday’ detailing his agenda in the run up to the Aug. 17 Democratic convention.

      “Biden wants to get to the same place that many to his left want to get to but he firmly believes that it will take an incremental path to get there and that you can’t leapfrog the political reality that he has come to know in many decades in politics,” said Jared Bernstein, who is advising the campaign after serving as Biden’s chief economic adviser in the vice president’s office.

      Some in the media described the proposals as an attempt to address areas discussed by the right and the left. 

      * * *

      But we see it as what it truly is: A clumsy attempt to pander to swing voters. For those who want to learn more, they can check out the full policy sheet below:

      1. Ensure the U.S. achieves a 100% clean energy economy and reaches net-zero emissions no later than 2050. On day one, Biden will sign a series of new executive orders with unprecedented reach that go well beyond the Obama-Biden Administration platform and put us on the right track. And, he will demand that Congress enacts legislation in the first year of his presidency that: 1) establishes an enforcement mechanism that includes milestone targets no later than the end of his first term in 2025, 2) makes a historic investment in clean energy and climate research and innovation, 3) incentivizes the rapid deployment of clean energy innovations across the economy, especially in communities most impacted by climate change.

      2. Build a stronger, more resilient nation. On day one, Biden will make smart infrastructure investments to rebuild the nation and to ensure that our buildings, water, transportation, and energy infrastructure can withstand the impacts of climate change.  Every dollar spent toward rebuilding our roads, bridges, buildings, the electric grid, and our water infrastructure will be used to prevent, reduce, and withstand a changing climate. As President, Biden will use the convening power of government to boost climate resilience efforts by developing regional climate resilience plans, in partnership with local universities and national labs, for local access to the most relevant science, data, information, tools, and training.

      3. Rally the rest of the world to meet the threat of climate change. Climate change is a global challenge that requires decisive action from every country around the world. Joe Biden knows how to stand with America’s allies, stand up to adversaries, and level with any world leader about what must be done. He will not only recommit the United States to the Paris Agreement on climate change – he will go much further than that. He will lead an effort to get every major country to ramp up the ambition of their domestic climate targets. He will make sure those commitments are transparent and enforceable, and stop countries from cheating by using America’s economic leverage and power of example. He will fully integrate climate change into our foreign policy and national security strategies, as well as our approach to trade.

      4. Stand up to the abuse of power by polluters who disproportionately harm communities of color and low-income communities. Vulnerable communities are disproportionately impacted by the climate emergency and pollution. The Biden Administration will take action against fossil fuel companies and other polluters who put profit over people and knowingly harm our environment and poison our communities’ air, land, and water, or conceal information regarding potential environmental and health risks. The Biden plan will ensure that communities across the country from Flint, Michigan to Harlan, Kentucky to the New Hampshire Seacoast have access to clean, safe drinking water. And he’ll make sure the development of solutions is an inclusive, community-driven process.

      5. Fulfill our obligation to workers and communities who powered our industrial revolution and subsequent decades of economic growth. This is support they’ve earned for fueling our country’s industrial revolution and decades of economic growth. We’re not going to leave any workers or communities behind.

      * * *

      Oh, and Biden for America has committed to not accepting contributions from oil, gas and coal industry, and their executives.

    • Cancel Culture Targets Broadway Hit 'Hamilton' As Racial Politics Grow More Uncompromising
      Cancel Culture Targets Broadway Hit ‘Hamilton’ As Racial Politics Grow More Uncompromising

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 19:45

      Authored by Daniel Payne via JustTheNews.com,

      “Hamilton”, the Broadway play which for half a decade has been a nearly unsurpassed cultural phenomenon across the globe, may be on the verge of a denouement. 

      The play, written and originally starring the actor and musician Lin-Manuel Miranda, took America and the world by storm when it debuted in 2015. Combining a clever, lightning-quick hip-hop musical score with an imaginative yet mostly faithful take on American history — and with the vast majority of the cast being made up of nonwhite actors — it would go on to win nearly a dozen Tony awards as well as a Pulitzer Prize. 

      Inspired by historian Ron Chernow’s exhaustive biography of Founding Father Alexander Hamilton, Miranda’s play depicts Hamilton’s role in the American Revolution and its immediate aftermath, including his actions as a soldier and aide-de-camp to George Washington during the Revolutionary War, his turn as Washington’s Treasury Secretary, his relationship with his wife Elizabeth, the death of his son, and his own eventual death in a duel with Aaron Burr. 

      The production has spawned a franchise — including an album, merchandise, and books — that has grossed over $1 billion worldwide. A filmed version of the play, released this month on the streaming service Disney+, has been met with acclaim. The show has been so highly regarded that New York Times theater critic Ben Brantley once suggested that people should “mortgage their houses and lease their children” to see it. 

      Yet a growing chorus of voices may be turning on both the play and the man who produced it.

      The ongoing political moment in which America finds itself – where the dictates of Black Lives Matter have become something of a moral litmus test, and every aspect of American culture and history is under unforgiving scrutiny by ideologues and activists – may bring down the curtain on perhaps the premier cultural touchstone of the 21st century so far. 

      [ZH: is that why the King is smiling?]

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      At issue for a growing number of activists is the contention that Miranda’s play largely glosses over the issue of slavery in 18th century America.

      Numerous historical characters in the production – George Washington, James Madison, Thomas Jefferson – in real life owned significant numbers of slaves; the play more or less skates around these facts, and it goes to great lengths to portray Washington in an almost hagiographic light. 

      Hamilton, too, is subject to a similar sort of hagiography, even though his historical relevance largely comes from his service to Washington the slaveowner. Hamilton was an outspoken and committed abolitionist, but he appears to have had few compunctions about working for Washington and with other slavers. Moreover, there is evidence that he may have facilitated some slavery transactions for his wife’s slaveowning family. 

      Those tensions, which were mostly ignored in the early years of the play’s meteoric success, are becoming more apparent today, as the nation engages in a protracted debate about whether we should rip down statues of not just Confederate generals but Founding Fathers and even Union heroes of the Civil War as well. 

      Writing at CNN last week, journalist Ed Morales asked: “Is [Hamilton’s] strategy of non-traditional casting a triumph that allows people of color to ‘rise up’ or are they undermined by the irony of how their embodiment as founding fathers ignores the fact that most of the characters they play were slave owners?

      Writer Tracy Clayton, meanwhile, wrote last week that “Hamilton” is “a flawed play about flawed people written by an imperfect person,” though she claimed it gave her life “a big boost” when she first saw it. She wrote that she “would have appreciated more context [in the play] about hamilton & slavery,” but she counseled against “lump[ing] it in with statues of columbus and robert e lee.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Earlier this month, a 2016 interview with Harvard historian Annette Gordon-Reed resurfaced in which the professor, who confessed she liked the play, nevertheless argued against interpreting Hamilton in too charitable a light.

      “He was not an abolitionist,” Gordon-Reed said. “He bought and sold slaves for his in-laws, and opposing slavery was never at the forefront of his agenda.

      Esquire this week, meanwhile, echoed that criticism by noting that “Hamilton’s actual relationship to slavery and slave owners was much more complex, and not as progressive as the play depicts.”

      Washington Post writer Gregory Schneider argued last week that Hamilton’s “relationship with Washington, his marriage into the wealthy Schuyler family, his slaveholding friends — all advanced him socially while requiring him to turn his head from the toughest issue of the day.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Miranda’s office did not respond to an interview request from Just the News. But the artist was clearly well aware of the growing backlash against his most famous work — a backlash which includes criticism that he has uttered the word the N-word on more than one occasion. On Monday, he briefly and favorably acknowledged the burgeoning reevaluation of his play.

      “All the criticisms are valid,” he wrote on Twitter, responding to Clayton’s thread. “The sheer tonnage of complexities & failings of these people I couldn’t get. Or wrestled with but cut.”

      “I took 6 years and fit as much as I could in a 2.5 hour musical. Did my best. It’s all fair game,” he added.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Whether that will be enough to save his show from “cancelation” remains to be seen, and may very well be determined by the course of American politics in 2020: If Black Lives Matter continues its dominating march through American academic, cultural, corporate, legal and political life, it may end up that Miranda’s play will get the axe due to its relative soft-pedaling of American slavery.

      Reflecting on the difference between the 2015 of the play’s release and the 2020 of today,  Clayton observed, “Hamilton the play and the movie were given to us in two different worlds.”

      “Our willingness to interrogate things in this way,” she continued, “feels like a clear sign of change.”

    • Google Abandons Another Shady China Venture
      Google Abandons Another Shady China Venture

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 19:25

      Google is competing fiercely against Amazon and Microsoft to build out a cloud computing offering that can establish itself as a serious competitor to AWS, but two employees have reportedly told Bloomberg that Google has abandoned a cloud computing project in China and other politically-sensitive countries, largely due to concerns over worsening bilateral relations with the US.

      The tech behemoth reportedly shut down the project, known internally as “Isolated Region,” which sought to address nations’ desires to control data within their borders, the employees said. The decision to close the program was a “massive strategy shift,” according to one of the employees, who said hundreds of employees around the world had worked on  “Isolated Region”.

      Given the ominous description, it’s not too difficult to understand the true nature of this project: Google would essentially help empower China to enforce its “Great Firewall,” which it is now trying to expand to Hong Kong.

      A Google spokesperson who commented on the record to Bloomberg insisted that the project was scrapped for reasons that were totally innocuous.

      A Google spokeswoman said Isolated Region was shelved because “other approaches we were actively pursuing offered better outcomes.” She declined to detail those approaches. “We have a comprehensive approach to addressing these requirements that covers the governance of data, operational practices and survivability of software,” the spokeswoman said. “Isolated Region was just one of the paths we explored to address these requirements.”

      “What we learned from customer conversations and input from government shareholders in Europe and elsewhere is that other approaches we were actively pursuing offered better outcomes,” the spokeswoman said. “Google does not offer and has not offered cloud platform services inside China.”

      According to one of the employees, the plan involved selling cloud services in what Google calls “sovereignty sensitive markets,” such as China and the E.U., where there are strict laws for companies offering services that involve the collection or processing of people’s data.

      The project, which began in early 2018, sought to address rules in China that require Western companies to form a joint venture with a Chinese partner company when they provide data or networking services, one of the employees said. In such a relationship, the partner company would have retained both physical and administrative control over user data. The arrangement was intended to satisfy Chinese authorities while also providing a barrier between Google’s Isolated Region cloud services and the rest of its data center network, which stores and processes emails, documents, photographs and other data from its users, the employee said.

      By handing over control of user data to third party companies in foreign countries, Isolated Region also aimed to appease privacy concerns about the U.S. government’s potential ability to carry out covert surveillance of Google’s Cloud services, the employee said. Those concerns increased in March 2018, following the passing of the Clarifying Lawful Overseas Use of Data Act, better known as the CLOUD Act, a federal law that granted U.S. law enforcement agencies more power to request personal data stored by American technology companies even if the data is stored on servers located outside of the U.S., the employee said.

      Interestingly enough, the Bloomberg’s editors slotted the first paragraph addressing the company’s controversial business practices involving its work in China and the CCP

      Some employees expressed concern about the Cloud project in China and questioned their superiors about it, according to one of the employees. But it’s not known if employee opposition was a factor in Google’s decision to stop the initiative in China or elsewhere.
      Isolated Region was part of a larger Google project known as “Sharded Google,” which has sought to develop new data storage and processing facilities, known as “shards,” that are walled off from the rest of the company’s systems, according to the employees.
      Major cloud providers are all racing to develop data centers that are either physically separated or rely on complex software to keep information flows apart.

      It’s a costly process, driven by rising demand on two fronts. One is from firms in specific industries, such as finance, that want isolated machinery for security reasons. Another comes from laws that require data reaped inside the country to stay there, with China being perhaps the most stringent example.

      Both trends are accelerating. More than 100 countries have some sort of data sovereignty laws in place, according to David Gilmore, chief executive officer of DataFleets Ltd., an enterprise software firm. In the U.S., state policies, such as California’s new consumer privacy law, provide further restrictions on how cloud companies handle data. “It’s just the tip of the iceberg,” he said.

      France and Germany recently started Gaia-X, an effort to build the continent’s own data storage systems over the internet without relying on U.S. technology giants.

      We’re certainly curious to hear more about this “data sovereignty” project. For all the reporting BBG did here, the reader isn’t walking away with a clear understanding of what this even means.

      And as we’ve learned with ‘Project Dragonfly’, once Google declares a project dead, that doesn’t mean it actually is.

    • In An Insane World, Madness Looks Moderate And Sanity Looks Radical
      In An Insane World, Madness Looks Moderate And Sanity Looks Radical

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 19:05

      Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

      There are no moderate, mainstream centrists in the US-centralized empire. They do not exist.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      It’s not that moderate, mainstream centrism is an inherently impossible position. In a healthy world, that’s exactly what the predominant worldview would be. But we do not live in a healthy world.

      There are no moderate, mainstream centrists anywhere in the tight alliance of nations which function as a single empire on foreign policy, because that functional empire is built upon murder, terrorism, exploitation, oppression, ecocide and the stockpiling of armageddon weapons.

      People who support the status quo of this empire are called “moderates”, but, just like the so-called “moderate rebels” of Syria, they are in fact violent extremists.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      This is the reality of living in a world that is profoundly psychologically unhealthy. If you make a career out of facilitating wars which cause explosives to be dropped from the sky on top of innocent human beings causing their bodies to be ripped to shreds and buried in rubble, then you are treated as an exemplar of ideal leadership and rewarded with prestigious positions in politics, punditry, book publishing and think tankery. If you oppose those same wars, you are marginalized and smeared as at best an extremist whack job and at worst a literal traitor conducting psyops for a foreign government.

      Because the plutocratic class owns the political class which advances depraved plutocratic agendas and the media class which normalizes and justifies those agendas, a mainstream consensus has been forcibly manufactured that maintaining the oppressive, exploitative, omnicidal, ecocidal status quo is a good and sane thing to do. Voices which point out that this is bat shit crazy are marginalized and ignored when possible and smeared and demonized when necessary.

      The ability of our plutocratic rulers and their lackeys to do this is the only reason why defenders of the status quo get to call themselves “centrists” and “moderates”. It’s not because their position is middle-of-the-road in any way whatsoever, it’s because they stand in alignment with the consensus that has been deliberately artificially manufactured and shoved into the mainstream by sheer force of narrative control.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      This consensus manufacturing is then carried home by a glitch in human cognition known as status quo bias, which causes us to tend toward holding to the familiar as a default preference and perceive the risk of losing what we have as far less favorable than the reward gaining something better. Psychology Today explains:

      Research from Kahneman and Tversky suggests that losses are twice as psychologically harmful as gains are beneficial. In other words, individuals feel twice as much psychological pain from losing $100 as pleasure from gaining $100. One interpretation is that in order for an individual to change course from their current state of affairs is that the alternative must be perceived as twice as beneficial. This highlights the challenges we may face when considering a change to our usual way of doing things.

      When military members are considering their choices as their contract comes to an end, many consider re-enlisting simply because they are unaware of the many opportunities that exist for them. Even when we understand our current path is no longer beneficial or no longer makes us happy, we must still overcome the natural urge to stay on the path unless the alternative is sufficiently attractive. In order for us to readily pursue an alternate path, we must believe that the alternative is clearly superior to the current state of affairs.

      The status quo effect is pervasive in both inconsequential and major decisions. Oftentimes we are held back by what we believe to be the safe option, simply because it is the default. Bearing in mind our natural propensity for the status quo will enable us to recognize the allure of inertia and more effectively overcome it.

      Status quo bias is further exacerbated in our current predicament by the fact that so many people are now so close to the brink of financial ruin and so terrified of what can happen to them if things change in a sudden and unpredictable way. The result of this is that now you’ve got the majority of people in the most dominant country on earth supporting the “slow incremental change” philosophy of so-called centrism, which in practice has always ended up meaning no change whatsoever. Meanwhile our ecosystem is dying and the US is escalating nuclear tensions with Russia and China and everyone’s getting more and more crazy and miserable under the oppressive and exploitative status quo.

      Did you ever climb a tree when you were a kid and get stuck because you were afraid to climb down? It’s a common experience for a lot of us. You get lost in the joy of the climb and so pleased with yourself in how well you’re doing, then suddenly you notice that the branches are getting a lot thinner and the wind is starting to sway you back and forth, and suddenly you look down and get terrified.

      Maybe you called out for your mother and she came out and told you to climb down, calling up “Well you can’t stay up there!” And you knew she was right, but in that moment the idea of looking down and letting go of the thin branches you were clinging to felt so much scarier than just staying put in your precarious and unsustainable position.

      That’s exactly where we’re at right now with status quo bias in our current predicament. People know things need to change, but they’re in such a precarious position that the risk of change feels far too scary to take the leap and force a deviation from our trajectory toward disaster.

      But that is our only choice if we are to survive as a species. We know we were able to climb down from whatever trees we got stuck in as kids, and we know that our mother was as right then as that small inner voice inside us is now: we can’t stay here. We’ve got to wake up from the status quo narrative management and find a way to get down from our precarious and unsustainable position to the stable ground of sanity.

      *  *  *

      Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my tip jar on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

      Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 8th July 2020

    • Deep European Recession Forecast For 2020
      Deep European Recession Forecast For 2020

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 02:45

      In its Summer Forecast published today, the European Commission downgraded its own projection from earlier in the year, making for an even grimmer outlook for the EU economy in 2020. The -7.4 percent contraction originally expected has been reassessed to -8.3 percent.

      Infographic: Deep European Recession Forecast for 2020 | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      In the EC press release, the following context was given:

      “The EU economy will experience a deep recession this year due to the coronavirus pandemic, despite the swift and comprehensive policy response at both EU and national levels. Because the lifting of lockdown measures is proceeding at a more gradual pace than assumed in our Spring Forecast, the impact on economic activity in 2020 will be more significant than anticipated.”

      And don’t expect the European banks to help, as Daniel Lacalle recently notes, banks may face a tsunami of problems as three factors collide: rise in non-performing loans, deflationary pressures from a prolonged crisis and central bank keeping negative rates that destroy banking profitability. We estimate a rise in net debt to EBITDA of the largest corporations of the Stoxx 600 soaring to 3x from the current 1.8x. This means that banks may face a wall of delinquencies and weakening solvency and liquidity in the vast majority of their assets (loans) just as deflationary pressures hit the economy, growth weakens and the central bank implements even more aggressive but futile liquidity measures and damaging rate cuts.

      This combination of three problems at the same time may generate a risk of a financial crisis created by using the balance sheet of banks massively to address the bailout of every possible sector. It may undo the entire improvement in the balance sheet of the financial entities achieved slowly and painfully in the past decade and destroy it in a few months.

      Weakening the balance sheet of banks and hiding larger risk at lower rates in their balance sheets may be an extremely dangerous policy in the long run. 

    • Some See A Dark Cloud Hanging Over The European Rally
      Some See A Dark Cloud Hanging Over The European Rally

      Tyler Durden

      Wed, 07/08/2020 – 02:00

      Authored by Bloomberg macro commentators Jan-Patrick Barnert and Michael Msika

      Equities are still creeping higher even as more voices become cautious about the market rally. Although bulls and bears both have valid arguments, it seems that the technical data could flip the balance in favor of the latter.

      European stocks just hit a one-month high and the daily Euro Stoxx 50 Future chart is knocking at the 200-day moving average again — a mark that saw a sharp three-day decline in June when the market was overheating from its previous rally. Overcoming this strong resistance could spur further gains for the index.

      Yet relative strength indicators are very close to being overbought, which may suggest that potential gains could be limited.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      With charts trading in such a range for the past weeks “short-term positioning has been a challenge,” writes LCM technical analyst Andy Dodd in a note to clients.

      There’s also some ominous bearish signals hanging over markets for the longer term. A few weeks ago, the weekly chart for the Euro Stoxx 50 Future showed a so-called bearish Dark Cloud Cover candle as the future sold off from the cluster of moving averages. “That candle suggested limited upside in this time frame and was the reason I sold the rally,” says Dodd.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      His cautious comments are echoed by Christian Curac, a technical analyst at Fuerst Fugger Privatbank AG, who notes that consolidation, with shares trading within a range, is still the name of the game in the medium-term. We “therefore consider the upside potential to be limited,” Curac says by email. “Defensive positioning appears advisable from a risk-return perspective.”

      Turning to market breadth, the picture is neutral at best. There’s been a visibly steady decline in trading volume in cash and futures since the peak in June, suggesting investors are less engaged amid warnings not to chase the rally.

      The picture would fit the view of Citigroup Inc. strategists that bullish and bearish forces will cancel each other out over the next few months. With the massive stimulus and improving economic backdrop on one side, and weak earnings and rising Covid-19 infections on the other, the preference is to wait for the next dip, they say.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      To be sure, in this sideways environment, some investors might be tempted to listen to Morgan Stanley strategist Graham Secker, who thinks it makes sense to “keep things simple.” Improving economic data at the start of a new cycle, strong monetary and fiscal policy support, and muted investor participation in the rally to date ultimately implies an upbeat environment for stocks, he says.

    • Luongo: Russia's Political Stability Ensured While The West Sinks
      Luongo: Russia’s Political Stability Ensured While The West Sinks

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 23:30

      Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog

      Despite what American and European commentators may think, there really is a deep desire among people to vote for their own sovereignty. And that impulse was on full display last week with the announcement of the results of Russia’s public vote to approve the changes to its constitution.

      The final tally put the vote at 78% in favor with a 65% voter turnout for the referendum. These are the most sweeping changes to Russia’s constitution since it was ratified back in 1993, which vested the President with immense power.

      And while the final package of reforms differed in one important aspect from the original one – allowing for a president to serve more than two ‘consecutive’ terms – the over-arching theme of the changes was to devolve power out of the presidency putting more power in the hands of the elected representatives in the Duma.

      The president’s cabinet is to be drawn from the Duma rather than the appointed by the president, while the State Council has been officially added to the constitution which can implement presidential edicts directly to the regions. In effect, there is now a greater balance (and tension) between these various branches of government as the president loses control over appointing his cabinet but strengthens his ability to bypass the elected parliament.

      What was clear at the outset of this process was that Putin was trying to prepare his succession while minimizing the potential for another ‘foreign puppet’ to wield the immense power of the Russian presidency, as it was under Boris Yeltsin.

      Putin was looking to retire in 2024, at 71, with an eye of maintaining a strong presence in Russian politics by leading the Security Council, which with these reforms has a more direct role in shaping military and diplomatic policy than it did before.

      Back in December I did a podcast with Alexander Mercouris of The Duran where we discussed these potential changes in detail (which pre-dates the changes to the president’s term limit) which I think is important to review at this point since the changes are now law.

      No matter what political perspective you come from there will be valid criticisms of these changes seeing the potential for abuse, but the overall arc of them is to make Russia far more resistant to outside interference while reflecting the growing pride of Russians for their home and their surviving the hell imposed on them post-USSR.

      And these changes have to be viewed through that lens. In my mind Russia has been in a state of war with the West since late 2013 with the EU’s attempt to fast-track Ukraine into its bosom. That morphed into the Maidan uprising and the subsequent reunification with Crimea and the War to Prevent Donbass Secession.

      Putin came to power at the height of Russia’s post-Soviet economic and societal collapse. He knows who was behind it and where, metaphorically, the bodies are buried. He is still making moves which are, at best, incremental changes which are achievable when obvious wholesale changes are necessary.

      That’s what a lot of these constitutional changes represent, incremental changes necessary to secure Russia’s near-term future in the context of an infinitely hostile West in the death throes of Empire.

      For that reason, they are welcome, if to be distrusted as all power is to be inherently distrusted. And the Russian people understand the nature of the conflict to the degree that they were motivated to make a definitive statement about it.

      The response from the western press has been suitably pathetic, leading with headlines which only emphasize the potential for Putin to remain in power until 2036 (at which point he’ll be 83) and the small pockets of resistance to these changes.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The people crying the most today are the neoliberal/neocons and their intelligence agents who Putin has consistently outmaneuvered over the past thirty years who planned on waiting him out. These changes to the constitution may, in the end, as Gilbert Doctorow suggests, strengthen the presidency in unforeseen ways, but the one thing it does do is ensure that if Russia is to sink into autocracy it will do so on its terms and not on those that openly destroyed it back in the 1990’s.

      This is an age of extreme political instability which reflects the poisoned economic foundation those institutions are built upon. All across the West we are seeing massive resistance to the existing order from all sides of the political spectrum. Their anger and frustration have the same genesis while their goals are vastly different.

      The powers that be are behind the ones aimed at tearing down the political order in the U.S. while opposing the same drive in Europe. The irony shouldn’t be lost on anyone that a color revolution is underway in the U.S. where the institutional system is vested in a national government with individual states still operating in accordance with that national government.

      While at the same time, a loose collection of treaties binds sovereign nations together into the European Union which has almost zero legal authority to enforce its edicts, but which has violently, resisted all expressions of national sovereignty as barbaric.

      So, the picture should be very clear what the dynamic is and who is pulling what strings to what end. And this is why there is the kind of howling and teeth gnashing coming from the West over these reforms, they cannot allow to stand any successful expression of national sovereignty lest the serfs get some funny ideas.

      But I don’t think either of these dynamics will win out ultimately. The U.S. in its current form may not survive its civil war but neither will Europe go gently into the long night of The Davos Crowd’s intended supranational police state either.

      The key to Putin’s success has been his conservative nature which understands that change comes over time. You can’t force lasting change. You have to allow people time to get used to an idea while also be willing to admit some changes made were the wrong ones.

      That’s why these changes passed with a near 80% majority. They were overwhelmingly in agreement with public opinion about what Russia’s future should look like and who should make those decisions.

      As such Russians stated to the world the other day that the truly dangerous disease infecting the West – unrestrained liberalism bordering on the libertine – will not be public policy going forward.

      *  *  *

      Join My Patreon if you like strong coverage of Russia’s emerging future. Install the Brave Browser if you want to slow down Google and the Woke-inistas from erasing our history.

    • Australia Warns Citizens They Risk Arbitrary Detention While Traveling Through China
      Australia Warns Citizens They Risk Arbitrary Detention While Traveling Through China

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 23:10

      The Australian government has issued a provocative new warning sure to damage already rocky and worsening relations with Beijing, updating travel advice for China telling Aussies they risk ‘arbitrary detention’ while traveling through the communist-run country.

      Australia’s Department of Foreign Affairs revised the travel advice on Tuesday with this new phrase:

      “Authorities have detained foreigners because they’re ‘endangering national security’. Australians may also be at risk of arbitrary detention.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Image via Bloomberg

      Similar to the situation with the Trump administration, there’s been a developing tit-for-tat leveling of accusations between Australia and China, including last week’s charge from Beijing that Australia is waging an “espionage offensive”.

      Already there had been travel warnings related to coronavirus restrictions when for months prior as authorities in China struggled to get the pandemic under control, but this latest official travel guidance for Aussies is somewhat unprecedented given its politically charged nature

      It will also no doubt hurt the Chinese tourism industry, given Australians are among the most frequent foreign travelers when it comes to southeast Asia. 

      The move could also be linked to the new Hong Kong national security law which went into effect July 1st, and has since been roundly condemned by the US, UK, and European countries. Australian media has cited Feng Chongyi, an Associate Professor in China Studies at the University of Technology Sydney, to explain of the travel update:

      “In a sense that it subjects almost everyone into arbitrary detention,” he added according to Australia’s ABC. Local media has also warned of a “hostage diplomacy” type scenario in which China could detain Australian citizens on trumped up charges in order to gain leverage in any negotiations. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      This also comes amid a row between China and Canada, after Canada suspended its extradition treaty with Hong Kong. Beijing has since urged Canada to change course immediately, or risk retaliatory action.

      Ironically China then issued its own travel advisory on Canada Monday, reading in part that citizens must remain “cautious” while traveling there because of “frequent violent actions by law enforcement agencies in Canada, which have triggered many demonstrations.”

    • Judd Gregg: The Coming Biden Coup
      Judd Gregg: The Coming Biden Coup

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 22:50

      Authored by Judd Gregg, op-ed via The Hill,

      It is more than a possibility, and slightly less than a likelihood, that Joe Biden will be elected president in November.

      Biden has made it clear that a woman will be his running mate.

      What is becoming equally apparent is that he may be cornered into choosing a socialist or progressive as that person.

      As he runs his campaign from his basement, allowing President Trump to stomp his feet and shout as he tries to mount a more traditional campaign, Biden has shown little inclination to take on his own foot-stomping base.

      Thus the socialist/progressive wing of the Democratic Party is now center stage — and insisting one of their own be Biden’s vice presidential candidate.

      That individual could be Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.) or Sen. Kamala Harris (D-Calif.) or any number of lesser-known advocates for the far left.

      The underlying agenda is becoming more and more apparent:

      • Promoting and promulgating – not merely accepting – the massive protests that have occurred in some cities, even when they have led to lawlessness, looting, riots and declarations of autonomy.

      • Searching out and destroying unbelievers in pursuit of a politically correct version of history, and doing so with a zeal that would have made Cotton Mather blush.

      • Removing statues of historical figures that are deemed unacceptable based on today’s parameters of social justice.

      It is of course ironic that figures such as Ulysses S. Grant, Francis Scott Key and even those who make up the faces of Mount Rushmore — Presidents Washington, Lincoln, Jefferson and Theodore Roosevelt — are now deemed evil by the progressive ideologues of the new Democratic Party.

      It is difficult, if not impossible, to see how the nation would have developed without these extraordinary men.

      It is also ironic that when leftists condemn these historical figures, they are using freedoms and rights that would not exist without the leadership of those selfsame giants of our past.

      But the Democratic Party is, to use a highly politically incorrect phrase, “on the war path” against the nation’s history if it is not interpreted pursuant to their dogma.

      The pilgrims of the progressive cause countenance no dissent as they rope and spray-paint the statues of people who once led the nation.

      They are a fanatical group.

      Biden is suspect to them, of course.

      He defeated their patron saints, Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.) and Warren, and thus they demand that he have as his cohort an acceptable socialist/progressive who is fervent about the cause.

      This is about power.

      All major elections are.

      The socialist/progressives understand this as well as any political movement does.

      But the difference is that the socialist/progressive movers who now control the board in the game of Democratic Party politics have no ethical tether.

      They are filled with the flames of clarity as to the rightness of their goals. They see all who attempt to dampen those flames as enemies.

      Theirs is first and foremost a social justice cause that is justified by their self-proclaimed correctness.

      It allows them to move forward without any doubt and with untempered intensity.

      They can proclaim sections of cities independent nations. They can proclaim America’s most important past political leaders evil. They can promote lawlessness in the name of the rightness of their cause.

      They can essentially march outside the boundaries of the nation’s history and political structure, asserting that what they do is best for all.

      They will not tolerate for long not being in total control. They will have their vice president, but not their president. And they are a very impatient people and movement.

      Since their goal is power and their purpose pure, why should they wait?

      The path to total control is clearly there once they have the vice presidency.

      It is the 25th Amendment.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Within a few months of assuming the presidency, Biden may find himself being the next statue toppled as the socialist/progressive movement moves closer to power.

      Replacing him with his vice president could be deemed necessary to the cause.

      His colleagues could declare him too old to handle the presidency and remove him under the 25th Amendment.

      Et tu, Brute?

      The Cause will have been completed.

      Power will be fully in the hands of the statue-removers, the social justice police and those who see America’s political history as basically evil. Socialist/progressive excess will govern.

      It will be a coup.

      Look over your shoulder, Joe. Watch your back. Donald Trump is not your most threatening problem.

      *  *  *

      Judd Gregg (R) is a former governor and three-term senator from New Hampshire who served as chairman and ranking member of the Senate Budget Committee, and as ranking member of the Senate Appropriations Foreign Operations subcommittee

    • Visualizing The Size Of Amazon, The World's Most Valuable Retailer
      Visualizing The Size Of Amazon, The World’s Most Valuable Retailer

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 22:30

      As brick-and-mortar chains teeter in the face of the pandemic, Amazon continues to gain ground.

      The retail juggernaut is valued at no less than $1.4 trillion – roughly four times what it was in late 2016 when its market cap hovered around $350 billion, and as Visual Capitalist’s Dorothy Neufeld notes, last year, the Jeff Bezos-led company shipped 2 billion packages around the world.

      Today’s infographic shows how Amazon’s market cap alone is bigger than the nine biggest U.S. retailers put together, highlighting the palpable presence of the once modest online bookstore.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The New Normal

      COVID-19’s sudden shift has rendered many retail outfits obsolete.

      Neiman Marcus, JCPenney, and J.Crew have all filed for bankruptcy as consumer spending has migrated online. This, coupled with heavy debt loads across many retail chains, is only compounding the demise of brick-and-mortar. In fact, one estimate projects that at least 25,000 U.S. stores will fold over the next year.

      Still, as safety and supply chain challenges mount—with COVID-19 related costs in the billions—Amazon remains at the top. It surpasses its next closest competitor, Walmart, by $1 trillion in market valuation.

      How does Amazon compare to the largest retailers in the U.S.?

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Source: Deloitte, YCharts
      *Largest public US retailers based on their retail revenue as of fiscal years ending through June 30, 2019, e=estimated

      With nearly a 39% share of U.S. e-commerce retail sales, Amazon’s market cap has grown 2,830% over the last decade. Its business model, which aggressively pursues market dominance instead of focusing on short-term profits, is one factor behinds the rise.

      By the same token, one recent estimate by The Economist pegged Amazon’s retail operating margins at -1% last year. Another analyst has suggested that the company purposefully sells retail goods at a loss.

      How Amazon makes up for this operating shortfall is through its cash-generating cloud service, Amazon Web Services (AWS), and through a collection of diversified enterprise-focused services. AWS, with estimated operating margins of 26%, brought in $9.2 billion in profits in 2019—more than half of Amazon’s total.

      Amazon’s Basket of Eggs

      Unlike many of its retail competitors, Amazon has rapidly diversified its acquisitions since it originated in 1994.

      Take the $1.2 billion acquisition of Zoox. Amazon plans to operate self-driving taxi fleets, all of which are designed without steering wheels. It is the company’s third largest since the $13.7 billion acquisition of organic grocer Whole Foods, followed by Zappos.

       

      TECHNOLOGY

      Visualizing the Size of Amazon, the World’s Most Valuable Retailer

      Published

       4 days ago

      on

       July 2, 2020

      By

       Dorothy Neufeld

      Tweet

      Share

      Share

      Reddit

      Email

       

      Visualizing the Size of the World’s Most Valuable Retailer

      As brick-and-mortar chains teeter in the face of the pandemic, Amazon continues to gain ground.

      The retail juggernaut is valued at no less than $1.4 trillion—roughly four times what it was in late 2016 when its market cap hovered around $350 billion. Last year, the Jeff Bezos-led company shipped 2 billion packages around the world.

      Today’s infographic shows how Amazon’s market cap alone is bigger than the nine biggest U.S. retailers put together, highlighting the palpable presence of the once modest online bookstore.

      The New Normal

      COVID-19’s sudden shift has rendered many retail outfits obsolete.

      Neiman Marcus, JCPenney, and J.Crew have all filed for bankruptcy as consumer spending has migrated online. This, coupled with heavy debt loads across many retail chains, is only compounding the demise of brick-and-mortar. In fact, one estimate projects that at least 25,000 U.S. stores will fold over the next year.

      Still, as safety and supply chain challenges mount—with COVID-19 related costs in the billions—Amazon remains at the top. It surpasses its next closest competitor, Walmart, by $1 trillion in market valuation.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Accounting for the lion’s share of Amazon-owned physical stores, Whole Foods has 508 stores across the U.S., UK, and Canada. While Amazon doesn’t outline revenues across its physical retail segments—which include Amazon Books stores, Amazon Go stores, and others—physical store sales tipped over $17 billion in 2019.

      Meanwhile, Amazon also owns gaming streaming platform Twitch, which it acquired for $970 million in 2017. Currently, Twitch makes up 73% of the streaming market and brought in an estimated $300 million in ad revenues in 2019.

      Carrying On

      Despite the flood of online orders due to quarantines and social distancing requirements, Amazon’s bottom line has suffered. In the second quarter of 2020 alone, it is expected to rack up $4 billion in pandemic-related costs.

      Yet, at the same time, its customer-obsessed business model appears to thrive under current market conditions. As of July 1, its stock price has spiked over 51% year-to-date. On an annualized basis, that’s roughly 100% in returns.

      As margins get squeezed and expenses grow, is Amazon’s growth sustainable in the long-term? Or, are the company’s strategic acquisitions and revenue streams providing the catalysts (and cash) for only more short-term success?

    • China Inks Military Deal With Iran Under Secretive 25-Year Plan
      China Inks Military Deal With Iran Under Secretive 25-Year Plan

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 22:10

      Authored by Simon Watkins via OilPrice.com,

      Last August, Iran’s Foreign Minister, Mohammad Zarif, paid a visit to his China counterpart, Wang Li, to present a roadmap on a comprehensive 25-year China-Iran strategic partnership that built upon a previous agreement signed in 2016.

      Many of the key specifics of the updated agreement were not released to the public at the time but were uncovered by OilPrice.com at the time. Last week, at a meeting in Gilan province, former Iran President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad alluded to some of the secret parts of this deal in public for the first time, stating that:

      “It is not valid to enter into a secret agreement with foreign parties without considering the will of the Iranian nation and against the interests of the country and the nation, and the Iranian nation will not recognize it.”

      According to the same senior sources closely connected to Iran’s Petroleum Ministry who originally outlined the secret element of the 25-year deal, not only is the secret element of that deal going ahead but China has also added in a new military element, with enormous global security implications.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      One of the secret elements of the deal signed last year is that China will invest US$280 billion in developing Iran’s oil, gas, and petrochemicals sectors. This amount will be front-loaded into the first five-year period of the new 25-year deal, and the understanding is that further amounts will be available in each subsequent five year period, provided that both parties agree. There will be another US$120 billion of investment, which again can be front-loaded into the first five-year period, for upgrading Iran’s transport and manufacturing infrastructure, and again subject to increase in each subsequent period should both parties agree. In exchange for this, to begin with, Chinese companies will be given the first option to bid on any new – or stalled or uncompleted – oil, gas, and petrochemicals projects in Iran. China will also be able to buy any and all oil, gas, and petchems products at a minimum guaranteed discount of 12 per cent to the six-month rolling mean average price of comparable benchmark products, plus another 6 to 8 per cent of that metric for risk-adjusted compensation. Additionally, China will be granted the right to delay payment for up to two years and, significantly, it will be able to pay in soft currencies that it has accrued from doing business in Africa and the Former Soviet Union states.

      Given the exchange rates involved in converting these soft currencies into hard currencies that Iran can obtain from its friendly Western banks, China is looking at another 8 to 12 per cent discount, which means a total discount of around 32 per cent for China on all oil gas, and petchems purchases,” one of the Iran sources underlined.

      Another key part of the secret element to the 25-year deal is that China will be integrally involved in the build-out of Iran’s core infrastructure, which will be in absolute alignment with China’s key geopolitical multi-generational project, ‘One Belt, One Road’ (OBOR). To begin with, China intends to utilise the currently cheap labour available in Iran to build factories that will be financed, designed, and overseen by big Chinese manufacturing companies with identical specifications and operations to those in China. The final manufactured products will then be able to access Western markets through new transport links, also planned, financed, and managed by China.

      In this vein, around the same time as the draft new 25-year deal was presented last year by Iran’s Vice President, Eshaq Jahangiri (and senior figures from the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps and intelligence agencies) to Iran’s Supreme Leader, Ali Khamenei, Jahangiri announced that Iran had signed a contract with China to implement a project to electrify the main 900 kilometre railway connecting Tehran to the north-eastern city of Mashhad. Jahangiri added that there are also plans to establish a Tehran-Qom-Isfahan high-speed train line and to extend this upgraded network up to the north-west through Tabriz. Tabriz, home to a number of key sites relating to oil, gas, and petrochemicals, and the starting point for the Tabriz-Ankara gas pipeline, will be a pivot point of the 2,300 kilometre New Silk Road that links Urumqi (the capital of China’s western Xinjiang Province) to Tehran, and connecting Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Uzbekistan and Turkmenistan along the way, and then via Turkey into Europe.

      Now, though, another element that will change the entire balance of geopolitical power in the Middle East has been added to the deal.

      “Last week, the Supreme Leader [Ali Khamenei] agreed to the extension of the existing deal to include new military elements that were proposed by the same senior figures in the IRGC [Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps] and the intelligence services that proposed the original deal, and this will involve complete aerial and naval military co-operation between Iran and China, with Russia also taking a key role,” one of the Iran sources told OilPrice.com last week.

      “There is a meeting scheduled in the second week of August between the same Iranian group, and their Chinese and Russian counterparts, that will agree the remaining details but, provided that goes as planned, then as of 9 November, Sino-Russian bombers, fighters, and transport planes will have unrestricted access to Iranian air bases,” he said.

      “This process will begin with purpose-built dual-use facilities next to the existing airports at Hamedan, Bandar Abbas, Chabhar, and Abadan,” he said.

      OilPrice.com understands from the Iranian sources that the bombers to be deployed will be China-modified versions of the long-range Russian Tupolev Tu-22M3s, with a manufacturing specification range of 6,800 kilometres (2,410 km with a  typical weapons load), and the fighters will be the all-weather supersonic medium-range fighter bomber/strike Sukhoi Su-34, plus the newer single-seat stealth attack Sukhoi-57. It is apposite to note that in August 2016, Russia used the Hamedan airbase to launch attacks on targets in Syria using both Tupolev-22M3 long-range bombers and Sukhoi-34 strike fighters. At the same time, Chinese and Russian military vessels will be able to use newly-created dual-use facilities at Iran’s key ports at Chabahar, Bandar-e-Bushehr, and Bandar Abbas, constructed by Chinese companies.

      These deployments will be accompanied by the roll-out of Chinese and Russian electronic warfare (EW) capabilities, according to the Iran sources. This would encompass each of the three key EW areas – electronic support (including early warning of enemy weapons use) plus electronic attack (including jamming systems) plus electronic protection (including of enemy jamming). Based originally around neutralising NATO’s C4ISR (Command, Control, Communications, Computers, Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance) systems, part of the new roll-out of software and hardware from China and Russia in Iran, according to the Iran sources, would be the Russian S-400 anti-missile air defence system:

      “To counter U.S. and/or Israeli attacks.”

      The Krasukha-2 and -4 systems are also likely to feature in the overall EW architecture, as they proved their effectiveness in Syria in countering the radars of attack, reconnaissance and unmanned aircraft. The Krasukha-2 can jam Airborne Warning And Control Systems (AWACS) at up to 250 km, and other airborne radars such as guided missiles, whilst the Krasukha-4 is a multi-functional jamming system that not only counters AWACS but also ground-based radars, with both being highly mobile.

      It is again apposite to note here that an entire EW company (encompassing the three core elements of EW) can consist of as little as 100 men and, according to the Iran sources, part of the new military co-operation includes an exchange of personnel between Iran and China and Russia, with up to 110 senior Iranian IRGC men going for training every year in Beijing and Moscow and 110 Chinese and Russians going to Tehran for their training. It is also apposite to note that Iran’s EW system can easily be tied in to Russia’s Southern Joint Strategic Command 19th EW Brigade (Rassvet) near Rostov-on-Don, which links into the corollary Chinese systems.

      “One of the Russian air jamming systems is going to be based in Chabahar and will capable of completely disabling the UAE’s and Saudi Arabia’s air defences, to the extent that they would only have around two minutes of warning for a missile or drone attack from Iran,” one of the Iran sources told OilPrice.com last week.

      An indication of what Iran hopes to receive in return its co-operation with China, and Russia, came last week when Zhang Jun, China’s permanent United Nations (U.N.) representative, in a statement to the Security Council, told the U.S.:

      “To stop its illegal unilateral sanctions on Iran… The root cause of the current crisis is the U.S.’s withdrawal from the Iran nuclear deal in May 2018 and the re-imposition of unilateral sanctions against Iran.”

      He also opposed the U.S.’s push for the extension of the U.N. arms embargo on Iran, which expires in October. “This has again undermined the joint efforts to preserve the JCPOA [Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action],” Zhang said, and added: “The [JCPOA] agreement was endorsed by the U.N. Security Council [UNSC] and is legally binding.”

      He concluded: “We urge the U.S. to stop its illegal unilateral sanctions and long-arm jurisdiction, and return to the right track of observing the JCPOA and Resolution 2231 [of the UNSC].”

      Securing China’s support was a key reason for the original secret part of the deal agreed last year, along with that of Russia, as the two countries have two-fifths of the total Permanent Member votes on the UNSC, with the others being the U.S., the U.K., and France. Aside from this support and the US$400 billion+ of investments pledged by China, the other reason that Iran has agreed to such Chinese (and Russian) influence in its country going forward is that China has guaranteed that it will continue to take all of the oil, gas, and petchems that Iran requires.

    • Hong Kong Activists Are Off The Streets – They're Too Busy Scrubbing Digital Footprints
      Hong Kong Activists Are Off The Streets – They’re Too Busy Scrubbing Digital Footprints

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 21:50

      Hong Kong activists haven’t been too busy in the streets these days protesting China’s crackdown in the wake of the newly enacted national security law, instead they’ve been at home, frantically scrubbing their social media accounts and digital footprints.

      The new law imposed by Beijing took effect July 1st, and given that it wasn’t until after that date that most people didn’t even know what’s in it, and with questions still looming over whether it can be applied to “crimes” and anti-mainland related activity ‘retroactively’ – many young activists aren’t waiting to find out, and are instead busy deleting all traces of their name and activities online. An alarming report in the South China Morning Post begins as follows

      Sam Wong [a pseudonym] remembers exactly when he deleted his Facebook account.

      An hour before the clock struck midnight on July 1, Hong Kong officially adopted a new national security law imposed by Beijing. Like many others living in the city, Wong only learned about the full details of the sweeping legislation after it was signed into law. By the time it came into force, he decided that the moment had come for him to quit the social media platform.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Via Reason TV

      Many aspects to the law and what its diverse layers will look like as interpreted and applied in practice remains uncertain.

      But some legal and industry experts say “the rules authorize the police to search electronic devices believed to contain criminal evidence, and require social media platforms and internet service providers to assist law enforcement without a warrant,” as the SCMP underscores.

      The new legal situation has even forced app-makers and companies to issue statements related to the Hong Kong issue.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Many Hong Kongers have reportedly taken to using an app called Signal, given that not only does it include end-to-end encryption, but even allows users to utilize “disappearing messages” – which allows for automatic deletion and scrubbing of message history anywhere from seconds after a chat to up to a week following.

      Wong emphasized to SCMP that “If my account is compromised, or if my phone is hacked, or if I am kidnapped and someone else sees what’s on my phone, then it’s not just the stuff that I wrote that is being exposed but also my friends’.”

      Recall too that the national security law allows for harsh prison sentences for conduct deemed subversive and ‘separatist’ within semi-autonomous Hong Kong, even life in prison for acts deemed terrorism which are politically motivated. 

    • Turkish Forces Lick Wounds After Airstrikes Hit Their Base In Libya
      Turkish Forces Lick Wounds After Airstrikes Hit Their Base In Libya

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 21:30

      Submitted by SouthFront,

      After a short break, the military confrontation between the Libyan National Army mainly backed up by Egypt and the UAE and the Turkish-backed Government of National Accord has once again entered an open phase.

      On July 5, aircraft of the Libyan National Army conducted nine pinpoint airstrikes on the Turkish-operated al-Watiya Air Base in western Libya. According to the LNA, the strikes destroyed a Hawk air-defense system, several radars and a KORAL electronic warfare system. The Hawk system and other equipment were deployed to the base by the Turkish military in early July.

      Turkish state media confirmed the incident saying that the strikes “targeted some of the base’s equipment, which was recently brought in to reinforce the base, including an air-defense system”. Pro-Turkish sources claimed that the airstrikes were carried out not by the LNA, but rather by the Egyptian or UAE Air Force. According to them, the warplanes took off from Egypt’s Sidi Barrani Air Base. However, according to the LNA, the strikes were delivered by its aircraft deployed in Libya. Commenting on the situation, the GNA said that it would respond at the “right place and at the right time.”

      While the GNA in fact has no resources to conduct extensive airstrikes deep inside the territory controlled by the LNA, Ankara will have to respond to this attack in some way if it really wants to demonstrate that Turkey is committed to achieving a military victory (or at least a partial military victory) in the conflict in Libya.

      At least 5,250 Syrian militants out of 15,300 originally deployed in Libya have returned to Syria, according to the London-based Syrian Observatory for Human Rights. The SOHR claimed that 300 Syrian child soldiers are still fighting in Libya. All of them range in ages between 14 and 18. Most of them were recruited by the Turkish-backed al-Sultan Murad Division. It’s interesting to note that the numbers provided by the SOHR mostly fit other sources that argue that about 10,000 Turkish-backed Syrian militants are currently deployed in Libya.

      Therefore, Ankara is apparently set to continue its offensive operations by the hands of the GNA and Syrian groups in the countryside of Sirte. This strategic port city is now the main priority of Turkish-led forces.

      On the other hand, if Turkey continues escalating the conflict, it may force Egypt and the UAE, the main backers of the LNA, to provide direct military support to the LNA and directly intervene in the conflict. In this case, the Libyan ‘civil war’ will officially turn into a war between Turkey and the UAE-Egypt bloc.

    • The New CMBS: Italian Mafia Issues 'Crime & Murder Backed Securities'
      The New CMBS: Italian Mafia Issues ‘Crime & Murder Backed Securities’

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 21:10

      It appears global bond investors were “made an offer they could not refuse” as, according to financial and legal documents seen by the Financial Times, they bought bonds backed by the crime proceeds of Italy’s most powerful mafia.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      An estimated €1bn of these private bonds – backed in part by front companies charged with working for the Calabrian ’Ndrangheta mafia group – were sold to international investors between 2015 and 2019

      As The FT notes, the ’Ndrangheta is less well-known outside Italy than the Sicilian mafia but has risen over the past two decades to become one of the wealthiest and most feared criminal groups in the western world, engaging in crimes ranging from industrial-scale cocaine trafficking to money laundering, extortion and arms smuggling.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As Vice.com reported back in 2014, unlike the world famous Cosa Nostra from Sicily and the Camorra from Naples, for years the ‘Ndrangheta has largely managed to avoid the attention of the media.

      It’s a tight-knit family affair and members have done their best not to make too much noise, while police informers have always been a rare breed. Its name comes from the Greek for “courage” or “loyalty” and aptly its well observed code of silence gives investigators a hard time.

      the ‘Ndrangheta has come a long way since it was denounced as a “sect of wrongdoers” way back in 1888. Between 1970 and 1991, besides usury and extortion in Calabria, the ‘Ndrangheta was mainly involved in kidnapping for ransom. The most famous case was that of John Paul Getty III, the son of Paul Getty and grandson of the industrialist Jean Paul Getty, founder of the Getty Oil company. The ‘Ndrangheta ended up raking in a ransom of around $3 million for Getty III after kidnapping him in Rome in July 1973, before releasing him onto the Salerno-Reggio Calabria motorway.

      When the Berlin Wall fell, the ‘Ndrangheta siezed the moment and the cheap assets, moving quickly to expand its operations in former Soviet bloc countries and turning its operation global. The syndicate dealt heroin and cocaine and became a reliable ally of the South American drug cartels. Last year, an investigation linked its operation with an IRA money laundering scam.

      It is well known that Mexican drug gangs Los Zetas and the Gulf Cartel are in business with the ‘Ndrangheta, and recent joint operations by police in Italy and the US—code-named “Crime 3,” “Reckoning/Solare,” and “New Bridge”—uncovered an elaborate logistical network. Operation “Crime 3” showed that the ‘Ndrangheta exercises absolute “hegemony over cocaine trafficking in Europe based on the alliance with Colombian traffickers in Europe and Los Zetas in the US.”

      “The ‘Ndrangheta can and has to be considered one of the most powerful organizations in the world for the handling of international drug-trafficking,” said Raffaele Grassi, head of Italy’s national anti-racketeering division in February. He said that operations like “New Bridge” prove once more that the ‘Ndrangheta has expanded far beyond its place of origin and its activities in Northern Italy, and “is looking for criminals beyond the borders, invading new markets to make profit.”

      And, for bond investors, it’s a good business – according to Europol, the mafia’s activities generate a combined turnover of €44bn a year…  and would appear to be in recession-proof businesses with a strong moat from competitors.

      The bonds themselves are backed by collateral consisting of unpaid invoices to Italian public health authorities from companies providing them with medical services (which under EU law, prodeuce a guaranteed penalty interest rate).

      Most of the assets securitised in the deals were legitimate but, as The FT details, some were from companies later revealed to be controlled by certain ’Ndrangheta clans, which had managed to evade anti-money laundering checks to take advantage of international investor demand for exotic debt instruments.

      One bond deal purchased by institutional investors contained assets sold by a refugee camp in Calabria that had been taken over by organised criminals.

      They were later convicted for stealing tens of millions of euros of EU funds.

      Entities involved in buying these bonds claim they had never knowingly purchased any assets linked to criminal activity; all saying that they conducted significant due diligence on all the healthcare assets that they handled as financial intermediaries.

      The question remains, did Luca Brasi hold a gun to investors’ heads? And how long before the world’s largest organized crime business – The Fed – starts buying these bonds (for the good of the economy?)

    • After Sending 1000s Of COVID Patients Into Nursing Homes, New York Blames Deaths On "Infected Staff"
      After Sending 1000s Of COVID Patients Into Nursing Homes, New York Blames Deaths On “Infected Staff”

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 20:50

      Authored by Daniel Payne via JustTheNews.com,

      New York officials issue a report this week concluding that the high number of coronavirus deaths in state care facilities was the result of infected workers, not sick residents, spreading the contagion.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      New York has face sharp criticism over the past several months for its policy of allowing COVID-19-positive patients to return to nursing homes before they were declared free of the virus.

      Democratic Gov. Andrew Cuomo said the state policy of allowing residents to return to elderly-care facilities was in line with guidance from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. However, PolitiFact in May rated that claim “mostly false,” pointing out the state appeared to pressure nursing homes to take COVID-19 patients regardless of whether they could properly house them.

      The report by the New York Department of Health states that “an analysis of the timing between known nursing home staff infections and nursing home fatalities indicates that they are correlated.” It also states that “the peak number of nursing home staff reporting COVID-19 symptoms occurred 23 days prior to the date of the peak nursing home fatalities.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The data “does not support [the] assertion” that infected patients were the spreaders of the disease, the department argues. 

      “Nursing home resident fatalities peaked on April 8, 2020,” the paper states.

      “The peak of nursing home admissions from hospitals did not occur until April 14, 2020, a week after peak nursing home fatalities – suggesting the policy was not the cause.”

      The report also argues that “most patients readmitted to nursing homes were likely not infectious,” claiming that they would likely have spent enough time in the hospital to have entered a non-infectious stage of the disease. 

      Data also “do not show a consistent relationship between admissions and increased mortality,” the report says, adding that “there were cases where nursing homes did not admit any COVID-positive patients, yet still had a high number of COVID-related deaths.”

      The report states that any staff who spread the disease did so “through no fault of their own,” insofar as they would have been unaware they were infectious while working.

    • Fearful And Frugal: COVID Weighs On Consumer Psyche 
      Fearful And Frugal: COVID Weighs On Consumer Psyche 

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 20:30

      There is no question in our mind that consumer behaviors will be drastically reshaped in a post-corona world – one where a fearful and frugal consumer might result in a much slower economic recovery. 

      For more color on the evolving consumer, one that has been severely damaged by the virus-related recession, Bloomberg recently conducted a survey (of 2,200 adults) that found there is “waning interest in public events and material things, like appliances and clothes, and a new austerity, expressed through pantry stockpiling and delayed big-ticket purchases.” 

      The survey, polled between June 26-28, doesn’t account for the latest surge in coronavirus cases, and a stalled recovery with more than 40% of the country pausing or reversing reopenings. Shifting consumer trends, sort of like what happened in the Great Depression, is the government’s and Federal Reserve’s worst nightmare because declining consumption will result in no V-shaped recovery this year. 

      “People are generally expressing that they’ll do certain things less, or at home, on their own,” said Victoria Sakal, managing director of brand intelligence at Morning Consult, Bloomberg’s partner on the survey that was conducted on the last weekend of June. “There’s also a health component to how safe, comfortable and protected people feel.”

      The survey first revealed that nearly half of the respondents aren’t ready to return to shopping malls. 

      Americans—often stereotyped around the world as confident to the point of arrogance—have developed a fear of enclosed retail spaces. While about three-quarters of U.S. adults feel okay shopping inside grocery stores or small businesses, more than half don’t feel safe inside a shopping center, the data show. This is only adding to the woes of malls. – Bloomberg 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Bloomberg

      Readers may recall, commercial real estate is an absolute disaster as retailers are failing to make rent payments; this is a byproduct of a consumer ditching malls for e-commerce stores. 

      Another sign the recovery could be painful and prolonged is the survey found America’s love affair with bars has abruptly died in the age of pandemic. Half of the respondents said they’re “not at all” looking forward to drinking at bars – but rather continue drinking at home. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Bloomberg

      Respondents were less nervous about restaurants – though most said they would feel more comfortable if eateries adopted social distancing guidelines and new cleaning protocols.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Bloomberg

      The survey reveals respondents have become more frugal – the day of putting everything on the credit card(s) are over. 

      These cautious attitudes mark a stark change for a country that is both admired and derided for its at-times extravagant consumer culture. America invented the shopping mall and the movie theater, and has eight of the world’s ten biggest sports stadiums. But the coronavirus lockdowns have given rise to a new attitude: If you reopen it, they might not come. 

      Some of the hesitance is economic. Americans became more frugal during the pandemic, the survey shows. Over the past three months, 23% of respondents purchased more generic items, 28% increased bulk purchases and 41% chose to save money more often by forgoing a purchase. People also increased price comparing, while putting luxury and expensive purchases on hold at a higher rate.

      This thriftiness could be here to stay, permanently shifting the makeup of the average American consumer—not unlike the Great Depression’s impact on spending habits 90 years ago. More than three-quarters of consumers say they expect to increase their savings rate and financial conservatism after economies fully reopen.- Bloomberg 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Bloomberg

      Gen Z and millennial respondents appear to be the first generations looking forward to normalizing their social life – however, the percentages are still at very low levels. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Bloomberg

      Tens of millions unemployed, nearly three million jobs eliminated, those who were just rehired and now being fired, and states pausing and or reversing reopenings because virus cases are surging once more, this all suggests consumers are entering an age of thriftiness – bad news for anyone betting on the consumer. 

    • Ghislaine Maxwell Goes From Posh Hideout To COVID-Stricken 'Third World Country' NY Jail
      Ghislaine Maxwell Goes From Posh Hideout To COVID-Stricken ‘Third World Country’ NY Jail

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 20:11

      For the first time in her privileged life, ex-socialite Ghislaine Maxwell is living in conditions described by one judge in 2016 as similar to a ‘prison on Turkey or a Third World Country.’

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The 58-year-old Maxwell was arrested after hiding out in a lavish four-bedroom, four-bathroom mansion in New Hampshire, which Bloomberg notes sports views of the Mount Sunapee foothills from every room.

      After being initially booked in New Hampshire on multiple charges related to trafficking underage girls for the sexual gratification of dead pedophile Jeffrey Epstein, Maxwell was transferred on Monday to New York’s Metropolitan Detention Center (MDC) – home to over 1,600 male and female detainees which was built at the turn of the 20th century and used during both world wars, according to Bloomberg.

      No one wants to go to jail, but the conditions described at the MDC have been the subject of numerous complaints and scrutiny that rival the rat-infested federal lockup in Lower Manhattan where Epstein was held.

      In early 2019, hundreds of inmates at the MDC were locked shivering in their cells for at least a week after an electrical fire knocked out power in the building. The inmates spent some of the coldest days of that winter in darkness, largely without heat and hot water. –Bloomberg

      One inmate, Derrilyn Needham, has been incarcerated at MDC since last November along with 30 other women who slept in bunk beds. Needham said social distancing was difficult, and that for three days starting April 23, the women were on “lockdown on our bunk beds, not able to leave our bunks except to use the bathroom or shower.

      She added that they hadn’t been given gloves, hand sanitizer or disinfectant wipes – and that despite symptoms of COVID-19, the assistant warden said she couldn’t receive a test for the virus.

      According to The Intercept, “The number of reported coronavirus symptoms far exceeds the number of tests MDC has performed.” In May, the facility came under fire for allegedly destroying medical records “as part of a deliberate effort to obscure the number of incarcerated people infected with the coronavirus.”

      The report, filed Thursday as part of a putative class-action lawsuit by people held in custody at the Metropolitan Detention Center in Brooklyn, casts doubt on assertions by the Bureau of Prisons, which runs the jail, and the U.S. Attorney’s Office for the Eastern District, which serves as counsel for the bureau. The Bureau of Prisons and federal prosecutors have insisted in court that the situation at the jail is under control. But the medical examiner’s report — which contradicted prison assertions that Centers for Disease Control and Prevention guidelines were being followed — suggests that the six people in custody who have tested positive for the disease likely represent the tip of the iceberg. –The Intercept

      After the pandemic began, the detention center was deemed “ill-equipped” to deal with the spread of COVID-19 by former chief medical officer for the city’s jails, Homer Venters, who says he’s “concerned about the ongoing health and safety of the population,” and slammed administrators for failing to adequately deal with the pandemic.

      That said, MDC has been on the receiving end of criticism over its conditions long before coronavirus was an issue.

      Cheryl Pollak, the federal magistrate in Brooklyn, has repeatedly voiced concerns about the MDC after reviewing a report by the National Association of Women Judges, who visited the facility and found that 161 female inmates were housed 24 hours a day, seven days a week, in two large rooms that lacked windows, fresh air or sunlight and weren’t allowed out to exercise. –Bloomberg

      “Some of these conditions wouldn’t surprise me if we were dealing with a prison in Turkey or a Third World Country,” Pollak said during a 2016 hearing. “It’s hard for me to believe it’s going on in a federal prison.”

       

    • The Madness Of Political Correctness
      The Madness Of Political Correctness

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 20:10

      Via Monty Pelerin’s World blog,

      The madness of political correctness is mocked in this e-mail sent to Clarence Page of the Chicago Tribune after an article he published concerning a name change for the Washington Redskins.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The author is unknown but perceptive, clever and sarcastic:

      Dear Mr. Page:

      I agree with our Native American population. I am highly jilted by the racially charged name of the Washington Redskins.  One might argue that to name a professional football team after Native Americans would exalt them as fine warriors, but nay, nay. We must be careful not to offend, and in the spirit of political correctness and courtesy, we must move forward.

      Let’s ditch the Kansas City Chiefs, the Atlanta Braves and the Cleveland Indians. If your shorts are in a wad because of the reference the name Redskins makes to skin color, then we need to get rid of the Cleveland Browns. The Carolina Panthers obviously were named to keep the memory of militant Blacks from the 60’s alive. Gone. It’s offensive to us white folk.

      The New York Yankees offend the Southern population. Do you see a team named for the Confederacy? No! There is no room for any reference to that tragic war that cost this country so many young men’s lives. I am also offended by the blatant references to the Catholic religion among our sports team names. Totally inappropriate to have the New Orleans Saints, the Los Angeles Angels or the San Diego Padres.

      Then there are the team names that glorify criminals who raped and pillaged. We are talking about the horrible Oakland Raiders, the Minnesota Vikings, the Tampa Bay Buccaneers and the Pittsburgh Pirates!

      Now, let us address those teams that clearly send the wrong message to our children. The San Diego Chargers promote irresponsible fighting or even spending habits. Wrong message to our children.

      The New York Giants and the San Francisco Giants promote obesity, a growing childhood epidemic. Wrong message to our children. The Cincinnati Reds promote downers/barbiturates. Wrong message to our children. The Milwaukee Brewers. Well that goes without saying. Wrong message to our children.

      So, there you go. We need to support any legislation that comes out to rectify this travesty, because the government will likely become involved with this issue, as they should. Just the kind of thing the do-nothing Congress loves.

      As a die-hard Oregon State fan, my wife and I, with all of this in mind, suggest it might also make some sense to change the name of the Oregon State women’s athletic teams to something other than “the Beavers” (especially when they play Southern California). Do we really want the Trojans sticking it to the Beavers?

      I always love your articles and I generally agree with them. As for the Redskins name, I would suggest they change the name to the “Foreskins” to better represent their community, paying tribute to the dick heads in Washington DC.

      One wonders whether Mr. Page grasped the madness of political correctness after this communication. Perhaps.

    • Forget TikTok Ban, Trump Aides Discuss Busting The Hong Kong Dollar Peg To Punish China
      Forget TikTok Ban, Trump Aides Discuss Busting The Hong Kong Dollar Peg To Punish China

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 19:50

      While admitting that there are many pushing back against the idea, Bloomberg is reporting that the Trump administration is escalating its plans to hold China accountable for its recent global pandemic chaos and Hong Kong freedom oppression.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Secretary of State Pompeo told Fox News earlier in the day that the US was mulling the possibility of banning social media app TikTok in the US, but tonight Bloomberg reports that some top advisors have suggested the Washington should undermine the Hong Kong dollar’s peg to the US dollar.

      According to people familiar with the matter, Bloomberg reports that the idea of striking against the Hong Kong dollar peg – perhaps by limiting the ability of Hong Kong banks to buy U.S. dollars – has been raised as part of broader discussions among advisers to Secretary of State Michael Pompeo but hasn’t been elevated to the senior levels of the White House, suggesting that it hasn’t gained serious traction yet.

      As a reminder, we suggested that one major reason for China’s recent push for everyone and their pet rabbit to buy stocks (sending Chinese markets exploding higher) was dramatic investment outflows from China.

      China-dedicated equity funds saw an 11th consecutive week of net outflows.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Taking a page of the Robinhood playbook, China is desperate to halt and reverse the massive equity outflows as it urgently needs the flow of US Dollars to reverse into Chinese markets, instead of away from. To do that, it needs to create an initial upward momentum in prices which halts the selling/outflows and prompts a reappraisal of Chinese asset values. Ideally, it will also capture the euphoria of US daytraders who will buy Chinese, not US stocks.

      This potential ‘strawman’ to break the HKD peg comes a day after we noted the simple maths that if 500,000 Hong Kongers were to leave the city and take USD1m equivalent with them then ceteris paribus, the HKD peg would surely have to go as all FX reserves evaporated.

      In recent weeks we have seen the HK authorities publicly state they will not impose capital controls – which as a key global financial center should always be unthinkable. Yesterday, after a Chinese official response strongly opposing the UK government making clear it will offer 2.9m Hong Kongers a path to citizenship, the HK authorities had to publicly disavow rumours of a travel ban on its citizens.

      Yes, that’s where we stand.

      What does monetary policy have to offer here?

      Not much, because it is The Fed’s ZIRP policy (relative to HIBOR) that is forcing carry traders’ flow to buy Hong Kong Dollars (and lend them) against cheaply-funded USDollars.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As the chart above attempts to show, the relative spread between USD funding and HKD funding implies a stronger HKD which would ‘break’ the peg band (green dotted line) and thus Hong Kong Monetary Authority had to intervene to maintain that upper peg band.

      The proposal reportedly faces strong push back from others in the administration who worry such a move would only hurt Hong Kong banks and the U.S., not China.

      But the very fact that this serious monetary threat has been raised (or leaked) implies two things: 1) US authorities appear to want to punish banks based in Hong Kong (especially HSBC after Pompeo singled out HSBC’s “show of fealty”); and 2) it will force a response (or pre-response) from China, which could also ripple through becalmed markets and ruin the glorious gains in Nasdaq for retail bagholders everywhere.

      As Pompeo said earlier in the week: “We’d love to preserve the freedom in Hong Kong; but if we can’t, we’re going to hold the Chinese Communist Party accountable.”

    • Public Forums & The First Amendment: Can Streets Be Painted With 'Black Lives Matter' Messaging?
      Public Forums & The First Amendment: Can Streets Be Painted With ‘Black Lives Matter’ Messaging?

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 19:30

      Update (2130ET): In a stunning update, the Martinez couple caught on video painting over the “approved” Black Lives Matter mural on July 4th…

      …are being charged with a hate crime.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      *  *  *

      Authored by Mark Glennon via Wirepoints.org,

      Are Black Lives Matter supporters free to paint those words and its slogans on public streets? Do others have a right to put up contradictory views or cancel out BLM messages?

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Those questions should be trending, given recent headlines, but they are yet to be discussed in the press. Perhaps that’s because answers are unclear, at least as far as I can tell.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Removing “Black Lives Matter” in Martinez, CA

      “From Cleveland to Montpelier, Vt., BLM street slogans have been defaced,” says The Washington Post in a Monday story about two people in Martinez, California who painted over “Black Lives Matter” that had been painted on a public street. Major streets in New York and Washington, D.C. have been amond thosee painted with Black Lives Matter.

      Locally, the words Black Lives Matter and Defund EPD, which had been painted on Evanston streets, were splattered with white paint this past weekend in what appears to be an attempt to deface the words, according to various news reports.

      Who has what rights to paint public streets?

      The starting point is what’s called the public forum doctrine. That doctrine, which courts have recognized under the First Amendment for over 80 years, requires “viewpoint neutrality” when government creates a public forum for speech. Under that doctrine, when government excludes a speaker from a public forum – such as a park or a podium at a government meeting – doing so may violate the speaker’s First Amendment rights if the exclusion is based on the content of the speech or the speaker’s viewpoint.

      It’s under that doctrine that courts have denied government officials, including President Trump, the right to block critics on social media. Officeholders are obviously free to say what they want. But if they choose to go on a public forum like Twitter that allows responses, those officeholders cannot block reactions they don’t like.

      By letting people paint messages on public streets, cities probably would be deemed to have created a forum, so it might seem that neutrality demands that competing messages be allowed. Or since contesting messages might make a mess of the streets, perhaps dissenters would defend erasing them by claiming neutrality can be preserved that way.

      But not so fast.

      Courts also recognize something called the government speech doctrine, which basically says the government itself can express whatever viewpoint it chooses. So, if the BLM messaging is the city’s own or the city blessed it, it’s probably protected.

      If you are confused, you should be. The conflict between the public forum and government speech doctrines has been variously described as either a contradiction or a paradox. A Boston College legal journal put it this way:

      [T]he government must show that it is not discriminating against a viewpoint. And yet if the government shows that it is condemning or supporting a viewpoint, it may be able to invoke the government speech defense and thereby avoid constitutional scrutiny altogether. Government speech doctrine therefore rewards what the rest of the First Amendment forbids: viewpoint discrimination against private speech.

      Making things still murkier in Martinez and Evanston are the facts about whether the government was itself speaking. If it was private citizens and not the government, the government speech defense would not apply.

      In Martinez, community members reportedly did the original Black Lives Matter painting though they had a city permit to do so.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “Defund EPD.” Source: Daily Northwestern.

      In Evanston, it appears the city supported the Black Lives Matter painting but not the Defund EPD message, according to the Daily Northwestern, and those who painted the latter may face charges.

      I’ll leave it there on how courts would deal with these cases and let First Amendment experts speculate further.

      As a matter of policy, however, it certainly seems the government should stay away from divisive messaging unless they deliver it in forums where debate can be robust. Painting streets is no such forum.

      Many will say, of course, that there is nothing divisive in BLM messaging and that dissenting views should be disregarded. Much of the press will go along with that, reporting the dissenters as vandals or racists. The San Francisco Chronicle headline on the Martinez incident was “Black Lives Matter mural in Martinez vandalized in ‘hateful and senseless’ act.”  And in The Washington Post, the headline was, “Calling racism a ‘leftist lie,’ white vandals target California Black Lives Matter slogan.”

      But the division BLM inflames is real and will grow. BLM Chicago recently retweeted a video of Fred Hampton with the message, “we not gon fight capitalism with black capitalism, we gon fight it with socialism… we’re going to fight their reactions when all us people get together and have an international proletariat revolution!” Hampton was a Black Panther leader killed in a 1969 police raid in Chicago.

      And over the weekend BLM Chicago promoted training sessions on abolishing the entire police and prison system, which included “black only” sections.   

      We wrote more about them and the national BLM organization’s extremism earlier. Their supporters have their legal rights, but the facts are coming out.

      Race relations are being set back by fifty years and BLM is part of the reason why.

    • DoJ, FTC Investigating TikTok Over Child Privacy Violations
      DoJ, FTC Investigating TikTok Over Child Privacy Violations

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 19:13

      Update (1840ET): Not long after President Trump confirmed that the administration is “looking into” banning TikTok, Reuters has reported that the DoJ and FTC are, in fact, looking into probing TikTok over allegations the company violated a 2019 agreement where it promised to protect children’s privacy.

      And instead of citing the usual anonymous sources, the report cited officials from various nonprofit groups who claimed that officials from the DoJ and FTC had met with them over complaints that TikTok had violated an agreement reached with the two agencies in 2019.

      Officials from both the FTC, which reached the original consent agreement with TikTok, and the DoJ, which often takes legal actions on behalf of the FTC, met via video conference with representatives from the various groups to discuss the matter, according to David Monahan, a campaign manager with the Campaign for a Commercial-Free Childhood, one of the sources who spoke with Reuters.

      “I got the sense from our conversation that they are looking into the assertions that we raised in our complaint,” Monahan said.

      According to the agreement, TikTok agreed to police sensitive information about minor users shared on its platform. But the digital privacy groups who brought the complaint alleged that “TikTok failed to delete videos and personal information about users age 13 and younger as it had agreed to do, among other violations.”

      We suspect Beijing won’t be thrilled about this news, and we imagine the CCP will once again use this as another example of how Chinese companies are persecuted and slandered by the envious west.

      * * *

      After an intrepid group of “TikTok Teens” purportedly sabotaged President Trump’s Tulsa, Oklahoma campaign comeback rally by ‘fraudulently’ requesting “1 MILLION TICKETS” as Trump Campaign Manager Brad Parscale put it in a tweet when he announced the numbers. By doing this, the media narrative goes, the teens supposedly stopped thousands of eager Oklahoman Trump supporters (read: racists) from obtaining tickets to the rally.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Of course, we later learned that it didn’t really go down like that. And even NYT social media reporter Taylor Lorenz urged readers to accept her reporting with a grain of salt. Still, CNN was happy to run with the story.

      But before the liberals break out the ukeleles and start strumming the opening to “I Believe the Children are the Future”, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo told Fox News Host Larua Ingraham during a Monday evening interview that the administration is “looking into” the possibility of banning the app in the US.

      WaPo noted that Pompeo’s interview, and his comments on TikTok, followed the TikTok teens sabotage campaign. But this is hardly the first time the secretary of state has warned about the dangers of using the app. At this point, we wouldn’t be surprised to learn that the White House sees this as a bunch of gullible American teenagers being manipulated like a gang of ‘useful idiots’ by the CCP. Notably, Kellyanne Conway’s teenage daughter is now using the app to thoroughly embarrass the bejeezus out of her mother by airing the family dirty laundry in public.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      India recently banned TikTok and dozens of other Chinese apps, and Ingraham was simply asking if the Trump Administration, which has been ratcheting up the pressure on China, might consider pursuing a similar tack.

      “We’re certainly looking at it,” Pompeo said, adding that the administration was taking the issue “very seriously.” “With the respect to Chinese apps on people’s cellphones, I can assure you the United States will get this one right.”

      But he added: “I don’t want to get out in front of the president, but it’s something we’re looking at.”

      Asked if he could endorse Americans downloading the app to their phones, Pompeo replied: “Only if you want your data in the hands of the Chinese Communist Party.”

      If you have any doubts about whether TikTok is working to expand the influence of the CCP in the US, give this WSJ story published last month a read…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • Ghislaine Should Be On Suicide Watch: Former MDC Warden
      Ghislaine Should Be On Suicide Watch: Former MDC Warden

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 19:10

      A former warden at the jail holding Ghislaine Maxwell says the accused Jeffrey Epstein accomplice should be on suicide watch – as her case is ‘too explosive to risk her killing herself behind bars,’ reports the New York Post.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      She allegedly knows a great deal of information about a multitude of potential co-defendants in the actions against Jeffrey Epstein,” said Cameron Lindsay, who served as the warden of the Metropolitan Detention Center for three years, adding that he wouldn’t risk the possibility of her suicide.

      “This is just such a sensitive case, it’s absolutely imperative that the government get it right,” added Lindsay. “Why take any chances? Just put her on suicide watch and keep her there until she’s out the door. I would just not risk it.

      At the jail, an inmate is placed on suicide watch at the discretion of the warden and the chief psychologist at the facility.

      Once on inmate is on suicide watch, a staff member or fellow inmate who has been trained by the psychologist, sits outside their cell and stares at them constantly to ensure they don’t attempt to kill themselves. –New York Post

      Maxwell will likely be placed in a cell by herself due to her status as a high-profile suspect which could make her a target for other inmates, according to the report.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Maxwell shortly after the death of her father in 1991

      To take someone out like that, that would be a badge of honor in the subculture of prisons,” he added. “Anytime an inmate with wide publicity of a very sensitive nature like this, they become a target.”

      Maxwell, who arrived at the Sunset Park jail Monday, was likely transported to the facility in “full restraints,” which includes leg irons, a belly chain and handcuffs. After entering, she would’ve been stripped searched and cavity searched and given a medical examination.

      She’ll likely ride out her time at the jail in “administrative lockdown status,” Lindsay added, which would keep her locked down in a cell 23 hours a day. She’d be given one hour of recreation time at a small outdoor area after being escorted from her cell in shackles under the lockdown status. –New York Post

      Maxwell’s death would also be incredibly convenient for a host of high-profile individuals suspected of participating in Epstein’s underage sex trafficking ring. She was charged with four counts of sex trafficking and two counts of perjury, and will be held at the Metropolitan Detention Center at least until her bail hearing, tentatively scheduled for the 14th of July.

      After his arrest on charges of sex-trafficking dozens of teenage girls, Jeffrey Epstein was found dead in his cell last August at New York’s Metropolitan Correctional Center (MCC) in lower Manhattan. While ruled a suicide, many have speculated that the combination of broken security cameras and ‘sleepy guards’ at the exact moment he allegedly hanged himself suggests he was ‘suicided’ before he could spill the beans on his high-profile friends and clients.

    • Interactive Map Of All The PPP Mega Loans Over $1 Million Made To U.S. "Small" Businesses
      Interactive Map Of All The PPP Mega Loans Over $1 Million Made To U.S. “Small” Businesses

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 18:50

      Submitted by Adam Andrzejewski, first published in Forbes

      Yesterday, the Small Business Administration released data on which businesses received forgivable loans under the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) in amounts between $150,000 and $10 million.

      So, who received how much taxpayer money through the program? Our auditors at OpenTheBooks.com mapped the big loans – the nearly 83,000 loans between $1 million and $10 million. These businesses are located in 13,700 zip codes across the country.

      Now, you can find out yourself, zip code by zip code, with an interactive tool we’ve built on our government transparency website.

      This mapping tool allows users to quickly review every PPP transaction exceeding $1 million. Just click a pin (zip code) and scroll down to see the results that will appear in the chart beneath the map.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The overall subsidies are quite breathtaking.

      Kanye West, who just declared for president and claims a net worth of $1.3 billion, took between $2 million and $5 million for his clothing and sneaker company, Yeezy LLC.

      Robert Redford’s Sundance Institute received between $2 million and $5 million in lending. The non-profit’s latest IRS 990 lists $55.4 million in assets (FY2018).

      Then, there is Francis Ford Coppola the legendary filmmaker of the Godfather and other movies.

      Coppola is also a renowned wine maker and two of his affiliated companies received PPP funding including Francis Ford Coppola Presents LLC ($5 million to $10 million);and Niebaum Coppola Estate Winery, LP ($1 million – $2 million).

      A spokesperson responded to our request for comment:

      “Francis Ford Coppola Winery and Niebaum Coppola Estate Winery, LP applied for the PPP loans based on business necessity and are using the entirety of the loans on wages and benefits to save the employment of its wineries, hospitality, and restaurant workforce during these uncertain times. 

      We are family-owned wine businesses, and the PPP loans have enabled us to bring back over two hundred of our Direct to Consumer employees, even though we may not have work for all them for the foreseeable future.”

      However, Coppola’s winery wasn’t alone as 601 wineries across America received at least $192 million in PPP lending.

      Here is just a sample of our findings from the overall database:

      • 43,815 restaurants across America received between $13.6 billion and $32.7 billion.
      • 31,559 dentists and physician offices received between $9.9 billion to $24.3 billion. The world’s most famous cosmetic dentist – Dr. Bill (William) Dorfman – affectionately known as “America’s dentist” and featured dentist on ABC’s Extreme Makeover, and author of best-selling books – received up to $350,000.
      • 14,306 law offices received between $5.3 and $12.8 billion including the prominent firm of Boies, Schiller and Flexner in Washington, D.C. who received $5 million to $10 million.
      • 12,694 new car dealerships received between $7 billion and $16.7 billion including the Land Rover and Ferrari dealerships in Hinsdale, Illinois – each received between $350,000 to $1 million.
      • 10,684 religious organizations received between $3 billion and $7.5 billion. Located in Notre Dame, Indiana, the Sisters of the Holy Cross received up to $5 million; Holy Cross College received up to $1 million; and the Corporation of St. Mary’s College Notre Dame received up to $10 million. (Colleges already received $12 billion in bailout money through the CARES Act.)

      The large ranges (above) are the result of a transparency gap in the data.

      The Trump administration did not release the known loan amounts. Instead, the amounts were disclosed within bands: $150,000 to $350,000; $350,000 to $1 million; $1 million to $2 million; $2 million to $5 million; and $5 million to $10 million.

      Not surprisingly, many firms and non-profit organizations who signed up for a PPP loan will argue that the subsidies helped keep people employed when federal, state, and local government literally closed down the economy. And, in fact, these businesses employed 31.5 million people.

      However, critics contend that many businesses legally gamed the system.

      For example, Citizens Against Government Waste (CAGW) – a conservative Washington, D.C. oversight group founded to help President Reagan cut pork – publishes the annual “Congressional Pig Book.” Yet, they took up to $350,000 despite listing $4.2 million in assets on their recent IRS 990 (FY2018).

      CAGW responded to our request for comment saying, “… COVID-19 had a significant impact on our funding sources and threatened our ability to provide continued employment to our staff.”

      Media Matters For America – a Soros-funded progressive group – had $5.3 million in assets on their latest available IRS 990 (FY2018) and received up to $2 million in PPP lending.

      “R” Street Institute, a self-described conservative and libertarian free market group based in Washington, D.C. and dedicated to limiting government, took between $1 million and $2 million.

      In San Francisco, Apple co-founder Steve Wozniak co-founded the Electronic Frontier Foundation and they received between $1 million and $2 million even though they have assets of $40.3 million on their latest IRS 990.

      Using the interactive map, citizens will find countless examples of businesses, churches, and non-profit organizations right in their own neighborhoods that received massive PPP subsidies.

      As you search the federal PPP loan portfolio, keep in mind that taxpayers will pay for most of these “loans.” The loans are forgivable – treated as a grant – as long as the businesses retain their employees and don’t cut their paychecks.

      What will you find in your own backyard? Whatever it is, let Washington know.

      Note: Our watchdog organization at OpenTheBooks.com does not take government funding under any circumstances. Furthermore, we reached out to every entity mentioned and will update the piece if they respond.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 7th July 2020

    • Russia & Greece Slam Turkey For Plans To Turn Hagia Sophia Church Into A Mosque 
      Russia & Greece Slam Turkey For Plans To Turn Hagia Sophia Church Into A Mosque 

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 02:45

      Greece and Turkey are once again at odds over the fate of one of Christendom’s largest and oldest churches, built under Byzantine Emperor Justinian in the 6th century, and surviving changing empires throughout history.

      The Church of Hagia Sophia in Istanbul was – prior to the Turkish takeover of Byzantium in 1453 – Constantinople’s most famous church and center of the Orthodox Christian world. Under the modern Turkish state it’s gone from mosque to museum to ‘protected’ UNESCO world heritage site, despite still being considered by Greece and Greek visitors, as well as Russian pilgrims, a church.

      But now Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdogan and lawmakers are eyeing changing its status back to a mosque, which has outraged Athens. Russia has also chimed in, with both the Kremlin and Russian Orthodox Patriarch Kirill condemning any potential move to turn Hagia Sophia into a mosque. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Hagia Sophia file image, via Greek City Times

      “We by all means hope that Hagia Sophia’s status as a world heritage site will be taken into consideration,” a Kremlin spokesman said Monday.

      “Of course, this is a world masterpiece beloved by tourists coming to Turkey from all over the world and especially by tourists from Russia who not only recognize Hagia Sophia’s tourist value but also it’s sacred spiritual value,” he added.

      Turkey’s top court is said to still be debating the move. There are still multiple tens of thousands of indigenous Christians in Istanbul and in parts of Anatolia, mostly Greek, Syriac, and and some few remnant Armenian Christians. These ancient communities say Erdogan has newly unleashed a war on Turkey’s Christians

      The Russian Orthodox Church slammed the potential Turkish move as “unacceptable” and a “violation of religious freedom”. The statement said: “We can’t go back to the Middle Ages now” — referencing centuries where Ottoman policy severely suppressed Christians throughout Asia Minor. 

      The controversy has unleashed a storm on social media, which has included those against turning Hagia Sophia into a mosque envisioning it as a church once again:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Erdogan however, has interpreted it as a matter of “asserting Turkey’s sovereignty” over the site. Turkey argues that it can legally do what it wants with monuments and historic places within its sovereign territory.

      Mike Pompeo has even weighed in on the side of the Greek government, urging that it be kept as a museum. 

      “We urge the government of Turkey to continue to maintain the Hagia Sophia as a museum, as an exemplar of its commitment to respect Turkey’s diverse faith traditions and history, and to ensure it remains accessible to all,” the US Secretary of State said within the last weeks.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Echoing Greek politicians, the leader of the Orthodox Church of Greece, Archbishop Ieronymos II, issued a provocative statement saying of the Turks, “they won’t dare!”

      Greek television quoted the top clergyman as saying: “They (the Turks) play whatever games are in hand. This is one more game. I believe they won’t dare.”

      Critics of Erdogan and his AKP have long said he and the party have Islamist and neo-Ottoman aspirations. One prominent lawyer and human rights activist with UN Watch commented that:

      Turkey now occupies more Arab territories — Syria, Iraq, Libya — than any other country in the world. Yet when the U.N.’s human rights council next week will hold its regular debate on “Occupied Arab Territories,” Turkey’s name won’t be mentioned even once. Isn’t that odd?

      Turkey has also lately caused tensions within the NATO alliance, especially over Libya policy and repeat violations of a UN arms embargo.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Hagia Sophia in Istanbul, or ancient Constantinople, public domain image.

      Turning Hagia Sophia into a mosque after almost a century as a museum would be but one more symbolic provocation, albeit a serious one further worsening Greece-Turkey relations, and risking Moscow’s wrath as well.

      Meanwhile, Ecumenical Patriarch Bartholomew of Constantinople – who represents the Orthodox Church and its some 300 million adherents worldwide, is still in residence in Istanbul. He and his predecessors have been barred from using Hagia Sophia as a place of prayer since the 15th century, though over the years there’s been a few provocative instances where Greek clergy were said to have stealthily entered the now museum to “illegally” conduct Christian worship.

      * * *

    • Slavery Rampant In Africa, Middle East; The West Wrongly Accuses Itself
      Slavery Rampant In Africa, Middle East; The West Wrongly Accuses Itself

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 02:00

      Authored by Giulio Meotti via The Gatestone Institute,

      The United States abolished slavery 150 years ago, and has affirmative action for minorities. It is the country that elected a Black president, Barack Obama — twice! Yet, a new movement is toppling one historic monument after another one, as if the US is still enslaving African-Americans. Activists in Washington DC even targeted an Emancipation Memorial, depicting President Abraham Lincoln, who paid with his life for freeing slaves.

      Today slavery still exists in many parts of Africa and Middle East, but the self-flagellating Western public is obsessively focused only on the Western past of African slavery rather than on real, ongoing slavery, which is alive and well — and ignored. For today’s slaves, there are no demonstrations in the streets, no international political pressure, and virtually no articles in the media.

      “We must not forget that Arab-Muslims have been champions in this field,” Kamel Bencheikh, a Muslim poet, wrote in Le Matin d’Algerie.

      “Emirs and sultans bought entire convoys of young black ephebes to make into eunuchs to guard their harems. And this continued with Ottoman emperors…. Even today, Mauritania and Saudi Arabia are still housing their own Ku Klux Klan. Slavery is still the order of the day in Nouakchott [Mauritania]. As for Riad, all you have to do is find out about young Asian girls that the potentates hire as maidservants”.

      An investigation by BBC Arabic found that domestic workers in Saudi Arabia are even being sold online in a slave market that is booming.

      According to Bencheikh, George Floyd’s death was an opportunity for many in Europe to turn a respectable fight into an unimaginable depravity.

      “So, on the Place de la République in Paris or the Avenue Louise in Brussels, there are vengeful thugs, fed with hatred, taking advantage of the allotments that these two countries offer them, and attacking the past of those who enabled them to free themselves from their dictatorships…

      “In France and Belgium, we do not execute apostates, crucify heterodox people, throw stones at unfaithful women, spit at heretics…

      “… this anti-racism is biting its tail to turn into racism. You only have to see the angry crowd, the drool on their lips, to realize that we are dealing with people who have come to insult the white man guilty of having had, more than a hundred years ago, inappropriate gestures or shameful thoughts, and to insist, like the wolf in La Fontaine who said to the lamb: ‘If not you, then your brother’… Totalitarianism is among us again”.

      He calls it a “Stalinism of communitarianism (sectarian politics) that makes itself into an indigenous victimization”. People who fled from Bouteflika and Gaddafi, the oppressors and tyrants of Kinshasa and Niamey, “come and spit incomprehensible hatred in Paris or Brussels”.

      Bencheikh’s article shows just one brave group of dissidents in the Islamic world who are defending the West better than the Westerners are doing. These dissidents love freedom of expression and conscience; they know the difference between democracy and dictatorship; they enjoy religious tolerance, pluralism in the public sphere, and they outspokenly criticize the practice of Islam from which they fled. They also know that arousing historic and racial resentment is a dangerous game. For political Islam, their voices are revealing and devastating. For Western multiculturalism, they are “heretical” and annoying. Le Figaro pointed to this paradox: “Seen by their communities as ‘traitors’, they are accused by the elites in the West of ‘stigmatizing'”.

      In The Spectator, Nick Cohen, explained:

      “In the liberal orientalist world view the only ‘authentic’ Muslim is a barbarian. A battery of insults fires on any Muslim who says otherwise. They are ‘neo-conservatives,’ ‘native informants,’ and ‘Zionists’: they are as extreme as jihadists they oppose, or, let’s face it, worse…”.

      Like Bencheikh, Algerian author Mohammed Sifaoui reminds all of us that “Mauritania, in North Africa, is the most slavery-supporting country in the world today. Qatar in the Middle East is as well, just as much, [as is] Saudi Arabia, under the banner of the Guardians of the Holy Places of Islam”.

      The author Ayaan Hirsi Ali, who fled her homeland of Somalia and now live in the US, writes:

      What the media do not tell you is that America is the best place on the planet to be black, female, gay, trans or what have you. We have our problems and we need to address those. But our society and our systems are far from racist“.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Black, female and gay, the apex of “intersectionality.” According to Andrew Sullivan:

      “‘Intersectionality’ is the latest academic craze sweeping the American academy. On the surface, it’s a recent neo-Marxist theory that argues that social oppression does not simply apply to single categories of identity — such as race, gender, sexual orientation, class, etc. — but to all of them in an interlocking system of hierarchy and power. “

      For the intersectional activists, the US is the world’s biggest oppressor. Not Saudi Arabia or Iran. Hirsi Ali, who fled Somalia and experienced female genital mutilation, knows about oppression better than anti-statues activists. According to Hirsi Ali, writing in The Wall Street Journal:

      “When I hear it said that the U.S. is defined above all by racism, when I see books such as Robin DiAngelo’s ‘White Fragility’ top the bestseller list, when I read of educators and journalists being fired for daring to question the orthodoxies of Black Lives Matter—then I feel obliged to speak up… America looks different if you grew up, as I did, in Africa and the Middle East”.

      Writing in Le Monde and Le Point, Algerian writer Kamel Daoud indicted this hypocrisy. “There is an instinct for death in the air of the total revolution”, Daoud notes.

      “According to some, the West is guilty by definition, we find ourselves not in a demand for change but, little by little, in [a demand for] destruction, the restoration of a barbarity of revenge”.

      Daoud calls these “anti-Western Soviet-style trials”.

      “It is forbidden to say that the West is also the place to which we flee when we want to escape the injustice of our country of origin, dictatorship, war, hunger, or simply boredom. It is fashionable to say that the West is guilty of everything”.

      In Le Point, Daoud states that “with the great announcement of antiracism, the Inquisition returns”.

      Daoud has been accused by twenty leftist academics, in an appeal in Le Monde, of “orientalist clichés” and “colonialist paternalism”. This new accusation of racism serves publicly to shame, mark and disqualify a politician or an intellectual who comments with too much frankness on the damage of multiculturalism.

      Zineb el Rhazoui, a Moroccan-born anti-Islamist French journalist facing death threats, recently said:

      “The only racism I suffer from comes from North Africans. For the Algerians, I am a Moroccan whore. For Moroccans, I am an Algerian whore. For both, a ‘whore of the Jews'”.

      Arabs threaten other Arabs for speaking the truth about real racism and Islamization. They are the invisible victims of racism in France. Rhazoui claimed that “France is one of the most tolerant and least racist country in the world” and that real threat is not racism, but communitarism [importance placed on groups rather than individuals], denounced as well by French President Emmanuel Macron.

      The Iranian writer Abnousse Shalmani, born in Tehran but now living in Paris, said to Le Figaro:

      The new anti-racism is racism disguised as humanism (…) What resonates in this discourse is the prison of victimization….It implies that every white person is bad –– as witnessed by the recent debunking of the statues of Victor Schoelcher, father of the abolition of slavery, in Martinique — and that every black person is a victim“.

      While the economist Thomas Piketty, in Le Monde, invited the West to make amends for its colonial past, the Franco-Senegalese author, Fatou Diome, called for the abandonment of a discourse on decolonization:

      “It is an emergency for those who do not yet know that they are free. I do not consider myself colonized. The catchphrase on colonization and slavery has become a business”.

      The “ideology” is simple: colonialism is supposedly still at work, people from formerly colonized countries continue to be oppressed, in particular Muslims who are said to be targets of a “racist” and “Islamophobic” hate. In this view, “White Western males” are always the oppressors, and the minorities are always victims.

      A prominent anti-racism campaigner, Rokhaya Diallo, has said that France is “racist” in an opposition between “the dominator” and “the dominated”. It is a view that sees racism everywhere, especially where it does not exist. It has also produced many of the disasters of multiculturalism throughout Europe by making it impossible to criticize the consequences of mass immigration and Islamist separatism. The French author Pascal Bruckner has called this stance “imaginary racism“. It is a penitential creation that leads the public in the West — even though presumably no one in the West either was a slave or had a slave — to believe that anti-Western hatred is deserved.

      The border between this Marxist view, in which someone always has to be a victim, has become porous with Islamism. In the movement named after Adama Traoré, the “French George Floyd“, you will find an alliance of organizations such as SOS Racisme and Muslim Salafists. Human rights organizations also rally with the “Union of Islamic Organization of France”, considered fundamentalist.

      Manuel Valls, the former French prime minister, in an interview with Valuers Actuelles magazine said, “Human rights associations have been lost and have opened the doors to Tariq Ramadan”. This instead of taking the side of the many great Muslim reformers. Ayaan Hirsi Ali writes:

      “Reformers such as Asra Nomani, Irshad Manji, Tawfiq Hamid, Maajid Nawaz, Zuhdi Jasser, Saleem Ahmed, Yunis Qandil, Seyran Ates, Bassam Tibi and Abd al-Hamid al-Ansari must be supported and protected… These reformers should be as well known in the West as Solzhenitsyn, Sakharov and Havel were generations earlier.” Instead, so-called human rights associations, politicians and the media have chosen to back political Islam.

      By contrast, a group of 12 writers put their names to a statement in the French magazine Charlie Hebdo warning against Islamic “totalitarianism”.

      “After having overcome fascism, Nazism, and Stalinism, the world now faces a new global totalitarian threat: Islamism. We, writers, journalists, intellectuals, call for resistance to religious totalitarianism and for the promotion of freedom, equal opportunity and secular values for all”.

      Among the 12 signatories, eight came from the Islamic world.

      These anti-Islamist Muslim intellectuals were not born free; they fled dictatorships for democracies, where they still suffer death threats and abuses, but where they are far freer and prouder of the West than those Westerners who know only freedom but now practice a dreadful feeing of guilt — mostly for things they did not do.

      The West not only turns its back the new slave markets; the UN Human Rights Council actually welcomes states such as Sudan, where tens of thousands of women and children from mostly Christian villages were enslaved during Jihadi raids; Kenya and Nigeria, where the police last fall rescued hundreds of men and boys chained in an Islamic school; Pakistan, where Christians are condemned to servitude, and Mauritania, where two in every 100 people are still held as slaves. It is the same UN Human Rights Council that now, thanks to pressure by African countries, wants to investigate “systemic racism in the US”. US Secretary of State Mike Pompeo noted:

      “If the Council were honest, it would recognize the strengths of American democracy and urge authoritarian regimes around the world to model American democracy and to hold their nations to the same high standards of accountability and transparency that we Americans apply to ourselves”.

      It is high time for the United States to stop funding the United Nations. The United Nations is being used to perpetuate injustice, not stop it.

      Real slave traders and racists — those who believe Western societies and values should not exist at all — most likely look at the current Western self-flagellation and cheer their approval.

    • China Touts "Aircraft Carrier Killer" Missiles As US Supercarriers Operate In South China Sea
      China Touts “Aircraft Carrier Killer” Missiles As US Supercarriers Operate In South China Sea

      Tyler Durden

      Tue, 07/07/2020 – 01:00

      China has slammed what it calls the United States flexing its muscles in the South China Sea to try to provoke tensions and conflict among countries of the region. But the Pentagon has called the maneuvers by two supercarriers sent to the region days ago, namely the USS Ronald Reagan and USS Nimitz, an act of standing up “for the right of all nations to fly, sail and operate wherever international law allows” and further as a “symbol of resolve”.

      Each carrier has 90 or more aircraft and about 6,000 personnel, making it a significant display of force off China’s coast. Given this, the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) is said to be tracking their movements closely, with Chinese vessels said to be within eyesight of the US carriers. 

      The carriers have been conducting flight drills since exercises commenced on July 4. Nimitz commander Rear Admiral James Kirk told reporters in a telephone interview: “They have seen us and we have seen them” – in reference to a nearby Chinese flotilla.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Aircraft carrier USS Ronald Reagan is one of two currently operating in the South China Sea.

      Interestingly, the US Navy and Chinese state-run newspaper Global Times had an exchange this weekend after on Sunday GT issued a veiled threat hyping Beijing’s advanced missile arsenal. China has a wide selection of anti-aircraft carrier weapons like DF-21D and DF-26 “aircraft carrier killer” missiles, the state-run paper said. 

      It then said any aircraft carrier movement in the region “is at the pleasure of PLA”.

      “And yet, there they are,” the Navy Chief of Information Twitter account posted, saying the US ships “are not intimidated” because their exercises and navigation are “at our discretion”.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The carriers are holding some of the Navy’s largest exercises in recent years in the area, which is frequently beset upon by American destroyers sailing within 12 miles of certain islands developed by China that are the subject of competing international claims.

      The exercises also involve four other warships as well, along with round-the-clock fights and missions.

    • Why No One Should Believe COVID-19 Is Naturally Occurring
      Why No One Should Believe COVID-19 Is Naturally Occurring

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 23:40

      Authored by Lawrence Sellin via WIONews.com,

      After six months of exhaustive investigation, the global scientific community has been unable to identify the natural source of COVID-19, that is, the when, where and how it “jumped” from animals to humans.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Some now imply that we may never know the natural origin of COVID-19.

      In a news article recently published by the international science journal Nature, the progress, or lack thereof, identifying the natural source of COVID-19 was reviewed.

      According to the article, COVID-19 probably originated in bats, specifically horseshoe bats, which host two closely related coronaviruses, named RaTG13 and RmYN02, whose genomes are 96% and 93% identical to COVID-19, respectively.

      Both coronavirus samples were isolated from bats in Yunnan Province, RaTG13 in 2013 and RmYN02 in 2019, and were studied in the Wuhan Institute of Virology.

      Wuhan is where the outbreak of COVID-19 originated and about 1,000 miles from Yunnan.

      The Nature article does not mention that RaTG13 is actually a duplicate of another bat coronavirus, BtCoV/4991, about which there is nearly no published experimental data since it was isolated in 2013, despite clearly being a Potential Pandemic Pathogen.

      That is, except for the structure, analyzed only by Chinese scientists, practically nothing is known about RaTG13.

      The Nature article also does not mention that the receptor-binding domain of RmYN02 showed only a 61.3% sequence identity with COVID-19, meaning it is highly unlikely that RmYN02 could even bind to human cells.

      The Nature article suggests that pangolins (scaly anteaters), might be an intermediate host because some pangolin coronaviruses “share up to 92% of their genomes” with COVID-19, presumably bridging the gap between bats and humans.

      When asked about that possibility, Dr Ralph Baric, a coronavirus expert from the University of North Carolina, in a March 15, 2020 interview, stated unequivocally that pangolins were not the source of COVID-19:

      “Pangolins have over 3,000 nucleotide changes – no way they are the reservoir species [for COVID-19], absolutely no chance.”

      Nevertheless, the receptor-binding domain of COVID-19 is structurally closer to pangolins than bats indicating a recombinant event, in this case, likely artificial.

      In fact, Ralph Baric and Zheng-Li Shi, the “bat woman” from the Wuhan Institute of Virology, conducted just such an artificial receptor-binding domain insertion from a newly isolated bat coronavirus (SHC014) onto the “backbone” from SARS-CoV, the coronavirus responsible for the 2003 pandemic.

      In a December 9, 2019 interview, Dr Peter Daszak, President of the EcoHealth Alliance and a long-time collaborator with the Wuhan Institute of Virology, presumably referring to the Ralph Baric- Zheng-Li Shi experiments, stated “you can manipulate them in the lab pretty easily” inserting a spike protein “into a backbone of another virus.”

      Thus, an artificial recombinant event carried out in the laboratory would be a far better explanation of pangolin-like structures appearing on a bat coronavirus backbone than one occurring in nature, at least given the current state of knowledge.

      The most conspicuous sign of COVID-19 genetic manipulation is the presence of a furin polybasic cleavage site, a structure that is not present in any of the coronaviruses so far identified as possible direct ancestors.

      The authors of the RmYN02 article stretch credulity even further by claiming that RmYN02 has a precursor cleavage site.

      In reality, it is a weak attempt to offer a naturally-occurring explanation for the presence of the furin polybasic cleavage site in COVID-19.

      Unfortunately, the amino acid sequence PAA, the insertion cited by the authors, is chemically neutral, totally unlike COVID-19’s polybasic PRRAR sequence and PAA has no ability to cleave anything.

      Based on the actual evidence, it is unlikely that RmYN02 is a natural close relative of COVID-19.

      Although COVID-19 appears to have been “pre-adapted” for human infection, the artificial insertion of the furin polybasic cleavage site may explain a potentially significant point mutation in COVID-19 that may have increased its infectivity.

      According to the article “The D614G mutation in the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein reduces S1 shedding and increases infectivity,”, over the course of the human pandemic, one amino acid position has changed from aspartic acid to glycine, increasing the stability of the spike protein and, thereby, making COVID-19 more infectious.

      As suggested by the authors, that mutation may have been what is known as a “positive selection” to compensate for the structural instability created after the artificial insertion of the furin polybasic cleavage site.

      The burden of proof is now on China to demonstrate that COVID-19 is naturally-occurring because most of the available evidence indicates otherwise.

    • Why Zuck Doesn't Give A F**k About The Virtue-Signaling Ad Boycott
      Why Zuck Doesn’t Give A F**k About The Virtue-Signaling Ad Boycott

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 23:20

      More companies are cancelling their Facebook advertising campaigns amid the #StopHateForProfit boycott, a movement aiming to hold social media and tech companies like Facebook accountable for hate speech and online harassment on their platforms.

      However, as Statista’s Willem Roper notes, while large companies like Target, Microsoft, Starbucks and others are removing ads from Facebook, revenue data for the social media giant shows just how little it affects the company’s overall advertising profits.

      Infographic: Boycotts Only a Fraction of Total Facebook Revenue | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      According to the Wall Street Journal, the top eight boycotting companies by spending made up just $57 million of Facebook’s advertising revenue in May. Microsoft, the largest, spent roughly $10.4 million, and Starbucks was right behind with around $8.1 million. Those top eight were just over 10 percent of what the top 100 U.S. advertisers spent on Facebook for the month. Compare those numbers to $34 billion – what Facebook made from just U.S. and Canada companies in 2019. Globally, Facebook made nearly $70 billion in 2019 from advertising revenue alone.

      While large companies boycotting Facebook attract news headlines, these numbers show that they have very little impact on the company’s overall advertising revenue.

      The Wall Street Journal also showed how 76 percent of Facebook’s total $69 billion in global advertising revenue is from small to medium-sized companies, with just 24 percent from larger corporations and companies.

    • Should Professional Athletes Be More Worried About COVID-19 Or Lightning?
      Should Professional Athletes Be More Worried About COVID-19 Or Lightning?

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 23:00

      Authored by Adam Dick via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

      Znamya Truda, a Russian professional soccer team, has announced that Ivan Zaborovsky, a goalkeeper for the team, went to intensive care after being struck by lightning during training.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      People being seriously harmed or killed by lightning strikes is rare. In America, the United States government’s National Weather Service relays that, in the ten years of 2009 through 2018, there were an average of 27 deaths and 243 estimated injuries each year from lightning countrywide. While the risk of an individual being struck by lightning is real, it is also quite small. The National Weather Service lays out the likelihood as follows: a one in 1,222,000 chance of being struck by lightning in a given year and a one in 15,300 chance of being struck in one’s lifetime.

      A professional athlete like Zaborovsky being injured by lightning is a very unusual occurrence. In contrast, we hear regularly of professional athletes from just about every sport testing positive for coronavirus. In the National Basketball Association (NBA), for example, 25 players, about seven percent of NBA players, have tested positive for coronavirus in testing of players in the last couple weeks. Plenty of athletes in other professional sports leagues have also tested positive. Other professional sports players surely have had coronavirus but were never tested because they had no to minor health issues at the time.

      Where are the many intensive care hospitalizations and deaths among these athletes who have had coronavirus? We are not hearing about that.

      This makes sense given that coronavirus tends not to be a major threat to people the more healthy and young they are.

      [ZH: In case you need a little more context on the COVID fatality rates, Holger Zschaepitz tweeted the following stunning chart: ]

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      For many top athletes in their 20s and 30s it may make more sense to be worried about being struck by lightning than about having coronavirus. And, for competitors in outdoor sports, the threat from lightning can be well above that experienced by the average person. Many professional athletes, weighing the risks, may find it is a better decision to stay inside on occasion because of a thunderstorm than to avoid practicing and competing in their sports for an extended period because of worry about coronavirus.

      It could be a drag for professional sports players to stay indoors now and then for a few minutes to a few hours to ensure they are not struck by lightning. Many of them may find doing so to be excessively cautious, especially if it prevents them from doing something they see as particularly important or desirable. In comparison, players may see eliminating their ability to compete for a significant chunk of their prime athletic years — to refrain from using and developing the skills they have dedicated their lives to mastering — as a tragedy, especially when that restriction is imposed due to a disease that is nearly certain not to threaten them with major negative health consequences.

    • Watch Putin's Limo Brand, Aurus, Crash Test Luxury Car At High-Rate Of Speed 
      Watch Putin’s Limo Brand, Aurus, Crash Test Luxury Car At High-Rate Of Speed 

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 22:40

      Russian carmaker Aurus, best known for producing President Vladimir Putin’s new bulletproof limo, recently released a video showing one of its sedans slamming into a barrier at a high rate of speed with crash dummies inside.

      The video was first released via Russian broadcaster Zvezda, and then reported by Sputnik, which shows two mannequins, one in the driver’s seat and another in the front passenger seat of the sedan, crashing into a barrier at 64kph (40mph). 

      The luxury sedan, listed for a quarter-million dollars, or about 18 million rubles, had the front end completely crushed from the impact. However, both mannequins remained in the car, protected from a full coverage airbag system. 

      Russia has dumped $190.6 million, or about 12 billion rubles, into the Aurus car program (includes a limousine, a sedan, a minivan, and an SUV). The automaker is set to begin series production of Putin’s bulletproof limo this year, which will be marketed to heads of states around the world. 

      Aurus Senat 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Aurus Senat 

      Aurus Limo

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Aurus Arsenal

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Aurus Arsenal

      Last year, Aurus sent the limo to Siberia for rugged testing, operated in -50°C (-58°F) conditions. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Aurus in Siberia 

      Russia is trying to diversify its oil economy – now attempting to compete with high-end luxury automotive brands like Rolls Royce and Bentley.  

    • Behind China's Takeover Of Hong Kong: The Pearl River Delta Megacity
      Behind China’s Takeover Of Hong Kong: The Pearl River Delta Megacity

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 22:20

      By Mustafa Zaidi, Research Director at Clarmond Wealth

      As Hong Kong was being handed over in early July 1997, my old colleague and I began a series of short visits throughout the Pearl River Delta, from Macau to Shenzen to Canton; all rather sleepy spots relative to the towering buzz of Hong Kong. In Macau there was an unexpected statue of Jorge Alvares, the Portuguese explorer, who arrived here in 1513; he was soon followed a few years later by his colleague Rafael Perestrello, who happened to be a cousin of Christopher Columbus…so strange to think a single family produced explorers that sailed west to America and east to China.

      At the end of our visit we concluded that the area had potential but given the lack of transport, communication and legal integration, it would be a very lengthy commitment and we reported back accordingly. It was too long term for the principals.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Today this long integration is on the verge of being complete and it will make the Pearl River Delta, now renamed as the “Greater Bay Area” (GBA), a rival to the great urban areas such as New York, San Francisco, and Tokyo.

      To give a sense of the GBA its population is 71m and comprises ten key cities. The ‘Big Three’ are Hong Kong with GDP of$340bn, Shenzhen ($330bn) and Guangzhou ($320bn). The GDP of the whole GBA is $1.5tr. In comparison New York (pop. 20m) has a GDP of $1.6tr, San Francisco (pop. 7m) $800bn, and Tokyo (pop. 40m) $1.9tr.

      The GBA is already one of the most valuable urban clusters on the globe and will certainly overtake its cousins. Over the last decade key road, rail, and bridge projects have been completed. Projects include the HK-Zuhai-Macau bridge, the Shenzhen-Zhongshan bridge, and high speed rail from Hong Kong to Guangzhou (the XRL). With completion of the transport and communication infrastructure now in sight, the final step is to bring the two Special Administration Regions (HK/Macau) into a seamless zone, where each city has specialisations: finance for HK, high tech manufacturing for Shenzhen, which is where Huawei is based along with its outlandish European-style campus called Oxhorn, Macau for entertainment, and Guangzhou for shipping; the other smaller cities will grow and find their own “flavor”.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Source: Visual Capitalist

      The current step by step reduction of HK autonomy needs to be seen through the lens of the GBA, given that HK becomes a smaller component of the regional economy and a very small one of the national economy.

      Hong Kong, as we wrote a year ago, is following a similar trajectory to Trieste, once the key city of commerce for the Austro-Hungarian Empire that became just another Italian city. The global commotion about HK misses how the current rulers see the status of HK in the larger GBA scheme, which for the Chinese Communist Party is going to be the engine of their growth – they are forecasting doubling over the next decade.

    • US Mint Ups Coin Production To Circumvent Shortage
      US Mint Ups Coin Production To Circumvent Shortage

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 22:00

      According to the New York Times, the U.S. Mint is upping its coin production after shortages of coins have been reported in the U.S. as a result of the coronavirus pandemic.

      On June 15, the Federal Reserve had first implemented quotas for distribution locations to further protect its coin inventories, which were running low. As a result, banks and other distributors of coins received less than what they ordered or even less than their usual allotments, according to the Times. Especially businesses are routinely turning to banks in order to receive coins and other tender to fill up their registers.

      Chair of the Fed, Jerome Powell, said that closures of parts of the economy due to COVID-19 were responsible for disrupting the normal flow of coins through the system.

      Statista’s Katharina Buchholz notes that, according to numbers by the U.S. Mint, coin production for circulation has actually decreased during the last couple of years and because of COVID-19 restrictions for Mint workers, has had some particularly slow months in the first half of 2020.

      In the second half of 2020, the Mint expects production increases to 1.2 billion coins in June and 1.35 billion coins per month for the rest of the year– which would add up to a projected total of 14.2 billion coins produced in 2020.

      Infographic: U.S. Mint Ups Coin Production to Circumvent Shortage | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      Members of the public who want to deposit coins into their banks to aid circulation can do so.

      Officials also said that the public can also aid businesses and those who cannot operate without coins by paying electronically whenever possible.

      Wouldn’t they love that?

    • Is This The Real Reason For China's Massive Market Meltup?
      Is This The Real Reason For China’s Massive Market Meltup?

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 21:43

      Now that Hong Kong is facing a creeping monetary boycott by the US, and more importantly, by the US financial system as a result of its de facto annexation by China, a pesky question has emerged: how will China procure those much needed dollars which are oh so critical to keep the Chinese financial system, all $40 trillion of it, functioning smoothly. 

      While there has been surprisingly little discussion of this critical topic in the financial media, which looking at soaring stocks in China and the US is left with the false impression that all is well, one person who has continued to hammer this topic home has been Rabobank’s Michael Every, who this morning once again raised the alert level over China’s USD access:

      Note this South China Morning Post article titled “Time for China to decouple the yuan from US Dollar, former diplomat urges”. Zhou Li, a former deputy director of the CCP’s International Liaison Department is “the latest in a series of voices in China” to warn the USD Weapon is real and “has us by the throat”, will pose an “increasingly severe threat” to Chinese development –USD oil sanctions seen as a key area of vulnerability– and so preparations for gradual decoupling and CNY internationalisation should begin “now”. Li adds China should “give up the illusion” of friendship and instead prepare for full-fledged conflict with the US.

      His specific proposal is to increase cross-border payments and clearing, local FX settlement, and maximize CNY usage in industrial supply chains. The problems in internationalizing CNY are manifold, however, which is why the USD weapon exists. The capital account would need to be opened, precipitating a collapse in CNY as money floods out.

      So with the natural gateway for more inbound dollars suddenly clogged up, China has to find other, just as effective ways to attract US dollars into its economy: by drawing foreign investors into its stock market. Here is Every again:

      To try to counter that, it’s China bubble time again – not just in property, but in stocks: the Shanghai exchange was up 4% at time of writing today, and 7% last week, as Chinese press openly talk up a new bull market –despite a flat economy– going so far as to imply this is part of the struggle between the “world’s powers”, according to Bloomberg: with different percentages, the same dynamic is of course true in the US. Yet for both this is lethal can-kicking at best that only creates far larger problems.

      There is just one problem: if Beijing relies on existing inertia it will fail miserably, because as the following Chart of the week from Goldman shows, China-dedicated equity funds saw an 11th consecutive week of net outflows.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And as a result of the substantial outflows, Goldman believes that “underweight positioning may have contributed to the outsized gains in Chinese shares and the Yuan at the start of this week.”

      Maybe, but what is far more likely is that Beijing turned on turbo boost in the infamous National Team, aka China’s Plunge Protection Team, which led to a stunning rally in Chinese equities since March, with the CSI300 surging 32% since its Q1 troughs, and 14% in the past 5 trading days, while the Shanghai Composite soared almost 6% on Monday, its biggest one day gain since the bubble of 2015.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      So why the massive intervention and ramp of stocks by Beijing officials?

      The answer is simple: taking a page of the Robinhood playbook, China is desperate to halt and reverse the massive equity outflows as it urgently needs the flow of US Dollars to reverse into Chinese markets, instead of away from. To do that, it needs to create an initial upward momentum in prices which halts the selling/outflows and prompts a reappraisal of Chinese asset values. Ideally, it will also capture the euphoria of US daytraders who will buy Chinese, not US stocks.

      Whether China succeeds is unclear, however it simply has no option and must follow through this plan until the bitter end, even if it means blowing an even bigger stock bubble than in 2015.

      And as we reported this morning, Beijing is clearly on board: realizing that the economy is far weaker than a SHCOMP print of 3,400 will support, Beijing still sent a message to the Chinese population when a front-page editorial in the state-owned China’s Securities Journal said that fostering a “healthy” bull market after the pandemic is now more important to the economy than ever.

      Why? Because without the “bull market” the equity outflows would continue, and soon China will run out of dollars, an outcome which would have far more catastrophic financial, monetary and geopolitical consequences for both China and the the entire world than a 2nd (and 3rd and 4th) Covid wave, coupled with a Biden win and a permanently jammed Fed money printer.

      And so far it’s working: the Shangai Composite is up 2% in early trading…

    • Quibi Squandered $2BN On Its Vision For "TV In Your Pocket": Here's How It All Went Horribly Wrong
      Quibi Squandered $2BN On Its Vision For “TV In Your Pocket”: Here’s How It All Went Horribly Wrong

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 21:20

      Like many of our readers, we first learned about Quibi last spring, when Meg Whitman, the former CEO of HP Enterprise, started doing the rounds on CNBC, sitting first for a lengthy interview with David Faber, then for a longer interview alongside Jeffrey Katzenberg, the former Walt Disney Studios chairman and Dreamworks co-founder who was now the husband in this odd couple.

      Together, they delivered their jargon-laden pitch: a “TV in your pocket” focusing on “white space” “short-form” “bites” bringing together “the best of Hollywood and the best of Silicon Valley.” Whitman’s description of Quibi – pronounced “Quibby” – was equal parts glib and startlingly short-sighted. Did these two billionaire boomers really think they knew the secret cheat code to crack the mobile-streaming market, and earn a seat at an increasingly crowded table? Just because Americans are watching ten times as much streaming video on their smartphones as they were in 2012? We just weren’t buying it.

      At times, Whitman sounded so out of touch, we couldn’t help but chuckle. Just minutes into her first solo interview, she revealed that the name “Quibi” is a portmanteau of “Quick Bites” – “as you probably guessed”. It was then that we knew this would be a supremely entertaining corporate trainwreck. And like the blind leading the blind, Whitman and Katzenberg, both of whom staked a tremendous amount of capital on the venture, were taking their buddies along for the ride.

      When the entire world shut down in March because of the coronavirus, just as Quibi was coming to market, we marveled at the timing: maybe Quibi wouldn’t crash and burn quite as quickly as we expected. But then the first leaked subscriber numbers hit. And they were really, really bad.

      Despite an unprecedented marketing blitz featuring a procession of beloved celebrities, from Chance the Rapper, to Chrissy Teigen and beyond, the app had managed to rack up just 1.3 million subscribers, not even 1% of Netflix’s total subscriber base.

      Apparently, Quibi had been so hyper-focused on the ‘TV in your pocket’ concept, that they built an app that was designed exclusively for mobile viewing. When they first tried to download Quibi, millions found that it simply didn’t have the functionality to play on a TV or laptop. And while watching a video on your phone might be ideal on the subway, it makes binge-watching content almost impossible.

      And that, we realized, was Quibi’s biggest blunder: that Whitman and Katzenberg were somehow so focused on the “mobile” concept that they completely forgot about how millennials’ favorite activity is to snuggle up with a tub of Ben and Jerries and watch 10 episodes of “Friends” over the course of a Saturday afternoon. And at $4.99 for the ad-supported version, Quibi was basically just a crappier, more expensive version of YouTube, with an extremely limited library of (albeit premium) content that nobody really even wanted to watch.

      Now, executives and employees are abandoning ship, and Whitman and Katzenberg are trying to navigate a turn-around starting with making the product more “binge-able”. But on Monday morning, New York Magazine delivered something we had long been waiting for: a long-form inside look at how “Quibi” came to be.

      And boy did NY Mag deliver.

      In order to establish immediate legitimacy in Hollywood in accordance with the stature of its founders, Quibi started paying the talent gobs of money – “$100,000 a minute”, one insider quipped. Producers were being paid production costs plus 20% to take the risk on an unproven platform. Katzenberg reckoned that if he poured a billion dollars into the content, the viewers would come –  the old “Field of Dreams” approach.

      One comedian who went in for a pitch described Quibi’s lavish officers and the ‘cockiness’ of the team: everybody was acting like they had a guaranteed hit in hand.

      “I can honestly say I’ve never been in such a cocky pitch environment,” Gairdner recalls. “I would describe the atmosphere as almost Wolf of Wall Street, not in terms of actual debauchery, but it’s an incredibly nice office that just goes and goes. They had two lobbies; you went in and checked in at a nice, big lobby, then you were moved to another lobby. There’s massive jars of expensive, nice-seeming candy everywhere. It’s sleek and modern, and you see hundreds of people passing by. And there’s this energy of people who really believe they’ve got the next big thing.”

      Quibi was to launch in the spring of 2020 with 50 original shows, and another 125 were to be rolled out by the end of the first year. Recognizing the risk of making something for an unproven platform, Katzenberg typically offered to pay producers’ costs plus 20 percent. “People on Quibi have $100,000 a minute to make content,” Katzenberg tells me. “That doesn’t exist on other platforms.” Producers who went into meetings with him skeptical walked out thinking he might be onto something. “He pitched me at Nate ’n Al’s, and my eyes lit up,” recalls Jason Blum, whose horror-focused Blumhouse Productions was behind Paranormal Activity, The Purge, and Get Out. Blum signed on to make Wolves and Villagers and, later, two other series.

      And for a brief moment after the app launched on April 6, it looked like Quibi might have landed. It peaked at No. 3 most popular in the Apple app store before beginning a descent that has landed it at around No. 300 most popular. There are ad-supported version of bejeweled with more downloads than Quibi.

      Now, the company appears to have set a land speed record for going from launch to the butt of late-night jokes.

      That Quibi managed to spend ungodly amounts of money for high-gloss Hollywood content with A-list talent only to end up without a discernible hit has inspired a substantial amount of Schadenfreude. Jimmy Kimmel, hosting a virtual version of Disney-ABC’s annual upfront, said, “Here I am, standing here like a fucking fool with nobody watching. I feel like every show on Quibi right now.” Gairdner, who walked out of Quibi without a deal (“It was just clear that if we didn’t have a celebrity attached, they weren’t interested”), unveiled a satirical website called Swippi, in which longer videos are arbitrarily broken up into short chunks, sometimes in the middle of a scene. “We realized people want to take Swift Sips of content,” he says dryly.

      Another detail: the ground-breaking “technology” that Whitman spoke of is the app’s “Turnstyle” technology, which allows users seemlessly flip their phone from vertical to horizontal and back without compromising the viewing experience. It’s arguably better than Netflix’s landscape technology.

      During her initial round of interviews on CNBC, Whitman alluded to an affinity for the novelist Dan Brown.

      Before Quibi even had a name, Katzenberg was singing the gospel of chapterized stories for your cell phone. “I believe there is going to be an enterprise ten years from now that will be as big as the television business is today,” he told a conference crowd in early 2017. He viewed the success of Dan Brown’s The Da Vinci Code, with its 105 chapters, as validation of the thesis that consumers want entertainment in small chunks. He believed that, despite most shortform video sites’ reliance on user-generated content, every medium has room for a premium offering. And he considered the TV streamers to be playing a different game altogether than what he was envisioning.

      If anyone in Hollywood could conjure something new purely through force of will, it was Katzenberg, who, though he’s approaching 70, remains a not-so-young man in a hurry. An NYU dropout, he studied gambling for a time in order to run a club in the city, and he learned how to count cards well enough that he was banned from several Las Vegas casinos. He eventually landed a job as Barry Diller’s assistant at Paramount, where the patronizing nickname bestowed on him by Diller and Michael Eisner was “Golden Retriever.”

      After recruiting Whitman, Katzenberg set about winning over “investors” to back his vision with an interesting scheme: for every dollar invested in Quibi by a major studio, Quibi would commit to spending on dollars.

      Because NewTV’s point was to charge for content, it had to start out by raising an enormous amount of money in order to afford content worth charging for. In August 2018, just five months after Whitman’s arrival, Katzenberg announced that NewTV had raised $1 billion. (It would eventually amass a total of $1.75 billion.) Its biggest investors included Madrone Capital, an investment vehicle for the Walmart Waltons, and Alibaba, the Amazon of China. But the most important investors were those Katzenberg had brought aboard: every major studio, from Disney to Viacom to Comcast-Universal to 21st Century Fox to Sony. “People doubted that we’d ever be able to pull all the entertainment companies into one boat at one time to support the new venture,” he says. “In the 100-year history of Hollywood, that never happened.”

      Without their support, NewTV would be locked out from all the best talent, who tend to have exclusive deals with studios, and from intellectual property like Reno 911! and Punk’d (another show Quibi rebooted), both of which are owned by ViacomCBS. Katzenberg was able to make hay of the studios’ involvement, too, as a show of industry support for his start-up, even though the investments were relatively small — “in the $20 million range,” a studio executive says.

      From the studios’ perspective, the investment provided schmuck insurance in the event that NewTV took off, and perhaps most important, according to two studio veterans, the deals came with assurances that NewTV would spend an equal amount on services and products provided by the investor. This is known as “round-tripping.” If Disney invested $20 million, NewTV would commit to spending $20 million on content and production supplied by Disney. There was really nothing for the studios to lose. (“Many of them asked that Quibi reciprocate their level of investment,” a Quibi executive says. “Quibi did not agree to that.”)

      Unsurprisingly, the name “Quibi” was an invention of Whitman and Katzenberg after they discovered that their first choice, “NewTV”, was taken.

      The investments helped secure a slate of A-list directors and producers for the launch of the app, which was no longer called NewTV. (It turned out — whoops — that there was already a company named NewTV.) The new name was Quibi. Katzenberg had originally wanted to call it Omakase, after the sushi tasting menus he enjoyed at least once a week at Nobu Malibu. “That would have really won over Wisconsin,” a former insider notes. Ultimately, Quibi won the day. “They never asked staff to weigh in on it,” this person says. “People on staff thought it was cringey and would ask, ‘Is it too late to change it?’ Meg loved it.” Though arguably no sillier-sounding than Hulu, Quibi would be roundly mocked by people who thought it sounded like a “quinoa-based doggy snack” or “the cry of an attacking Ewok.”

      Six months before launch, Whitman and Katzenberg had seen their relationships wither to the point where they were no longer on speaking terms. The two would frequently get into fights over Katzenberg dipping into areas that weren’t “his purview”.

      When Quibi was preparing to move offices, “they had a huge fight when [the design consultant] took Jeffrey to see the new office without Meg knowing, because the new office was Meg’s purview,” says a person with firsthand knowledge of the company’s inner workings. (A Quibi executive denies that this happened.) Once Quibi had moved into the 49,000-square-foot space, “they carved up North and South Korea, and they drew a DMZ line each doesn’t cross.” Whitman sits on the third floor, Katzenberg on the fourth. “Katzenberg was in the content corner. Meg did everything else.” On occasion, Whitman would have to discourage Katzenberg from reaching out to people in departments she oversaw, with marketing being a particular flashpoint. “It was like, ‘Oh, Mom and Dad are fighting again,’ ” this source adds. (“We’ve formed a strong partnership based on strength and authenticity,” Whitman says. “We’re friends who admire and respect one another.”)

      At some point during the process, somebody apparently challenged Katzenberg to explain why the world needed Quibi to break up content into “snackable” bits when it seemed consumers were already having an easy enough time doing that on their own. After this, Katzenberg set about trying to prove that Quibi was “different” by adding features that seemed to deliberately hamstring the product, like the fact that the initial iteration of Quibi couldn’t even be streamed to a TV.

      To combat the idea that Quibi would be providing something that already existed, Katzenberg leaned into making Quibi seem different. To emphasize that this wasn’t just TV on your phone, he declared that Quibi wouldn’t even be available on your TV when the app launched. He also heavily hyped Turnstyle, and once Quibi was all in on this phone-only tech, the decision not to prioritize casting to TV was even harder to reconsider. In interviews, Katzenberg would adamantly emphasize Quibi’s novelty.

      But the juiciest part of the New York Mag article came when the writer finally got around to the big question: what drove Katzenberg, and then Whitman, to believe that they had some special insight into the untapped desires of the millennial generation.

      When pressed by the reporter on this topic, the two seemed at a loss.

      People have wondered why Katzenberg and Whitman, in their late and early 60s, respectively, and not very active on social media, would believe they have uniquely penetrating insight into the unacknowledged desires of young people. When I ask Whitman what TV shows she watches, she responds, “I’m not sure I’d classify myself as an entertainment enthusiast.” But any particular shows she likes? “Grant,” she offered. “On the History Channel. It’s about President Grant.”

      Katzenberg is on his phone all the time, but he is also among the moguls of his generation who have their emails printed out (and vertically folded, for some reason) by an assistant. In enthusing about what a show could mean for Quibi, Katzenberg would repeatedly invoke the same handful of musty touchstones — America’s Funniest Home Videos, Siskel and Ebert, and Jane Fonda’s exercise tapes. When Gal Gadot came to the offices and delivered an impassioned speech about wanting to elevate the voices of girls and women, Katzenberg wondered aloud whether she might become the new Jane Fonda and do a workout series for Quibi. (“Apparently, her face fell,” says a person briefed on the meeting.)

      At a casting session this year, while watching a tape test for a Daily Essentials host who was a Black man with an Afro, Katzenberg said the man didn’t look “authoritative.” Content executive Shawna Thomas, an Emmy-winning journalist from Vice News and NBC, was used to the political incorrectness endemic to casting conversations, but as a discussion of the candidate’s hair went on and on, she felt increasingly uncomfortable and left the room to avoid becoming visibly upset. That evening, she and Katzenberg had a long phone chat in which she explained why she makes a point of wearing her hair in a natural style on TV — so that, say, a little Black girl watching MSNBC could see someone authoritative who didn’t conform to the predominant white American standard of beauty. Afterward, she felt Katzenberg had understood her. “The discussion was frank, honest, and positive and might not have gone as well at another company,” Thomas says.

      Moreover, Quibi’s offices were stocked with young employees, but all of them knew that challenging the inherent biases of their two bosses was not a road to success. During an enterprise where even one well-placed dissenting voice might have averted a disaster – for instance, if somebody had just pointed out to Katzenberg that it makes no sense to deliberately cripple a product’s functionality just to try and stand out – maybe this whole disaster could have been averted. Or at least mitigated.

      But the one line that everybody knew not to cross was, of course, the money: “You never dissented on that point,” recalled one employee, referring to the notion that millennials might not pay up for the product in numbers large enough to satisfy Whitman’s models. “Their fund-raise was predicated on a plan that showed revenue targets, so they could never unwind that.” By doing this, Katzenberg might have backed himself into a corner. When asked why Quibi didn’t try out a free ad-supported version, Katzenberg reportedly responded that “Literally,” he said, “you cannot do the math.”

      In July, all of the subscribers who signed up for Quibi’s 90-day free trial will start being asked to pay for the content. In just a few weeks, the public might have a better idea of how many millennials are truly willing to pay up for Whitman’s vision.

      And once that happens, well, let’s just say that one doesn’t need the discerning wit of Judge Chrissy Teigen to figure out what happens next.

    • USDollar & Stock Futures Dive As Offshore Yuan Spikes To 4-Month Highs
      USDollar & Stock Futures Dive As Offshore Yuan Spikes To 4-Month Highs

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 21:16

      China’s offshore yuan extended its spike in early Asia trading, pushing back below 7/USD – its strongest vs the greenback in almost four months…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      That triggered weakness in the dollar…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      US equity futures are tumbling back from early gains…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And gold is bid…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      What is China doing?

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Are they pumping the yuan and stocks to provide a cushion for when Trump’s rising rhetoric turns into executive orders?

    • Ohio Town Proclaims Itself A "Statuary Sanctuary City" For Outcast Historical Figures
      Ohio Town Proclaims Itself A “Statuary Sanctuary City” For Outcast Historical Figures

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 21:00

      Authored by Alex Nitzberg via JustTheNews.com,

      As protesters target statues around the nation, one town is becoming a statue sanctuary city for monuments honoring select figures. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Newton Falls, Ohio City Manager David M. Lynch has signed a proclamation that states that the city will accept and display spurned statues of people including George Washington, Abraham Lincoln, and certain other prominent figures.

      “A Proclamation declaring that Newton Falls is a Statuary Sanctuary City and declaring a general amnesty for George Washington, Abraham Lincoln, Thomas Jefferson, Ulysses S. Grant, Patrick Henry, Francis Scott Key, Theodore Roosevelt and Christopher Columbus as represented by the statues of these great leaders, and volunteering to accept these statues that have been removed throughout the USA and place them in a location of honor in our community,” the proclamation says, according to a copy posted by 21-WFMJ.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “They founded our nation, they ended slavery, and established and protected our national parks,” Lynch said, according to Fox 8.

      “Yes, they had warts but they laid the foundation for what we have today,” he said.

      Protesters in Baltimore, Maryland on July 4th toppled a statue of Christopher Columbus and dumped it into the city’s Inner Harbor. 

    • COVID Concerns Send Casino Stocks Tumbling As Recovery Dims
      COVID Concerns Send Casino Stocks Tumbling As Recovery Dims

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 20:40

      As the recovery stalls, states are pausing and or reversing reopenings as coronavirus cases surge. Mobility trends show retail and or corporate workspace activity slowed in late June, sparking new concerns the casino recovery could be coming to an end. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The S&P500 Casino and Gaming (Sub Ind) is down 1% in late afternoon trading on Monday. From mid-March to June 8, the casino index soared 133% on reopening optimism. Since June 9, the index has fallen 24% on technical exhaustion, coupled with rising virus cases across the country that could threaten recent reopenings of US casinos. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Notable declines MGM Resorts International (-2%), Wynn Resorts Ltd (-2%), Penn National Gaming (-4.1%), Golden Entertainment (-4.4%), Caesars Entertainment (-1.5%), and Boyd Gaming (-3.8%). 

      You’re never going to guess who panic bought casino stocks with their Trump checks and unemployment benefits –  Robinhood traders, of course. Notice at the start of the pandemic, the number of Robinhood users holding MGM shares went from 7,800 to over 200,000 by early July.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Robinhood traders also panic bought Barstool Sports’ Dave Portnoy’s PENN during the pandemic. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Americans are quickly losing interest in casinos. No proven vaccine = no hanging out in indoor commercial spaces. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Don’t tell Robinhood daytraders, who panic bought not just casinos, but also airlines, cruise ships, and rental car companies – that a V-shaped recovery in the real economy won’t happen this year. 

      Former Chief Economist at the World Bank Paul Romer shocked a Fox Bussiness host Monday when he said a recovery in economic growth and jobs reverting to 2019 levels could take until 2028. 

      Millennials who panic bought virus-sensitive stocks could find out in the coming months/quarters what it means to be a bagholder.   

    • Niall Ferguson: China Has Already Declared Cold War On US
      Niall Ferguson: China Has Already Declared Cold War On US

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 20:20

      Authored by Niall Ferguson, op-ed via Bloomberg.com,

      America and China Are Entering the Dark Forest

      To know what the Chinese are really up to, read the futuristic novels of Liu Cixin.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “We are in the foothills of a Cold War.” Those were the words of Henry Kissinger when I interviewed him at the Bloomberg New Economy Forum in Beijing last November. 

      The observation in itself was not wholly startling. It had seemed obvious to me since early last year that a new Cold War — between the U.S. and China — had begun. This insight wasn’t just based on interviews with elder statesmen. Counterintuitive as it may seem, I had picked up the idea from binge-reading Chinese science fiction.

      First, the history.

      What had started out in early 2018 as a trade war over tariffs and intellectual property theft had by the end of the year metamorphosed into a technology war over the global dominance of the Chinese company Huawei Technologies Co. in 5G network telecommunications; an ideological confrontation in response to Beijing’s treatment of the Uighur minority in China’s Xinjiang region and the pro-democracy protesters in Hong Kong; and an escalation of old frictions over Taiwan and the South China Sea.

      Nevertheless, for Kissinger, of all people, to acknowledge that we were in the opening phase of Cold War II was remarkable.

      Since his first secret visit to Beijing in 1971, Kissinger has been the master-builder of that policy of U.S.-Chinese engagement which, for 45 years, was a leitmotif of U.S. foreign policy. It fundamentally altered the balance of power at the mid-point of the Cold War, to the disadvantage of the Soviet Union. It created the geopolitical conditions for China’s industrial revolution, the biggest and fastest in history. And it led, after China’s accession to the World Trade Organization, to that extraordinary financial symbiosis which Moritz Schularick and I christened “Chimerica” in 2007.

      How did relations between Beijing and Washington sour so quickly that even Kissinger now speaks of Cold War? 

      The conventional answer to that question is that President Donald Trump has swung like a wrecking ball into the “liberal international order” and that Cold War II is only one of the adverse consequences of his “America First” strategy.

      Yet that view attaches too much importance to the change in U.S. foreign policy since 2016, and not enough to the change in Chinese foreign policy that came four years earlier, when Xi Jinping became general secretary of the Chinese Communist Party. Future historians will discern that the decline and fall of Chimerica began in the wake of the global financial crisis, as a new Chinese leader drew the conclusion that there was no longer any need to hide the light of China’s ambition under the bushel that Deng Xiaoping had famously recommended.

      When Middle America voted for Trump four years ago, it was partly a backlash against the asymmetric payoffs of engagement and its economic corollary, globalization. Not only had the economic benefits of Chimerica gone disproportionately to China, not only had its costs been borne disproportionately by working-class Americans, but now those same Americans saw that their elected leaders in Washington had acted as midwives at the birth of a new strategic superpower — a challenger for global predominance even more formidable, because economically stronger, than the Soviet Union.

      It is not only Kissinger who recognizes that the relationship with Beijing has soured. Orville Schell, another long-time believer in engagement, recently conceded that the approach had foundered “because of the CCP’s deep ambivalence about the way engaging in a truly meaningful way might lead to demands for more reform and change and its ultimate demise.”

      Conservative critics of engagement, meanwhile, are eager to dance on its grave, urging that the People’s Republic be economically “quarantined,” its role in global supply chains drastically reduced. There is a spring in the step of the more Sinophobic members of the Trump administration, notably Secretary of State Mike Pompeo, deputy National Security Adviser Matt Pottinger and trade adviser Peter Navarro. For the past three and a half years they have been arguing that the single most important thing about Trump’s presidency was that he had changed the course of U.S. policy towards China, a shift from engagement to competition spelled out in the 2017 National Security Strategy. The events of 2020 would seem to have vindicated them.

      The Covid-19 pandemic has done more than intensify Cold War II. It has revealed its existence to those who last year doubted it. The Chinese Communist Party caused this disaster — first by covering up how dangerous the new virus SARS-CoV-2 was, then by delaying the measures that might have prevented its worldwide spread.

      Yet now China wants to claim the credit for saving the world from the crisis it caused. Liberally exporting cheap and not wholly reliable ventilators, testing kits and face masks, the Chinese government has sought to snatch victory from the jaws of a defeat it inflicted. The deputy director of the Chinese Foreign Ministry’s information department has gone so far as to endorse a conspiracy theory that the coronavirus originated in the U.S. and retweet an article claiming that an American team had brought the virus with them when they participated in the World Military Games in Wuhan last October.

      Just as implausible are Chinese claims that the U.S. is somehow behind the recurrent waves of pro-democracy protest in Hong Kong. The current confrontation over the former British colony’s status is unambiguously Made in China. As Pompeo has said, the new National Security Law Beijing imposed on Hong Kong last Tuesday effectively “destroys” the territory’s semi-autonomy and tears up the 1984 Sino-British joint declaration, which guaranteed that Hong Kong would retain its own legal system for 50 years after its handover to People’s Republic in 1997.

      In this context, it is not really surprising that American public sentiment towards China has become markedly more hawkish since 2017, especially among older voters. China is one of few subjects these days about which there is a genuine bipartisan consensus. It is a sign of the times that Democratic presidential candidate Joe Biden’s campaign clearly intends to portray their man as more hawkish on China than Trump. (Former National Security Adviser John Bolton’s new memoir is grist to their mill.) On Hong Kong, Nancy Pelosi, the Democratic speaker of the House, is every bit as indignant as Pompeo.

      I have argued that this new Cold War is both inevitable and desirable, not least because it has jolted the U.S. out of complacency and into an earnest effort not to be surpassed by China in artificial intelligence, quantum computing and other strategically crucial technologies. Yet there remains, in academia especially, significant resistance to my view that we should stop worrying and learn to love Cold War II.

      At a forum last week on World Order after Covid-19, organized by the Kissinger Center for Global Affairs at Johns Hopkins University, a clear majority of speakers warned of the perils of a new Cold War.

      • Eric Schmidt, the former chairman of Google, argued instead for a “rivalry-partnership” model of “coop-etition,” in which the two nations would at once compete and cooperate in the way that Samsung and Apple have done for years.

      • Harvard’s Graham Allison, the author of the bestselling “Destined for War: Can America and China Escape Thucydides’s Trap?”, agreed, giving as another example the 11th-century “frenmity” between the Song Emperor of China and the Liao kingdom on China’s northern border. The pandemic, Allison argued, has made “incandescent the impossibility of identifying China clearly as either foe or friend. Rivalry-partnership may sound complicated, but life is complicated.”

      • “The establishment of a productive and predictable US/China relationship,” wrote John Lipsky, formerly of the International Monetary Fund, “is a sine qua non for strengthening the institutions of global governance.” The last Cold War had cast a “shadow of a global holocaust for decades,” observed James Steinberg, a former deputy secretary of state. “What can be done to create a context to limit the rivalry and create space for cooperation?”

      • Elizabeth Economy, my colleague at the Hoover Institution, had an answer: “The United States and China could … partner to address a global challenge,” namely climate change. Tom Wright of the Brookings Institution took a similar line: “Focusing only on great power competition while ignoring the need for cooperation will not actually give the United States an enduring strategic advantage over China.”

      All this sounds eminently reasonable, apart from one thing. The Chinese Communist Party isn’t Samsung, much less the Liao kingdom.

      Rather — as was true in Cold War I, when (especially after 1968) academics tended to be doves rather than hawks — today’s proponents of “rivalry-partnership” are overlooking the possibility that the Chinese aren’t interested in being frenemies. They know full well this is a Cold War, because they started it.

      To be sure, there are also Chinese scholars who lament the passing of engagement. The economist Yu Yongding recently joined Kevin Gallagher of Boston University to argue for reconciliation between Washington and Beijing. Yet that is no longer the official view in Beijing. When I first began talking publicly about Cold War II at conferences last year, I was surprised that no Chinese delegates contradicted me. In September, I asked one of them — the Chinese head of a major international institution — why that was. “Because I agree with you!” he replied with a smile.

      As a visiting professor at Tsinghua University in Beijing, I have seen for myself the ideological turning of the tide under Xi. Academics who study taboo subjects such as the Cultural Revolution find themselves subject to investigations or worse. Those who take a more combative stance toward the West get promoted.

      Yan Xuetong, dean of the Institute of International Relations at Tsinghua, recently argued that Cold War II, unlike Cold War I, will be a purely technological competition, without proxy wars and nuclear brinkmanship. Yao Yang, dean of the National School of Development at Peking University, was equally candid in an interview with the Beijing Cultural Review, published on April 28.

      “To a certain degree we already find ourselves in the situation of a New Cold War,” he said. “There are two basic reasons for this. The first is the need for Western politicians to play the blame game” about the origins of the pandemic.

      “The next thing,” he added, “is that now Westerners want to make this into a ‘systems’ question, saying that the reason that China could carry out such drastic control measures [in Hubei province] is because China is not a democratic society, and this is where the power and capacity to do this came from.”

      This, however, is weak beer compared with the hard stuff regularly served up on Twitter by the pack leader of the “wolf warrior” diplomats, Zhao Lijian. “The Hong Kong Autonomy Act passed by the US Senate is nothing but a piece of scrap paper,” he tweeted on Monday, in response to the congressional retaliation against China’s  new Hong Kong security law. By his standards, this was understatement.

      The tone of the official Chinese communiqué released after Pompeo’s June 17 meeting in Hawaii with Yang Jiechi, the director of the Communist Party’s Office of Foreign Affairs, was vintage Cold War. On the persecution of the Uighurs, for example, it called on “the US side to respect China’s counter-terrorism and de-radicalization efforts, stop applying double standards on counter-terrorism issues, and stop using Xinjiang-related issues as a pretext to interfere in China’s internal affairs.”

      And this old shrillness, so reminiscent of the Mao Zedong era, is not reserved for the U.S. alone. The Chinese government lashes out at any country that has the temerity to criticize it, from Australia — “gum stuck to the bottom of China’s shoe” according to the editor of the Party-controlled Global Times — to India to the U.K. 

      Those who hope to revive engagement, or at least establish frenmity with Beijing, underestimate the influence of Wang Huning, a member since 2017 of the Standing Committee of the Politburo, the most powerful body in China, and Xi’s most influential adviser. Back in August 1988, Wang spent six months in the U.S. as a visiting scholar, traveling to more than 30 cities and nearly 20 universities. His account of that trip, “America against America,” (published in 1991) is a critique — in places scathing — of American democracy, capitalism and culture (racial division features prominently in the third chapter).

      Yet the book that has done the most to educate me about how China views America and the world today is, as I said, not a political text, but a work of science fiction. “The Dark Forest” was Liu Cixin’s 2008 sequel to the hugely successful “Three-Body Problem.” It would be hard to overstate Liu’s influence in contemporary China: He is revered by the Shenzhen and Hangzhou tech companies, and was officially endorsed as one of the faces of 21st-century Chinese creativity by none other than … Wang Huning.

      “The Dark Forest,” which continues the story of the invasion of Earth by the ruthless and technologically superior Trisolarans, introduces Liu’s three axioms of “cosmic sociology.”

      First, “Survival is the primary need of civilization.” Second, “Civilization continuously grows and expands, but the total matter in the universe remains constant.” Third, “chains of suspicion” and the risk of a “technological explosion” in another civilization mean that in space there can only be the law of the jungle. In the words of the book’s hero, Luo Ji:

      The universe is a dark forest. Every civilization is an armed hunter stalking through the trees like a ghost … trying to tread without sound … The hunter has to be careful, because everywhere in the forest are stealthy hunters like him. If he finds other life — another hunter, an angel or a demon, a delicate infant or a tottering old man, a fairy or a demigod — there’s only one thing he can do: open fire and eliminate them. In this forest, hell is other people … any life that exposes its own existence will be swiftly wiped out.

      Kissinger is often thought of (in my view, wrongly) as the supreme American exponent of Realpolitik. But this is something much harsher than realism. This is intergalactic Darwinism.

      Of course, you may say, it’s just sci-fi. Yes, but “The Dark Forest” gives us an insight into something we think too little about: how Xi’s China thinks. It’s not up to us whether or not we have a Cold War with China, if China has already declared Cold War on us. 

      Not only are we already in the foothills of that new Cold War; those foothills are also impenetrably covered in a dark forest of China’s devising.

    • Teachers "Scared" After All Florida Schools Ordered To Reopen In August
      Teachers “Scared” After All Florida Schools Ordered To Reopen In August

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 20:06

      In what is sure to be discussed with some “blood on their hands” headline in the next 24 hour news cycle, Fox35 Orlando reports that Education Commissioner Richard Corcoran on Monday ordered public schools to reopen in August and offer “the full panoply of services” to students and families.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The full Emergency Order says that all public schools will be required to reopen in August for at least five days a week and to provide the full array of services required by law, including in-person instruction and services for students with special needs.

      “Required services must be provided to students from low-income families, students of migrant workers, students who are homeless, students with disabilities, students in foster care, students who are English-language learners, and other vulnerable populations,” the order says.

      Corcoran’s order also instructs school districts to follow the advice of state and local health officials as well as executive orders issued by Gov. Ron DeSantis.

      Read the full emergency order below:

      Of course, as one would imagine, teachers are concerned. According to Florida Education Association President Fedrick Ingram.

      It’s clear in communications with our members that educators are scared. They don’t trust politicians to make sure things are safe — rightly so, with the record-breaking number of cases being reported,” Ingram told the News Service of Florida in an email Monday.

      “The governor is trying to brush that off.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Of course, while every mainstream media org is leading with the soaring “cases”, few, if any, have mentioned the flat incremental deaths (and this plunging mortality rate)…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The average age for those testing positive for COVID-19 in Florida is now only 21, Gov. Ron DeSantis said Monday in an update in The Villages.  He said the younger age of those testing positive is contributing to lower mortality rates from the virus across the state. The fatality rate in Florida is currently less than 2%.

      However, Ingram, who heads the state’s top teachers’ union, said students and school employees “need to be at the center of our conversations about reopening schools.”

      And just like that it becomes politicized as ‘science’ goes out the door.

      Under the order issued Monday, school districts and charter-school governing boards are required to submit reopening plans to the Department of Education showing how all schools plan to fully reopen and offer all services to students.

    • Gary Shilling Sees 1930s-Style Decline In Stock Market 
      Gary Shilling Sees 1930s-Style Decline In Stock Market 

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 20:00

      “I think we’ve got a second leg down and that’s very much reminiscent of what happened in the 1930s where people appreciate the depth of this recession and the disruption and how long it’s going to take to recover,” Gary Shilling, the president of A. Gary Shilling & Co., told CNBC’s Elizabeth Schulze in an interview on Monday, referring to the possibility the stock market will tumble once investors realize the shape of the recovery is an “L” rather than the overhyped “V.” 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      At the moment, President Trump, completely ignoring the millions of jobs that have been eliminated from the economy because it would make him look bad ahead of the elections – is touting “NASDAQ HITS ALL TIME HIGH!” on Twitter on Monday morning. 

      The optimism of a V-shaped recovery in the back half of the year, coupled with unprecedented central bank liquidity, is fueling the biggest stock market bubble in history, that Shilling says stocks could plunge 30-40% over the next year as investors figure out the shape of the recovery is an “L.” 

      Shilling said today’s stock market bounce from March lows resembles the initial dip then rebound in 1929 – and we all know what happened next… 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      He warned history could repeat as people, even back in the Great Depression, initially underestimate the depths of the downturn and how long a recovery phase would take. 

      “Stocks are [behaving] very much like that rebound in 1929 where there is absolute conviction that the virus will be under control and that massive monetary and fiscal stimuli will reinvigorate the economy,” he said. 

      Adding that, “I think we’re going to see downward pressure on prices and that works to the advantage of Treasury bonds, which have been my favorite since 1981.” 

      We noted on Sunday that recovery times continue to push out, now 2022, due to surging virus cases forcing states to pause or even reverse reopening plans. The latest data shows retail foot traffic stalled in late June – suggesting the V-shaped recovery narrative is more hype than truth, and jobs and economic growth will not revert to 2019 levels for several years. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      There are emerging trends readers should know: the first, as states pause/reverse reopenings, those who were recently hired are now getting fired; the second is permanent job loss – as we noted over the weekend, nearly 3 million jobs have been eliminated from the economy since the pandemic began. Remember, permanent job loss is a consumption killer, considering consumer spending drives two-thirds of the economy. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      To sum up, Wall Street’s bet is that the Federal Reserve can print its way out of a depression is unlikely as the recovery shape is set to transform from a “V” to “L.”  

    • CNBC Talking Head And Tesla Mega-Bull, Ross Gerber Received PPP Loan Days After He Called Program "Another Trump Scam"
      CNBC Talking Head And Tesla Mega-Bull, Ross Gerber Received PPP Loan Days After He Called Program “Another Trump Scam”

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 19:52

      As we pointed out on Twitter earlier today, Tesla’s favorite uber-bull and useful FinTwit punching bag Ross Gerber’s firm, the Santa Monica-based Gerber Kawasaki (not to be confused with a motorbike dealer, although perhaps it would hope to be) Wealth Management, was approved for a PPP loan on May 3, 2020.  

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The disclosure comes as part of a broader disclosure of firms who took PPP loans and confirms that Gerber’s firm took a loan ranging from $350,000 to $1 million through Wells Fargo Bank. While PPP loans were given out in exchange for “retaining jobs”, in the case of Gerber Kawasaki that particular number is unknown as the excel cell is empty.

      The irony, of course, comes from the fact that on April 27, 2020, just 6 short days before his firm’s loan was approved, Gerber virtue signalled to the #resistance by tweeting that “this whole PPP thing looks like a scam. Another big Trump scam”.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      … A scam which Ross Gerber had applied for weeks prior and was eagerly waiting approval.

      Then, during the same thread about “another Trump scam”, when Gerber was called out for having Trump derangement syndrome, he doubled down and said “you can correlate PPP loans and Trump supporters” before suggesting “they should publish the list of companies and amounts.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

       

      Well, Ross, we hate to tell you this… but they did. And your firm is on it as receiving up to $1 million in PPP grants.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      It gets better. The NAICS code of “441228” which Gerber Kawasaki applied under indicates that the “investment advisory” company got the loan under the guise of being a “Motorcycle, ATV and Other Motor Vehicle Dealer”! Perhaps Gerber was hoping that someone at the Small Business Administration was dumb enough and would assume that a company named “Kawasaki” deal with, well, motorobikes. Because after all which financial advisor would like to be exposed as need bailout money to continue offering paid “advise” on what happens next.

      This motorcycle/ATV PPP rescue grant – which the company should have applied for only if it meant the difference between life and death – follows not only Gerber’s constant boasting on Twitter about being long Tesla, which has more than tripled off of its recent lows, but constant bragging by Gerber on social media about how well his firm is doing and how rich he is. In fact, just days ago, he said he was taking a “victory lap” on Tesla…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      …he was also publishing text allegedly from one of his client’s statements, also bragging about Tesla:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Even better, a little over a year ago, Gerber was bragging about his wealth:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      …after bragging in 2017 that his firm was taking in $3 million per week.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Then, at the beginning of 2020 posting influencer-style photos of himself drinking what he called “Crystal”:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      …which he has been bragging about (and spelling wrong) for years….

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The PPP loan disclosure caused an uproar on social media, with some also pointing out that Gerber Kawasaki’s Form ADV filings may not have been updated to reveal the loan. Even Dave Portnoy of Barstool Spots, with whom Gerber had a kerfuffle with several weeks ago, chimed in:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      “Absolute dickhead looking motherfucker,” Portnoy had called Gerber in a live video in late May after Gerber suggested Portnoy’s wealth was because he was “lucky”.

      “If you’re so good at this, why you helping strangers? Because you’re not. You need other people’s money, you coward,” Portnoy said in late May, in what is turning out to be an extremely prescient observation.

      “Ross Gerber’s the worst to ever do it,” Portnoy concluded. 

      Gerber responded by saying he was up $10 million on the day and calling Portnoy out for bragging, which is beyond ironic given Gerber’s history of bragging himself.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      But then again, we didn’t see Barstool Sports on the PPP recipient list. So there’s one thing Portnoy can brag about that Gerber will never again mention.

    • China & India Agree To 1km Buffer Zone, Troop Pullback After Deadly Border Clash
      China & India Agree To 1km Buffer Zone, Troop Pullback After Deadly Border Clash

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 19:20

      Following the deadly June 15 India-China border fight which had the highest casualties of any skirmish between the two along the Line of Actual Control (LAC) in fifty years, Indian and Chinese officers have conducted multiple deescalation talks as each country’s media saber rattles, and as India has retaliated economically against Beijing

      These talks have led to a major breakthrough apparently, as on Monday both sides have announced the establishment of a sizable buffer zone along the LAC in the Galwan River valley, requiring each to move troop positions away from the site

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Modi in Ladakh on July 3, via ANI/Financial Express

      This after especially a semi-permanent PLA build-up was observed in the region, and as Indian troops responded by sending tanks and armored units. 

      The buffer zone agreement was reportedly firmed up Sunday during a phone call between Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi and Indian National Security Advisor Ajit Doval, which agreed to immediate mutual disengagement. 

      An Indian government statement said “it was necessary to ensure at the earliest complete disengagement osf the troops along the LAC and de-escalation from India-China border areas.” The statement as widely reported in Indian media said further: “In this regard they further agreed that both sides should complete the ongoing disengagement process along the LAC expeditiously.”

      Regional media also said both sides have already begun the one kilometer pull-back from the disputed border line:

      Today, sources said China has withdrawn its troops by at least a kilometer and dismantled its temporary structures in Ladakh’s Galwan river valley, where 20 soldiers were killed in action during a clash with Chinese troops on June 15. Indian soldiers have also pulled back and a buffer zone has been created, sources said.

      Ahead of this days ago, Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi made a visit to the Ladakh region in solidarity with troops stationed at the remote Himalayan border area. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Via Defense Aviation Post

      The Chinese foreign minister confirmed Monday that both countries have “agreed to follow the important consensus reached by leaders of the two countries”.

      This came after at least three rounds of high level military talks held in the Ladakh region, potentially ending soaring tensions which for nearly a month grabbed international headlines and had analysts fearing to nuclear armed neighbors could be headed for a border war. 

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 6th July 2020

    • UAE In Drastic Government Shake-Up Seeking More "Swift & Agile" COVID Economy
      UAE In Drastic Government Shake-Up Seeking More “Swift & Agile” COVID Economy

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 02:45

      We’ve never heard of a government shake-up this big being first announced on social media, but on Sunday United Arab Emirates vice president and prime minister, Sheikh Mohammed bin Rashid Al Maktoum shocked his country as well as Gulf-watchers by unveiling on Twitter a sweeping government restructuring

      Sheikh Mohammed said said in Arabic: “The aim… is a government that can more quickly make decisions and deal with changes and more adeptly seize opportunities in dealing with this new stage in our history; a swift and agile government,” according to an Al Jazeera translation.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The drastic restructuring is being reported as ostensibly due to the threat of severe economic impact of the coronavirus pandemic, and includes the goal of permanently transforming half of all government service centers into remote, online platforms. 

      About half of all UAE’s federal agencies are to be merged with an apparent aim of reducing unnecessary bureaucracy and increasing centralization for the sake of more rapid speed in decision-making.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      VP Mohammed bin Rashid Al Maktoum with Crown Prince of the Emirate of Abu Dhabi Mohammed bin Zayed.

      Here are some of the shake-up highlights and new appointments as well as reappointments, as reported in Al Jazeera:

      • The head of Abu Dhabi’s national oil company ADNOC, Sultan al-Jaber, was named as industry and advanced technology minister and Abdullah al-Marri was appointed economy minister.
      • The energy and infrastructure ministries were merged under a single portfolio to be headed by current energy minister Suhail Al Mazrouei.
      • The Federal Water and Electricity Authority, Emirates Post, Emirates General Transport Corp, and Emirates Real Estate Corp were placed under the Emirates Investment Authority.
      • The economy ministry got two ministers of state – Ahmed Belhoul for business and small and medium enterprises, and Thani al-Zeyoudi for foreign trade. Omar al-Olama was named minister of state for digital economy and artificial intelligence.
      • A woman was named to head the nascent Emirates Space Agency. Sarah al-Amiri is currently leading the UAE’s Hope Probe to Mars, which will launch this month from Japan with the goal of providing a new look at the planet’s climate and atmosphere.

      The county’s central bank had issued dire numbers related to the local and global impact of the coronavirus, forecasting the oil-rich UAE economy would contract by 3.6% this year.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “As the drop in economic activity is expected to be followed by sharp contractions in the subsequent quarters, non-energy growth contraction is projected at (minus)-4.1% for 2020,” the central bank had said in its first-quarter report.

      “While recovery of economic activity is projected to commence in the second half of the year, recovery of economic sentiment will hinge on deploying policy support measures,” it said.

    • Netherlands "Justice" Is Totally Corrupt: MH17 Case As Example
      Netherlands “Justice” Is Totally Corrupt: MH17 Case As Example

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 02:00

      Authored by Eric Zuesse via the Saker Blog,

      On Friday, July 3rd, the judge in the Netherlands court case against Russia as having fired a Buk missile that brought down the Malaysian Airlines plane that Ukrainian Air Traffic Control had instructed to fly over Ukraine’s civil-war zone on 17 July 2014, ruled out any consideration of evidence from Russia.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Judge Hendrik Steenhuis “refused to allow Russian military intelligence to reveal where the missile was located between 1987 and July 17, 2014, when the Dutch prosecution claims the missile was fired by a Russian military crew at MH17,” as John Helmer reported on Friday. The Dutch prosecutor says that that Buk missile was fired by Russia’s Government, not by Ukraine’s Government, and that it was owned by Russia and had been maintained by Russia ever since having been manufactured in Russia in 1986, and the Dutch judge announced that he refuses to consider Russia’s evidence to the contrary.

      Russia’s Government alleges that it can provide evidence that that missile did not, in fact, bring the airliner down, and that, instead, it was brought down by two Ukrainian Air Force jets that fired directly at and into the airliner’s pilot, but previously the Dutch court had ruled out any consideration of such evidence, though even the Dutch Government’s own investigation included and buried the following information, as I reported just a few days ago on June 24th:

      The Dutch Government’s 279-page investigative findings on the “Crash of Malaysia Airlines flight MH17” were published in October 2015, and reported, on page 84, (under 2.13.2 “Crew autopsy”) that “First Officer Team A … During the body scan of the First Officer’s body, over 120 objects (mostly metal fragments) were detected. The majority of the fragments were found in left side of the upper torso.” Then, it reported, on page 85 (under 2.13.3) “the First Officer, from Team A, who was operating the aeroplane at the time of the crash.”

      (Note that they buried this crucial information, instead of saying clearly that “The pilot’s upper left torso, immediately to the left of the area of the fuselage that had been shot out, had 120 objects that were mostly metal fragments.”) (Here is a closer picture of that side-panel on the left side of the fuselage, to the pilot’s immediate left, and here is that side-panel shown back on the airliner, so that one can see that this firing had to have been done from below, shooting upward into the pilot.)

      This crucial physical finding, that the pilot’s corpse had been loaded with “over 120 objects (mostly metal fragments),” is entirely consistent with the side-panel’s having been shot through by bullets, which would have been coming from a Ukrainian military jet and aimed upward, directly at the pilot. That marksman had to have been highly proficient in order to hit the pilot so accurately with so many bullets.

      Nothing else was found to be shot through with anything like such an intensity of “mostly metal fragments,” but only the pilot’s upper left torso. This, alone, is virtually conclusive proof that a Ukrainian military jet plane had fired directly at the pilot in order to bring down this civilian plane. (More will be cited here, in #2 below.)

      All of this evidence was entirely buried and ignored by the Dutch Government, revealed deep in the report, and only in sub-clauses, instead of in any direct sentences. Furthermore“There have been two or three pieces of fuselage that have been really pockmarked with what almost looks like machine-gun fire, very very strong machine-gun fire.” This remarkable statement comes not from Haisenko, but from one of the first OSCE investigators who arrived at the scene of the disaster. Go to https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7ze9BNGDyk4  and you will see it. [But, now, it has been removed. Here is the information on that video. That video was titled “OSCE monitor mentions bullet holes in MH17”.]

      That evidence is consistent with the Dutch Government’s having found (but buried) that the pilot’s corpse had been riddled with “metal fragments.”

      The matter which was being addressed on July 3rd was strictly concerning which Government owned and operated that Buk missile (which Russia has always contended did not bring down that plane).

      Previously, when Ukraine’s Government authorized Holland’s Government to investigate and rule on what caused the MH17 to be shot down, Holland’s Government signed onto a secret agreement with Ukraine’s Government that included a provision allowing Ukraine’s Government to block and prevent any finding from being issued that would implicate Ukraine’s Government in having shot it down. Holland’s Government violates its own Freedom of Information law by refusing to make public what that secret agreement says. However, at the time when the existence of the agreement slipped through into mention by a Ukrainian news-site on 8 August 2014, that news-report said “As part of the four-party agreement signed on August 8 between Ukraine, the Netherlands, Belgium and Australia [all of which nations are allies of the United States and are cooperating with its new Cold War against Russia], information on the investigation into the disaster Malaysian ‘Boeing-777’ will not be disclosed.”

      *  *  *

      Investigative historian Eric Zuesse is the author, most recently, of  They’re Not Even Close: The Democratic vs. Republican Economic Records, 1910-2010, and of  CHRIST’S VENTRILOQUISTS: The Event that Created Christianity.

    • Johnstone: Seriously, Get The Hell Out Of Afghanistan
      Johnstone: Seriously, Get The Hell Out Of Afghanistan

      Tyler Durden

      Mon, 07/06/2020 – 00:00

      Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

      With overwhelming bipartisan support, the House Armed Services Committee has added a Liz Cheney-spearheaded amendment to the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) which throws severe roadblocks in the Trump administration’s proposed scale-down of US military presence in Afghanistan and Germany.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As The Intercept’s Glenn Greenwald notes, both parties advancing the amendment cited in their arguments the completely unsubstantiated intelligence leak that was recently published by credulous mass media reporters alleging that Russia has paid bounties to Taliban fighters for killing the occupying forces in Afghanistan. Yet another western imperialist agenda once again facilitated by unforgivably egregious journalistic malpractice in the mass media.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Every aspect of this development is enraging.

      The mass media have continued to add to their mountain of Gish gallop fallacies promoting this narrative with a new Daily Beast report citing former senior Taliban figure Mullah Manan Niazi who asserts that “The Taliban have been paid by Russian intelligence for attacks on U.S. forces — and on ISIS forces — in Afghanistan from 2014 up to the present.” The Beast’s own article admits that its source has severe conflicts of interest and is believed to be a CIA asset by Taliban leadership, and that Niazi provided no evidence of any kind for his claim or any further details whatsoever.

      These flimsy, poorly-sourced allegations are being hammered into mainstream liberal consciousness on a daily basis now in the exact same way the discredited Russiagate psyop was, and just like with Russiagate the narrative they are being used to shape helps advance military expansionism and new cold war escalations which just so happen to fit perfectly into pre-existing geostrategic agendas of planetary domination.

      The way mainstream news outlets consistently refuse to account for a fact so obvious and indisputable as intelligence agencies being known liars should by itself be enough to discredit the entire institution of mass news reporting. Yet here we are with these reports being treated as established fact throughout the entire political/media class and down through the entire population of propagandized rank-and-file citizenry.

      The Afghanistan Papers established conclusively that the occupation has been unwinnable and without a clear picture of what winning would even look like from the very beginning, and that this fact has been hidden from the world by systematic deceit for two decades. The revelation was in the news for a day and then quickly memory holed without having any meaningful impact on the dominant narrative about Afghanistan, and now the mainstream consensus is that even trying to reduce the number of troops there is a hazardous and outlandish notion.

      This is because the mainstream consensus is shaped not by facts, but by narrative. We see this in the way the fact-filled Afghanistan Papers have played no role in shaping the dominant narrative about what should be done about the nineteen-year occupation, and we see it in the way the fact-free “bounty” narrative is shaping public opinion and determining US foreign policy. The propagandists who manufacture consent for imperialist agendas understand that truth and facts play far less of a role in what the propagandized consider important than does mindless repetition and emotion.

      The Empire Files has an absolutely phenomenal mini-documentary on the Afghanistan occupation which came out the other day, and everyone should watch it. Abby Martin quickly breaks down the geostrategic, resource control, and military-industrial complex agendas which are advanced by this interminable war, the deceit and depravity which went into initiating and maintaining it, and the devastating toll it has taken on the Afghan people. I strongly encourage my readers to give it a view when you get the chance.

      The continued Afghanistan occupation is like if the police stormed a house, shot a bunch of people, realized they got the wrong house and they’d never find the guy they were looking for by staying there, stayed anyway, moved in, and then years later said they can’t move out because they heard a rumor that the neighbors are trying to make them leave.

      In a sane world it would be the violent invasion and occupation of sovereign nations which elicits outrage and opposition from elected officials and intense skepticism and critical reporting from prominent journalists. In today’s propaganda-maddened society we get the exact opposite: the invasions and occupations are treated as the normal default position and any attempt to end them is regarded as outlandish.

      This cannot continue. We must find a way to awaken from the brainwashing and force it to end. Anyone who works to prevent this from happening is an enemy of human progress.

      *  *  *

      Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my tip jar on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

      Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

    • California Enters Deadly Wildfire Season With Over Half Of Inmate Firefighters Under COVID Lockdown
      California Enters Deadly Wildfire Season With Over Half Of Inmate Firefighters Under COVID Lockdown

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 23:30

      As California’s deadly wildfire season approaches, over half of the state’s inmate firefighters are currently unavailable to serve the northern half of the state, after prison officials placed 12 of the state’s 43 inmate fire camps on lockdown thanks to a giant COVID-19 outbreak at a Lassen County prison – which serves as the training center for the Conservation Camp Program.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Prisoners from the McCain inmate crew from San Diego, Calif., prepare to clear brush from a road on Oct. 11, 2017 in Calistoga, Calif. Ben Margot:AP
       

      Approximately 2,200 California inmates serve on the front lines of the state’s increasingly frequent and destructive blazes, according to the Sacramento Bee. Overall, the program has 3,100 inmates stationed at minimum security facilities across 27 counties.

      To put it in context, Cal Fire has approximately 6,500 year-round employees, which swells to around 9,000 during fire season. Inmates earn between $2 and $5 per day, plus $1 per hour while fighting a fire.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As of Friday, at least 220 inmates at Susanville prison located 120 miles north of Lake Tahoe tested positive for COVID-19 over the past two weeks, prompting the California Department of Corrections to halt movement in and out of the prison – which includes sending inmates to the conservation camps, according to the state prison system spokesman, Aaron Francis.

      Until the lockdown lifts, only 30 of the state’s 77 inmate crews are available to fight a wildfire in the north state, prison officials said.

      California’s incarcerated firefighters have for decades been the state’s primary firefighting “hand crews,” and the shortage has officials scrambling to come up with replacement firefighters in a dry season that is shaping up to be among the most extreme in years. The state is hunting for bulldozer crews and enlisting teams that normally clear brush as replacements. –Sacramento Bee

      That said, just one of the inmate firefighters have tested positive as of Friday, according to Francis.

      The reduced manpower will create an enormous challenge for the state, should any large fires break out this year.

      To have that many (conservation camps) locked down, there are only a few camps left in the north that are going to be able to fight fires,” said retired corrections officer Mike Hampton, who served as the fire camp system’s union president according to the Bee. “That’s going to hamper them.”

      “All of a sudden we start losing inmates, you can’t replace them with high-risk inmates,” Hampton added. “That defeats the purpose of the program. The whole purpose of the program is to fight fires and save the state money. You put high-risk inmates in there, that defeats the safety standpoint for the citizens out there.”

      Identified by their orange fire uniforms, inmates typically do the critically important and dangerous job of using chainsaws and hand tools to cut firelines around properties and neighborhoods during wildfires.

      Each crew has 17 inmates. They’re supervised in the field typically by a Cal Fire captain, but sometimes a correctional officer will go with them on out-of-county assignments, or on local assignments located near residential areas.

      California Department of Forestry and Fire Protection officials acknowledged losing inmate hand crews to the disease outbreak is going to pose a significant challenge this summer. –Sacramento Bee

      In order to cope with the shortfall, state fire officials are expanding the use of seasonal firefighters, creating new crews, and working with multiple agencies to secure more aircraft and bulldozers. Cal Fire employees have also been approved to serve on the state’s “fuels crews” teams, which create fire breaks by clearing brush and other flammable materials surrounding communities, according to Amy Head, a Battalion Chief and Cal Fire spokeswoman. 

      State and federal officials, along with the National Guard and California Conservation Corps have all been tapped to help find more firefighters, the Bee reports.

      We’re doing our best to plan ahead,” said Head. “Thankfully, we haven’t had anything too big to deal with yet.”

      Inmate shortage began years ago

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The Bee also notes that the number of inmates available to fight fires has been “steadily decreasing in recent years” – as only low-level felons are eligible to participate, which state officials have been diverting to county custody or releasing them back into the public.

      The department has reduced the overall population of the prison system by almost 10,000 inmates since March. The majority of releases were of people whose terms were already ending, though the state also expedited the release of 3,500 inmates who were near the end of their sentence. The prison system also has suspended intake from county jails, contributing to the decreased number of people held by the state, Francis said.

      Typically, 90 inmate fire crews are available to fight fires in Northern California, but there were just 77 assigned to the region this year — and that was before the pandemic hit. –Sacramento Bee
       

      “This is a result of natural attrition, expedited releases, and sentencing reform changes that took place prior to the COVID-19 pandemic,” Francis told the Bee in an email.

      Read the rest of the report here.

    • Why Texas Governor Abbott's "Face Mask"-Order Is Not What It Seems
      Why Texas Governor Abbott’s “Face Mask”-Order Is Not What It Seems

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 23:00

      Authored by Daniel McAdams via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

      Today Texas Governor Greg Abbott (R) issued yet another executive order on the coronavirus outbreak – while the Texas state legislature continues slumbering while collecting paychecks for no work.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The mainstream media, predictably, is mis-reporting the executive order as a “statewide face covering requirement for Texans.”

      It is no such thing. However, it is worded in such an obtuse manner that this misinterpretation of the executive order will likely be universal in Texas.

      Here is the important part of the order:

      Every person in Texas shall wear a face covering over the nose and mouth when inside a commercial entity or other building or space open to the public, or when in an outdoor public space, wherever it is not feasible to maintain six feet of social distancing from another person not in the same household; provided, however, that this face-covering requirement does not apply to the following…

      That comma after the word “space” is essential. It establishes “outdoor public space” as a clause within the sentence, meaning both indoor AND outdoor are covered by the exception “wherever it is not feasible to maintain six feet of social distancing.” This is critically important, as it means even in stores or other indoor spaces masks are not required as long as it is possible to “social distance.” That would include every grocery store and reasonably-sized commercial establishment.

      In other words, this order was purposely written to be misinterpreted! Perception is 99 percent of reality, particularly among county and local officials who will mis-read this (probably intentionally) as a green light to crack down hard. Abbott is not mandating face masks outdoors or even indoors or even in commercial entities. But his order is worded in such a purposely weasel-like manner that it will be universally accepted and reported as such. It is already being so reported.

      Section Sec. 418.014.C of the Texas legal code states that a governor-declared state of emergency can only last for 30 days. The governor has the authority to extend that state of emergency, but he is subject to the actions of the legislature. As the code states.

      “The legislature by law may terminate a state of disaster at any time. On termination by the legislature, the governor shall issue an executive order ending the state of disaster.”

      Texas Lt. Governor Dan Patrick loves to bluster about being a champion of civil liberties, recently blasting the hapless Dr. Fauci to earn red meat political points. But unfortunately then it comes to actually standing up for Texans who are seeing their livelihoods destroyed, who are seeing their civil liberties trampled, who are seeing an out-of-control governor ruling by decree in a manner that would have made King George blush, he’s “all hat, no cattle” as we say here in Texas.

      In Texas the Lt. Governor wields extraordinary power over the state’s legislative body and could call the Texas Senate back into session to begin the process of ending Governor Abbott’s insane power grab.

      But thus far that former radio personality has done little more than preen in front of the microphone.

      As we very clearly explain in today’s Ron Paul Liberty Report, the reason for the “spike” in Texas covid cases is a massive ramping up in testing (“Come one come all, it’s free!!!!!”) and an extraordinary re-definition of what it means to be “covid positive” that was implemented by Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS) in mid-May. Texas county and local officials expressed concern that ramping up testing and lowering the threshold to declaring “probable” covid cases (with no testing) as actual “covid cases” would lead to a mass spike in Texas. Turns out they were right.

      Classifying all those seeking delayed surgeries and other medical procedures as “covid cases” even if not sick only makes the situation in Texas seem worse.

      Many honest Texas officials saw the “second wave” spike coming because they saw how the game was being rigged. But Abbott fell for it and he has declared war on Texans and on liberty.

      This is not rocket science. Politics is at play in the “second wave” coronavirus in Texas and elected officials are either too dense or too corrupt to take a stand for truth.

    • Western Supermarkets Drop Coconut Goods Picked By Slave Monkeys
      Western Supermarkets Drop Coconut Goods Picked By Slave Monkeys

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 22:30

      People for the Ethical Treatment of Animals (PETA) Asia investigators found Thailand’s major coconut milk producers are forcing monkeys to pick coconuts as slave laborers. After the report emerged, major Western supermarket chains have removed coconut water and oil from their store shelves that are connected with these farms.

      Eight farms were noted in the report. Two in focus are Aroy-D, and Chaokoh, which have dozens of monkeys picking upwards of 1,000 coconuts each, per day. It was found these two farms supply coconut products to Giant Food, Food Lion, Stop & Shop, and Hannaford in the U.S.

      PETA said Walgreens Boots Alliance had dropped products from Aroy-D and Chaokoh: 

      After hearing from PETA, Walgreens Boots Alliance has pledged to not stock Aroy-D or Chaokoh, and not knowingly sell any own-brand coconut food and drink products of Thai origin in their 9,277 Walgreens and 250 Duane Reade stores in the U.S. and 2,758 Boots stores in the U.K. and Thailand, and Morrisons has suspended its supply of Chaokoh products pending an investigation and Ocado, Waitrose, and Co-op have committed to never knowingly stocking any products from suppliers that use monkey labour. – PETA said on its website 

      Following PETA’s report, 15,000 stores worldwide have abandoned products from Thailand’s major coconut milk producers the employ monkeys. 

      PETA released disturbing images of the coconut picking monkeys:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t PETA Asia 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t PETA Asia 

      Undercover PETA video of the coconut farms:

      All lives matter – even, in this case, monkeys forced into slave labor in Thailand.  

    • Prins: "We're Living In A Permanent Distortion"
      Prins: “We’re Living In A Permanent Distortion”

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 22:00

      Via Greg Hunter’s USAWatchdog.com,

      Three time best-selling book author Nomi Prins says long before the Covid 19 crisis, the global economy was faltering big time.  The Fed stepped in with the start of massive money printing in late 2019 to save the day. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Prins explains, “We were already in crisis mode as I mentioned at the end of my last book going into 2019.”

      “What did we see at the end of 2019?  We saw this pivot, and I call it phase two. . . . Central banks had pivoted to easing mode. . . . Come September, October, November and December, the Fed is producing repo operations.  Those are short-term lending operations that are supposed to be the purview of the banks . . . . The Fed is not supposed to get involved, but it did.  The Fed had all kinds of excuses.  It said it was not QE, but it was. . . . The debt at the end of 2019 for the world was three times GDP.  For every $3 borrowed, only $1 of economic activity occurred.  That’s what we started 2020 with.  Throw a pandemic into that . . . and you have a long drawn out financial and economic crisis.”

      Now, the money printing has gone into overdrive to save the system from the virus crisis.  The social and economic damage, according to Prins, is profound and not going away.  Prins points out,

      “We are not going to pay back this debt, and this is global.  Nobody is even considering trying to pay back the debt that has been created.  Let’s think about why that debt has been created.  It’s not just because the economy slowed down.  That’s one reason and kind of an excuse.  The reality is the Fed is on steroids, and other central banks are on steroids . . . throughout the world in a larger number and larger magnitude than in the wake of the financial crisis of 2008.  This means all this new debt created is even cheaper than the debt created going into the 2008 crisis.  So, more debt, created more cheaply, means less incentive to pay it back and more incentive to push it down the road and grow it.  You’ve got this snowball of debt rolling down this high mountain, and it’s rolling and growing and getting bigger.  The mountain, which is the main street economy, is coming down as the snow ball is coming down, and the main street economy itself, that foundation, is really shaky. . . . How does this end?  It ends with us, the foundation, which is the main street economy, by both that snowball of debt and the avalanche of the mountain.  That’s going to be a multi-decade problem.

      Prins says this next stage has a brand new name and explains,

      I call this a ‘Permanent Distortion.’  I have not used this term in prior books, but I am using it because . . . the disconnect between financial assets, equity markets and the real economy . . . has become massive

      There is going to be this endless supply of artificial stimulation into the markets. . . . Former New York Fed President Bill Dudley said the Fed’s balance sheet is going to $10 trillion.  That’s what I have been saying, and now he finally said it.  That’s not going away anytime soon.  That’s not being unwound anytime soon.  That becomes permanent lift to financial assets. . . . In the wake of that, less real capital gets used for infrastructure, research and development, growth and retooling the economy and getting jobs into this new period.”

      Prins says gold prices are going to “follow the expansion of the Fed’s balance sheet.”  It is that simple, and Prins predicts,

      “As we saw in the wake of the financial crisis of 2008, gold and silver will have the ability to go up quite substantially as the Fed’s book increases in size, which we know it is going to do.  We have been told that multiple times by many different words by Federal Reserve Chairman Jerome Powell.”

      In closing, Prins says, “We are continuing to drive up asset bubbles where we don’t have the real economy to back it up…” 

      “The more this ‘Permanent Distortion’ gets bigger, the more the likelihood the next crisis will happen… and it will be from a higher height.  It will be from a larger bubble, a bigger snowball accelerating downward more quickly.  I don’t think we are out of this crisis.  I think the markets are going to have a bumpy ride as the economy has a bumpier ride.”

      Join Greg Hunter as he goes One-on-One with three time best-selling author Nomi Prins.

      *  *  *

      To Donate to USAWatchdog.com Click Here

    • Low-Income Households Crushed By Covid Inflation Shock
      Low-Income Households Crushed By Covid Inflation Shock

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 21:30

      As The Fed continues to flood the system with money – insisting that inflation is merely a boogeyman and it is doing everything in its power to support the middle class, Bloomberg has found that inflation due to coronavirus is real, and is disproportionately hammering poor households.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Due to higher grocery and housing costs for the bare necessities during the pandemic lockdown, the study found that the bottom 10% of households by income currently face inflation of 1.5%, while those in the top 10% face 1%. Meanwhile, the official overall average in May was 0.1%.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      According to the report, the difference is primarily due to changes in consumption habits during the pandemic – as households have been forced to buy more food, which has shot up in price, while spending less on recreational activities and transportation. 

      In a period of protest and increasing anger about inequality, the differential inflation rate experienced by low- and high-income households is a concern,” said Bloomberg Economics’ Björn van Roye and Tom Orlik.

      The suggestion the virus is less disinflationary than many economists believe poses a challenge for the Federal Reserve which is eyeing a slower inflation rate than that experienced by lower earners, who are instead facing a steady erosion of their purchasing power. –Bloomberg

      “Taken together with concerns about central banks bailing out investors ahead of firms and workers, and the benefits rich, asset-owning households gain from quantitative easing, it adds to the sense that central banks are unintentional contributors to the problem of inequality,” they added.

      Meanwhile, adding insult to injury, CCN points out that blue-collar workers are more likely to contract the virus, adding “If you can’t work remotely and you haven’t been laid off, chances are you’re headed into work and putting yourself at risk every day.”

      Looking a bit more closely at spending habits during the pandemic, Opportunity Insights, which contributed to Bloomberg‘s report, found that those in the top income quartile had a significant decline in spending of 53%, while those in the bottom quartile spent virtually the same.

      High-income households cut spending primarily because of health concerns rather than a loss of income or purchasing  power. Spending fell most  on  services  that require in-person interaction and thereby carry a risk of COVID-19 infection, such as transportation  and  food services.

      The pattern of spending reductions during this recession differs sharply  from that of prior recessions, during which spending on services remained essentially unchanged while spending on durable goods (e.g., new appliances or cars) fell sharply. –Opportunity Insights

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Opportunity Insights also found that small businesses in the most affluent zip codes lost over 70% of their revenue due to COVID-19, vs. 30% in the least affluent (low rent) zip codes. Meanwhile, reopenings have had little impact on economic activity, as illustrated by Colorado – which reopened on May 1, vs. New Mexico, which reopened on May 16.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And while stimulus payments significantly increased consumer spending – particularly among low-income households, they didn’t lead to large gains for businesses hardest-hit by the pandemic – small businesses in affluent areas.

      Even more surprising is that Opportunity Insights found that $500 billion in PPP loans had virtually no impact on employment rates.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Which begs the question: is there a vaccine for ineffective fiscal policy? (we already know that the only solution to failed monetary policy is much more of it).

    • Senate Bill Would Ban Federal Use Of Facial Recognition Systems
      Senate Bill Would Ban Federal Use Of Facial Recognition Systems

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 21:00

      Submitted by Sovereign Man Explorer

      This Week’s Intelligence

      Senate bill would ban federal use of facial recognition systems

      What happened:

      A bill in the Senate would issue a presumptive ban on the use of any facial recognition systems by any federal agencies.

      That means unless a government agency or bureau is specifically authorized by Congress, they cannot deploy real time facial recognition surveillance or use it to identify people in photos and video later.

      The bill would also keep certain federal funds from city and state law enforcement who use biometric surveillance, like facial recognition.

      What this means:

      Facial recognition technology is too easy to abuse. The government is supposed to go through due process before investigating citizens.

      Even just learning the identity of someone is supposed to require reasonable suspicion that a crime has been committed.

      But facial recognition is a pre-emptive “search” revealing the identity of anyone on camera.

      And in addition to the due process concerns, facial recognition is a good way to quell dissent and protest from anyone afraid of being identified and targeted by the government for speaking out.

      * * *

      Colorado Police Reform bill on its way to ending qualified immunity

      What happened:

      A bill has passed the Colorado Senate which would end qualified immunity in the state.

      If the bill becomes law, it would mean police could be sued and charged for crimes they commit while acting in their official capacity as police officers.

      The bill also requires officers to intervene if a colleague is committing a crime or face possible charges themselves.

      It also permanently strips officers of their certification to be police officers if they are convicted or plead guilty to any excessive force violations.

      What this means:

      Qualified immunity is the legal doctrine that protects police from legal consequences if they claim they thought their actions were legal and necessary to do their job.

      To hold police accountable essentially requires a matching precedent that says a specific behavior or incident of brutality is not protected.

      Ending qualified immunity is a good first step towards holding police to the same legal standards as everyone else.

      * * *

      New Mexico Supreme Court says governments can snoop bank records

      What happened:

      The third party doctrine is used by the federal government to spy on anyone they want without a warrant.

      The idea is once a citizen gives information to a third party like a bank or internet provider, they have voluntarily given it away.

      The New Mexico Supreme Court just extended that power to state governments.

      So now it isn’t just the feds who can dig through your records without a warrant. State agencies and grand juries can do the same.

      What this means:

      Genius. The government forces banks to collect information on customers. And that means the customers have “voluntarily” handed that information to the bank.

      So of course then the bank can “voluntarily” give your information to the government.

      Of course this is all absurd mental gymnastics which trample the intention of privacy protections.

      But this is how the government operates. And little hole in your rights will be exploited, until the right no longer exists at all.

      * * *

      Biological male wins vote for Female District Leader in New York City

      What happened:

      For about 100 years, the Democratic Party in New York City has elected one male and one female party leader in each district.

      This is not a government position, but an unpaid internal party role. It was a feminist idea to allow women to gain a foothold in politics.

      But now a biological male identifying as a woman has been elected to the Female District Leader position in Queens, New York City.

      For the first time since the position was created, the district will have no natural born female representation in the party.

      What this means:

      We are into freedom. Frankly, what someone wants to do with their own body is their own business.

      But it’s hard to ignore the effects this has on natural born women with an XX chromosome.

      Feminists have long been warning that the gender issue would meld into a sex issue, and women would lose protections in areas like competitive sports, and privacy.

      Apparently, all it takes to be a woman is to declare it.

    • Texas Sees Record Jump In COVID-19 Hospitalizations: Live Updates
      Texas Sees Record Jump In COVID-19 Hospitalizations: Live Updates

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 20:45

      Summary:

      • Texas sees record jump in hospitalizations
      • California reports jump in daily cases
      • Taj Mahal closed until further notice
      • India draws nearer to Russia amid another record jump in cases
      • World sees record jump in COVID-19 cases
      • Florida reports 9,999 new cases
      • Arizona sees roughlt 3,500 new cases
      • South Africa sees record jump in new cases
      • US reports 53k cases for Sunday
      • WHO cancels hydroxychloroquine trials
      • Russia cases near 700k
      • Japan sees another 277 new cases

      * * *

      Update (1900ET): Texas saw daily hospitalizations reach a fresh record high on Sunday as 8,181 patients with the virus were admitted to hospitals around the state, even as the number of new COVID-19 cases reported declined day-over-day.

      Texas reported 3,449 new confirmed cases of COVID-19 Sunday, after a record high of 8,258 Saturday.

      State health officials also reported 29 additional deaths, bringing the totals to 2,637 deaths and 195,239 confirmed cases, per state data.

      Officials in cities like Austin are pushing Gov Abbott to return control to municipalities to allow some places to implement new stay-at-home orders, a measure the governor has resisted despite making mask-wearing mandatory. Mayor Steve Adler, a Democrat, said as much on CNN’s “State of the Union” Sunday as he warned that hospitals have been facing a crisis and ICUs could be overrun in as few as 10 days. A few counties warned that their ICUs had been overwhelmed over the last couple of days, and hospitals in Houston have already needed to transport some patients 50 miles away. In the Houston area, Democratic Harris County Judge Lina Hidalgo claimed a stay-at-home order is needed.

      * * *

      Update (1435ET): California reported another 5,410 new cases (+2.1%) on Sunday (remember, the cases are reported with a 24 hour delay). The positivity rate was 6.3%, down slightly from the rates seen on Thursday and Friday.

      The new cases brought the state’s total case count count climbed to  260,155

      The state also reported 17 deaths on Saturday…

      …which means mortality continues to trend lower across the state.

      * * *

      Update (1430ET): Already, it looks like India reported another record (or near record) total of new cases on Sunday.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The post-lockdown surge in the world’s second-most-populous nation took India’s total tally to more than 673,000 cases and 19,268 deaths, moving India closer to surpassing badly-hit Russia, the world’s third-most infected nation.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      …officials have announced that the Taj Mahal, India’s most popular tourist attraction and one of the seven wonders of the modern world, won’t reopen any time soon.

      “The Taj Mahal, which is in the Taj Ganj police station jurisdiction, is a ‘containment zone’,” a document released by Agra’s District Magistrate Prabhu N Singh stated late Sunday.

      Containment zones are where high infection rates have been detected, with all activity except essential services halted.

      * * *

      The world celebrated America’s independence by reporting 212,000 new cases of the Coronavirus yesterday, with roughly half that total came from the US, India and Brazil alone.

      Data from Johns Hopkins put the number at 207k:

      JHU put the number of cases confirmed in the US yesterday at 52,391, with 7.6% of tests coming back positive.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Source: JHU

      The last record high in the US arrived on July 3, when 57,549 people tested positive for the first time.

      Following studies showing hydroxychloroquine can be effective at mitigating symptoms in patients if taken early enough in the life of the infection, the WHO said yesterday that it planned to discontinue trials of the Trump-approved malaria drug, along with a combination HIV drugs known as lopinavir/ritonavir in hospitalised patients with COVID-19 after the medications failed to reduce mortality.

      This comes almost exactly a month after the WHO decided to resume trials of the drug.

      Worldwide cases have reached 11.23 million while 6.04 million patients have recovered, according to the latest Johns Hopkins University tally. The number of deaths worldwide hit more than 530,000.

      Already, Arizona and Florida have reported their case numbers for the last 24 hours, with both states seeing a minor retreat from the all-time highs in daily case numbers.

      As of Sunday, coronavirus cases are on the rise in 34 states over the past week, with 12 seeing an increase of more than 50%. Three states, Kentucky, New Hampshire and Vermont, are reporting a decline in cases.

      Florida reported 9,999 new coronavirus cases Sunday, coming one day after the state set a record for most cases in a single day with a total of 11,458 new cases, which also surpassed New York’s previous single-day high of 11,434, which was recorded in mid-April.

      Arizona reported 3,536 new cases, and 4 deaths, bringing its total confirmed to 98,089 1,809 coronavirus-related deaths, according to the state’s latest numbers.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      New York, meanwhile, saw another 533 new cases and 8 fatalities.

      He also confirmed the state would move on to phase 3 tomorrow.

      Internationally, the Philippines reported its biggest jump in new cases with 2,434, taking its total count to 44,254, the health ministry said.

      South Africa is reporting more than 10,000 new confirmed coronavirus cases for the first time in a single day, bringing the country’s total confirmed cases to more than 187,977, by far the most of any country in Africa.

      South Africa also has surpassed the deaths of 3,000 people in the outbreak.

      As more of the Middle East rolls back restrictions, Saudi Arabia’s coronavirus cases have surpassed 200,000 and neighboring UAE has 50,000, with the number of new cases climbing after both countries fully lifted curfews last month.

      Russia reported 6,736 new cases, bringing its total to 681,251, with 134 new deaths bringing its death toll to 10,161. India saw its biggest surge in COVID-19 cases, with 24,850 new cases and 613 deaths in the last 24 hours. The country’s tally of infections rose to 673,165 as the death toll increased to 19,268, according to health ministry data.

      FInally, Japan reported 277 new coronavirus cases Sunday morning, bringing the country’s total number of cases to 20,234 (19,522 on land and 712 on the Diamond Princess cruise ship).

    • Top Economist Warns No Recovery Until 2022, Stock Market Correction Ahead 
      Top Economist Warns No Recovery Until 2022, Stock Market Correction Ahead 

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 20:30

      It remains to be seen if the US economy even began anything that could realistically be called a “recovery” in June. After all, virus cases are surging, states are pausing or reversing reopening plans, and retail foot traffic has stalled. The “V-shaped recovery” hype in which jobs and economic growth will surge to 2019 levels ahead of the election is nothing more than propaganda hogwash from the Trump administration.

      Christophe Barraud, the chief economist of the broker-dealer Market Securities, recently told Business Insider that the economy wouldn’t revert to 2019 growth activity levels until at least 2022, adding that, “it will take a long time for life to return to normal.” 

      “Even if there is a vaccine by the end of the year, it likely wouldn’t be distributed until 2021, leaving a long time for the US to grapple with the virus,” he said. 

      Barraud said the recovery phase of the economy might not be seen until 2022 or after, and also said for Europe, recovery might not be seen until 2023.

      Barraud is ranked one of Bloomberg’s top economic forecasters for the last decade. His forecasts for the US, Europe, and China have been mostly accurate. So when he indicates the probabilities of a V-shaped recovery in the US are low for this year – readers should take note.

      Barraud said the stock market is priced for perfection, a lot of things have to go right at current valuations. He warns of a correction in equities as uncertainties increase over the shape of the recovery. 

      “Markets are not pricing in a lot of risks,” he said, adding that the latest sugar high in the economy is due to massive fiscal spending. 

      We noted last week that the economy could be headed for a fiscal cliff if the next round of stimulus doesn’t arrive by early August. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Barraud said around August – markets should focus on the presidential election.

      “That could lead people to take some profits, and market structure might revert back to what it looked like before coronavirus,” Barraud said. 

      He also said dismal corporate earnings and a second virus wave could result in investors locking in gains for the year ahead of the election. 

      “At this point, people look a little optimistic about EPS for next year,” said Barraud, adding that analysts and investors are expecting a V-shaped recovery and aren’t pricing in the potential risks, such as increased taxes, that could come as a result of the presidential election in November. 

      “The market could react because, at this point, there is no room for disappointment,” he warned.  

      Barraud said with no imminent coronavirus vaccine – there is “still some time for a second wave, which would be very damaging” to the economy and derail the recovery, resulting in a further deterioration of the jobs market. 

      We noted Sunday morning, with the unemployment level sill at Great Depression levels, the stock market is set for a rude awakening as nearly 3 million jobs in June, up from 1.6 million in February, have been eliminated from the economy. 

      Permanent Job Loss (inverse) vs. S&P500

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “My advice would be to be cautious from August, maybe take some protection,” Barraud said. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In a separate piece, he recently said the global trade recovery would be much slower than the market is anticipating.  

      It appears a lot of disappointments are ahead. 

    • Jim Bovard: Old Coins Taught Me To Never Trust The Government
      Jim Bovard: Old Coins Taught Me To Never Trust The Government

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 20:00

      Authored by Jim Bovard via The Libertarian Institute,

      Old coins vaccinated me against trusting politicians long before I grew my first scruffy beard. I began collecting coins when I was eight years old in 1965, the year President Lyndon Johnson began eliminating all the silver in new dimes, quarters, and half dollars. LBJ swore that there would be no profit in “hoarding” earlier coins “for the value of their silver content.” Wrong, dude: silver coins are now worth roughly fifteen times their face value.

      History had always enthralled me, and handling old coins was like shaking hands with the pioneers who built this country. I wondered if the double dented 1853 quarter I bought at a coin show was ever involved in Huckleberry Finn–type adventures when “two bits” could buy a zesty time. I had a battered copper two-cent piece from 1864, the same year that Union general Phil Sheridan burned down the Shenandoah Valley where I was raised. Some of the coins I collected might now be banned as hate symbols, such as Indian Head pennies and Buffalo nickels (with an Indian portrait engraved on the front).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In the era of this nation’s birth, currency was often recognized as a character issue—specifically, the contemptible character of politicians. Shortly before the 1787 Constitutional Convention, George Washington warned that unsecured paper money would “ruin commerce, oppress the honest, and open the door to every species of fraud and injustice.”

      But as time passed, Americans forgot the peril of letting politicians ravage their currency. In 1933, the US had the largest gold reserves of any nation in the world. But fear of devaluation spurred a panic, which President Franklin Roosevelt invoked to justify seizing people’s gold to give himself “freedom of action” to lower the dollar’s value. FDR denounced anyone who refused to turn in their gold as a “hoarder” who faced ten years in prison and a $250,000 fine.

      FDR’s prohibition effectively banished from circulation the most glorious coin design in American history—the twenty-dollar Saint-Gaudens Double Eagle gold piece. I was captivated by early American coin designs, especially those featuring idealized female images emblazoned with the word liberty. I was unaware that George Washington refused to allow his own image on the nation’s coins because it would be too “monarchical.” Until 1909, there was an unwritten law that no portrait appear on any American coin in circulation. That changed with the hundredth anniversary of the birth of Abraham Lincoln, whom the Republican Party found profitable to canonize on pennies.

      By the mid-twentieth century, American coinage had degenerated into paeans to dead politicians. Portraits of Franklin Roosevelt, John F. Kennedy, and Dwight Eisenhower were slapped onto coins almost as soon as their pulses stopped. This reflected a sea change in values as Americans were encouraged to expect more from their leaders than from their own freedom.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The Double Eagle, which was designed by sculptor Augustus St. Gaudens, is widely considered to be the most beautiful US coin ever minted.

      Coin dealing helped me recognize early on that a government promise is not worth a plug nickel. From 1878 onwards, the US Mint printed silver certificates, a form of paper currency. My 1935 silver certificate stated: “This certifies that there is on deposit in the Treasury of the United States of America One Dollar in Silver Payable to the Bearer on Demand.” But in the 1960s, that became inconvenient so the government simply nullified the promise.

      On August 15, 1971, President Richard Nixon announced that the US would cease paying gold to redeem the dollars held by foreign central banks. The dollar thus became a fiat currency—something which possessed value solely because politicians said so. Nixon assured Americans that his default would “help us snap out of the self-doubt, the self-disparagement that saps our energy and erodes our confidence in ourselves.” Regrettably, this particular treachery was not included on the list of indictable offenses that the House Judiciary Committee enacted a few years later.

      After Nixon’s declaration of economic martial law, I lost my enthusiasm for squirreling away one memento from each mint and each year in the Whitman blue coin folders that permeated many 1960s childhoods. I shifted from collecting to investing, hoping that old coins would be a good defense against Nixon’s “New Economics.” Prices for pristine coin specimens were far higher and more volatile than the value of some of the barely legible slabs of metal I previously amassed. A single blemish could slash the value of a rare coin by 80 percent (same problem I had with some manuscripts I’ve submitted over the years).

      Coin values were pump primed by the Federal Reserve’s deluge of paper dollars to create an artificial boom to boost Nixon’s reelection campaign and supplemented by wage and price controls that wreaked havoc. Inflation almost quadrupled between 1972 and 1974, and I soaked up the cynicism and outrage prevailing in coin investment and hard money newsletters. I poured most of the money from the jobs I did during high school into rare coins. Because rare coins were appreciating almost across the board, it was difficult not to be lucky in a rising market. The biggest peril was the endless scam artists seeking to fleece people with false promises of lofty gains or fraudulent grading of rare coins—a pox that continues to this day.

      After graduating high school in 1974, I began working a construction job. When I got laid off, I saw it as a sign from God (or at least from the market) to buy gold. Investment newsletters and political debacles convinced me the dollar was heading for a crash. I sold most of my rare coins and plunked all my available cash into gold and also took out a consumer finance loan at 18 percent to purchase even more. That interest rate was the gauge of my blind confidence. Nixon’s resignation in August 1974 did wonders to redeem my gamble.

      My coin and gold speculations helped pay for my brief stints in college, with some greenbacks left over to cover living expenses during my first literary strikeouts. I eventually shifted into journalism and migrated to the Washington area.

      Two weeks after I moved into a shabby group house in the District of Columbia in 1983, I pawned the last gem of my coin collection—the 1885 five-dollar gold piece that my Irish American grandmother had given me fifteen years earlier. She was a dear sweet lady who would have appreciated that her gift helped cover the rent for a few more weeks until I finally consistently hit solid paydirt later that year. (Thanks, Reader’s Digest!)

      Wheeling and dealing with coins inoculated me against Beltway-style agoraphobia—a pathological dread of any unregulated market. The market set the price for 1950 Jefferson nickels coined in Denver based on the relatively small mintage chased by growing legions of young collectors. Nixon boosted the price of milk after the dairy lobby pledged $2 million in illegal contributions. It was nuts to permit politicians to control prices when there was no way to control politicians. Having watched coin values whipsaw over the prior decade, I recognized that value was subjective. The test of a fair price is the voluntary consent of each party to the bargain, “the free will which constitutes fair exchanges,” as Senator John Taylor wrote in 1822. Seven years ago, President Barack Obama, talking about how the government was losing money minting the lowest denomination coin, declared, “The penny, I think, ends up being a good metaphor for some of the larger problems we got.” Actually, the collapse of our currency’s value is a curse, not a metaphor. The dollar has lost 85 percent of its purchasing power since Nixon closed the gold window.

      For a century, American coinage and currency policies have veered between “government as a damn rascal” and “government as a village idiot.” I remain mystified how anyone continues trusting their rulers after the government formally repudiates its promises. But I still appreciate old coins with beautiful designs that incarnated the American creed that no man has a right to be enshrined above anyone else.

    • How Deutsche Bank Helped Con The Public Into Believing In Wirecard
      How Deutsche Bank Helped Con The Public Into Believing In Wirecard

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 19:30

      More reporting on the Wirecard situation has emerged over the long weekend in the US, and none of it is flattering.

      As a court-appointed administrator begins the process of managing what’s left of Wirecard through the insolvency process, while doing the best the government can to compensate shareholders who were deceived by the onetime fintech darling, WSJ reports that the (now former) COO, Jan Marsalek, has disappeared, with many suspecting that the longtime COO – who probably knows where many of the bodies are buried – has gone on the run as German prosecutors seek to question hi,.

      His motives aren’t too difficult to discern: With CEO Markus Braun out on bail, it’s likely that Marsalek, who’s suspected of playing a critical role in maintaining the company’s complex shell game with the “Asian third-parties” which helped Wirecard conceal its accounting fraud, even from the auditors who apparently never bothered to actually check these accounts.

      When the FT reported last year that most of Wirecard’s actual profits were generated by its opaque Asian businesses, the company denied it, with CEO Markus Braun insisting this was “simply not true”.  But once again, it appears the FT reporters were spot-on, as an appendix to to KPMG’s damning third-party report obtained exclusively by the FT purports to show.

      Per the FT, Wirecard’s core business in Europe and the Americas has been lossmaking for years, which means the only Wirecard subsidiaries worth any money are those tied to the company’s most opaque operations, which might make it more difficult to sell the business lines that aren’t impacted by the fraud, and which still have value (theoretically, at least).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Some background: German payments group collapsed into insolvency last month after revealing that €1.9 billion ($2.1 billion) in cash in its accounts actually “didn’t exist”, exposing the “highly profitable” payments company and lender as a fraud.

      According to its EY-audited financial reports, between 2016 and 2018 Wirecard generated operating margins of around 22% and almost doubled annual earnings before interest and taxes to €439 million. However, these profits appear to have existed largely on paper, according to the section of the KMPG report (which has already been made public, though the appendix has not) obtained by the FT. The businesses in question are WC’s payments business in Europe and Asia, and its credit card business in Europe and North America. Not only were these businesses lossmaking, but they’ve become increasingly money-losing in recent years.

      During this time, Wirecard contended that its opaque Asian business more than offset these losses. But now it appears that 2/3rds of that businesses profits were completely imaginary. The company’s activities outside Asia haven’t actually generated a profit since 2016.

      Wirecard’s court-appointed administrator Michael Jaffé is facing a difficult task as he tries to manage the sale of a few profitable business lines in WC’s banking and payments businesses. As more damning information comes to light, a sale of Wirecard’s subsidiaries needs to happen within weeks or they will lose any remaining value. “Wirecard has very few physical assets, and the risk is that many of its clients will switch to rivals soon,” said an anonymous source quoted by the FT. That source also claimed that the legal claims against Wirecard’s former management and its auditor (EY)  said one of the people, adding that Wirecard’s legal claims against its former management and its accountant may be more valuable than its remaining operating business.

      Several buyers have expressed interest, including – most notably – Deutsche Bank, which maintains it is best positioned to integrate Wirecard’s legit businesses into its existing operations.

      In an extraordinary example of how banks can sometimes abuse the “Chinese Wall” that’s supposed to exist between the stock analysts and the investment bankers, Deutsche Bank, over the course of a year, hedged all of its loan exposure (some $300 million in loans to both Wirecard and its (now former) chief executive, Markus Braun) to Wirecard. Meanwhile, its independent investment-management unit (DWS) piled into Wirecard’s shares, and DB’s analysts issued at least one “buy” rating on the DAX component’s shares.

      As Wirecard’s shares eclipsed those of Germany financial champions like Deutsche Bank and Commerzbank (which WDI would later replace as a component of the DAX), the financial establishment in the country went from treating Wirecard like a pariah or a novelty (the company got its start providing payments infrastructure to adult entertainment sites and other shadier corners of the Internet) to a true national champion.

      One of DB’s most egregious decisions involving Wirecard was hiring Andreas Loetscher, the Ernst & Young partner who oversaw several audits of Wirecard’s results, as chief accounting officer. Loetscher is now under investigation by German authorities.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Source: BBG

      When the FT, published its first story alleging certain ‘accounting irregularities’ at Wirecard (the first in a series led by intrepid investigative reporter Dan McCrum) DB’s investment bankers immediately started worrying about the bank’s exposure should the company’s shares (against which all of DB’s loans were collateralized).

      At Deutsche Bank, some executives grew alarmed, including Garth Ritchie, the head of investment banking at the time. Ritchie’s skepticism had arisen in part from conversations with hedge-fund clients that had conducted their own research into the firm’s workings, and who had been betting against the stock. His unit oversaw a 150 million-euro loan to Braun that was secured by Wirecard shares, so if the shares fell, the bank could lose a lot of money.

      Risk managers led by Stuart Lewis, Deutsche Bank’s chief risk officer, were also worried. The lender had agreed to provide around 120 million euros to Wirecard as part of that firm’s revolving credit facility, but the payments company was expanding very rapidly and Deutsche Bank didn’t fully understand all the factors at play. They reduced their exposure and increased their hedge in the wake of the FT story.

      When Wirecard approached DB about a merger last spring, the bank courteously declined. As its bankers sold off chunks of its Wirecard exposure, they made sure to do so quietly, so as not to spark a market panic that the biggest bank in Germany was getting cold feet on Wirecard. When SoftBank stepped up and invested €900 million in a complicated capital injection, DB’s analysts upped their rating on Wirecard stock to buy from hold, and projected 20% upside.

      Later that year, when SoftBank got cold feet and started looking for a way out of its partnership with Wirecard, DB declined to help underwrite a convertible bond sold by Wirecard as part of the deal last spring. And while the bank did underwrite a €500 million bond deal for Wirecard in September, the entire inventory of debt was sold on to investors. The bank was more than happy to underwrite this debt and sell it on to yield-starve institutions despite having declined to underwrite a more complicated debt security for fear of getting stuck with too much of the product on its books, according to BBG.

      When Wirecard shares sold off last fall, DWS doubled down. Yet, by the time Wirecard spiraled into insolvency in the spring, a margin loan to CEO Braun was off the bank’s books. But DB apparently helped Braun find another lender in the form of German bank Oldenburgische Landesbank, a small regional lender backed by private equity investors including Apollo Global Management.

      Although DB is among a group of 15 lenders owed some €1.6 billion by Wirecard, its actual exposure is closer to €70 million, assuming the credit facility was 90% drawn down. Commerzbank, ABN Amro and ING are each owed twice as much.

      And here’s the kicker: With Wirecard headed for insolvency, Deutsche Bank is now considering buying Wirecard’s banking operations, which have been ringfenced from the rest of the company by BaFin. After all that, DB could walk away with the only profitable business in the entire toxic company at a substantial discount. And with the explicit help of BaFin, the German securities regulator that actively protected Wirecard by attacking the FT and its reporters and even going so far as to bar short-selling in Wirecard shares. Most analysts believe that the company’s lending business will be worthless soon if clients go elsewhere. That should set the stage for DB to acquire the business at a substantial discount.

      In summary, DB basically did more than any other member of the German establishment (perhaps aside from BaFin) to legitimize Wirecard. Now, DB is set to become one of the biggest beneficiaries of the company’s historic collapse.

    • 67 Shot, 13 Fatally, Over Fourth of July Weekend In Chicago: Police
      67 Shot, 13 Fatally, Over Fourth of July Weekend In Chicago: Police

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 19:00

      Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times,

      At least 67 people were shot, including 13 fatally, over the Independence Day weekend in Chicago, according to authorities.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Nine of the weekend’s victims were minors, and two children died, officials told Fox32. That includes 14-year-old boy who was among four people who were killed in the South Side neighborhood Englewood on Saturday evening.

      The victims were at a large gathering on the street at around 11:35 p.m. on South Carpenter Street. Four males then approached the group and began shooting, police said, adding that the 14-year-old boy was shot in the back before he was taken to Comer Children’s Hospital, where he was later pronounced dead.

      The three other males, who were not identified, were pronounced dead at the scene and at the University of Chicago Medical Center, police said.

      In the same incident, an 11-year-old boy suffered a bullet graze wound, and a 15-year-old boy was shot in the abdomen. They were taken to the Comer hospital, and both are currently in fair condition, authorities said.

      Officials said a 7-year-old girl was shot in the head while standing on the sidewalk at her grandmother’s house during a Fourth of July celebration at 7 p.m. in Austin on the West Side, according to The Associated Press.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      “Tonight, a 7-year-old girl in Austin joined a list of teenagers and children whose hopes and dreams were ended by the barrel of a gun,” Mayor Lori Lightfoot wrote on Twitter on Saturday.

      “As a city, we must wrap our arms around our youth so they understand there’s a future for them that isn’t wrapped up in gun violence.”

      In the incident, according to police, suspects emerged from a vehicle and started shooting. No suspects have been apprehended.

      Chicago Police Chief of Operations Fred Waller told NBC5 that the violence against children needs to end.

      “You gotta be tired of this,” he said.

      “Chicago’s heart is broken again. Austin’s heart is broken again … I’m tired of this.”

      Meanwhile, in a later incident at around 2:15 a.m. on Sunday in the South Side, a 21-year-old man was shot to death while standing on the sidewalk, police said. An hour before that, a woman was shot and five men were injured when a person opened fire at a crowd setting off fireworks in the West Side’s Lawndale neighborhood.

      Commenting on the latest violence, president Trump tweeted that shootings are significantly also in NYC “where people are demanding that @NYGovCuomo & @NYCMayor act now. Federal Government ready, willing and able to help, if asked!”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • China New Car Sales Crash 37% In 4th Week Of June
      China New Car Sales Crash 37% In 4th Week Of June

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 18:30

      June does not appear to be shaping up to be the month where Chinese auto sales “bounce back”. Dealing with recessionary headwinds pre-Covid, the world’s largest auto market has been decimated by the effect of the pandemic and doesn’t look to be leading the world to any type of meaningful recovery any time soon.

      Overnight the China Passenger Car Association said that retail car sales were down 37% YOY for the 4th week of June.

      Average daily sales were down to 51,627 during June 22-27. This is a 6% sequential fall from the same week in May, indicating little respite or improvement from the pressure of the coronavirus pandemic on the industry. PCA blamed “seasonal factors” for the drop, which is a funny way to say “Chinese-borne virus ravaging the entire planet”. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This also paints an ugly picture for June’s new car sales number, since we reported about 3 weeks ago that the first week in June was also off to an ugly start. In that article, we noted that retail car sales fell 10% year over year – but more importantly 20% from the same period in May – in the first week of June.

      June’s interim data comes after what looked like the beginning of a rebound for the industry in May, to the extent that we can trust the numbers coming out of Beijing. This news comes despite better than expected results in May, where sales showed a 12% increase year over year. 

      According to The Detroit Bureau, premium and luxury passenger car retail sales led the charge in May, rising 28% last month compared with year-ago results. Those vehicles accounted for 1.61 million of the month’s 2.14 million vehicles sold.

      The China Association of Automobile Manufacturers, or CAAM, had predicted an 11.7% jump for May, including commercial vehicle sales in its results. Predictions for June look ominous: the CPCA has said that June sales will decline in part because June 2019 was such a strong month for the industry.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Meanwhile, the Chinese government is attempting to spur demand with new policies aimed at enticing buyers, according to Bloomberg, citing an unnamed automotive industry group in China. 

      Recall, we have recently noted that U.S. auto manufacturers are also teeing up sizeable incentives to get buyers back into showrooms. Europe is following suit, with Volkswagen starting a sales initiative to revive demand, including improved leasing and financing terms. 

      Outlook for the year in China remains less-than-optimistic. The CAAM predicts that sales will drop 15% to 25% for the year, depending on whether or not the country is able to further slow the spread of the virus.

      June’s full retail vehicle sales data should be available in days. 

    • State Dept Warns Top US Firms To Replace Supply Chains Exposed To China's Xinjiang
      State Dept Warns Top US Firms To Replace Supply Chains Exposed To China’s Xinjiang

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 18:15

      Now that the Senate has joined the House in its condemnation of China’s National Security Law, and on Thursday passed by unanimous consent a bipartisan bill to impose sanctions on Chinese officials who threaten Hong Kong’s limited autonomy, as well as the banks and firms that do business with them, we eagerly await when (and perhaps, if) Trump will sign the legislation into law (according to a WSJ report from Thursday, the White House hasn’t responded to a request for comment over whether the president will support the bill).

      And since it is unlikely that Trump will object to the veto-proof law – after all, the last thing he wants is to be seen as easy on China ahead of the election – on Friday, the State Department warned top American companies including Walmart, Apple and Amazon over risks faced from maintaining supply chains associated with human rights abuses in China’s western Xinjiang region, according to a letter seen by Reuters on Thursday. 

      “It is critical that U.S. companies and individuals be aware of the large-scale human rights abuses perpetrated by the PRC government in Xinjiang,” Keith Krach, Undersecretary of State for economic growth, energy and the environment wrote on July 1 according to Reuters. “Businesses should evaluate their exposure to the risks that result from partnering with, investing in, and otherwise providing support to companies that operate in or are linked to Xinjiang,” he said in the letter which was sent to trade groups.

      The warning comes at a time when the United States has been ratcheting up pressure on China over that country’s treatment of Muslim Uighurs in Xinjiang and Beijing’s new national security law for Hong Kong. It also follows a U.S. government advisory sent out on Wednesday which said that companies doing business in Xinjiang or with entities using Xinjiang labor could be exposed to “reputational, economic, and legal risks”.

      Naturally, China was hardly impressed by the latest escalation, and when he was asked about the U.S. government’s warnings over supply chain risks linked to Xinjiang, Chinese foreign ministry spokesman Zhao Lijian said that allegations of forced laboer were fabrications.

      “Some people in the U.S. keep on saying they care about ethnic minorities in Xinjiang while also taking all kinds of measures to oppress Xinjiang companies,” he said at a daily news conference in Beijing.

      As Reuters further notes, in a call with reporters, Krach said the complex nature of supply chains was making companies vulnerable to potential risks and urged them to be more vigilant. He did not say how many U.S. companies might have been entangled in such supply chains.

      The real question, of course, is not Xinjuang, but how far will the US push China, and how long before all China-based supply chains receive a similar warning, resulting in an unprecedented hit to global trade. In any event, the bottom line is clear: US corporations are now under the clock to shifting most if not all Chinese supply chains away from the country. Needless to say, the inflationary consequences of such a transition – which will take years to complete and billions of dollars to be optimized – can not be underscored enough. And since this is happening at a time of global demand-side deflation, the most likely outcome will be a brutally painful burst of stagflation which could last for years.

    • "Concept Incubator" Envisages Babies Being Grown At Home In A Pod
      “Concept Incubator” Envisages Babies Being Grown At Home In A Pod

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 18:00

      Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

      A “concept incubator” envisages a dystopian future where babies are grown inside sophisticated electronic pods which completely replace the womb and pregnancy.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The promotional video for the baby pod stresses how parents will be able to focus on other things like work while the pod baby is taken care of by the machine.

      “Parents would be able to live their lives normally,” states the promo, as if having a baby naturally is abnormal.

      “It has a dock to insert food,” states the promo as a woman is shown pouring green gunk into a canister. There’s also a “microphone” attached so people can “speak to the foetus.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The pod, which thankfully is just an “idea” at this stage, was *birthed* by students at Product Design Arnhem.

      According to Tech Insider, the arrival of the pod baby is “only a matter of time” because it is not that different from lambs already being grown inside “biobags.”

      Responses on Twitter to the pod baby concept were not overly enthusiastic.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The happy clappy promotional video did not make mention of the fact that this all sounds like some horrific dystopian hybrid of Aldous Huxley’s Brave New World and a plot from Black Mirror.

      Huxley’s 1932 classic portrayed a soft form of totalitarianism where children are biologically engineered from birth in test tubes where each one is given a predestined course in life which is dependent on the conditioning techniques used on its decanted embryo.

      While the “concept incubator” falls far short of that scenario, it does promote the idea of dehumanizing the baby by removing the mother from the process entirely.

      As we have previously highlighted, the tech elite seems to be obsessed with further atomizing human beings by making them do literally everything from within the confines of a pod, whether that be living, exercising, working, or eating.

      Since the coronavirus outbreak, numerous restaurants have announced that they’ll be enclosing diners within pods or greenhouses, despite the fact that they will obviously overheat in summer.

      “Transparent corrals for beach-goers. Dining pods. Clear boxes for students. The demand for plexiglass protective shields has never been higher,” announced the Wall Street Journal this week.

      *  *  *

      My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.

    • Musk Tweets Link To "Limited Edition" Short Shorts At Tesla's Online Store
      Musk Tweets Link To “Limited Edition” Short Shorts At Tesla’s Online Store

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 17:45

      In what is becoming the ultimate display of hubris – or perhaps a purposeful distraction from the Ghislaine Maxwell photograph that is making its way around the internet faster than coronavirus is spreading across the world – Elon Musk Tweeted out on Sunday afternoon that Tesla would now be selling “short shorts”, in what is a continuing dig at short sellers.

      Recall, last week, Musk took a swipe at both the SEC – again referring to them as the “Shortseller Enrichment Commission” and possibly suggesting that the regulator fellate him – and short sellers.

      “Who wears short shorts,” Musk tweeted last week, antagonizing short sellers. And in a separate exchange, Musk seemed to offer his approval for a pair of short shorts, with gold trim, that had the phrase “S*** Elon’s C***” on them. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Musk took what was a stupid joke to begin with, laden with hubris and perhaps other mind-altering ego-droppings, and doubled down on it on Sunday, when he Tweeted out that “Limited edition short shorts now available” at the Tesla store.

      He posted a link to the store, which shows actual short shorts for sale.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “Only $69.420!!” Musk Tweeted, doing his best impression of a middle schooler laughing uncomfortably while shooting root beer out of their nose and onto their Dungeons and Dragons board the first time they hear a sex joke. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      “Celebrate summer with Tesla Short Shorts. Run like the wind or entertain like Liberace with our red satin and gold trim design. Relax poolside or lounge indoors year-round with our limited-edition Tesla Short Shorts, featuring our signature Tesla logo in front with ‘S3XY’ across the back. Enjoy exceptional comfort from the closing bell,” the product description says.

      Meanwhile, Musk continues to bicker with journalist Ken Klippenstein, as we laid out in our article this morning, regarding the details of his relationship with Jeffrey Epstein and Ghislaine Maxwell, if any. 

      But, at least he can do so knowing another day has gone by where he has “bested” short sellers.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsAs for the shorts…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • 80% Of NYC Restaurants Couldn't Afford June Rent
      80% Of NYC Restaurants Couldn’t Afford June Rent

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/05/2020 – 17:45

      The majority of restaurant owners around the city did not pay their entire rent in June, with 36% skipping out on it altogether, as the coronavirus pandemic continues to make it harder for eateries to survive, a new survey found according to Commercial Observer.

      The nonprofit New York City Hospitality Alliance surveyed 509 restaurateurs around the city and found four out of five didn’t pay the full June rent. Of those, 90% said they paid half or less last month.

      “Rent is putting enormous financial pressure on restaurants, bars and clubs after four near-fatal months of economic disaster in which many have already shuttered for good,” said Andrew Rigie, executive director of the NYC Hospitality Alliance

      “Pre-pandemic, it was incredibly difficult to run a successful restaurant,” added Rigie. “These conditions, the longer that it goes on, is going to make it more and more challenging for small businesses to ever recover. The vast majority of small businesses will not be able to pay back months of missed rent.”

      As the report further notes, the survey also found that landlords have been unwilling to give restaurants a break: 60% of restaurant owners said their landlords refused to give them deferments during the pandemic, while only 10% were able to renegotiate their leases. In total 73% of landlords — also under economic stress — refused to waive rent payments for their restaurants, bars and clubs in June, the poll found.

      “Our small businesses urgently need support on rent, so government officials, landlords and banks need to work together to find a solution. Whether it’s direct rent subsidies, deferring rent and extending payment schedules to the back end of lease agreements, and other creative ideas, we are in the midst of a rent crisis and need action now,” Rigie said adding that restaurant owners are “hanging on by a thread and they’re exhausting their personal savings in the hope of one day getting their business up and running again.”

      Even with the challenges and debts piling up, owners said most aren’t looking to close up shop.

      “The idea of walking away right now is not something that most folks want to do,” said Karl Franz Williams, the owner of Harlem’s 67 Orange Street cocktail bar who was able to get a rent break from his landlord. “They want to figure out how to make it through. [Owning a restaurant is] not something most of us are doing just for the fun of it.”

      Emergency restrictions put in place to curb the spread of the coronavirus forced restaurants and bars to switch to take-out and delivery models since late-March. Owners dealt with a significant drop in revenue and were forced to lay off thousands of workers.

      The city began to ease restrictions in June as the number of cases dropped and last week restaurants and bars were allowed to start outdoor service. While that has helped, Rigie said that most of the extra funds generated from outdoors sales immediately went to rent and other expenses.

      And as the number of people infected with coronavirus began spiking in other states around the country, Gov. Andrew Cuomo indefinitely postponed the return of indoor dining around the city this week, which was scheduled to start on July 6. Rigie said the move could cause more restaurants to permanently shutter.

      Willimas said the return of indoor dining likely won’t be the shot in the arm for restaurants most people think it will be. He owns an eatery in New Haven, Ct., The Anchor Spa, which has been allowed to start indoor dining but the spot is still doing 30 percent of its pre-COVID-19 sales.

      “We’re not back yet, we’re still struggling and indoor dining is not the end-all,” he said. “There’s still a lot of trepidation of being inside a small space.”

      Plus, landlords and other debtors will think it’s business as usual once indoor dining returns and will come to collect debts, Williams said. And re-opening indoor seating too soon could be the death knell for many businesses if a second-wave hits.

      “The only thing worse than delaying restaurants opening indoors is to have them re-open and then shut down shortly thereafter because of a spike of COVID cases,” Rigie said. “While there’s an urgency to start opening and generating revenue, there’s a great fear that it can result in a spike of coronavirus and that would further devastate the industry and make it more unlikely that these businesses will ever recover.”

      What would be a bigger help than returning indoor dining for owners would be for the government to step in with either rent subsidies, deferrals or other methods to keep restaurants alive, Rigie said.

      “We need all levels of government, the banks, the landlords and the commercial tenants to come together and figure out how to deal with this situation,” he said. “We just can’t keep ignoring it.”

      “We’re eager to work with lawmakers and industry leaders on any tangible plans that provide immediate relief to struggling restaurants and nightlife venues across the city before it’s too late.”

      Another form of relief would be to extend take-out and delivery alcohol sales along with the cap of third-party delivery fees implemented during the pandemic until months after the epidemic finally wanes, Williams said.

      “Everything is uncertain right now, we don’t know if there’s going to be another wave,” he said. “That’s why I really hope that our elected officials will make some of the things that they’ve given us more permanent. Running your business in a total state of insecurity, where you don’t know what’s going to happen, is not a way to run your business.”

       

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 4th July 2020

    • Is America Heading For Civil War?
      Is America Heading For Civil War?

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 23:10

      Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

      In last week’s article I discussed the issue of American “balkanization” and the rapid migration of conservatives and moderates from large population centers and states that are becoming militant in their progressive ideology. In my home state of Montana there has been a surge of people trying to escape the chaos and oppression of leftist states. Some are here because of the pandemic and the harsh restrictions they had to endure during the first lockdowns. Others are here because they can’t stand the hostility of identity politics, cancel culture and race riots. Either way, they are fleeing places with decidedly leftist influences.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Uprooting and moving to an entirely new place is not an easy thing to do, especially in the middle of a pandemic. For many people, such an idea would have been unthinkable only a few years ago. Believe me, moving to a place like the Rocky Mountain Redoubt is not an easy transition for most. Hopefully these people understand that they will have to make extensive preparations for the rough winter and be ready to work hard in the spring and summer months to survive. Maybe they don’t realize yet how tough it is here; maybe they know and don’t care.

      That’s how bad the situation has become – Rational and reasonable people are willing to leave behind their old life and risk it all to keep a margin of freedom.

      In my view it is clear that the political left has gone so far off the rails into its own cultism that there is no coming back. There can be no reconciliation between the two sides, so we must separate, or we must fight. I advocate for separation first for a number of reasons:

      • First and foremost, conservatives are the primary producers within American culture. If we leave the leftists to their own devices there is a chance they will simply implode in on themselves and eat each other because they have no idea how to fill the production void. The recent developments in the defunct CHAZ/CHOP autonomous zone are a perfect example. Those people don’t have the slightest clue what they are doing and it shows.

      • Second, if conservatives separate it provides a buffer that helps defuse future random conflicts. When you force the two sides into a box together eventually they will find a reason to try to kill each other. Putting some distance between them and us reduces the angst.

      • Third, if the leftists decide they don’t like that we have separated and are thriving on our own, and they attempt to antagonize or attack us where we live, then we hold the clear moral high ground when we smash them to pieces in response.

      I fully realize that the third outcome is the most likely. War is probably inevitable. Why? Because collectivists and narcissists are never satisfied. They desire unlimited control over the lives of others and they will use any means to get that control no matter how destructive. Separating from them is only a stop-gap that allows us to take the superior position. Through peaceful migration, we set the pace of the conflict. Eventually they will come after us, and there will be no doubt about our response then. There will be no way to spin the result in their favor, no way for them to play the victims.

      Some people might question if we are actually to the point of open conflict; they might accuse me of “doom mongering”. Others may argue that conservatives are acting “passive” and that we will never take any action. These assumptions are common right now because such people do not understand how history progresses and how group psychology evolves.

      Domestic war is not something pursued lightly, or haphazardly. The average person knows at least subconsciously that it is better to seek resolution or to remain patient as events unfold. Conservatives aren’t stupid; we know that before any civil war there is first a culture war. And, we know that the cards are stacked against us and that if we act rashly in any way we will lose position in that culture war.

      So, we let the leftists spit and rage like madmen for a little while. Each day people who were on the fence when it comes to the culture war are witnessing this and come over to our side because we’re the only side that is sane. The drawback is, there comes a point in which calm professionalism might be wrongly perceived as weakness. And when people sense weakness among conservatives, they might run into the arms of the extreme left thinking that it’s safer to join the “winning team”.

      I think conservatives have not been sucked into a reactionary stance yet because they are thinking logically and refusing to play the game for now. In some ways it is how we enter the fight that is more important than the fight itself.  To understand why, we have to look at the bigger picture beyond the left/right conflict.

      As I noted last week, the political left is a tool for a greater agenda. They are being used as a weapon of chaos by globalist interests. This is not “conspiracy theory”, this is conspiracy fact. Millions of dollar have poured into Antifa and BLM related groups through elitist donors like George Soros and his Open Society Foundation as well as the Ford Foundation. Globalist institutions like these have been influencing the extreme left and promoting identity politics for DECADES. This is openly admitted. What we are witnessing in 2020 is simply the culmination of a half-century long propaganda campaign that created the modern feminist movement, victim group status, entitlement culture, etc.

      The reason for the agenda should be obvious: Chaos creates fear. Fear creates division and crisis. And, crisis creates opportunity (as globalist Rahm Emanuel once bragged). Meaning, the extreme left is going to start a war because that’s exactly what the global elites created them for.

      Now, some might suggest that this places conservatives in a Catch-22 position; if we don’t fight back then we will look weak. We will be culturally isolated and eventually overrun and wiped from the history books. If we do fight back we will be giving the globalists what they want – A civil war that will tear America apart.

      The suggestion by certain special interests will be that there is only one way out; use government power to turn the tide to our advantage. In other words, institute martial law. I don’t really see it that way.

      Once we understand that a fight is coming regardless, our task is to position ourselves with the most advantage possible while keeping our culture and our principles intact. This includes our belief in constitutionalism, civil liberties and opposition to tyranny in ANY form. Winning the fight is important, but maintaining our principles in the process is more important. Becoming a monster to fight the monster is the same as losing.

      When the left comes for us (and they will), the fight has to be won by us, not government. We cannot hand even more power to government in the name of security. We cannot become the fascists the leftists accuse us of being.

      I am often asked these days about my view of the 2020 election and how it will turn out. I did predict Trump’s election win in the summer of 2016 based on the idea that Trump’s presence in the White House would drive the left insane, as well as give the globalists a perfect “conservative” scapegoat for the economic collapse they had been engineering since at least 2008.

      Trump’s cabinet of global elitists suggests his complacency in this plan.  We still live under a one party system pretending as if it is a two party paradigm.

      Furthermore, I am not convinced there will even be an election in November. With pandemic lockdowns surely returning as infections spike once again, the US economy will be in ruins by winter. Voting in a traditional fashion will be difficult or restricted in some states. And, mail-in or digital ballots will not be accepted by most conservatives because of their history of being used to rig election outcomes.

      Look at it this way: If Trump “wins”, or delays the election, the left will riot and a civil war will be triggered. Conservatives will have to deal with the violence of the left while also dealing with the potential for martial law (which we cannot tolerate or support either). If Biden “wins”, it will be perceived by many conservatives who still think elections matter as a stolen presidency engineered through fraudulent ballot practices.

      To summarize, if Trump is still in the White House in 2021, get ready to fight back against leftist mobs as well as martial law measures. If you believe in freedom, realize that fake conservatives that support government tyranny will be as much a problem as Marxist lefties. If Biden enters the White House, expect him to immediately implement unconstitutional policies including medical tyranny, gun confiscation and martial law. Either way, it ends in war.

      It’s also the classic false choice narrative:  You can choose Marxism and communism, or you can choose fascism.  Communism being the elevation of the weak and the oppression of the strong in the name of arbitrary “equality”, and fascism being the elimination of the weak or less fortunate in the name of making more room for the strong.  Both sides rely on totalitarian government to assert dominance, and both sides benefit the elitist establishment.  The great con is that there is no third option, when there is; the non-aggression principle, citizen defense, voluntarism and freedom.

      Frankly, I almost prefer a scenario in which Biden and the left are perceived as stealing the election. At least then conservatives will be fully united once again and ready to fight, instead of passively relying on a Pied Piper like Trump to save them.

      The truth is, in 2020-2021 we stand at a massive nexus point in human history. We are spiraling into a decade and a fight that will decide the fate liberty for the next century or more. On one side stands the global elites and the useful idiots on the hard left. They will push for a collectivist system that erases all memory of the Constitutional Republic we once new, and they will get help from fake conservatives that value power over principle. On the other side stands the people that just want to be left alone; the free minds, the people that don’t need or desire to have power over anybody.

      If humanity is to have a future at all, the second group must continue to exist and prosper. They are the wellspring that feeds us, that gives us something to hope for. If the elites and the social justice mob take control, there can be no future for our species. They desire what they cannot and should not have. They value only what they can take from others. They have a hunger that can never be satiated. They will devour the world until there is nothing left while claiming they stand for the “greater good”. War cannot be avoided with such people; the only question is, will liberty minded people stay the course and stick by their principles or will they fall to their darker impulses to ensure victory?

      *  *  *

      If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

       

    • What's At Risk: An 18-Month View Of A Post-COVID World
      What's At Risk: An 18-Month View Of A Post-COVID World

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 22:35

      As the world continues to grapple with the effects of COVID-19, no part of society seems to be left unscathed. Fears are surmounting around the economy’s health, and dramatic changes in life as we know it are also underway.

      In today’s graphic, Visual Capitalist’s Iman Ghosh uses data from a World Economic Forum survey of 347 risk analysts to show the likelihood of major risks we face in the aftermath of the pandemic.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      What are the most likely risks for the world over the next year and a half?

      The Most Likely Risks

      In the report, a “risk” is defined as an uncertain event or condition with the potential for significant negative impacts on various countries and industries. The 31 risks have been grouped into five major categories:

      • Economic: 10 risks

      • Societal: 9 risks

      • Geopolitical: 6 risks

      • Technological: 4 risks

      • Environmental: 2 risks

      Among these, risk analysts rank economic factors high on their list, but the far-reaching impacts of the remaining factors are not to be overlooked either. Let’s dive deeper into each category.

      Economic Shifts

      The survey reveals that economic fallout poses the most likely threat in the near future, dominating four of the top five risks overall. With job losses felt the world over, a prolonged recession has 68.6% of experts feeling worried.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The pandemic has accelerated structural change in the global economic system, but this does not come without consequences. As central banks offer trillions of dollars worth in response packages and policies, this may inadvertently burden countries with even more debt.

      Another concern is that COVID-19 is now hitting developing economies hard, critically stalling the progress they’ve been making on the world stage. For this reason, 38% of the survey respondents anticipate this may cause these markets to collapse.

      Social Anxieties

      High on everyone’s mind is also the possibility of another COVID-19 outbreak, despite global efforts to flatten the curve of infections.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      With many countries moving to reopen, a few more intertwined risks come into play. 21.3% of analysts believe social inequality will be worsened, while 16.4% predict that national social safety nets could be under pressure.

      Geopolitical Troubles

      Further restrictions on trade and travel movements are an alarm bell for 48.7% of risk analysts—these relationships were already fraught to begin with.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In fact, global trade could drop sharply by 13-32% while foreign direct investment (FDI) is projected to decline by an additional 30-40% in 2020.

      The drop in foreign aid could also put even more stress on existing humanitarian issues, such as food insecurity in conflict-ridden parts of the world.

      Technology Overload

      Technology has enabled a significant number of people to cope with the impact and spread of COVID-19. An increased dependence on digital tools has enabled wide-scale remote working for business—but for many more without this option, this accelerated adoption has hindered rather than helped.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Over a third of the surveyed risk analysts see the emergence of cyberattacks due to remote working as a rising concern. Another near 25% see the threat of rapid automation as a drawback, especially for those in occupations that do not allow for remote work.

      Environmental Setbacks

      Last but certainly not least, COVID-19 is also potentially halting progress on climate action. While there were initial drops in pollution and emissions due to lockdown, some estimate there could be a severe bounce-back effect on the environment as economies reboot.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As a result of the more immediate concerns, sustainability may take a back seat. But with environmental issues considered the biggest global risk this year, these delayed investments and missed climate targets could put the Earth further behind on action.

      Which Risks Are of the Greatest Concern?

      The risk analysts were also asked which of these risks they considered to be of the greatest concern for the world. The responses to this metric varied, with societal and geopolitical factors taking on more importance.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In particular, concerns around another disease outbreak weighed highly at 40.1%, and tighter cross-border movement came in at 34%.

      On the bright side, many experts are also looking to this recovery trajectory as an opportunity for a “great reset” of our global systems.

      This is a virus that doesn’t respect borders: it crosses borders. And as long as it is in full strength in any part of the world, it’s affecting everybody else. So it requires global cooperation to deal with it.

      – Gita Gopinath, IMF Chief Economist

    • Something Worth Striving For
      Something Worth Striving For

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 22:00

      Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

      [Editor’s Note: This edition of the Economic Prism was originally published on July 04, 2019, as Independence Day in America Circa 2019.  The themes explored within are even more relevant today.  So we’ve dusted it off, made several updates, and are republishing it.  Enjoy!]

      Not Welcome

      The days are long and hot in the Northern Hemisphere when real American patriots spit upon their hands and hoist the stars and stripes.  On July 4, the free and brave, with duty and self-sacrifice, begrudgingly accept federal holiday pay to stand tall upon their own two feet.  Rugged individualism and uncompromising independence are essential to their character.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      With purpose and intent, they assemble as merry mobs along the shoreline to celebrate American Independence.  Freedom lovers – descendants of Buffalo Bill – gather to eat hotdogs and pitch horseshoes while downing tipples of corn syrup and fermented grain.  When the sun slips beyond the western horizon and the stars twinkle bright, they hoot and holler at the brilliance of fireworks and sparkling pyrotechnics.

      Most years, these festivities certify that, even in an era of big government, there remains a time and place to revel in the virtues of representative self-rule.  All are usually welcome, of course, so long as their vehicles are registered, they’ve paid their income taxes, and have proper documentation.  But not this year.  At least, not in certain jurisdictions.

      After all, this is the age of coronavirus.  In some reaches of the land of the free, none are welcome.  For example, in Los Angeles County, the Board of Supervisors closed beaches, piers, beach bike paths, and beach access points from July 3 thru 6 “to prevent dangerous crowding.”

      According to the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department, violating the beach closure amounts to trespassing, which is punishable by fines up to $1,000.  Nonetheless, Sherriff Alex Villanueva said he will not enforce the order because the County is “Care First, Jails Last.”

      What to make of it?

      Right to assemble.  Freedom.  Liberty.  Independence.  Limited representative government.  Sound money.  Private property rights.  A humble and esteemable populace.  Avoidance of foreign entanglements.  Rafting down the Mississippi River.  Creedence Clearwater Revival.  Trim waist lines.

      These ideas, in truth, faded from daily life over the last century like the horse drawn plow.  Alas, the republic was lost long before Elvis popped his last pill.  Washington’s casted nets have since ensnared the globe.  There’s little you can do to avoid getting caught up in its tangled web.

      But why spoil such a magical day with the truth?

      Instead, we’ll add to the magic with a look back to the not too distant past.  To a magical time and place – before the Department of Homeland Security, Facebook, Google, and contact tracers were around to track your every move.  Back when freedom was a little freer.  And currency destruction was a little subtler…before the Fed’s printing press was continuously dialed up to Brrrr.

      Creative Destruction

      Boiling points in politics, business, and popular culture are often exceeded with seemingly little advanced notice.  Then, in short order, a revolution explodes the status quo out of existence.  Not until later is it apparent that the pot was simmering for many years – or decades – before the eruption.

      In the early 1990s, Steve Rocco, a scrub freestyle skater from Hermosa Beach, delivered an epic haymaker to the corporate skateboard industry.  On a shoe string budget, financed with predator loans from a shark named Kirby, Rocco rapidly took down the big three skate companies that, in hindsight, had grown fat and stale.  In a classic case  of Joseph Schumpeter’s “gale of creative destruction,” he revolutionized the industry and subculture.

      The big skate companies, which had capitalized on the popular attraction of vert ramp skating in the late 1980s, had taken the sport to a place that was unreachable to the next generation of skaters.  To protect marketing investments in their sponsored pros, many which had fallen a step behind, the big skate companies operated as gate keepers; locking out new talent to the professional ranks.

      Rocco, through design innovation, relentless hustle, and savvy parody, exposed what had become an elitist industry.  In the blink of an eye, the old guard’s products were outdated, its brands were unhip, and its pros were lacking.  Sales collapsed.

      Street skating, which was accessible to any kid with a board, replaced vert skating as the forefront of the sport.  Rocco’s company, World Industries, capitalized on this like no other.  In fact, the documentary, The Man Who Souled the World, shows how he did it; in less than 90 minutes, and at no cost, you’ll learn more about entrepreneurship than any fancy business school could ever teach you.

      But that’s not all…

      Something Worth Striving For

      Rocco’s creative destruction of the skateboard industry opened up the sport to a new, and much larger cast of hungry kids.  World Industries, through partnerships and distribution agreements, unlocked the doors for many new skater owned and operated companies.  This, in effect, opened the flood gates to a massive wave of energy, urgency, youth, creativity, and angst, which crashed upon the industry in wild and unpredictable ways.

      For example, Plan B, established by Mike Ternasky (RIP) in 1991, was formed under a distribution agreement with World Industries.  Ternasky’s vison was to create a super team – to sponsor the most talented skaters, and actively push the limits of what’s physically possible.  Matt Hensley, Rodney Mullen, Danny Way, Colin McKay, Rick Howard, Mike Carroll, Pat Duffy, among others, rapidly progressed the sport beyond comprehension.

      Many inexplicable tricks were dreamed up and successfully executed by Plan B skaters.  The team’s creativity, excellence, style, grace, and ‘go big or go home’ ethos, was best demonstrated on July 9, 2005.  That’s when Danny Way, after suffering a devastating slam on his initial attempt the day before, stuck a mammoth 360 air over the Great Wall of China.

      Not since Genghis Khan, in 1216 AD, had the Great Wall been successfully breached.  But what’s the point?  Or, more aptly, what does Steve Rocco, World Industries, Danny Way or any of this have to do with Independence Day?

      Quite frankly, this has much more to do with American independence than eating hotdogs and knocking back several cans of suds at the beach.  Here’s the point…

      The U.S. economy, and by extension the world economy, has reached a boiling point.  You can see it.  You can feel it.  You can hear it.  You can smell it.  You can taste it.

      Presently, government planners and schemers are queuing up their tired plans to roll out at the moment of maximum panic.  The CARES Act is merely the beginning.  Economic patriotism, universal basic income, modern monetary theory, trade wars, outright currency destruction, and greater government control and encroachments upon freedom and liberty.

      The plans, however, ain’t gonna fix what’s coming.  What’s more, these programs of central planners, while pandering to extreme populism, will only further exacerbate it.

      Thus, in the American traditions of freedom, liberty, and independence, do as Rocco did.  Create something new and according to your own rules. 

      A centralized statist government may ultimately confiscate every last dollar you earn. 

      But, with a little luck, you’ll be contributing to a “gale of creative destruction” that blows through the status quo like a Midwestern tornado.

      Wishful thinking?  Perhaps.

      Though, on Independence Day in America, circa 2020, it’s something worth striving for.

    • "A Storm Waiting To Happen": The Average American's Power Bill Is About To Rise As Much As 30%
      "A Storm Waiting To Happen": The Average American's Power Bill Is About To Rise As Much As 30%

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 21:25

      Today in “The Fed can’t find inflation anywhere” news, it looks as though the average American’s 2020 is going to go from bad to worse. Bloomberg is reporting that with rising temperatures during what is expected to be a blistering summer, most consumers are about to face “sharp increases” in electric bills that could “drive some to the brink of financial ruin”. 

      That’s a serious claim to make about a power bill, but the facts are there to back it up. People that are stuck at home instead of at the office this summer are going to depend on air conditioners far more than they used to. This will drive up power bills by “25% in parts of the U.S.,” according to the report. This comes at a time where about 50 million people are experiencing financial hardships.

      Working from home has already increased residential demand for electricity by 15% during work hours, according to Innowatts, a utility consultant. Con Ed has warned customers bills could go up 10% this summer and in California, the average bill may rise by 25% to over $200, the state’s Public Utilities Commission has warned. 

      In parts of the U.S. south, prices could rise as much as 30%, according to the Union of Concerned Scientists. 

      The increases could amount to as much as $50 per month, the report says, and will disproportionately affect many who are already struggling through the pandemic.  

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Sindy Benavides, chief executive officer of the League of United Latin American Citizens said: “There will be people faced with figuring out whether to pay their bill or put food on the table. It’s a storm waiting to happen.”

      Lower income families spend about 9% of their budget on energy bills, according to the report. The problem disproportionately affects Black and Hispanic families who are twice as likely to live in poverty, according to the American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy and the U.S. Census Bureau.

      Jacqui Patterson, director of the NAACP’s environmental and climate justice program, said: “People will start to make very tough choices. It’s another situation where people are paying the price of poverty with their lives.”

      A long hot summer is being predicted for most of the U.S. this year and places like California have already dealt with two serious heat waves. New York, Boston and Philadelphia have already reached or exceeded 90 degrees this year. 

      Jim Rouiller, lead forecaster at the Energy Weather Group, said: “We have made the turn into what is going to become a long summer of heat.”

      Jeremiah Bohr, an assistant professor of sociology at the University of Wisconsin, Oshkosh concluded: “It highlights the larger issue of how difficult it is to make ends meet.”

    • Goldman Sees Ghost Of Dot Com Bubble As Baby Boomers Sell Stocks To Their Own Kids
      Goldman Sees Ghost Of Dot Com Bubble As Baby Boomers Sell Stocks To Their Own Kids

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 20:57

      Back in 2019 we posted on several occasions that a “conundrum” had emerged in the stock market: with equities hitting new all time highs, especially in the last quarter after the Fed relaunched QE to bailout a bunch of basis trading hedge funds under the pretext of saving the repo market, equity outflows soared to all time highs…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      … as investors fled risk assets realizing that the market was unsustainable high and artificially propped up by the Fed (as a reminder 2019 saw zero earnings growth and all the equity upside was thanks to multiple expansion).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Fast forward to early May when the “conundrum” made a triumphal return, because as BofA reported even as stocks were soaring, investors once again fled into cash, allocating tens of billions to money markets…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      … and while investors also rushed to allocate fund to “risk free” bonds, now that the Fed is buying corporate bond ETFs and also debt from such “middle class” stalwarts as Apple and Berkshire, they were once again aggressively selling stock fund ETFs.

      In the ensuing two months, the conundrum has persisted even if there was one small change: the funds flowing into money markets have reversed, and according to the latest EPFR fund flows data, the last week of June saw $28.8bn pulled out out of cash, which according to BofA’s Michael Hartnett was the largest MMF redemption since Dec 19. That said, even with the latest outflow from money market funds, more than $1.1 trillion in cash has gone into money markets.

      Yet what continues to confound professional investors who continue to recommend stocks based on “fundamentals” when the only thing that matters any more is how many trillions the Fed will injects into stocks, is that funds continue to flow into bonds ($15.3bn last week), new money continues to be allocated to gold (42BN in the last week), yet equity funds continue to see relentless outflows, with another $7.1bn pulled out of stocks last week even as stocks appears to be on a relentless upswing.

      In fact, a look at fund flows among various asset classes, shows that stocks are the only class that has suffered pretty much constant outflows, while new capital has been allocated to gold, bonds (both IG and HY), and most of all cash.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      But wait, it’s not just the 2019 conundrum that is at play here. Yes, it is true that last year investors were just as aggressively selling equity funds (while the strong buyback bid helped levitate most assets), a situation that has re-emerged in recent weeks, but in 2019 we didn’t have the Robin Hood effects, where millions of Gen-Zers and millennials were willingly “investing” their stimulus checks in ultra-high beta stocks and anything that had plunged, even if it was bankrupt companies. 

      So how is the current situation different? The answer comes courtesy of Goldman’s head of hedge fund sales, Tony Pasquariello, who writes that while in total retail investors are dumping stocks, that is not true for all retail investors, where a very clear generational divide has emerged.

      Here are his latest observations:

      The bifurcation continues within the retail community: an older generation continues to make sales via mutual funds and ETFs (link); a younger generation continue to trade stocks like it’s 1999 (“free trades, jackpot dreams lure small investors to options”).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      At some point, the $64,000 question is… Where are we in the retail cycle?  Having lived through the late 90’s, I tend to think the recent euphoria can persist a bit longer.

      In other words, even Goldman now sees the ghost of the dot com bubble re-emerge, as older Americans scramble to liquidate stock by selling to their very own children.

      As for Goldman’s assessment that the euphoria can persist a “bit” longer, we take the over – with Powell now having gone all in, staking not only the Fed’s reputation and the entire capitalist way of life, including the dollar as a global reserve currency on pushing stocks even higher, this may be the one time when retail investors not only outperform hedge funds – and the S&P500 – as they have been for much of 2020…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      … but also the baby boomers who can’t sell stock fast enough to their own children.

      Or then again, maybe this time won’t be different.

    • "You Are On Stolen land" – Protests Intensify At Mount Rushmore Ahead Of Trump's Arrival
      "You Are On Stolen land" – Protests Intensify At Mount Rushmore Ahead Of Trump's Arrival

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 20:20

      Update(20:45ET): President Trump is due any moment to land at Ellsworth AFB. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Ellsworth AFB is about a 34-mile car drive from Mount Rushmore – Marine One will fly the president to the national monument in the Black Hills region of South Dakota.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      *  *  * 

      Update(20:21ET): Twitter handle Unicorn Riot, you may recall the account live-streamed the early days of the Minneapolis social unrest, is on the scene as demonstrators have erected a vehicle blockade preventing people from attending the firework display at Mount Rushmore this evening, which will host President Trump. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      “A more intensive vehicle blockade has also gone up, blocking the road to Trump’s event in South Dakota. Indigenous people gathered here are invoking their unceded rights to the land – police preparing to make arrests,” Unicorn Riot tweeted.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Unicorn Riot 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Unicorn Riot 

      Demonstrators are seen blocking the street with white vans, and at least one vehicle has the back driver side tire removed. One protester sign reads: “You Are On Stolen land.” 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Unicorn Riot 

      Unicon Riot notes, “Many Trump supporters are waiting to get through the roadblock.” 

      Moments ago, police declared the protests an “unlawful assembly.” 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      More images of the blockade

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      h/t Unicorn Riot 

      “25+ Nat’ l Guard soldiers met the blockade line with riot shields & helmets. Demonstrators trying to prevent Guard from pushing through. One shield was taken from Guard,” Unicorn Riot tweeted.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      “A second arrest warning has been given. Police claim that demonstrators will be allowed to return to their original protest location. National guard soldiers are approaching the blockade,” Unicorn Riot said. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Soldiers fired pepper balls at demonstrators’ feet to push them off the highway. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Rapid City Journal reports Trump supporters are “unable to get through the protests.” This has led to “many empty seats” at the Mount Rushmore complex – where the president is expected to attend a firework show. 

      “The lower level of the amphitheater is filled but there are many empty seats in the upper level. Many of the ticket holders are not wearing masks, but they are wearing Trump and MAGA hats and shirts with political messages,” Rapid City Journal said. 

      Rapid City Journal said the president will be arriving at Mount Rushmore around 6:45 PM via Marine One. 

      *  *  * 

      With the leftist cancel mob now looking to erase Mount Rushmore, President Trump is heading to the South Dakota landmark to kick off his 4th of July weekend.

      The president will enjoy a fireworks display with some 7,500 people – who won’t be required to wear masks or socially distance. The monument, featuring the faces of  Presidents George Washington, Thomas Jefferson, Abraham Lincoln and Theodore Roosevelt, hasn’t had fireworks since 2009 due to environmental concerns, according to Reuters.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In addition to fireworks, the event will feature Lakota storytellers, a military flyover, hoop dancers, and of course – President Trump will entertain the crowd.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Governor Kristi Noem (R) told Fox News on Monday night that attendees at Trump’s Friday night event at the monument said that people who have health concerns over COVID-19 can “stay home,” but that face masks will be distributed so people can “choose to wear one.”

      “We’re asking them to come, be ready to celebrate, to enjoy the freedoms and the liberties that we have in this country,” said Noem. “But we won’t be social distancing.

      And of course, wherever Trump goes, triggerings follow.

      Native Americans, who reportedly plan to protest during the trip, have criticized Trump’s visit for increasing the risk of spreading the virus and for celebrating U.S. independence in an area that is sacred to them.

      The Democratic National Committee (DNC) tweeted at one point that Trump had disrespected Native Americans and that the event was “glorifying white supremacy.” It later deleted the tweet.

      Both Washington and Jefferson, revered for their roles in the founding of the nation, were slave owners. –Reuters

      “It’s an injustice to actively steal Indigenous people’s land then carve the white faces of the conquerors who committed genocide,” says Oglala Lakota Noation activist Nick Tilsen.

      Cheyanne River Sioux Tribe chairman Harold Frazier has called for the removal of Mount Rushmore, saying in a statement “Nothing stands as a greater reminder to the Great Sioux Nation of a country that cannot keep a promise of treaty then the faces carved into our sacred land on what the United States calls Mount Rushmore.”

      “The United States of America wishes for all of us to be citizens and a family of their republic yet when they get bored of looking at those faces we are left looking at our molesters,” he added in the June 29 comments.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      That said, as Fox NewsRebecca Grant pointed out on Friday in an Op-Ed (which quoted Tilsen), nobody seemed to have a problem with the ‘racist’ monument ‘built on indigenous land’ when former President Obama and Hillary Clinton visited during their 2008 campaigns.

      Candidate Obama and a bus of campaign reporters visited Mount Rushmore late on a Friday evening in May 2008. The New York Times covered it as an adorable moment with Obama’s “tie not a half-inch ajar” and Obama joking with park rangers that his ears were too big to carve on the mountain.

      Candidate Hillary Clinton had already been there. On her photo op a few days earlier, a reporter asked her if she could envision herself carved on the mountain. According to CBS, this prompted a visibly annoyed Clinton to say: “Why don’t you learn something about the monument?” Good point.

      But a dozen years on, it may be too late for history. –Fox News

      Meanwhile, Grant points out that while the left seems to be intent on erasing America’s past, they’ve conveniently overlooked that “every square inch of the United States, plus the rest of North America and Latin America, once “had been Indigenous land.”” – and that “Even the headquarters of oh-so politically correct New York Times sits on land in Manhattan that once belonged to indigenous people before it was purchased for almost nothing by the Dutch and later taken by the British.”

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Moreover, three of the four presidents on Mount Rushmore – Washington, Jefferson and Lincoln, were all deceased when the US took control of the Black Hills in 1877, while Roosevelt was just 19 years old.

      Trump will hold another 4th of July celebration on Saturday in Washington DC.

    • Meet Four New Virus-Fighting Technologies That Could Soon Become The Standard In Public Areas
      Meet Four New Virus-Fighting Technologies That Could Soon Become The Standard In Public Areas

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 20:15

      As the push for some to head back to the office continues, despite being the midst of the ongoing pandemic, a focus has shifted to what kinds of technologies are going to be used in order to make sure that public areas, like office environments and airports, are virus-free.

      Aside from the usual hand sanitizers and face masks, FT published a report this week highlighting some of the other technologies that businesses are choosing to employ in order to surfaces and spaces clean. 

      Shaun Fitzgerald, visiting professor at the University of Cambridge, said: “Pandemics like this can provide fertile ground for creative minds to think about how to do things differently.”

      One option that’s being looked at is self-cleaning surfaces. While the virus can stay alive for up to 72 hours on plastics and steel, silver and copper have a track record of killing viruses and bacteria within four hours. Felicity de Cogan, research fellow at the University of Birmingham and founder of NitroPep, said that timeframe needs to get down to “seconds to minutes” and it needs to be “built into the material”.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Her company is working on developing layers of materials with spike particles on them that puncture and kill viruses within minutes. Her company’s antimicrobial agents can be added to already existing desks, walls and other surfaces and rupture “anything with a membrane”. 

      “It doesn’t require a change in behaviour, it just sits there and kills whatever lands on it,” de Cogan said. In a pilot run of the technology for a Royal Navy ship, it killed more than 95% of bacteria like E. Coli and MRSA. de Cogan aims to implement it in public transport and for self-cleaning equipment, if it proven to be able to kill coronavirus. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Another option is UV irradiation. The idea of “germicidal ultraviolet” has been known for years but is now getting another look. UV beams are used to kill micro-organisms by targeting the RNA in viruses and DNA in bacteria and fungi. UV lamps have been found in the past to be effective in stopping drug-resistant tuberculosis in large rooms.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The technology is good for large rooms and crowded and poorly ventilated environments. Covid has accelerated demand for UV charging robots that emit UV light that leaves bacteria and viruses too damaged to function. They robots cost about 60,000 Euro each and can be found in places like hospitals and hotels. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      A third technology being used is environmental monitors that “check the pulse” of a building that already exists to assess things like CO2 levels. In Switzerland, researchers are trying to develop sensors that detect the virus itself. The Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH Zurich) and Swiss Federal Laboratories for Materials Science and Technology (Empa) have together developed a sensor inside of a chamber that emits light if it finds the viruses RNA. Real-world testing is set to start soon. 

      Finally, ventilation is in focus. HVAC systems play a huge role in the accumulation of aerosol droplets and improving the amount of fresh air a person gets per second can help slow the viruses movement. This can be especially true in confined spaces like elevators and airplanes. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Gardner Allen, assistant professor at the Harvard TH Chan School of Public Health said: “You always want the air to move from clean to dirty and then out. In the bathroom, you want it to move from indoor, to bathroom and then out through the exhaust.” 

      One thing is for certain: the world is changing and evolving to try and deal with the pandemic threat in ways that 6 months ago, we would have never thought possible. Surely this will lead to a whole host of new Silicon Valley startups that will focus not only on combating the virus, but also likely on burning cash at ungodly WeWork-style levels.

      Keep your eyes out for those “exciting” IPO opportunities to probably start hitting the market around late 2021. 

    • Mexican State Closes Border With Arizona As COVID-19 Outbreak Worsens: Live Updates
      Mexican State Closes Border With Arizona As COVID-19 Outbreak Worsens: Live Updates

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 20:09

      Summary:

      • Mexican state closes border with US
      • Texas reports another 7,555 new cases, 3rd highest yet
      • Global total nears 11 million
      • South Carolina positivity rate hits 20.7%
      • Latam surpasses US case total
      • More MLB, NBA players test positive
      • California reports latest case numbers
      • Court orders 3 defiant Arizona gyms to close
      • South Africa suffers record jump in new cases; positivity rate ~25%
      • Dallas reports more than 1k cases
      • Arizona hospitalizations at new record high
      • 105 University of Washington students living in frat houses off campus test positive
      • NY reports 9 fatalities
      • Sweden sees deaths, hospitalizations tumble
      • WHO warns against trying to predict when vaccine will be ready
      • ES futures slide as Florida passes NJ with 178k COVID-19 cases
      • Gov Cuomo delivers a holiday weekend warning
      • Britain mandates quarantine for all American visitors
      • US reports another record case jump
      • Total cases (US): ~2,740,000
      • Washington State Gov pauses reopening
      • India reports new record daily jump
      • South Korea sees another 60+ cases
      • China cluster eases
      • Peru death toll tops 10k

      * * *

      Update (2000ET): At least one Mexican state has just closed its border with Arizona to cut off the expected flood of 4th of July travelers. The state is Sonora, according to the Fort Worth Star-Telegram.

      The state is in a difficult position because it’s struggling to contain its own outbreak while across the border, officials in Arizona are trying to do the same.

      As coronavirus cases surge across the US, one Mexican state is closing itself off from its northern neighbor out of concern for safety, outlets report.

      Officials in Sonora, Mexico moved quickly to slam the border shut before the start of the July Fourth weekend, traditionally a peak tourism time as Americans flock south to celebrate, the Arizona Daily Star reported.

      Officials have not announced a reopening date.

      Sonora is in a difficult position. It’s struggling to control the pandemic within its own borders, and just above is Arizona, one of the most afflicted states in the U.S..

      * * *

      Update (1700ET): Just as today’s earlier numbers from Dallas suggested, Texas reported 7,555 new confirmed cases on Friday, the state’s third-highest number yet. .

      The latest numbers haven’t been added to the state’s dashboard yet, which means the state’s true total is just shy of 191,000 confirmed cases, and 2,625 deaths.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Source: Texas HHS

      In sports news, the NBA’s Miami Heat have closed their practice facility at the American Airlines Arena in Miami after a second player tested positive.

      MLB pitcher Brett Martin of the Texas Rangers has tested positive, according to his team. A team rep says Martin is now in quarantine in Texas. Boston Red Sox manager Ron Roenicke admitted during a briefing on Friday that the team had a “few positive cases”.

      As more states roll back their reopenings, Akansas Gov. Asa Hutchinson has signed an executive order giving cities the ability to mandate face coverings, becoming the latest governor in the deep south to start softening his resistance to more strict measures.

      In a major milestone underlining the severity of the outbreak in Latin America, the region reached more than 2.7 million  cases and the number of deaths reached more than 121,000, according to a count by CNN.

      The rankings have shifted over the last couple of weeks as the outbreaks in Chile and Peru have spiraled out of control:

      1. Brazil: 1,496,858 cases; 61,884 deaths
      2. Peru: 292,004 cases; 10,045 deaths
      3. Chile: 288,089 cases; 6,051 deaths
      4. Mexico: 238,511 cases; 29,189 deaths
      5. Colombia: 106,110 cases; 3,641 deaths
      6. Argentina: 69,941 cases; 1,385 deaths
      7. Ecuador: 60,657 cases; 4,700 deaths
      8. Bolivia: 35,528 cases; 1,271 deaths
      9. Panama: 35,237 cases, 667 deaths
      10. Dominican Republic: 35,148 cases; 775 deaths

      The 10 worst-hit countries in the region alone have at least 2,658,083 coronavirus cases and at least 119,608 virus-related deaths. That suggests both numbers for the entire region are probably higher than the US’s total (and there are probably also many more undiagnosed cases and uncounted deaths).

      Brazil’s neighbors have also seen a notable pickup in cases. Since last Friday, Argentina has passed Ecuador, Bolivia  has passed Panama and the Dominican Republic, and Panama has surpassed the DR. In other news, Costa Rica on Friday extended restrictions in several provinces due to the sharp rise in cases. Chile’s health ministry reported 131 new deaths Friday, bringing the country’s death toll north of 6k to 6,051.

      Finally, in South Carolina reported 1,558 new cases and 10 new deaths Friday. According to the agency’s numbers, the positivity rate in the state is now 20.7%.

      There are currently 1,148 hospital beds occupied by patients who have either tested positive or are suspected of having the virus. The hospital bed utilization rate is just shy of 73%. South Carolina has a total of 41,413 confirmed cases, 119 probable cases, 787 confirmed deaths and six probable deaths, according to the statement.

      California’s cases continued to climb, with the state reporting  another 5,688 cases bringing its total to 248,235 confirmed cases.

      Another 100 deaths were reported, bringing the state’s total to 6,263. Roughly 43% of the state’s cases are in LA County. The statewide positivity rate stands at 6.4 % for the past 14-days. And hospitalization rates are back at record highs north of 5,500 patients.

      Globally, the coronavirus case total stood at 2,976,026 as of 7pmET, meaning we’ll likely pass 11 million later tonight.

      * * *

      Update (1534ET): While we still haven’t heard much, if anything, from CNN about today’s hydroxychloroquine news, the network reported on three defiant gyms in Arizona that are refusing to shut down again. A court has sent them an official order to cease and desist, If they continue to resist, the owners could face jail.

      Meanwhile, South Africa just suffered its worst day yet.

      Epidemiologists around the world have been looking toward Africa with increasing alarm over the outbreak, which is picking up steam after getting off to a slow start.

      * * *

      Update (1500ET): As we wait for the latest update out of Texas, Dallas officials just reported one of their highest single-day totals yet.

      To put that into context.

      Masks may have contributed to the northeast’s success, but just making masks mandatory simply isn’t enough to stop the outbreak from escalating, as LA County has shown us.

      President Trump is set to travel to South Dakota Friday to watch a fireworks display.

      Earlier, the FDA approved the first test that tests for COVID-19 and the seasonal flu, which should put Dr. Fauci’s mind at ease.

      As we noted earlier, a study has (Finally) shown that hydroxychloroquine can be effective in high-risk patients if taken early enough.

      Yet, even with the slow news day due to the holiday weekend, we’re not seeing much attention being paid to this development.

      Some college students who allegedly threw “COVID-19 parties” have terrified parents with their nonchalant attitude toward the virus. In the latest story along those lines, more than 100 University of Washington students have tested positive . The students all lived in frat houses near campus, per CBS.

      “It really is consistent with what we’ve been observing, which is incredible noncompliance with wearing face masks, social distancing, particularly among young adults and teenagers,” he said.

      Looks like the NYT and CNN are going to need to rethink their whole “Gen Z will save us” narrative.

      * * *

      Update (1205ET): Arizona hospitalizations hit another record high as the state reports another 4,400+ cases and ICU capacity hits dangerously crowded levels (though, as we learned from Houston, there’s overflow capacity that can still be brought on-line). Total hospitalizations rose by 75 to 3,013 over the last 24 hours.

      Arizona is reporting 4,433 new coronavirus cases, and 31 more deaths.

      The state says 91% of its ICU beds are filled with COVID-19 patients, only 196 licensed beds are left in the entire state.

      Maricopa county remains the hardest-hit county in the state. It’s also the most densely populated, being home to Phoenix, one of the biggest cities in the country.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The state’s last record high came earlier this week, on Wednesday.

      * * *

      Update (1115ET): NY Gov Andrew Cuomo has just released the latest batch of daily COVID-19 figures…and it looks like the state recorded just 9 deaths over the last 24 hrs.

      * * *

      Update (1100ET): Building on comments from the other day, the WHO’s Dr. Mike Ryan insisted that we can’t yet say reliably when a vaccine will be ready for mass production.

      Here’s more from Reuters:

      • WHO DIRECTOR-GENERAL TEDROS SAYS EXPECTS INTERIM RESULTS FROM SOLIDARITY TRIAL OF COVID-19 THERAPEUTICS WITHIN THE NEXT TWO WEEKS
      • WHO’S MIKE RYAN SAYS NO VACCINE IS FAR ENOUGH ADVANCED TO KNOW WHETHER THERE WILL BE SIGNAL OF EFFICACY
      • UNWISE TO PREDICT WHEN A VACCINE COULD BE ROLLED OUT, VACCINES MAY HAVE SHOWN EFFICACY BY END OF YEAR, QUESTION IS PRODUCTION CAPACITY – WHO’S RYA

      Meanwhile, while Sweden still has one of the higher mortality rates overall (5,000+ deaths for a population of 10.2 million), and while the country’s immensely popular method of tackling the virus with no lockdowns has seen its popularity fade as the death toll crossed 5k, the numbers show that Sweden might be one of the closest communities toward achieving herd immunity.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      * * *

      Update (1030ET): It wasn’t the 10k+ jump from the other day, but Florida reported another 9,488 (+5.6%) cases on Friday, pushing its total case tally past New Jersey’s. The 7-day average is 5.8%.

      While we didn’t take out the last record, hospitalizations in the state continued to climb at an alarming rate.

      ES aren’t liking this (though fortunately the cash market will have the whole weekend to digest these numbers).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Florida is now No. 4 in the country behind only Texas (No. 3; 182k), California (No. 2; 248k) and New York (No. 1; 400k).

      * * *

      Update (1000ET): Before you kick back with a bucket-full of Bud’Merica’s and a wheelbarrow full of illegal fireworks, we implore you, dear reader, to read this special holiday weekend message from NY Gov Andrew Cuomo:

      Oh and one more thing: If you haven’t spoken to grandma lately, maybe find some time to give her a ring. You would probably make her day.

      * * *

      Update (0950ET): Joining the EU27, the UK has released an updated list of travel guidelines that will ease restrictions on visitors from dozens of countries, though not the US.

      The EU has urged all European states to bar travelers from the US, unless they complete a mandatory 2-week quarantine upon arriving. The notable difference is that the EU will block most Americans from even traveling to Europe, while the UK will permit arrivals, so long as they agree to quarantine under close monitoring.

      Nicola Sturgeon, the leader of Scotland’s devolved government, bashed the conservative government’s “shambolic” decision making process, but nonetheless said she would accept the updated guidelines. The devolved governments of Wales and Northern Ireland must also accept the guidelines, or set their own.

      Meanwhile, in China’s Hebei Province (not Hubei where Wuhan is) still has hundreds of thousands of families on mandatory lockdowns even as newly confirmed cases have once again trended toward zero.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Elsewhere, South Korea reported 63 newly confirmed cases of COVID-19 on Friday, another alarming uptick as health authorities scramble to mobilize public health resources in the city of Gwangju, the home of the latest outbreak where more than 50 people were found sickened over the past week.

      The Korea Centers for Disease Control and Prevention said the new total is 12,967 infections, and 282 deaths.

      India reported yet another single-day record jump in new virus cases on Friday, breaking 20k for the second day in a row: 20,903.

      The figure took the national total to 625,544. The Ministry of Health also reported an additional 379 deaths, taking the death toll to 18,213. At this rate, India should surpass Russia as the world’s third-worst-hit country in the coming days as Vladimir Putin, having just secured another decade-plus in power, is finally bringing things under control.

      In Latin America, Peru’s death toll rose to 10,045 on Thursday, the health ministry said, a day after the Latin American nation began easing a lockdown as its economy teeters on the brink of a serious crisis. The number of deaths rose by 185 in the last 24 hours, while the number of people infected rose to 292,004. Peru has the third-worst outbreak in Latin America, after Brazil and Mexico.

      * * *

      Coronavirus cases in the US hit another daily record on Thursday as Americans prepared for a distinctly joyless Fourth of July weekend that bears none of the sense of joy and revival that the country enjoyed on Memorial Day Weekend. According to JHU, the US reported 52,291 new cases, bringing its nationwide total to 2,739,879.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Source: JHU

      Last night, Washington State Gov. Jay Inslee announced that he would pause the phased reopening process for all counties in the state for 2 weeks, joining NY & NJ in delaying some of its reopening plans due to the outbreak int he south and west, while dozens of states – including Texas and Florida, arguably the two hardest hit states – have taken steps to roll back or delay their reopening. He also announced a statewide directive for businesses to require face coverings of all employees and customers, just a few hours after Texas Gov Greg Abbott issued an executive order mandating mask-wearing.

      Washington’s decision comes after the state reported 509 new cases yesterday, the highest single-day number since April 8.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      While the resurgence of new cases in Washington State is definitely discouraging, heading into the weekend, only a handful of states in the northeast – NY, NJ, Connecticut, Mass., RI, Vermont, NH and Maine – haven’t seen the numbers backslide.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

       

      To put things in perspective….

    • Holiday Humor? Democrats Prepare To Celebrate Dependence Day
      Holiday Humor? Democrats Prepare To Celebrate Dependence Day

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 19:40

      Via Babylon Bee,

      Democrats across the country prepared to celebrate Dependence Day this week, an annual holiday where they reflect upon their complete and total dependence on the government.

      Every year on July 4, Democrats celebrate the high holy day where they thank the government for its gracious gifts.

      It’s good to pause every year and think about how we are completely and utterly dependent on the government for everything,” said Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi. 

      “We have to give up all our rights to the government to find out how dependent we can be.”

      “This good and benevolent government was given to us by, you know, the thing,” said Joe Biden.

      “We should take a moment and be thankful for that. You know, I was around on the first Dependence Day, when Paul Washington and George Revere rode their donkeys into the holy city of Washington. I watched them come into town. I even stuck a feather in Revere’s hat and called him ‘macaroni’. He didn’t really appreciate that, you know. But it was a good time.”

      The DNC’s official Twitter account tweeted, “Let’s take a moment to think about everything we owe the government this Dependence Day.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      While Americans celebrate Independence Day with fireworks, barbecues, and merrymaking, Democrats celebrate Dependence Day by staying inside and weeping over all the freedom going on outside. The celebrations conclude with the reading of the Communist Manifesto and the singing of “Imagine”.

    • Japanese City Kills "Smartphone Zombies", Bans Texting-While-Walking
      Japanese City Kills "Smartphone Zombies", Bans Texting-While-Walking

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 19:05

      Yamato, a city in Japan, became the first municipality in the country to ban people from using smartphones while walking in public areas, reported RT News.

      The passage of the new ordinance is to prevent ‘smartphone zombies’ from endangering themselves and others as they walk down the street with their heads buried in a screen. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The city’s assembly in Kanagawa Prefecture passed the new rule last week and will go into effect this Wednesday. Violaters will not be fined or imprisoned, but the purpose is to bring awareness that “smartphones should be used when not in motion.”

      The ordinance makes clear smartphone users should come to a complete stop while in public areas and not obstruct sidewalk traffic before checking emails or text messages. 

      Earlier this year, city officials launched a study in several high trafficked areas, observing roughly 6,000 people, and found 12% of people were actively using their smartphones while walking down the street. It concluded by saying smartphone users could trip or walk into traffic while using their device. 

      And maybe the Japanese are onto something – here’s a New Jersey woman texting while walking – falls into a basement.

      Here’s a compilation of people in the U.K. walking into things while texting. 

      Smartphone addiction has led to the proliferation of sidewalk zombies. 

      In the age of technology, whoever thought of walking down the street while texting could be so dangerous.

    • Daily Briefing – July 3, 2020
      Daily Briefing – July 3, 2020


      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 18:40

      In this special, Fourth of July edition of the Daily Briefing, senior editor Ash Bennington and managing editor Ed Harrison sit down to answer questions from our viewers concerning everything from crypto to markets and more. Filmed on July 1, 2020.

    • Syria Prepares For Military Confrontation With Turkey In Northeast
      Syria Prepares For Military Confrontation With Turkey In Northeast

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 18:30

      Via Southfront.org,

      The Syrian Army and the National Defense Forces have put their forces on high alert in response to the new round of aggressive actions by the Turkish Army and its proxies in northeastern Syria.

      Several convoys of government forces, including several T-62M battle tanks and a number of trucks equipped with heavy machine guns, deployed to the countryside of Ayn Issa after intense Turkish artillery strikes on positions of the Kurdish-led Syrian Democratic Forces and the army near al-Nuyhat in northern al-Hasakah and Hushanah in northern Raqqah. Another group of government troops deployed near the town of Tell Tamr.

      According to local sources, the recent Turkish strikes led to no casualties among civilians or military personnel. Nonetheless, regular Turkish attacks on these areas in fact turned a large part of the territory located relatively close to the Turkish-occupied area into a no man’s land. Syrian state media also reported that Turkey set up a new training camp for its proxies northwest of Tell Tamr.

      While the chances of an open full-scale military confrontation in northeastern Syria between Turkey and the Syrian Army remain low, the military stalemate with regular ceasefire violations clearly does not contribute to any kind of peace process.

      Meanwhile, the US troops, which the Trump administration had supposedly mostly withdrawn from Syria some time ago, have been expanding their military infrastructure there. Recently, they set up a new airfield approximately 8km south of the town of al-Ya’rubiyah in the province of al-Hasakah. Local sources report that US forces are actively deploying new equipment and materials there, building up barracks and erecting concrete barriers. Units of the Syrian Democratic Forces are also allegedly involved in securing the perimeter of the airfield.

      At least one soldier was killed and 3 others injured in an attack by gunmen on a checkpoint in the town of Talfita in the western part of the Qalamun region, near the border with Lebanon. Following the attack, the army and security forces deployed additional units to the area in order to find and neutralize the attackers. Hezbollah is reportedly also involved.

      Such attacks in Western Qalamun are an uncommon development due to the strict security measures employed. A previous notable incident of this kind happened in December 2019, when gunmen stormed an army checkpoint in the town of Rankos in Eastern Qalamun. Then, all the attackers were tracked and neutralized in a series of operations within a few weeks of the incident.

    • The Complete Guide To Best & Worst-Run Cities In America 
      The Complete Guide To Best & Worst-Run Cities In America 

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 17:55

      Personal-finance website WalletHub analyzed the 150 most-populated U.S. cities to determine the best and worst-run municipalities. They assigned each metro area a “Quality of Services” score comprised of 38 metrics grouped into six service categories (including financial stability, education, health, safety, economy, infrastructure, and pollution) – which was compared against each’s per-capita budget.

      The study, titled 2020’s Best- & Worst-Run Cities in America, determined the effectiveness of local leadership in crisis and non-crisis periods. 

      City leaders have been fighting the COVID-19 pandemic for months, and now many are tasked with keeping the peace while respecting people’s rights to demonstrate as protests against police brutality surge across the nation. People in local positions of power will undoubtedly feel extra pressure to please the public this year, as the November election will determine whether many of them keep their seats.

      Even when the U.S. isn’t in a time of crisis, running a city is a tall order. The larger the city, the more complex it becomes to manage. In addition to representing the residents, local leaders must balance the public’s diverse interests with the city’s limited resources. That often means not everyone’s needs can or will be met. Leaders must carefully consider which services are most essential, which agencies’ budgets to cut or boost and whether and how much to raise taxes, among other decisions. -WalletHub

      “How do we measure the effectiveness of local leadership?” WalletHub said. “One way is by determining a city’s operating efficiency. In other words, we can learn how well city officials manage and spend public funds by comparing the quality of services residents receive against the city’s total budget.”

      The findings revealed Washington D.C. was the worst-run city, the second was San Francisco, and third Gulfport, Mississippi. 

      Bottom 10 cities nationally:

      1. Washington, DC
      2. San Francisco, CA
      3. Gulfport, MS
      4. Chattanooga, TN
      5. New York, NY
      6. Hartford, CT
      7. Oakland, CA
      8. Detroit, MI
      9. Chicago, IL
      10. Flint, MI

      The study determined the three best-run cities were in Idaho and Utah.

      Top 10 cities nationally:

      1. Nampa, ID
      2. Boise, ID
      3. Provo, UT
      4. Las Cruces, NM
      5. Durham, NC
      6. Lexington-Fayette, KY
      7. Missoula, MT
      8. Fort Wayne, IN
      9. Virginia Beach, VA
      10. Nashua, NH

      Notice some of the worst-run cities are concentrated on the coasts, or in Democratic states. 

      Other metrics comparing the best and worst-run cities: 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      A well-run city requires officials who can efficiently manage resources and make above-average good decisions for the long-term survivability of keeping their tax base in place. It’s a difficult juggling act when it comes to running a city in 2020 – many metro areas are fraught with socio-economic collapse, resulting in an exodus of the wealthy tax base. 

    • The Economic "Bounce" Is In: What's Next?
      The Economic "Bounce" Is In: What's Next?

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 17:20

      Submitted by Joe Carson, former chief economist at Alliance Bernstein

      Both the employment report and the Institute of Supply Management (ISM) survey of manufacturers for June show a strong “bounce” in jobs and new orders from very depressed levels. The financial markets view the data as another sign of the economy slowly returning to pre-pandemic levels. But the continued high levels of jobless claims and fast rebound in COVID cases to record highs raises doubts on the sustainability while also placing a “lower” ceiling on the scale on the bounce.

      In June, payroll employment rose 4.8 million, well above consensus estimates, following a gain of 2.7 million in May and a record loss of 20.7 million in April. The “bounce” in jobs was broad-based as 75% of private industries added people to their payrolls in June. That compares to a record low of 4% in April.

      Sixty percent of the job gains in June were centered in retail trade and leisure and hospitality industries, the two sectors of the economy that were badly hurt by government restrictions on travel and social and recreational gatherings.

      The civilian unemployment rate of 11.1% in June was off 2.2 percentage points from the level in May. The household employment survey showed 4.9 million people found employment in June. But questions over the accuracy of the household employment data, especially the reported unemployment rate, still linger.

      According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the number of households who responded to the survey in June came in at 65%, lower than the 67% in May, and 70% in April. A “normal” response rate is around 83%. BLS maintains that they were “still able to obtain estimates that met our standards for accuracy and reliability”. But the potential error in the data has to be larger when the sample size is dramatically less than normal.

      The ISM manufacturing survey in June posted a strong bounce of roughly 10 percentage points to 52.6, the highest monthly reading since April 2019. A record 25 percentage point jump to 56.4 in the new orders index was largely responsible for strong “bounce” in the ISM composite index.

      The ISM index is a diffusion index. One of the shortcomings of a diffusion index is that it does not distinguish between the scales of gains and declines. For example, in June 37% of the respondents reported higher new orders, 39% said orders were unchanged, and 23% reported lower orders. Given the depressed level of order bookings, it is surprising that more firms reported no improvement in orders versus those that reported gains.

      Taken together, June reports on jobs and manufacturing do show a bounce in economic activity, but from very depressed levels. Hours worked for production and non-supervisory workers contracted a record 45% annualized in Q2. That points to a record fall in GDP, wage and salary income, and operating profits, the latter of which is being overlooked or ignored by equity investors.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Also, the path forward is still filled with potholes and downside risks. The 1.5 million in new jobless claims in the latest week indicates the rebound in jobs is a bounce and nothing more. Also, the number of new COVID cases rising to a new record of 50,000 for a single day raises the odds of more layoffs as states force businesses to pause or reverse course in their reopening plans.

      The equity market is priced for a “pandemic-free” economy. But pandemics are not solved by equity market recoveries but instead by medical science ability to find a cure. As such, equity investors should not expect the “good” news in the June data to continue as long as the pandemic remains unresolved.

    • China Buys US Corn, Soybean; Trade Deal Commitments Far From Satisfied 
      China Buys US Corn, Soybean; Trade Deal Commitments Far From Satisfied 

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 16:45

      Around the same time President Trump and National Economic Council director Larry Kudlow were pumping jobs, stocks, and the V-shaped recovery on national television on Thursday morning – Reuters quoted a U.S. Agriculture Department (USDA) report that said China booked its first U.S. sales of corn and soybean since it asked suppliers (nine days ago) to guarantee shipments were not contaminated with COVID-19. 

      Readers may recall, from day one of the trade deal being signed – we outlined how the number of proposed agricultural goods exported to China under the agreement was unrealistic

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      China’s purchases of US farm goods since the trade deal was signed in mid-January has been underwhelming. With today’s purchases, we’re surprised the president or Kudlow didn’t pump the numbers, rather Kudlow said: “We are very unhappy with China.” 

      Reuters, quoting the USDA report, said China’s “private exporters reported the sale of 202,000 tonnes of corn and 126,000 tonnes of soybeans for delivery during the 2020/21 marketing year that begins on Sept. 1.” 

      For more color on China not upholding trade commitments under the deal – we turn to Peterson Institute for International Economics (PIIE). Their trade deal tracker (latest data from April), shows China’s purchases under the trade agreement has been significantly below agreed-upon levels.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Even before the trade deal was signed – we outlined in December, vessel tracking data didn’t support China was purchasing farm goods from the U.S. – instead, they abandoned North American markets for Latin American ones. 

      In June, we noted again; there was no way in hell that China was buying enough agricultural goods from the U.S. to satisfy commitments. Just look at the vessel tracking map below (from early June) – a massive traffic jam of ships carrying soybeans from Latin America to Asia was seen – and just a few vessels carrying beans in North America. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      What’s evident is that China has predictably fallen way short of its commitments of the trade deal as it now blames virus pandemic for reduced purchases.

      The Trump administration should come clean and just admit the trade deal is a dud.

    • Video Game Developer 'Ends Racism' By Erasing "OK" Hand Gesture From Call Of Duty
      Video Game Developer 'Ends Racism' By Erasing "OK" Hand Gesture From Call Of Duty

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 16:15

      Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

      Video game developer Infinity Ward has officially ended racism by removing the “OK” hand gesture emote from Call of Duty: Modern Warfare.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Stunning and brave.

      “After plastering “BLACK LIVES MATTER” in capitalized bold text across every loading screen and delaying the launch of Season 4 for a week seemingly failed to end racism on a global scale, it appears that Infinity Ward have removed the OK emote from the game,” reports National File.

      The company didn’t publicly acknowledge the change, but numerous Twitter users noticed the deadly hand sign’s absence from the game.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Someone also created a Reddit thread to discuss the issue, but in the spirit of one of if not the most censored social networks in existence, it was swiftly locked by moderators.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The notion that the ‘OK’ hand gesture is some kind of racist dog whistle originated as a stunt by 4chan trolls to fool the media into hysterically amplifying a hoax, which it dutifully has done for the past three years.

      Although the ADL initially refused to take the bait, they later reversed their position and included the gesture in their “hate symbols” database.

      “Some white supremacists themselves soon also participated in such trolling tactics, lending an actual credence to those who labeled the trolling gesture as racist in nature,” states the organization on its website. “By 2019, at least some white supremacists seem to have abandoned the ironic or satiric intent behind the original trolling campaign and used the symbol as a sincere expression of white supremacy.”

      As we highlight in the video below, other companies that helped end racism include Lego for pulling marketing of toy police stations and Uncle Bens for erasing the character of an African-American man from their products.

      *  *  *

      My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.

    • Hong Kong Man Charged With 'Terrorism' In First Ever Security Law Case After Ramming Police
      Hong Kong Man Charged With 'Terrorism' In First Ever Security Law Case After Ramming Police

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 15:50

      Yesterday we noted that one of the Hong Kong pro-independence movement’s most visible young activists, Nathan Law, fled Hong Kong for an undisclosed outside country on fears of how the new national security law could be applied retroactively, especially given his and his close associate Joshua Wong’s public relationship with and backing by the US embassy and American Congressional leaders.

      There is also the looming question of just what the law will look like applied in action. Recall that the law which went into effect Wednesday harshly cracks down on dissent and fomenting unrest with possible maximum life jail sentences for some crimes, largely dependent on the ambiguous and highly open to interpretation (with no independent review) question of what ultimately constitutes ‘foreign interference’ or sponsorship of a ‘terror’ organization. 

      It was perhaps wise that Nathan Law didn’t stick around to find out how stringently it will be applied given that on Friday HK authorities made their first example, arresting a man for carrying an anti-Beijing sign after he was alleged to have intentionally rammed police with his motorcycle.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Protest slogans such as the popular “Liberate Hong Kong. Revolution of our times” are now banned by the National Security Law in Hong Kong. Getty Images

      Reuters reports of the first ever instance of a protester being charged with terrorism under the fresh law:

      A man carrying a “Liberate Hong Kong” sign as he drove a motorcycle into police at a protest against the territory’s Chinese rulers became on Friday the first person charged with inciting separatism and terrorism under a new security law.

      It appears precisely this sign and slogan, which reports say is ubiquitous around Hong Kong streets, buildings and walls, which gave police the excuse and ability to bring harsher charges against the man, described as in his 20s, under the new security law.

      The motorcycle ramming can now be effectively considered a political act of “terrorism” based on the security law.

      Reuters continues:

      Police say 23-year-old Tong Ying-kit rammed and injured some officers at an illegal protest on Wednesday. A video online showed a motorbike knocking over several officers on a narrow street before the driver falls over and is arrested.

      Tong, who was hospitalised after the incident, was charged less than 24 hours after the city government said the slogan he was carrying – “Liberate Hong Kong, revolution of our times” – connotes separatism or subversion under the new law.

      Ironically he was reported to be protesting the very law that he’s now being charged under.

      Here’s video of the motorcycle “attack” incident:

      Given even political slogans and signage now carry the possibility of arrest, or at least severely heightened charges in connection with other crimes, it’s more than likely we’ll see other big activist names flee Hong Kong and the region in the coming days and weeks. Clearly pro-independence leaders are bracing for the worst. 

      Reports say that Joshua Wong’s Demosisto, a pro-democracy group with deep ties to the US, UK, and other European countries, has already been disbanded – at least on a public level – over fears its members could face terrorism and subversion charges.

    • Supertanker Rates Collapse: "The Dam Has Burst"
      Supertanker Rates Collapse: "The Dam Has Burst"

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 15:25

      By Greg Miller of FreightWaves,

      Some sayings pop up again and again in shipping circles:

      “The way to make a small fortune in shipping is to start with a big one.”

      “Moving cargo is what you do between buying and selling ships.”

      “If analysts say the market can only get worse, buy.”

      There’s also one that goes:

      “If there are 98 ships and 101 cargoes, boom, 98 cargoes and 101 tankers, bust.”

      Alas, there are now a lot more tankers than cargoes.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Rates are sliding, owners are capitulating, and charterers have the upper hand.

      Rates for very large crude carriers (VLCCs; tankers that carry 2 million barrels of crude) from the Middle East Gulf (MEG) to Asia were down to $20,000 per day on Wednesday, with the global average assessed at $26,537 per day by brokerage Howe Robinson.

      “The dam has burst, and VLCC rates have taken an overdue nosedive,”

      said the brokerage Fearnleys in a new report.

      “Daily earnings are still in the $20,000s [per day], but with increased bunker prices and further downward potential, OPEX [operating expense] levels could come under threat moving forward,” Fearnleys warned. “By all accounts it’s going to be a hot, long summer of discontent.”

      Current rates are less than a tenth of the record $250,000-per-day-plus peak in March and below rates of $28,000 per day at this time last year.

      Meanwhile, rates for Suezmaxes (tankers that carry 1 million barrels) are down to just $9,700 per day, while Aframaxes (750,000 barrels) are down to $8,200 per day, according to Clarksons Platou Securities. These rates are at or near multiyear lows and the outlook for all tanker classes remains negative.

      Owners spar for limited cargoes

      “High competition among [VLCC] owners in the Middle East Gulf is putting further downward pressure on rates, with our brokers expecting sentiment to weaken further into the week with smaller segments sharing the outlook,” said Clarksons Platou Securities analyst Frode Mørkedal.

      “Brokers said it is clear that charterers are in the driver’s seat now with each cargo receiving a double-digit [number of] offers from shipowners. With so many owners bidding on the same cargoes, it only takes one owner to start panicking and bring rates lower,” Mørkedal said.

      Argus Media reported on Wednesday that only one cargo was up for bid on the MEG-Korea route that day — with eight vessels competing for it. Argus quoted a market participant as stating that downward rate pressure “will likely increase in the short term.”

      Tanker rates are falling because of seasonal weakness, OPEC+ production cuts and the beginning of the unwind of floating storage. The unloading of floating-storage cargoes both decreases demand for new transport deals and increases the capacity of ships vying for the fewer remaining transport deals.

      Floating storage headwinds ahead

      Evercore ISI analyst Jon Chappell told FreightWaves, “I do think a lot of the recent precipitous decline in VLCC spot rates is associated with owner capitulation, but let’s be clear on how we got here.

      “VLCCs have held in much better than the midsize tanker sectors, primarily on hope of Venezuela-related sanctions and partially owing to congestion in China ports. It now appears that Venezuela will not be the next COSCO [referring to U.S. sanctions against Chinese owner COSCO in 2019, which restricted capacity] and eventually China port congestion will ease.

      “At the same time, the OPEC cuts are biting deeply,” said Chappell. “You can see it in the monthly cargoes out of the Arabian Gulf. And U.S. exports have declined as U.S. production slows and the arb [arbitrage window] is not open.

      “The floating-storage unwind has really yet to fully occur and should provide an overhang in the coming months and quarters,” cautioned Chappell.

      “The duration of the headwinds from the floating-storage unwind will almost completely depend on the pace of demand recovery. The faster the recovery, the more painful the immediate unwind, and the quicker the return to market balance. The more prolonged the demand recovery, the less painful the depths of the rate decline but it will be longer in duration. It’s too early to call if inventories will be normalized by the normal winter peak season,” said Chappell.

      Hopes pinned on fourth quarter

      Randy Giveans, analyst at Jefferies, was more optimistic. “As for low VLCC rates, it’s purely a matter of too many vessels and not enough cargoes,” he told FreightWaves. “Clearly the market is very tight, as evidenced by the surge in rates when there are extra cargoes and the rapid fall in rates when there is a lack of cargoes.

      “After basically six to eight months of strong rates, owners are more willing to accept weaker rates. Their balance sheets and liquidity have improved significantly in recent quarters so a few bad weeks and months won’t be very impactful.

      “Regarding duration, we expect rates to remain relatively flat — but still above $20,000 per day — in July and August before a strong move in the fourth quarter. And yes, I certainly expect rates above $50,000 per day at some point in that quarter. In 18 of the past 20 years, rates bottomed in the summer and rebounded in the fourth quarter,” said Giveans.

      Bet of Frontline boss

      The deteriorating tanker market brings to mind a wager Robert Macleod, CEO of Frontline (NYSE: FRO), made earlier this year.

      At the height of the rate frenzy, Macleod bet an analyst that VLCC rates would not revert to the $20,000- to $30,000-per-day levels seen in February at any point during the second or third quarters. Macleod vowed that if he lost the bet, he would walk the entire 300 miles between Oslo and Bergen, Norway.

      Macleod needs to start walking.

    • Tucker 2024? Growing Chorus Of Republicans Want Fox Host To Run For President
      Tucker 2024? Growing Chorus Of Republicans Want Fox Host To Run For President

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/03/2020 – 15:00

      Republicans looking to carry President Trump’s ‘America First’ momentum into the post-Trump era are excitedly eyeing Fox News host Tucker Carlson for a 2024 run.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      According to Politico, “Republican strategists, conservative commentators, and former Trump campaign and administration officials are buzzing about Carlson as the next-generation leader of Donald Trump’s movement — with many believing he would be an immediate frontrunner in a Republican primary.”

      Sixteen prominent Republicans interviewed by POLITICO said there’s an emerging consensus in the GOP that the 51-year-old Carlson would be formidable if he were to run. Some strategists aligned with other potential candidates are convinced he will enter the race and detect the outlines of a stump speech in Carlson’s recent Fox monologues. Others, particularly those who know him well, are skeptical that he would leave his prime-time TV gig.

      “Let me put it this way: If Biden wins and Tucker decided to run, he’d be the nominee,” said former Trump aide Sam Nunberg – though Nunberg also doesn’t think Carlson will run because he’s “so disgusted with politicians.”

      Carlson commands the largest audience of any cable news host in history according to ratings released this week – while Carlson clips on Fox News‘ YouTube channel have racked up more than 60 million views, according to the report.

      To put it simply, Tucker tells the truth and will call out bullshit on both sides of the aisle. He also frequently treads headfirst into subject matter like few, if any, of his media peers.

      On Monday, Carlson took Republican Senator Mike Braun to task, calling him out over Braun’s reform of the Qualified Immunity Act – which would expose police officers to greater liability in civil lawsuits.

      When Braun tried to argue that he needed to appease Sen. Chuck Schumer (D-NY), Carlson shot back: “Who controls the Senate? I thought Republicans controlled the Senate. So you’re taking your cues from Chuck Schumer [and] saying, ‘He might criticize me, therefore I have to pass a law that makes it easier to sue police’?

      Braun stammered his way through the rest of the interview as Carlson continued to land verbal jabs:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsCan Tucker convert his massive following into votes? 

      “There is at the very least a significant faction within the Republican Party that [Carlson] has a huge stake in and arguably leadership over,” said Rich Lowry, editor of the National Review and Politico columnist.

      If he has political ambitions, he has an opening. He has a following and a taste for controversy. He’s smart, quick on his feet and personable. Political experience matters less than it once did.”

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 3rd July 2020

    • Whitehead: America's Revolutionary Founders Would Be Anti-Government Extremists Today
      Whitehead: America's Revolutionary Founders Would Be Anti-Government Extremists Today

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 23:55

      Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

      “It is the duty of the patriot to protect his country from its government.”

      – Thomas Paine

      “When the government violates the people’s rights, insurrection is, for the people and for each portion of the people, the most sacred of the rights and the most indispensable of duties.”

      – Marquis De Lafayette

      Had the Declaration of Independence been written today, it would have rendered its signers extremists or terrorists, resulting in them being placed on a government watch list, targeted for surveillance of their activities and correspondence, and potentially arrested, held indefinitely, stripped of their rights and labeled enemy combatants.

      This is no longer the stuff of speculation and warning.

      In fact, Attorney General William Barr recently announced plans to target, track and surveil “anti-government extremists” and preemptively nip in the bud any “threats” to  public safety and the rule of law.

      It doesn’t matter that the stated purpose of Barr’s anti-government extremist task force is to investigate dissidents on the far right (the “boogaloo” movement) and far left (antifa, a loosely organized anti-fascist group) who have been accused of instigating violence and disrupting peaceful protests.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Boogaloo and Antifa have given the government the perfect excuse for declaring war (with all that entails: surveillance, threat assessments, pre-crime, etc.) against so-called anti-government extremists.

      Without a doubt, America’s revolutionary founders would have been at the top of Barr’s list.

      After all, the people who fomented the American Revolution spoke out at rallies, distributed critical pamphlets, wrote scathing editorials and took to the streets in protest. They were rebelling against a government they saw as being excessive in its taxation and spending. For their efforts, they were demonized and painted as an angry mob, extremists akin to terrorists, by the ruler of the day, King George III.

      Of course, it doesn’t take much to be considered an anti-government extremist (a.k.a. domestic terrorist) today.

      If you believe in and exercise your rights under the Constitution (namely, your right to speak freely, worship freely, associate with like-minded individuals who share your political views, criticize the government, own a weapon, demand a warrant before being questioned or searched by the police, or any other activity viewed as potentially anti-government, racist, bigoted, anarchic or sovereign), you’re at the top of the government’s terrorism watch list.

      Indeed, under Barr’s new task force, I and every other individual today who dares to speak truth to power could also be targeted for surveillance, because what we’re really dealing with is a government that wants to suppress dangerous words—words about its warring empire, words about its land grabs, words about its militarized police, words about its killing, its poisoning and its corruption—in order to keep its lies going.

      This is how the government plans to snuff out any attempts by “we the people” to stand up to its tyranny: under the pretext of rooting out violent extremists, the government’s anti-extremism program will, in many cases, be utilized to render otherwise lawful, nonviolent activities as potentially extremist.

      The danger is real.

      Keep in mind that the government agencies involved in ferreting out American “extremists” will carry out their objectives—to identify and deter potential extremists—in concert with fusion centers, data collection agencies, behavioral scientists, corporations, social media, and community organizers and by relying on cutting-edge technology for surveillance, facial recognition, predictive policing, biometrics, and behavioral epigenetics (in which life experiences alter one’s genetic makeup).

      This is pre-crime on an ideological scale and it’s been a long time coming.

      For example, in 2009, the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) released two reports, one on “Rightwing Extremism,” which broadly defines rightwing extremists as individuals and groups “that are mainly antigovernment, rejecting federal authority in favor of state or local authority, or rejecting government authority entirely,” and one on “Leftwing Extremism,” which labeled environmental and animal rights activist groups as extremists

      Incredibly, both reports use the words terrorist and extremist interchangeably

      That same year, the DHS launched Operation Vigilant Eagle, which calls for surveillance of military veterans returning from Iraq, Afghanistan and other far-flung places, characterizing them as extremists and potential domestic terrorist threats because they may be “disgruntled, disillusioned or suffering from the psychological effects of war.

      These reports indicate that for the government, anyone seen as opposing the government—whether they’re Left, Right or somewhere in between—can be labeled an extremist.

      Fast forward a few years, and you have the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA), which Congress has continually re-upped, that allows the military to take you out of your home, lock you up with no access to friends, family or the courts if you’re seen as an extremist.

      Now connect the dots, from the 2009 Extremism reports to the NDAA, the National Security Agency’s far-reaching surveillance networks, and fusion centers that collect and share surveillance data between local, state and federal police agencies

      Add in tens of thousands of armed, surveillance drones that are beginning to blanket American skies, facial recognition technology that will identify and track you wherever you go and whatever you do. And then to complete the circle, toss in the real-time crime centers being deployed in cities across the country, which will be attempting to “predict” crimes and identify criminals before they happen based on widespread surveillance, complex mathematical algorithms and prognostication programs.

      Hopefully you’re getting the picture, which is how easy it is for the government to identify, label and target individuals as “extremist.”

      And just like that, we’ve come full circle.

      Imagine living in a country where armed soldiers crash through doors to arrest and imprison citizens merely for criticizing government officials. Imagine that in this very same country, you’re watched all the time, and if you look even a little bit suspicious, the police stop and frisk you or pull you over to search you on the off chance you’re doing something illegal.

      Keep in mind that if you have a firearm of any kind (or anything that resembled a firearm) while in this country, it may get you arrested and, in some circumstances, shot by police.

      If you’re thinking this sounds like America today, you wouldn’t be far wrong.

      However, the scenario described above took place more than 200 years ago, when American colonists suffered under Great Britain’s version of an early police state. It was only when the colonists finally got fed up with being silenced, censored, searched, frisked, threatened, and arrested that they finally revolted against the tyrant’s fetters

      No document better states their grievances than the Declaration of Independence, drafted by Thomas Jefferson.

      A document seething with outrage over a government which had betrayed its citizens, the Declaration of Independence was signed on July 4, 1776, by 56 men who laid everything on the line, pledged it all—“our Lives, our Fortunes, and our sacred Honor”—because they believed in a radical idea: that all people are created to be free.

      Labeled traitors, these men were charged with treason, a crime punishable by death. For some, their acts of rebellion would cost them their homes and their fortunes. For others, it would be the ultimate price—their lives.

      Yet even knowing the heavy price they might have to pay, these men dared to speak up when silence could not be tolerated.

      Read the Declaration of Independence again, and ask yourself if the list of complaints tallied by Jefferson don’t bear a startling resemblance to the abuses “we the people” are suffering at the hands of the American police state.

      If you find the purple prose used by the Founders hard to decipher, here’s my translation of what the Declaration of Independence would look and sound like if it were written in the modern vernacular:

      There comes a time when a populace must stand united and say “enough is enough” to the government’s abuses, even if it means getting rid of the political parties in power. Believing that “we the people” have a natural and divine right to direct our own lives, here are truths about the power of the people and how we arrived at the decision to sever our ties to the government:

      All people are created equal. All people possess certain innate rights that no government or agency or individual can take away from them. Among these are the right to Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness. The government’s job is to protect the people’s innate rights to Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness. The government’s power comes from the will of the people.

      Whenever any government abuses its power, it is the right of the people to alter or abolish that government and replace it with a new government that will respect and protect the rights of the people. It is not wise to get rid of a government for minor transgressions. In fact, as history has shown, people resist change and are inclined to suffer all manner of abuses to which they have become accustomed. However, when the people have been subjected to repeated abuses and power grabs, carried out with the purpose of establishing a tyrannical government, people have a right and duty to do away with that tyrannical Government and to replace it with a new government that will protect and preserve their innate rights for their future wellbeing.

      This is exactly the state of affairs we are suffering under right now, which is why it is necessary that we change this imperial system of government. The history of the present Imperial Government is a history of repeated abuses and power grabs, carried out with the intention of establishing absolute Tyranny over the country.

      To prove this, consider the following:

      The government has, through its own negligence and arrogance, refused to adopt urgent and necessary laws for the good of the people. The government has threatened to hold up critical laws unless the people agree to relinquish their right to be fully represented in the Legislature.

      In order to expand its power and bring about compliance with its dictates, the government has made it nearly impossible for the people to make their views and needs heard by their representatives. The government has repeatedly suppressed protests arising in response to its actions.

      The government has obstructed justice by refusing to appoint judges who respect the Constitution and has instead made the Courts march in lockstep with the government’s dictates.

      The government has allowed its agents to harass the people, steal from them, jail them and even execute them. The government has directed militarized government agents—a.k.a., a standing army—to police domestic affairs in peacetime. The government has turned the country into a militarized police state.

      The government has conspired to undermine the rule of law and the Constitution in order to expand its own powers.

      The government has allowed its militarized police to invade our homes and inflict violence on homeowners. The government has failed to hold its agents accountable for wrongdoing and murder under the guise of “qualified immunity.”

      The government has jeopardized our international trade agreements. The government has overtaxed us without our permission.

      The government has denied us due process and the right to a fair trial. The government has engaged in extraordinary rendition. The government has continued to expand its military empire in collusion with its corporate partners-in-crime and occupy foreign nations.

      The government has eroded fundamental legal protections and destabilized the structure of government. The government has not only declared its federal powers superior to those of the states but has also asserted its sovereign power over the rights of “we the people.”

      The government has ceased to protect the people and instead waged domestic war against the people. The government has plundered our seas, ravaged our Coasts, and destroyed the lives of the people.

      The government has employed private contractors and mercenaries to carry out acts of death, desolation and tyranny against other nations, totally unworthy of a civilized nation. The government through its political propaganda has pitted its citizens against each other. The government has stirred up civil unrest and laid the groundwork for martial law.

      Repeatedly, we have asked the government to cease its abuses. Each time, the government has responded with more abuse.

      An Imperial Ruler who acts like a tyrant is not fit to govern a free people.

      We have repeatedly sounded the alarm to our fellow citizens about the government’s abuses. We have warned them about the government’s power grabs. We have appealed to their sense of justice. We have reminded them of our common bonds. They have rejected our plea for justice and brotherhood. Thus, our fellow citizens are equally at fault for the injustices being carried out by the government.

      Thus, for the reasons mentioned above, we the people of the united States of America declare ourselves free from the chains of an abusive government. Relying on the Creator’s protection, we pledge to stand by this Declaration of Independence with our lives, our fortunes and our honor.

      See what I mean? The abuses meted out by an imperial government and endured by the American people have not ended. They have merely evolved.

      Two hundred and forty-four years after a group of anti-government extremists declared their independence from tyranny, the American people have once again managed to work their way back under the tyrant’s thumb.

      “We the people” are still being robbed blind by a government of thieves. We are still being taken advantage of by a government of scoundrels, idiots and monsters. We are still being locked up by a government of greedy jailers. We are still being spied on by a government of Peeping Toms. We are still being ravaged by a government of ruffians, rapists and killers.

      We are still being forced to surrender our freedoms—and those of our children—to a government of extortionists, money launderers and corporate pirates. And we are still being held at gunpoint by a government of soldiers: a standing army in the form of a militarized police.

      The bipartisan coup that laid siege to our nation did not happen overnight. It snuck in under our radar, hiding behind the guise of national security, the war on drugs, the war on terror, the war on immigration, political correctness, hate crimes and a host of other official-sounding programs aimed at expanding the government’s power at the expense of individual freedoms.

      As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the building blocks for the bleak future we’re just now getting a foretaste of police shootings of unarmed citizens, profit-driven prisons, weapons of compliance, a wall-to-wall surveillance state, pre-crime programs, a suspect society, school-to-prison pipelines, militarized police, overcriminalization, SWAT team raids, endless wars, etc. – were put in place by government officials we trusted to look out for our best interests and by American citizens who failed to heed James Madison’s warning to “take alarm at the first experiment on our liberties.”

      For too long now, we have suffered the injustices of a government that has no regard for our rights or our humanity.

      We’ve suffered in silence for too long.

      Frankly, what this country desperately needs is more anti-government extremists willing to take the government to task for its excesses, abuses and power grabs that fly in the face of every principle for which America’s founders risked their lives.

    • Thailand Monkey Wars Escalate As Rival Gangs Force Locals To Flee Homes
      Thailand Monkey Wars Escalate As Rival Gangs Force Locals To Flee Homes

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 23:30

      Monkeys in the Thai city of Lopburi have become particularly aggressive since coronavirus lockdowns significantly cut into the supply of treat-throwing tourists which had been feeding the city’s wild macaques.

      The monkeys, numbering in the thousands, have set up shop in an abandoned local cinema – brawling with each other when they aren’t aggressively attacking locals.

      They’re also super horny, according to The Telegraph.

      Local efforts to offer the monkey mobs some nutrition may have backfired as some say a sugary diet of fizzy drinks, cereal and sweets has fuelled the animals’ sex lives, making their population grow even more. 

      The more they eat, the more energy they have… so they breed more,” Pramot Ketampai, who manages the city’s Prang Sam Yod temple shrines, told AFP. –The Telegraph

      In March, a rival monkey gang staged a ‘brazen raid’ on a group of macaques trying to butt in on their territory near the Phra Kan Shrine. The street fight caused mayhem, as traffic came to a standstill for approximately 10 minutes during the melee.

      “With the tourists gone, they’ve been more aggressive, fighting humans for food to survive,” said government veterinarian Supakarn Kaewchot in a statement to Reuters. “They’re invading buildings and forcing locals to flee their homes.”

      Imagine the smell…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • "The God That Failed": Why The US Cannot Now Re-Impose Its Civilisational Worldview
      "The God That Failed": Why The US Cannot Now Re-Impose Its Civilisational Worldview

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 23:05

      Authored by Alastair Crooke via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

      It was always a paradox: John Stuart Mill, in his seminal (1859), On Liberty, never doubted that a universal civilisation, grounded in liberal values, was the eventual destination of all of humankind. He looked forward to an ‘Exact Science of Human Nature’, which would formulate laws of psychology and society as precise and universal as those of the physical sciences. Yet, not only did that science never emerge, in today’s world, such social ‘laws’ are taken as strictly (western) cultural constructs, rather than as laws or science.

      So, not only was the claim to universal civilisation not supported by evidence, but the very idea of humans sharing a common destination (‘End of Times’) is nothing more than an apocalyptic remnant of Latin Christianity, and of one minor current in Judaism. Mill’s was always a matter of secularized religion – faith – rather than empiricism. A shared human ‘destination’ does not exist in Orthodox Christianity, Taoism or Buddhism. It could never therefore qualify as universal.

      Liberal core tenets of individual autonomy, freedom, industry, free trade and commerce essentially reflected the triumph of the Protestant worldview in Europe’s 30-years’ civil war. It was not fully even a Christian view, but more a Protestant one.

      This narrow, sectarian pillar was able to be projected into a universal project – only so long as it was underpinned by power. In Mill’s day, the civilisational claim served Europe’s need for colonial validation. Mill tacitly acknowledges this when he validates the clearing of the indigenous American populations for not having tamed the wilderness, nor made the land productive.

      However, with America’s Cold War triumph – that had by then become a cynical framework for U.S. ‘soft power’ – acquired a new potency. The merits of America’s culture, and way of life, seemed to acquire practical validation through the implosion of the USSR.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      But today, with America’s soft power collapsed – not even the illusion of universalism can be sustained. Other states are coming forward, offering themselves as separate, equally compelling ‘civilisational’ states. It is clear that even were the classic liberal Establishment to win in the November U.S. elections, America no longer has claim to path-find a New World Order.

      Yet, should this secularised Protestant current be over – beware! Because its subterranean, unconscious religiosity is the ‘ghost at the table’ today. It is returning in a new guise.

      The ‘old illusion’ cannot continue, because its core values are being radicalised, stood on their head, and turned into the swords with which to impale classic American and European liberals (and U.S. Christian Conservatives). It is now the younger generation of American woke liberals who are asserting vociferously not merely that the old liberal paradigm is illusory, but that it was never more than ‘a cover’ hiding oppression – whether domestic, or colonial, racist or imperial; a moral stain that only redemption can cleanse.

      It is an attack – which coming from within – forecloses on any U.S. moral, soft power, global leadership aspirations. For with the illusion exploded, and nothing in its place, a New World Order cannot coherently be formulated.

      Not content with exposing the illusion, the woke generation are also tearing down, and shredding, the flags at the masthead: Freedom and prosperity achieved via the liberal market.

      ‘Freedom’ is being torn down from within. Dissidents from the woke ideology, are being ‘called out’, made to repent on the knee, or face reputational or economic ruin. It is ‘soft totalitarianism’. It recalls one of Dostoevsky’s characters – at a time when Russian progressives were discrediting traditional institutions – who, in a celebrated line, says: “I got entangled in my data … Starting from unlimited freedom, I conclude with unlimited despotism”.

      Even ‘science’ has become a ‘God that failed’; instead of being the path to liberty, it has become a dark soulless path toward unfreedom. From algorithms that ‘cost’ the value of human lives, versus the ‘costing’ of lockdown; from secret ‘Black Box’ algos that limit distribution of news and thinking, to Bill Gates’ vaccination ID project, science now portends despotic social control, rather than a fluttering standard, hoist as the symbol of freedom.

      But the most prominent of these flags, torn down, cannot be blamed on the woke generation. There has been no ‘prosperity for all’ – only distortions and warped structures. There are not even free markets. The Fed and the U.S. Treasury simply print new money, and hand it out to select recipients. There is no means now to attribute ‘worth’ to financial assets. Their value simply is that which Central Government is willing to pay for bonds, or grant in bail-outs.

      Wow. ‘The God who failed’ (André Gide’s book title) – a crash of idols. One wonders now, what is the point to that huge financial eco-system known as Wall Street. Why not winnow it down to a couple of entities, say, Blackrock and KKR (hedge funds), and leave it to them to distribute the Fed’s freshly-printed ‘boodle’ amongst friends? Liberal markets no more – and many fewer jobs.

      Many commentators have noted the wokes’ absence of vision for the future. Some describe them in highly caustic terms:

      “Today, America’s tumbrils are clattering about, carrying toppled statues, ruined careers, unwoke brands. Over their sides peer those deemed racist by left-wing identitarians and sentenced to cancelation, even as the evidentiary standard for that crime falls through the floor … But who are these cultural revolutionaries? The conventional wisdom goes that this is the inner-cities erupting, economically disadvantaged victims of racism enraged over the murder of George Floyd. The reality is something more … bourgeoisie. As Kevin Williamson observed last week, “These are the idiot children of the American ruling class, toy radicals and Champagne Bolsheviks, playing Jacobin for a while, until they go back to graduate school”.

      Is that so? I well recall listening in the Middle East to other angry young men who, too, wanted to ‘topple the statues’; to burn down everything. ‘You really believed that Washington would allow you … in’, they taunted and tortured their leaders: “No, we must burn it all down. Start from scratch”.

      Did they have a blueprint for the future? No. They simply believed that Islam would organically inflate, and expand to fill the void. It would happen by itself – of its own accord: Faith.

      Professor John Gray has noted “that in The God that failed, Gide says: ‘My faith in communism is like my faith in religion. It is a promise of salvation for mankind’’. “Here Gide acknowledged”, Gray continues, “that communism was an atheist version of monotheism. But so is liberalism, and when Gide and others gave up faith in communism to become liberals, they were not renouncing the concepts and values that both ideologies had inherited from western religion. They continued to believe that history was a directional process in which humankind was advancing towards universal freedom”.

      So too with the wokes. The emphasis is on Redemption; on a Truth catharsis; on their own Virtue as sufficient agency to stand-in for the lack of plan for the future. All are clear signals: A secularised ‘illusion’ is metamorphosing back into ‘religion’. Not as Islam, of course, but as angry Man, burning at the deep and dark moral stain of the past. And acting now as purifying ‘fire’ to bring about the uplifting and shining future ahead.

      Tucker Carlson, a leading American conservative commentator known for plain speaking, frames the movement a little differently:

      This is not a momentary civil disturbance. This is a serious, and highly organized political movement … It is deep and profound and has vast political ambitions. It is insidious, it will grow. Its goal is to end liberal democracy and challenge western civilization itself … We’re too literal and good-hearted to understand what’s happening … We have no idea what we are up against … These are not protests. This is a totalitarian political movement”.

      Again, nothing needs to be done by this new generation to bring into being a new world, apart from destroying the old one. This vision is a relic – albeit secularised – of western Christianity. Apocalypse and redemption, these wokes believe, have their own path; their own internal logic.

      Mill’s ‘ghost’ is arrived at the table. And with its return, America’s exceptionalism has its re-birth. Redemption for humankind’s dark stains. A narrative in which the history of mankind is reduced to the history of racial struggle. Yet Americans, young or old, now lack the power to project it as a universal vision.

      ‘Virtue’, however deeply felt, on its own, is insufficient. Might President Trump try nevertheless to sustain the old illusion by hard power? The U.S. is deeply fractured and dysfunctional – but if desperate, this is possible.

      The “toy radicals, and Champagne Bolsheviks” – in these terms of dripping disdain from Williamson – are very similar to those who rushed into the streets in 1917. But before dismissing them so peremptorily and lightly, recall what occurred.

      Into that combustible mass of youth – so acultured by their progressive parents to see a Russian past that was imperfect and darkly stained – a Trotsky and Lenin were inserted. And Stalin ensued. No ‘toy radicals’. Soft became hard totalitarianism.

    • San Francisco Rent Drops Most On Record As People Flee For Suburbs
      San Francisco Rent Drops Most On Record As People Flee For Suburbs

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 22:40

      Readers may recall, as early as March, city dwellers in California fled to suburbs and remote areas to isolate from the virus pandemic. The proliferation of remote work arrangements has led this shift to become more permanent. 

      At first, the exodus out of the city was due to virus-related lockdowns, then social unrest, and now it appears a steady flow of folks are leaving the San Francisco Bay Area for rural communities as their flexible work environment (i.e., remote access) allows them to work from anywhere, more specifically, outside city centers where the cost of living is a whole lot cheaper.  

      Bloomberg notes, citing a new report from rental website Zumper, the latest emigration trend out of the Bay Area has resulted in rents for a San Francisco one-bedroom apartment to plunge 12% in June compared with last year, which is one of the most significant monthly declines on record.

      “Zumper has been tracking rent prices across the country for over five years but we have never seen the market fluctuate quite like this,” Zumper co-founder and CEO Anthemos Georgiades said. “For example, rent prices in San Francisco have historically only gone up and typically only incrementally, yet now we are seeing double-digit percent rent reductions. This is unprecedented for this generation of renters.”

      Georgiades said the ability to work remotely led to the exodus of city dwellers: 

      “The very real move of many mainly technology employers to a future of remote work, meaning millions of employees now looking outside of dense metropolitan areas for their next home now that their commute time is no longer a factor,” Georgiades said.

      “Silicon Valley hubs such as Mountain View and Palo Alto also saw rents plunge — a sign residents of the tech-heavy region are taking advantage of remote work arrangements to flee to cheaper areas,” Bloomberg said. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “This is the strangest downturn I’ve ever seen,” J.J. Panzer with the Real Management Company told San Francisco KPIX 5.

      Rental inventory in the Bay Area has increased since the pandemic began – allowing renters to renegotiate leases and ask for a 10-15% reduction in rents.  

      Other factors for the steep drop in rents is mainly because of the recession and high unemployment. People can no longer afford pricey rentals in San Francisco – must leave city centers for suburbs where rents are significantly less. 

      “As the pandemic persists on, the demand for rentals has continued to shift away from these pricey areas, and a significant amount of that demand seems to be moving toward neighboring, less expensive areas,” Zumper said on its blog.

      “Your landlord, given the widespread nature of the job loss, actually does have an incentive to negotiate a lower rent with you,” said senior Zillow economist Skyler Olsen.

      “Vacant units have no value coming upstream to pay their property taxes and their mortgage and that value as part of the system,” said Olsen. 

      Financial blog Market Crumbs notes, “with the rise of remote work seemingly inevitable at this point, this trend should continue in San Francisco as well as other major cities in the years to come.”

    • Left-Wing CHOP Zone Responsible For 525% Spike In Seattle Crime
      Left-Wing CHOP Zone Responsible For 525% Spike In Seattle Crime

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 22:15

      Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

      After characterizing the infamous CHOP area of downtown Seattle as a “summer of love,” Mayor Jenny Durkan was eventually forced to acknowledge that the failed communist experiment was responsible for a whopping 525 per cent spike in crime.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As we highlighted yesterday, following weeks of violence and chaos, CHOP was finally dismantled by Seattle police, but only after occupiers marched on Mayor Durkan’s 5,000 sqft., $7.6 million house.

      For almost the entirety of June, the area was plagued with fights, bickering, robberies and rapes, with occupiers targeting both outsiders and each other.

      It has now emerged that compared to the same period last year, from June 2 to June 30 there was a 525 per cent jump in crime.

      This figure is even greater than the 300% number repeatedly cited by Seattle Police Chief Carmen Best.

      Rather embarrassingly, after proclaiming a “summer of love” and telling President Trump, “Seattle is fine, don’t be so afraid of democracy,” Mayor Durkan was forced to acknowledge the numbers in her own emergency order.

      The order states that there were, “22 additional incidents, in person-related crime in the area, to include two additional homicides, 6 additional robberies, and 16 additional aggravated assaults (to include 2 additional non-fatal shootings).”

      So in other words, a commune that was built in the name of opposing violence and brutality led directly to a massive increase in violence and brutality.

      So much for the tolerant left!

      *  *  *

      My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.

    • Has E.T. Gone Home?
      Has E.T. Gone Home?

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 21:50

      There is some controversy as to whether World UFO Day falls on June 26 or July 02 with people seemingly celebrating it on both days.

      The occasion is an awareness day for UFOs coinciding with the Roswell incident’s anniversary; and, as Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes, it is getting increasingly popular as UFOs have been making headlines again lately, notably due to the “Storm Area 51” event which went viral last year.

      That’s on top of The New York Times running an interesting article about several U.S. Navy fighter pilots encountering mysterious objects near the southeastern coast of the United States. The high-profile story remains unexplained and so do plenty of other UFO sightings reported by members of the public every year like strange lights crossing the night sky or orange disks hovering in the distance.

      The National UFO Reporting Center which is based in the U.S. maintains statistics about global UFO sightings. Notably, they are ticking up again.

      Infographic: Has E.T. Gone Home? | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      There were just over 3,700 reported sightings in 2018 and in 2019, there were 6,889. So far in 2020, 4,688 UFO sightings have been reported.

      With regards to the above-mentioned “Storm Area 51” event, conspiracy theorists have long maintained that a secret U.S. base in Nevada known as Area 51 harbors alien life or parts of a crashed spacecraft. The event called for people to storm the base and find out and it attracted 1.4 million signatures. It also prompted the Air Force to issue a warning to stay well away from the facility. Facebook eventually took the event page down.

    • Judge Orders Jeffrey Epstein Accuser To Destroy Files
      Judge Orders Jeffrey Epstein Accuser To Destroy Files

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 21:45

      Jeffrey Epstein accuser Virginia Giuffre has been ordered by a US District Judge to destroy files believed to contain the names of Epstein’s associates – because they were “improperly obtained.’

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Epstein associates Bill Clinton, Ehud Barak, Prince Andrew and Les Wexner

      Senior US District Judge Loretta Preska said on Wednesday that Giuffre’s attorneys would need to provide proof that the documents had been destroyed, adding that “Counsel shall submit an affidavit detailing the steps taken to do so,” according to Newsweek.

      Preska noted that a protective order governing the ‘improperly obtained’ documents only applied during a civil lawsuit proceeding which has been settled.

      Preska’s ruling came after a request by attorney Alan Dershowitz to gain access to the documents. Giuffre has claimed that Dershowitz was one of the men Epstein forced her to have sex with. In response, Dershowitz sued Giuffre for defamation in 2019. Dershowitz claimed that obtaining the Epstein files would be an asset to his defense.

      Preska said in her ruling that Dershowitz’s desire to see all of the files “with over a thousand docket entries” was not a “targeted strike” but a “carpet bombing.”Newsweek

      In September 2019, an attorney for Epstein’s alleged ‘madam,’ Ghislaine Maxwell – who was arrested on Thursday, told Preska that that there are “hundreds” of people named in some 2,000 pages of documents.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The lawyer, Jeffrey Pagliuca, told U.S. District Judge Loretta Preska Wednesday that the materials also include an address book with about 1,000 names. Preska is considering how to carry out a ruling by the federal appeals court in New York that she must consider unsealing some of the documents. There was no detail at the hearing as to the identity of the people are named in the documents, and they may include women who say they are victims of Epstein, his friends and others. –Bloomberg

      Epstein died after being taken into custody in July, 2019 on charges of sex trafficking and conspiracy to engage in sex trafficking. Since his rampant pedophilia became public, his associates – including Bill Clinton, Bill Gates, Ehud Barak, and Victoria’s Secret boss Les Wexner have sought to distance themselves from Epstein and his activities.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Other famous names associated with Epstein include LinkedIn cofounder Reid Hoffman, Elon Musk, and Mark Zuckerberg, who Musk introduced to the registered sex-offender. Zuckerberg spokesman told Vanity Fair “Mark met Epstein in passing one time at a dinner honoring scientists that was not organized by Epstein,” adding “Mark did not communicate with Epstein again following the dinner.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Musk told the magazine “I don’t recall introducing Epstein to anyone, as I don’t know the guy well enough to do so, Epstein is obviously a creep and Zuckerberg is not a friend of mine. Several years ago, I was at his house in Manhattan for about 30 minutes in the middle of the afternoon with Talulah [Riley], as she was curious about meeting this strange person for a novel she was writing. We did not see anything inappropriate at all, apart from weird art. He tried repeatedly to get me to visit his island. I declined.” 

    • Celente: "If We Don't Restore Freedom, America Is Dead"
      Celente: "If We Don't Restore Freedom, America Is Dead"

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 21:25

      Via Greg Hunter’s USAWatchdog.com,

      Gerald Celente, a top trends researcher and Publisher of The Trends Journal, declared back in March that the “Greatest Depression” had already started. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Now, he says politicians who are power tripping “imbeciles and freaks out of their minds” closed down the economy for political gain in an attempt to stop President Trump from winning a second term in November.  Celente explains,

      “They destroyed the economy.  The economy is dead.  These little liberals, I am surrounded by them here . . . Cuomo loving liberals, when it started, they all said it will come back.  It’s not coming back.  The economy is dead, and the politicians killed it…

      They are doing this as a power trip and to show President Trump is not doing the right thing.  So, they are looking at it like that…

      If Trump were smart, and I think this is the card he is going to play, he’s going to blame the shutdown of the economy on the Democrats.  I don’t like either party because I am a political atheist, but he’s going to blame it on them and rightfully so.  Trump is going to say the reason you are out of work, the reason you lost your business, the reason you have escalating crime is because the ‘Democraps’ closed down the economy.  That’s the way I see him playing out the Trump card.

      In previous interviews on USAWatchdog.com, Celente predicted that when gold reached $1,485 per ounce, that it would begin to take off and never look back.  It looks like that prediction has come true.  Now, Celente says look for gold to be going much higher.  Celente says,

      “You look at gold prices.  Look at where gold prices are going.  How long have I been saying this?  When all this began, I said boom, you are going to see gold spike, and now it’s around $1,800 per ounce.  Silver is going to follow when gold breaks $2,000 per ounce.  It’s because this economy is going down, and it’s not coming back.  According to Yelp, 53% of the restaurants will not be reopening.  On average, 43% of the businesses won’t be reopening, and the bigs are going to gobble it up.  Here’s a headline, ‘Big hotels could benefit from aid.’  That’s right, more billions and billions of dollars are going to big hotels. . . . Why are the markets up?  The Federal Reserve is going to pump money into our big guys who got richer by about $650 billion since this started.  We are all becoming workers on the plantation of ‘Slavelandia,’ and here are some crumbs for you.”

      Celente says the Democrat party are now communists and Marxists, and he thinks they will employ their tactics.  Celente predicts,

      You are going to see violence like we have never seen before this summer.  You are going to see police against the people, and it’s going to become more militarized as it becomes more violent.  If we don’t unite for peace and restore freedom, America is dead.

      In closing, Celente thinks Trump can win a second term and says, “All he has to do is win the swing states.  That’s it.”

      Join Greg Hunter of USAWatchdog.com as he goes One-on-One with Gerald Celente, publisher of The Trends Journal.

      To Donate to USAWatchdog.com Click Here

    • UMass Nursing Dean Fired For Saying "Everyone's Life Matters"
      UMass Nursing Dean Fired For Saying "Everyone's Life Matters"

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 21:15

      Authored by Jonathan Turley,

      We have been discussing the growing fear of professors and students over the loss of free speech on campuses for years, but recently those concerns have been greatly magnified with the investigation or termination of professors for expressing opposing views about police abuse, Black Lives Matter movement or aspects of the protests following the killing of George Floyd.  There is a sense of a new orthodoxy that does not allow for dissenting voices as campaigns are launched to fire faculty who are denounced as insensitive or even racist for such criticism.  The most recent controversy involves the recently installed University of Massachusetts-Lowell Dean of Nursing Leslie Neal-Boylan. Dr. Neal-Boylan had only been in her position for a few months when she was fired. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The reason, according to many reports, is that she sent an email on June 2 to the Solomont School of Nursing on the recent anti-racism demonstrations across the country that include the words “everyone’s life matters.”

      As a blog dedicated to free speech, it has been difficult to keep up with the rising number of cases of the curtailment of speech or academic freedom on our campuses.  What is equally alarming is the relative silence of most faculty members as individual professors are publicly denounced by their universities, forced into retirement, or outright terminated for expressing dissenting views.  This case however raises an equally serious concern over the loss of due process for academics who find themselves the focus of a campaign for removal — or simply summary dismissal.

      Dr. Neal-Boylan was heralded last September as a “visionary leader” by the university in taking over the deanship.  Her writings include strong advocacy for those with disabilities in the nursing field. Those writings show tremendous empathy and concern for inclusivity in the profession.

      This controversy began when Dr. Neal-Boylan wrote the email which started with the following words:

      “Dear SSON Community,” the email provided to Campus Reform begins.

      “I am writing to express my concern and condemnation of the recent (and past) acts of violence against people of color. Recent events recall a tragic history of racism and bias that continue to thrive in this country. I despair for our future as a nation if we do not stand up against violence against anyone. BLACK LIVES MATTER, but also, EVERYONE’S LIFE MATTERS. No one should have to live in fear that they will be targeted for how they look or what they believe.”

      One can understand that many felt that the statement detracted from the need to focus on the treatment and loss of black lives. However, one can also read these words as a nursing dean expressing opposition to all violence. 

      However, the email was immediately denounced in a tweet as “uncalled for” and “upsetting”  by “Haley.”  The university quickly responded to Haley and said

      “Haley – Thank you for bringing this to our attention. The university hears you and we believe black lives matter. See the letter the chancellor sent out Monday.” 

      The letter isa statement in support of Black Lives Matter.  Soon thereafter the University reportedly fired Dr. Neal-Boylan.

      University spokesperson Christine Gillette issued a statement to the site Campus Reform Wednesday that stated 

      “The university ended the employment of Dr. Neal-Boylan on June 19 after 10 months in her role as dean of the Solomont School of Nursing. As with all such decisions, it was made in the best interest of the university and its students.”

      What is particularly concerning is a June 19 letter referenced on the site that was allegedly written by Neal-Boylan and sent to Provost Julie Nash. The letter states

      “It is important to point out that no one ever gave me an opportunity to share my views of how the college and school were interacting nor explain myself regarding the BLM email. My meeting with you, [Dean] Shortie [McKinney], and Lauren Turner was clearly not intended to give me an opportunity to defend my actions. I was condemned without trial.”

      The statement from the university does not state what specifically is “in the best interest of the university and its students.”  However, the failure to specifically state the grounds and the process used to reach the decision is alarming.  The University let the public record stand — and the view that Dr. Neal-Boylan was fired for expressing the view that “Black Lives Matter, but also Everyone’s Life Matters.”

      What is “in the best interest of the university and its students” should include free speech and due process.  The mere fact that we do not know if Dr. Neal-Boylan was afforded either right is chilling.  If there were other grounds against her, the university should state so.  Instead, the clear message to faculty is that the dean was fired for expressing concerns over the loss of lives across the country in these protests.

      I can understand the sensitivity to those who feel that the inclusion of other lives tends to take away the focus on the need for action on the treatment of African-Americans in our society.  However, it is possible that, as a leading health care figure, Dr. Neal-Boylan was speaking out to seek to end all violence in the protection of human life.  Medical and health care professionals tend to oppose all loss of life and violence.  The question is whether an academic should be able to express such a view and, equally importantly, whether there is a process through which a professor can defend herself in explaining the motivation and intended meaning of her words.

      The uncertainty over the process used in this case creates an obvious chilling effect for other faculty members. In 30 years of teaching, I have never seen the level of fear among faculty over speaking or writing about current events, particularly if they do not agree with aspects of the protests.  Not only is there a sense of forced silence but universities have been conspicuously silent in the face of the destruction of their own public art and statues. Even New York Times editors can be forced out for simply publishing opposing views.

      As we have previously discussed, chilling effects on free speech has long been a focus of the Supreme Court.  Free speech demands bright line rules to flourish. The different treatment afforded faculty creates an obviously chilling effect on free speech.  Avoiding the chilling effect of potential punishment for speech is a core concern running through Supreme Court cases.  For example, in 1964, the Supreme Court struck down the law screening incoming mail. A unanimous court, Justice William Douglas rejected the law as “a limitation on the unfettered exercise of the addressee’s First Amendment rights.” It noted that such review “is almost certain to have a deterrent effect” on the free speech rights of Americans, particularly for “those who have sensitive positions:”

      Obviously, many of these school are private institutions but freedom of speech and academic freedom have long been the touchstones of the academy. What concerned me most was that I could not find a university statement on a matter that resulted in the canning of one of its deans — just an ominous note that the page of Dr. Neal-Boylan can no longer be found.

    • COVID Kills 46,000 Jobs In Downturn Baltimore
      COVID Kills 46,000 Jobs In Downturn Baltimore

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 21:00

      The economic realities that a V-shaped recovery is not possible in the back half of 2020 are being realized in Baltimore’s downtown area.

      The Downtown Partnership of Baltimore (DPOB) published its annual State of the Downtown report on Tuesday and there are new concerns the COVID-19-induced recession will have long-lasting impacts. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Baltimore Downtown map 

      “The areas that were impacted, as you can imagine more significantly tourism, restaurants, some of our cultural institutions… and those are the ones that we really have to rally behind now,” DPOB President Shelonda Stokes told WJZ Baltimore

      DPOB conducted two surveys in mid-March, just around the time, Maryland Gov. Larry Hogan initiated virus-related lockdowns. Out of 150 respondents, DPOB said strict public health orders heavily impacted at least 94% of the businesses in the downtown district. About 29% of respondents said it would take upwards of three months to recover. 

      The survey found hospitality and restaurant/food service industries were the most impacted. It said restaurants, hotels, and retail shopping stand to lose billions of dollars. Nevertheless, DPOB claims COVID-19 has directly and indirectly impacted 46,000 jobs.

      “We’re at a place that you could see even from the consumer sentiment survey that we’re still fearful. We’re cautiously re-entering, we’ve been comfortable in our homes, we’ve figured out how to work from home and be effective,” Stokes said.

      Baltimore City is facing a double whammy – it’s not just the virus that has deterred people from traveling to the Inner Harbor area – but also crime across the city is out of control. On a per-capita basis, the city is one of the most dangerous in the country. Readers may recall our countless articles on the socio-economic implosion of Baltimore, starting years before the pandemic. 

      “Any level of violent crime in unacceptable,” said Councilman Eric Costello.

      DPOB is confident some businesses may not survive the virus-induced economic downturn and urged residents to support local businesses in this time of crisis. 

      What’s unfolding in Baltimore is just one example of how a V-shaped recovery in city centers across the country is, by far, a distant dream, and, in fact, complete bullshit. 

      Businesses, and to be specific, small businesses, and the bottom 90% of Americans, have been devastated in the last couple of months.

      Days ago, readers may recall we noted a quarter of all personal income in the US now comes from the government – this shows how reliant the population has become on the government, or should we say socialist Trump checks. 

      Twitter handle Long View pointed out last week that “Retail sales bounced back like a rubber band because of stimulus (Trump checks, PPP, UE bonus). It’s all over in a few weeks & with the new uptick we likely see at least 6 more weeks of contraction with no plug. The real hit starts now.”

      Knowing the backdrop of consumers, as to how they’re very reliant on Trump checks for consumption, there can be no V-shaped recovery this year – nevertheless, commercial shopping districts like the one in Baltimore – will remain depressed for the foreseeable future which will result in a period of high unemployment. 

      All of this comes at the worst possible time for Baltimore as the population crashes to a 100-year low – the tax base is collapsing as folks are quickly exiting the city for the suburbs. Coronavirus has exposed just how fragile the economy, society, and municipalities really are, which suggests the worst of the crisis is ahead. 

    • Three Glaring Problems With The Russian Taliban "Bounty" Story
      Three Glaring Problems With The Russian Taliban "Bounty" Story

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 20:35

      Authored by Barbara Boland via The American Conservative,

      There seems to be a lack of sourcing and a big whiff of politics, say former intelligence officers…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      A bombshell report published by The New York Times Friday alleges that Russia paid dollar bounties to the Taliban in Afghanistan to kill U.S troops. Obscured by an extremely bungled White House press response, there are at least three serious flaws with the reporting.

      The article alleges that GRU, a top-secret unit of Russian military intelligence, offered the bounty in payment for every U.S. soldier killed in Afghanistan, and that at least one member of the U.S. military was alleged to have been killed in exchange for the bounties. According to the paper, U.S. intelligence concluded months ago that the Russian unit involved in the bounties was also linked to poisonings, assassination attempts and other covert operations in Europe. The Times reports that United States intelligence officers and Special Operations forces in Afghanistan came to this conclusion about Russian bounties some time in 2019.

      According to the anonymous sources that spoke with the paper’s reporters, the White House and President Trump were briefed on a range of potential responses to Moscow’s provocations, including sanctions, but the White House had authorized no further action.

      Immediately after the news broke Friday, the Trump administration denied the report—or rather, they denied that the President was briefed, depending on which of the frenetic, contradictory White House responses you read.

      Traditionally, the President of the United States receives unconfirmed, and sometimes even raw intelligence, in the President’s Daily Brief, or PDB. Trump notoriously does not read his PDB, according to reports.

      Director of National Intelligence John Ratcliffe said in a statement Saturday night that neither Trump nor Vice President Pence “were ever briefed on any intelligence alleged by the New York Times in its reporting yesterday.”

      On Sunday night, Trump tweeted that not only was he not told about the alleged intelligence, but that it was not credible.“Intel just reported to me that they did not find this info credible, and therefore did not report it to me or @VP” Pence, Trump wrote Sunday night on Twitter.

      Ousted National Security Advisor John Bolton said on NBC’s “Meet the Press” Sunday that Trump was probably claiming ignorance in order to justify his administration’s lack of response.

      “He can disown everything if nobody ever told him about it,” said Bolton.

      Bolton is one of the only sources named in the New York Times article. Currently on a book tour, Bolton has said that he witnessed foreign policy malfeasance by Trump that dwarfs the Ukraine scandal that was the subject of the House impeachment hearings. But Bolton’s credibility has been called into question since he declined to appear before the House committee.

      The explanations for what exactly happened, and who was briefed, continued to shift Monday.

      White House press secretary Kayleigh McEnany followed Trump’s blanket denial with a statement that the intelligence concerning Russian bounty information was “unconfirmed.” She didn’t say the intelligence wasn’t credible, like Trump had said the day before, only that there was “no consensus” and that the “veracity of the underlying allegations continue to be evaluated,” which happens to almost completely match the Sunday night statement from the White House’s National Security Council.

      Instead of saying that the sources for the Russian bounty story were not credible and the story was false, or likely false, McEnany then said that Trump had “not been briefed on the matter.”

      “He was not personally briefed on the matter,” she said. “That is all I can share with you today.”

      It’s difficult to see how the White House thought McEnany’s statement would help, and a bungled press response like this is communications malpractice, according to sources who spoke to The American Conservative.

      Let’s take a deeper dive into some of the problems with the reporting here:

      1. Anonymous U.S. and Taliban sources?

      The Times article repeatedly cites unnamed “American intelligence officials.” The Washington Post and The Wall Street Journal articles “confirming” the original Times story merely restate the allegations of the anonymous officials, along with caveats like “if true” or “if confirmed.”

      Furthermore, the unnamed intelligence sources who spoke with the Times say that their assessment is based “on interrogations of captured Afghan militants and criminals.”

      That’s a red flag, said John Kiriakou, a former analyst and case officer for the CIA who led the team that captured senior al-Qaeda member Abu Zubaydah in Pakistan in 2002.

      “When you capture a prisoner, and you’re interrogating him, the prisoner is going to tell you what he thinks you want to hear,” he said in an interview with The American Conservative. “There’s no evidence here, there’s no proof.”

      “Who can forget how ‘successful’ interrogators can be in getting desired answers?” writes Ray McGovern, who served as a CIA analyst for 27 years. Under the CIA’s “enhanced interrogation techniques,” Khalid Sheik Mohammed famously made at least 31 confessions, many of which were completely false.

      Kiriakou believes that the sources behind the report hold important clues on how the government viewed its credibility.

      “We don’t know who the source is for this. We don’t know if they’ve been vetted, polygraphed; were they a walk-in; were they a captured prisoner?”

      If the sources were suspect, as they appear to be here, then Trump would not have been briefed on this at all.

      With this story, it’s important to start at the “intelligence collection,” said Kiriakou. “This information… appeared in the [CIA World Intelligence Review] Wire, which goes to hundreds of people inside the government, mostly at the State Department and the Pentagon. The most sensitive information isn’t put in the Wire; it goes only in the PDB.”

      “If this was from a single source intelligence, it wouldn’t have been briefed to Trump. It’s not vetted, and it’s not important enough. If you caught a Russian who said this, for example, that would make it important enough. But some Taliban detainees saying it to an interrogator, that does not rise to the threshold.”

      2. What purpose would bounties serve?

      Everyone and their mother knows Trump wants to pull the troops out of Afghanistan, said Kiriakou.

      “He ran on it and he has said it hundreds of times,” he said. “So why would the Russians bother putting a bounty on U.S. troops if we’re about to leave Afghanistan shortly anyway?”

      That’s leaving aside Russia’s own experience with the futility of Afghanistan campaigns, learned during its grueling 9-year war there in the 1980s.

      If this bounty campaign is real, it would not appear to be very effective, as only eight U.S. military members were killed in Afghanistan in 2020. The New York Times could not verify that even one U.S. military member was killed due to an alleged Russian bounty.

      The Taliban denies it accepted bounties from Russian intelligence.

      “These kinds of deals with the Russian intelligence agency are baseless—our target killings and assassinations were ongoing in years before, and we did it on our own resources,” Zabihullah Mujahid, a spokesman for the Taliban, told The New York Times. “That changed after our deal with the Americans, and their lives are secure and we don’t attack them.”

      The Russian Embassy in the United States called the reporting “fake news.”

      While the Russians are ruthless, “it’s hard to fathom what their motivations could be” here, said Paul Pillar, an academic and 28-year veteran of the Central Intelligence Agency, in an interview with The American Conservative. “What would they be retaliating for? Some use of force in Syria recently? I don’t know. I can’t string together a particular sequence that makes sense at this time. I’m not saying that to cast doubt on reports the Russians were doing this sort of thing.”

      3. Why is this story being leaked now?

      According to U.S. officials quoted by the AP, top officials in the White House “were aware of classified intelligence indicating Russia was secretly offering bounties to the Taliban for the deaths of Americans” in early 2019. So why is this story just coming out now?

      This story is “WMD [all over] again,” said McGovern, who in the 1980s chaired National Intelligence Estimates and prepared the President’s Daily Brief. He believes the stories seek to preempt DOJ findings on the origins of the Russiagate probe.

      The NYT story serves to bolster the narrative that Trump sides with Russia, and against our intelligence community estimates and our own soldiers lives.

      The stories “are likely to remain indelible in the minds of credulous Americans—which seems to have been the main objective,” writes McGovern. “There [Trump] goes again—not believing our ‘intelligence community; siding, rather, with Putin.’”

      “I don’t believe this story… and I think it was leaked to embarrass the President,” said Kiriakou. “Trump is on the ropes in the polls; Biden is ahead in all the battleground states.”

      If these anonymous sources had spoken up during the impeachment hearings, their statements could have changed history.

      But the timing here, “kicking a man when he is down, is extremely like the Washington establishment. A leaked story like this now, embarrasses and weakens Trump,” he said. “It was obvious that Trump would blow the media response, which he did.”

      The bungled media response and resulting negative press could also lead Trump to contemplate harsher steps towards Russia in order to prove that he is “tough,” which may have motivated the leakers.

      It’s certainly a policy goal with which Bolton, one of the only named sources in the New York Times piece, wholeheartedly approves.

    • College Students Busted Throwing "COVID-19 Parties" To Infect All Their Friends
      College Students Busted Throwing "COVID-19 Parties" To Infect All Their Friends

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 20:10

      Many older millennials might remember the furor over “Rainbow Parties” back in the late 1990s/early 2000s. We’re not going to get into all the details of this peculiar-sounding “youth culture trend” – the only thing that’s really relevant to our discussion is that these lurid stories horrified parents and – as it turns out – were completely, entirely made-up.

      And so it is with the latest COVID-19 related outrage: comments from Tuscaloosa City Councilor Sonya McKinstry, who warned that bored college and high school students in her district were throwing “COVID Parties” where everybody hangs out with somebody who has the virus, and they all place bets on who tests positive first.

      Thanks to the Internet, teenagers and young adults have been caught doing many extremely dumb things, like eating tidepods and whatnot. But even those trends were massively overblown and largely the work of a few trolls. This too stretches credulity. So, what kind of evidence does McKinstry have to support this claim?

      Actually, quite a bit. State officials have confirmed that 8 cases have been linked to a house party full of 20 year olds somewhere in New York. The host was already symptomatic during the event, and officials heard about two other parties.

      McKinstry told ABC that students have been organizing “COVID parties” as a game to intentionally infect each other presumably so they can “get it over with” and get the antibodies, even though the durability of these antibodies to provide lasting protection between ‘seasons’ hasn’t yet been closely studied. Organizers of these parties are purposefully seeking out and inviting COVID-19 positive young people to these parties.

      “They put money in a pot and they try to get COVID. Whoever gets COVID first gets the pot. It makes no sense,” McKinstry said. “They’re intentionally doing it.”

      Tuscaloosa Fire Chief Randy Smith told the City Council on Tuesday that he has confirmed the behavior.

      And what’s worse, those rumored to have attended aren’t cooperating with contact tracers, and 9 people have been subpoenaed over this.

      Across the US, young people gathering in bars and other social settings (like protests) have helped reignite the outbreak and push it to a new level of intensity, jeopardizing the progress made by the most successful states. One of the more interesting details about this story is that these “COVID-19 parties” didn’t actually happen in Tuscaloosa, they happened in Westchester.

      We’re not exactly sure how the kids from Tuscaloosa managed to travel back and forth, but we imagine it wasn’t very difficult.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Meanwhile, more schools like Yale are calling for remote learning next semester which might leave more college students languishing in their hometowns.

      With many young people likely staying home through the fall, we imagine this won’t be the last example of friction between rebellious young people and the authorities charged with enforcing social distancing.

    • What Went Wrong In 1971?
      What Went Wrong In 1971?

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 19:45

      Written by Jan Nieuwenhuijs for Voima Insight.

      An interview with the gentlemen behind the website “WTF Happened in 1971?”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The last remnants of the gold standard were abandoned in August 1971, when President of the United States Richard Nixon decided to close the gold window (foreigners couldn’t redeem dollars for gold at the Treasury anymore). From 1945 until 1971, the U.S. dollar was backed by gold, and served as the world reserve currency under a system called Bretton Woods.

      The “Nixon Shock”—as the unilateral suspension of Bretton Woods is often referred to—brought about a sea of change in economies and societies around the world, because from that moment on all national currencies stopped having an anchor. Fiat currencies could be created boundlessly. To get an understanding of the changes since 1971, I decided to interview the gentlemen behind the website “WTF Happened in 1971?

      If you don’t know this website, make sure to have a look. On the homepage you will find a collection of charts that all show a remarkable change around 1971. The founders of the website are Ben and Collin from the U.S., and I truly enjoyed talking to them. (Most of the charts in this article are sourced from their website.)

      Jan: So, who are you guys? What is your background?

      Ben: My background is very diverse. I have lots of interests, lots of hobbies. I have 3D graphics background. I don’t have an economics background, but as of recently I got very interested in economics. I’m the type of person that when I get into something, I tend to go all the way and learn as much as possible. We obviously found this rabbit hole and most of it’s from our study of money and monetary economics.

      Jan: How did your interest in economics begin?

      Ben: I got interested in it, because I got interested in bitcoin, and I tried to understand bitcoin, but realized I didn’t understand what money was. And that required asking a lot of questions about the history of money, how it emerged, and what its purpose is in society.

      Jan: Same questions for you Collin.

      Collin: So, we’re both amateur Austrian economists. That would probably be how we define ourselves. Neither of us have any formal education in finance, or business, or economics, which in a lot of ways has actually been to our benefit. We just like to ask questions, and we—as we continued to ask questions—identified what we think are the first principles of economics. We realized that that’s the best way for people to learn, by asking questions first rather than starting with a conclusion.

      Jan: What made you launch the website about economic developments that started in1971?

      Ben: Through learning about the history of money, we discovered the Nixon Shock and the ending of the Bretton Woods agreement. If you look at the Wikipedia page, for example, on the Nixon Shock, you’ll see a few of the charts that are on our website. I thought these charts are fascinating, they show an important fundamental change in our society. It had along with it some interesting data that exploded in that time [1971], and we started collecting more and more of these charts. We wished we had a repository where we could just put all these charts to point people to. And the meme was born. It was Collin’s idea to just ask the question: what the f*ck happened in 1971?

      Jan: What do you say are the most significant developments that have occurred since 1971.

      Collin: Monetary expansion—but we get a lot of criticism on this. People say, “oh you’re not taking into account many of the regulatory changes, or the socio-cultural changes that happened around that same time period, that caused some of these second and third order effects that you attribute to this one 1971 data point.” If you were to sit down and talk with us, we’d tell you that the story goes back much further. We would trace it back to 1944 and 1933, and we would look at the Great Depression in America in 1929. We’d look at the creation of the Federal Reserve in 1913, and then ideally, we’d go all the way back to the birth of fiat currencies in the United States before the U.S. was even a country. We’d look at the early fiat experiments, we’d go back to the bi-metal standards, we’d look at the process of coin clipping under the feudal lords. The story obviously doesn’t start in 1971, but certainly that’s when there’s an interesting inflection in the data that you can point to and say: “look what happened here, everything went crazy.”

      We attribute the expansion of monetary policy to gross malinvestment. Malinvestment that’s perpetuated and unable to be liquidated, in such a way that it creates second and third order problems in our society that are exacerbated as this bubble continues to be expanded, and the can of the liquidation of malinvestment is kicked down the road.

      Jan: On your website, the first chart I see is about inequality. How does what you just said ties into inequality in society?

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Ben: I think the greatest driver of inequality today is financial asset inflation, which is a direct result of monetary expansion. When you increase the money supply, you’re going to increase the costs of hard supplied assets like stocks for example. And the deterioration of the moneyness of money—because the store of value aspect of money is important—has led society to use financial assets as money, like stocks and real estate. Many people hold their wealth in financial assets and every financial advisor will tell you, “don’t hold dollars as a store of value.” So, the disproportionate access to financial assets, causes a wealth stratification in society, because the poorer you are the less access you have to financial assets as a percentage of your wealth, and the more wealthy you are, the larger percent of your wealth you hold in financial assets.

      I have a chart that shows at different wealth levels a car is what percentage of your wealth. For people having a low income, their car makes up a significant share of their assets.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      But a car is a depreciating asset. However, the wealthy hold 95 percent of their wealth in financial assets that inflate because of monetary expansion, and their car constitutes only a tiny part of their wealth. Stocks are very disproportionately held by the wealthiest. Something like 10 percent of the population holds 84 percent of all stocks. These dynamics have drawn society apart and hollowed out the middle class.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Average Sales Price of Houses Sold in the U.S./Federal Minimum Hourly Wage in U.S.

      Jan: At the moment there’s a lot of social unrest in the United States. Do you think this is related to that the topic we’re discussing?

      Ben: Yes.

      Collin: People don’t internalize why, but they look around and they understand that things are wrong. They understand that intuitively. Being of our generation [millennial], or even the younger that enter the world, that have no exposure to the “financial asset inflation ponzi,” they’re starting off their lives at a disadvantage.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      It’s much harder for them to get an education, it’s much harder for them to get assets that appreciate by inflation such as a home or stocks, and then they’re working with a depreciating currency to store their value in the short term, in order to build a base for themselves.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And to add on to what Ben said. What we’ve also seen is a major disruption in economic calculation, because of the artificially low discount [interest] rate that we’ve seen for so long that’s perpetuated by central banks since the late 1980s in the United States. We’ve seen the discount rate continue to be artificially pushed down, despite the fact that there isn’t the accumulation of capital that in a free market would normally push that discount rate towards lower numbers. We’re seeing that number artificially brought down by central banks.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Interest rates of several benchmark sovereign bonds.

      You’re watching the replacement cost of assets exceed the replacement cost of capital. Capital is so cheap for some businesses, that they are more financially incentivized to borrow money, and use that money to pump the price of their stocks rather than reinvest and serving the demands of the consumer. And this is why we see companies in America like Apple, which are very cash rich, borrowing money in order to buy back their stocks, so that they can pump the value of their assets rather than try to earn capital by being entrepreneurs, which is how the world is supposed to work in a free market.

      Jan: At the moment, it seems to me that the only thing that is keeping the economy going is the next bubble. Would you agree?

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Collin: Yes. It’s a feedback loop of pumping liquidity into the system to prevent the liquidation of malinvestment. But as that liquidity enters the system more malinvestment is created and the bubble just gets bigger.

      Ben: This is the idea of zombie companies and the zombie economy I’m sure you’re familiar with. Those are the malinvestment companies that should have probably gone under, weren’t it for zero percent interest loans that keep them alive, and them still staying around. It’s destructive to society because these things should have been liquidated.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Collin: If you study the business cycle, you’ll see that these things are very predictable. They tend to go in 10-year cycles. Currently, everyone is attributing our current economic downturn to the coronavirus pandemic, and is saying, “no one could have seen the corona crisis coming.” While, if you were paying close attention to financial markets in the precursor of corona, you were seeing warning signs that things were beginning to malfunction.

      You were watching the repurchase agreement [repo] markets meltdown in the United States. Financial institutions were choosing interest on excess reserves at the Fed over participation in the repo market, which doesn’t make sense in a market where there’s profit to be made. Those are warning signs. You saw an inversion of the yield curve in the Treasuries market, and an extremely low unemployment rate. These are warning signs, by the Fed’s own admission of a potential upcoming recession in 12 to 18 months. And yet, because of the public’s lack of awareness to these economic principles, they think that this economic downturn was caused solely by governments and corporate organizations demanding that people stay home and don’t work. Rather than it being attributed to the business cycles that always happen under these types of expansionary monetary policies.

      Jan: Do you think there’s a strong lobby from the banking industry to keep this system how it is? Because, for example, we can also point to deregulation that has caused problems, but maybe this was lobbied by special interest groups, which was possible because since 1971 we don’t have an anchor to gold anymore.

      Ben: That’s it. I actually think this is one of the greatest misconceptions about the data on our site. There’s a version of our website that does exactly the same thing as we do, but they point to 1980, Ronald Reagan, and deregulation as the cause. And I find that so fascinating. This is the opposite of what I believe. I believe deregulation would be a good thing if we have hard money. But it’s because of the soft money that deregulation causes problems—not the deregulation itself.

      Jan: So, the cause is central banks’ monetary expansion?

      Collin: We often attribute central banks to the feudal lords that clipped the coins and then recirculated the currency at their face value. If you study things like the Cantillon effect, you know that those with the fewest degrees of separation from the printing press benefit the most from the creation of new currency. And that’s by design, it has to work that way. If you were to increase the nominal currency values of everybody at the same time equally across the board, nothing would change. In expansionary monetary policies the relative purchasing power of certain groups are affected more than others, or else you are not redistributing wealth, and expansionary monetary policy effectively does nothing.

      Jan: The answer is that without central banks we would be better off?

      Collin: Absolutely.

      *  *  *

      The recording of this interview was not meant to be published, but as Ben and Collin were very pleased with the conversation, I sent them the audio, which they have published as a podcast. If you would like to listen to more of this conversation, please click here.

      Stay up to date, subscribe to Voima Insight—click here

      The views expressed on Voima Insight are those of the author(s) and do not necessarily reflect the official views or position of Voima Gold.

      You are allowed to copy our content, in whole or in part, provided that you give Voima Gold proper credit and include the appropriate URL. The name Voima Insight and a link to the original post must be included in your introduction. All other rights are reserved. Voima Gold reserves the right to withdraw the permission to copy content for any or all websites at any time.

      Nothing written in Voima’s blog or website constitutes investment, legal, tax, or other advice. It should not be used as the basis for any investment decision(s) which a reader thereof may be considering. The purpose of Voima’s blog is to provide objective, educational and interesting commentary and is not intended to constitute an offer, solicitation or invitation for investing in or trading gold.

    • Secret Spy Drone Flights Over San Diego Raise Concerns 
      Secret Spy Drone Flights Over San Diego Raise Concerns 

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 19:20

      The skies are clear for General Atomics to test fly a new military-grade drone over San Diego, reported Voice of San Diego

      The Federal Aviation Administration is currently evaluating General Atomics’ proposal to fly the Predator, better known as the MQ-9B Reaper, but for domestic affairs purposes has been renamed as the SkyGuardian.

      The drone is massive, has a wingspan of 79 feet, and weighs 12,500 pounds. The pilot run above the city, located on the Pacific coast of southern California, could set a new precedent for the US, one where civilian airspace will include military-grade drones as a new form of surveillance – the defense contractor calls the drone, “persistent eye in the sky.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In regards to the upcoming flights, the Voice of San Diego said, “there’s still a lot the public doesn’t know about the project:” 

      For months, I’ve been trying to understand whether regulators are satisfied that the technologies on board the SkyGuardian — which allow it, among other things, to automatically detect and avoid collisions with other aircraft — are safe to put above the heads of San Diegans. I’ve also been trying to figure out who’s backing the test flight and why.

      Last year, General Atomics announced that San Diego was supportive of the project. But in March, Jose Ysea, a spokesman for the mayor, said the city’s drone program was not working with the company on the SkyGuardian. General Atomics also announced last year that a test flight was scheduled for 2020 — one industry report said summer —but a date hasn’t been set yet and the cause of the hold-up is unclear.

      “We can’t get into details about a military aircraft program,” wrote Marcia Alexander-Adams, a public affairs manager for the FAA, in an email. “The FAA is working closely with the manufacturer to ensure the aircraft operates safely in civilian airspace.”

      In a complaint filed Friday, VOSD alleged that the FAA is improperly withholding public records initially requested in March about the SkyGuardian flight in violation of the Freedom of Information Act. The law gives the public the right to access certain documents in possession of the U.S. government. By law, those documents are supposed to be released in either full or partial form within a few weeks of a request.

      The complaint also names the Federal Communications Commission and makes similar allegations. Earlier this year, the FCC appears to have granted the company an experimental license to fly a drone in the deserts between California and Arizona.

      “VOSD believes that access to the records that it seeks from the FCC and the FAA about this drone program are essential to its readers and the public’s understanding of this program before the flight takes place as early as this summer,” Thomas Burke of Davis Wright Tremaine, who is representing Voice of San Diego, wrote in the filing. “There is particular public interest in this flight, not just because it is unprecedented and will open up civilian airspace, but because drone crashes are fairly common.”

      Testing military-grade surveillance drones in civilian airspace, above a large city, with limited public awareness or even debate, shows the federal government is quickly installing a Chinese-like surveillance state. 

      In late May, an MQ-9 was deployed from Grand Forks Air Force Base to surveil the social unrest in Minneapolis. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Under the strict lockdowns in April, Baltimore City officials approved a small fleet of spy planes to fly above the Baltimore Metropolitan Area to monitor crime. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      While everyone is distracted with virus-related headlines – the federal government is erecting a massive surveillance state with military-grade drones to surveil people in metro areas. 

    • National Coin Shortage Shines Light On Worthless Penny
      National Coin Shortage Shines Light On Worthless Penny

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 18:55

      Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

      A shortage of coins is appearing across America due to the covid‐19 pandemic significantly disrupting the supply chain and normal circulation patterns for U.S. coins. The U.S. Mint halted production due to covid-19 which has caused Fed Chair Powell to admit to lawmakers the Fed will be rationing coins until the problem is resolved. Powell said; “What’s happened is that with the partial closure of the economy, the flow of coins through the economy … it’s kind of stopped.” He went on to say the shortage which is expected to be temporary is due to the business closures that prevented people from spending their coins, as well as a lack of places that are open where people can trade coins for paper bills.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      We can only hope that this will cause more people to question the usefulness of the penny which is a blemish on the face of America. It is costly to produce, no friend to the environment and it wastes America’s resources while sapping our productivity. It cost our country billions of dollars, year after year. According to the “citizens to retire the penny” it cost the Country one hundred million dollars a year to produce the penny, and more then $15 billion dollars annually is wasted just in handling it. Coins are designed by the government to be a simple and efficient medium for the exchange of goods and services. For many years there have been discussions about discontinuing the penny which has become obsolete because of its minuscule purchasing value. The penny is a perfect example of our government’s inefficiency and waste, and the cost is a burden carried by business. If an employee is paid $12.00 an hour they receive twenty cents per minute. Businesses simply cannot afford to pay an employee to handle and count pennies, the cost of the labor exceeds their value.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Pennies Make A Great Bathroom Floor

      In March of 2012 Canada made the decision to do away with its puny penny coin, loved by some but an annoyance to many, it was withdrawn from circulation because it costs too much to make and had become a pecuniary pest. Ottawa said the penny retained only one-twentieth of its original purchasing power. Because it costs 1.6 cents to produce each one-cent coin stamped out, discontinuing the penny was expected to save around $11 million a year.

      “It was just one of those no-brainer slam dunks. It’s a place where we can save money,” said legislator Pat Martin, who has long campaigned for the penny to be abolished. In the middle of 2014 the Toronto Sun reported that since circulation of the penny was discontinued on Feb. 4, 2013, more than four billion of the copper coins had been recovered, equivalent to a face value of approximately $40 million. The Royal Canadian Mint at the time estimated that approximately 6 billion pennies were in circulation when production of the coin ceased in 2012. I suspect the number has dropped substantially since then and its use has become non-existent. Once the distribution of the coin ceased vendors were no longer expected to return pennies as change for cash purchases and were encouraged to round purchases to the nearest five cents.

      As for the issue of the American penny, simply put, the American penny doesn’t make sense! Let it be decreed that the penny when weighed and measured is found lacking. Other nations have either ceased to produce or have removed low denomination coins the list includes Australia, Brazil, Finland, Israel, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Sweden, Switzerland, Britain, and as stated above Canada. By the time it was discontinued many Canadians considered the penny more of a nuisance than a useful coin. They often stored them in jars, threw them away in water fountains, or refuse them as change. Financial institutions faced increasing costs for handling, storing, and transporting pennies, and over time the penny had become a burden to the economy.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The Penny No Longer Makes Sense

      To many people the penny is simply a horrible little thing with no redeeming value that destroys vacuum cleaners when they accidentally suck one up.  Still, we find that not only does the government continue making the penny but over the years it has even made new versions of the penny. Voters need to remind Washington that it is not the job of the well-paid employees of the treasury to create collectibles or to pander to small segments of the population by designing coins commemorating or recognizing minor events.

      The debate against continuing the penny is overwhelming, anyone still supporting it most likely has not given the subject much thought or is simply resistant to change, “the penny doesn’t make sense”.  From an environmental standpoint, the penny is also a disaster when you consider all the energy used to make, transport, and distribute this useless coin. Currently, it costs the U.S. Mint 1.66 cents to make each one-cent coin, meaning that taxpayers are losing 0.66 of a cent for each one of the 9.1 billion pennies the Mint produces each year. That is a loss of $60,181,440 to produce pennies in 2016. The U.S. Mint makes an average of  21 million pennies per day which adds up to around nine billion pennies annually. If we just get rid of the penny, the U.S. Mint would cut its work in half. This figure does not include the time, fuel, expense, and hassle of carting all of those pennies around to the banks, merchants, etc.

      If we stop making pennies we would also save all this cost associated with it. Remember the penny coin, has almost no purchasing power today and the cost of making the pennies is higher than face value. The melt value of pennies ranges from more than two cents for the pre-1982 copper pennies, to nearly a full cent for the zinc pennies. Logically, sooner or later the penny is destined to the dustbin of history. Ditching the penny would cost literally nothing and with a flourish of the executive pen create huge annual savings for business but such a move remains fiercely opposed by metal alloy industries and Coinstar, which makes millions each year by helping people get rid of their unwanted change.

      According to the folks at RetireThePenny.org, the average American wastes 2.4 hours a year handling pennies or waiting for people who handle them. This statistic is the result of compiling several penny-handling related events. These events include the ubiquitous 30 second period we sometimes spend waiting for someone who has to dig through their pockets or purse to find that last cent so they can pay for something with exact change. They probably do this, so they don’t get stuck with any more pennies. Still, we should not expect the government to take action anytime soon in our country so focused on pandering to those who fear change. It seems we may need some kind of push to bring about the penny’s final demise, because if we wait for those in charge of such things to do the logical thing we may be waiting until the end of time. Small things matter, if our politicians can’t get this right how can they ever deal with the more important issues facing our nation?

    • Young Democracy Activist Flees Hong Kong As New Security Law Casts Shadow On 'Foreign Ties'
      Young Democracy Activist Flees Hong Kong As New Security Law Casts Shadow On 'Foreign Ties'

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 18:30

      Hong Kong pro-democracy, anti-Beijing activists are on edge since this week’s formal passage of the sweeping national security law in response to the mass protests and unrest which gripped the city for much of last year. 

      As we and many others detailed of the law which went into effect Wednesday, it harshly cracks down on dissent with possible maximum life jail sentences for some crimes, largely dependent on the ambiguous and highly open to interpretation (with no independent review) question of what constitutes ‘foreign interference’ or sponsorship of a ‘terror’ organization. 

      Already some among protest leaders are fleeing in fear for how the law might apply retroactively to their past activities, as well as current activism. For example it’s already spooked a prominent young pro-independence leader named Nathan Law.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Nathan Law in 2019 seen advocating for the US Congress’ Hong Kong Human Rights and Democracy Act. Wiki Commons image.

      “He announced he had left two days after China brought in its new security law,” BBC reports. “Activists say it erodes freedoms but Beijing has dismissed the criticism.”

      Law issued a short message announcing his departure: “I have already left Hong Kong and continue the advocacy work on the international level,” he said in English, though without specifying which country he would settle in. 

      “Based on risk assessment, I shall not reveal too much about my personal whereabouts and situation now,” Law’s message added. After previously spending time in prison for leading protests in 2014, he’s not taking any chances apparently, also given his public links to Washington.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Both he and HK’s other most visible independence movement activist, Joshua Wong, have been seen as close to State Department and US embassy officials, even lately briefing Congressional leaders on the new security law

      Within moments of it being announced on Tuesday, Mr Law said he was stepping down from Demosito Party, which he co-founded with well-known activist Joshua Wong. At the time, he said the law marked the start of a “bloody cultural revolution”.

      On Wednesday, Mr Law spoke via videolink to a US Congressional hearing on Hong Kong. He told American politicians he was worried about returning to the territory, for fear of being imprisoned by Beijing.

      Pro-Beijing officials and media previously accused the pair of being stooges of the US and Britain, doing foreign bidding under the guise of local activism. 

      No doubt in the eyes of the mainland’s Communist Party, this might be enough to get him locked up on “foreign sponsorship” related to his protest activities. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Nathan Law. Image source: Demosisto.

      It’s more than likely we’ll see other big activist names flee Hong Kong and the region in the coming days and weeks, also as it’s still a bit up in the air as to what the new law’s application will look like in practice. 

      Clearly pro-independence leaders are bracing for the worst. 

    • Daily Briefing – July 2, 2020
      Daily Briefing – July 2, 2020


      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 18:10

      Senior editor Ash Bennington joins managing editor Ed Harrison to discuss the latest developments in markets, macro, and coronavirus. Bennington and Harrison dive into the June jobs report and talk about how it fits into the overall picture of the US’s economic recovery. They also explore the implications and future trajectory of the coronavirus’s spread and its continuing impact on the economy.

    • #StayHomeTexas – When Spouting Coronavirus Idiocy Helps The Bottom Line
      #StayHomeTexas – When Spouting Coronavirus Idiocy Helps The Bottom Line

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 18:05

      Authored by Adam Dick via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

      Here we are months into the coronavirus scare when it has become obvious that coronavirus for most people poses little to no threat. Yet, we see businesses and other entities repeatedly trumpeting the danger of coronavirus as if each and every person should view the disease as the Grim Reaper hovering over one’s shoulder.

      Of course, these entities will also trumpet their responses to coronavirus, including in many instances requiring people to wear masks that have no clear net benefit in protecting against coronavirus transmission but do have clear negative health consequences.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      It is coronavirus idiocy on display.

      For an example of such coronavirus idiocy, check out a Monday press release from the Perot Museum of Nature and Science and the Dallas Holocaust and Human Rights Museum, a couple museums in Dallas, Texas. It notes “the spike in COVID-19 cases in Dallas County” as a reason for deciding “to pause plans to reopen in early July” the museums that, supposedly due to concern about coronavirus, have been long closed.

      Of course, a spike in cases by itself is no reason for concern. This is especially so when the spike in cases accompanies a spike in testing, as has been the situation in Dallas County. An increase in cases (people who test positive for coronavirus or are presumed to have coronavirus) can be expected to accompany a testing increase. Such a cases spike says nothing about the spread of or danger from coronavirus.

      The recent shift in media and government to talking about the number of coronavirus cases instead of the number of deaths attributed to coronavirus — itself an inflated number — happened when deaths attributed to coronavirus came way down. Death numbers having dropped too low to be used to scare people as well as they had, new higher case numbers have become the focus for instilling and maintaining fear. While cases of coronavirus are nothing to be afraid of, many people do not understand that. They imagine that each case is someone at death’s door hooked up to a ventilator in a hospital. Instead, a case is often a person who is slightly sick or has no symptoms.

      Statements such as this in the museums’ press release help cement unfounded fear in regard to cases. People hear that a spike in cases caused a group of museums to stay closed longer, and they conclude that the spike must be something to really worry about — a propaganda success.

      The museums’ press release then proceeds to state: “We believe it is important to support Governor Abbott’s, Mayor Johnson’s and Judge Jenkins’ appeals for Texans to stay home, if at all possible, to be good community partners and neighbors.” Not content with just spouting idiocy to explain keeping museums closed, the museums echo and praise extreme hectoring of politicians at the local and state level (Texas Governor Greg Abbott, Dallas Mayor Eric Johnson, and Dallas County Judge Clay Jenkins) that people should hide at home for the indeterminate future.

      Why have so many businesses and other entities, including museums, not fought back strongly against governments’ shut down and operations limitation orders, as well as governments’ absurd exaggeration of the coronavirus threat?

      One big reason is that many of these entities, and especially those with strong political connections, are receiving or are hoping to receive money, tax relief, and other benefits from government via special coronavirus aid. They can see it as advancing their pursuit of these benefits to play along with the coronavirus crackdown and amplify its supporting propaganda.

      Museums, along with other entities including professional sports teams and preforming arts organizations such as theater companies, symphonies, and operas, are often significantly dependent on governments for funding, including often for the creation of their venues. On top of all that, many of them also can benefit from governments’ special coronavirus aid. All this weighs in favor of these entities being sycophantic concerning governments’ coronavirus crackdowns.

      Next time you hear some private entity spouting coronavirus idiocy, consider that it may be doing so for a smart reason – ensuring it receives a good share of government aid.

    • Al Qaeda Issues A Propaganda Message To Incite More Violence In America
      Al Qaeda Issues A Propaganda Message To Incite More Violence In America

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/02/2020 – 17:15

      Via The Organic Prepper blog,

      Al Qaeda has issued a message in English urging the “oppressed masses” to rise up in revolt “against the rulers occupying the White House.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      It’s not really surprising that enemies of the United States are trying to take advantage of the current unrest, and given the ongoing protests and riots in the United States, this message can only be meant to incite further violence. (To learn more about surviving civil unrest, go here.)

      The message urges no “compromises” and calls upon protesters to “persist in your defiance.” It warns of the punishment of Allah against those who fail to “revolt” and “overthrow the existing order.”

      Below you can find screenshots from AlertsUSA of the message.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Digest powered by RSS Digest